LM6000 PC O&M - GEK 105059 CHG 06
LM6000 PC O&M - GEK 105059 CHG 06
Volume I
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS GE PROPRIETARY INFORMA-
TION AND IS DISCLOSED IN CONFIDENCE. IT IS THE PROPERTY OF GE AND SHALL
NOT BE USED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS
WRITTEN CONSENT OF GE, INCLUDING, BUT WITHOUT LIMITATION, IT IS NOT TO BE
USED IN THE CREATION, MANUFACTURE, DEVELOPMENT, OR DEVIATION OF ANY
REPAIRS, MODIFICATIONS, SPARE PARTS, DESIGN, OR CONFIGURATION CHANGES
OR TO OBTAIN FAA OR ANY OTHER GOVERNMENT OR REGULATORY APPROVAL TO
DO SO. IF CONSENT IS GIVEN FOR REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR IN PART, THIS
NOTICE AND THE NOTICE SET FORTH ON EACH PAGE OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL
APPEAR IN ANY SUCH REPRODUCTION IN WHOLE OR PART. THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT MAY ALSO BE CONTROLLED BY U.S. EXPORT CON-
TROL LAWS. UNAUTHORIZED EXPORT OR REEXPORT IS PROHIBITED.
ALL TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN HAVE
BEEN DEVELOPED AND APPROVED FOR USE WITH GE ENGINES AND PARTS THAT
HAVE BEEN OPERATED AND MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GE TECHNICAL
DOCUMENTATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS. GE HAS NO TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE
OF, NOR OBLIGATION FOR, NON GE-APPROVED PARTS AND REPAIRS. ACCORDINGLY,
THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT INTENDED TO APPLY TO NON GE-APPROVED PARTS AND
REPAIRS, NOR TO ANY PARTS THAT MAY BE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY AFFECTED BY
NON GE-APPROVED PARTS AND REPAIRS.
COPYRIGHT (2013) GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, USA
15 May 2008
Change 6 15 August 2013
Foreword
This two-volume technical manual provides on-site operation instructions and general maintenance
procedures for the LM6000 Single Annular Combustor, PC Series, Gas Turbine. These instructions
are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every contingency
connected with installation, replacement, and maintenance. If more information is desired, or if prob-
lems arise which are not covered herein, contact General Electric Customer Service.
A Change 6
Table of Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1 Purpose and Scope of Technical Manual........................................................... 1-1
1-2 Arrangement and Use of Technical Manual ...................................................... 1-1
1-3 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings.......................................................................... 1-2
1-4 Changes to Technical Manual............................................................................ 1-2
1-5 Measurement Units ............................................................................................ 1-2
1-6 Glossary of Terms.............................................................................................. 1-7
1-7 Safety Precautions.............................................................................................. 1-7
1-7.1 Health Hazards .................................................................................... 1-7
1-7.2 Fire Hazards......................................................................................... 1-10
1-7.3 Compressed Air Hazards ..................................................................... 1-10
1-7.4 Heated/Chilled Part Hazards ............................................................... 1-10
1-7.5 Electrical Hazards................................................................................ 1-10
1-7.6 Paints and Finishes Hazards ................................................................ 1-11
1-7.7 Procedural Hazards.............................................................................. 1-11
1-7.8 Tooling Hazards .................................................................................. 1-11
1-7.9 Gas Turbine Operational Hazards ....................................................... 1-11
1-7.10 Environmental Hazards ....................................................................... 1-13
1-8 Special Inspections............................................................................................. 1-13
Chapter 2 Gas Turbine General Description and Model Summary ............................. 2-1
2-1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 General Description and Features ...................................................................... 2-1
2-2.1 General Description............................................................................. 2-1
2-2.2 Model Summary .................................................................................. 2-1
2-2.3 Summary of Changes from the PA Model .......................................... 2-4
2-2.4 Standard and Optional Equipment....................................................... 2-5
2-2.5 Standard and Optional Instrumentation............................................... 2-5
Chapter 3 Gas Turbine Package....................................................................................... 3-1
3-1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................. 3-1
3-2 Package Description........................................................................................... 3-1
Chapter 4 Gas Turbine Assembly Description................................................................ 4-1
4-1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................. 4-1
4-2 General Description ........................................................................................... 4-1
4-2.1 Main Components................................................................................ 4-1
4-2.2 Engine Airflow .................................................................................... 4-7
4-3 Variable Inlet Guide Vanes................................................................................ 4-7
4-4 Low Pressure Compressor ................................................................................. 4-7
4-4.1 General Description............................................................................. 4-7
Change 6 i
ii Change 6
Change 6 iii
iv Change 6
Change 6 v
vi Change 6
Change 6 vii
viii Change 6
Change 6 ix
Change 6 xi
xii Change 6
5 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1-1 Purpose and Scope of Volume II contains the individual work pack-
Technical Manual ages for on-site maintenance, including engine
changeout. Volume II also contains the recom-
Volumes I and II of this manual contain mended tooling and consumables provisioning
information to be used for the on-site for on-site maintenance, as well as, storage
installation, operation, and maintenance of and shipment preparation procedures.
the GE LM6000 Series Gas Turbine.
Level 1 maintenance covers all work on the
1-2 Arrangement and Use of exterior of an installed gas turbine, including
Technical Manual scheduled inspections, compressor cleaning
(water-wash), and engine changeout. Level 2
This manual consists of two volumes, each modular maintenance covers removal and
arranged to provide easy access to all required reinstallation of one or more major sections of
information. Volume I provides general the engine, including, but not limited to, the
descriptions of the engine and associated sys- low pressure turbine (LPT) and high pressure
tems, as well as, operating and troubleshoot- turbine (HPT) modules, the combustor, the
ing information. low pressure compressor (LPC) module, and
the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) module.
The chapters in Volume I are numbered with
Arabic numerals. Figures, tables, and pages Each work package in Volume II (or subordi-
are each numbered sequentially, starting with nate work package, as required) is numbered
the number one (1), preceded by the chapter and arranged in the following general
number and a dash, for each chapter; e.g., fig- sequence:
ure 1-1. Paragraphs are identified and layered 1. Introduction
in the following manner: 2. Reference Material
3. Support Equipment
1-1 Main Topic/Paragraph 4. Consumable Material
1-1.1 First-level subordinate paragraph 5. Expendable Material
1-1.1.1 Second-level subordinate paragraph 6. Component Removal
1-1.1.1.1 Third-level subordinate paragraph 7. Component Installation
1-1.1.1.1.1 Fourth-level subordinate paragraph
1-1
1-3 Notes, Cautions, and dispose of superseded pages. Page changes are
Warnings designated by the change number of the effec-
tive change at the bottom of each affected
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings will be found page. Refer to the list of effective pages for
throughout this publication. It is important that current change page applicability.
the significance of each is thoroughly under-
stood by personnel using this technical man- Illustrations (line art and photographs) repre-
ual. Their definitions are as follows: sent the equipment configuration at time of
inclusion in this technical manual. They will
WARNING Warnings refer to procedures
not necessarily be changed to represent all
or practices that may result in injury or
death if not followed correctly. and/or the latest equipment or configuration.
They are to be used only as an aid to supple-
CAUTION Cautions refer to procedures or ment the text and the parts list.
practices that may damage or destroy equip-
ment if not followed correctly. Changes or additions deemed necessary for
proper operation, maintenance, and safety
NOTE Notes highlight an essential proce-
improvements should be submitted to:
dure or a condition that requires emphasis.
1-4 Changes to Technical GE Aircraft Engines
Manual Marine & Industrial Customer Service
Mail Drop S-155,
A manual change is defined as the reissue of 1 Neumann Way
selected pages of the manual. A revision is Cincinnati, Ohio
defined as the reissue of the entire manual. 45215-6301 USA
Attention: Documentation Programs
Changes are indicated by a vertical bar | in the
margin, alongside the text change. Changes to The sample form shown in may be repro-
illustrations, diagrams, and schematics are duced and used for this purpose.
indicated in the same manner. Since previous 1-1
change symbols are deleted when a page is 1-5 Measurement Units
subsequently changed, the symbols show the
latest changes only. The Système International d'Unités (SI) or
metric system is being adopted throughout the
Manual changes and revisions are mailed to world. For this reason, SI unit conversion
all authorized LM6000 manual holders at the tables are shown in tables 1-1 and 1-2. Frac-
time the issues are published. When changes tions and decimal equivalents are shown in
are received, insert the latest change pages and table 1-3.
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
The introduction of torque wrenches cali- This section describes general safety precau-
brated in newton-meters has been commensu- tions that are not related to specific procedures
rate with the adoption of the SI system. These and therefore do not appear elsewhere in this
will eventually replace torque wrenches cali- manual. The precautions should be clearly
brated in kilogram-meters (kgm). Although understood and applied wherever appropriate
the following values are not mathematically in all phases of installation, operation, and
precise (3.5 kgm equals 34.2 N·m), they are maintenance.
considered adequate. To convert kilogram-
meters (kgm) to newton-meters, (N·m) move 1-7.1 Health Hazards
the decimal point one place to the right. For
example, 3.5 kgm would become 35 N·m. To WARNING Use all cleaning solvents, fuels,
convert kilogram-centimeters (kg cm) to new- oils, adhesives, epoxies, and catalysts in a
ton-meters, move the decimal point one place well-ventilated area. Avoid frequent and
to the left. For example, 50 kg cm would prolonged inhalation of fumes. Concentra-
become 5.0 N·m. tions of fumes of many cleaners, adhesives,
and esters are toxic and will cause serious
The SI units shown in this manual are direct adverse health effects and possible death if
mathematical conversions and may be inhaled frequently. Avoid frequent or pro-
rounded off, in most instances, at the user's longed exposure to the skin. Wear protec-
discretion. Examples of units that may be tive gloves and wash thoroughly with soap
rounded off are those used for temperatures, and warm water as soon as possible after
torque values, pressures, etc. Examples of SI exposure to such materials. Take special
units that may not be rounded off are those precautions to prevent materials from
used for drop checks, rigging adjustments, entering the eyes. If exposed, rinse the eyes
runouts, etc. in an eye bath fountain immediately and
report to a physician. Avoid spilling freon
1-6 Glossary of Terms or similar solvents on the skin. Extremely
rapid evaporation of these solvents has a
Table 1-4 lists and defines the abbreviations refrigerating effect and may cause serious
most commonly used in this manual. frostbite. Do not allow adhesive to contact
the skin. Rapid bonding of certain adhe-
1-7 Safety Precautions sives will cause instant adhesion to body
members or objects. Do not attempt to
This technical manual is designed to provide forcefully separate body members if
safe procedures and processes for accomplish- bonded together. Consult the area supervi-
ing the installation, operation, and mainte- sor or a physician for procedures for sepa-
nance tasks required for the LM6000 It is ration. Carefully review the hazard
therefore very important that all Warnings and information on the appropriate material
Cautions be clearly understood and observed safety data sheet and follow all applicable
by users of this manual. personal protection requirements.
1-7
Table 1-4Abbreviations
1-8
1-9
WARNING Keep all cleaning solvents, WARNING Use thermally insulated gloves
fuels, oils, esters, and adhesives away from when handling heated or chilled parts to
open flame space heaters, exposed-element prevent burning or freezing hands. Parts
electric heaters, sparks, or flame. Do not chilled to supercold temperatures (-40°F to
smoke when using flammables, in the vicin- -65°F [-40°C to -53°C]) can cause instant
ity of flammables, or in areas where flam- freezing of hands if handled without protec-
mables are stored. Provide adequate tive gloves.
ventilation to disperse concentrations of
potentially explosive fumes or vapors. Pro- 1-7.5 Electrical Hazards
vide approved containers for bulk storage
of flammable materials and approved dis- WARNING Use extreme care when work-
pensers in the working areas. Keep all con- ing with electricity. Electricity can cause
tainers tightly closed when not in use. shock, burns, or death. Electrical power
shall be off before connecting or disconnect-
1-7.3 Compressed Air Hazards ing electrical connectors. Lethal output
voltages are generated by the ignition
WARNING Air pressure used in work exciter. Do not energize the exciter unless
areas for cleaning or drying operations the output connection is properly isolated.
should be regulated to 29 psi (200 kPa) or Be sure all leads are connected and the plug
less. Use approved safety equipment (gog- is installed or all personnel are cleared to at
gles/face shield) to prevent injury to the least 5 feet (2 m) before firing the exciter. If
eyes. Do not direct the jet of compressed air the exciter is removed, fire it only in the iso-
at yourself or other personnel, or so that lation chamber of the tester.
refuse is blown onto adjacent work stations.
If additional air pressure is required to dis- WARNING When using equipment pro-
lodge foreign materials from parts, ensure vided with, or associated with, high-fre-
that approved safety equipment is worn quency power generators, be sure that all
and move to an isolated area. Be sure that components are adequately isolated to pre-
the increased air pressure is not detrimen- vent serious injury to the operator. Be sure
tal or damaging to the parts before apply- the generator power is off when connecting
ing high-pressure jets of air. or positioning connectors and cables and
when adjusting heater elements.
1-10
1-11
required, personnel should not stand in front compressor at crank speed and the poorly
of the inlet while the engine is operating. atomized water entering the rotor cooling cir-
cuit can cause accumulation of water in the
Suitable fire protection equipment should be compressor bore. This may result in unbalance
provided for the installation. Carbon dioxide, and subsequent damage to the turbine.
halides, fog, water, or chemical fire extin-
guishing systems may be used. In the event Do not override any engine control permis-
that the fire protection system is discharged sives. Overriding permissives can cause
while personnel are inside the enclosure, all engine operational problems, damage to the
personnel should immediately exit the enclo- engine, and, in certain cases, injury to
sure to prevent ingestion of the extinguishing personnel.
medium. Discharge of fine chemical or water WARNING When the gas turbine is oper-
mists directly on gas generator casings is per- ating, do not remain in the vicinity of the
missible. The use of chemical fire extinguish- package doors. Do not look through any
ing media will require the disassembly of the glass windows associated with package
engine for cleaning. walls or doors.
Suitable explosive mixture sensing devices
WARNING When entering the gas turbine
should be provided to sense any leakage of
enclosure, the following requirements shall
fuel (both into the packager's enclosure and
be met:
into the fuel manifold). These devices should
also shut down the gas turbine if leakage is • The gas turbine shall be shut down.
present. If this occurs, determine and correct
the cause of the leakage before continuing • Module entry during engine operation
operation. The enclosure and surrounding area is prohibited in general. If entry should
should also be properly ventilated to clear any be required during engine operation,
explosive fumes prior to restarting. contact GE Field Service for a represen-
tative who is trained to enter the module
The engine is provided with various sensors under such conditions.
and monitoring systems that are necessary for
proper operation, engine health, and safety. • The fire extinguishing system shall be
Bypassing, disabling in any way, or running made inactive according to the cus-
with sensors/monitoring systems inoperative tomer's procedures.
can result in engine damage. This includes the
bypassing of any individual sensor when more • Secondary air to the enclosure shall be
than one sensor is provided for a given shut off, since high secondary airflow
parameter. For example, bypassing one T4.8 may prevent opening or closing the
sensor could result in damage to the HPT enclosure door.
system. • The enclosure door should be kept open.
Do not bypass any of the protective control If the gas turbine is operating, an
features found in the SPRINT® system. Spe- observer should be stationed at the
cifically, do not turn on the SPRINT® water enclosure door and confined space entry
spray to rinse the compressor during a crank procedures shall be followed.
soak. The system is not designed to rinse the
1-12
1-13/(1-14 Blank)
3 CHAPTER 2
Change 2 2-1
2-2 Change 2
Change 2 2-3
Medium BTU (450-650 BTU per standard cubic foot [SCF]) gaseous fuel without
NOx suppression, equipped with gas manifolds for natural gas (for starting and low
power) and medium BTU fuel for high power operation.
2-2.3 Summary of Changes from the The LPT has additional exhaust expansion and
PA Model power extraction due to modifications to the
casing, stages 3-5 blades, stages 4 and 5 disks
The LM6000 PC Gas Turbine (derived from and vanes, and rear frame. The aft drive shaft
the LM6000 PA) incorporates design changes has an optional coupling flange for rear drive
to the LPC, HPC, LPT, balance piston system, units. The casing is cooled by a cooling mani-
and fuel systems. fold using LPC discharge air. Structurally, the
LPT is larger in diameter, slightly longer, and
The LPC employs redesigned stator vanes. has 14 struts versus 10. Exit flanges for both
inner and outer flowpaths have been modified,
The HPC casing has been redesigned to which requires a unique exhaust 2:1 area ratio
accommodate stage 8 bleed for LPT cooling. diffuser.
2-4 Change 2
The thrust balance piston control system has a • Accessory gearbox-driven lube oil supply
thrust balance control valve located off-gas and scavenge pumps and gas turbine-
turbine. The compressor bleed air from the mounted interconnecting piping
11th stage compressor bleed manifold must be
directed to the base mounted valve and the • Forward side-mount trunnions
valve discharge piped back to the balance pis-
ton manifold on the turbine rear frame. • Aft-mount clevises
The LM6000 PC Gas Turbine comes fully Certain items of optional equipment, not listed
assembled with the following standard equip- above, are provided as packager-installed kits.
ment installed and tested at the factory: The specific configuration of the LM6000 and
installation will determine which of these kits
• Single-stage VIGV system or inlet frame are installed. For additional information, refer
to the packager's manual.
• Five-stage LPC
2-2.5 Standard and Optional
• LPC discharge bypass air collector and Instrumentation
actuators
The LM6000 PC gas turbine is equipped with
• 14-stage HPC the sensors standard shown in table 2-2.
Optional sensors are listed in table 2-3. Pres-
• Annular combustor sure taps are provided at the following loca-
tions for packager-supplied sensors:
• Fuel system (fuel nozzles, connectors,
manifolds, and off-gas turbine pressuriz- • Lube oil supply line
ing valve, as applicable)
• Lube oil scavenge return line
• High pressure steam/water injection mani-
folds as applicable for NOx suppression • HPC discharge static pressure (PS3)
• Ignition system (igniter and exciter) • Liquid fuel manifolds (as applicable)
• Output shaft coupling adapter • HPC inlet static pressure (PS25 - front
frame)
• Accessory gearbox assembly, transverse
gearbox, and accessories • LPT inlet total pressure (P48)
Change 2 2-5
2 LPT rotor (XNSD) speed sensors - magnetic pickup type - located in the turbine rear
frame.
8 LPT inlet temperature (T48) sensors - KP/KN thermocouples - located on LPT stator
case.
2 Accelerometers - located on the compressor rear frame and turbine rear frame
(redundant accelerometers optional).
7 Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) - dual-element lube oil supply and scavenge -
located in on-gas turbine lube line (redundant dual-element RTDs optional).
1 LPT inlet pressure (P48) probe - total pressure - located on the LPT casing.
1 LPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T2/P2) probe - dual element RTD and P2
sensing port - located on the VIGV case or inlet frame (redundant probe optional).
1 HPC inlet temperature and total pressure (T25/P25) probe - dual-element RTD and P25
sensing port - located on front frame (redundant probe optional).
2 VSV position sensors - linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) - located in both
VSV actuators.
2 VIGV position sensors - LVDT - located in both VIGV actuators (VIGV assemblies only).
2 Accelerometers - located on the compressor rear frame (CRF) and LPT rear frame.
7 Sensors for lube oil scavenge and supply temperatures - dual element RTD 0 located
in on-gas turbine lube oil lines.
1 Probe for LPC inlet temperature and total pressure probe (T2/P2) - located on the
VIGV case.
1 Probe for HPC inlet temperature and total pressure probe (T25/P25) RTD - located on
front frame.
2-6 Change 2
2 CHAPTER 3
3-1/(3-2 Blank)
0 CHAPTER 4
This chapter describes the LM6000 PC Gas • Low pressure turbine (LPT)
Turbine assembly, equipment, and systems.
• Turbine rear frame (TRF) assembly
4-2 General Description
• Accessory gearbox (AGB) assembly and
4-2.1 Main Components accessories
The LM6000 PC gas turbine is a dual-rotor, The high pressure rotor (HPR) system is com-
concentric drive shaft gas turbine, capable of prised of a 14-stage HPC, a single annular
driving a load from the front and/or rear of the combustor (SAC), and a 2-stage HPT. The
low pressure rotor (LPR). Figure 4-1 is a cross HPC and the HPT are connected by mating
section of the engine, showing the significant splines. The HPR turns clockwise when
design features of the LM6000 PC gas turbine. viewed from aft, looking forward. The high
Figure 4-2 identifies the principal LM6000 PC pressure stator system consists of the HPC and
gas turbine components, as listed below: turbine stators.
• Variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assem- The LP system is comprised of a five-stage
bly (the power generation application can LPC and a five-stage LPT, both connected to a
be provided with or without VIGV concentric drive shaft. The LP rotor turns
assembly) clockwise when viewed from aft, looking for-
ward. The LP stator system consists of the
• Five-stage low pressure compressor (LPC) LPC and turbine stators. Drive adapters are
provided on both the front and rear of the LP
• Front frame assembly rotor for connection to the customer-supplied
power shaft and load.
• Bypass air collector
Three structural frames provide bearing sup-
• 14-stage variable-geometry (VG) high port for the two rotors used in the LM6000 PC
pressure compressor (HPC) gas turbine. These include the front frame, the
CRF, and the TRF. This configuration pro-
• Compressor rear frame (CRF) assembly vides excellent dynamic and mechanical sta-
bility and allows more precisely controlled
• Single annular combustor (SAC) assembly compressor and turbine blade and vane tip
clearances.
4-1
4-2
Change 6 4-1
4-2 Change 6
Change 6 4-3
4-4 Change 6
Change 6 4-5
4-6 Change 6
4-2.2 Engine Airflow trailing flaps. The variable flaps can be rotated
from -10 degrees open to +60 degrees closed
Air enters the engine at the inlet of the VIGV by means of an actuator ring (unison ring)
and passes into the LPC. Engine airflow is driven by twin hydraulic actuators at the 3:00
shown in figure 4-1. The LPC compresses the and 9:00 o'clock positions. Both actuators are
air by a ratio of approximately 2.4:1. Air leav- equipped with linear variable differential
ing the LPC is directed into the HPC and is transformers (LVDTs).
regulated at idle and low power by variable
bypass valves (VBV) arranged in the flow Normal engine operation range is approxi-
passage between the two compressors. mately -5 degrees open (full power) to +35
degrees closed (idle). The flaps will also close
The airflow in the 14-stage HPC is regulated during large power reductions to reduce the
by VIGV and five stages of variable stator LPC flow rate quickly in order to maintain the
vanes (VSV). The HPC compression ratio is LPC stall margin. The VIGV system improves
approximately 12:1. HPC discharge and stage performance for both simple cycle and heat
8 bleed air are extracted, as necessary, for recovery cycles. It also helps minimize VBV
emissions control. Compressor discharge air is bypass flow and pressure levels, thereby
then directed to the combustor section. reducing associated flow noise. A pressurized
rotating seal between the VIGV hub and the
Air entering the combustor is mixed with the LPC rotor prevents ingestion of unfiltered air
fuel provided by 30 fuel nozzles. The fuel/air into the flowpath.
mixture is ignited by an igniter that is deacti-
vated once combustion becomes self-sustain- The air intake section is designed to interface
ing. Combustion gases then exit to the HPT. with a radial inlet duct (which allows inlet air
to be drawn from the side or top, rather than
Hot gases from the combustor are directed from the front) or an axial inlet system. The
into the HPT, which drives the HPC. The radial inlet duct is compatible with either for-
exhaust gases exit the HPT and enter the LPT, ward or rear drive installations; the axial inlet
which drives both the LPC and the output can be used only in rear drive installations.
load. The exhaust gases pass through the LPT
and enter the exhaust duct. The LM6000 PC models without a VIGV
have a 43 strut inlet frame. LM6000 PC can be
4-3 Variable Inlet Guide Vanes provided with or without the VIGV assembly.
The air intake section of the engine consists of 4-4 Low Pressure Compressor
an axial flow section containing a VIGV sys-
tem. The VIGV assembly is located at the 4-4.1 General Description
front of the LPC and allows flow modulation
at partial power, resulting in increased engine The LM6000 PC LPC is a five-stage, axial-
efficiency. The VIGV system consists of 43 flow compressor. The LPC features a five-
stationary leading edge vanes and variable stage fixed stator.
Change 6 4-7
Provision is made for LPC discharge flow to The stage 4 stator vanes are mounted in the
be bypassed through modulating bypass doors front frame and supported on the ID by a sup-
to assure adequate LPC stall margin at lower port structure that is bolted to the engine front
power settings and during large power reduc- frame.
tion transients.
4-5 Front Frame and Air
4-4.2 LPC Rotor Collector
Individual disks are used in stages 0 and 1. 4-5.1 Front Frame
Stages 2 through 4 of the LPC rotor are an
integral spool. Stages 0 through 3 blades also The front frame is a major structure that pro-
have squealer tips. vides support for the LPC rotor and the for-
ward end of the HPC rotor through the No.
Stage 0 blades are individually retained in the 1B, No. 2R, and No. 3R bearings. The frame
axial dovetail slots of the disk by a one-piece also forms an airflow path between the LPC
blade retainer. Stages 1 through 4 LPC blades and the HPC inlet. Front engine mount provi-
are retained in circumferential slots in the sions are located on the front frame 3:00 and
stage 1 disk and stages 2 through 4 spool. The 9:00 o'clock positions. Two pads are included
blade-retention features permit individual on the frame outer case for mounting HPC
blade replacement. Blades in stages 0 through inlet temperature sensors.
3 can be removed without removing the rotor.
The front frame is made from a high-strength
4-4.3 LPC Stator steel casting. Twelve equally spaced radial
struts are used between the hub and outer case
The stages 0 through 3 titanium stator vanes to provide support for the inner hub. Twelve
are individually replaceable. The vanes are variable-position bypass valve doors are
shrouded to reduce vane response to aerody- located on the outer wall for LPC discharge
namic forces. Wear strips are utilized between bleed.
the vane dovetails and the LPC casing slots.
The front frame contains the engine A-sump,
The Teflon-lined stages 0 through 3 case is which includes a thrust bearing (1B) and roller
horizontally split to allow top casing. This fea- bearing (2R) that support the LPC rotor, and a
ture facilitates vane and blade replacement, roller bearing (3R) that supports the forward
and allows removal without affecting the front end of the HPC rotor. Lubrication oil supply
frame air collector. The stages 0 through 3 and scavenge lines for the A-sump are routed
shroud are axially are split to aid in vane inside the frame struts. The inlet gearbox is
removal. Borescope ports are located at stages located in the A-sump with the radial drive
1, 2, and 3 for diagnostic inspection without shaft extending outward through the strut
disassembly. located at the 6:00 o'clock position.
4-8 Change 6
The LPC bypass air collector is a duct The HPC stator consists of a cast stator case
attached to the front frame. It collects LPC that contains the compressor stator vanes. The
discharge air, vented through the LPC bypass inlet guide vanes and the stages 1 through 5
doors, and directs it overboard through pack- vanes can be rotated about the axis of their
ager-provided ducting. mounting trunnions to vary the pitch of the
airfoils in the compressor flow path. Vane air-
4-6 High Pressure Compressor foils in the remaining stages are stationary. All
fixed and variable vanes are non-interchange-
4-6.1 General Description able with other stages to prevent incorrect
assembly. The casing is split along the hori-
The LM6000 PC HPC is a 14-stage, axial- zontal split-line for ease of assembly and
flow compressor. It incorporates VIGVs and maintenance. The stages 1 and 2 vane shrouds
variable stators in stages 0 through 5 to pro- also support interstage rotor seals. The
vide stall-free operation and high efficiency shrouds are designed to allow the removal of
throughout the starting and operating range. either half of the compressor casing. There are
Stage 8 and at the compressor discharge air are 14 axial stations provided for borescope
used for combustor flame temperature control. inspection of blades and vanes.
Seventh and eleventh stage bleed air and com-
pressor discharge air are extracted for cooling 4-7 Compressor Rear Frame
and pressurization of the engine and bearing
sump components. The CRF consists of an outer case, 10 struts,
and the B- and C-sump housings. The outer
4-6.2 HPC Rotor case supports the combustor and fuel nozzles.
The hub provides support for a ball bearing
The HPC rotor consists of 14 stages. The stage and two roller radial bearings to support the
2 disk has an integral forward shaft and the midsection of the high pressure (HP) rotor
stages 11 through 14 spool has an integral rear system.
shaft.
Bearing axial and radial loads and a portion of
Stages 1 and 2 blades are individually retained
the first stage nozzle load are transmitted
in axial dovetail slots and the remaining
through the hub and 10 radial struts to the
blades are held in circumferential dovetail
case. The hub, struts, and outer casing are a
slots. These features allow individual blade
one-piece casting. The casting is welded to the
replacement without disassembly of the rotor.
fuel embossment ring and bolted to the aft
Stage 1 blades are shrouded at mid-span for case. This serves as the structural load path
the purpose of reducing vibratory stress. All between the compressor casing and the HPT
other blades are cantilevered from the rotor stator case. Seven borescope ports are pro-
structure. vided for inspection of the combustor, fuel
nozzles, and HPT. B- and C-sump service lines
are contained in, and pass through, the CRF
struts.
Change 6 4-9
The LM6000 PC gas turbine utilizes a lean The LM6000 PC HPT is an air-cooled, two-
premix combustion system designed for oper- stage design with demonstrated high
ation on natural gas fuel. efficiency. The HPT system consists of the
HPT rotor and the stages 1 and stage 2 HPT
The single annular configuration (SAC) nozzles.
enables the combustor to operate in uniformly
mixed, lean fuel to air ratio (premix mode) 4-9.2 HPT Rotor
across the entire power range, minimizing
emissions even at low power. The HPT rotor assembly consists of the stage
1 disk and integral shaft, a conical impeller
4-8.2 Single Annular Combustor spacer with cover, a thermal shield, and a
stage 2 disk. Forward and aft rotating air seals
Key features of the single annular combustor are assembled to the HPT rotor and provide
are the rolled-ring inner and outer liners, the air-cooled cavities around the rotor system.
low-smoke-emission swirl-cup dome design, An integral coupling nut and pressure tube are
and short burning length. This short burning used to form and seal the internal cavity. The
length reduces liner cooling air consumption rotor disks and blades are cooled by a continu-
which improves the exit temperature pattern ous flow of compressor discharge air. This air
factor and profile. The swirl-cup design serves is directed to the internal cavity of the rotor
to lean-out the fuel/air mixture in the primary through diffuser vanes that are part of the for-
zone of the combustor. This eliminates the for- ward seal system.
mation of the high-carbon visible smoke that
can result from over-rich burning in this zone. The stage 1 disk/shaft design combines the
rotor forward shaft and stage 1 disk into a one-
4-8.3 Ignition System piece unit. Torque is transmitted to the com-
pressor rotor through an internal spline at the
The ignition system produces the high-energy forward end of the disk/shaft. The stage 1
sparks that ignite the fuel/air mixture in the blades fit into axial dovetail slots in the disk.
combustor during starting. The system con- The stage 2 disk incorporates a flange on the
sists of one off-gas turbine mounted ignition forward side for transmitting torque to the
exciter, one lead, and one spark igniter. Once stage 1 disk. An aft flange supports the aft air
ignition occurs, combustion becomes self-sus- seal and the integral coupling nut and pressure
taining and continues without the spark ignit- tube. Stage 2 blades fit into axial dovetail slots
ers. in the disk.
4-10 Change 6
The cone-shaped impeller spacer serves as the The turbine shrouds form a portion of the
structural support between the turbine disks. outer aerodynamic flow path through the tur-
The spacer also transmits torque from the bine. They are axially aligned with the turbine
stage 2 disk to the stage 1 disk. The catenary- blades and form a pressure seal to minimize
shaped thermal shield forms the outer portion HP gas leakage around tips of the blades.
of the turbine rotor cooling air cavity and
serves as the rotating portion of the interstage The interstage seal is composed of six seg-
gas path seal. ments bolted to the inner flange at the nozzle
segments. The sealing surface consists of a
4-9.3 Stage 1 HPT Nozzle two-step honeycomb seal that mates with the
rotating thermal shield. The interstage seal is
The stage 1 HPT nozzle consists of 23 two- designed to minimize leakage of core gas flow
vane segments bolted to a nozzle support around the stage 2 nozzle.
attached to the hub of the CRF.
4-10 Low Pressure Turbine
Compressor discharge air is used to cool the
nozzle vanes and support bands to maintain 4-10.1 General Description
the metal temperatures at the levels required
for extended operating life. The LPT drives the LPC and load device using
the core gas turbine discharge gas flow for
4-9.4 Stage 2 HPT Nozzle energy. The principal components of the LPT
module are a five-stage stator, a five-stage
The stage 2 HPT nozzle assembly consists of rotor supported by the No. 6R and No. 7R
24 two-vane stage 2 nozzle segments, stages 1 bearings, and a cast TRF supporting the stator
and 2 HPT shrouds and shroud supports, HPT casing and the No. 6R and No. 7R bearings.
stator support (case), and interstage seals. The
nozzle vanes are internally cooled by HPC 4-10.2 LPT Rotor
eleventh-stage air.
The LPT rotor assembly drives the LPC
The stage 2 nozzles are supported by the stage through the LP mid-shaft and drives a load
1 shroud support. They are also bolted to the through either the mid-shaft or from an aft
stage 2 shroud support forward leg, which is drive adapter on the rear of the LPT rotor. The
attached, by a flange, to the outer structural LPT rotor assembly consists of five stages of
wall. The stage 1 shroud system features seg- bladed disks and a shaft subassembly. The
mented supports and shroud segments to rotor is supported by the No. 6R and No. 7R
maintain turbine clearance. bearings in the D- and E-sump of the TRF.
Change 6 4-11
Each LPT rotor stage consists of a bladed disk The stage 1 nozzle vanes provide capability
subassembly comprised of a disk, turbine for LPT inlet instrumentation. Holes are pro-
blades, blade retainers, interstage air seals, vided for thermocouple probes and a single
assembly bolts, and balance weights. Integral pressure probe can be inserted. There are eight
flanges on each disk provide assembly bolt nozzles to provide for thermocouples, one for
holes in a low stress area of the disk. Blade a pressure probe, and four nozzle segments
retainers hold the turbine blades in the axial without instrumentation holes.
dovetail slots.
Seals minimize the air leakage around the
The turbine shaft assembly is a torque cone inner ends of the nozzles and shrouds mini-
coupled to the mid-shaft through a spline and mize air leakage over the tips of the turbine
is bolted to the stage 2 and stage 3 turbine disk blades.
flanges. It also provides the journal for the D-
and E-sump air oil seal and the No. 6R and 4-11 Turbine Rear Frame
No. 7R bearing interfaces. The rotating por-
tion of the balance piston system mounts on The TRF is a one-piece casting which pro-
the shaft, aft of the No. 7R bearing seals. vides the gas turbine exhaust flow path and the
Additionally, the aft shaft spline provides for supporting structure for the D- and E-sump,
driving the output load from the rear through the LPT rotor thrust balance assembly, the
the aft drive adapter. LPT rotor shaft, and the aft drive adapter.
Fourteen radial struts function as outlet guide
4-10.3 LPT Stator vanes to straighten the exhaust air flow into
the exhaust diffuser for enhanced perfor-
The five-stage stator assembly consists of a mance. Lubrication oil supply and scavenge
one-piece tapered 360° casing, five stages of lines for the D- and E-sumps and LPT rotor
interlocking tip shrouds, and a 12 segment speed sensors are routed through the struts.
LPT case external cooling manifold. Air-
cooled first stage nozzle segments with a bolt- The LPT rotor thrust balance system is
on pressure balance seal, four additional designed to maintain the axial thrust loading
stages of nozzle segments with bolt-on inter- on the No. 1B thrust bearing within design
stage seals, and instrumentation and borescope limits. The balance piston static seal is
ports also comprise the stator assembly. mounted to the TRF hub. Stage 11 HPC bleed
air is routed through three TRF struts to gener-
The LPT casing is the load-carrying structure ate the required axial loading through the rotor
between the HPT stator case and the TRF. The thrust balance system.
casing contains internal machined flanges that
provide hooks to support the nozzle segments
and stops to assure nozzle alignment and seat-
ing. Borescope inspection ports are provided
along the right side, aft looking forward (ALF)
from 2:30 to 4:30 o'clock positions at nozzle
stages 1, 2, and 4.
4-12 Change 6
4-12 Accessory Gearbox of the HPCR. The No. 4B bearing carries the
Assembly thrust loads for the HPR (HPC and HPT). The
No. 5R bearing supports the high pressure tur-
The accessories are driven from the high pres- bine rotor (HPTR) at its forward shaft.
sure rotor system by the inlet gearbox, a radial
drive shaft, and the transfer gearbox (TGB) The D- and E-sump houses the No. 6R and
assembly. The TGB is attached to the air col- No. 7R bearings. The No. 6R bearing supports
lector at the 6:00 o'clock position. The AGB the forward end of the low pressure turbine
(the accessory drive portion of the TGB rotor (LPTR) shaft. The No. 7R bearing sup-
assembly), located below the HPC casing, is ports the aft end of LPTR shaft and the bal-
driven from the TGB by a short horizontal ance piston system.
shaft. The starter, lube-and-scavenge pump, 4-3
VG hydraulic pump, and other accessories are Labyrinth-type seals control the flow of air
mounted on and driven by the AGB. into the sump areas to prevent excess oil con-
sumption. The A-sump drains into the TGB
4-13 Bearings through the same front frame strut that houses
the gearbox shaft. Oil is then scavenged
Eight bearings support the rotating compo- through the gearbox. The No. 4R/4B and No.
nents and the aerodynamic loads in the 5R bearing zones of the B- and C-sump are
LM6000 PC. Each rotating mass (the com- individually scavenged, as are the No. 6R and
pressor, turbine, and balance-piston system) is No. 7R bearing zones of the D- and E-sumps.
supported by roller bearings and axial thrust All sumps emit mist-carrying air and are
loads are carried by ball bearings. These bear- vented to a packager-supplied air/oil separator.
ings are located in the A-, B-, C-, D-, and E-
sump areas. Sump areas and bearing locations 4-14 Low Pressure Rotor Balance
are shown in figure 4-3. Piston System
The A-sump houses the No. 1B, No. 2R, and The balance piston system is designed to con-
No. 3R bearings. The No. 1B bearing is a ball- trol thrust loading on the No. 1B bearing.
type thrust bearing that carries the thrust loads These loads are imposed by LPC and LPT and
for the LPR (LPC and LPT). The No. 2R bear- vary with output power. Forward axial loads
ing supports the low pressure compressor are applied by varying air pressure in the bal-
rotor (LPCR) and the No. 3R bearing supports ance piston air cavity to maintain thrust loads
the high pressure compressor rotor (HPCR) within the capability of the bearing. Air pres-
forward shaft. sure at the balance piston cavity is maintained
at the correct level by the off-engine electronic
The B- and C-sump houses the No. 4R bear- control and the hydraulically activated balance
ing, the No. 4B bearing, and the No. 5R bear- piston valve.
ing. The No. 4R bearing supports the aft shaft
Change 6 4-13
4-14 Change 6
5 CHAPTER 5
Change 5 5-1
5-1
5-2 Change 5
5-2
Change 5 5-3
Actuators are installed at the 1:00, 3:00, 5:00, 5-3 Fuel Systems
7:00, 9:00, and 11:00 o'clock positions on the
engine. The six actuators are positioned with This section provides functional descriptions
one VBV door on each side of each actuator. of the fuel systems included as standard equip-
The actuators, the actuation ring, and the VBV ment with the LM6000 PC model.
doors are mechanically linked by bellcranks
and pushrods. The actuator positions the actu- Simplified schematics of engine fuel system
ation ring, which opens and closes the VBV hardware are provided in figures 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
doors. The 5:00 and 11:00 o'clock position 5-7 and 5-8.
actuators are equipped with integral LVDTs
for position indication. The packager-sup- Engine hardware includes fuel, water and/or
plied control is designed to provide excitation steam manifolds and feeder tubes, and fuel
and signal conditioning for both LVDTs and to fuel/steam nozzles mounted externally on the
control VBV position by means of closed-loop engine. Dual-fuel and liquid fuel models, with
scheduling of VBV actuator position, based on or without NOx suppression, include an off-
LPC inlet temperature (T2) and high pressure engine liquid fuel pressurizing valve.
(HP) rotor speed corrected to inlet conditions
Major fuel system components are shown in
(XN25R2).
table 5-1. Refer to the Illustrated Parts break-
5-2.3 VSV System down, GEK 105060, for exact configurations.
The VSV system is an integral part of the HPC The components listed in table 5-1 provide the
stator, consisting of two VSV actuators and flexibility to configure the engine for opera-
levers, actuation rings, and linkages for each tion on a variety of fuels and the option of
VSV stage. See figure 5-3. using water or steam to suppress NOx emis-
sions.
The LM6000 PC model gas turbine module is
equipped with two actuators on the VSV sys- 5-3.1 Gas Fuel Systems
tem, one at the 3:00 o'clock position and one
5-3.1.1 Systems for Standard Natural
at the 9:00 o'clock position. Each actuator
Gas
incorporates an integral LVDT. The packager-
supplied control is designed to provide excita- Natural gas fuel systems are available for use
tion and signal conditioning for both LVDTs with or without water or steam systems for
and to control VSV position by means of NOx suppression. Figure 5-4 is a simplified
closed-loop scheduling of VSV actuator posi- schematic of a natural gas fuel system with
tion, based on corrected HP rotor speed water injection for NOx suppression.
(XN25R). Figure 5-5 shows a simplified natural gas fuel
system schematic with steam for NOx sup-
pression.
5-4 Change 5
Dual-Fuel/Water Primary manifold, secondary manifold, Dual-fuel with off-engine liquid fuel
and gas manifold pressurizing valve system
Dual Gas Standard natural gas and medium BTU Dual Gas
gas manifolds
CAUTION Failure to provide necessary The minimum temperature of the gas fuel sup-
purge of fuel system components could result plied to the gas turbine shall be 50°F (27.8°C)
in fuel system hardware failure from back- greater than the saturated vapor temperature of
flow of combustion products. the gas supply pressure. The temperature of
the gas fuel should not exceed 300°F
The use of fuels that do not comply with gas (148.8°C) at the gas manifold inlet.
fuel specification MID-TD-0000-1,
Appendix A1, can cause severe damage to the The requirements for gas fuel are provided in
engine. Inquires concerning fuels that do not Appendix A1 in Volume I of this manual. The
meet requirements should be directed to the use of unapproved fuels can cause severe
packager. damage to the engine. Inquiries concerning
fuels should be directed to the packager.
During periods of operation without steam
injection, it is necessary to purge the fuel noz-
5-3.1.2 System for Medium BTU Gas
zle steam manifold. The recommended
method is to purge the manifold with CDP For medium BTU fuels with lower heating
manifold air extracted through a low delta P values in the range of 450-650 BTU/SCF, a
check valve. dual gas fuel system is available.
Note that, at shutdown, residual gas in the
Figure 5-8 is a schematic of the dual gas fuel
engine gas manifold and the packager's lines
system. The system is comprised of 30 fuel
downstream of the shutoff valves will vent
nozzles, with provisions for (1) injecting stan-
into the gas path and overboard via the engine
dard natural gas for starting and low power
flowpath and the exhaust ducting.
and (2) injecting medium BTU gas for opera-
The LM6000 PC fuel system includes fuel tion between approximately 50 percent power
manifolds, flexible fuel hoses, and 30 fuel and baseload.
nozzles.
Change 5 5-5
During start to core idle natural gas, meeting 5-3.2 Liquid Fuel Systems
requirements of Appendix A1, is supplied to
the engine through the starting gas circuit Liquid fuel systems are available either with
through interface F3. or without water injection for NOx suppres-
sion. Figure 5-6 is a simplified liquid fuel sys-
After a 10-second dwell at core idle, medium tem schematic utilizing water injection. These
BTU gas is introduced to the main fuel circuit configurations have primary and secondary
through fuel supply manifold F1 and the gas liquid fuel circuits, as shown in figures 5-6
turbine operates on a mixture of natural gas and 5-7. They use an off-engine, base-
and medium BTU fuel. mounted valve. Both primary and secondary
manifolds and fuel nozzle feeder tubes, and
As power is increased from core idle to syn- fuel nozzles are mounted on the engine. There
chronous idle to about 50 percent power, a are two fuel supply points on the engine for
gradual transition is made from a combination these systems (one each for primary and sec-
of natural gas and medium BTU gas to 100 ondary).
percent medium BTU gas. When the natural
gas is shut off, a purge valve opens and
medium BTU gas flows into the starting gas
circuit, providing purge of that circuit.
5-6 Change 5
Figure 5-4 Gas Fuel System with Water NOx Suppression (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 5-7
Figure 5-4 Gas Fuel System with Water NOx Suppression (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-8 Change 5
Figure 5-5 Gas Fuel System with Steam NOx Suppression (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 5-9
Figure 5-5 Gas Fuel System with Steam NOx Suppression (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-10 Change 5
Figure 5-6 Liquid Fuel System With and Without NOx Suppression (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 5-11
Figure 5-6 Liquid Fuel System With and Without NOx Suppression (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-12 Change 5
Figure 5-7 Dual Fuel System with Water NOx Suppression (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 5 5-13
Figure 5-7 Dual Fuel System with Water NOx Suppression (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-14 Change 5
Change 5 5-15
5-16 Change 5
The primary fuel circuit is used for starting. It CAUTION Failure to provide necessary
provides a more precisely metered fuel flow purge of fuel system components could result
that ensures a proper fuel/air mixture. The in fuel system hardware failure from back-
presence of the proper fuel/ air mixture flow of combustible products.
ensures proper ignition and burning, which
When operating on gas fuel without water
prevents over-temperature problems and
injection, the primary and secondary liquid
flameout. The secondary fuel circuit provides
fuel manifolds are to be purged with gas fuel.
fuel during operation at normal power settings
Care must also be exercised to ensure proper
above core idle.
venting of natural gas, which is present in the
At shutdown, residual liquid fuel in the engine liquid drain system, when the engine is shut
fuel manifolds and the packager-supplied lines down.
between the fuel manifolds and the off-engine The gas manifold must be purged during liq-
fuel pressurizing valve must be drained. uid operation. This is required to prevent cok-
ing of the feeder tubes and/or gas fuel nozzles.
The use of fuels that don't comply with the liq- The purge line must include a double block
uid fuel specification MID-TD-0000-2, and bleed system to prevent injection of natu-
Appendix A2, can cause severe damage to the ral gas into the engine compressor discharge.
engine. The minimum acceptable liquid fuel
temperature is 35°F (1.6°C) or the temperature Fuel quality for the liquid and gas dual-fuel
to meet the viscosity and wax requirements of system is the same as for liquid or gas only.
MID-TD-0000-2, Appendix A2, whichever is
5-3.4 Liquid Fuel Pump and Filter
greater. Inquiries concerning fuels that do not
meet the requirements should be directed to The optional GE-supplied fuel pump/filter
the packager. consists of a two-element centrifugal/positive
displacement pump with an integral relief
5-3.3 Dual-Fuel System
valve and high-pressure filter. It is mounted
The dual-fuel (liquid fuel/natural gas) system directly on the engine accessory gearbox or on
is available with water injection for NOx sup- a purchaser-supplied electric motor with a
pression. Figure 5-7 shows a simplified dual- speed-increasing gearbox.
fuel system schematic utilizing water injection The centrifugal and positive displacement
for NOx suppression. pump elements are in series with the integral
relief valve, which is set for 1,350 psid
Gas fuel nozzles and the gas side of the dual
(9,307.9 kPa differential). The relief valve dis-
fuel nozzles have the same pressure flow char-
charges back to the inlet of the positive dis-
acteristics. Similarly, the liquid fuel circuits on
placement pump element. The high-pressure
dual fuel nozzles exhibit the same characteris-
filter, which mounts on the side of the fuel
tics as the liquid fuel circuits on liquid/water
pump, is a 46 micrometer “last chance” type
nozzles.
filter with minimal dirt-carrying capacity. The
filter also contains a bypass valve that causes
the fuel flow to bypass the filter if the pressure
drop exceeds 35 psid (241.3 kPa differential).
See figure 5-9.
Change 5 5-17
The fuel pump/filter assembly contains the The maximum allowable flow from the pilot
following three main ports: pressure port is 600 lb/hr (272.2 kg/hr). It is
subtractive from the pump main discharge
• Fuel inlet: 2.0 in (50.8 mm) tubing size flow.
5-3
• Fuel discharge: 1.0 in (25.4 mm) tubing 5-3.5 Liquid Fuel Handling
size
Sound procurement, proper transportation,
• Fuel bypass return: 1.0 in (25.4 mm) tub- and appropriate treatment of liquid fuel with
ing size the objective of meeting the GE liquid fuel
specification MID-TD-0000-2, Appendix A2,
The fuel supplied to the pump inlet shall meet are critical to gas turbine component life. Vari-
the following requirements: ous liquid fuel contaminants can cause differ-
ent problems within a gas turbine, but the most
• Quality: GE Specification
common contamination is from high levels of
MID-TD-0000-2, Appendix A2,
sodium. Sodium, or sodium in conjunction
• Filtration: 20 micrometers absolute with sulfur, can lead to severe premature hot
section distress. A rigorous fuel cleanliness
• Maximum temperature: 150°F (65.5°C) plan must be implemented daily to assure
trouble free operation of any gas turbine over
• Pressure: 5-50 psig (34.5-344.8 kPa gage) its operating life.
• Minimum temperature: 20°F (-6.6°C) Lessons learned have established good prac-
above wax point of the fuel tices in the transportation, handling, and deliv-
ery of the fuel to the gas turbine. It is critical
• Viscosity: 0.5 centistokes minimum to the trouble free operation of the gas turbine
that these practices be maintained at all times.
To prevent cavitation damage to the pump in Fuel analysis at the refinery is insufficient to
the event of an emergency shutdown, the assure that fuel will be delivered to the operat-
action of the fuel system shutoff valves, ing site in a condition consistent with the GE
installed in the pump supply and discharge specification. Transportation can introduce
lines, should be sequenced. The discharge contaminants. Poor storage practices, or treat-
shutoff valve is first to be actuated, followed ing facility malfunction, can increase the risk
by closure of the inlet shutoff valve, after a of contaminants. Lack of attention to detail
delay of approximately 15 seconds. can result in expensive to repair damage to hot
section hardware and costly plant outages in a
The bypass return fuel from the fuel metering short period of time.
valve inlet should be connected to the pump
bypass return port. The pump is capable of True distillate fuel has low water, dirt, and
accepting 100 percent of the fuel pump dis- trace metal contaminant levels, as refined,
charge flow at a maximum pressure of which can be maintained with careful trans-
100 psig (689.5 kPa gage) and a maximum portation, handling, and storage. Most fuel
temperature of 250°F (121°C). contamination occurs during transportation.
Where there is a danger of contamination,
such as salt-bearing water, auxiliary fuel
5-18 Change 5
Change 5 5-19
water and sludge should be drained from all after the above recommendations have been
storage tanks on a daily basis. After experi- implemented, indicate that the fuel system
ence is gained with a given fuel, and fuel does not provide fuel per the guidelines, the
source, the frequency of draining may be customer must change his fuel source or mod-
adjusted by the customer. ify the fuel treatment system.
5-20 Change 5
Change 5 5-21
Nominal cutout speed for the GE-supplied – 45 seconds On, 2 seconds Off for any
starter is 4,600 rpm (XN25). During engine number of cycles or
starting, minimum acceptable starter output – 2 minutes On, 5 minutes Off for a
speed is 4,100 rpm. Maximum acceptable maximum of two cycles or
starter output speed is 4,900 rpm.
– 2 minutes On, 21 minutes Off for any
If air is used to drive the starter, it can be dis- number of cycles.
charged directly from the starter with no addi- • Motoring
tional piping. If natural gas is used, the
exhausted natural gas must be vented to a safe – 5 minutes On, 2 minutes Off for a
location. For either type of pneumatic starter maximum of two cycles or
supplied by GE, the starter lube system is part
– 5 minutes On, 18 minutes Off for any
of the engine system, allowing constant oil
number of cycles or
flow through the starter. For all other starters,
refer to the packager's manual. – 10 minutes On, 20 minutes Off for any
number of cycles. For 10 minutes of
5-5.2 Starter Duty Cycles motoring, maximum starter air inlet
temperature is 200°F (93.3°C).
For information on starter types other than
those described here, contact the packager. 5-5.2.2 Hydraulic Starter
5-5.2.1 Air and Gas Starters The hydraulic starter consists of a variable dis-
placement type hydraulic motor. Piston stroke
During a normal start, the starter is energized is controlled by a wobble plate, while dis-
for approximately 40-70 seconds. Air/gas con- placement is controlled by means of a pressure
sumption per start is approximately compressor. The starter is equipped with an
120-250 lb (54.4-113.3 kg), depending on the over-running clutch to prevent the motor from
medium and conditions. being driven by the HP rotor when the hydrau-
lic supply pressure and flow are reduced to
The maximum supply temperature is 475°F zero. Physical arrangement and starter perfor-
(246.1°C). Air or gas must be dry and filtered mance are shown in figures 5-11 and 5-12
to 40 micrometers nominal. To purge and go respectively.
directly into a start cycle without stopping, the
5-22 Change 5
Change 5 5-23
The hydraulic supply and control system are There are no duty cycle limitations on the
supplied by the gas turbine packager. hydraulic starter, as long as the oil temperature
Figure 5-13 is a simplified schematic of a is maintained under 140°F (59.9°C). The
maximum cooling circuit oil temperature limit
typical packager-supplied system. The starter
is 200°F (93.3°C).
interfaces are identified as B1 through B5 in
figures 5-11 and 5-13. The hydraulic starter For starting, a minimum pressure drop of
requires a flow capability of 0-55 gpm 4,200 psi (28,958 kPa) is supplied. As starter
speed increases, the flow will increase
(0-208.20 l/min) of hydraulic fluid at a
from 0 to 55 gal/min (0 to 208.2 l/min). At
maximum differential pressure of 4200 psi 55 gal/min (0 to 208.2 l/min) flow, an internal
(28,957 kPa). The maximum starter inlet pressure compensator in the starter maintains
pressure (pump compensator pressure) is starter inlet pressure and accelerates the starter
4500 psig (31,026 kPa gage). A list of the while the hydraulic supply system maintains
starter manufacturer’s approved oil types is the 55 gal/min (208.2 l/min) flow. When the
found in DEB-101. The oil temperature to the gas turbine is fired, it will eventually attempt
to drive the starter above its maximum speed.
start circuit shall be between 32° and 200°F
At this point, an internal over-running clutch
(0° and 93.3°C). The oil shall be filtered to allows the gas turbine to continue to run at its
10 µm nominal (25 µm absolute). The maxi- maximum speed without driving the hydraulic
mum starter discharge pressure is 300 psig starter. The hydraulic supply system for the
(2068 kPa gage). The supply pressure shall be hydraulic starter should be shut down and
reduced to zero after the gas turbine attains cooling flow initiated. If the gas turbine is
4,000 to 4,600 rpm (XN25). Drive input unfired, such as for purge or compressor
cleaning, the starter speed will approach the
power for the hydraulic supply pump is
steady state speed of 1,900 to 2,200 rpm
approximately 180-200 horsepower. desired, by decreasing the pressure drop
The maximum flow through the starter across the starter or limiting fluid flow to less
cooling circuit is 3.5 gal/min (13.25 l/min) and than 55 gal/min (208.2 l/min).
the maximum allowable backpressure is The seal drain connection allows hydraulic
25 psig (172.4 kPa gage). The minimum fluid that has leaked across the starter carbon
allowable backpressure is 1.0 psig (6.9 kPa seal between the starter and the AGB to be
gage). A maximum 2.0 gal/min (7.6 l/min) ported outside the package. The drain is
flows between the starting circuit and the redundant with the AGB drain at the starter
cooling circuit once the starting circuit is pres- location. The maximum flow through the
surized. Filtration requirements are the same starter seal drain is 5.0 cc/hr and the maximum
as the supply circuit. The starter torque allowable backpressure is 1.0 psig (6.9 kPa
characteristic is shown in figure 5-12. gage).
Cooling flow to lubricate the internal clutch is
For new installations or where the start system
required during over-running conditions (once
has had maintenance performed, the hydraulic
the start circuit flow is stopped). Supply shall
system supply and cooling lines should be
be to the cooling supply interface and return
flushed until clean, without the starter
from the cooling return interface shown in
installed in the circuit. This should be accom-
figure 5-11. The circuit uses the same
plished by circulating fluid through the
hydraulic fluid used in the supply circuit.
5-24 Change 5
Change 5 5-25
5-26 Change 5
Change 5 5-27
The standard engine lube system components then be changed and the lube system con-
include the gearbox-driven engine lube oil nected to the gas turbine. See Chapter 7 for
supply and scavenge pump and the necessary specific recommendations.
on-engine piping for the HP and LP system
bearings and sumps, for the inlet gearbox, and Use of engine lubrication oil for purposes
for the TGB assembly. Oil supply and scav- other than described in this section must be
enge temperature sensors are included. The oil reviewed by GE M&IED.
temperature sensors are dual-element resis-
tance temperature detectors (RTD). Three chip 5-6.2 System Flows, Pressures, and
detectors are also included. One monitors the Temperatures
thrust bearing in the A-sump and one the
Table 5-2 provides the parameter values for
thrust bearing in the B-sumps. The third or
the oil supply and scavenge, actuator drain,
common detector monitors the remaining
and air/oil vents for use in troubleshooting
bearings.
possible operational problems. Total flow
The packager provides air/oil separator(s), from the oil tank to the engine and return is
lube oil, lube conditioning and storage mod- approximately 17 gal/min (1.7 l/sec) at rated
ule, and the necessary flexible lines to inter- power.
face with the engine at two locations. The lube
5-6.3 Oil Specification
conditioning and storage system includes the
lube oil supply filter(s), scavenge oil filter(s), Type II oil (MIL-PRF-23699) is the preferred
oil cooler, check valves, and the storage tank. lubricant for the LM6000 PC gas turbine. This
class of synthetic oil has a coking temperature
The lubrication oil may be used with a transfer
advantage of 20°F (11°C) to 50°F (28°C) over
gearbox assembly-mounted hydraulic pump to
Type I (MIL-PRF-7808). For details on
provide hydraulic pressure to operate pack-
approved oils, reference Appendix A6, Lubri-
ager-supplied fuel, water, and steam metering
cating Oil. Improved film effectiveness of
valves, required by the system as supplied.
Type II oil MIL-PRF-23699 at higher temper-
For new installations, following lube system atures also improves bearing life. Type I lubri-
maintenance, or after lube system component cant is not recommended for general use in the
failure, the package lube system lines should LM6000 PC Model. In applications where
be flushed until free of contamination. The very low temperature starting capability is
flushing should occur without the gas turbine required, Type I oil may be used provided the
installed in the circuit. Flushing is accom- ambient temperature is consistently lower than
plished by circulating fluid through the system 68°F (19.9°C). Any use of Type I oil requires
and filters at operating temperatures and pres- approval of M&IED for the specific site. Ref-
sures. Continue circulation until system filters erence Appendix A for further guidance on
are free of debris. The filter elements should acceptable lubrication oils.
5-28 Change 5
Lube Pump Inlet Oil 10-18 gal/min 0-1.0 psig 100 to 120°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (0-6.9 kPa gage) (37.7 to 48.8°C)
Lube Supply to Filter Oil 10-18 gal/min 32-110 psig 140 to 160°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (220.6-758.4 kPa gage) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Engine Lube Supply Oil 10-18 gal/min 27-68 psig 140 to 160°F
(0.63-1.13 I/sec) (186.1-468.8 kPa gage) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Combined Actuators Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
VG Servo Drain Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
(0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Combined Accessory Oil 0-10 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Pad Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (59.9 to 71.1°C)
Thrust Balance Valve Oil 0-30 ml/hr 0-2 in. H2O 140 to 160°F
Drain (0-0.5 kPa) (60 to 71°C)
Note: Data provided are normal expected values from idle to maximum power.
Change 5 5-29
The oil flow from the supply element of the 5-6.4.2 Scavenge Oil Circuit
engine lube pump is approximately propor-
tional to the engine HP rotor speed. The pump Scavenge flow, an air/oil mixture, is approxi-
internal relief valve for the lube supply ele- mately proportional to HP rotor speed. Scav-
ments is set to open at 300 psid (2,068.4 kPa enge pump capacity is approximately three
differential) and bypass full flow (at maximum times that of the oil supply element.
speed) at 400 psid (2,757.9 kPa differential).
The pump requires a flooded inlet to maintain Oil returning to the tank is cooled and filtered
prime. Immediately following cold starts, oil to 3.0-6.0 µm absolute to maintain a clean
pressure at the pump inlet may be as low as 5.0 tank. The filter should include a bypass relief
psia (34.5 kPa absolute). Oil pressure at the valve and bypass alarm as described for the
pump inlet shall not be less than atmospheric lube supply circuit. The tank must be vented to
pressure when the oil temperature is at normal ambient through an air/oil demister.
operating conditions. Oil from the lube and
scavenge pump shall be filtered to 3.0-6.0 µm An oil pressure measurement fitting is pro-
absolute by packager-supplied off-engine fil- vided in the engine lube oil scavenge system.
ters before being returned to the engine lube Limits in Chapter 10 apply to pressures mea-
system. Filters include bypass relief valve with sured at this fitting.
an alarm to alert the operator to impending
5-6.4.3 Engine Drains
bypass. Oil filter pressure drop shall not
exceed 40 psid (275.8 kPa differential) at full In normal operation, the drains will have little
oil flow. or no oil flow.
Oil supplied to the engine should not contain The B- and C-sump drains into the LP recoup
more than 10 percent entrained air on a vol- vent line. Under normal conditions, insignifi-
ume basis. cant amounts of oil will be entrained in the LP
recoup air. In the event of sump seal oil leak-
An oil pressure measurement fitting is pro-
age, the LP recoup vent line may contain
vided in the engine lube oil supply system.
entrained oil. The D- and E-sump drains are
Limits in Chapter 10 apply to pressures mea-
expected to carry insignificant amounts of oil
sured at this fitting. An on-engine temperature
during normal operation. The sump drains are
sensor is provided for oil supply temperature
sized to handle full air/oil flow in the event of
measurement. Engine oil pressure is a function
seal oil leakage.
of HP rotor speed and oil supply temperature.
Refer to Chapter 8 for oil supply characteris-
tic. Chapter 10 provides requirements for pres-
sure and temperature instrumentation and
operation limits.
5-30 Change 5
A fluid drain collector system should be pro- The drain lines from the air/oil separator and
vided, as part of the installation, and should the oil collector, if present, should be sepa-
comply with all applicable regulations relating rately routed back to the lube storage tank
to environmental contamination or pollution. without any traps in the lines.
It is strongly recommended that provisions be
made to isolate the drain lines, when neces- 5-6.4.5 Lube and Scavenge Line
sary, to enable troubleshooting for excessive Cooling
drain fluid flow. The collector system must not
permit fluids to siphon back into the engine. After engine shutdown, the turbine rear frame
(lube supply and scavenge lines) and compres-
The TGB assembly drive pad seal drain is a sor rear frame (LP recoup line) will require
manifold drain for the fuel pump, the starter, packager-supplied vent air cooling to prevent
the lube/scavenge pump, the external shaft oil line coking. This cooling air flow enters fit-
seal on end of the lube/scavenge pump, and tings near internal lube piping and provides a
the forward accessory pad. cool air film around these lines and sump
walls.
The TGB assembly drain manifold fluid may
be lube oil, fuel, or starter hydraulic oil and Cooling flow at the gas turbine should be
cannot be returned to the lube storage tank. 120°F (48.9°C) or less and 25 psig (172.3 kPa
gage). The cooling flow must be supplied for a
5-6.4.4 Sump Vent Circuit minimum of 1.5 hours after shutdown from
idle to provide sufficient time for the frames to
The engine A-, B-, C-, D-, and E-sumps vent cool below the lube oil coking temperature.
to the packager-supplied air/oil separator sys- Emergency shutdown from high power
tem. The allowable vent pressures into the air/ requires a longer cooling period.
oil separator at full power should not exceed
2.3 psig (15.85 kPa gage). See figure 5-16 for Post-shutdown cooling air supply for the tur-
sump locations and figure 5-17 for a sump- bine rear frame struts and the low pressure
function diagram. recoup line should conform to the same air
quality requirements of gas turbine inlet air.
Oil entrained in the vent air is normally com- Discharge from the fan or blower may be
posed primarily of liquid oil droplets. These water vapor saturated air but no water droplets
oil droplets may constitute as much as or slugs are permitted. Entrained oil not to
0.5 gal/min (32 ml/sec) from each sump vent exceed 3.0 lb/min, by weight.
interface.
5-6.5 Sump Pressurization
The amount of oil vapor discharging from the
air/oil separator exhaust will vary with separa- All sumps are pressurized by LPC discharge
tor efficiency. The air/oil separator exhaust static air pressure. This airflow is of sufficient
should be located to minimize oil vapor inges- volume and pressure to maintain a positive
tion into the engine inlet system. Oil mist will airflow inward across the inner seals to the
cause compressor fouling and engine perfor- inner sump cavity. This positive airflow car-
mance loss. ries with it any oil on the seals, thus retaining
the oil within the inner cavity.
Change 5 5-31
5-32 Change 5
Sump pressurization air enters the outer sump 5-6.7 Oil Consumption
cavity through a pressurizing port. This air
then passes across the oil seals into the inner Oil consumption is not expected to exceed
sump cavity, where it is vented to the air/oil 0.4 gal/hr (1.5 l/hr). Additional oil may be lost
separator. overboard through the engine sump vents,
depending upon the efficiency of the air/oil
Sump pressurization air also passes outward separator(s).
across the outer seals to the engine cavity.
5-7 Sensors and Indicating
5-6.6 Oil Mixing Systems
Mixing of oils MIL-PRF-23699 and This section describes the various engine-
MIL-PRF-7808 should be avoided. If mixing mounted sensors and indicating systems
does occur, the tank should be drained and ser- required for normal operation of the
viced as soon as possible. Mixing of different LM6000 PC Model.
brands of oil to the same specification should
be accomplished by topping off the tank with 5-7.1 Speed Indication
new brand.
Two pairs of speed sensors (two per system)
are provided to monitor low pressure turbine
(LPT) rotor speed (XNSD) and HP rotor speed
(XN25).
Change 5 5-33
The engine is equipped with two reluctant- 5-7.5.1 LPC Inlet Air Temperature (T2)
type speed sensors, mounted in the turbine
rear frame at struts No. 4 and 12. These sen- The engine is equipped with a probe to mea-
sors detect and measure the tooth-passing fre- sure the LPC inlet total temperature (T2) and
quency of a toothed sensor ring attached to the inlet total pressure (P2). The probe contains a
LPT rotor shaft. Each sensor has an integral dual-element RTD with an integral lead termi-
lead which terminates on the No. 4 electrical nating at the No. l electrical panel.
panel.
5-7.5.2 HPC Inlet Air Temperature
5-7.3 HP Rotor Speed (T25)
The engine is equipped with two reluctance- The engine is equipped with a probe to mea-
type speed sensors mounted in the AGB sec- sure the HPC inlet total temperature (T25) and
tion of the TGB assembly for sensing HP rotor the inlet total pressure (P25) of the high pres-
speed. The speed signal is produced by sens- sure compressor. The probe contains a dual-
ing passing gear teeth frequency on a spur element RTD with an integral lead terminating
gear in the accessory gearbox section. Har- at the No. 2 electrical panel.
nesses are routed to the No. 2 electrical panel.
5-7.5.3 HPC Discharge Temperature
5-7.4 Vibration Sensors (T3)
The engine is equipped with two accelerome- Two T3 sensors are included as standard
ters, one on the compressor rear frame (CRF) equipment. The T3 sensor is a dual-element
and one on the turbine rear frame (TRF). KP-KN thermocouple with readout capability
These accelerometers provide protection for each element. The integral leads are routed
against self-induced synchronous vibration. to the No. 3 electrical panel.
Each sensor is capable of monitoring both
high-speed and low-speed rotor vibration lev- 5-7.5.4 LPT Inlet Gas Temperature
els. Each accelerometer sensor has an integral (T48)
lead that is routed to one of the electrical pan-
Eight separate shielded KP-KN (type K) ther-
els CRF accelerometer to the No. 3 electrical
mocouple probes are installed on the LP tur-
panel; TRF accelerometer to the No. 4 electri-
bine stator case to sense LPT inlet
cal panel.
temperature. Each dual-element T48 sensor
Optional redundant engine accelerometers reads an average of the two elements for a
may also be included. total of eight control readings. Two flexible
harnesses, each connected to four of the
probes, are routed to connectors on the No. 4
electrical panel.
5-34 Change 5
5-7.5.5 Lube Supply and Scavenge 5-7.6.3 LPT Inlet Gas Total Pressure
Temperature (P48)
5-7.6.1 LPC Inlet Pressure (P2) The engine includes an LPT inlet gas total
pressure (P48) probe located on the right side
The engine is equipped with a probe which of the LPT stator case.
measures LPC inlet total temperature (T2) and
which provides a tap to measure LPC inlet 5-7.6.4 Additional Pressure
total pressure (P2). The P2 tap is a threaded Parameters
boss that may be connected by a tube or hose
Additionally, the LM6000 PC Model includes
(supplied by the packager or user) to a trans-
provisions for measurement of the following
ducer. The probe is located in the VIGV case
pressure parameters:
which also contains provisions for a second
optional probe. NOTE
5-7.6.2 HPC Inlet Pressure (P25) • The 17 cu in. (278 cu cm) line volume
limits exist on the PS3 and P48 sensors.
The engine is equipped with a probe which Changes to the tubing should not be made
measures HPC inlet total temperature (T25) without consultation with the packager.
and which provides a tap to measure HPC
inlet total pressure (P25). The P25 tap is a • The PS3 sensing lines, for flowpath pres-
threaded boss that may be connected by means sure measurement, must include provision
of a tube or hose (supplied by the packager or for preventing water accumulation in the
user) to a transducer. This probe is located in line. Contact your packager for the correct
the front frame which also contains provisions configuration.
for a second optional probe.
• HPC inlet static pressure (PS25)
Change 5 5-35
• Balance piston pressure reference (PBPV) An ultraviolet flame detector indicates the
presence, or loss of flame, in the engine com-
Of these, PS25 and PBPV can be used for con- bustion system for engine control system logic
dition monitoring or troubleshooting. The use in sequencing and monitoring. The flame
remaining two (PS3 and PTB) are vital to detector hardware consists of two ultraviolet
engine operation and are an integral part of the sensor assemblies and two flame viewing win-
packager-supplied control system. For these dow assemblies mounted on two holes in the
parameters, the packager is responsible for compressor rear frame. The flame sensors
sensor leads and readout devices. come equipped with cooling cans and integral
leads, which are connected directly to the
P0, which is located in the inlet to the gas tur- packager-supplied signal conditioner. Cooling
bine, is critical to the scheduling of the VIGV air for the system is packager-supplied and
system and load limiting. The sensor reads must be kept on for a minimum of 30 minutes
slightly less than ambient when functioning following a normal shutdown.
properly in a clean inlet. Failure to calibrate
this reference using a calibrated ambient pres- 5-7.10 Thrust Balance Control System
sure gauge will result in performance loss.
The thrust balance control system consists of
5-7.7 Chip Detectors the on-engine VG hydraulic pump and an off-
engine mounted thrust balance control valve
The engine is equipped with electrical/mag- and actuator. Positioning of the thrust balance
netic remote-reading chip detectors in the control valve is scheduled by a purchaser-
TGB/A-sump, B-sump, and common scav- supplied control system electrical input to the
enge return lines. Optional chip detectors are valve mounted servo valve. Position feedback
available for use on the C-, D-, and E-sump is provided by two LVDTs integral with the
scavenge lines. actuator.
Each standard or optional chip detector indi- 5-8 Electrical System
cates chip collection when resistance across
the detector drops. Chip detector leads are The engine electrical system consists of the
connected to the No. 2 electrical panel. ignition system and the cabling for the control
and instrumentation. The system is designed
5-7.8 Variable-Geometry Position for high reliability and ease of maintenance by
utilizing integral lead sensors or on-engine
The positions of the LPC variable inlet guide
harnesses, which are terminated at one of four
vanes (VIGV), the LPC variable bypass valves
electrical connector panels mounted on the
(VBV), and the HPC VSV are provided to the
engine. See figure 5-18 for electrical panel
control and monitoring systems by indepen-
locations.
dent pairs of linear variable differential trans-
formers (LVDTs). Two actuators in each VG
system are equipped with LVDTs.
5-36 Change 5
Change 5 5-37
Abbreviation Nomenclature
AGB Accessory Gearbox
CRF Compressor Rear Frame
LVDT Linear Variable Differential Transformer
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
TC Thermocouple
T/M Torque Motor
TGB Transfer Gearbox
TRF Turbine Rear Frame
T48 Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature
T2 Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature
T25 High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature
T3 High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature
VBV Variable Bypass Valve
VIGV Inlet Guide Vane
VSV Variable Stator Vane
XNSD Low Pressure Turbine Rotor Speed
XN25 High Pressure Rotor Speed
5-38 Change 5
5-9.1 Eighth Stage HPC Bleed A water-wash system can be provided by the
packager to remove contaminants that accu-
HPC bleed air is available from the 8th stage mulate in the LPC and HPC, resulting in a loss
of the HPC if required by packager-supplied of performance.
systems. In most applications, 8th stage bleed
There are two methods of water-washing
is limited to a maximum of 3.3 percent of HPC
available: crank-soak and on-line cleaning.
airflow.
Technique associated with a working water-
5-9.2 HPC Discharge Bleed wash system that maintains compressor effi-
ciency is very much dependent on site condi-
The engine is provided with HPC discharge tions. Each operator should, by testing, choose
bleed capability at the compressor rear frame. the proper fluid and wash frequency based on
HPC discharge bleed air flow under choked their plant economics. Water-wash recommen-
conditions is limited to a maximum of 4 per- dations and procedures are covered in
cent of HPC airflow. HPC discharge bleed is WP 4014 00.
unavailable in dual fuel and gas/steam fuel
system configurations.
Change 5 5-39
5-40 Change 5
5-14 Air System Tubing and 5-14.6 High Pressure and Low
Frame Strut Functions Pressure Recoup
Change 5 5-41
5-42 Change 5
Change 5 5-43
5-44 Change 5
Change 5 5-45
5-15 SPRINT® System • 48 feeder tubes which deliver the air and
water to the nozzles
SPRINT® is an optional equipment system
which allows higher power operation for inlet • an extraction port to extract the atomizing
temperatures above 30°F (-1.1°C). SPRINT® air
operates as an intercooler by injecting a fine
water mist into the compressor airflow and The off-engine part of the system includes:
reduces the temperature of the air as it evapo-
• water supply pump, and metering device,
rates in the front compression system.
flow measuring and air and water control
Two versions of SPRINT® have been pro- on-off valves
duced. In early productions of SPRINT®, the
water mist injection is injected in the HPC • air supply lines from compressor extrac-
inlet airflow only, via nozzles mounted in the tion to SPRINT® air manifold
compressor front frame. In later versions
(referred to as enhanced SPRINT®) additional • a heat exchanger to cool atomizing air and
injection nozzles were added, in the radial heat water (initial models)
inlet volute, to enable LPC inlet injection
• pressure taps to sense manifold pressures
which provides additional evaporative cooling
and send to the control
benefits during hot-day operation. In the later
version, the inlet mist injection is disabled • accumulator to smooth flow and prevent
during potential below-icing conditions severe on-off transients
[T2<45°F (7.2°C)].
5-15.1 SPRINT® System with HP This system also requires a different control
Injection Only software from a standard LM6000PC engine.
Figure 5-23 is a schematic of the SPRINT® 5-15.2 SPRINT® Systems with LPC and
system. The water is atomized to a very fine HPC Inlet Injection
aerosol mist using atomizing air extracted
With the introduction of the later SPRINT®
from stage 8 of the HPC. SPRINT® water
configuration, the mist injection nozzles were
injection is automatically initiated only at Ps3
redesigned to eliminate need for the off-engine
values within 50 psi of the dry Ps3 schedule.
heat exchanger. Testing also showed that the
Reference Chapter 8 on operation of the
accumulator could be eliminated.
SPRINT® system.
The on-engine system is comprised of: Figure 5-24 is a schematic of the SPRINT®
systems with LPC and HPC injection capabil-
• 24 injector nozzles mounted in the com- ity. Figure 5-25 is a schematic without the off-
pressor front frame engine heat exchange system.
• two manifolds (air and water) mounted The on-engine system is comprised of:
forward of the air collector
• 24 injector nozzles mounted in the com-
pressor front frame
5-46 Change 5
• two manifolds (air and water) mounted • air supply lines from compressor extrac-
forward of the air collector tion to SPRINT® air manifold
• 48 feeder tubes which deliver the air and • pressure taps to sense manifold pressures
water to the nozzles and send to the control
• atomizing air supply line from the com- • 23 inlet volute mounted nozzles, inlet
pressor to the atomizing air manifold volute mounted
The off-engine part of the system includes: • an atomizing air manifold and supply pip-
ing
• water supply pump, and metering device,
flow measuring and air and water control • an inlet volute mounted water manifold
on-off valves
Change 5 5-47
5-48 Change 5
Change 5 5-49
5-50 Change 5
Change 5 5-51
Figure 5-25 SPRINT® 1 System W/O Heat Exchange System Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-52 Change 5
3 CHAPTER 6
Service and Support Requirements
6-1 Purpose and Scope If the gas turbine and fuel system are removed
from the enclosure in preparation for ship-
This chapter defines the following service and ment, the fuel system must be properly
support requirements associated with the drained and purged of gas or liquid fuel prior
LM6000 PC gas turbine. to removal as covered in WP 3010 00.
• Shipping 6-2.1 Engine Shipment
• Storage CAUTION Ensure crane is of sufficient lift-
ing capacity when moving shipping con-
• Installation/Removal tainer with engine installed, into and out of
truck.
• Auxiliary systems
a. The engine assembly is shipped in a metal
• Support services
container that measures 219 inches (556.3
• Maintenance cm) long by 102 inches (259.1 cm) wide
by 99.25 inches (252.1 cm) high. The
The information provided is general but not empty container weighs approximately
all-inclusive. References are made to other 11,000 pounds (4,990 kg). With the addi-
sections of this manual and to specific mainte- tion of the air ride (Soft Ride) kit installa-
nance work packages (WP) that cover these tion (SWP 3014 01), weight increases
topics in detail. approximately 2000 pounds (907 kg). The
container is equipped with shock mounts
6-2 Shipping to avoid damage to the engine bearings
The engine is shipped from the factory as a during shipment. It has a pressure relief
complete assembly, including the engine, fuel valve for controlled breathing, humidity
manifold, engine-mounted accessories, exter- indicators, and a desiccant container for a
nal configuration hardware, and engine controlled environment.
mounted sensors. The engine is shipped on an
b. Weight of the container and engine assem-
air ride tractor trailer or a conventional tractor
bly, as shipped from the factory, is approx-
trailer can be used if an air ride (Soft Ride) kit
imately 31,000 pounds (14,061 kg).
is installed onto the shipping container per
SWP 3014 01. The air ride (Soft Ride) kit is c. In the event that the engine requires repair
designed to reduce the possibility of bearing at a designated repair facility, it should
damage in engines installed in shipping con- be shipped to the facility in the shipping
tainers in areas where tractor trailers with air container. Installation of the engine in
ride suspensions may not be available. the shipping container is covered in
WP 3014 00.
Change 6 6-1
6-2.2 Low Pressure Turbine Module b. All aero engines (gas turbines and gas gen-
Shipping erators) are to be transported on air ride
tractor trailer or conventional tractor
a. The low pressure turbine (LPT) module, trailer with air ride (Soft Ride) kit installed
consisting of the LPT rotor, LPT stator, (SWP 3014 01) for the specific engine and
turbine rear frame, and aft drive adapter, shipping container. Aero engines are not
can be transported in a unique reusable approved for transportation by rail type
metal shipping container. This container is systems.
95 inches (241.3 cm) long by 88 inches
(223.5 cm) wide by 80.0 inches (203.2 cm) Notify GE of any unusual engine/container
high. Similar to the engine assembly con- shipping event such as dropped container
tainer, it is equipped with shock mounts to (with engine installed) or tractor trailer
avoid damage to the No. 6R and No. 7R accident. All special events require a
bearings during shipment. It has a pressure report to your GE representative for dispo-
relief valve for controlled breathing, sition of the gas turbine/gas generator.
humidity indicators, and a desiccant con-
tainer for a controlled environment. 6-2.4 Container and Engine Lifting
b. The weight of the container is approxi- GE recommends the following prior to lifting
mately 5,200 pounds (2,359 kg) empty and a LM6000 shipping container:
11,600 pounds (5,262 kg) loaded. Installa-
tion of the LPT module in the shipping a. Visually inspect lifting features for cracks.
container is covered in WP 3017 00.
b. If cracks noted, document and report fin-
NOTE Both the engine and LPT module con- dings to GE.
tainers can be air-shipped on the 747F, L1011,
or C130. The LPT module can also be air- c. If cracks noted, local weld repair is autho-
shipped on DC10CF, C130, A300C, and rized. Weld procedure is provided in
A310C/F aircraft. LM6000 Service Letter No. 6000-04-08.
6-2 Change 6
Change 6 6-3
6-4 Change 6
Change 6 6-5
6-6 Change 6
Change 6 6-7
Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or
equivalent, required if preservation equivalent, required)
period greater than 15 days) Cover inlet (optional)
Cover inlet (optional) Cover exhaust (optional)
Cover exhaust (optional) Cover VBV (optional)
Cover VBV (optional) Oil wet bearings every 30 days
(BRAYCO 599, or equivalent,
required)
Engine installed in container Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or Preserve liquid fuel pump, if
equivalent, required if preservation installed
period greater than 15 days) Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or
Install desiccant equivalent, required)
Inspect desiccant every 30 days Install desiccant
If blue: Inspect desiccant every 30 days
No action required If blue:
If pink: No action required
Oil wet bearings within 14 days If pink:
Install new desiccant Oil wet bearings within 14 days
Install new desiccant
Engine installed in maintenance Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or Preserve liquid fuel pump, if
dolly or pedestal equivalent, required if preservation installed
period greater than 15 days) Oil wet bearings (BRAYCO 599, or
Cover inlet equivalent, required)
Cover exhaust Cover inlet
Cover VBV Cover exhaust
Cover VBV
Oil wet bearings every 30 days
(BRAYCO 599, or equivalent,
required)
6-8 Change 6
Table 6-2 LM6000 PC and Major Component Weight and Center of Gravity
Approximate Center of
Weight Gravity Engine Station
Item Component lb. (kg) in. (m)
- Engine, Complete with Fuel System 16,660 (7557) 232.9 (5.9)
1. VIGV Module (see Note) 580 (263) 145 (3.7)
2. LPC Module 2700 (1225) 159 (4.0)
3. Front Frame Assembly 2150 (975) 190 (4.8)
4. Air Collector 1000 (454) 190 (4.8)
5. Accessory Gearbox 580 (263) 190 (4.8)
6. Midshaft Assembly 280 (127) 232 (5.9)
7. Core Module (does not include item 8) 2500 (1134) 235 (6.0)
8. HPT Module 800 (363) 267 (6.8)
9. LPT Module (less items 10, 11, 12, and 13) 6400 (2903) 297 (7.5)
10. Miscellaneous External Attachments 370 (168) 151 (3.8)
11. Fuel System (Manifold, Hoses, and Valves) 370 (168) 240 (6.1)
NOTE An inlet frame weighs 570 pounds (259 kg) and has a center of gravity at station
145 inches (3.7 m). Fuel system weight is for a dual fuel system. A gas/steam fuel system is
70 pounds (32 kg) heavier and a liquid/water fuel system is 180 pounds (82 kg) lighter. Weights
are for a steel A-286 HPC stages 3-9 spool. Titanium spool is 300 pounds (136 kg) lighter.
Weights exclude starter and clutch.
6-4.4 Engine Power Output Shafts b. The VIGV forward inner flange mates
with either the packager-supplied radial air
The engine is equipped with flanged drive inlet system or the centerbody (bullet
adapters at both the forward and aft ends to nose) supplied with the engine for axial air
accommodate forward or aft drive arrange- inlet system. Refer to the appropriate sec-
ments. The packager-supplied coupling shaft, tion of the packager's manual for details.
which mates with the engine drive adapter,
incorporates a close-tolerance rabbet-fit and c. For installations with an axial inlet, a
must be dynamically balanced and aligned in packager-supplied air inlet bellmouth is
accordance with packager-supplied instruc- independently supported at the forward
tions. This must be done during initial installa- enclosure bulkhead. The flowpath between
tion and subsequent to any removal or the bellmouth and the engine is formed by
replacement of the engine. a liner following the contour of the bell-
mouth. Any gap outboard of this liner
6-4.5 Flange Interfaces must be sealed to prevent inflow of ambi-
ent air.
a. The VIGV case forward outer flange
mates with the outer flowpath structure of
the packager's inlet system.
Change 6 6-9
6-10 Change 6
d. The aft or exhaust interface flanges are on b. After 1000 hours of operation in which no
the turbine rear frame. The outer and inner debris is found in the inlet plenum or cap-
flanges mate with the packager's exhaust tured by the screen, the operator/user may
outer and inner flowpath diffuser. These find it advantageous to replace the 800-
joints normally incorporate a piston ring micrometer screen with a coarser 1200-
assembly to accommodate thermal growth micrometer mesh to reduce the rate of
of the engine. screen fouling. A 55-60 porosity rating is
recommended.
6-3
6-4
6-5 Auxiliary Systems 6-5
6-5.1.1 Air Filtration
Provision is made in the packager's design to
accommodate the following conditions and a. The air entering the inlet of the engine
auxiliary requirements. must meet the following conditions:
6-12 Change 6
Change 6 6-13
Secondary cooling air must be filtered so that • Fuel supply to the engine in accordance
solid material in the air does not exceed with the applicable GE specification
0.2 grains per 1,000 ft3 (0.013 grams per
28.32 m3) of air and the size and density dis- • Verification of site conditions, including
tribution should be such that no more than inlet air quality and fuel quality
5 percent (by weight) of the solid particles are
10 micrometers or greater in size. Air contain- • Lubrication system external to the engine
ing salts, or other corrosive elements, have a
• Fuel metering and control systems; engine
harmful effect on the engine and must be fil-
speed-governing and protection systems
tered or washed from secondary cooling air
circuits.
6-14 Change 6
Change 6 6-15
6-16 Change 6
Change 6 6-17
6-18 Change 6
3 CHAPTER 7
7-2 Change 5
Change 5 7-3
7-4 Change 5
Change 5 7-5
7-6 Change 5
Change 5 7-7
7-8 Change 5
Change 5 7-9
7-10 Change 5
Change 5 7-11
7-12 Change 5
Change 5 7-13
7-14 Change 5
Change 5 7-15
7-16 Change 5
Change 5 7-17
7-18 Change 5
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 1 of 7)
Change 5 7-19
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 2 of 7)
7-20 Change 5
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 3 of 7)
Change 5 7-21
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 4 of 7)
7-22 Change 5
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 5 of 7)
Change 5 7-23
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 6 of 7)
7-24 Change 5
Figure 7-3 Distillate Fuel Systems (Including D/F Systems) Checklist (Sheet 7 of 7)
Change 5 7-25
7-26 Change 5
Change 5 7-27
7-28 Change 5
c. Inspect the engine inlet area per ply system (reference Chapter 8, Lube
WP 4010 00. Thoroughly clean inlet ple- Oil).
num of dirt and foreign objects. Vacuum
and/or wash the area as necessary. No fas- h. Inspect lube and scavenge pump screens,
teners, loose or trapped material, or weld and remove and clean or replace all system
slag/spatter is allowed. Weld splatter that filters to avoid engine contamination. GE
is attached to or trapped behind the inlet also recommends that an oil sample be
plenum perforated plate must be com- taken per WP 4016 00 to verify oil quality,
pletely removed. Remove weld splatter by and that it is free of contamination.
mechanical means, as required. Failure to
remove all loose or weakly constrained i. Ensure that the air/oil separator system
material will likely result in gas turbine and all vents and drains are free and clear.
damage from material ingested through Remove any restrictions, and clean as
the gas turbine inlet. required.
d. Inspect bleed air ducting to ensure the sys- j. Ensure that the gas turbine fuel and water/
tem is free of blockage and the exhaust steam meets GE specification require-
area is clear as specified in Chapter 8, ments. Based on experience, GE strongly
Equipment Protection. Inspect bleed air urges customers to regularly check fuel
ducting including potential traps for samples, particularly given the damaging
debris. No weld slag/splatter or loose effects of noncompliant fuel on gas turbine
material is allowed. Clean using mechani- components. GE also recommends that
cal means as required. particular attention be given to the Fuel
Forwarding Recommendations provided
e. Perform an exhaust system inspection per in the Liquid Fuel Specification and
WP 4013 00. Ensure that exhaust compo- Chapter 5 to assure that fuel remains con-
nents are aligned with the turbine rear tinuously free of contamination.
frame, that there are no obstructions, and
that the flowpath is smooth. k. Calibrate thrust balance valves.
f. Ensure that lube, fuel, water/steam, and l. Verify packager fuel and hydraulic system
purge systems are properly routed and for correct installation. Reference the
connected. Assure that gas and steam man- appropriate packager's manual.
ifolds are aligned properly per
m. Verify high pressure compressor (HPC)
WP 3015 00.
discharge temperature (T3) and low pres-
g. Ensure that the lube system is sure turbine (LPT) inlet temperature (T48)
properly serviced. Engine oil should be thermocouples. Confirm proper thermo-
MIL-PRF-23699 per the requirements of couple wiring. All gas turbine thermocou-
Chapter 5. GE recommends that the lube ples are type K and can be verified by wire
system be flushed prior to gas turbine color. Input the proper type K voltage at
installation for a new plant, prior to instal- the gas turbine electrical panel for T3 and
lation of engine or module replacement T48 and readout on the engine control to
due to lube or sump component failure, or confirm proper system setup.
on-site repair of the gas turbine lube sup-
Change 5 7-29
o. Verify variable-geometry. Calibrate vari- e. Wet motor liquid fueled engines per the
able inlet guide vanes (VIGVs), variable procedure described in the wet/dry motor-
bypass vanes (VBVs), and variable stator ing section of Chapters 8 and 12 of the
vanes (VSVs). Visually verify that vari- manual. It is also recommended that the
able-geometry slews to the proper position liquid fuel circuits of dual-fueled engines
during calibration. be checked for fuel system leaks at this
time.
7-5 Operational Checkout
WARNING When working inside or near
CAUTION If a questionable condition the engine enclosure during operation,
exists, do not attempt to motor or operate the observe the safety precautions described in
engine until a thorough investigation of the Chapter 8.
condition has been made. Do not repeat hot
starts, compressor stalls, load–shedding, or f. Make a start (Chapter 8, Starting and
other problems that initiate emergency shut- Operation) and set power at idle. When the
downs or aborted operation without thorough engine is stabilized at idle, do the follow-
investigation. Failure to do so can result in ing:
undue stress on engine components that may
result in damage or subsequent destructive • Check engine and supply systems for
failure of the engine. leaks.
The initial startup procedures described in this • Check for loose parts, tubing, cabling,
section should be followed after any LM6000 etc.
PC gas turbine installation or internal mainte-
nance. • Observe and record all results.
a. Inspect the enclosure per the packager's g. If any discrepancies are noted, make a nor-
instructions. mal or emergency shutdown, as required,
(Chapter 8, Shutdown Procedures). Other-
b. Perform normal prestart checks wise, proceed to the verification test
(Chapter 8, Starting and Operation). paragraph 7-6, if required.
7-30 Change 5
h. Correct any discrepancies noted during the f. Inspect for leakage and loose parts and
initial startup. take any corrective action required.
7 CHAPTER 8
Engine Operation
8-1 Purpose and Scope The outside surfaces of the engine are not
insulated. Adequate precautions should be
This chapter covers general operating taken to prevent personnel from inadvert-
procedures for the LM6000 PC. The ently coming in contact with hot surfaces.
procedures discussed are typical of any
LM6000 PC-powered package but should not The engine is a source of considerable
be considered totally comprehensive for any noise. It will be necessary for personnel
specific installation. Configuration and system working on it, or in its vicinity, to wear
procedures may vary from package to package proper ear protection equipment when the
and with the packager-supplied control engine is operating.
system. Prior to operation of the engine, the
site operators should be thoroughly schooled The LM6000 PC is a high-speed machine.
in both normal and abnormal (emergency) In the remote case of parts failure, the cas-
operation and the control system action/ ing may not contain major compressor or
reaction to these conditions. turbine disk failures. Personnel should not
be permanently stationed in, or near, the
8-2 General plane of the rotating parts.
The following procedures are intended to pro- Rotating parts of the starter operate at a
vide operating personnel with the information very high speed. In the remote case of a
required to operate the engine safely and reli- parts failure, personnel should not be sta-
ably. Some of the information contained in tioned near the starter during start, motor-
this chapter is also provided, in whole or part, ing, or purge cycles.
in other chapters. Redundancy is used to pro-
vide as much specific detail as required. It is The low pressure (LP), high-velocity air-
also possible that the information may not pro- flow created by the compressor in the
vide for every variation in installation, equip- LM6000 PC can draw objects and person-
ment, or contingency to be found in nel into the engine. The use of an inlet
conjunction with engine operation. Additional screen or other protective measure is
information can be provided by the packager mandatory.
or by GE.
In the event that the fire extinguishing sys-
8-3 Safety tem is activated, care must be taken to
ensure that all personnel are clear of the
General safety precautions are defined in enclosure prior to activation. Due to lack
Chapter 1. The following safety consider- of oxygen, failure to comply may result in
ations should be observed by operators and injury or death to personnel remaining
support personnel working on the engine: inside the enclosure.
Change 6 8-1
8-2 Change 6
Change 6 8-3
8-4 Change 6
Change 6 8-5
d. Flushing of the off-engine lube oil system NOTE Following this flushing, the system fil-
should be performed prior to connecting ters should be removed and cleaned or
the off-engine lubrication system to the replaced to avoid engine contamination.
LM6000 or any time that particulate con-
tamination is suspected (including lube e. In the event of a failure during site opera-
system maintenance). The flush system tion that involves the engine lube system,
uses an off-engine flush pump and filter to the system should be disconnected,
clean particulate contaminates from the oil drained, and cleaned as described in
system prior to connecting it to an engine. step d. This procedure should be followed
The flush system should consist of a pump whether the engine is removed and
which can produce approximately 30 gpm replaced or repaired on-site.
flow (113.5 lpm). Flow should be filtered
using a 3 micron cleanup filter. f. Engine oil is filtered to 3 micrometers,
absolute.
(1) Inspect the inside of supply oil tank
for contamination. Wipe all tank sur- 8-5.2 Air
faces clean and then install tank cover.
Maximum airflow through the LM6000 PC
(2) Connect a flush cart (see note on engine is approximately 350 lb/sec
figure 8-1) to the lube system supply (159 kg/sec) and is filtered by the inlet system
and return interface connections to meet the following requirements:
(see figure 8-1 for typical system).
• 95 percent of the time: must not contain
Each supply and return may be
solid particles exceeding 0.004 grains/
flushed separately or a manifold
1,000 ft3 (0.0097 grams/1,000 m3)
arrangement can be used to flush all
circuits simultaneously (include stator
• 5 percent of the time: must not contain
and hydraulic pump circuits if appli- solid particles exceeding 0.04 grains/1,000
cable). ft3 (0.097 grams/1,000 m3)
(3) Start flush pump and monitor system
• When operating in a marine environment,
cleanliness. Oil should be sampled sodium (from air or water) entering the
periodically. engine should not exceed 0.00045 lb/sec
(0.000204 kg/min) average, or 0.003 lb/
(4) Actual required flush time will vary
sec (0.0014 kg/min), maximum.
depending on the initial system con-
tamination level and the actual system • The maximum allowable liquid water con-
volume. It is expected that a minimum tent in the inlet air is 0.5 percent of the
of 8 hours of continuous flushing will inlet airflow weight at inlet air tempera-
be required to clean-up a typical facil- tures of 42°F (5.6°C) and above. Below
ity oil system. 42°F (5.6°C), no liquid water content is
allowed.
(5) When oil sample meets cleanliness
standards outlined in WP 4016 00, the
engine may be installed.
8-6 Change 6
Change 6 8-7
8-8 Change 6
• Water supply pump: per packager's opera- • Fuel drain valve closed (if applicable)
tional procedures
• Flameout detection circuit OK
• Steam supply pump: per packager's opera-
tional procedures • Flame detection cooling air on
Change 6 8-9
8-9 Motoring Procedures b. With the fuel shutoff valves closed, acti-
vate the motoring or start sequence and
8-9.1 Dry Motoring allow the engine to motor to maximum
motoring speed for 30 seconds. Observe
Any dry motoring check should be made with and record the following:
the ignition system deenergized.
• Engine high pressure rotor speed
CAUTION Be certain that checklists have
been established for packager-furnished • Starter air or hydraulic inlet pressure
equipment. Consult the packager's manual
for mandatory prestart procedures and make • Inlet air temperature
certain that the packager-furnished lube sup-
ply subsystem is activated and operational • Lube supply pressure
prior to any motoring or start sequence.
c. After 30 seconds, deenergize the starter.
a. Check all switches and interlocks for
proper motoring settings.
8-10 Change 6
Any wet-motoring check should be made with 8-10 Starting and Operation
the igniter system deenergized.
8-10.1 Normal Starting Sequence
CAUTION
CAUTION It is critical that the cold restart
• Excessive wet motoring can result in sat- procedure be followed; otherwise, major
uration of the TRF insulation blanket engine damage can result.
with fuel.
a. Ensure that all prestart checks have been
• Be certain that checklists have been completed.
established for packager-furnished
equipment. Consult the packager's man- b. Open the starter shutoff valve or initiate
ual for mandatory prestart procedures the start sequence. The following should
and make certain that the packager-fur- occur:
nished lube supply subsystem is activated
and operational prior to any motoring or • The engine will begin to rotate for a
start sequence. Failure to comply can predetermined period to purge the
result in engine failure. exhaust system.
a. Check all switches and interlocks for • The starter will rollback the core speed
proper motoring settings. to approximately 1,700 rpm or main-
tain the core speed at approximately
b. With the fuel shutoff valves closed, acti- 2,400 rpm (recommended), depending
vate the motoring or start sequence and on packager setting.
allow the engine to motor to maximum
motoring speed for 30 seconds. At maxi- • The ignition will be energized at
mum motoring speed, open the fuel shut- approximately 1,200 rpm for liquid
off valves. Observe and record the fuel and 1,700 rpm for gas fuel.
following:
• The fuel shutoff valves will open.
• Engine high pressure rotor speed
• Lightoff should occur in approxi-
• Starter air or hydraulic inlet pressure mately 10-12 seconds.
• Finish 5 minute warmup prior to load- c. If a hot start occurs, the startup procedure
ing (5 minutes total time at core and should not be repeated without investigat-
synchronous idle speed). ing the cause of the hot start. For trouble-
shooting procedures, refer to Chapter 10.
• Maintain a constant rate of load
increase during acceleration (8 mW/ 8-10.2 Special Operating
minute). Stepped accel rate should be Requirements
avoided. If the packager-supplied con-
trol requires a stepped accel rate, the The information in the following paragraphs is
rate shall not exceed specified limits. presented as generic information only. Refer
to the packager's manual for specific control
NOTE Stepped accel rate values will be pro- system sequencing modes and site operation
vided in a later issue of this manual. information.
8-12 Change 6
Change 6 8-13
8-14 Change 6
Change 6 8-15
• When transferring from gas to liquid at flow rate is gradually increased to meet the
normal operating power, the LM6000 PC schedule for the particular fuel being used.
should be powered down to reduce T3 to For shutdown, water is shut off prior to
750°F (398.8°C) or less. This reduces the fuel transfer.
possibility of autoignition in the gas sys-
tem. When transferring from liquid fuel • Prior to water flow initiation, it is recom-
back to gas fuel, the LM6000 PC should mended that operation at a stabilized,
be powered down to reduce the air temper- steady-state condition first be achieved.
ature to less than 750°F (398.8°C) before Water should not be introduced below core
introducing natural gas into the manifold idle speed.
containing hot air. If a heat exchanger is • Water injection rate should be established
present in the line to maintain the purge by setting values in the packager control
line air temperature below 750°F system to meet the site contractual emis-
(398.8°C) at high power steady state con- sions levels. Emissions measuring equip-
ditions, transfers may be made at any ment in the gas turbine exhaust will be
power. required to establish the proper engine
8-10.2.2 Fuel/Water Injection water-to-fuel ratio when an engine is
Requirements installed or the fuel system, combustor or
hot section components, are changed.
• Liquid fuel operation will normally Water injected to achieve NOx emissions
require a higher water flow and water levels lower than 42 ppm, 15 percent O2,
pressure than gas fuel operation in order to may impact combustor and/or hot section
meet NOx suppression requirements. life. Water injection resulting in emissions
levels lower than 25 ppm NOx, 15 percent
• For gas fueled systems configured for O2, will significantly impact combustor
water injection for NOx suppression, and hot section life and are not recom-
including dual fuel systems, there is no mended.
requirement to initiate water at a particular
power level. The gas turbine can be oper- 8-10.2.3 High Pressure Steam Injection
ated to base load without water injection. Requirements
• Gas turbines equipped with dual-fuel sys- a. Special sequencing is provided for initia-
tems are designed to operate on 100 per- tion and termination of steam injection on
cent natural gas with water injection, 100 models with steam injection for NOx sup-
percent liquid fuel with water injection, or pression. The sequencing ensures that
on combinations of the two fuels with steam is superheated before being intro-
water injection with no limit on natural duced into the engine, that any condensate
gas-to-liquid fuel ratios, except as specifi- is removed from the lines prior to steam
cally noted. injection, and that appropriate drains are
opened during shutdown conditions. For
• Prior to fuel transfer after starting, the additional information, refer to the pack-
water injection flow is adjusted to a mini- ager's manual.
mum setting. Following transfer, the water
8-16 Change 6
Change 6 8-17
The percent increase in power due to greater power. The LP speed reference throttle
SPRINT® is greater for warmer inlet tempera- can then be manually (i.e. by the operator)
tures than for cooler temperatures. Expected advanced further or until the SPRINT® MW
output increase at T2=59°F (15°C) is about 8 limiter is achieved or otherwise limited by T3,
percent and for T2=90°F (32°C) is about 22 T48, or XN25R3 regulators for the case when
percent for engines with steam or water sup- the power turbine droop reference is set to
pression of NOx. For engines operating with- maximum.
out NOx suppression, the expected output
increase will be lower than the previously SPRINT® system can also be manually acti-
mentioned values. vated while at baseload operating conditions
(see packager’s appropriate manual). For spe-
The SPRINT® system will automatically cific details of how to activate the SPRINT®
sequence if the operator selects SPRINT® system, refer to Original Equipment Manufac-
operating mode before (or during) load ramp turer (OEM) operations manual.
(see packager’s appropriate manual). If power is reduced during SPRINT® opera-
When the following conditions are met: tion, the water injection will automatically
shut off when Ps3 drops ≥60 psi below the Ps3
• T2≥30°F, dry schedule. During shutdown a drain valve
is opened to air purge water out of the
• Other site permissives are satisfied, and SPRINT® water supply line to prevent
• Ps3 reaches a level with 50 psid of the freezing.
baseload dry Ps3 schedule.
Water injection flow to the SPRINT® system
SPRINT® is activated, T3 will decrease, and is scheduled as a function of T2. The water
power will automatically ramp increase by the flow ranges from 5 gpm at T2≤40°F to 13.1
ratio of the SPRINT® maximum power limiter gpm at T2≥ 80°F.
to the dry maximum power limiter to achieve
8-18 Change 6
Change 6 8-19
8-20 Change 6
If the fault causing the emergency shutdown is b. Energize the starter to crank the HP rotor
fully understood, resolved, and cleared, and it to a speed not to exceed 2,400 rpm. If the
has been verified that no damage to the engine HP rotor rotates freely, make a normal
has occurred, a restart or motoring sequence start.
can be initiated if the 10 minute limit has not
been exceeded. c. If circumstances allow the HP rotor to be
cranked within 10 minutes after shutdown,
8-12.1.1 Restart Within 10 Minutes a manual purge, if available, will enable a
After Shutdown restart purge cycle to be initiated. The
restart purge cycle motors the engine high
If circumstances permit the shutdown problem pressure rotor to prevent thermal bowing
to be cleared within 10 minutes or less and the of the HP rotor. Starter use for motoring
high pressure (HP) rotor speed is less than 300 the engine HP rotor must be consistent
rpm, the restart procedure is as follows: with limitations specified in Chapter 5.
Change 6 8-21
d. By selecting the restart purge option, the each period is preceded by normal engine
operator preserves capability to restart the operation.
engine any time after the fault or system
problem has been cleared. • Unlimited windmilling of the engine
rotors is allowed at HP rotor speeds above
8-12.1.2 Restart More Than 10 Minutes 1,000 rpm, provided supply oil tempera-
After Shutdown ture is maintained above 90°F (32.2°C)
and scavenge oil temperature is kept
CAUTION Bypassing this logic and crank- below 340°F (171.1°C). At this speed, the
ing the HP rotor may result in severe HP lube supply and scavenge system operates
compressor rubs and may damage the com- normally, provided positive oil pressure is
pressor blades and vanes. maintained and oil cooling is provided.
8-22 Change 6
A log of all LM6000 PC running time should • Crank soak washing should be performed
be kept. The following minimum data should prior to test
be recorded:
• Fuel sample should be collected and
• Time of all starts and shutdowns analyzed for lower heating value (LHV)
and specific gravity (SG) to assist in expe-
• Total time since installation dited analysis of performance data. Liquid
fuel is to be analyzed for contaminants and
• Twice daily log of all instrument readings, compliance with fuel specification
taken at the set-load point
• High power data readings should be taken
• All changes in speed or load with VBV closed
• Adjustments and part changes The same data should be used for periodic
trending of engine performance.
• Preventive maintenance action
8-14.3 Component Life/Repair Intervals
• Lease pool installation, removal, run time
Safe operation of the LM6000 PC is depen-
8-14.2 Performance Data Recording dent on properly scheduled maintenance,
repairs, and component replacement. In order
For diagnosing performance or emissions
to properly track these conditions, packager-
issues, best results are obtained when all the
supplied time and event counters provide data
parameters in the Performance Data Sheet,
for the parameters listed in table 8-4.
figure 8-4, are recorded and the data is
recorded to the indicated level of precision. The operator is responsible for maintaining a
Also for best accuracy in the analysis, the log of the operating data parameters for gas
engine should be stabilized for at least 5 min- turbine components. This will require that the
utes prior to data recording and several (3-5) operator track components that are removed
readings should be taken at a given power during field or depot maintenance.
level
Change 6 8-23
8-24 Change 6
Change 6 8-25
8-26 Change 6
Change 6 8-27
Parameter Description
8-28 Change 6
5 CHAPTER 9
Abnormal Operation
9-1 Purpose and Scope • Shutdowns
• Emergency shutdown (gas turbine motor- • Drain and vent valves are opened per con-
ing allowed) trol sequencing
• Emergency shutdown (gas turbine motor- • Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, and
ing not allowed) operating timers are reset
• Step decel to idle The emergency shutdown will not allow reset
until core speed (XN25) is less than 400 rpm.
• Abort start Table 8-3 outlines the protection functions that
require root cause resolution prior to engine
All alarm and protective function setpoints are motoring.
based on typical applications with driven
equipment rated for continuous duty operation 9-3.3.3 Step-Decel to Idle/Shutdown
at 3,600 rpm.
A step-decel to idle is an immediate rapid
9-3.3.1 Shutdown (max decel rate) deceleration to idle followed
by a 10 second pause, and then by a shutdown.
A control initiated shutdown is a controlled A step-decel provides a more controlled and
decel to idle, a 5 minute stabilization period, orderly way of shutting down the engine than
and a shutoff of the fuel valves and opening of does an immediate shutdown at power. The
the fuel staging valves. 10 second pause at core idle allows various
scheduled engine systems, such as variable
9-3.3.2 Emergency Shutdown
inlet guide vanes (VIGVs) and VBVs, to reach
An emergency shutdown is initiated by the a stabilized condition before shutdown occurs.
control when the engine must be shut down
When a step-decel occurs, the control initiates
immediately in order to prevent severe dam-
the following sequence of events:
age to the engine or installation.
a. Power is immediately reduced to core idle,
When an emergency shutdown occurs, the
causing the engine to decel as rapidly as
control initiates the following events:
possible.
• The fuel shutoff valves and metering valve
b. When the engine reaches core idle speed,
are closed
the control holds it at idle for 10 seconds
• The gas blowoff valve is opened and then initiates a shutdown. The hold at
core idle allows the engine to be shut
down from an on-schedule, stabilized con-
dition.
9-2
c. When the control initiates the shutdown • Underspeed and oil pressure alarms are
after the 10 second idle hold, the following bypassed
events occur:
• Drain and vent valves are opened per con-
• The fuel shutoff valves are closed trol sequencing
• The VBVs are closed during coast- • Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, and
down operating times are reset
• Underspeed and oil pressure alarms • A purge cycle is initiated by the control, if
are bypassed applicable
• Drain and vent valves are opened per 9-4 Operator Action
control sequencing
In order to avoid more severe protective
• Alarms, interlocks, sequence timers, action, the operator must address the causes of
and operating timers are reset all alarms and determine corrective actions
necessary to clear abnormal conditions.
9-3.3.4 Slow Decel to Minimum Load/ Before resuming normal engine operation
Shutdown after a power cutback or shutdown, positive
action to correct the cause is necessary. For
A slow decel to minimum load involves the any alarm or protective action, the following
fuel control controlling gas turbine decelera- general procedures should be followed:
tion at a rate of core speed equal to 100 rpm/
sec. or low pressure rotor speed equal to a. Acknowledge the alarm in the manner
9 rpm/sec. After core idle is reached, the specified in the packager's manual.
sequence of events is the same as a step-decel
to idle/shutdown. b. Reduce power, if necessary, and take
whatever steps possible to prevent further
9-3.3.5 Aborted Start alarms or more severe protective action.
Reducing power to eliminate an alarm
An abort is initiated at any time during the without investigation of alarm root cause
start sequence when certain parameters exceed is unacceptable. Significant damage to the
limits. During an aborted start, the control ini- engine can occur if alarms are bypassed.
tiates the following events:
c. Consult the troubleshooting procedures in
• The fuel shutoff valves are closed Chapter 10 of this manual.
• The ignition system and starter are de- d. During an alarm-only condition, correct
energized the problem, if possible, and resume nor-
mal operation. If recovery is not possible,
• The VBVs are closed during coastdown shut down and correct the problem; refer
to the packager's manual for more specific
information.
9-3
e. After a power cutback, correct the problem When T48 returns to normal, discontinue
before resuming operation at power. If motoring. Refer to post-shutdown fire in
recovery is not possible, shut down and Chapter 8 and troubleshooting procedures in
correct the problem. Chapter 10.
9-4
• Significant inlet ingestion events (e.g., facturing, operation within defined limits, and
foreign objects causing significant maintenance within defined limits and pro-
flowpath damage, ice ingestion, inlet cesses, as well as by inspection. Parts exposed
system failure) to abnormal conditions may appear to be ser-
viceable when, in fact, the actual state of the
• Exposure to external fire, involving
material cannot be ascertained even by the
inlet system, exhaust system, base
most advanced non-destructive testing and
enclosure, and equivalent
inspection methods. Parts which have been
• Exposure to external fire in storage or involved in an abnormal event must be for-
transport mally reviewed for severity of operation
beyond the normal working environment and
• Internal fire
dispositioned as to the necessity for a special
• Thermal quench by water or other inspection workscope. The operator has the
agent, local overheating by fuel or responsibility for the continued safe operating
steam system failure condition of the gas turbine. Since used
replacement parts may be available which
• Exposure to corrosive chemicals, fire-
have operated in abnormal events, the operator
fighting agents, salt water, or sewage
should verify that the service histories of these
These events are highly variable and the expo- parts are known and that, when applicable, the
sure and associated damage which a gas tur- required special inspections and part disposi-
bine experiences is unpredictable. This tion following exposure to abnormal condi-
prevents establishing a single, all-inclusive tions have been completed and the part is
inspection and repair procedure. Depending serviceable.
upon the circumstances of the event, instances
b. Similarly, many components or assemblies
of localized, limited damage can often be dis-
from aircraft engines which have experi-
positioned by normal channels. For abnormal
enced previous flight service are not
events, such as the events listed above, execu-
usable in LM engines. In addition, gas tur-
tion of a special inspection workscope is nec-
bine components which have experienced
essary for proper restoration of serviceability.
an extremely high number of start/stop
In some extreme cases, repair may not be pos-
cycles may not be usable. Specifically, use
sible or economical, and, therefore, further
of used-serviceable flight or high-cycle
repair effort may not be advisable. Before pro-
engine parts in the following categories is
ceeding with inspection or repair action to
prohibited:
restore serviceability after a mishap, contact
the following for guidance: (1) Rotating components
GE Aircraft Engines (2) Stator cases and stator vanes
Marine & Industrial Customer Service (3) Frame assemblies, including sump
Mail Drop S-155 components
1 Neumann Way
Cincinnati, Ohio 45215-1988 USA (4) Main shaft bearings
9-5/(9-6 Blank)
CHAPTER 10
Troubleshooting
10-1 Purpose and Scope alarms, control actions, and the setpoints that
trigger these alarms or control actions. These
This chapter provides general troubleshooting are grouped by major engine/facility systems.
procedures for the LM6000 PC gas turbine. Each event also lists a numbered Trouble-
shooting Procedure (TS-) or a SPAM (See
10-2 Arrangement and Use Packager’s Appropriate Manual) reference.
This chapter includes two major segments: a At the end of the Troubleshooting Reference
Troubleshooting Reference Table and a set of Table, items in the Miscellaneous category
numbered Troubleshooting Procedures. For either (1) do not trigger an alarm or control
ease of use, the Troubleshooting Reference action or (2) are a combination of conditions,
Table and Troubleshooting Procedures follow some of which may or may not trigger an
these introductory and explanatory sections. alarm or control action on their own, that must
Figures and tables are presented at the end of also be looked at in combination with others.
the section.
10-2.2 Numbered Troubleshooting
Figure 10-1 provides a control system compo- Procedures
nent schematic as an aid to troubleshooting.
The numbered Troubleshooting Procedures
Engine/package electrical interface panels are (TS-1 through TS-32) are referred to in the
illustrated in figure 10-2. Engine interface Troubleshooting Reference column of the
connectors are indicated in the schematics of Troubleshooting Reference Table. These pro-
figures 10-3 through 10-26. Figures 10-3 cedures show symptoms for each engine or
through 10-26 are cited in the numbered facility condition, possible causes for each, the
Troubleshooting Procedures. troubleshooting procedure to isolate the cause
of the problem, and the recommended correc-
Tables 10-1 through 10-10 are cited in, and tive action. Events or conditions in the Trou-
provide supplementary information for, bleshooting Reference Table that have only a
some of the numbered Troubleshooting SPAM reference are not discussed in the num-
Procedures. bered troubleshooting procedures.
Change 6 10-1
10-2.3 Using This Chapter These instructions may not provide for every
possible variation in equipment or contin-
The steps shown below illustrate how to use gency to be met in connection with the opera-
this chapter for troubleshooting. tion of the engine. Refer requests for
additional information to the packager.
NOTE Symptoms, possible causes, trouble-
shooting procedures, and corrective actions 10-3.1 Low Pressure Turbine Speed
are grouped horizontally across each page, Sensor (XNSD) Testing
allowing each symptom or set of symptoms to
have more than one possible cause. Each pos- NOTE
sible cause may also have more than one trou-
bleshooting procedure, and each • This procedure is only for the XNSD speed
troubleshooting procedure may have more sensor, PN L44684.
than one corrective action.
• XNSD speed sensor, PN L44684, can only
Example - Alarm received for air inlet differ- be tested on the secondary winding. This
ential pressure high: test cannot confirm a good sensor, but it
can confirm a bad sensor. The evaluation
a. Find the air inlet differential pressure high that follows is only for determining that a
entry on the first page of the Troubleshoot- sensor is bad.
ing Reference Table.
WARNING Alcohol is flammable and toxic
b. Refer to troubleshooting procedure TS-3, to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
as listed in the Troubleshooting Reference and eye protection is required. Avoid
column. repeated or prolonged contact. Use in a
well-ventilated area.
c. Follow the appropriate procedure for each
possible cause listed in TS-3. a. Ensure the inside of the sensor connector
is not dirty or wet before performing the
10-3 Troubleshooting Procedures following tests. If dirt or fluids are seen
inside connector, this may explain an
WARNING If a questionable condition improper XNSD signal indication. Use
exists, do not operate the engine until a only denatured alcohol to rinse and clean
thorough investigation has been made. Do inside of connector.
not repeat hot starts, compressor stalls, or
other recognized problems without prior b. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance
thorough investigation, root cause determi- across two pins. Resistance should be
nation, and corrective action. Failure to do same measuring in either direction. Resis-
so can result in undue stress being imposed tance value between pins of a good XNSD
on engine components, with immediate or sensor should be 500-2000 ohms. If read-
subsequent destructive failure of the engine ing is outside these limits, ensure a good
and injury to personnel. connection exists between ohmmeter leads
and pins, and repeat reading. If indication
is still outside limits, replace sensor.
10-2 Change 6
c. Measure resistance from each pin to case, b. Calculate and record the current 1B bear-
one at a time. Both measurements should ing load using the following equation:
indicate above 500,000 ohms. If either
indication is less than 500,000 ohms, • 1B Axial Load = 55901 - 192260 x
replace sensor. The actual reading could be (PTBSEL/PS3SEL) + 295 x P48SEL
over 5 megohms. - 995 x P25SEL.
d. When starting engine, note speed at which c. Record current orifice plate part number,
control begins to display engine speed. IGV system, SPRINT® system, and total
Speed indication should appear before operating time (hours) since new or last
engine reaches 350 rpm, with 200 rpm full overhaul. Record engine configuration
being nominal highest (worst case) value. and conditions as follows:
If first indication is above 350 rpm, repeat
steps b. and c. to validate sensor. If values (1) Configurations of engines:
are in range per steps b. and c., reset sen-
• Configuration 1 = Fixed IGV to
sor, using a slight twisting action to fully
0°F (0°C), non-SPRINT®
seat sensor. If control continues to give
first indications above 350 rpm, switch • Configuration 2 = VIGV,
positions of the two sensors in LPT to
non-SPRINT®
determine if the first indication speed is
reduced to a better value. If not, the defec- • Configuration 3 = Fixed IGV to
tive sensor should indicate out-of-range in 0°F (0°C), with SPRINT®
both positions, and if so, should be
replaced. • Configuration 4 = VIGV, with
SPRINT®
10-3A Adjustment of Engine
Balance Piston Pressure • Configuration 5 = Fixed Open
IGV to -5°F (-20.6°C),
Using data input sheet table 10-3A.1 to record non-SPRINT®
data information, verify thrust-balance load as
follows: • Configuration 6 = Fixed Open
IGV to -5°F (-20.6°C), with
a. Start gas turbine per normal start proce- SPRINT®.
dure. Accel to maximum power, greater
than 30 MW, stabilize for 20 minutes and (2) Engine conditions:
record operating parameters PTBSEL,
PS3SEL, P48SEL, P25SEL, and T2SEL. • New = new or fully overhauled
Shut down per normal shut down proce- engine with less than 1000 hours
dures. since new or last overhaul
Change 6 10-3
d. Identify target thrust bearing balance load f. Calculate and record the change in orifice
from the appropriate target load curves diameter needed to reach target load. Use
(Refer to figure 10-3A.1 through the following equation:
figure 10-3A.13). As an alternative, the
target bearing load can be identified from • Change in orifice diameter = load dif-
the data in table 10-3A.2 and ference / -109,140.
table 10-3A.3. Record target 1B bearing
load. g. Record current orifice diameter from
table 10-11 onto data sheet in
NOTE The calculated bearing load should be table 10-3A.1. Calculate and record the
between 2000-16000 pounds (907-7257 kg). required/predicted orifice plate diameter
If the calculated bearing load is within onto data sheet table 10-3A.1 as follows:
2000-16000 pounds (907-7257 kg), an orifice
change is not required unless an anticipated • Required/predicted orifice plate diam-
change in ambient temperature could result eter = current orifice plate - change in
in the calculated bearing load exceeding orifice diameter.
16000 pounds (7257 kg) or be less than
h. Select the orifice plate that is closet in
2000 pounds (907 kg).
diameter to the required/predicted diame-
Example: Engine is operated with a T2SEL of
ter. Refer to table 10-11. Record selected
20°F (16.7°C) and the calculated load is
orifice plate part number using data sheet
12000 pounds (5443 kg). The change in load
in table 10-3A.1.
required is 1500 pounds (680 kg). If the engine
is expected to operate at a T2SEL of 55°F i. Install orifice plate per WP 1714 00.
(12.8°C), there is a potential that the bearing Repeat paragraphs 1 through 9 as required.
load will exceed 16000 pounds (7257 kg) (tar-
get load at 55°F (12.8°C) from table plus
change load required to meet target). Refer to
figure 10-3A.13.
10-4 Change 6
Data Input
Site:
Model:
ESN:
Date:
Power (MW)
PTBSEL (psia)
PS3SEL (psia)
P48SEL (psia)
P25SEL (psia)
T2SEL (degrees F)
Current Orifice Plate: P/N L49438 or L52177 (P0x)
Does the engine contain a VIGV System? (Y/N)
If Fixed IGV, is it the new -5°F (-20.6°C) fixed open configuration? (Y/N)
Is the engine operating with a SPRINT® Water System? (Y/N)
Anticipated Site min T2 (default to -65°F [-53°C])
Anticipated Site max T2 (default to 140°F [60°C])
Total Operating Time (hours)
Calculations
1B Bearing Load Algorithm equation:
1B Axial load = 55,901 - 192,260 (PTB/PS3SEL) + 295 (P48SEL) - 995 (P25SEL)
Current 1B Bearing Load (pounds)
Configuration of Engine
Condition of Engine
Data Table or figure used
Current Orifice Diameter (inches)
Target 1B Bearing Load (pounds)
Change in 1B Load required (pounds)
Orifice Plate Sizing equation:
Change in Orifice Diameter = (Change in 1B Load required) / (-109,140)
Amount of change required in Orifice Diameter (inches, + is larger)
Predicted Orifice Diameter (inches)
Notes:
1. Orifice plate shall be sized for long-term operating conditions.
2. All recorded pressure measurements are absolute (psia).
3. All recorded temperature measurements are degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Engine must be at a Steady State operating condition >30 MW for 20 minutes.
5. Total Operating Time to be lesser of Time Since New or Time Since Major Overhaul.
6. Engines operating continuously at MAX Power are expected to use orifice plate diameters = 0.810 inch
(20.57 mm) (P05).
7. Engines operating continuously at less than MAX Power are expected to use orifice plate diameters
>0.810 inch (20.57 mm).
Change 6 10-5
Table 10-3A.2 New LM6000 PC Engine - Nominal No. 1B Bearing Loads Data Sheet
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6
FIGV Non- VIGV, Non- FIGV, with VIGV, with FOIGV, Non- FOIGV,
T2SEL
SPRINT®, SPRINT®, SPRINT®, SPRINT®, SPRINT®, SPRINT®,
New New New New New New
-65 5,091 9,635 4,950 9,566 4,443 4,315
-60 5,553 9,611 5,419 9,541 5,073 4,932
-55 6,003 9,596 5,870 9,527 5,648 5,531
-50 6,457 9,662 6,318 9,604 6,224 6,105
-45 6,883 9,809 6,762 9,750 6,778 6,673
-40 7,316 9,993 7,190 9,934 7,445 7,338
-35 7,480 10,132 7,363 10,064 7,581 7,472
-30 7,719 10,276 7,604 10,149 7,694 7,579
-25 7,943 10,360 7,752 10,150 7,781 7,598
-20 7,936 10,054 7,738 9,882 7,503 7,318
-15 7,975 9,868 7,771 9,701 7,342 7,149
-10 7,926 9,688 7,573 9,525 7,222 6,935
-5 7,832 9,513 7,421 9,347 6,942 6,662
0 7,723 9,333 7,330 9,171 6,674 6,397
5 7,928 8,898 7,624 8,711 6,689 6,487
10 8,434 8,536 8,116 8,366 6,871 6,673
15 8,917 8,218 8,611 8,043 7,077 6,881
20 9,325 7,905 9,062 7,731 7,412 7,161
25 9,674 8,064 9,520 7,805 7,811 7,581
30 10,030 8,871 11,227 10,277 8,321 9,806
35 10,439 9,536 11,633 10,736 9,133 10,434
40 10,507 9,981 12,024 11,169 9,684 10,883
45 10,049 9,640 13,354 12,422 9,449 12,120
50 9,391 8,658 14,098 13,031 8,409 12,728
55 8,366 7,692 14,605 13,650 7,547 13,353
60 7,522 6,882 14,553 14,288 6,835 13,968
65 6,572 6,305 14,255 13,999 6,106 13,890
70 5,871 6,294 13,925 13,647 5,552 13,536
75 5,356 6,327 13,557 13,276 5,060 13,155
80 4,921 6,290 13,195 12,894 4,317 12,803
85 4,440 6,265 12,741 12,529 3,863 12,277
90 4,414 6,260 12,124 12,234 3,178 11,657
95 4,258 6,229 11,280 11,956 2,625 10,817
100 3,652 6,260 10,397 11,517 2,096 10,136
105 2,775 6,260 9,698 11,062 1,450 9,200
110 2,025 6,338 9,311 10,683 1,011 8,380
115 1,528 6,617 9,143 10,585 630 7,852
120 1,256 7,071 8,570 10,427 422 7,113
125 1,479 6,865 7,957 10,337 1,192 6,657
130 1,533 5,870 7,389 10,222 1,364 6,373
135 2,130 5,065 7,175 10,471 1,778 6,261
140 2,633 4,876 7,001 10,845 2,090 6,163
10-6 Change 6
Table 10-3A.3 Deteriorated LM6000 PC Engine - Nominal No. 1B Bearing Loads Data Sheet
Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12
FIGV, Non- VIGV, Non- FIGV, with VIGV, with FOIGV, Non- FOIGV,
T2SEL
SPRINT® SPRINT® SPRINT® SPRINT® SPRINT® SPRINT®
Deteriorated Deteriorated Deteriorated Deteriorated Deteriorated Deteriorated
-65 4,756 8,592 4,610 8,548 3,922 3,783
-60 5,232 8,592 5,087 8,537 4,530 4,396
-55 5,741 8,602 5,580 8,532 5,138 4,993
-50 6,216 8,678 6,043 8,641 5,743 5,583
-45 6,676 8,834 6,514 8,796 6,321 6,176
-40 7,093 9,006 6,963 8,965 6,927 6,812
-35 7,091 9,151 6,966 9,106 7,068 6,960
-30 7,213 9,280 7,107 9,193 7,202 7,086
-25 7,443 9,362 7,251 9,192 7,298 7,107
-20 7,258 9,020 7,038 8,855 6,978 6,786
-15 6,984 8,791 6,738 8,511 6,612 6,360
-10 6,673 8,465 6,427 8,186 6,222 5,981
-5 6,451 8,138 6,152 7,855 5,883 5,612
0 6,283 7,812 5,988 7,532 5,625 5,352
5 6,347 7,210 6,132 7,057 5,655 5,462
10 6,617 6,937 6,368 6,791 5,851 5,660
15 7,031 6,707 6,774 6,552 6,060 5,868
20 7,450 6,495 7,184 6,335 6,279 6,064
25 7,973 6,448 7,702 6,217 6,470 6,276
30 8,624 7,060 10,225 8,688 6,893 8,472
35 9,389 7,774 10,715 9,429 7,448 9,026
40 9,900 8,609 11,140 10,160 8,057 9,666
45 9,197 8,403 12,333 11,476 8,157 11,217
50 8,089 7,382 12,899 12,085 7,250 11,824
55 7,172 6,462 13,111 12,726 6,426 12,408
60 6,243 5,640 13,108 12,898 5,842 12,816
65 5,522 5,347 12,932 12,730 5,264 12,651
70 4,970 5,384 12,779 12,584 4,737 12,503
75 4,499 5,412 12,601 12,354 3,937 12,243
80 4,050 5,143 12,267 11,995 3,309 11,897
85 4,031 5,115 11,782 11,577 2,988 11,435
90 4,017 5,147 11,273 11,323 2,413 10,773
95 3,481 5,257 10,423 10,969 1,765 10,149
100 2,739 5,309 9,732 10,602 1,261 9,355
105 1,855 5,421 9,211 10,139 713 8,468
110 1,150 5,588 9,073 9,777 283 7,824
115 757 5,995 8,607 9,675 -58 7,202
120 735 6,636 7,832 9,574 273 6,396
125 797 6,056 7,261 9,541 693 6,117
130 1,278 4,878 6,809 9,435 987 5,808
135 1,823 4,476 6,577 9,664 1,317 5,591
140 2,255 4,360 6,478 10,044 1,595 5,919
Change 6 10-7
10-8 Change 6
Change 6 10-9
Figure 10-3A.6 Fixed Open IGV to -5 Degrees, with SPRINT®, New Engine
10-10 Change 6
10-12 Change 6
Figure 10-3A.12 Fixed Open IGV to -5 Degrees, with SPRINT®, Deteriorated Engine
Change 6 10-13
10-14 Change 6
panied by a control action. Limits are shown in the alarm column for events resulting in an alarm only. Events that have both an
alarm and an accompanying control action will show the limits in the appropriate action column and an X in the alarm column.
In cases where one limit triggers an alarm only and a higher limit triggers both an alarm and control action, the limits for each
will be shown in the appropriate columns. In any case that has no particular limits and is simply an either/or condition, the alarm
and/or control action will be indicated by X in the appropriate columns.
Air Inlet Differential dP > dPi +1.0 in H2O dP > dPi +2.0 in H2O 1 TS-3
Pressure, High (dP >dPi + 0.25 kPa) (dP >dPi + 0.50 kPa)
10-15
Combustion System
10-16
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
Flame loss, One Sensor X TS-29
(No Flameout) SPAM
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
10-17
Fuel System
10-18
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
(< TSV + 11°C)
Liquid Fuel:
< TWP + 20°F or
temperature to meet
viscosity
requirements of MID-
TD-0000-2 35°F
(1.7°C) is the
minimum
temperature
(< TWP + 11°C)
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
10-19
HPC System
10-20
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
Stall X -dPS3/dt> Threshold 21, 22 TS-9
for > 20 msec
T25 Sensor Failure, One or One Element: Both Elements: 4, 13, 18 TS-27
Both Elements <-40°, >380°F <-40°, >380°F
(<-40°, >193°C) (<-40°, >193°C)
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
No Start 37 TS-25
10-21
LPC System
10-22
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
(<-40°, >60°C) (<-40°, >60°C)
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
10-23
LPT System (Continued)
10-24
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
<350, >4,500 rpm <350, >4,500 rpm
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
10-25
Lube System (Continued)
10-26
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
High (>689 kPa) SPAM
Lube Supply Pressure Low X <6 psig (<41 kPa) at <15 psig at XN25 9 TS-17
(With/Without Fluctuation) 4,500-7,800 rpm >7,800 rpm SPAM
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Steam Flow Sensor Failure <0, >50,000 pph Position >Schedule SPAM
<0, >22,680 kg/h) +25 psi for
>10 sec
10-27
Thrust Balance Valve System
10-28
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
PTB Demand Error Position >Schedule Position >Schedule Position >Schedule 22 TS-30
+15 psi for >10 sec +50 psi for >1.0 sec +25 psi for >10 sec
or
>Schedule +25 psi
for >2.0 sec
Change 6
PTB Demand Check Position >Schedule Position >Schedule 22 TS-30
+25 psi for >5.0 sec +50 psi for >2.0 sec
PTB and PTBV Sensor |PTB-PTBV|> 15 psi for |PTB-PTBV|> 25 psi for TS-30
Difference 5.0 sec 2.0 sec
Thrust Balance Null Current >null +/-5mA for 5.0 >null +/-15mA for 5.0 TS-30
Shift sec and dXN25/dt sec and dXN25/dt <+/-
<+/-150 rpm 150 rpm
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
10-29
Variable Geometry Systems
10-30
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Change 6
VBV LVDT Failure One Sensor: Both Sensors: 4, 7, 21, TS-23
<-2%, >102% (if XN25 rpm) 22
<-2%, >102%
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
sec
10-31
Vibration Monitoring System
10-32
Step Decel to
Volume I
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
GEK 105059
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
Vibes High, HP Rotor >2.0 in/sec (>5.1 cm/ >3.0 in/sec (>7.6 cm/ TS-26
sec) at 100-200 Hz sec) at 100-200 Hz
(Tracked Core (Tracked Core
Speed) for 4 sec Speed)
Change 6
Vibes High, LP Rotor >1.4 in/sec (3.6 cm/ >2.0 in/sec (5.1cm/ TS-26
sec) peak at sec) peak at
N2ROTOR < 3,000 N2ROTOR < 3,000
or N2ROTOR ≥ 3,580 or N2ROTOR ≥ 3,590
or N25SEL ≥ or N25SEL ≥
N25MAX for 60 min N25MAX
or or
>1.75 in/sec (4.45 >2.5 in/sec (6.35 cm/
cm/sec) peak at sec) peak at 3,000 ≤
3,000 ≤ N2ROTOR < N2ROTOR < 3,590
3,580 and N25SEL < and N25SEL <
N25MAX for 4 sec N25MAX
Water System
Step Decel to
Shutdown or Core–Idle,
Emergency Shutdown Slow Decel to Troubleshooting
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
System/Event Alarm Shutdown 10 Seconds Later Minimum Load Abort Start Notes Reference
The events listed in this section are conditions that are not specifically handled by the engine control system or which are not part of any of the specific engine or package
systems shown previously in the table. These events are either a single symptom or combination of symptoms with no specific set of setpoints that can be monitored by the
control. These events and conditions must be monitored by the operator and corrected as they occur.
The combinations of conditions shown in this section do not cause any sort of alarm or control action to be initiated; however, individual symptoms that are part of any of the
combinations shown here may cause an alarm or control action, just as they normally would when occurring alone (such as low pressure).
Indication of Motoring
10-33
Notes
10-34
1. dPi is defined as the FOD screen pressure drop (dP) value measured at site commissioning.
Volume I
3. Flameout signal is ignored by the control if XN25 is greater than 9,500 rpm; if a flameout has actually occurred, the loss–
of–flame logic will initiate a shutdown when XN25 drops below the 9,500 rpm threshold and a delay of 320 msec.
4. Control system defaults to remaining sensor/element.
Change 6
5. Defaults to fully closed, zero fuel flow position.
6. Defaults to site ambient during start.
7. Torquemotor current is set to zero.
8. Defaults to 665 psia (4,585 kPa).
9. Fuel and NOx valves off, VBV to kicker schedule.
10. Core VIGV torquemotor current defaults to 0mA (VIGVs closed).
11. Control system defaults to T2 = 60°F (16°C).
12. Steam valves must be closed if alarm occurs.
13. Defaults to T25 = 200°F (93°C) if both sensors fail.
14. Defaults to 1,050°F (566°C).
15. Defaults to higher signal (more closed position).
16. Defaults to higher signal (more open position).
17. Sensor loss overridden if XN25R.
18. Contact the packager if optional redundant temperature sensors (four elements per parameter) are used.
19. Alarm limits are based on component capability and may be reduced, consistent with the characteristics of each installation.
For application and site conditions that have the potential for reaching alarm limits under normal load conditions, active
controls must be available to limit fuel flow before operating limits are exceeded.
24. Limits shown are for the two individual signals from any of the eight probes, as specified.
25. Any T48 thermocouple probe reading is rejected from the T48 average calculation if it is:
(1) out of range; T48 <400°F (204°C) or >1,900°F (>1,038°C)
(2) -200°F (128°C) or more below the average; T48 ≤ T48 -200°F (111°C).
26. Reject from spread calculations any thermocouple probe reading that is out of range.
27. These limits apply only at steady state conditions above 9,000 rpm XN25 or 15,000 shp output.
28. Alarm is triggered only if the condition persists for 10 seconds or more after initial detection.
GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
10-35
GEK 105059 LM6000 PC
Volume I GE Industrial AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
Starting stall; slow T48 Excess starting fuel flow SPAM: check calibration
increase plus XN25 hangup of fuel flow
or dropoff
T48 high after lightoff and Acceleration fuel flows SPAM: check PS3 sensor
during first portion of start too high or too low system
cycle VSVs off schedule TS-23
T48 start temperature over
limit VIGVs off schedule TS-23
T48 start temperature over
backup start schedule limit VBVs off schedule TS-23
NOTE Also see TS-9 for HPT/HPT degradation Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of
starting stalls WP 4015 00 specified limits
10-1
10-36 Change 6
T48 rise during normal Leaking fuel shutoff SPAM: close valves, one Turn fuel off
shutdown valve(s) at a time, to isolate faulty Motor engine as
T48 >1,000°F (>538°C) valve required to blow out fire
after shutdown Motor gas generator
with starter and ignition
off until T48 indicates
400°F (204°C) or less.
Do not exceed starter
duty cycle
Replace valves as
required
Borescope HPT per
WP 4015 00 if T48
exceeds 1,000°F
(538°C)
Pressure high Inlet screen clogged Inspect inlet screen Clean screen
with dirt or debris Replace nylon sock
Change 6 10-37
TS-4: Flameout
Symptoms Possible Causes Troubleshooting Corrective Action
No control indications Electrical power supply Inspect engine for loose SPAM: repair/replace
loss piping/joints that may power supply as
have been jarred loose if required
high-power stall occurred
10-38 Change 6
Gas fuel below Tsv limit Sensor system failure SPAM SPAM: inspect fuel
metering valve for
hydrates
Liquid fuel below Twp limit Preheater system If abnormal starting or Replace flow-divider
failure T48 temperatures are valve per WP 1914 00
observed for liquid fuel, Inspect fuel-metering
the liquid flow divider valve for contamination
valve may be
contaminated by fuel
precipitate
SPAM
Pressure High Contaminated Filter Remove and inspect filter Replace filter per
element Determine and correct WP 4010 00
source or cause of NOTE If filter has
contamination gone into bypass,
SPAM
inspect and clean
downstream fuel sys-
tem components
Sensor Failure Sensor system failure SPAM
No pressure indication at Sensor system failure Compare readings with Locate and correct the
XN25 >8,000 rpm Filter in bypass mode previous good data source of contamination
Missing filter element SPAM Clean and flush
downstream
components
SPAM
Change 6 10-39
High temperature High water or liquid fuel SPAM: if temperature Replace hoses,
supply temperature reaches 700°F (371°C) manifolds, fuel nozzles,
limit, inspect hoses and and seals per
piping for signs of appropriate work
discoloration and burning package, as required
TS-9: Stall
Symptoms Possible Causes Troubleshooting Corrective Action
NOTE A starting stall is characterized by a hung start, slow acceleration to idle, lower than
normal fuel manifold pressure (or fuel flow), and higher than normal power turbine inlet temper-
ature (T48). Occasionally, the stall will continue at idle power. A stall at idle can be recognized
by one or a combination of any of the following symptoms: higher than normal T48, higher than
normal fuel manifold pressure, or XN25 does not increase or is sluggish when power is advanced
from idle.
Stall Borescope engine per Replace engine if out of
Starting stall WP 4015 00 borescope inspection
limits
10-40 Change 6
Change 6 10-41
High/over limits Dirty HPC Inspect inlet per Water-wash engine per
WP 4010 00 WP 4014 00
Borescope HPC per
WP 4015 00
10-42 Change 6
Higher T48 reading than VG system off schedule Check VG systems per
previous reading at 100% WPs 1411 00, 1113 00,
power under same 1312 00, and 1313 00
operating conditions; all SPAM
other parameters changed
with T48 T2 sensor failure TS-27
Change 6 10-43
Chip detector alert Sensor system failure Check chip detector per Replace chip detector
WP 4017 00 per WP 1910 00 as
SPAM required
Chip detector failure Sensor system failure Check chip detector per Replace chip detector
WP 4017 00 per WP 1910 00 as
Clean chip detector required
SPAM
10-44 Change 6
Overtemperature: dark oil Low oil level in lube Check oil level Drain, flush clean, and
in tank samples; burned tank service tube/hydraulic
odor; sludge and varnish system and all filters
on oil filter; sludge on chip Clean chip detector as
detector required per SPAM
Refill tanks to correct
level; monitor scavenge
temperature when
operation resumes
Change 6 10-45
High pressure Lube scavenge filter Check lube and scavenge Replace filter as
contaminated filter per WP 4020 00 required
SPAM Determine and correct
cause of contamination
10-46 Change 6
Clogged oil lines and Monitor scavenge oil Clean oil lines
jets, often indicated by temperature and record (Pulling vacuum is one
tendency of pressure to any abnormal acceptable method)
creep upward temperature to isolate Replace engine
problem area. Check all
chip detectors and record
locations of chips before
replacing engine Flow-
test bearing sumps per
WP 4027 00
Change 6 10-47
Low pressure with Obstructed or collapsed Disconnect supply line at Replace supply line
fluctuation (cont'd) oil supply line to pump pump and check flow
Low pressure without External oil leak Inspect for large oil leaks Repair leaks
fluctuation
Internal oil leak Check for high oil Repair or replace
(possible damage to oil consumption engine as required
seals)
10-48 Change 6
No oil pressure Sheared pump shaft Check for XN25 indication Replace pump if XN25
while motoring engine indication is present
Verify lube supply to with no oil pressure and
pump normal oil supply to
pump
Loss of pump prime Check pump inlet line for Fill oil line with oil as
presence of oil required
Change 6 10-49
Oil contamination Maintenance error; lube Contact GE M&I Flush lube and
tank serviced with Customer Service before hydraulic systems
contaminated oil continuing operation Completely drain oil
CAUTION If engine tank and as many
is operated for more service lines as
possible. Service with
than 200 hours with
fresh MIL-L-23699 oil
MIL-L-23699 oil con- and operate the engine
taining more than 5% for 5 minutes at core
mineral oil, significant idle. Shut down the
internal coking may engine, drain the oil
occur tank and lines, and refill
with fresh oil
10-50 Change 6
Oil pump seal drain See figure 10-5 See figure 10-5
leakage
Change 6 10-51
Air in liquid fuel system Advance power and Recheck idle speed
return to idle stability
Accel to maximum power Low fuel flow or no fuel SPAM: check SPAM
not possible flow and fuel pressure - PS3 line to sensor
- PS3 sensor circuit
- Fuel flow vs PS3
schedule
10-52 Change 6
TS-21: Overspeed
Symptoms Possible Causes Troubleshooting Corrective Action
Radial drive shaft failure Attempt manual engine Isolate and replace
rotation from defective drive
maintenance crank pad component per
on aft end of TGB Assy. WPs 2810 00, 2811 00,
View HPC rotor through or 2812 00
borescope port
(WP 4015 00) to see if
HPC rotates
Change 6 10-53
Fuel manifold pressure too Fuel nozzle Check fuel flow; if within Replace fuel nozzles
high or too low at power limits, check fuel nozzles per WP 1510 00 as
SPAM required
10-54 Change 6
Change 6 10-55
10-56 Change 6
Change 6 10-57
10-58 Change 6
Change 6 10-59
10-60 Change 6
Change 6 10-61
High vibes, HP rotor Sensor system failure Perform functional check Repair or replace
High vibes, LP rotor per WP 4024 00 accelerometers as
SPAM required per
WP 1911 00
SPAM
10-62 Change 6
Liquid fuel/water manifold Sensor or cabling Table 10-5, Group 1 Repair or replace as
sensor failure failure, type K Table 10-6 required per WP 1912 00
thermocouple SPAM
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
T48 - Loss of average Sensor or cabling Table 10-5, Group 2 Repair or replace as
reading failure, type K Table 10-7 required per WP 1711 00
T48 - Cold sensor thermocouple SPAM
T48 - Loss of four probes System ground loop Table 10-5, Group 2 Repair or replace as
T48 - Loss of any probe Table 10-6 required per WP 1711 00
T48 - High or over limit SPAM SPAM
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
T25 sensor failure Sensor or cabling Table 10-5, Group 4 Repair or replace as
T25 A/B difference over failure, resistance Table 10-6 required per WP 1310 00
limit temperature detector SPAM
(RTD), see table 10-7
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
Lube supply or scavenge Sensor or cabling Table 10-5, Group 6 Repair or replace as
temperature sensor failure failure, RTD, see Table 10-6 required per WP 1817 00
table 10-8
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
T3/T48 sensors read low/ Improper wiring Use test thermocouple or SPAM: install proper wire
high, decreases or goes - KP/KN reversed trace lines from sensors
negative during light off - Copper wire used to control and verify
proper configuration
Change 6 10-63
XN25 sensor failure Sensor system failure Paragraph 10-3.1 Repair or replace as
XNSD sensor failure and table 10-9 required per
XN25 sensor mismatch Check sensor, wiring, and WPs 1210 00, 1816 00,
XNSD sensor mismatch sensor installation per or 1710 00
WPs 1210 00, 1816 00,
and 1710 00
Signal-conditioning or SPAM
display failure
Flame loss, one sensor (no Dirty sight glass lens Inspect lenses Clean or replace per
flameout) Dirty sensor lens WP 1515 00, as
required
10-64 Change 6
Thrust balance pressure P0, P25, or P48 SPAM: check for leaks
demand check sensors system failure SPAM: check transducer
calibration
XN2 TS-19
T2 TS-27
Thrust balance valve LVDT LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
failure or difference failure WP 1713 00
Torquemotor failure or null LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
current shift failure WP 1713 00
Thrust balance valve LVDT sensor system TS-24 Replace valve per
position error failure WP 1713 00
Change 6 10-65
Thrust balance pressure P48, PTB, PS3, P25, or Check latest measured SPAM
Bearing load > upper limit T2 sensor system values versus last good
failure or calibration values or SPAM
error
Balance piston orifice is Calculate orifice size per Replace orifice per
too large or installed paragraph 10-3A WP 1714 00
incorrectly
Bearing load < lower limit P48, PTB, PS3, P25, or Check latest measured SPAM
T2 sensor system values versus last good
failure or calibration values or SPAM
error
Balance piston orifice is Calculate orifice size per Replace orifice per
too small paragraph 10-3A WP 1714 00
10-66 Change 6
Reduced Power Dirty or damaged low or Trending equation, Water-wash (or hand
Use trending equations to high pressure compressor efficiency clean) and confirm
aid determination of power compressors Borescope per effectiveness with
loss, or compare power VIGVs too closed WP 4015 00 borescope inspection
output on similar inlet per WP 4014 00
condition
(P2 and T2 days)
Change 6 10-67
10-68 Change 6
Engine fails to motor, but Radial drive shaft failure Attempt manual rotation Isolate and replace
control indicates motoring; through maintenance defective drive
rapid increase in indicated crank pad on aft end of component per
motoring speed TGB Assy. View rotor WPs 2810 00, 2811 00,
through borescope port and 2812 00
(WP 4015 00) to see if
HPC rotates
Engine fails to motor/no Seized engine For cold engine, check Attempt another start
indication of motoring rotation with starter or and/or rotation check
with ratchet wrench on after cool down period
TGB Assy maintenance Repair or replace
crank pad engine as required
For a hot engine, any
attempt to motor must be
made within 5 minutes
after shutdown. If the
engine cannot be motored
within 5 minutes, wait the
required 4-hour cooling
period before attempting
again. If the engine turns,
make a normal start. If LP
rotor does not turn by the
time the HP rotor reaches
idle speed, shut down and
try a second start; if the
LP rotor still does not
rotate, shut down and
investigate
Check for binding, rubs,
etc.
Borescope engine per
WP 4015 00
Check chip detectors per
WP 4017 00
Change 6 10-69
Engine fails to motor/no Starter failure Attempt manual engine Service, repair, or
indication of motoring rotation through the replace starter per
(cont'd) gearbox; if engine rotates, WPs 1814 00, 1815 00,
the problem is in the and 4022 00 (GE starter
starter system only)
Transfer gearbox failure If engine will not turn after Replace the transfer
removal of all gearbox per
accessories, remove the WP 2811 00
radial drive shaft per
WP 2810 00. Rotate the
transfer gearbox
Random shutdowns or Wiring ground faults SPAM: check engine to SPAM: correct shielding
failure to start control wiring for improper an/or routing of wiring.
shielding or grounding
10-70 Change 6
TS-32: Emissions
Symptoms Possible Causes Troubleshooting Corrective Action
Change 6 10-71
10-72 Change 6
TBD
Change 6 10-73
TBD
10-74 Change 6
Change 6 10-75
10-76 Change 6
Figure 10-5 Troubleshooting LM6000 High Oil Consumption Due to Gas Turbine Leaks
Change 6 10-77
10-78 Change 6
Change 6 10-79
10-80 Change 6
Change 6 10-81
10-82 Change 6
Change 6 10-83
10-84 Change 6
Change 6 10-85
10-86 Change 6
Figure 10-15 Interfaces ES1/E1 and ES9/E9 (Standard) and ES2/E2 and ES14/E14 (Optional)
Change 6 10-87
10-88 Change 6
Change 6 10-89
10-90 Change 6
Change 6 10-91
10-92 Change 6
Change 6 10-93
10-94 Change 6
Change 6 10-95
10-96 Change 6
Change 6 10-97
10-98 Change 6
Resistance*
(Ohms ±10%)
Reference Component Unless Corrective
Component Figure Interface Pins Specified Action
TBV LVDT 10-23 ES56/E56 3-4, 10-11 90 Primary Replace valve per
5-6, 12-13 70 Sec 1 WP 1713 00
6-7, 13-14 70 Sec 2
VIGV T/M Coil 10-23 N/A 1-2, 8-9 40 Replace valve per
WP 1713 00
VBV T/M Coil 40
VSV T/M Coil 40
TBV T/M Coil 10-23 ES56/E56 1-2 32 (coil only)
VIGV T/M Coil 10-23 N/A 3-4, 10-11 40 Replace valve per
VBV T/M Coil 40 WP 1811 00
VSV T/M Coil 40
TBV T/M Coil 32 (coil only)
Change 6 10-99
10-100 Change 6
Change 6 10-101
Group 4 Sensor 10-15 ES9/E9 (Std) 1-2 Table 10-7 Standard and
RTD or ES14/E14 3-4 Table 10-7 optional
(Opt) sensors each
hour, two
200-ohm at
32°F (0°C)
RTDs in each
probe. Each
probe has an
integral lead
Group 5 Sensor 10-15 ES1/E1 (Std) 1-2 Table 10-4 Standard and
RTD or 3-4 Table 10-4 optional
ES2/E2 (Opt) sensors each
hour, two
200-ohm at
32°F (0°C)
RTDs in each
probe. Each
probe has an
integral lead
10-102 Change 6
Group 6 Sensor 10-16 and ES19/E19 1-2 Table 10-8 Standard and
RTD 10-19 (Std) or ES17/ 3-4 Table 10-8 optional
E17 (Opt) sensors each
hour, two
200-ohm at
32°F (0°C)
RTDs in each
probe. Each
probe has an
integral lead
Table 10-6 Cable Circuit Resistance Values at Room Temperature (or as Specified in Table)
(ft) KP KN
Change 6 10-103
-20 -4 184
0 32 200
20 68 215
40 104 232
60 140 250
NOTE All listed pins to ground > 100 kilo-ohm
-40.0 -40.0 84
-17.8 0.0 92
10-104 Change 6
Component Temperature
Lube Oil RTDs 220°F (104°C)
XN2 Speed Sensors 140°F (60°C)
XN25 Speed Sensors 225°F (107°C)
XNSD Speed Sensors (Connector) 600°F (316°C)
Variable Stator Vane Actuators 350°F (177°C)
LPC Bleed Valve Actuators 300°F (149°C)
Accelerometer 500°F (260°C)
T48 Sensor (At Lugs) 600°F (316°C)
T3 Sensor (At Connector) 600°F (316°C)
VIGV Actuators 350°F (177°C)
VG Hydraulic Pump and Control Unit 220°F (104°C)
Lube Pump 300°F (149°C)
Starter 250°F (121°C)
Electrical Cable Panel No. 1 400°F (204°C)
Electrical Cable Panel No. 2 400°F (204°C)
Electrical Cable Panel No. 3 400°F (204°C)
Electrical Cable Panel No. 4 500°F (260°C)
Chip Detectors 350°F (177°C)
Balance Piston Air Valve 500°F (260°C)
UV Flame Detectors (GE Supplied) 302°F (150°C)
Thrust Balance Valve 250°F (121°C)
Change 6 10-105
10-106 Change 6
4 CHAPTER 11
Maintenance Considerations
11-1 Purpose and Scope 11-3 Standard Maintenance
Practices
This chapter covers basic maintenance and
inspection practices and procedures to be fol- 11-3.1 Points of Reference
lowed during maintenance operations.
The following points of reference are used
11-2 Levels of Maintenance throughout this manual: forward, aft, right,
left, top, bottom, and clock position. These
The workscope for level 1 corrective mainte- points of reference are defined as follows:
nance allows replacement of external parts,
adjustments, and other work (preventive and Forward - the air intake end of the engine
corrective) up to and including removal and
replacement of the entire engine. Aft - the turbine end of the engine
The workscope for level 2 corrective mainte- Right - the right side of the engine when
nance permits the replacement of major viewed from the aft end and when the engine
engine sections (modules) and the replace- is in the normal operating position (gearbox
ment or repair of certain internal parts. Level 2 down)
maintenance is performed on-site on a nonin-
stalled engine or on an installed engine in the Left - the side opposite the right side
enclosure, as permitted by the enclosure
Top - the side of the engine that is up when the
design. Maintenance is performed with the
engine is in the normal operating position
engine horizontal. See Volume II.
Bottom - the side of the engine on which the
gearboxes are mounted
Change 6 11-1
11-3.2 Maintenance Within an NOTE Most of the tasks outlined can be done
Enclosure within the enclosure if the horizontal mainte-
nance option is selected, provided that tooling
WARNING When entering the gas turbine is available. Deviations from the procedures in
enclosure, the following requirements shall the Volume II work packages are permitted as
be met: necessary to adapt to the needs dictated by the
enclosure design, provided that these devia-
• The gas turbine shall be shut down.
tions do not compromise the intent of the
• Module entry during engine operation instruction. Some modular change-out may be
is prohibited in general. If entry should done within the enclosure and some outside,
be required during engine operation, whichever is more convenient. Consult the
contact GE Field Service for a represen- packager for planning assistance when ques-
tative who is trained to enter the module tions arise.
under such conditions. Observe all safety precautions listed below, as
well as those listed in Chapters 1 and 8.
WARNING The fire extinguishing system
must be deactivated before personnel enter a. Wear protective clothing, gloves, safety
the enclosure. Suffocation can occur if the glasses, etc. as required by the mainte-
fire extinguishing system is activated. nance to be performed.
WARNING The following steps must be b. Ensure the engine will not be started while
performed before entering the enclosure. personnel are inside the enclosure.
These conditions must be maintained while
inside the enclosure to prevent injury to c. Post an observer at the exit while mainte-
personnel. nance is being performed inside the enclo-
sure.
CAUTION All hardware items have been
manufactured to English measurement units. WARNING Electrical power to system on
Use of substitute metric sizes is not recom- which maintenance is being performed
mended and will void the warranty for inter- must be turned off to prevent arcing and
facing parts. Tools in metric sizes should be possible injury to personnel or damage to
furnished with suitable adapters to mate with components. Tag the switch “Out of Service
English measurement unit sizes given. Lim- for Maintenance” to prevent inadvertent
its, fits, and clearances may be interpreted in activation.
either English or metric units, as shown in
the tables. d. Turn off all electrical power, liquid, and air
service to system on which maintenance is
to be performed. Allow the engine to cool.
(2) Close the enclosure door. a. Torque values are expressed in lb in.
(pound-inches) or lb ft. (pound-feet). One
(3) Remove tag and turn on electrical pound-inch (or one pound-foot) is the
power, and liquid and air services. twisting force of one pound applied to a
twist-type fastener (such as a bolt or nut)
11-3.3 Electrical Bonding Straps with 1 inch (or one foot) of leverage. This
twisting force is applied to the fastener to
Electrical bonding strap contact surfaces shall secure the components.
be prepared by removing all anoxic film,
grease, paint, lacquer, or other high-resistance b. It is important to use the correct torque
material from an area at least one and one-half wrench for the amount of torque being
times the bonding surface contact area. Bonds applied. See table 11-1 for torque wrench
shall be installed and contact surfaces sealed ranges and requirements.
within 4 hours of cleaning. The area shall then
be painted to match the surrounding area. CAUTION If torque should increase signifi-
cantly prior to final seating of any threaded
11-3.4 Torque fastener, remove and inspect the fastener for
the cause of the torque increase.
In these maintenance procedures, it is assumed
that all threaded parts on the engine will be c. Never over-torque any fastener. Torque
tightened to a specific torque value. Special limits are provided in the text and in
torque values, if required, will be stated in the tables 11-2 through 11-5; these limits must
text; otherwise, standard torque values should be observed. Refer to paragraph 11-3.4.4
be used. for application information.
140 - 550 lb in. (15.8 - 62.1 N·m) 0 - 600 lb in. (0 - 67.2 N·m)
Change 6 11-3
Table 11-2 Torque Values for Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Self-Locking Nuts
Torque Value
Size Threads Per Inch lb in. N·m
8 32 13-16 1.5-1.8
10 24 20-23 2.3-2.5
1/4 20 40-60 4.5-6.8
5/16 18 70-110 7.9-12.4
3/8 16 160-210 18.1-23.7
7/16 14 250-320 28.2-36.2
1/2 13 420-510 47.5-57.6
8 36 16-19 1.8-2.1
10 32 33-37 3.7-4.2
1/4 28 55-70 6.2-7.9
5/16 24 100-130 11.3-14.7
3/8 24 190-230 21.5-26.0
7/16 20 300-360 33.9-40.6
1/2 20 480-570 54.2-64.4
Tube OD Fitting
(inches) Dash No. Torque Value
1/8 2 40-50 lb in. (4.5-5.6 N·m)
3/16 3 90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m)
1/4 4 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m)
5/16 5 155-175 lb in. (17.5-19.8 N·m)
3/8 6 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m)
1/2 8 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m)
5/8 10 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m)
3/4 12 45-50 lb ft (61.0-67.8 N·m)
1 16 58-70 lb ft (78.6-94.9 N·m)
1-1/4 20 75-87 lb ft (102-118 N·m)
1-1/2 24 83-100 lb ft (113-136 N·m)
11-1
11-4 Change 6
Table 11-4 Torque Values for Tubing Nuts and Hose Fittings
lb ft N·m lb ft N·m
Change 6 11-5
Table 11-5 Torque Values for Plugs and Unions Used in Bosses and for Universal Bulkhead Fitting Locknuts
11-6 Change 6
11-3.4.1 Tightening Procedures e. Washers are installed beneath the part that
turns when tightening, unless otherwise
CAUTION When chilling or heating an specified.
engine part during assembly, do not torque
spanner nuts, locknuts, or retaining bolts f. The torque wrenches listed in table 11-1
until the part has returned to room tempera- are recommended for use within the indi-
ture. The fastener may loosen as the part cated ranges. Larger wrenches have too
cools or may be overstressed as the part great a tolerance and can result in inaccu-
warms and expands. racies.
a. If possible, tighten at a uniformly increas- g. Torque values specified in this manual are
ing rate until the desired torque is actual values to be applied to fasteners.
obtained. In cases where gaskets or other Whenever an adapter (crowfoot, spanner
parts cause a slow permanent set, be sure wrench, etc.) is used with a torque wrench,
to hold the torque at the desired value until torque must be calculated per figure 11-2.
the material is seated.
h. Inspect all nuts and bolts after tightening
b. Apply uniform torque to a series of bolts to make sure they are seated. If any nut or
that have different diameters and are bolt is not seated after the required torque
installed on one flange or in one area. has been applied, remove and inspect for
Torque shall be less than the final torque thread damage.
required for the smallest diameter bolt.
This prevents shearing or breaking of tight i. Lubricate tube/hose connector threads and
bolts due to force concentrations. between the B-nut and ferrule of a connec-
tor. Run B-nuts onto fittings by hand to
c. It is not desirable to tighten to the final ensure that tubes and hoses are aligned and
torque value during the first drawdown; threads are free of burrs. Two wrenches
uneven tension can cause distortion or must be used when loosening or tightening
overstressing of parts. Torque mating parts B-nuts, one on the fitting to which the tube
by tightening the bolts or nuts gradually or hose is being connected to hold it sta-
until the parts are firmly seated. Loosen tionary and one on the B-nut for torquing.
each fastener by one-quarter turn, then This not only prevents twisting the tube,
apply final tightening. Tightening in a dia- but also prevents loosening or overtighten-
metrically opposite (staggered) sequence ing the fitting. When using an extension on
is desirable in most cases (figure 11-1). Do a torque wrench, calculate the correct
not exceed listed maximum torque values. torque input before applying torque per
figure 11-2.
d. All bolts are installed with heads forward
11-2
and up with nuts aft and down, unless oth-
erwise specified.
Change 6 11-7
11-8 Change 6
Refer to table 11-6 for minimum breakaway Prior to retightening, examine the fastener for
torque on self-locking nuts. This table applies the cause of the looseness. If safety wire is
to silver-plated, lubricated, and nonlubricated missing, tighten to the required torque and
self-locking nuts. Values given are for nuts safety-wire the fastener. If the fastener has a
with no axial load. To check minimum break- self-locking feature, check breakaway torque
away torque, screw the nut onto a bolt until per the preceding step. Replace defective fas-
two to five threads are exposed beyond the teners as required.
nut. Measure the amount of torque required to
11-3.4.4 Standard Torque
turn the nut on or off the bolt. Nuts that do not
meet these minimum frictional requirements Use the following standard torque tables,
should be replaced. unless otherwise directed in the text.
Table 11-6 Minimum Running Torque for Self-
a. Use the torque values given in table 11-2
Locking Nuts
for steel bolts and nuts (including self-
Minimum Breakaway Torque locking nuts). Values given are for clean
bolts and nuts that are free of nicks and
Threads/
Size Inch lb in. N·m burrs.
0.136 (6) 32/40 1.0 0.1 b. Use half the value given in table 11-2 for
the following applications:
0.164 (8) 32/36 1.5 0.2
0.190 (10) 32 2.0 0.2 (1) Thin steel hex nuts - These nuts have
a height of less than 0.60 inch (15.2
1/4 28 3.5 0.4
mm) of the inside diameter for plain
5/16 24 6.5 0.7 nuts and less than 0.80 inch (20.3
mm) of the inside diameter for self-
3/8 24 9.5 1.1
locking nuts.
7/16 24 14.0 1.6
(2) Nonsteel nuts and bolts except
1/2 20 18.0 2.0
titanium.
9/16 18 32.0 3.6
(3) All bolts threaded directly into alumi-
5/8 18 50.0 5.6 num, magnesium, or other non-steel
3/4 16 50.0 5.6 parts.
Change 6 11-9
11-10 Change 6
Tri-wing recessed-head fasteners are available b. Ensure the axis of the drive is aligned with
in a wide range of sizes, and each size requires the axis of the fastener when installing or
the use of a matched driver. See figure 11-4. removing the fastener. If the head of the
When properly used, the tri-wing design per- fastener has been coated with paint or
mits a higher ratio of torque to end-pressure other material, use a driver one size
than is possible with slotted-head or cross- smaller than that indicated, to compensate
head designs, minimizing burring and mutila- for the thickness of material on the walls
tion. The following procedures should be used of the recess.
for tri-wing fasteners.
11-3.5.2 Extraction
11-3.5.1 Installation
a. There is no slope to the walls of mating
surfaces of either fastener or driver, so that
a. Select the correct driver. The driver num-
the tendency of the driver to slip out of the
ber should match the recess number of the recess is minimized. Normal extraction by
fastener head as shown in figure 11-4. applying counterclockwise torque is usu-
Table 11-7 lists a range of standard fas- ally successful.
tener sizes with their corresponding tri-
Change 6 11-11
11-12 Change 6
Change 6 11-13
11-14 Change 6
Change 6 11-15
• The maximum span of safety wire • When removing safety wire, identify
between tension points shall be 6 inches safety-wiring holes on parts.
(152 mm), unless otherwise specified.
Where multiple groups are safety-wired 11-3.7.2 Safety Wire Installation
either by the double-twist or the single-
strand method, the maximum number in a The following safety-wiring procedures are to
series shall be determined by the number be used throughout the engine:
of units that can be safety-wired with a 24-
a. Insert the safety wire through the first part
inch (610 mm) length of wire. When
and bend the upper end either over the
safety-wiring widely spaced multiple
head of the part or around it. If bent around
groups with the double-twist method, the
it, the direction of wrap and twist of the
maximum number in a series shall be three
strands shall be such that the loop around
units.
the part comes under the strand protruding
• Both 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) and 0.032-inch from the hole. Done this way, the loop will
(0.81 mm) safety wires are used through- not tend to slip upward and become slack.
out the engine. The application is deter-
b. Twist the strands while taut until the
mined by the size of the hole in the unit to
twisted portion is just short of the nearest
be safety-wired. Whenever possible, use
hole in the next part. The twisted portion
the 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) safety wire.
should be within 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) of the
Only new safety wire shall be used in each
hole in each part.
application.
c. If the free strand is to be bent around the
• The safety wire shall be pulled taut while
head of the second part, insert the upper
being twisted, and shall have 9 to 12 twists
strand through the hole in this part, then
per inch (25 mm) for 0.020 inch (0.51
repeat the previous step. If the free strand
mm) diameter wire and 7 to 10 twists per
is to be bent over the unit, the direction of
inch for 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) diameter
twist is unimportant. If there are more than
wire.
two units in the series, repeat the preced-
• Hose and electrical coupling nuts shall be ing steps.
safety-wired in the same manner as tube
d. After wiring the last part, continue twist-
coupling nuts.
ing the wire to form a pigtail of three to
• Caution must be exercised while twisting eight twists (1/4-1/2 inch [6-13 mm] long)
to keep the wire tight without overstress- and cut off the excess wire. Bend the pig-
ing it or allowing it to become nicked, tail inward toward the part in such a man-
kinked, or otherwise mutilated. ner as to prevent it from becoming a
hazard to personnel.
• Only existing safety wire should be
replaced; do not add safety wire which
was not previously in place or specified in
text.
11-16 Change 6
NOTE Apply light finger pressure at the mid- h. When removing safety wire, ensure that all
point of the safety wire span, and flex the wire pieces are removed to prevent them from
in both directions to check for tautness. entering engine parts or otherwise causing
damage.
e. If the safety wire is not taut after safety-
wiring per the preceding instructions, use 11-3.8 Safety Cable
the limits shown in table 11-8 to determine
its acceptability. Safety cable is an alternative to safety wire.
Safety cable is installed through two or more
f. If the safety wire fails to meet the limits parts in such a way that as the fastener or part
shown in table 11-8, remove it and install loosens the safety cable will tighten. When the
new safety wire. safety cable tightens, it will not permit the fas-
tener to part or turn.
Table 11-8 Installed Safety Wire Flex Limit
Change 6 11-17
• Where possible, install the safety cable so NOTE Keep the safety cable as straight as
it does not touch other parts. possible when you safety cable the fasteners
or parts together.
• Make sure the cable is not damaged or
bent when installing safety cable through b. Put the end of the cable without the cable
the holes in the fastener or part. Frayed end fitting into the hole in the part. Pull the
cable assemblies are not permitted. cable through the hole until the cable end
fitting is against the part.
• Install the safety cable through existing
holes only. c. Insert the end of the cable through the sec-
ond part. Choose the hole in the part that
• Unless specified differently in the pack- permits the cable to be as straight as possi-
ager's manual: ble. Pull the cable through the second part.
If three parts must be safety cabled, do the
The maximum length of the safety cable same procedure for the third part.
between safety cabled parts is 6.0 inches
(152.4 mm). NOTE On a two bolt pattern, do not cable in
a negative pull direction. Make sure the cable
No more than three bolts can be safely tied has a positive or neutral pull.
with one safety cable.
d. Put the end of the safety cable coming out
Safety cable can not be used on titanium of the last part to be safety cabled through
fasteners. a ferrule in the ferrule magazine. Pull the
safety cable through the ferrule and use the
11-3.8.2 Crimping Tool Verification safety cable to pull the ferrule out of the
ferrule magazine.
Do a pulloff load test as necessary to make
sure the crimp done by the crimping tool e. Put the end of the safety cable through the
meets the necessary requirements. GE Aircraft crimping head of the crimping tool. Make
Engines recommends the pulloff load test be sure the large hole in the crimping head is
done at the beginning, middle, and end of each on the same side as the ferrule. Move the
shift. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for crimping tool along the safety cable until
pulloff load test procedure. the crimping head is against the ferrule.
Pull back on the retraction knob. Put the
11-3.8.3 Safety Cable Installation
ferrule in the crimping head and release
a. Do a visual inspection of the holes to be the retraction knob. Make sure the ferrule
safety cabled to find all damage. If the is fully in the crimping head.
hole is damaged, replace the part, or if
possible, use another hole to safety cable.
11-18 Change 6
CAUTION Do not put too much tension on m. Push against the safety cable with light
the safety cable. The crimping tool will auto- finger pressure halfway between the safety
matically set the tension. Too much tension cabled parts. If the cable feels loose, do a
will break the safety cable. dimensional check to make sure the safety
cable is serviceable as follows (see
f. Pull the safety cable to the tension post on figure 11-6):
the crimping tool. Wrap the cable com-
pletely around the post. Make sure the (1) Measure the distance between the
cable is in the groove at the top of the post. safety cabled parts. Write this mea-
Pull the cable toward the drive handle until surement down as Dimension A. If
the cable goes behind the locking ball. three parts are safety cabled together,
measure the distance between each of
g. Hold the crimping tool perpendicular to the parts and add the two measure-
the cable in the bolt head. Make sure the ments together to get Dimension A.
ferrule is tightly against the bolt head.
Lightly pull on the end of the safety cable (2) Push against the safety cable with
to remove slack. light finger pressure halfway between
two safety cabled parts. Measure the
h. Push the start cycle button and turn the distance the safety cable moves later-
drive handle clockwise. At the start of the ally. Write this measurement down as
cycle, the tension block will move back- Dimension C.
wards. This movement backwards pro-
vides the cable tension. When the drive (3) Compare the dimensions that were
handle is turned, release the start cycle written down to the limits given in
button. Turn the drive handle until it stops figure 11-6.
(approximately two full turns).
CAUTION Do not try to break the safety
i. Pull up on the safety cable end to remove cable. If the safety cable must be removed,
it from the tension block. cut the safety cable to avoid damage to the
holes in the parts.
j. Pull back on the retraction knob and
remove the crimping tool from the n. If the safety cable is not in the limits given
crimped ferrule and the remaining safety in figure 11-6, cut the safety cable with
cable. wire cutters and remove the installed
safety cable. Install new safety cable.
k. Cut the unused safety cable even with the
11-6
crimped ferrule. Use the side cushioned 11-3.9 Correction of Leaks
cutters. Discard the unused safety cable.
CAUTION Do not over-torque threaded fas-
l. Visually inspect safety cable for kinks, teners as a method of correcting leaking con-
frayed wires, or improper crimps. Remove nections. Over-torquing could result in part
and replace safety cable if a problem failure.
exists.
a. Disassemble the connection.
Change 6 11-19
11-20 Change 6
b. Discard the seal, gasket, or packing, if Make sure all ports, openings, connec-
present. tions, and mating surfaces are capped or
covered, and that the part is protected from
c. Inspect mating surfaces for contamination, potential handling or environmental dam-
scratches, dents, or other surface defects. age.
d. Inspect threaded fasteners for thread dam- f. Bearings shall be handled per paragraph
age and ensure that fasteners seat properly 11-3.20 in this chapter.
when torqued to specified values.
11-3.11 Jackscrews
e. Replace nonserviceable parts and assem-
ble the connection, using new seals, gas- a. When using jackscrews to remove compo-
kets, or packing as required. nents, do not bend flanges or strip threads.
Lubricate jackscrews with engine lube oil
11-3.10 Unpacking and Repacking before installing. Turn jackscrews inward
evenly and in small increments. Always
The following general instructions apply dur- check for and remove burrs or rough edges
ing unpacking and repacking to minimize pos- before using jackscrews. If regular bolts
sible part damage and contamination. are used as jackscrews, the tips must be
blunt and polished. Do not allow compo-
a. Initially, remove only that portion of the nents to fall free as jackscrews are tight-
packing material necessary to mount the ened.
part. Where possible, remove the remain-
der of the packing material, including b. Jackscrew holes are often in flanges that
protective caps and plugs, one at a time as are only thick enough for three or four
each connection (fluid, air, or electrical) is threads. The ends of most standard bolts
made. are chamfered, and the first couple of
threads are missing or incomplete. These
b. Retain protective caps and plugs and reus- should not be used as jackscrews without
able packing components for repacking modification, since only one or two
purposes. threads will engage and the threads in the
flange are likely to strip.
c. Install a cap or plug on each connection
(fluid, air, or electrical) as it is discon- c. Jackscrews, frequently designed as special
nected. tools and identified as such, are not cham-
fered and full thread engagement will
d. When possible, repack the part for storage
occur. If specially manufactured jack-
or shipment, using the same packing mate-
screws are not available and must be man-
rial in which the replacement part was
ufactured locally, be sure that the ends are
received.
ground to remove the chamfer and the
e. When original packing components are incomplete thread so that the maximum
not available, use locally available packing number of threads may be engaged.
materials and containers to pack the part.
Change 6 11-21
11-3.12 Protective Closures and Caps f. Reinstall the fitting and screw it down to
its final position.
a. Preventing foreign material from lodging
in drilled passages, fuel lines, oil lines, air Union
lines, and open engine ports is extremely
important. Machined surfaces must be a. Lubricate the packing and roll it over the
properly protected to prevent damage. threads into the groove in the union.
b. Wrap precision parts and cap or plug all b. Screw the union into the boss until the
openings and connections. It is most packing contacts the surface of the boss.
important that all engine parts be kept
clean and free of corrosion. All instruc- c. Tighten the union to the proper torque
tions that specify special handling of parts value.
must be followed without exception.
Bulkhead fitting
c. Accessories, tubes, and hoses may contain
a. Lubricate the fitting end. Screw the nut
fuel or oil at the time of removal. Drain
onto the fitting until the washer face of the
these fluids from the accessory being
nut is aligned with the upper corner of the
removed and cap all connecting hoses or
seal groove.
tubes. Do not use tape.
b. Lubricate the packing and roll it over the
d. Do not remove plugs, caps, etc., until the
threads into the groove in the fitting so that
part is ready for assembly. Check both
it contacts the nut.
seating surfaces for removal of plugs, etc.
prior to assembly. c. Screw the fitting and nut simultaneously
into the boss until the seal contacts the
11-3.13 Universal Fittings
chamfer at the face of the boss and the nut
Universal fittings should be installed accord- contacts the boss.
ing to the procedures described below (figure
d. Position the fitting either by turning in as
11-3).
much as three-quarters of a turn (270°
Pipe fitting clockwise) or turning out as much as one-
quarter turn (90° counterclockwise).
a. Inspect the fitting visually. Attach the line to the fitting and check the
alignment of the fitting. Tighten the nut to
b. Clean if necessary. the proper torque.
d. Install the fitting, screwing it down to a. Lubricate the male threads of the fitting,
within one-half turn of final position. the backup ring, and the packing.
e. Remove the fitting, clean, inspect, and b. Screw the nut onto the fitting, with the
lubricate the male thread. counterbore side facing the fitting end.
11-22 Change 6
c. Put the backup ring on the fitting and seat d. Mating flanges, tube flanges, and cou-
it in the counterbore of the nut, with its plings shall be wiped clean to make sure
convex side facing the fitting end. that a good seal will be obtained.
d. Roll the packing over the threads into the e. Hands and gloves must be clean when
groove in the fitting. handling machined surfaces.
e. Adjust the nut so the backup ring forces f. The engine shall not be used as a shelf for
the packing firmly against the lower holding tools or parts while maintenance is
threaded portion of the fitting. being performed.
f. Screw the fitting and nut simultaneously g. After performing any maintenance, the
into the boss until the packing contacts the work area shall be thoroughly inspected
chamfer at the face of the boss. for loose parts, rags, tools, and other mate-
rials. The area shall be cleaned to remove
g. Hold the nut and turn the fitting one-and- grit, dust, chips, safety wire, and other
a-half turns into the boss. The fitting may small objects.
be positioned further by one additional
turn. 11-3.15 Gaskets and Packing
h. Attach the line to the fitting and check the a. Gaskets, packing, key washers, and cotter
alignment of the fitting. pins shall not be reused, unless otherwise
specified.
i. Hold the fitting and tighten the nut to the
proper torque. b. Gaskets and packing shall be lightly lubri-
cated with engine lube oil prior to installa-
11-3.14 Cleanliness tion, unless otherwise specified. Ensure
parts are properly seated. When a fitting
Cleanliness is important for equipment life with a jamnut and packing is used, see fig-
and proper operation. The major cause of pre- ure 11-3 for the proper installation proce-
mature engine removal is foreign object dam- dure. See figure 11-7 for packing used
age (FOD). with flexible sleeve type fittings.
a. The enclosure must be kept clean and free 11-7
11-3.16 Tubes
of dirt and loose objects. It is recom-
mended that small FOD containers be kept When installing tubes, the following precau-
in the work area or in tool boxes. tions and instructions apply. See figure 11-7.
b. All parts shall be inspected for cleanliness a. As tubes are installed, tighten all
before being installed. end-fittings and clamps finger-tight. After
a complete system is installed, torque
c. Gaskets and packing shall be free from
end-fittings first and then clamps.
dirt, lint, and/or grit.
Change 6 11-23
11-24 Change 6
Change 6 11-25
11-26 Change 6
Change 6 11-27
11-28 Change 6
CAUTION Ball and roller bearings require At the point where bearings are accessible in
special care to prevent corrosion. Bearings the disassembly cycle, the bearings shall be
must not be handled with bare hands nor thoroughly covered with lubricating oil,
with any device that might cause contamina- MIL-C-6085.
tion. Clean rubber or nylon gloves or a pro-
tective hand cream shall be used at all times Use of engine lubricating oil as a lubricant or
when handling bearings. preservative is specifically prohibited.
Change 6 11-29
• Use thermal gloves when you move or b. Immediately after installation of a chilled
touch hot or cold parts. Hot or cold bearing, apply heat with a heat gun until
parts can cause injury. bearing and adjacent parts are brought to
room temperature. Remove any moisture
• When using compressed air for clean- using clean, dry shop air, and coat
ing, cooling, or drying, do not exceed 30 the bearing with corrosion preventive,
psig. Wear eye protection and do not MIL-C-6529, Type III.
direct compressed air at self or others.
11-30 Change 6
c. Heat bearings using ovens or heat guns. CAUTION Do not repair titanium parts
No direct heat source, such as a blow with tools, such as grinding wheels, files,
torch, may be used. When the bearing stones, or emery cloth, that have been used to
returns to room temperature, coat with cor- repair other types of metal. Damage to parent
rosion preventive, MIL-C-6529, Type III. metal could occur.
11-3.21 Spray Shields • Defects more than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)
apart shall be blended separately. Those
Spray shields shall be positioned on tubing so less than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) apart (except
as to prevent fluid from spraying on the engine splines) shall be blended together. Splines
if a leak occurs at the shielded area of a tube. that are closer together than 0.25 inch
(6.4 mm) and defects shall be repaired sep-
11-3.22 Blending arately.
NOTE Refer to specific engine manual sec- • The finish on the blended area must be as
tion or service bulletin for blend limits for the close as possible to the original finish of
piece part under review. Use the limits in this the part.
procedure only when no specific limits are 11-3.22.2 Hand Blending
specified for the component in the engine man-
ual or appropriate service bulletin. Sharp edges can be blended out using abrasive
stones or papers, files, or crocus cloth. Coarse
Blending is a repair procedure that is used to grades of abrasives or files may be used for
remove stress concentrations caused by nicks, fast metal removal, but the parts must then be
scratches, or other sharp-edged damage marks given a smooth surface finish with fine grades
on critical parts. Removal of the material sur- of abrasives or crocus cloth.
rounding the stress concentration, so that the WARNING Do not breathe the particles
sharp edges are blended into smooth contour,
from grinding or let the particles touch you.
relieves the stress concentration and permits The particles can cause damage, injury, or
further use of the part by lessening the danger irritation to you. Use personal protection
of cracking. equipment. Use local mechanical exhaust
ventilation or an approved respirator.
Blending is also used to remove sharp edges
resulting from machining, drilling, etc., and to NOTE Refer to the inspection and repair lim-
restore the original contour and/or surface fin- its for specific instructions on blending limits
ish to parts that have been repaired by weld- applicable to each part of the engine.
ing, brazing, etc.
a. When blending compressor rotor blades,
11-3.22.1 Blending General Practices stator vanes, turbine blades, and similar
parts, blend in a radial direction in relation
The following rules for blending shall be
to the engine. Avoid removing metal from
observed, unless specific instructions to the
leading and trailing edges of airfoil sec-
contrary are given in the text:
tions in such a way that the edges become
thin or sharp; blend so as to maintain
approximately the original contour.
Change 6 11-31
b. When blending a cylindrical part, blend in a. Rough out defects using coarse grades of
a circumferential direction, not along the resilient flexible abrasive impregnated
axis of the part. wheels, brushes, or points. Use fine or
extra fine grades to finish the blend areas.
c. The finish on the blended area shall be as
close to the original finish as possible. b. Follow the requirements described-in
d. When blending on a part involving a paragraph 11-3.22.2 when doing power
radius, keep the radius as specified in the blending.
repair section. If the radius is not speci-
c. Etch reworked area per paragraph 11-3.23
fied, keep it as close as possible to the
and inspect by spot fluorescent-penetrant
original contour. Refer to a similar part, if
method, per paragraph 11-3.24, after
necessary, to determine original radius.
blending.
e. Etch reworked area per paragraph 11-3.23
11-3.22.4 Component Specific
and inspect by spot fluorescent-penetrant
Requirements
method, per paragraph 11-3.24, after
blending. NOTE Requirements in specific engine man-
11-3.22.3 Power Blending ual section or appropriate service bulletin take
precedence over the following procedures. The
Blending on most parts may be done by using requirements in this section should be used
a power-driven polishing wheel or rubber- with engine manual or service bulletin criteria
bonded abrasive points, and any special or when no criteria are specified.
instructions for the individual part must be fol-
lowed. a. Blending Airfoils.
WARNING Do not breathe the particles (1) The types of airfoil damage described
from grinding or let the particles touch you. below may be repaired by hand blend-
The particles can cause damage, injury, or ing or by power blending. Always
irritation to you. Use personal protection refer to applicable part inspection
equipment. Use local mechanical exhaust paragraph for a description of airfoil
ventilation or an approved respirator. defect limits as follows:
CAUTION Power blending of airfoil sec- (a) Nick – A V-shaped depression in
tions may be done only when specified by
the airfoil made by a sharp-edge
individual part instructions. When doing
object pushing the metal inward.
power blending, be sure to avoid building up
excessive heat and resulting thermal stresses (b) Pit – A round sharp-edged hole
in the part. with a rounded bottom caused by
NOTE After power blending of a titanium corrosion.
part is completed, hand-blend the same area
approximately 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) deeper to (c) Scratch – A V-shaped line or fur-
remove any residual stresses in the surface row in the airfoil such as would
material. be made by dragging a sharp
object across the surface.
11-32 Change 6
(d) Dent – A smooth rounded depres- (c) Defects more than 0.25 inch
sion in the airfoil made by impact (6.4 mm) apart shall be blended
with a rounded object. If there is separately; those 0.25 inch
any noticeable sharp discontinu- (6.4 mm) or less apart may be
ity in the depression, it should be blended together. All blends must
considered as a nick. Waviness of have a minimum radius of
leading or trailing edges is to be 0.25 inch (6.4 mm). The total
treated as a dent. reduction in chord width may be
taken on either side or divided
(e) Erosion – A sand- or shot-blast- between the sides. The amount of
ing effect on the leading edges or rework is controlled by the mini-
the leading portion of the con- mum chord width limit. The min-
cave side caused by sand or dust imum allowable chord is given
going through the engine. for root and tip of airfoil, the min-
imum chord at other points is
(f) Torn Metal – A separation or proportional. To minimize the
pulling apart of material by force, possibility of an engine stall,
leaving jagged edges. keep the shape of the blended air-
foil leading edge as close as pos-
(2) Hand-blending of airfoils may be sible to the original contour (see
done as specified below: figure 11-12).
(a) Blending is done to remove stress (d) Blending limits are given as
caused by nicks, pits, and depth dimensions to make it eas-
scratches to prevent blade failure. ier to see how much can be
Remove high metal and repaired. Experience has shown
straighten dents (where permit- that depth limits are used for
ted) to restore the airfoil shape as most rework. However, the mini-
closely as possible to its' original mum chord limit is the most
aerodynamic contour. important dimension; it should be
checked in borderline cases or
(b) Blending shall be finished with
where previous rework is evident
fine stone or crocus cloth.
in the same area. For conve-
Coarser tools may be used for ini-
nience, the depth limits and mini-
tial removal of material. Finish
mum chord limits are given in
blending in a direction along the
both decimals and fractions. In
length of the blade or vane and
borderline cases where depth lim-
remove all evidence of marks
its and minimum chord limits
across the airfoil that may have
conflict with one another, use the
been made during initial blend-
decimal minimum chord dimen-
ing.
sion to decide if the part is usable.
11-12
Change 6 11-33
(e) Defect limits are given as depth on penetrant where air passages
dimensions since this is the are present to prevent excessive
dimension that affects strength. penetrant entrapment.
However, accurate depth mea-
surements require special equip- (3) Power-blending of rotor blades, vari-
ment not normally available. able vanes, and vane segments may be
Comparing the depth of a defect done as follows:
with the thickness of a leaf of
thickness gage or with the thick- (a) To avoid damaging the airfoil,
ness of a piece of safety wire is a use masking tape and mask off
reasonably accurate way of mea- the airfoil next to the rework area.
suring depth (see figure 11-13).
(b) Use coarse grade, silicon-carbide
11-13 impregnated rubber wheels and
(f) Swab etch reworked area per
points for the initial benching of
paragraph 11-3.23 and spot-fluo-
the blades and vanes.
rescent-penetrant inspect per
paragraph 11-3.24. Brush or swab
11-34 Change 6
NOTE During finish blending of defects, (f) Carefully inspect the blades and
make a radius on both the leading and trailing vanes.
edges of the airfoil. To do this, apply light
pressure with the rubberized abrasive wheel, b. Blending Minor Indications in Tubing.
and let the cushion action of the wheel do both
(1) Use a fine abrasive stone, a small file,
the blending of the radius and the buffing of
emery cloth, or crocus cloth for blend-
the defect.
ing.
(c) Finish blending the defects, using (2) Blend around the circumference of the
the fine and extra fine grade of tubing. The finished blend shall be as
rubberized abrasive wheels. close as practical to the original finish
Remove only enough material to of the part.
repair the defect.
c. Removing High Metal. High metal is
(d) Swab etch reworked areas per caused by the displacement of metal above
paragraph 11-3.23 and spot-fluo- a surface. It is found around defects like
rescent-penetrant inspect per nicks and scratches. Remove high metal as
paragraph 11-3.24. follows:
(e) Place the repaired blades and (1) Use a fine abrasive stone, a small file,
vanes in separate containers to emery cloth, or crocus cloth to
prevent damage during handling. remove high metal.
Change 6 11-35
(2) Remove only the material that is pro- WARNING Etching solution contains acid
jecting above the original surface con- and is highly toxic to skin, eyes, and respi-
tour (see figure 11-14). ratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and
vapor control are required. Avoid all con-
(3) Swab etch reworked area per para- tact.
graph 11-3.23 and spot-fluorescent-
penetrant inspect per paragraph 11- CAUTION Refer to the Material Safety
3.24. Data Sheets (MSDS) for storage and han-
dling instructions for etchant solution.
11-3.23 Swab Etching Procedure Etchant solutions can become hazardous to
personnel if not handled appropriately.
This procedure describes the materials and
process for swab etching used as a preliminary a. All surfaces to be etched must be free from
step before fluorescent-penetrant inspection. oil, grease, scale, or other extraneous
Etching solutions are used as described herein material.
or with exceptions as specified for individual
parts in the Shop Manual. 11-14
11-36 Change 6
CAUTION Do not pour working solution (1) Inspection booth, darkroom, or black
back into stock container. Although the small cloth hood (for remote locations) to
quantities involved do not ordinarily consti- prevent excessive admission of white
tute an environmental hazard, flush away light.
discarded solutions with several volumes of (2) Compressed air supply for drying
water to ensure adequate dilution. parts. Air supply must have filters to
remove oil and moisture which can
f. Discard used working solution, rinse, and contaminate parts or inspection mate-
dry plastic container for future use. rials.
Change 6 11-37
(4) White light lamp for visual inspection This procedure is to be used wherever the
of parts. shop manual calls out specific classes using
either waterwashable or post-emulsifiable
(5) Time piece for timing operations. penetrant systems.
(6) Tools for inspection personnel:
NOTE
(a) Three power and 10 power mag- • If visible color dye penetrant has been
nifying lenses used on parts which are to be subsequently
(b) Cotton swabs or small fine hair inspected with fluorescent penetrants, the
art brush to apply solvents for contamination by the dye may prevent reli-
evaluating questionable indica- able fluorescent penetrant inspection. Any
tions color dye indications evident by white
light visual inspection shall be considered
b. Materials required: valid indications even if not detectable by
ultraviolet light.
NOTE Qualified Products listed in MIL-I-
25135 QPL (Qualified Products List) as Level • Excessive white light may interfere with
3, Method D, are considered acceptable alter- detection of a rejectable size indication. A
nates to the products listed. test part having a known defect can be
used to evaluate effectiveness of white
(1) Post-Emulsification Fluorescent-Pen- light shielding.
etrant Oils: ZL22A, B, or C, ZL27 or
ZL27A (Magnaflux Corporation) a. Parts must be cleaned of all traces of oil,
grease, carbon, and rust scale prior to pen-
(2) Hydrophilic Removers: ZR10A or etrant application.
ZR10B (Magnaflux Corporation)
b. Apply penetrant oil with soft-bristle brush,
(3) Dry Powders: ZP4A or ZP4B cotton swab, or spray application. Allow a
(Magnaflux Corporation) minimum of 30 minutes for penetration.
11-38 Change 6
• Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, d. Apply either dry powder or NAWD as a
eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin and eye fine thin coating at ambient temperature to
protection is required. Avoid repeated a dry surface. Allow a minimum of 10
or prolonged contact. Use in a well-ven- minutes for developer to absorb penetrant
tilated area. before inspecting part.
CAUTION Titanium alloy parts are subject e. Evaluate any indication to the required
to stress corrosion cracking when residues of inspection standards.
halogen containing compounds remain on a
part that is subsequently subjected to elevated f. Remove all residues by spraying, wiping,
temperatures typical of welding, heat treat- or soaking with approved solvents.
ing, or engine operation. These parts must be
thoroughly cleaned with nonhalogen com- 11-3.25 Miscellaneous Procedures
pounds after exposure to any halogen con-
CAUTION Use of motor-driven hydraulic
taining compound to prevent the cracking
pumps to operate hydraulically actuated spe-
and possible failure of parts.
cial support equipment other than torque
NOTE Indications of defects can be lost by multipliers is not recommended. Equipment
use of excessive solvent. damage can result from improper power
application.
c. Wipe off excess penetrant with a clean
cloth using a solvent. a. Use hand-operated hydraulic pumps to
operate hydraulically actuated special sup-
(1) Alternate. Remove excess penetrant port equipment such as pushers or pullers,
with a hydrophilic remover, provided unless otherwise specified.
it belongs to the same family as the
penetrant used. Do not exceed 90 sec-
Change 6 11-39
11-40 Change 6
t. Always read the complete operation and 11-3.26 V-Band (Coupling) Clamps
be sure you understand it fully. It is better
to stop and ask than to continue and cause 11-3.26.1 Preinstallation Checks
unnecessary work and/or damage.
a. Check alignment of tube ends, unre-
u. Do not disassemble any component any strained, to the following maximum limits
further than necessary to perform the prior to installing V-band clamps:
required maintenance, even though com-
plete disassembly instructions may be (1) Parallelism: no angle (centerlines of
given. Remove piping and electrical leads tubes or fittings parallel).
only as required to perform maintenance
(2) Offset between fittings or tube center-
tasks.
lines: no more than 0.060 inch (1.52
v. Attaching hardware (bolts, nuts, plain mm) circumferential, axial, or com-
washers, brackets, clamps, etc.) is gener- bined.
ally reusable. When possible, it is recom-
(3) Gaps: no more than 0.060 inch
mended that attaching hardware be left in
(0.15 mm) space between fitting
seats.
Change 6 11-41
(4) If tube ends do not align within the for tool marks and cracks. V-band cou-
above limits, readjust mounting until plings in poor condition should be
proper alignment is attained. replaced.
b. Ensure flange faces are free of dirt, grease, f. Check the threads on the T-bolt for wear
corrosion, distortion, deformation, and and condition. If there is any sign of wear,
scratches. galling, or deformation, install a new T-
bolt or coupling clamp.
c. Use protective flange caps on the ends of
all ducts until the installation progresses to g. Check the T-bolt for straightness; how-
the point where removal of the cap is ever, if it is bent it will be necessary to
essential to continuing with the installa- determine if the bend is intentional. Some
tion. small diameter couplings have curved T-
bolts. Check the applicable illustrated
d. Use care during the installation of ducts parts breakdown for part identification. If
and tubes to ensure mating and alignment in doubt, install a new T-bolt or coupling
of flanges. A poorly fitted joint requires clamp.
excessive torque on the T-bolt to close the
joint and imposes structural loads on the h. Check the trunnion and latch for freedom
V-band clamp. Adjacent support clamps or of movement or other overloading.
brackets should remain loose until installa-
tion of the coupling has been completed. i. Avoid twisting, spreading, or bending of
When connections are by V-band cou- the coupling when positioning the cou-
plings, the weight of the components pling on the joint.
should be fully supported during the fit-up
and installation of the couplings. j. When gaskets are used in the joint, exer-
cise care in handling to avoid nicks and
e. When reinstalling a used coupling, check burrs on the gasket surfaces. Whenever a
it for twist or distortion. Visually check the joint is disassembled after service opera-
V-section for spreading at the open ends or tions, a new gasket should be used when
other signs of distortion. Check spot welds reassembling to ensure maximum sealing
or rivets for condition and security. The efficiency. Exercise care to ensure that the
corner radii should be carefully checked gasket is properly seated.
11-42 Change 6
Change 6 11-43
11-44 Change 6
4 CHAPTER 12
Preventive Maintenance
12-1 Purpose and Scope 12-2.1.2 Form of Inspection Tables
This chapter defines the requirements and Inspection tables in this technical manual gen-
frequency for performing preventive erally treat each component as a separate item
maintenance checks, inspections, and in order to provide the maximum amount of
servicing. Dry motoring procedures, generally information. Inspection and repair information
associated with maintenance, are also contained in tables is often revised as experi-
provided, as are definitions of terms used to ence gained through increased service time of
evaluate equipment condition and damage equipment. An explanation of table headings
during inspections. follow:
12-2 General Checks and NOTE The terms On-Site Maximum Service-
able Limit, On-Site Maximum Repair Limits
Inspections and On-Site Corrective Action apply only at
the level of maintenance at which inspection is
This section provides general guidelines, con- being conducted. For example, corresponding
ditions, and definitions for conducting engine entries of “Not repairable” and “Replace
checks and inspections. part” respectively in the On-Site Maximum
Repairable Limit and On-Site Corrective
Preventive maintenance and servicing inspec- Action columns in the maintenance inspection/
repair tables shall be interpreted as not
tions and checks are performed to reduce repairable at this level of maintenance.
unscheduled shutdown time. If the frequency Replaced part may be repairable at next
of inspection/service requires change, coordi- higher level of maintenance.
nate with the packager. Table 12-1 lists checks
and service intervals. For terminology and
Observed Defines given areas of a part
definitions, refer to table 12-2.
Condition/ with associated conditions/
Discrepancy discrepancies which may be
12-2.1 Use of Inspection Tables and Column observed.
Instructions
Change 6 12-1
12-2 Change 6
12-3.2 Wet Motoring (Liquid Fuel Only) c. Close fuel shutoff valve and continue
motoring for 5 minutes to purge the enclo-
Any wet motoring check should be made with sure/engine fuel system of fuel. If an
the ignition system deenergized. engine start is to be made, wait a minimum
of 2 minutes before initiating the start
CAUTION cycle.
• Excessive wet motoring can result in sat- d. Deenergize the starter.
uration of the TRF insulation blankets
with fuel. 12-4 Rigging and Idle Checks
• Be certain that checklists have been
12-4.1 Rigging Checks
established for packager-furnished
equipment. Consult the packager's man- In addition to the preventive maintenance and
ual for mandatory prestart procedures servicing checks listed in table 12-1, any vari-
and make certain that the packager-fur- able–geometry system (variable inlet guide
nished lube supply subsystem is activated vane [VIGV], variable bypass valve [VBV],
and operational prior to any motoring or or variable stator vane [VSV]) that has had
start sequence. maintenance performed on it since the engine
was last operated, should undergo a rigging
a. Check all switches and interlocks for
check. Rigging check procedures are
proper motoring settings.
described in WP's 1113 00, 1312 00, and
b. With the fuel shutoff valves closed, acti- 1411 00 in Volume I of this manual.
vate the motoring or start sequence and
allow the engine to motor to maximum
motoring speed for 30 seconds. At maxi-
mum motoring speed, open the fuel shut-
off valves. Observe and record the
following:
Change 6 12-3
12-4 Change 6
Maintenance Interval:
4000 Operating Hours,
450 Fired Starts,
or Annually (whichever Procedure
Maintenance Item (Note 1) comes first) Reference
Inlet and Coupling Inspection X and (Note 4 and 5) WP 4010 00 and Packager's
Manual
Lube and Scavenge Pump Inlet Screen and X and (Note 5) WP 4020 00
Filter Inspection
GT Starter Oil Return Line Screen Inspection X and (Note 5) Packager's Manual
(If installed)
Change 6 12-5
Maintenance Interval:
4000 Operating Hours,
450 Fired Starts,
or Annually (whichever Procedure
Maintenance Item (Note 1) comes first) Reference
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC Blade Chord Length At same time as stage 1 HPC WP 2413 00
® only) blade replacement
Inspection (systems with HPC SPRINT
Stage 2, 3, and 4 HPC Blade Chord Length At same time as stage 1 HPC WP 2413 00
Inspection (systems with LPC + HPC blade replacement
SPRINT®)
Stage 0 and Stage 1 LPC Blade Inspection Every 25,000 hours of (LP) WP 4015 00
SPRINT® operation
SPRINT® Nozzle Clean, Flow, and Inspection Every 25,000 hours of WP 1916 00
at Authorized Repair Source SPRINT® operation
12-6 Change 6
Maintenance Interval:
4000 Operating Hours,
450 Fired Starts,
or Annually (whichever
Maintenance Item (Note 1) comes first) Procedure Reference
High Pressure Turbine Diffuser X (Until Service Bulletin Service Letter
LM6000-IND-0216 LM6000-03-06 R1
is incorporated)
Inlet Gearbox Spline X Service Letter
LM6000-04-01 R2
High Pressure Compressor X Service Letter
Stage 11 Manifold Check Valve LM6000-04-02
Right Side Aft Stage 8 LPT Cooling X (Until Service Bulletin Service Letter
Air Tube LM6000-IND-0211 is incorpo- LM6000-04-03
rated)
Igniter X (Until Service Bulletin Service Letter
LM6000-IND-0219 is incorpo- LM6000-04-06 R1
rated)
VBV Clevis Bolt Thread Engage- X Service Letter
ment to Locking Nut LM6000-04-07
PCC Forward Mount Bolt Wear X Service Letter
LM6000-01-03
NOTES:
1. Inspections shall be made with the engine shut down.
2. Change filter element whenever a 5-7 psi filter ΔP is noted on user gage.
3. Inspections shall be made anytime maintenance is performed in the area or when the area is accessible.
4. Inspections shall be made as required per troubleshooting procedures.
5. Test the redundant overspeed protection system to verify its function using a simulated speed signal input.
Change 6 12-7
12-8 Change 6
Change 6 12-9
12-10 Change 6
CHAPTER 13
Critical Parts Life Management - LM6000 PC Engine
13-1 Purpose and Scope Paragraph 13-5 defines how cycles are to be
calculated.
CAUTION
Critical life-limited parts have undergone
• Critical life-limited parts must be extensive analysis which provides a basis for
removed from service before reaching the establishing the industrial life limits defined in
declared life limit. table 13-1. GE will continue evaluating
component life limits and will revise the limits
• Serious engine damage can occur if all when technically justified.
provisions of this caution are not
complied with. The critical parts life limitations have been
substantiated based on engineering analysis
This chapter identifies specific parts of the that assumes this product will be operated and
LM6000 PC engine that are cyclic life-limited maintained using the procedures and inspec-
as a result of normal operation. Instructions tions provided in the instructions for contin-
for tracking the operating hours and operating ued operation supplied with this product by
cycles for such parts that have been identified GE, or its licensees. For Life Limited Parts
as being limited in terms of operating service, and parts that influence Life Limited Parts,
are also provided. any repair, modification or maintenance pro-
cedures not approved by GE, or its licensees,
Critical life-limited parts are those parts that,
or any substitution of such parts not supplied
should they suddenly fail, could threaten the
by GE, or its licensees, may materially affect
structural integrity of the engine or its
these limits.
package. Stress cycles on gas turbine parts
result from transients of speed and 13-2 Definitions
temperature that occur during starts,
accelerations, and decelerations. Therefore, The following terms are used in this chapter:
life limits are expressed in terms of engine
cycles and can be related to normal a. Full Cycle: A full cycle is defined as a
operational data. cycle from zero gas generator speed
with acceleration to high power
Cycles are defined in paragraph 13-2, setting, followed by shutdown of the
Definitions. Life limits of critical parts are gas turbine. High power setting is
established through analysis and testing. considered to be any power setting
Accumulated cycles are to be calculated, above synchronous idle where the
tracked, and compared to published life limits generator breaker is closed. For a
to determine when a part should be visual representation of what a typical
permanently retired from service. No LM6000 full life cycle analysis is
component shall be allowed to remain in based upon, see figure 13-1.
service beyond its published life limit.
Change 6 13-1
13-2 Change 6
Change 6 13-3
13-4 Change 6
Industrial Life
Module Component Part Number Kf Kp Kt
Limit (Cycles)
LPCR
Stg 0 Disk L24546P05 20,000 1 See Note 1 1
Stg 1 Disk L24547P03 20,000 1 1
Stg 2-4 Spool 1781M30G04 20,000 1 1
LPC Fwd Shaft L24548P06 20,000 1 1
LPC Fwd Shaft L44648G01, G02 TBD TBD TBD
FMS
Fwd Shaft 9080M27P09 8,500 1 1
Mid Shaft L47747P01, P02, P03 TBD TBD TBD
HPCR
Stg 1 Disk 9380M26P06 10,000 1 1.97
Stg 2 Disk 9380M27P08 10,000 1 1.96
Stg 2 Disk 9380M27P10 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 3-9 Spool 1333M66G10 10,000 1 1.76
1333M66G09, G13, G14,
Stg 3-9 Spool 10,000 1 TBD
and L44863G03
Stg 3-9 Spool L44659P01 TBD TBD TBD
1703M49G01, G02,
Stg 10-14 Spool 10,000 1 TBD
G03, G04
CDP Seal L47299P02 10,000 1 3.94
L47299P03,
CDP Seal 1782M82P02, P03, and 10,000 1 TBD
L43372P04
HPTR
Stg 1 Disk 1531M84G10, G12 10,100 1 1.688
Stg 1 Disk 1531M84G11 TBD TBD TBD
Stg 2 Disk 9362M43P05 6,200 1 2.67
Stg 2 Disk 9362M43P10 10,000 1 TBD
Spacer 1539M12P01, P02 15,900 1 1.823
Change 6 13-5
Industrial Life
Module Component Part Number Kf Kp Kt
Limit (Cycles)
LPTR See Note 1
Stg 1 Disk L47741P01 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 1 Disk L47741P02 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 2 Disk L47742P01 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 2 Disk L47742P02 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 3 Disk L47743P02, P04 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 4 Disk L47744P02, P03, P05 10,000 1 TBD
Stg 5 Disk L47745P02, P03 10,000 1 TBD
Shaft L47746P01 10,000 1 TBD
L45001P07 and
Balance Piston 10,000 1 TBD
L47958P01, P02
Note 1: For appropriate partial cycle factor (Kp), refer to Partial Cycle definition in paragraph 13-2.b.
13-6 Change 6
APPENDIX A
Fuel/Water Requirements
A1 Fuel Gases
A2 Liquid Fuel
A6 Lubricating Oil
A-1/(A-2 Blank)
A-3
Notes:
1. MWI at max limits C2+.
2. Other levels may be possible. Consult GE.
3. Other combustibles - CO, olefin hydrocarbons, etc.
A-4
Notes:
1. Expanded values may be possible with fuel nozzle modifications. Consult GE.
2. High hydrogen and carbon monoxide content fuels have large rich to lean flammability limits.
These types of fuels often require inert gas purging of the gas turbine gas fuel system upon unit
shutdown or a transfer to a more conventional fuel. When process gas fuels have extreme flam-
mability limits such that the fuel will auto ignite at turbine exhaust conditions, a more “conven-
tional” start-up fuel, such as methane, is required.
3. The presence of even trace amounts of butadiene in the gas fuel may cause fuel system fouling.
Additional fuel system maintenance may be required when using fuels containing butadiene.
4. Olefins in the gas fuel at moderate levels (<15%) are not expected to present problems as long as
the fuel temperature is kept below 176°F (80°C). With a higher levels of olefins or with a higher
gas fuel temperature, fuel system fouling may be an issue.
5. Other combustibles - CO, hydrocarbons. etc.
A-5
Dew Point (See Note 1) ASTM D1142 - Water vapor content of Gaseous Fuels
by measurement of Dew Point Temperature
A-6
A-7
IP - Institute of Petroleum UK
Notes:
1. Hydrocarbon and water dew points shall be determined by direct dew point measurement (Chilled
Mirror Device). If dew point cannot be measured, an extended gas analysis, which identifies hydro-
carbon components from C1 through C14, shall be performed. This analysis must be accurate within
10 ppmv. A standard gas analysis to C6+ is normally not acceptable for dew point calculation unless it
is known that heavier hydrocarbons are not present, as is most often the case with liquefied natural
gases.
2. This test method will not detect the presence of condensable sulfur vapor. Specialized filtration equip-
ment is required to measure sulfur at concentrations present in vapor form. Contact GE for more
information.
A-8
Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) is produced by Other gases that may be utilized as gas turbine
drying, compressing, cooling and expanding fuel are those formed by the gasification of
natural gas to approximately -260°F at coal, petroleum coke, or heavy liquids. In gen-
14.7 psia (-162°C at 101.4 kPa). The product eral, the heating values of gasification fuels
is transported as a liquid and delivered as a gas are substantially lower than other fuel gases.
after pressurizing and heating to ambient tem- These lower heating value fuels require that
perature. The composition is free of inerts and the fuel nozzle gas flow passages be larger
moisture and can be treated as a high quality than those utilized for fuels of higher heating
natural gas. LNG can pick up moisture that is values.
present in the pipeline but it is not a source of
the moisture. Gasification fuels are produced by either an
Oxygen Blown or Air Blown gasification pro-
A1-2.1.3 Medium BTU Natural Gas cess.
Natural gases are found in and extracted from A1-2.2.1 Oxygen Blown Gasification
underground reservoirs. These "raw gases"
may contain varying degrees of nitrogen, car- The heating values of gases produced by Oxy-
bon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and contain gen Blown Gasification fall in the range of
contaminants such as salt water, sand, and dirt. 200 to 400 Btu/scf (7856-15752 kJ/NM3). The
The heating values of Medium BTU Natural Hydrogen (H2) content of these fuels is nor-
Gas normally fall between 400 and 800 mally above 30 percent by volume and have
Btu/scf (LHV). Processing by the gas supplier H2/CO mole ratio between 0.5 to 0.8. Oxygen
normally reduces and/or removes these con- Blown Gasification fuels are often mixed with
stituents and contaminants prior to use in the steam for thermal NOx control, cycle effi-
gas turbine. A gas analysis must be performed ciency improvement, and/or power augmenta-
to ensure that the fuel supply to the gas turbine tion. When utilized, the steam is injected into
meets the requirements of this specification. the combustor by an independent passage.
Due to high hydrogen content of these fuels,
Oxygen Blown Gasification fuels are nor-
A1-2.1.4 Liquefied Petroleum Gases mally not suitable for DLE applications.
A-9
For gasification fuels, a significant part of the A1-2.3.2 Coke Oven Gases
total turbine flow comes from the fuel. In
addition, for oxygen blown fuels, there is a Coke Oven Gases are high in H2 and CH4 and
diluent addition for NOx control. Careful inte- may be used as fuel for SAC systems, but are
gration of the gas turbine with the gasification not suitable for DLE combustion applications.
plant is required to assure an operable system. These fuels often contain trace amounts of
Due to the low volumetric heating value of heavy hydrocarbons which, when burned,
both oxygen and air blown gases, special fuel could lead to carbon buildup on the fuel noz-
systems and fuel nozzles are required. zles. The heavy hydrocarbons must be
"scrubbed" or removed from the fuel prior to
A1-2.3 Process Gases delivery to the gas turbine or maintained in the
gaseous state.
Many chemical processes generate surplus
gases that may be utilized as fuel for gas tur- A1-2.3.3 Flare Gases
bines, for example, tail or refinery gases.
These gases often consist of methane, hydro- Flare Gases are produced by a number of asso-
gen, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide ciated gas activities including oil wells or oil
that are normally by-products of petrochemi- rigs, refineries, chemical plants, and landfills.
cal processes. Due to the hydrogen and car- Associated gases from oil production and
bon monoxide content, these fuels have large refineries are normally flared, but can also be
rich-to-lean flammability limits. These types a good fuel source for power production.
of fuels often require inert gas purging of the These associated gases can be high in methane
gas turbine gas fuel system upon unit shut- and C2+ gases and must be evaluated on a
down or a transfer to a more conventional fuel. case by case basis by GE. Refinery gases are
When process gas fuels have extreme flamma- also known to contain butadienes which must
bility limits such that the fuel will auto ignite be removed prior to use. Gases produced from
at turbine exhaust conditions, a more “conven- chemical plants are usually the result of a
tional” start-up fuel, such as methane, is chemical reaction and will vary in heating
required. value depending on the composition and pro-
cess. In landfills, gas which results from
Additional process gases utilized as gas tur- the decomposition of materials buried in
bine fuels are those that are by-products of the landfill can be a source fuel for power
steel production. These are: production. These types of gases are usually
in the low to medium heating value range
A1-2.3.1 Blast Furnace Gases (BFGs) (300-450 Btu/scf) and normally contain silox-
anes.
Blast Furnace Gases (BFGs), alone, have heat-
ing values below minimal allowable limits.
These gases must be blended with other fuel to
raise the heating value to above the required
limit. Coke Oven and/or Natural Gases or
hydrocarbons such as propane or butane can
be utilized to accomplish this.
A-10
A-11
A-12
Contamination limits for particulates are Sulfur can sometimes be found in natural gas
established to prevent fouling and excessive in the compounds “H2S” and/or “COS”. It is
erosion of hot gas path parts, erosion and plug- produced with the natural gas. Typically the
ging of combustion fuel nozzles and erosion gas supplier will limit H2S to a concentration
of the gas fuel system control valves. The uti- of less than approximately 20 ppmv by remov-
lization of gas filtration or inertial separation ing sulfur in a treatment system. Sulfur may
is required. The filtration level should be a also be present in very low concentrations
beta ratio of 200 minimum (efficiency of (<100 ppbv) in the form of elemental sulfur
99.5%) at 5μ or less. The total particulate vapor.
should not exceed 30 ppm by weight. GE
requires the use of stainless steel piping down- There is no specific limit on natural gas fuel
stream of this last level of filtration. sulfur content if the engine is used in an appli-
cation where both the fuel and environment
A1-4.2 Liquids are free of alkali metals, including sulfur com-
pounds. There are several concerns relative to
No liquids are allowed in the gas turbine fuel the levels of sulfur contained in the fuel gas
gas supply. Liquids contained in the fuel can supply. Many of these are not directly related
result in nuisance and/or hardware damaging to the gas turbine but to associated equipment
conditions. These include rapid excursions in and emissions requirements.
firing temperature and gas turbine load, pri-
mary zone re-ignition and flashback of pre- These concerns include but are not limited to:
mixed flames, and when liquids carry over
past the combustion system, melting of hot gas A1-4.3.1 Hot Gas Path Corrosion
path components. When liquids are identified
in the gas supply, separation and heating is Typically, use of sulfur bearing fuels will not
employed to achieve the required superheat be limited by concerns for corrosion in the tur-
level. bine hot gas path unless alkali metals are pres-
ent. Sodium, potassium and other alkali metals
Gas at the wellhead is typically produced in a are not normally found in natural gas fuel, but
wet saturated condition and is treated to are typically found to be introduced in the
remove water and heavy hydrocarbon liquids. compressor inlet air in marine environments,
Depending on the degree of treatment and the as well as in certain adverse industrial envi-
supply pressure, the gas may be delivered in a ronments. The total amount of sulfur and
dry condition. After pressure reduction it is alkali metals from all sources shall be limited
possible for condensates to form as the gas to form the equivalent of 0.6 ppm of alkali
cools during expansion. The condensates may metal sulfates in the fuel. Unless sulfur levels
be either water or hydrocarbons or both. Carry are extremely low, alkali levels are usually
over of lubricating oil from compressor sta- limiting in determining hot corrosion of hot
tions is another source liquids. gas path materials.
A-13
For low BTU gases, the fuel contribution of A1-4.3.2 HRSG Corrosion
alkali metals at the turbine inlet is increased
over that for natural gas and the alkali limit in If heat recovery equipment is used, the con-
the fuel is therefore decreased. The total centration of sulfur in the fuel gas must be
amount of alkali metals(a) in gas fuels used known so that the appropriate design for the
with engines having marinized (corrosion- equipment can be specified. Severe corrosion
resistant) coatings on the high pressure turbine from condensed sulfuric acid results if a Heat
blading shall not exceed 0.2 ppm(b). Recovery Steam Generator (HRSG) has metal
temperatures below the sulfuric acid dew
(a) Sodium, potassium, and lithium. point. Contact the HRSG supplier for addi-
Experience has shown that tional information.
sodium is by far the preponderant
alkali metal, if any, found in gas- A1-4.3.3 Selective Catalytic Reduction
eous fuels. (SCR) Deposition
(b) Units utilizing ammonia injection downstream
This limit assumes zero alkali
metals in the inlet air or injected of the gas turbine for NOx control can experi-
water or steam. When actual lev- ence the formation of deposits containing
els are above zero, the maximum ammonium sulfate and bisulfate on low tem-
allowable sodium content of the perature evaporator and economizer tubes.
fuel must be reduced in accor- Such deposits are quite acidic and therefore
dance with the following corrosive. These deposits, and the corrosion
relationship: that they cause, may also decrease HRSG per-
formance and increase back pressure on the
gas turbine. Deposition rates of ammonium
ppm sodium inlet air × sulfate and bisulfate are determined by the sul-
Air/Fuel ratio = fur content of the fuel, ammonia content in the
exhaust gas, tube temperature, and boiler
ppm sodium in water or
design. Fuels having sulfur levels above those
steam × water or steam ratio
used as odorants for natural gas should be
Fuel =
reported to GE. In addition, the presence of
ppm sodium in fuel = minute quantities of chlorides in the inlet air
Total fuel equivalence for may result in cracking of AISI 300 series
sodium from all sources not ______ stainless steels in the hot gas path. Contact the
to exceed 0.2 ppm SCR supplier for additional information.
A-14
A1-4.3.4 Exhaust Emissions sition take place, fuel heating will be required
to maintain the sulfur in vapor phase and
Sulfur burns mostly to sulfur dioxide, but 5 avoid deposition. A gas temperature of 130°F
percent to 10 percent oxidizes to sulfur triox- (54°C) or higher may be required at the inlet
ide. The latter can result in sulfate formation, to the gas control valves to avoid deposition,
and may be counted as particulate matter in depending on the sulfur vapor concentration.
some jurisdictions. The remainder will be dis- The sulfur vapor concentration can be mea-
charged as sulfur dioxide. To limit the dis- sured by specialized filtering equipment. If
charge of acid gas, some localities may restrict required, GE can provide further information
the allowable concentration of sulfur in the on this subject.
fuel.
A1-4.4 Siloxanes
A1-4.3.5 Elemental Sulfur Deposition
Siloxanes are sometimes found in non-tradi-
Solid elemental sulfur deposits can occur in tional gas fuels such as those obtained from
gas fuel systems downstream of pressure landfills. Siloxanes should be removed with
reducing stations or gas control valves under current technology so that the content is as
certain conditions. Power reduction has been low as possible, but not to exceed 50 ppb by
observed for DLE applications due to elemen- weight in the fuel gas. If the application
tal sulfur. These conditions may be present if includes wet NOx controls, the silica limit for
the gas fuel contains elemental sulfur vapor, the water or steam is reduced to 50 ppb by
even when the concentration of the vapor is a weight. Gas sampling and analysis is required
few parts per billion by weight. Concentra- and should include either an impinger or sor-
tions of this magnitude cannot be measured by bent collection method and have a laboratory
commercially available instrumentation, and with Gas Chromatography coupled with Mass
deposition cannot therefore be anticipated Spectrometer (GC-MS) capability to analyze
based on a standard gas analysis. Should depo- the samples collected.
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
• For DLE applications, the B100 fuel vis- • At the port where the fuel is delivered
cosity must not exceed 3cs for starting. before unloading
This may require fuel temperature greater
than 100°F (37.8°C). • From the pipeline just upstream of the raw
fuel storage tanks as the fuel is being
B100 will degrade, soften, or seep through added to the tanks.
some hoses, gaskets, seals, elastomers, glues,
and plastics with prolonged exposure. Nitrile After the fuel is treated/conditioned, samples
rubber compounds, polypropylene, polyvinyl, should be taken and analyzed at both the inlet
and Tygon materials are particularly vulnera- and outlet of the fuel treatment system. Fuel
ble to B100. Materials such as Teflon, Viton, exiting the system must meet the fuel specifi-
fluorinated plastics, and nylon are compatible cation. This should be confirmed before the
with B100. It is advisable to set up a monitor- fuel is placed in clean fuel day storage tanks.
ing program to visually inspect fuel system Fuel samples should be taken and analyzed to
equipment once a month for leaks, seeps, and ensure that the fuel discharged from these
seal decomposition. It would be wise to con- tanks and at a practical location at, or just
tinue these inspections even after one year, as upstream of, the gas turbine fuel manifold
the experience is still relatively limited with flange meets the specification.
B100. Brass, bronze, copper, lead, tin, and
zinc may accelerate the oxidation of biodiesel For all fuel sampling, sufficient samples (min-
fuels and potentially create fuel insolubles imum of three) must be taken to ensure that a
(sediments) or gels and salts when reacted representative sample is obtained. Samples
with some fuel components. A detailed review should be taken at different levels in large vol-
of both the gas turbine and the package fuel ume tanks and at equally spaced time intervals
systems must be completed before long-term during fuel delivery or fuel treatment. To
use of B100 fuel is initiated. avoid contamination, all samples should be
obtained in clean plastic bottles. Fuel samples
A2-5 Fuel Sampling taken should be analyzed to meet all GE liquid
fuel requirements. If fuel samples taken after
A well thought out fuel sampling protocol will the above recommendations have been imple-
ensure that quality fuel is delivered to the mented indicate that the fuel system does not
engine. For each delivery, fuel samples should provide fuel per the requirements, the cus-
be taken and analyzed at the following loca- tomer must change his fuel source or modify
tions: the fuel treatment system. The end user is
responsible for ensuring that the fuel meets the
• At the refinery before loading requirements.
A-21
Notes:
a. Fuels with a higher sulfur content can be burned. Impact on HSRI (Hot Section Repair Interval) will be dependent
upon alkali metals present in the fuel, inlet air, and injected water and upon engine operating temperature. Consult
GE for review of higher sulfur fuels.
b. This limit is considered to include all alkali metals, e.g., potassium and lithium, as well as sodium. Experience,
however, has shown that sodium is generally the predominant alkali metal.
This limit also assumes zero alkali metals in the inlet air or injected water or steam. When actual levels are above
zero, the maximum allowable sodium content of the fuel must be reduced in accordance with the following rela-
tionship:
ppm Na in Inlet Air x Air/Fuel Ratio
+ ppm Na in Water or Steam x Water or Steam/Fuel Ratio
+ ppm Na in Fuel
Total fuel equivalence for sodium from all sources not to exceed 0.2 ppm.
c. For non marinized engines (except for LM6000), the total amount of alkali metals from all sources shall not exceed
0.1 ppm.
d. To achieve the level of sensitivity for detection of sodium to the level required, an atomic absorption spectrometer
or a rotating disk spectrometer may be necessary.
e. Phosphorus testing applies to Bio-diesel blends only.
f. Care must be taken with the more viscous fuels to ensure that the minimum hydrogen content is met.
g. Fuels with Hydrogen content lower than 12.7% have been approved for use in certain applications with specific
restrictions. These fuels require a development test program for the applicable engine model before approval would
be considered. Asphaltene testing applies only to such fuels. In general, fuels with Hydrogen content less than 10%
have not been shown to be acceptable.
h. For marine gas turbines using a hydromechanical main fuel control, the limit is 40 ppm.
i. Legal limits and applicable safety regulations must be met; however, it should be noted that use of fuels having a
flash point in excess of 200°F (93.3°C) may result in unsatisfactory starting characteristics. Blending for enhance-
ment of spark ignition or use of alternate fuels may be required for starting.
j. Copper corrosion test conditions are 2 hours at 212°F (100°C).
k. LM6000 SAC models may not operate without water injection above 15MW power, if the distillation end point
temperature is above 675°F (357°C).
A-23/(A-24 Blank)
Appendix A3
Requirements for Water and Steam Purity for Injection in
AeroDerivative Gas Turbines
This document establishes the purity require- ASTM D3370 Standard Practices for
ments for water for NOx suppression and Sampling Water from
SPRINT® injection into gas turbine engines Closed Conduits
and for Steam for injected into the gas turbine
ASTM D4327 Anions in Water by
whether for NOx suppression or power aug-
Chemically Suppressed
mentation.
Ion Chromatography
For the purpose of this specification, the fol- ASTM D5391 Electrical Conductivity
lowing definition shall apply: and Resistively of a
Flowing High-Purity
NOx Suppression Water - Water introduced Sample
into the engine combustor for the purpose of
suppressing the oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in ASTM D5464 Standard Test Method for
the engine exhaust gases. This does not pH of Water with Low
include any boiler feed or make up water for Conductivity
steam generation. ASTM D5542 Trace Anions in High-
Purity Water by Ion
SPRINT® Water - Water introduced into the
Chromatography
engine inlet or into the high pressure compres-
sor inlet for purpose of power enhancement. ASTM D5907 Standard Test Method
for Filterable and Non-
Steam - Steam that is injected into the com-
Filterable Matter in Water
bustion for NOx suppression or injected into
the compressor rear frame or LP Turbine for Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
power augmentation on certain LM modules.
Test Methods.
A3-1 Applicable Documents EPA 150.1 pH Electrometric
Available from ASTM International, EPA 200.7 Metals & Trace Elements
100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700,
West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959 USA EPA 300.0 Determination of
(http://www.astm.org). Inorganic Anions by
Ion Chromatography
ASTM D1066 Standard Practice for
Sampling Steam
A-25
ASTM D5542,
Chlorides, mg/L, max 0.5 ASTM D4327, or
EPA 300.0
ASTM D5542,
Sulfates, mg/L, max 0.5 ASTM D4327, or
EPA 300.0
A-27
GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION - Subject to the restrictions on the cover or first page.
A-28
Appendix A4
Compressor Cleaning Water Purity Specification for GE Aircraft
Derivative Gas Turbines in Industrial Applications
This specification establishes the requirements A4-1 Applicable Documents
for purified water for use in cleaning the com-
pressor of gas turbine engines where the intent The following documents shall form a part of
is to restore performance by removing the this specification to the extent defined herein.
buildup of deposits from compressor compo- Unless an issue is stipulated, the latest revision
nents. The water quality defined in this speci- shall apply.
fication applies to water used in both on-line
compressor cleaning and crank-soak compres- Available from ATSM International,
sor cleaning. 100 Barr Harbor Dr., P.O. Box C700,
West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959 USA
For the purpose of this specification, the fol- (http://www.astm.org).
lowing definitions shall apply:
ASTM D1293 Tests for pH of Water
On-line Compressor Cleaning - A method of
removing the buildup of deposits on compres- ASTM D3370 Practices for Sampling
sor components while the engine is operating. Water
On-line cleaning is accomplished by spraying
cleaning solution into the inlet of the engine ASTM D4191 Test for Sodium in Water
while the engine is operating. by Atomic Absorption
Spectography
Crank-Soak Compressor Cleaning - A
method of removing the buildup of deposits ASTM D4192 Tests for Potassium in
on compressor components while the engine is Water by Atomic
motored by the starter. Crank-soak cleaning is Absorption Spectography
accomplished by spraying cleaning solution
ASTM D5907 Tests for Filterable and
into the inlet of the engine while the engine is
operating unfired at crank speed. Non-Filterable Matter in
Water
Liquid Detergent - A concentrated solution
A4-1.1 Environmental Protection
of water-soluble surface active agents and
emulsifiable solvents. Agency (EPA) Test Methods
A-29
A-30
Appendix A5
Liquid Detergent for Compressor Cleaning for GE Aircraft
Derivative Gas Turbines
This specification establishes the requirements ASTM D445 Standard Test Method for
for liquid detergents used to prepare cleaning Kinematic Viscosity of
solutions for cleaning the compressors of gas Transparent and Opaque
turbine engines, where the intent is to restore Liquids
performance by removing the buildup of
deposits on compressor components. Such ISO 3104 Determination of
deposits include salt, soils, and oils that may Kinematic Viscosity and
be ingested from the atmosphere. Calculation of Dynamic
Viscosity
The cleaning process shall be carried out by
spraying the cleaning solution into the bell- ARP 1795 Stress-Corrosion of
mouth of the engine while the engine is run- Titanium Alloys, Effect
ning at power (on-line cleaning) or while the of Cleaning Agents on
engine is being cranked (crank-soak cleaning). Aircraft Engine Materials
For the purposes of this specification, the fol- AMS 1424 Deicing/Anti-Icing Fluid,
lowing definitions shall apply: Aircraft (Newtonian - SAE
Type I)
Liquid Detergent - A concentrated solution
of water-soluble surface active agents and A5-2 Detergent Properties
emulsifiable solvents.
A5-2.1 Composition
Cleaning Solution - A solution or emulsion of
liquid detergent in water or water and anti- The chemical composition of the detergent is
freeze mixture for direct engine application. not limited, other than as specified herein.
Recommended dilution of detergent and water
A5-2.2 Biodegradability
shall be determined by the liquid detergent
manufacturer. Use of detergent/cleaning solution shall con-
form to local regulations for water pollution.
A5-1 Applicable Documents Biodegradable ingredients are recommended.
The following documents shall form a part of A5-2.3 Toxicity
this specification to the extent defined herein.
Unless a specific issue is specified, the latest Use of the liquid detergent/cleaning solution
revision shall apply. shall conform to local regulations for indus-
trial hygiene and air pollution. Use of nontoxic
ASTM D88 Standard Test Method for ingredients is recommended.
Saybolt Viscosity
A-31
A-32
A-33
20 to 50 (-7 to 10) 20 80
A-34
Appendix A6
Lubricating Oil Guidance for GE Aero Engines
This document provides the requirements and some GE Aeroderivative products as
application guidelines for selection and use of specified in the applicable operation and
lubricating oils in GE Marine and Industrial maintenance (O&M) manual.
Aeroderivative applications.
A6-2 Applicable Documents
NOTE: Industry standards are moving toward the
improvements offered by SAE AS5780. This The following documents form a part of this
broadens the fitness criteria definition to include specification to the extent defined herein. Unless
the improvements in traceability, change control, a particular issue is stipulated, the latest revision
and bench test standards. shall apply.
A-35
some HTS/HPC oils is linked to service pressure d. Oil Property Stability and Perfor-
and temperatures. mance
Reference 1 provides an excellent description of 2. The oil manufacturer should show evi-
the chemistry and physics of this well-known dence of suitability for anticipated per-
industry issue. formance beyond 25,000 hours to
demonstrate to their prospective cus-
GE Aeroderivative engines continue to use tradi- tomers that these requirements have
tional AMS-R-83248 (FKM) seals. HTS/HPC been met.
oils being considered for use in GE Aeroderiva-
tive products must be reviewed by the operator Engine boroscope inspections, partial engine dis-
and oil supplier for compatibility with these assembly, used oil analyses and O-ring condition
materials in the particular engine type, environ- evaluation may be required to demonstrate that
ment, and type of service for which usage is being the above requirements are met.
considered.
The following oils have been widely used in GE
A6-4 Fitness Criteria Aeroderivative Products with general customer
satisfaction:
In order for oils to be considered suitable for use
in GE Aeroderivative applications, the following AeroShell 500TM (AS5780 SPC)
criteria must be met. AeroShell 560TM (AS5780 SPC)
At a minimum, the oils must be:
BP 2380TM (AS5780 SPC)
1. Approved to MIL-PRF-23699 or AS5780. Mobil Jet Oil IITM (AS5780 SPC)
OR Turbonycoil 600TM (AS5780 SPC)
2. Approved to MIL-PRF-7808 (for exist-
ing successful applications. Not recom- BP 2197TM (AS5780 HPC)
mended for future applications). Mobil Jet Oil 254TM (AS5780 HPC)
AND have demonstrated the following: The above list is not intended to be comprehen-
sive and does not imply any GE endorsement.
1. The Oil Manufacturer should demonstrate Ultimately, the operator and oil supplier are
suitability to the operator by evaluation of responsible for lubrication selection.
the oil for a minimum of 25,000 hours
under appropriate operational and cli- A6-5 References
matic conditions. Suitability should be
demonstrated with respect to: 1. SAE Technical Series 2001-01-2974, “Fluo-
a. Seal material compatibility parity to roelastomer Compatibility with Advanced
MIL-PRF-23699 STD or AS5780 Jet Engine Oils”. E.W. Thomas (available at
SPC class oils specifically relating to http://papers.sae.org/)
AMS-R-83248 (Viton A) elastomer
seals
b. Coking
c. Corrosion issues
A-36
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
GE INDUSTRIAL
AERODERIVATIVE
GAS TURBINES
GE PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
15 May 2008
Change 6 15 August 2013
WP/SWP No. Change No. WP/SWP No. Change No. WP/SWP No. Change No.
WP 0001 00 ........ 6 WP 1514 00 ........ 0 WP 1910 00 ......... 0
WP 1110 00 ........ 1 WP 1515 00 ........ 0 WP 1911 00 ......... 0
WP 1111 00 ........ 0 SWP 1515 01 ........ 0 WP 1912 00 ......... 0
WP 1112 00 ........ 0 WP 1516 00 ........ 4 WP 1913 00 ......... 0
SWP 1112 01 ........ 0 WP 1517 00 ........ 0 SWP 1913 01 ......... 5
WP 1113 00 ........ 0 WP 1518 00 ........ 0 SWP 1913 02 ......... 4
WP 1114 00 ........ 0 WP 1710 00 ........ 4 SWP 1913 03 ......... 5
WP 1210 00 ........ 0 WP 1711 00 ........ 2 SWP 1913 04 ......... 4
WP 1310 00 ........ 0 WP 1712 00 ........ 4 WP 1914 00 ......... 0
WP 1311 00 ........ 0 WP 1713 00 ........ 0 WP 1915 00 ......... *
WP 1312 00 ........ 0 WP 1714 00 ........ 0 WP 1916 00 ......... 0
WP 1313 00 ........ 4 WP 1810 00 ........ 0 WP 2110 00 ......... 0
WP 1410 00 ........ 2 WP 1811 00 ........ 0 SWP 2110 01 ......... 0
WP 1411 00 ........ 5 WP 1812 00 ........ 1 WP 2210 00 ......... 2
WP 1412 00 ........ 5 WP 1813 00 ........ 1 WP 2211 00 ......... 4
WP 1510 00 ........ 0 WP 1814 00 ........ 0 WP 2212 00 ......... 0
WP 1511 00 ........ 0 WP 1815 00 ........ 2 WP 2213 00 ......... 1
WP 1512 00 ........ 0 WP 1816 00 ........ 1 WP 2214 00 ......... 4
WP 1513 00 ........ 0 WP 1817 00 ........ 0 WP 2215 00 ......... 0
A Change 6
Table of Contents
WP/SWP Number Title
LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE
WP 0001 00 Numerical List of Support Equipment, Consumables, and Expendables
WP 1110 00 Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Replacement
WP 1111 00 Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor
Replacement
WP 1112 00 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement
SWP 1112 01 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement with Fixed Link
WP 1113 00 Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check
WP 1114 00 Forward Seal Cover Plate Replacement
WP 1210 00 Low Pressure Compressor Speed (XN2) Sensor Replacement
WP 1310 00 High Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T25/P25) Sensor
Replacement
WP 1311 00 Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) Actuator Replacement
WP 1312 00 Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check
WP 1313 00 Bypass Valve, Bellcrank, and Actuating Ring Replacement
WP 1410 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components Replacement
WP 1411 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging
WP 1412 00 Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replacement (High-Boss
HPC Stator Case)
WP 1510 00 Gas/Steam Fuel System Components Replacement
WP 1511 00 Dual Fuel/Water Fuel System Components Replacement
WP 1512 00 Gas/Water Fuel System Components Replacement
WP 1513 00 Liquid Fuel/Water Fuel System Components Replacement
WP 1514 00 Gas Fuel System Components Replacement
WP 1515 00 Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L28490, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, and Flame
Sensor Bracket Replacement
SWP 1515 01 Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L44819, Flame Sensor Sight Glass, and Flame
Sensor Bracket Replacement
WP 1516 00 Igniter Plug Replacement
WP 1517 00 High Pressure Compressor Discharge Temperature (T3) Sensor Replacement
WP 1518 00 Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Bleed Air Manifold and Flange Cover
Replacement
WP 1710 00 Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor Replacement
WP 1711 00 Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Temperature (T48) Thermocouple
Replacement/Inspection
Change 6 i
ii Change 6
Change 6 iii
iv Change 6
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
NUMERICAL LIST OF SUPPORT EQUIPMENT,
CONSUMABLES, AND EXPENDABLES
(LEVEL 1 AND 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Introduction................................................................................................................................. 2
List of Consumables.................................................................................................................... 23
Mechanic's Hand Tools ............................................................................................................... 2
On-Site Expendables................................................................................................................... 33
Special Tools ............................................................................................................................... 13
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains a numerical list of special support equipment required to maintain
the LM6000 gas turbine models covered in this manual. This work package also contains a list of
recommended mechanic's hand tools, consumables, special tools, and on-site expendables to sup-
port level 1 and 2 maintenance.
See table 1.
NOTE
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 1/4 × 5/16 2 GXDH810B A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXDH1214A A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GXDH1618A A
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 7/32 × 1/4 2 66069 A
(thin wall) 5/16 × 3/8 2 66040 A
7/16 × 1/2 2 66042 A
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 7/16 × 1/2 1 CX1416 A
(half - moon)
Wrench, Box - 12 pt 1/4 × 5/16 2 GR810A A
(ratchet) 3/8 × 7/16 2 GR1214A A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GR1618A A
Wrench, Box - Offset 3/16 × 7/32 2 GSX67 A
1/4 × 5/16 2 GXS0810 A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXS01214 A
1/2 × 9/16 2 GXS01618 A
5/8 × 3/4 2 GXS02024 A
Wrench, Flare Nut - 6 pt 3/8 × 7/16 2 RXF1214B A
1/2 × 9/16 RXFS1618B
5/8 × 11/16 RXFS2022A
3/4 × 13/16 RXFS246A
2 Change 6
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Wrench, Open-End 5/32 2 DS1010 A
3/16 2 DS1212 A
1/4 × 5/16 1 GV0810 A
5/16 × 3/8 1 GV01012 A
3/8 × 7/16 1 GV01214 A
7/16 × 1/2 1 GV01416 A
1/2 × 9/16 1 GV01618 A
9/16 × 5/8 1 GV01820 A
5/8 × 11/16 1 GV02022 A
5/8 × 3/4 1 GV02024 A
3/4 × 13/16 1 GV02426 A
13/16 × 7/8 1 GV02628 A
7/8 × 15/16 1 GV02830 A
1 × 1-1/16 1 GV03234 A
1-1/16 × 1-1/4 1 GV03440 A
1-1/8 × 1-3/16 1 GV03636 A
Wrench, Combination - 1/4 2 G0EX80 A
12 pt 5/16 2 G0EX100 A
11/32 2 G0EX110 A
3/8 4 G0EX120 A
7/16 2 G0EX140 A
1/2 2 G0EX160 A
9/16 2 G0EX180 A
5/8 2 G0EX200 A
11/16 1 G0EX220 A
3/4 2 G0EX240 A
13/16 1 G0EX260 A
7/8 1 G0EX280 A
15/16 1 G0EX300 A
1 1 G0EX320 A
1-1/16 1 G0EX34 A
1-1/8 1 G0EX36 A
1-3/16 1 G0EX38 A
1-1/4 1 G0EX40 A
1-5/16 1 G0EX42 A
1-3/8 1 G0EX44 A
2-1/4 1 N7829B-2 1/4 A
Change 6 3
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Wrench, Spline 1/4 × 5/16 2 GXDES810A A
3/8 × 7/16 2 GXDES1214 A
1/2 × 9/16 1 GXDES1618 A
9/16 × 5/8 1 GXDES1820A A
13/16 × 15/16 1 GXDES2630 A
Wrench, Adjustable 6″ 1 DA26 A
12″ 1 DA212 A
Socket - 12 pt 3/16 2 GTMD6 A
(1/4 drive) 3/16 Deep 2 GSTMD6 A
7/32 2 GTMD7 A
7/32 Deep 2 GSTMD7 A
1/4 2 GTMD8 A
1/4 Deep 2 GSTMD8 A
9/32 2 GTMD9 A
9/32 Deep 2 GSTMD9 A
5/16 2 GTMD10 A
5/16 Deep 2 GSTMD10 A
11/32 2 GTMD11 A
11/32 Deep 2 GSTMD11 A
3/8 2 GTMD12 A
3/8 Deep 2 GSTMD12 A
7/16 2 GTMD14 A
7/16 Deep 2 GSTMD14 A
1/2 2 GTMD16 A
1/2 Deep 2 GSTMD16 A
9/16 2 GTMD18 A
9/16 Deep 2 GSTMD18 A
Socket, Universal - 12 pt 1/4 2 GTMU81 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 2 GTMU101 A
3/8 2 GTMU121 A
7/16 2 GTMU141 A
1/2 2 GTMU161 A
Socket - Spline 1/4 2 GTES8 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 2 GTES10 A
5/16 Deep 2 GTEL10 A
5/16 Universal 2 GTESU10 A
4 Change 6
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Socket - 12 pt No. 3 Phillips 1 FP32A A
(3/8 drive) 5/16 2 GF101 A
5/16 Deep 2 GSF101 A
3/8 2 GF121 A
3/8 Square Female 2 PP412 A
3/8 Deep 2 GSF121 A
7/16 2 GF141 A
7/16 Deep 2 GSF141 A
1/2 2 GF161 A
1/2 Deep 2 GSF161 A
9/16 2 GF181 A
9/16 Deep 2 GSF181 A
5/8 2 GF201 A
5/8 Deep 2 GSF201 A
11/16 2 GF221 A
3/4 1 GF241 A
13/16 1 GF261 A
Socket, Universal - 12 pt 5/16 2 GFU10A A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 2 GFU12A A
7/16 2 GFU14A A
1/2 2 GFU16A A
9/16 2 GFU18A A
5/8 2 GFU20A A
11/16 2 GFU22A A
3/4 1 GFU24A A
Socket - Torx (1/4 drive) No. 10 1 GTTX10 A
Socket - Torx (3/8 drive) No. 30 2 GFTX30A A
No. 40 6 TX40 F
Socket - Swivel - 6 pt 3/8 2 IPF12 A
(3/8 drive) 7/16 2 IPF14 A
Change 6 5
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Socket - Spline 3/8 2 GFES120 A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 Deep 2 GFEL120 A
3/8 Universal 2 FESU120 A
7/16 2 GFES140 A
7/16 Deep 2 GFEL140 A
7/16 Universal 2 FESU140 A
9/16 Deep 2 GFEL180 A
9/16 Universal 2 FESU180 A
5/8 Deep 2 GFEL200 A
5/8 Universal 2 FESU200 A
Socket - 12 pt 9/16 1 GSW181 A
(1/2 drive) 5/8 1 GSW201 A
11/16 1 GSW221 A
3/4 1 GSW241 A
13/16 1 GSW261 A
7/8 1 GSW281 A
15/16 1 GSW301 A
1 1 GSW321 A
1-1/16 1 GSW341 A
1-1/8 1 GSW361 A
Socket - Spline 9/16 1 GSES181 A
(1/2 drive) 5/8 1 GSES201 A
No. 18 1 SES181 A
No. 20 1 SES201 A
No. 26 1 SES261 E
No. 30 1 SES301 C
Socket - 12 pt 1-1/16 1 GLDH342 A
(3/4 drive) 1-1/8 1 GLDH362 A
1-3/16 1 GLDH382 A
1-1/4 1 GLDH402 A
1-7/16 1 GLDH462 A
1-1/2 1 GLDH482 A
1-5/8 1 GLDH522 A
1-3/4 1 GLDH562 A
2 1 LDH642 A
2-1/4 1 GLDH722 A
2-3/8 1 LDH762 A
6 Change 6
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Socket - 6 pt 2-5/8 1 L843 A
(1-inch drive)
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 1/4 1 TMRX8 A
(1/4 drive) 5/16 1 TMRX10 A
3/8 1 AN8508-6A A
7/16 1 AN8508-7A A
1/2 1 AN8508-8A A
9/16 1 AN8508-9A A
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 5/8 1 GAN8508-10A A
(3/8 drive) 11/16 1 GAN8508-11A A
3/4 1 GAN8508-12A A
13/16 1 GAN8508-13A A
7/8 1 GAN8508-14A A
15/16 1 GAN8508-15A A
1 1 GAN8508-16A A
1-1/16 1 GAN8508-17A A
Crowsfoot - Open End 3/8 2 GFC012 A
(3/8 drive)
Crowsfoot - Flare Nut - 9/16 1 FRH180S A
6 pt (3/8 drive) 5/8 1 FRH200S A
11/16 1 FRH220S A
3/4 1 FRH240S A
13/16 1 FRH260S A
7/8 1 FRH280S A
15/16 1 FRH300S A
1 1 FRH320S A
Change 6 7
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Crowsfoot - 12 pt 1-1/8 1 GAN8508-18A A
(1/2 drive) 1-3/16 1 GAN8508-19A A
1-1/4 1 GAN8508-20A A
1-5/16 1 GAN8508-21A A
1-3/8 1 GAN8508-22A A
1-7/16 1 GAN8508-23A A
1-1/2 1 GAN8508-24A A
1-9/16 1 GAN8508-25A A
1-5/8 1 GAN8508-26A A
1-11/16 1 GAN8508-27A A
1-3/4 1 GAN8508-28A A
1-13/16 1 GAN8508-29A A
1-7/8 1 GAN8508-30A A
1-15/16 1 GAN8508-31A A
2 1 GAN8508-32A A
2-1/16 1 GAN8508-33A A
2-1/8 1 GAN8508-34A A
2-1/4 1 GAN8508-36A A
2-1/2 1 GAN8508-40A A
Crowsfoot - Open-End 1-1/16 1 GSC034 A
(1/2 drive) 1-1/4 1 GSC040 A
1-1/2 1 GSC048 A
1-3/4 1 GSC056 A
2 1 GSC064 A
Speed Handle 1/4 Drive 2 GTMS4D A
1/4 Drive 2 GTMS4E A
3/8 Drive 2 GF4LA A
1/2 Drive 1 KB4 A
Ratchet Handle 1/4 Drive 2 GM70T A
1/4 Drive 5″ Long 2 TM75A A
3/8 Drive 2 GFL720A A
3/8 Drive 7″ Long 2 F720B A
1/2 Drive 10″ Long 2 GS710A A
3/4 Drive 20″ Long 1 GL72H A
3/4 Drive 24″ Long 1 GL72TH A
Ratchet Head 3/4 Drive 1 GL72T A
8 Change 6
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Breaking Bar 1/4 drive 1 GTM10F A
3/8 Drive 1 GF10M A
1/2 Drive 1 GSN18A A
3/4 Drive 36″ Long 1 L112EL A
Extension (1/4 drive) 2″ 1 GTMX2 A
4″ Wobble 1 GTMXW4 A
6″ 1 GTMX60 A
6″ Wobble 1 GTMXW60 A
10″ 1 GTMX100 A
14″ 1 GTMX140 A
Extension (3/8 drive) 3″ Wobble 1 GFXW3 A
6″ 1 GFX6 A
12″ 1 GFX11A A
Extension (1/2 drive) 5″ 1 GS5 A
10″ 1 GS10 A
Extension (3/4 drive) 3″ 1 GL32 A
8″ 1 GL62 A
8″ 1 GS62 A
16″ 1 GS122 A
Adapter, Torque 1/4F × 3/8M 1 GTA3 A
3/8F × 1/4M 1 GTM1 A
3/8F × 1/2M 1 GAF2 A
1/2F × 3/8M 1 GAX1 A
1/2F × 3/4M 1 GLA12A A
3/4F × 1/2M 1 GLA62 A
1F × 3/4M 1 GLA124A A
Adapter, Torque - 12 pt 1/4 2 GFRDH081 A
(3/8 drive) (thin wall) 5/16 2 GFRDH101 A
3/8 2 GFRDH121 A
7/16 2 GFRDH141 A
1/2 2 GFRDH161 A
9/16 2 GFRDH181 A
Change 6 9
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Adapter, Torque - Spline 5/16 2 GFRES10 A
(3/8 drive) 3/8 2 GFRES12 A
7/16 2 GFRES14 A
9/16 2 GFRES16 A
5/8 2 GFRES18 A
5/16 2 GFRES10 A
3/8 2 GFRES12 A
7/16 2 GFRES14 A
9/16 2 GFRES16 A
5/8 2 GFRES18 A
Universal Joint 1/4 Drive 1 GTMU8 A
3/8 Drive 1 GFU8A A
1/2 Drive 1 GU8 A
Torque Wrench 1/4 Drive 30-200 lb in 1 AJR117E A
3/8 Drive 150-1000 lb in 1 QJR248E A
1/2 Drive 30-250 lb ft 1 A
3/4 Drive 0-600 lb ft 1 QJR3250A A
1 TEC602FUA A
Strap Wrench 1-6″ 1 A91C A
1-3/4 × 29-1/4″ 1 No. 5 D
Allen Wrench Set 3/64 - 3/8 2 AW1013AK A
0.028 - 3/8 2 GAW1015AK A
Hammer
- Compothene 24 oz 1 BC1A A
- Plastic Tip 16 oz 1 BE116 A
- Soft-Faced 13″ 1 BH232-2 A
- Ball Peen 16 oz 1 BPN16B A
32 oz 1 BPN32A A
Punch
- Nylon 3/4″ dia × 12″ long 1 A
- Bronze 3/4″ dia × 12″ long 1 PPC1002 A
- Pin Set 1/4″ dia 1 PPC108A A
- Pin Set 5/16″ dia 1 PPC110A A
- Starter 1/4″ dia 1 PPC208A A
- Tapered Set 1 PPC905A A
10 Change 6
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Screwdriver 4″ × 1/4″ Blade Tip
- Common 6″ 2 GSSD44 A
6″ × 5/16″ Blade Tip 2 SDD6 A
8″ 2 SDD46 A
8″ × 3/8″ Blade Tip 2 SDD8 A
Pocket Size 2 SDD48 A
- Phillips No. 1 6″ 2 SDDP204 A
6″ 2 SDDP61 A
- Phillips No. 2 No. 30 2 SDDP62 A
- Torx Tip 2 STDTX430 C
- Magnetic Set 1 SSDM40B A
- Miniature Set 1 CM6551 A
Pliers
- Bent Needle Nose 10 1/2″ 1 497ACP B
- Safety-Wire Twister 2 GA311C A
- Wire Twister/Cutter 5-1/16″ 2 PR311 A
- Diagonal Cutting 2 86ACP A
2 E710CG A
- Retaining Ring Set 1 PR36 A
- Electrical Connector, PWC50 A
Vinyl/Jaws
- Needle Nose 1 196ACP A
1 95ACP A
- Flat Nose 6″ 1 61CP B
- Standard 1 46C B
- Adjustable Joint 12″ 1 91CP A
- Water Pump HL112P A
- Line Clamp 1 SWE82 A
Measuring 0-6″
- Micrometer, Depth 0-1″ 1 445AZ6RL C
- Micrometer, Outside 1 230RL C
Depth Gage 0-18″
- Vernier Depth 1 448-18 C
Gage 6″
- Steel Rule 6″ 1 622R A
- Pocket Rule 26 blade 1 PMF131 A
- Feeler Gage 1 FB335 A
Change 6 11
Part Vendor
Tool Type Size Qty Number Code
Inspection Mirror 1-1/4″ dia 1 CF143A A
2-1/4″ dia 1 GA295 A
Oval Pocket Mirror 1 CF157A A
Mechanical Fingers 17-3/4″ 1 GA265A A
Magnetic Pickup 17-27″ 1 PT30B A
Pry Bar 16″ 1 1650 A
Pinch Bar 16″ 1 1658B A
Scriber 1 PTS5 A
Flashlight 2 Cell 1 ECF35 A
Drop Light 2 EC691 A
India Stone - Fine 1 FF156 B
1 FF214 B
1 FF24 B
Parallel Bars 6″ 1 - -
12″ 1 - -
Tool Box 33 × 18 × 13 1 KR547B A
12 Change 6
3. Special Tools.
Refer to table 2.
NOTE
Change 6 13
14 Change 6
Change 6 15
16 Change 6
Change 6 17
18 Change 6
20 Change 6
Change 6 21
22 Change 6
4. List of Consumables.
Refer to table 3 for a list of consumables recommended to support on–site level 1 and 2
corrective maintenance tasks. For consumable materials required to support an individual
maintenance task, refer to the specific work package covering that task.
Change 6 23
24 Change 6
Change 6 25
26 Change 6
Change 6 27
28 Change 6
Change 6 29
30 Change 6
Change 6 31
32 Change 6
5. On-Site Expendables.
See table 4.
NOTE
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc., used during installa-
tion of external tubing, expendable materials are not listed. Refer to the
individual maintenance task (Reference SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP
1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.) and Illustrated Parts Breakdown
GEK 105060 for required parts.
Change 6 33
34 Change 6
Change 6 35
36 Change 6
Change 6 37
Change 6 38
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
AXIAL INLET CENTERBODY ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT - HOT END DRIVEN
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the axial inlet centerbody
assembly. (Reference kit, P/N 682L204, Fig 74 IPB).
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 1
See figure 1.
NOTE
Forward and aft centerbody are matched parts and are kept
together as an assembly.
B. Using No. 10 Torq-Set driver, remove 13 screws that secure forward centerbody
(Detail A). Remove forward centerbody.
C. Remove 46 nuts, 92 washers, and 46 bolts that secure aft centerbody to inlet frame or
variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) forward inner casing (Detail B). Remove aft
centerbody.
1
7. Axial Inlet Centerbody Assembly Installation.
See figure 1.
NOTE
Forward and aft centerbody are matched parts and are kept
together as an assembly.
A. Using 46 bolts, 92 washers, and 46 nuts (Detail B) install aft centerbody onto inlet
frame or VIGV forward inner casing. Boltheads face forward. Position one washer
under bolthead, and one washer under nut. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
B. Align matchmarks and install forward centerbody onto aft centerbody. Secure with
13 screws (Detail A). Using No. 10 Torq-Set driver, tighten screws to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
Change 1 3
4 Change 1
WP 1111 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR INLET
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE (T2/P2) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
1-5 ...... 0
6 Blank ...... 0
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure compressor
inlet temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensor.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
A. If installed, disconnected pressure sensing tube from T2/P2 sensor pressure port per
packager's manual.
NOTE
B. Remove plug or fitting from T2/P2 sensor pressure port. Discard preformed
packing.
1
WARNING
CAUTION
C. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from T2/P2 sensor integral lead.
D. Remove jamnut that secures T2/P2 sensor integral lead to electrical interface panel.
F. Remove bolts that secure T2/P2 sensor to variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly
case. Remove T2/P2 sensor.
See figure 1.
A. Install T2/P2 sensor onto inlet frame or VIGV assembly case. Using two bolts, secure
T2/P2 sensor to inlet frame or VIGV assembly case. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.7-4.1 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
B. Using jamnut, secure T2/P2 sensor integral lead to electrical interface panel. Tighten
jamnut to 25-35 lb in. (2.8-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
NOTE
E. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N J221P903, with petrolatum, and install onto plug or
fitting.
F. Install plug or fitting into T2/P2 sensor pressure port. Tighten plug or fitting to
90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
G. If present, connect pressure sensing tube to fitting in T2/P2 sensor pressure port per
packager's manual.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) ACTUATOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable inlet guide vane
(VIGV) actuators.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check WP 1113 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Soap Solution Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
Ensure that lube oil supply is shut off before disconnecting tubing.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do
not inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant.
Personal protective equipment required. Use mechanical
exhaust ventilation - if not available, use an approved respi-
rator.
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VIGV actuator. Disconnect drain line
from drain adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VIGV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from
VIGV actuator port to expose coupling nut.
CAUTION
CAUTION
D. Remove nut, bolt, and bushings that secure VIGV actuator rod end (figure 2).
E. Remove nut and bolt that secure VIGV actuator to bearing block. Remove VIGV
actuator.
F. Remove fittings from VIGV actuator. Remove and discard preformed packings.
7. Variable Inlet Guide Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Check Fixture,
1C9403.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
A. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to actuator. Supply 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) to
extend actuator to fully extended position. Maintain pressure throughout adjustment
procedure.
C. Adjust rod end so that actuator slides freely onto fixture, 1C9403. See figure 3.
WARNING
NOTE
A. Lubricate preformed packings, P/N J221P904 and P/N 9365M41P122 (figure 1), with
lubricating oil and install into groove of fitting.
B. Install fitting into VIGV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
C. Apply thread lubricant to threads of bearing actuator block bolt and secure VIGV
actuator onto actuator bearing block with nut and bolt. See figure 2, view B. Bolthead
faces aft. Tighten nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Apply thread lubricant to threads of VIGV actuator rod-end bolt, detail A. Using bolt
(bolthead outboard) and nut, secure actuator-to-ring brackets onto VIGV actuator rod
end. Tighten nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
F. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117 (figure 1), with lubricating oil and
install into drain adapter.
CAUTION
G. Connect tubing coupling nut onto VIGV actuator fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use
lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil,
MIL-L-7808 and MIL-L-23699, or damage will occur.
(1) Install reducers from pressure test adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator
unit, 1C3569. Tighten reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU).
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening or tightening
coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(3) Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube on -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten
coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube on -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten
coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(5) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of 2
minutes. Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of 2
minutes. Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(9) Connect head tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(10) Connect rod tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
I. Slide drain adapter over coupling nut and connect onto VIGV actuator port.
Hand-tighten drain adapter.
(1) Connect source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen onto drain line fitting
on drain adapter.
9
WARNING
(2) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and monitor.
Pressure shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as
required, and repeat leak check.
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling back shell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
10
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) ACTUATOR
REPLACEMENT WITH FIXED LINK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This subordinate work package contains instructions for replacing the VIGV actuators with fixed
links.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement WP 1112 00
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check WP 1113 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I)
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04
Thread Lubricant GP460
Wire Ties -
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from VIGV actuator. Wire tie electrical cable,
figure 1, to adjacent tube.
NOTE
NOTE
(1) Remove two bolts and flat washers that secure clamp to tubes and bracket.
Remove clamp.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(3) Tag and disconnect drain tube, and rod- and head-end tubes from tubes and
manifolds near bracket.
C. Remove nut, bolt, and bushings that secure VIGV actuator rod-end.
D. Remove nut and bolt that secure VIGV actuator to bearing block. Remove VIGV actuator
and tubing as an assembly.
E. Install caps or plugs onto ends of rod-end, head-end, and drain tubes. Tighten caps and
plugs to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plugs and caps.
F. Reinstall clamp to remaining tube and secure bracket with two bolts and washers.
Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.1 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
• Install the correct fixed link for the desired IGV configuration. Use
the L44818G01 for a Zero Degree Fixed IGV configuration or
L44818G02 for a Negative Five Degree Fixed IGV configuration.
• Clevis end of fixed link has two different size holes. Flanged
bushing is installed in largest hole.
H. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bearing actuator block bolt and secure fixed link
onto actuator bearing block with nut and bolt. See figure 2. Bolthead faces aft. Tighten
nut to360-400 lb in. (40.6-45.1 N·m) of torque.
I. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of fixed link rod-end bolt. Using bolt (bolthead
outboard) and nut, secure actuator-to-ring brackets onto fixed link rod-end. Tighten nut
to 360-400 lb in. (40.6-45.1 N·m) of torque.
J. Install protective caps or plugs onto tubes or hoses still attached to actuator.
A. Remove nut and bolt that secure fixed link onto actuator bearing block (figure 2).
B. Remove nut and bolt that secures fixed link rod-end to actuator-to-ring brackets and
remove fixed link.
C. Remove two bolts and flat washers that secure clamp to bracket.
F. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of VIGV actuator rod-end bolt, figure 1, using
bolt (bolthead outboard) and nut. Secure VIGV actuator rod-end onto actuator-to-ring
brackets. Tighten nut to 360-400 lb in. (40.6-45.1 N·m) of torque.
G. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of actuator bearing block bolt and secure VIGV
actuator onto bearing block with bolt and nut. Bolthead faces aft. Tighten nut to
360-400 lb in.(40.6-45.1 N·m) of torque.
I. Tighten drain tube and rod- and head-end tubes to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque.
J. Using two bolts and flat washers, reinstall clamp onto bracket, holding drain, rod-,
and head-end tubes.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
7/(8 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) SYSTEM
CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for checking the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV)
system. Before performing this work package, ensure the following conditions exist:
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement WP 1112 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
CAUTION
(1) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569
(figure 1). Tighten to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU) (figure 2).
1
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
CAUTION
(3) Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten
coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten
coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VIGV system to
full open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly
throughout entire range of travel in both directions.
(2) Check all fittings for leaks through VIGV system to full travel. Correct, as
required.
NOTE
(3) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VIGV system to
full open position. VIGV position indicator shall read 100 ± 1 percent (full open).
CAUTION
VIGV actuating ring mount bolts are anodized. Do not disturb
mount bolts, or coating damage may occur.
(4) Insert actuator locating pin, 1C9359P03, through rig fixture -10 degree hole.
Actuator locating pin, P03, shall slide freely. See figure 3. If difficulty is
encountered, loosen both actuator-to-ring brackets at actuator rod ends as follows:
(b) Loosen nuts that secure both VIGV actuator rod ends to actuation-to-ring
brackets. See figure 4.
(c) Insert pin so that actuator locating pin, figure 3, slides freely into rig
fixture -10 degree hole.
4
3
(5) Remove bolts and nuts that secure actuator rod ends to actuator-to-ring brackets.
See figure 4, detail A.
(6) Apply hydraulic pressure so both actuator rod ends are fully extended.
(7) Position actuator-to-ring brackets onto actuation ring so holes align with actuator
rod ends. If required, loosen nuts that secure actuator-to-ring brackets to actuation
ring.
(8) Apply thread lubricant to threads of actuator rod-end bolts, detail A. Using bolts
and nuts, secure actuator rod-ends onto actuator-to-ring brackets. Boltheads are
outboard. Tighten nuts to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
(9) Tighten nuts that attach actuator-to-ring brackets onto actuation ring to
380-420 lb in. (43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening or
tightening coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
D. Connect head tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m)
of torque. See figure 2.
E. Connect rod tube onto HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m)
of torque.
F. If gas turbine still has VIGV difference alarm, perform shim adjustments as follows:
(1) Remove VIGV actuators per WP 1112 00. Check and reset rod-end per
WP 1112 00. Reinstall actuators.
(2) Locate actuation ring support blocks bolted to outer VIGV case. Measure
clearance between blocks and actuation ring inside diameter, 14 places on
L45027G03, and 8 places on L45027G04 and later configurations.
(3) Plot and review clearances at support blocks 180 degrees opposite each other.
Example: 12:00 o'clock position equals 0.000 inch (0.00 mm) clearance, 6:00
o'clock position equals 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) clearance. Obtain shims L45101P01
through P08. Remove two bolts attaching support block to VIGV case at 12:00
o'clock position. Install shim to correct clearance at 6:00 o'clock position to 0.020
inch (0.51 mm). Install bolts and tighten to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
(4) Proceed in clockwise direction to next support block and repeat step (3) to adjust
clearances opposite locations to be as equal as shim thicknesses will allow.
(5) After shim corrections are complete, perform rig check per this WP.
9/(10 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
FORWARD SEAL COVER PLATE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the forward seal cover plate.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
Remove two bolts (figure 1) and forward seal cover plate from inlet frame at 6:00 o'clock
position.
A. Position variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) or inlet frame inner case so that forward
seal opening is at 6:00 o'clock position. See figure 1.
B. Using thread lubricant, coat washer faces and threads of two bolts.
C. Position cover plate over opening in VIGV or inlet frame inner case at 6:00 o'clock
position (figure 1).
D. Install two bolts. Tighten bolts to 105-115 lb in. (11.9-12.9 N·m) of torque.
1
3/(4 Blank)
2WP 1210 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR SPEED (XN2)
SENSOR REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
NOTE
There are three possible speed (XN2) sensor configurations. The first is
the LPC module with the speed (XN2) sensor installed. The second is with
a speed sensor plug installed. The third is with neither the sensor or plug
installed.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure compressor
(LPC) (XN2) speed sensors.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from speed (XN2) sensor. See figure 1.
B. Remove bolts and washers that secure speed (XN2) sensor to LPC stator case.
C. Remove speed (XN2) sensor and laminated shim. Discard laminated shim.
A. Remove bolts and washes that secure speed sensor plug to LPC stator case. See
figure 1.
A. If shim is not reused or new speed sensor is installed, calculate required shim
thickness as follows. Otherwise, proceed to step C.
(4) Stack shims, as required, to exceed calculated shim thickness. Peel away
laminated shim until measured shim is within +/- 0.004 inch (0.101 mm) of
calculated shim thickness. Use new laminated shim, P/N 9107M55P01, if
required.
C. Install laminated shim and speed (XN2) sensor onto LPC stator case.
D. Using four washers and bolts, secure (XN2) speed sensor onto LPC stator case.
Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps 2 and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps
that restrict mating.
B. Install laminated shim and speed sensor plug onto LPC stator case.
C. Using four washers and bolts, secure speed sensor plug to case. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
7/(8 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR INLET
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE (T25/P25) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure compressor
inlet temperature/pressure (T25/P25) sensor.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
A. If installed, disconnect pressure sensing tube from T25/P25 sensor pressure port per
packager's manual.
NOTE
B. Remove plug or fitting and preformed packing from T25/P25 sensor pressure port.
Discard preformed packing.
WARNING
CAUTION
F. Remove two bolts that secure T25/P25 sensor to compressor front frame. Remove
T25/P25 sensor.
See figure 1.
A. Install T25/P25 sensor onto compressor front frame. Using two bolts, secure T25/P25
sensor to compressor front frame. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of
torque. Safety-wire bolts.
B. Using jamnut, secure integral lead to electrical interface panel. Tighten jamnut to
25-35 lb in. (2.9-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
1
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while wig-
gling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
NOTE
E. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N J221P903, with petrolatum, and install onto plug or
fitting.
F. Install plug or fitting into T25/P25 sensor pressure port. Tighten plug or fitting to
90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
G. If present, connect pressure sensing tube to fitting in T25/P25 sensor pressure port per
packager's manual.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE BYPASS VALVE (VBV) ACTUATOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the six variable bypass valve
(VBV) actuators.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Front Frame Air Collector Replacement WP 2310 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Soap Solution Local Purchase
5. Expendable Material.
A. Remove access panels from air collector, as required, to gain access per WP 2310 00.
WARNING
CAUTION
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VBV actuator. Disconnect drain line
from drain adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VBV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from
VBV actuator port to expose coupling nut.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
D. If required, remove air collector seal from VBV actuator per WP 2310 00.
CAUTION
Do not change adjustment of clevis or actuator rod end. Any
movement or adjustment of clevis or actuator rod end length
requires that VBV actuation system rigging be checked.
E. Remove nut, washer, and bolt that secure clevis to bellcrank (figure 2).
2
F. Remove bolt and washer that secure VBV actuator mount leg to front frame.
G. Remove nuts and washers that secure VBV actuator mount studs to front frame.
Remove VBV actuator.
H. Remove nut and bolt that secure clevis to VBV actuator rod end. Remove clevis.
I. Remove fitting from VBV actuator (figure 1). Remove and discard preformed
packing.
WARNING
B. Install fitting into VBV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
C. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of all bolts and mount studs
figure 2.
D. Using bolt and nut, install clevis onto VBV actuator rod end. Tighten nut to
100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
E. Install VBV actuator onto front frame. Position VBV actuator so that clevis retaining
bolt bolthead faces inboard.
F. Using washers and nuts, secure VBV actuator onto front frame. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Using bolt and washer, secure VBV actuator mount leg onto front frame. Tighten bolt
to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
H. Using bolt, washer, and nut, secure clevis onto bellcrank. Bolthead faces inboard,
washer under nut. Tighten nut to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque. Restrain
bolt during tightening procedure using 0.125-inch (3.175 mm) Allen wrench.
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of air collector seal retaining
screws.
J. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117, with lubricating oil and install into
drain adapter (figure 1).
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
K. Connect tubing coupling nut onto VBV actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose (head-end) to hydraulic
control unit (HCU). Remove seal gasket.
(2) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto VBV head hose adapter from adapter set,
1C9393. Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto head hose. Tighten bolts
to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose (rod-end) to HCU. Remove
seal gasket.
(4) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto VBV rod hose adapter from adapter set,
1C9393. Using washers and bolts, secure adapter to rod hose. Tighten bolts
to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
3
CAUTION
Use hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569G3, with engines that use
lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699. Do not intermix lubricating oil,
MIL-L-7808 and MIL-L-23699, or damage will occur.
(5) Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to hose adapters. Tighten fittings
to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of
2 minutes. Check head hose/actuator connection for leakage.
(7) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of
2 minutes. Check rod hose/actuator connection for leakage.
(9) Release pressure on VBV hydraulic system. Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit
from VBV hose adapters.
(10) Remove VBV hose adapters. Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets for
serviceability. Discard damaged seal gaskets.
(11) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03, into HCU rod-end port.
Using washers and bolts, secure rod hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(12) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P04, into HCU head-end port.
Using washers and bolts, secure head hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
M. Slide drain adapter over coupling nuts and connect onto adapter port (figure 1).
Hand-tighten drain adapters.
WARNING
(1) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line fitting
on drain adapter.
(2) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and monitor.
Pressure shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as
required, and repeat leak check.
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nuts to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling back shell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
10
NOTE
P. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install access panels onto air collector per
WP 2310 00. Tighten bolts and nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
11/(12 Blank)
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE BYPASS VALVE (VBV) SYSTEM CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for checking the variable bypass valve (VBV) system.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
Nomenclature Part No
Hydraulic Actuator Unit 1C3569G3
Tool Set, Rigging, VBV Doors 1C9353G02
Adapter Set, Pressure Test/Rig - VIGV, 1C9393G01
VBV, VSV
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Cable, Safety 736L680G01
Wire, Safety R297P04
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
B. Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose to hydraulic control unit
(HCU).
See figure 2. Remove seal gasket.
C. Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393.
Secure adapter to VBV head hose using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N•m) of torque.
D. Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose to HCU. Remove seal gasket.
E. Install seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set, 1C9393.
Secure adapter to VBV rod hose using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N•m) of torque.
CAUTION
WARNING
G. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the
full open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly
throughout entire range of travel in both directions.
NOTE
H. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the
full closed position. Insert four rig pins, 1C9353. Rig pins shall insert freely through
unison ring and thread into the four threaded bosses at the 12:30, 2:00, 6:30, and 8:00
o'clock positions. See figure 3. VBV position indicator shall indicate 0 ± 1 percent
(full closed).
I. If VBV position indicator does not indicate 0 ± 1 percent (full closed), adjust the
rigging as follows (figure 4):
(2) Loosen jamnut on each of the six rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages.
(3) Remove six nuts and bolts attaching rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to
actuator rods.
WARNING
(4) Apply hydraulic pressure so that actuator rods are fully retracted (full closed).
(5) Turn rod-end bearing(s) in or out of the actuator clevis(es), as necessary, until
hole in rod-end bearing(s) aligns with hole in the clevis on actuator rod(s).
Tighten jamnut(s) finger-tight.
(7) Install six bolts and nuts that attach rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to
actuator rods. Tighten nuts to 125 lb in. (14.1 N•m) of torque.
(8) Ensure that a 0.055-inch (1.40 mm) diameter wire will not pass through witness
hole in actuator devises. If necessary, turn rod-end bearing and clevis on actuator
rod to position rod-end bearing centered in actuator clevis.
(9) Tighten jamnuts on rod-end bearing/actuator clevis linkages to 80 lb in. (9.0 N•m)
of torque. Safety cable or safety wire jamnuts to clevises.
WARNING
K. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to the
full open position. VBV position indicator shall indicate 100 ± 1 percent (full open).
CAUTION
N. Remove VBV hose adapters. Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets for
serviceability. Discard damaged seal gaskets.
O. Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto HCU rod-end port. Secure
VBV rod hose to HCU using washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N•m) of torque.
P. Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto HCU head-end port. Secure
VBV head hose to HCU using washers andbolts. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N•m) of torque.
Q. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install air collector access panels. See figure 1. Tighten
bolts and nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N•m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
BYPASS VALVE, BELLCRANK, AND
ACTUATING RING REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing a bypass valve, bellcrank,
and actuating ring.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Sprayable Air Drying Lubricant GE Spec. A50TF192,
Class B
Loctite 271 or European Loctite 275 GE Spec. A15B41A9
(MIL-S-46163A,
Type I, Grade A)
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 4
A. Remove access panels from front frame air collector, as required, to gain access.
(1) Position bottle jack with protective block to support accessory gearbox.
(2) Remove screws that secure engine thrust mount frame seals. Remove seals.
1
WARNING
(3) Using a 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist, position lift sling above air
collector. Secure sling arms to air collector lower section. Take up slack on hoist
to support air collector lower section.
(4) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts that secure air collector lower section.
(5) Slowly lower sling while pulling lower section clear of engine.
(6) Repeat steps (3), (4), and (5) to remove remaining lower section.
(1) Remove nut, washers, and bolt that secure clevis rod-end bearing to valve.
(2) Remove bolts (Section A-A) and washers that secure hinge to front frame.
Remove valve with attached hinge.
(3) Remove nuts, washers, screws, and bushings that secure hinge to valve. Separate
hinge from valve.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) to remove remaining 11 bypass valves.
2
D. Remove actuating ring and bellcranks (figure 3) as follows:
3
(1) Remove 12 bolts (View B) that secure bypass valve bellcrank to actuating ring.
(2) Remove six bolts that secure variable bypass valve (VBV) actuator bellcrank to
actuating ring.
Change 4 3
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
6 Change 4
NOTE
E. Remove bolts (Section A-A), flat washers, thrust washers, sleeves, and washers that
secure 18 bellcranks onto bearing. Remove bellcranks from bearing.
NOTE
F. Remove four bolts (View B) from connector plate (if present) at struts No. 2 and 5,
and remove actuating ring halves from front frame. Remove screw thread inserts.
G. Remove nut (figure 2, Detail C), bolt, and washer that secure clevis to bypass valve
bellcrank.
WARNING
(2) Align hinge with bypass valve. Install bushings, flange outside, through valve
and hinge.
CAUTION
The newer configuration VBV doors are aluminum and require
longer screws to ensure engagement with the self-locking nuts. The
steel and aluminum VBV doors are interchangeable on the engine,
but screws are not interchangeable. Longer screws are required for
use with aluminum VBV doors, but may be used with steel VBV
doors. Use of shorter screws with aluminum VBV doors will result in
damage to the engine.
(3) Install two screws, washers, and nuts to secure hinge to bypass valve. Install
screw through bushing from outside, washers and nuts inside. Ensure longer
screws are used with aluminum VBV doors, P/N L56212G01, or engine damage
will occur. Refer to GEK 105060, Figure 4.
Change 4 7
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) for remaining 11 bypass valve/hinge assemblies.
(1) Measure from aft center portion of valve bottom to seal retainer lip. Record as
dimension B.
4
(2) Subtract 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) from dimension B. Record difference as
dimension C.
(3) Measure bypass port rear face from inside outward. Using marking pen, mark rear
face at dimension C. DIM C ACTUAL:
WARNING
(1) Apply sprayable lubricant to seal on bypass valve and mating surface of front
frame.
(2) Apply molybdenum disulfide onto bolt threads. Install bypass valve/hinge
assembly in opening on front frame.
(3) Secure bypass valve/hinge assembly onto front frame using two bolts and
washers.
(5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) for remaining 11 bypass valve/hinge assemblies.
(1) Apply thin coating of molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto threads of rod-end
bearing.
(2) Thread jamnut onto rod-end bearing and install bearing to clevis. Thread bearing
into clevis approximately 0.375 inch (9.53 mm), until end of thread is flush with
underside of clevis. Tighten jamnut finger-tight.
8 Change 4
Change 4 9
(4) Align clevis with bellcrank angled leg and install bolt, washer, and nut. Install
washer under nut and bolthead on frame side of bellcrank.
(6) Repeat steps (1) through (5) for remaining 11 bellcrank and clevis assemblies.
(c) Push rod into actuator to full retracted position until contact is made.
CAUTION
Variable bypass valve actuator rods must remain in the full
retracted position for successful VBV components installation.
Adjust rod-end bearing length to align with actuator rod end;
do not extend VBV actuator rods to align with rod-end bear-
ings.
(2) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of four bolts (View B).
(3) Position actuating ring halves around front frame so halves connect at
approximately 2:00 and 8:00 o’clock positions (over struts No. 2 and 5).
NOTE
(4) Secure actuating ring halves together using connector plates and bolts. Longest
bolt goes through center hole of each connector plate. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
10 Change 4
(2) Install washer (Section A-A) and sleeve onto bearing. Install bellcrank assembly.
Install thrust washer on top of bellcrank.
(3) Secure bellcrank assembly onto bearing with washer and bolt. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) for remaining 11 bellcrank assemblies.
(5) Check that each bellcrank assembly operates freely, using finger force only.
NOTE
(1) Align actuating ring (figure 2, View B) to front frame with four locating pins,
1C9353P02. Insert locating pins through actuating ring and thread into front frame
at 4:00, 7:00, 10:00, and 12:30 o’clock positions. Tighten locating pins hand-tight;
do not force the assembly. This is the bypass valve rig position.
(2) Rotate bellcranks until straight leg engages into actuation ring.
(3) Apply Loctite 271 to threads of 18 bolts (figure 3, View B) that secure bellcranks to
actuation ring. Align bellcranks with holes in ring. Install bolts through ring and
bellcrank. Tighten bolts to 225 lb in. (25.4 N·m) of torque.
(1) Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant to threads of 12 bolts that secure rod-end
bearings to bypass valves.
(2) With actuator rods fully retracted and four locating pins installed, align rod-end
bearing to bypass valve clevis.
(3) Thread rod-end bearing to bellcrank clevis to align boltholes. Adjust so bolt can be
installed with center of bypass valve aft lip protruding into air flow path.
(4) Adjust rod-end bearings at each of 12 bellcranks to obtain required bypass valve
alignment. Check that there is full thread engagement of bearing into clevis,
approximately 0.375 inch (9.53 mm). Do not torque jamnuts at this time.
(5) Install bolt, washers, and nut to hold clevis to rod-end bearing. Bolthead is on right
side of valve, aft looking forward. Washer is under bolt and nut. See View B.
Change 4 11
(6) Tighten 12 nuts at valve and clevis pivot point to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque. Safety-cable or lockwire nuts.
(7) Position 12 rod-end bearings centered in clevises. This will prevent premature
failure of rod-end bearings.
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV head hose onto hydraulic control unit
(HCU). Remove seal gasket (figure 5).
5
(2) Install seal gasket, PN J219P04, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set,
1C9393. Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto head hose. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Remove bolts and washers that secure VBV rod hose onto HCU. Remove seal
gasket.
(4) Install seal gasket, PN J219P03, onto VBV hose adapter from adapter set,
1C9393. Using washers and bolts, secure adapter onto rod hose. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(5) Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, onto hose adapters. Tighten fittings to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure.
Eye protection is required. Relieve pressure before discon-
necting lines and fittings.
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to
full open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly
throughout entire range of travel in both directions.
12 Change 4
Change 4 13
(7) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VBV system to
full closed position. Variable bypass valve seal retainer lip shall align with mark
on inside lip of bleed port rear face.
CAUTION
(9) Disconnect hydraulic actuator unit from VBV hose adapter set.
(10) Remove VBV hose adapters (figure 5). Remove seal gaskets. Inspect seal gaskets
for serviceability. Discard damaged seal gasket.
(11) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, PN J219P03, onto HCU rod port.
Using washers and bolts, secure rod hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(12) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, PN J219P04, onto HCU head port. Using
washers and bolts, secure head hose to HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(2) Using a 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist, position lift sling above air
collector. Secure sling arms to lower section.
(5) Install bolts and nuts that secure lower section onto front frame forward flange.
Boltheads face aft.
(6) Install bolts that secure lower section onto front frame aft flange.
14 Change 4
(7) Install bolts and nuts that secure flanges. Boltheads face up or outboard.
(10) Tighten nuts that secure lower section onto front frame forward flange to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(11) Tighten bolts that secure lower section onto front frame aft flange to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(12) Repeat steps (1) through (11) for remaining lower section.
(13) Install thrust mount frame seals and secure with screws.
K. Using washers, bolts, and nuts, install access panels onto air collector. Tighten bolts
and nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV) ACTUATOR
COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 2 1
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable stator vane
(VSV) actuation components.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging WP 1411 00
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator WP 2411 00
Case Replacement
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Stator Vanes Replacement WP 2412 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B56
(RTV 106)
Soap Solution Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GP 460
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 2
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
CAUTION
NOTE
Ensure that lube oil supply is shut off before disconnecting tubing.
WARNING
(1) Position a waste fluid container beneath VSV actuator. Disconnect drain line
from drain adapter.
(2) Disconnect drain adapter from VSV actuator. Slide drain adapter away from
VSV actuator ports to expose coupling nut.
1
CAUTION
C. Remove bolts that secure actuator bracket to front frame. See figure 2.
Change 2 3
CAUTION
D. Remove nut and bolt that secure VSV actuator to bracket. Separate bracket from VSV
actuator.
E. Rotate guide 90 degrees. Remove guide and VSV actuator from actuation lever.
F. Remove fitting from VSV actuator. Remove and discard preformed packings.
See figure 1.
4 Change 2
Change 2 5
6 Change 2
WARNING
NOTE
B. Install fitting into VSV actuator. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
CAUTION
C. Position VSV actuator rod end over forward end of actuation lever. See figure 2.
D. Install guide onto end of lever. AFT mark on guide faces aft. Rotate guide 90 degrees.
E. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of actuator retaining bolt and actuator bracket
retaining bolts.
F. Slide VSV actuator so that guide fits into channel of bracket. Using bolt and nut,
secure VSV actuator to bracket. Bolthead faces forward. Tighten nut to 120-150 lb in.
(13.6-16.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Using bolts, secure actuator bracket onto front frame. Tighten bolts per figure 3 and
safety-wire.
3
Change 2 7
8 Change 2
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
H. Lubricate preformed packing, P/N 9365M41P117, with lubricating oil and install into
drain adapter. See figure 1.
CAUTION
I. Connect tubing coupling nut to VSV actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569.
Tighten reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Position waste fluid container under hydraulic control unit (HCU).
Change 2 9
10 Change 2
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do
not inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant.
Personal protective equipment required. Use mechanical
exhaust ventilation - if not available, use an approved respi-
rator.
CAUTION
(3) Disconnect VSV head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer.
Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect VSV rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure.
Eye protection is required. Relieve pressure before discon-
necting lines and fittings.
(5) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of
2 minutes. Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(6) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of
2 minutes. Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(9) Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(10) Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m)
of torque.
K. Slide drain adapter over coupling nut and connect to VSV actuator port. See figure 1.
Hand-tighten drain adapters.
Change 2 11
WARNING
(1) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line fitting
on drain adapter.
(2) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and monitor.
Pressure shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(3) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair as
required and repeat leak check.
(5) Connect drain line to drain adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no move-
ment with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
8. Variable Stator Vane Actuator Length Preset Adjustment Using Fixture, 1C9403.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
A. Connect hydraulic actuator unit, 1C3569, to actuator. Supply 250.0 psi (1,724 kPa) to
extend actuator to fully extended position. Maintain pressure throughout adjustment
procedure.
5
B. Loosen jamnut that secures actuator rod end.
C. Adjust rod end so that actuator slides freely onto fixture, 1C9403. See figure 5.
Change 2 13
B. Remove bolts, washers, bushings (stages 3-5), and nuts that secure clevis assemblies to
VSV connecting links. See figure 2.
C. Remove nut, washer, and spacer that secure actuation lever to aft mount and remove
lever.
E. Remove nuts and bolts that secure clevis assemblies to actuation lever.
14 Change 2
A. Install slot-loaded bearings into actuation lever (figure 2). Install seal boots over
bearings.
C. Secure clevis assemblies to actuation lever using nuts and bolts (boltheads next to
engine). Tighten nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
E. Apply thread lubricant to stud threads and install washer and nut. Tighten nut to
190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
E.A Apply thread lubricant to threads of rod-end bearing to connecting link bolts.
F. Align clevis rod-end bearings with connecting links and secure with bolts, washers,
and nuts. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0203, boltheads face forward. After
SB LM6000-IND-0203, boltheads face forward at stage IGV through stage 4 and bolt-
head faces aft at stage 5. One washer is under bolthead and one washer is under nut.
Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0203, bushing is between aft side of rod-end
bearing and connecting link on stages 3-5. After SB LM6000-IND-0203, bushing is
between aft side of rod-end bearing and connecting link on stages 3 and 4, and bushing
is between forward side of bearing and connecting link on stage 5.
G. Tighten rod-end bearing to connecting link nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
WARNING
I. Apply silicone rubber adhesive over exposed joint between lever, spacer, and aft
mount. Allow adhesive to cure for 8 hours minimum before engine operation.
Change 2 15
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not change adjustment of actuator rod end. Any movement
or adjustment requires that paragraph 8 of this work package
be performed and VSV actuator system rigging be checked.
16 Change 2
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV) RIGGING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for rigging the variable stator vane (VSV) system.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP 460
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
See figure 1.
WARNING
CAUTION
B. Install reducers, from adapter set, 1C9393, onto hydraulic actuator unit. Tighten
reducer to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Disconnect head tube from HCU. Install head tube onto -4 to -10 reducer.
Tighten tube to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
D. Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer. Tighten
tube to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Prior to performing this work package, ensure the following
conditions exist:
• VSV vane arms are installed in actuation rings.
• Actuation rings are secured to bridge connectors.
• Actuating arm levers are installed and secured properly.
• VSV actuators are installed and secured properly.
A. Position stator vanes to full open position (VSV actuator rods fully extended) by
applying hydraulic pressure.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
NOTE
All eight spacers per stage shall be adjusted at the same time.
B. Adjust actuation ring spacers. See figure 2.
C. Tighten locknuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Measure clearance between spacer and high pressure compressor (HPC) case
(dimension M). Clearance shall be within limits of figure 2.
Change 5 5
NOTE
Deleted.
(2) Deleted.
(3) Install clevis assembly into VSV clevis gage set, 2C6925.
(4) If necessary, loosen jamnut and adjust clevis assembly length to appropriate value
as specified in figure 3.
NOTE
(5) Tighten jamnut to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
6 Change 5
CAUTION
Ensure stage number is marked on each clevis assembly, improper
location of clevis assemblies will cause unpredictable engine
operation.
Change 5 7
NOTE
CAUTION
Ensure clevis assemblies are installed at the proper locations.
Failure to comply may cause unpredictable engine operation.
NOTE
Maintain 250 psig (1,724 kPa) pressure at head-end of actuators
while installing IGV through stage 5 clevises.
C. Install inlet guide vane (IGV) and stages 1 and 2 clevis assemblies as follows
(figure 4):
CAUTION
Jamnut safety wire shall not be broken when installing clevis
assemblies on actuating arm lever or bridge connector.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connector
bolts.
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail A) onto actuating arm lever, bolthead
facing inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
8 Change 5
(3) Using bolt, washers, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector, bolthead facing
forward. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut.
Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
D. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0203, install stage 3 through stage 5 clevis
assemblies as follows (figure 4):
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connector
bolts.
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail B) to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(3) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector,
bolthead facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod end and bridge
connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut.
Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
(1) For stage 3 and 4 clevis assemblies (detail A), proceed as follows:
(a) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connec-
tor bolts.
(b) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector,
bolthead facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod-end and
bridge connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes
under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
(a) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolt and bearing end to bridge con-
nector bolt.
(b) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 9
(c) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure bearing end to bridge connec-
tor, bolthead facing aft. Bushing goes between forward face of bearing end
and bridge connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes
under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
CAUTION
Ensure clevis assemblies are installed at the proper locations.
Failure to comply may cause unpredictable engine operation.
NOTE
A. Assemble clevis assemblies per figure 4. Do not tighten jamnuts at this time.
NOTE
B. Install stage IGV through stage 2 clevis assemblies as follows (figure 4):
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connector
bolts.
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail A) onto actuating arm lever, bolthead
facing inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
10 Change 5
(3) Adjust clevis length to correct any mismatch of rod-ends and connectors.
1
(4) Using bolt, washers, and nut, secure rod end onto bridge connector, bolthead
facing forward. One washer under bolthead, and one washer under nut. Tighten
nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge connector
bolts.
(2) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis (detail B) to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(3) Adjust clevis length to correct any mismatch of rod-ends and connectors.
(4) Using bolt, washers, bushings, and nut, secure rod end onto bridge connector,
bolthead facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod end and bridge
connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes under nut.
Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
D. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0203, install stage 3 through stage 5 clevis
assemblies as follows (figure 4A):
(1) For stage 3 and stage 4 clevis assemblies (detail A), proceed as follows:
(a) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolts and rod end to bridge con-
nector bolts.
(b) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(c) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure rod end to bridge connector,
bolthead facing forward. Bushing goes between aft face of rod-end and
bridge connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes
under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
(a) Apply thread lubricant to threads of clevis bolt and bearing end to bridge
connector bolt.
(b) Using bolt and nut, secure clevis to actuating arm lever, bolthead faces
inboard. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 11
(c) Using bolt, washers, bushing, and nut, secure bearing end to bridge connec-
tor, bolthead facing aft. Bushing goes between forward face of bearing end
and bridge connector. One washer goes under bolthead, and one washer goes
under nut. Tighten nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) above run-on torque.
F. Calibrate portable electronic protractor, 1C9365, to set master as follows (figure 5):
(1) Set 110v/60Hz, 230v/50Hz switch on back panel to proper setting for power
supply being used.
NOTE
P38 encoders should remain connected to readout unit to
ensure pre-rig check accuracy.
(2) Install encoder on set master ensuring tangs are engaged. Position locator arm at
zero degree. Install alignment pin through locator arm into zero degree hole of set
master.
(3) Connect encoder to digital position readout unit.
(4) Power up readout unit and allow to warm up for 15 minutes. When unit is
powered up, display will show P-UP. Press any R key to clear display.
12 Change 5
Change 5 13
Figure 4A. Vane Actuator Lever Assembly After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0203
14 Change 5
Change 5 15
NOTE
(1) Move locator arm to zero position. Press reset button to set readout counter to
zero.
CAUTION
• Do not make any mechanical adjustments to encoder or
locator arm. Move arm slowly; rapid movement will cause
inaccurate readings. Operate one complete cycle between
readouts.
(2) Move locator arm to each degree hole in set master and check readout of counter.
Readings shall be within 0.2 degree of degree mark on set master. If readings
cannot be met within 0.2 degree, check for proper setup and security of plugs in
receptacle. Replace encoder or digital position readout unit as required.
(3) Return to zero hole in set master. Zero hole shall give zero reading after other
settings have been checked.
G. Install P38 encoders on stage IGV through stage 2 vane stems as follows:
NOTE
(1) Install post locators onto four vane stems as listed in figure 7, table 1. Tighten
post locator to 5-10 lb in. (0.6-1.1 N·m) of torque. See figure 6.
16 Change 5
Change 5 17
(2) Install tang adapters over four post locators and engage adapter tangs in vane
arms. Scribe lines on tang adapters must face aft.
(3) Install arm locator onto second vane in either direction from the four vane
positions listed in figure 7, table 1.
(4) Install encoder over post locator. Engage slots in encoder with tangs of tang
adapter. Simultaneously, engage encoder arm with pin on arm locator.
(5) Measure stator vane angles per step I.
H. Install encoders on stages 3 through 5 vanes as follows (figure 6 and 7):
CAUTION
Use safety wire to ensure stator vane does not drop into stator
case when retaining nut is removed.
(1) Remove stator vane arm retaining nuts at locations where encoders will be
installed.
(2) Secure stator vane arm with nut. Tighten nut finger-tight.
(3) Install tang adapter over vane arm. Tighten setscrew to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
18 Change 5
(5) Install encoder over post locator. Engage slot in encoder with tang of tang adapter.
Simultaneously, engage arm of encoder with arm locator pin.
WARNING
(1) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to
full open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly
through entire range of travel in both directions.
NOTE
(2) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to
full closed position. Pushrods shall be positioned for maximum clearance to
actuation rings and actuator lever arms. Record average of encoder readouts. The
average reading shall be between upper and lower limits listed in figure 7, table 2.
(3) Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to
full open position. Pushrods shall be positioned for maximum clearance to actua-
tion rings and actuator lever arms. Record average of encoder readouts. The aver-
age reading shall be between upper and lower limits listed on figure 7, table 2.
NOTE
(4) Adjust rod ends to obtain required angles at both open and closed positions.
Change 5 19
(5) Check clevis assemblies for proper engagement of rod end bearing threads by
attempting to insert No. 56 drill (0.55 inch [1.4 mm] diameter) through witness
hole at each end of clevis assembly. Drill shall not pass through.
(6) Tighten jamnuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnuts.
CAUTION
Ensure stator vane does not drop into stator case when retaining
nut is removed.
(7) Remove encoders, post locators, tang adapter, arm locator, and retaining nut.
Install stator vane arm retaining nuts. Replace any nut when run-on torque falls
below 5 lb in. (0.6 N·m) or exceeds 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque. Tighten nuts to
85-95 lb in. (9.7-10.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
A. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full
open and full closed positions several times. System shall operate smoothly through
entire range of travel in both directions.
NOTE
VSV position indication is read at indicator on control panel.
Control panel must be powered up to read VSV position indication.
B. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full
closed position. VSV position indicator shall indicate 0 ± 1 percent.
C. Apply 200-250 psi (1,379-1,724 kPa) system pressure to actuate VSV system to full
open position. VSV position indicator shall indicate 100 ± 1 percent.
20 Change 5
See figure 1.
CAUTION
B. Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of
torque.
C. Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE STATOR VANE (VSV)
STAGES 3 TO 5 BUSHING REPLACEMENT
(HIGH-BOSS HPC STATOR CASE)
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC HIGH-BOSS CASE HPC STATOR
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instruction for replacement of high-boss case stages 3 to 5 high pressure
compressor (HPC) variable stator vane (VSV) bushings on engine while engine is installed in the
package.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter II
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Component WP 1410 00
Replacement
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Stator Vanes Replacement WP 2412 00
Gas Turbine External Inspection (Visual) WP 4012 00
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection WP 4028 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 5
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Anti-Seize Compound Milk of Magnesia
(Unflavored)
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
(R297P04 ALT)
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) Fed Spec SS-S-736
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
NOTE
Quantities below are for complete change for all three stages.
Smaller quantities are required if individual bushing changes
are accomplished.
Change 5 3
6. Recommended Material.
NOTE
4 Change 5
A. Before disassembly, inspect VSV actuation system for problems per applicable section
of WP 4012 00 and IGV to stage 5 stator vanes for off-schedule condition per
WP 4028 00. Obtain vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or locally manufacture vane tang
extension handle per figure 1.
(1) Remove any interfering tubing or electrical cables per appropriate work packages
(SWP 1913 02 and SWP 1913 04).
(a) Using marking pen, mark stage number on connecting links to be removed.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pin from stages 3 and 4 connecting links
and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for
reinstallation.
(c) Remove bolts from stage 5 connecting links and remove links from actuation
rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
1
Change 5 5
C. Remove any safety cable or safety wire from all bushings to be replaced. Ensure that all
safety-cable/safety-wire pieces are removed from VSV area to prevent binding in rotat-
ing elements and to prevent any cable or wire from entering the HPC flowpath (FOD
risk).
D. Starting at left horizontal splitline (ALF) and working clockwise, number all bushings
or housing using marking pen.
NOTE
In the event that bushings are replaced randomly, i.e., not a com-
plete stage is replaced, new bushings should be marked, using the
shallow vibropeen method, on the aft facing edge with the number
of engine hours at time of replacement. This will aid in identifying
replaced bushings and determining length of bushing service.
NOTE
(1) Note direction of V scribed in end of vane tang. Ensure apex of each V is pointing
forward.
6 Change 5
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
CAUTION
• Extreme caution must be used when disassembling vane bushings.
Once the bushing is removed, the vane may be easily dropped or
rotated in the case. This may cause damage to the vane which
would necessitate replacement. Care must be taken to maintain
control of the vane at all times while the bushing and attaching
hardware are removed, to avoid vane damage and need to remove
HPCS top case.
(2) Loosen locknut (1) with torque break wrench, 1C9428, and channel lock pliers
(figure 3). If torque break wrench, 1C9428, is not available, use standard socket
or wrench to loosen nut. Provide countertorque on lever arm body using soft jaw
pliers. Remove locknut and lever arm (2, figure 2 or figure 2.A). Inspect lever arm
for serviceability per WP 4012 00, table 8. Remove actuation ring sleeve (10)
from actuation ring (11).
CAUTION
NOTE
(3) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5) from upper case as
follows:
(a) Hold vane (9) with spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647. Break torque on jamnut
(3). Remove wrench.
(b) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, install vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or
locally manufactured tool onto end of vane stem.
Change 5 9
(c) Insert small blade-tipped screwdriver under spacer (5). Gently lift spacer and
alignment sleeve (4) while slowly sliding screwdriver in until it contacts vane
stem. Apply gentle force against the vane stem to hold vane (9) in case.
Remove vane retention fixture or locally manufactured tool.
(d) While still maintaining force on vane stem with screwdriver, remove jamnut
(3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(e) Reinstall vane retention fixture on vane stem and remove screwdriver.
(4) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5) from lower case as
follows:
(a) Hold vane (9) with spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647. Break torque on jamnut .
Remove wrench.
(b) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(c) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, install vane retention fixture, 1C9412, or
locally manufactured fixture onto end of vane stem.
10 Change 5
(a) Examine bushings (6) and securing bolts (7) to ensure that bolts are clamping
bushing in place. If bushings are loose, threaded holes in case must be
examined to determine if repair is needed.
(c) Remove bushings (6) from case. Bushings next to the borescope ports do not
have jackscrew holes: use a nylon drift and small screwdriver to loosen, as
required.
(d) If installed, remove and discard preformed packing (8). Packing will not be
reinstalled at assembly.
NOTE
(a) Examine housing (6) and securing bolts (7) to ensure that bolts are
clamping housing in place. If housings are loose, threaded holes in case must
be examined to determine if repair is needed.
(b) Remove bolts (7) securing housing (6) to case.
(c) Remove washer (8), housing (6), and bushing (13) from case. Retain
serviceable housing for reuse.
F. Clean HPC case in area of bushings, taking care to ensure that no material enters the
HPC case. Remove all preformed packing residue and inspect HPC case for damage
per WP 4012 00.
G. Inspect threaded holes in high-boss case (12). Ensure internal threads are not
damaged.
Change 5 11
NOTE
CAUTION
• Part Numbers are not marked on new bushings and are difficult
to differentiate by size and shape. Stage 5 bushings have a paint
marking on bushing barrel and stage 3 and 4 bushings have no
paint markings. Failure to assemble correctly may cause VSV
off-schedule operation.
• Part Numbers are not marked on new washers and are difficult
to differentiate by size and shape. Stage 5 washers have a paint
marking on washer face and stages 3 and 4 washers have no
paint markings. Failure to assemble correctly may cause VSV
off-schedule operation.
(a) Inspect housings (6) for wear or galling. Reuse only if there is no evidence of
wear or galling.
1 Insert barrel end of unpainted stages 3, and 4 flanged bushing (13), inside
barrel end of stages 3 and 4 compressor stator vane actuation housing (6).
2 Insert unpainted stages 3 and 4 flat washer (8), in recessed area on housings
assembled in previous step.
1 Insert barrel end of painted stage 5 flanged bushing (13), inside barrel end of
stage 5 compressor stator vane actuation housing (6).
12 Change 5
CAUTION
NOTE
(c) Verify that borescope ports in stages 3, and 4 are not blocked. If blocked, repeat
steps 1, and 2. If not blocked, perform remaining installation steps.
CAUTION
NOTE
There are 3 bolts, J644P04F, indicated in the parts list (paragraph 6).
These bolts are to be used, one per stage, in one of the bushings adjacent
to the borescope plug. This bolt is configured with a safety-wire hole
and is to be used to safety-wire the borescope plug in position.
(2) Visually check for evidence of locking feature on bolts (7). Lightly coat threads and
seating surfaces of bolts with thread lubricant.
(a) Install self-locking bolts by hand into case. If bolts can be run into case without
stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace bolt with new bolt.
Change 5 13
(b) If bolthole condition does not allow any self-locking fastener to engage
locking feature, remove adjacent self-locking bolt and install two
non-self-locking bolts so they may be safety-wired or safety-cabled together.
(3) Secure bushing (6) or housing (6) with two bolts (7), 1855M35P08 or J644P04F.
Install bolts by hand into case. Maximum installation torque of bolts is not to
exceed 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m). Tighten bolts to 85-105 lb in. (9.6-11.9 N·m) of torque.
Install non-self-locking bolts at borescope locations. Safety-wire or safety-cable
bolts to adjacent borescope plug.
CAUTION
NOTE
When installing spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3)
in upper case or lower case near split line, use step (4). When
installation is in lower case, use step (5).
(4) Install spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3) into upper case as follows:
(a) Using small blade tipped screwdriver, apply gentle force against vane stem to
hold vane (9) in position.
(b) Ensuring vane (9) does not turn, remove vane retention fixture.
(c) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment
sleeve faces forward.
(f) Install spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647, or soft jaw pliers over spacer (5) to
hold vane (9).
(g) Tighten jamnut (3) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Replace jamnut if
run-on torque exceeds 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
14 Change 5
(5) Install spacer (5), alignment sleeve (4), and jamnut (3) into lower case as follows:
(a) Ensuring vane does not turn, remove vane retention fixture.
(b) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment
sleeve faces forward.
(d) Install spacer spanner wrench, 2C6647, over spacer to hold vane.
(e) Tighten jamnut (3) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Replace jamnut if
run-on torque exceeds 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
CAUTION
Ensure that all stages 3-5 stator vanes have the letter V marked
at top of vane stem. Apex of V shall point forward. Failure to
comply may result in serious engine or part damage.
NOTE
A 0.0 lb in. (0.0 N·m) torque limit implies that vane can rotate
with a minimum force applied. However, it is important to
ensure that the vane assembly is not loose after assembly as a
result of a spacer that is too thin. Vane assembly should be tight
and should not rattle or demonstrate any looseness.
(6) Reset torque wrench to 10 lb in. (1.1 N·m). Manually rotate vane (9) several times
to ensure vane is seated. Ensure vane rotational torque is within range of 0 to 10
lb in. (0.0 to 1.1 N·m). Replace spacer (5) as required to obtain proper rotational
torque. A thinner spacer will reduce rotational torque. A thicker spacer will
increase rotational torque. Record rotational torque.
(7) Small changes to vane rotational torque may be accomplished by lapping spacer
(5) face, using a figure eight motion to remove material. Final surface finish shall
match original.
(8) Install new actuation ring sleeve (10) into actuation ring (11).
(9) Install lever arm (2) onto vane (9). Flat on lever arm faces forward. Insert pin end
of lever arm into actuation ring sleeve.
Change 5 15
(10) Install locknut (1) onto vane (9) by hand. If nuts can be run onto vane without
stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace nut with new nut. Tighten
locknut to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque. Take care when torquing nut to
prevent lever arm damage.
J. Once all bushings in a stage have been replaced, perform actuation ring pull check as
follows:
NOTE
There are two methods for performing the actuation ring pull
check. The first uses the torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408,
and the other uses a pull scale. Perform only the paragraphs
that correspond with the method used.
(1) Using torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408, perform pull check on stages 3-5 as
follows:
(a) Remove parts from vane near center of actuation ring per figure 4.
(b) Remove sleeve from actuation ring.
(c) Install dummy lever arm, locator plug, and drive adapter from fixture set,
1C9408.
(d) Tighten locator plug to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(e) Measure torque required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial
position per figure 5. On stages 3 and 4, torque required shall not exceed
140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in.
(23.0 N·m).
(2) Perform pull check using a pull scale as follows:
(a) Install slave bolt into actuation ring connecting link bolthole.
(b) Attach pull scale to slave bolt.
(c) Measure force required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial position
per figure 5. Multiply reading by the following scale factors to obtain torque:
16 Change 5
Change 5 17
(d) On stages 3 and 4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On
stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(3) Actuate each stage by hand, through complete open and closed mechanical travel.
Each stage shall move freely with no catching or binding.
(4) If pull check requirements are not met, perform the following:
(a) Check actuation ring spacer clearance per figure 6. Adjust as required.
(c) Check recorded rotational torques for individual vanes per step I.(6). Replace
or rework spacers on vanes with high torques per step I.(6) and (7).
(d) Repeat steps as necessary to bring torque values into range required. If the
requirements cannot be met, contact GE Engineering Support for further
direction.
(1) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for stage
being installed.
18 Change 5
(2) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces
forward. Install stage 3 and 4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins engage sleeves.
(3) Install bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire
or safety-cable.
(4) Ensure that all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and not engaged with
connecting link lightening holes.
M. Reconnect all piping and electrical connections per appropriate work packages.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS/STEAM FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacement of the fuel nozzles, supply hoses, steam
manifold, and natural gas manifold. (Reference kit, PN 682L179.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
CAUTION
NOTE
A. Disconnect natural gas and steam supply hose from fuel nozzle (figure 1).
B. Remove bolts that secure fuel nozzle onto compressor rear frame (CRF). Remove fuel
nozzle and seal ring. Discard seal ring.
1
C. If fuel nozzle bolt breaks during removal, use drilling fixture, 2C6883 (figure 2), to
remove broken bolt as follows:
(3) Install two bolts through body and into tapped holes. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Turn three lockscrews and lock body to fuel nozzle hole.
CAUTION
Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles into
position. Failure to comply may result in fuel nozzle tip or swirl cup
damage.
B. Install fuel nozzle through CRF. Align seal ring with fuel nozzle boltholes.
C. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant and install through fuel nozzle, seal ring, and
brackets, as required.
D. Tighten each fuel nozzle bolt to 50 lb in. (5.6 N·m) of torque, then tighten to
80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque.
E. After 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of
torque.
F. After an additional 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in.
(9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire bolts in groups of three.
G. Apply thread lubricant onto fuel nozzle inboard and outboard fitting threads.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
H. Connect steam supply hose onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
I. Connect natural gas supply hose onto fuel nozzle outboard fitting. Tighten coupling
nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas or steam supply hose from manifold (figure 1).
B. Disconnect natural gas or steam supply hose from fuel nozzle. Remove hose.
A. Apply thread lubricant onto manifold fitting and fuel nozzle fittings threads (figure 1).
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
B. Connect natural gas hose onto natural gas manifold and onto fuel nozzle outboard
fitting. Tighten coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
C. Connect steam supply hose onto steam supply manifold and onto fuel nozzle inboard
fitting. Tighten coupling nuts to 75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect natural gas or steam supply hoses from manifold upper section
(figure 3 or 4).
4
3
NOTE
WARNING
D. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist on manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be removed manually.
E. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts from manifold section mounting flanges (figure 5).
5
10
WARNING
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if lowering manifold lower section to
gain clearance for installation of manifold upper section.
Failure to comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
A. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist onto manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be installed manually. Install manifold upper section.
11
B. Install three adjacent bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers,
washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges (figure 5). Install five remaining
bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold upper section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold upper
section brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts, but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 12:00 o'clock position inlet flange bolts and nuts to 235-265 lb ft
(319-359 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
K. Install manifold vent fitting or plug into manifold. Tighten to 450-550 lb in.
(50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
L. Install packager-supplied vent line onto manifold vent fitting, if required. Tighten
coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
N. Install packager-supplied vent line onto manifold vent fitting, if required. Tighten
coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
12
O. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas and steam supply hose coupling nut threads.
CAUTION
P. Connect steam supply hose onto appropriate manifold. Tighten coupling nuts to
75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
Q. Connect natural gas supply hose onto appropriate manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at
each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction aft looking forward (ALF).
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction
ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas or steam supply hoses from manifold lower section
(figure 3 or 4).
NOTE
C. If installed, disconnect vent line at 6:00 o'clock position. If manifold will be replaced,
remove fitting or plug and seal. Discard seal.
13
CAUTION
Removing or changing position of packager-supplied stanchion
will require use of steam/fuel manifold shipping bracket fixture
assembly, 1C9381, to relocate fuel or steam manifold to proper
position.
E. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts from manifold section mounting flanges (figure 5)
WARNING
CAUTION
14
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if raising manifold upper section to
gain clearance for installation of manifold lower section.
Failure to comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through manifold section flanges (figure 5). Install nuts and
washers, washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges (figure 5). Install five remaining
bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower
section brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts, but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
15
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 6:00 o'clock position inlet flange nuts to 235-265 lb ft (319-359 N·m) of
torque, if required.
NOTE
L. Install manifold vent fitting or plug into manifold. Tighten to 450-550 lb in.
(50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
N. Install packager-supplied vent line onto manifold vent fitting, if required. Tighten
coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
O. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas or steam supply hose coupling nut threads.
CAUTION
P. Connect steam supply hose onto appropriate manifold. Tighten coupling nuts to
75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
Q. Connect natural gas supply hose onto appropriate manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction
ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
16
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
DUAL FUEL/WATER FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacement of fuel nozzles, supply hoses, liquid
fuel manifolds, natural gas manifold, fuel manifold block, and associated components.
(Reference kit, PN 682L178.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
A. If required, remove brackets with fuel nozzles per SWP 1913 02. Tag brackets for
location and orientation prior to removal.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
B. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle. See figure 1.
C. Loosen primary and secondary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts from primary and
secondary fuel supply manifolds.
CAUTION
D. Disconnect primary and secondary fuel feeder tubes from fuel nozzle.
E. Remove bolts that secure fuel nozzle onto compressor rear frame (CRF). Position fuel
feeder tubes clear of fuel nozzle. Remove fuel nozzle and seal ring. Discard seal ring.
1
F. If fuel nozzle bolt breaks during removal, use drilling fixture (figure 2), 2C6883, to
remove broken bolt as follows:
(3) Install two bolts through body and into tapped holes. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Turn three lockscrews and lock body to fuel nozzle hole.
CAUTION
Fuel nozzles, PN L31476P49 (blue band), is installed at positions 4
and 27 (aft looking forward). For remaining positions, use fuel
nozzle, PN L31496P48 (silver band). Do not mix fuel nozzles.
Failure to comply may result in engine damage.
CAUTION
Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles
into position. Failure to comply may result in fuel nozzle tip or
swirl cup damage.
B. Install fuel nozzle through CRF. Align seal ring with fuel nozzle boltholes.
C. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant and install through fuel nozzle, seal ring, and
brackets, as required.
D. Tighten each fuel nozzle bolt to 50 lb in. (5.6 N·m) of torque, then tighten to
80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque.
E. After 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of
torque.
F. After an additional 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in.
(9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire bolts in groups of three.
CAUTION
G. Connect primary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting and onto primary fuel
supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
I. Connect secondary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto secondary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
L. Apply thread lubricant onto fuel nozzle natural gas fitting threads.
CAUTION
M. Connect natural gas supply hose onto fuel nozzle outboard fitting. Tighten coupling
nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from natural gas manifold. See figure 1.
B. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle. Remove hose.
A. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas hose coupling nut threads.
B. Connect natural gas supply hose onto natural gas manifold and onto fuel nozzle
outboard fitting.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel feeder tube from fuel supply manifold.
See figure 1.
CAUTION
B. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel feeder tube from fuel nozzle. Remove fuel
feeder tube.
CAUTION
A. Connect primary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting and onto primary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
C. Connect secondary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto secondary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hose from primary or secondary fuel
supply manifold.
B. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hose from fuel manifold block. Remove
hose.
10
A. Apply thread lubricant onto primary and secondary fuel supply hose coupling nut
threads. See figure 1.
B. Connect primary or secondary fuel supply hose onto primary or secondary fuel supply
manifold.
C. Connect primary or secondary fuel supply hose onto appropriate fuel manifold block
fitting.
CAUTION
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft
(75-88 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold upper section. See figure 3.
11
12
NOTE
WARNING
Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds (37 kg).
Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual removal of
manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine damage or
serious injury.
D. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist onto manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be removed manually.
13
CAUTION
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift
parts. Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally
move or fall, they can cause an injury or kill you.
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if lowering manifold lower section to
gain clearance for installation of manifold upper section.
Failure to comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
A. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist onto manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be installed manually. Install manifold upper section. See figure 3.
14
B. Install three adjacent bolts through upper manifold section flanges, detail A. Install
nuts and washers, washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert
gasket.
C. Install seal gaskets between upper manifold section flanges. Install remaining five
bolts through manifold section flanges. Secure with nuts and washers, washers under
nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold brackets, upper section, with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold brackets,
upper section, to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install remaining five
bolts through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 12:00 o'clock position inlet flange nuts to 235-265 lb ft (319-359 N·m) of
torque.
NOTE
L. Install plug into natural gas manifold. Tighten to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
15
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto natural gas manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction aft looking forward (ALF).
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction
ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold lower section. See figure 3.
NOTE
CAUTION
Removing or changing position of packager supplied stan-
chion will require use of steam/fuel manifold shipping bracket
fixture assembly, 1C9381, to relocate natural gas manifold to
proper position.
16
WARNING
Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not deform hoses if raising manifold upper section to gain
clearance for removal of manifold lower section. Failure to
comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
WARNING
Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if raising manifold upper section to
gain clearance for installation of manifold lower section.
Failure to comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through lower manifold section flanges, detail A. Install nuts
and washers, washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges. Install remaining five bolts
through lower manifold section flanges, detail A. Secure with nuts and washers,
washers under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
17
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold brackets, lower section, with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold brackets,
lower section, to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install remaining five bolts
through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 6:00 o'clock position inlet flange nuts to 235-265 lb ft (319-359 N·m) of
torque.
NOTE
L. Install plug into manifold. Tighten to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto natural gas manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
18
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hoses from primary or secondary fuel
supply manifold. See figure 3, detail B.
NOTE
B. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers from primary or secondary fuel supply manifold
section connectors.
C. Remove clamps that secure primary and secondary fuel supply manifolds together.
CAUTION
D. Loosen primary or secondary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts from fuel nozzle.
E. Disconnect fuel feeder tubes from primary or secondary fuel supply manifold.
Remove primary or secondary fuel supply manifold sections.
A. Install one primary or secondary fuel supply manifold section onto appropriate
primary or secondary fuel feeder tubes as noted during removal. Orient manifold
section connector as noted at removal. Do not tighten coupling nuts at this time.
19
CAUTION
C. Connect remaining primary and secondary fuel feeder tubes onto primary and
secondary fuel supply manifold. Tighten all fuel feeder tube coupling nuts fingertight.
D. Tighten primary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts at fuel nozzles as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
E. Tighten secondary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts at fuel nozzles as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
F. Tighten primary and secondary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts at primary or secondary
fuel supply manifold as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
G. Tighten primary or secondary fuel supply manifold section connecting nuts as follows:
20
(2) Loosen until nuts are free running and retighten to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
H. Apply thread lubricant onto primary and secondary fuel supply hose coupling nut
threads.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
I. Install primary or secondary fuel supply hoses onto primary or secondary fuel supply
manifold. Tighten primary fuel supply hose coupling nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
K. Install clamps per SWP 1913 02 to hold primary and secondary fuel supply manifolds
together.
A. Disconnect primary and secondary fuel supply hoses from primary and secondary fuel
outlet adapters. See figure 4.
4
B. Disconnect primary fuel inlet hoses from primary fuel inlet adapters per packager's
manual.
21
22
C. Disconnect secondary fuel inlet and water supply inlet hoses from secondary fuel inlet
tee fitting, if installed, per packager's manual.
D. Disconnect pressure sensing hoses from primary and secondary fuel supply inlet
pressure sensing adapters.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installa-
tion. Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
E. Tag and disconnect electrical connectors from primary and secondary fuel
temperature sensors.
F. Remove bolt and clamp that secure secondary fuel inlet tube onto bracket.
G. Remove bolts that secure fuel manifold block onto bracket. Remove fuel manifold
block.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect secondary fuel inlet tube from secondary fuel inlet tube adapter.
See figure 4.
C. Remove secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapter. Remove and discard
seal.
F. Remove primary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapter. Remove and discard seal.
23
A. Install new seals onto secondary fuel outlet adapters. See figure 4. Install adapters into
secondary fuel outlet ports. Tighten adapters to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of
torque.
B. Install new seals onto primary fuel outlet adapters. Install adapters into primary fuel
outlet ports. Tighten adapters to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
C. Install new seal onto primary fuel temperature sensor. Install sensor into primary fuel
temperature sensor port. Tighten sensor to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Install new seal onto primary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapter. Install adapter
into primary fuel pressure sensing port. Tighten adapter to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
E. Install new seal onto primary fuel inlet adapter. Install adapter into primary fuel inlet
port. Tighten adapter to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
F. Install new seal onto secondary fuel temperature sensor. Install sensor into secondary
fuel temperature sensor port. Tighten sensor to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
G. Install new seal onto secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapter. Install
adapter into secondary fuel pressure sensing port. Tighten adapter to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
H. Install new seal onto secondary fuel inlet tube adapter. Install adapter into secondary
fuel inlet port. Tighten adapter to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque.
I. Install secondary fuel inlet tube onto secondary fuel inlet tube adapter. Do not tighten
coupling nut at this time.
A. Install fuel manifold block onto bracket with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Secure secondary fuel inlet tube clamp onto fuel manifold block mount bracket with
bolt. Tighten bolt to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
24
CAUTION
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
E. Apply thread lubricant onto primary and secondary fuel supply hose coupling nut
threads.
25
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
F. Connect primary fuel supply hoses onto primary fuel outlet adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft
(75-88 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
G. Connect secondary fuel supply hoses onto secondary fuel outlet adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
H. Connect packager-supplied primary and secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing
hoses to primary and secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
I. If required, connect water supply hose onto secondary fuel inlet tee fitting. Tighten
coupling nut to 75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
26
J. Connect primary fuel supply inlet hose onto primary fuel inlet adapter. Tighten
coupling nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
K. Connect secondary fuel supply inlet hose onto secondary fuel inlet tee fitting. Tighten
coupling nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
27/(28 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS/WATER FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacement of fuel nozzles, supply hoses, water
manifold, natural gas manifold, water manifold block, and associated components. (Reference
kit, PN 682L177.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 301500
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
CAUTION
NOTE
B. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle (figure 1).
1
C. Loosen water feeder tube coupling nuts from water supply manifold.
CAUTION
E. Remove bolts that secure fuel nozzle onto compressor rear frame (CRF). Position
water feeder tube clear of fuel nozzle. Remove fuel nozzle and seal ring. Discard seal
ring.
F. If fuel nozzle bolt breaks during removal, use drilling fixture, 2C6883 (figure 2), to
remove broken bolt as follows:
(3) Install two bolts through body and into tapped holes. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Turn three lockscrews and lock body to fuel nozzle hole.
CAUTION
Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles into
position. Failure to comply may result in fuel nozzle tip or swirl cup
damage.
B. Install fuel nozzle through CRF. Align seal ring with fuel nozzle boltholes.
C. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant and install through fuel nozzle, seal ring, and
brackets, as required.
D. Tighten each fuel nozzle bolt to 50 lb in. (5.6 N·m) of torque, then tighten to
80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque.
E. After 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of
torque.
F. After an additional 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in.
(9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire bolts in groups of three.
CAUTION
G. Connect water feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto water supply
manifold.
H. Tighten coupling nut at fuel nozzle to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
I. Tighten coupling nut at water supply manifold to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
CAUTION
K. Connect natural gas supply hose onto fuel nozzle outboard fitting. Tighten coupling
nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb
ft (106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
L. If required, install cap onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting (primary circuit). Tighten cap to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from natural gas manifold (figure 1).
B. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle. Remove hose.
7
A. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads (figure 1).
B. Connect natural gas supply hose onto natural gas manifold and onto fuel nozzle
outboard fitting.
CAUTION
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb
ft (106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
A. Disconnect water feeder tube from water supply manifold (figure 1).
CAUTION
B. Disconnect water feeder tube from fuel nozzle. Remove water feeder tube.
A. Connect water feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto water supply
manifold (figure 1).
CAUTION
B. Tighten coupling nut at fuel nozzle to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque. Install
water feeder tube.
C. Tighten coupling nut at water supply manifold to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque. Install water feeder tube.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect water supply hose from water supply manifold (figure 1).
B. Disconnect water supply hose from water manifold block. Remove hose.
A. Apply thread lubricant onto water supply hose coupling nut threads (figure 1).
B. Connect water supply hose onto appropriate water supply manifold fitting.
C. Connect water supply hose onto appropriate water manifold block fitting.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
D. Tighten water supply hose coupling nuts to 75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold upper section (figure 3).
3
10
NOTE
11
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
D. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist on manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be removed manually.
NOTE
12
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
installation of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in
engine damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
A. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist onto manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be installed manually. Install upper manifold section.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers,
washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
C. Install seal gasket between manifold section flanges (figure 3, detail A). Install five
remaining bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers
under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange bolts and nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of
torque.
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto upper manifold section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto upper manifold
section brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
13
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 12:00 o'clock position inlet flange bolts and nuts to 235-265 lb ft
(319-359 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
L. Install plug into manifold. Tighten plug to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
M. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads.
CAUTION
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto upper manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction aft looking forward (ALF).
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb
ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
14
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold lower section (figure 3).
NOTE
NOTE
15
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds
(47 kg). Manifold section without inlet flange weighs
81 pounds (37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are avail-
able for manual removal of manifolds. Failure to comply
may result in engine damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if raising manifold upper section to gain
clearance for installation of manifold lower section. Failure to
comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers,
washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
16
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges (figure 3, detail A). Install five
remaining bolts through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers
under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange bolts and nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of
torque.
E. Connect packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten bolts that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower section
brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts, but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install five bolts and nuts
through inlet flanges. Secure using nuts.
I. Tighten 6:00 o'clock position inlet flange bolts and nuts to 235-265 lb ft
(319-359 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
L. Install plug into manifold. Tighten plug to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
M. Apply thread lubricant to natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads.
17
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto lower manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as
follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect water supply hoses from water supply manifold (figure 3).
NOTE
B. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers from water manifold section connectors.
C. If installed, remove clamps that secure water supply manifold to support brackets.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel nozzle fittings are restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
E. Disconnect water feeder tube from water supply manifold. Remove water supply
manifold sections.
18
A. Install one water manifold section onto appropriate water feeder tubes. Orient
manifold section connector as noted at removal. Do not tighten coupling nuts at this
time.
B. Connect remaining water manifold section onto installed manifold section. Secure
with bolts, nuts, and washers, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
C. Connect remaining water feeder tubes onto water supply manifold. Tighten all water
feeder tube coupling nuts finger-tight.
D. Tighten water feeder tube coupling nuts at fuel nozzles to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
E. Tighten water feeder tube coupling nuts at water supply manifold to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
F. Tighten water supply manifold section connecting nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
G. Apply thread lubricant onto water supply hose coupling nut threads.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
H. Install water supply hoses onto water supply manifold. Tighten water supply hose
coupling nuts to 75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
I. If required, install clamps to secure water supply manifold onto support brackets.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect water supply hoses from water supply adapters (figure 4).
4
B. Disconnect water supply inlet hose from water supply inlet adapter per packager's
manual.
C. Disconnect pressure sensing hose from pressure sensing adapter per packager's
manual.
19
20
CAUTION
CAUTION
Ensure water manifold block is secured in vise or other suitable
restraining device when installing adapters and temperature sen-
sors. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
A. Install new seals onto water supply adapters. Install adapters into water supply ports.
Tighten adapters to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque.
B. Install new seals onto temperature sensors. Install temperature sensors into
temperature sensor ports. Tighten sensors to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install new seal onto pressure sensing adapter. Install adapter into pressure sensing
port. Tighten adapter to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
D. Install new seal onto water supply inlet adapter. Install adapter into water supply inlet
port. Tighten adapter to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque.
E. Install new seals onto primary fuel outlet port plugs. Install plugs into primary fuel
outlet ports. Tighten plugs to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
F. Install new seal onto primary fuel pressure sensing port plug. Install plug into primary
fuel pressure sensing port. Tighten plug to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
21
G. Install new seal onto primary fuel inlet port plug. Install plug into primary fuel inlet
port. Tighten plug to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
A. Using bolts, install water manifold block onto bracket. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling back shell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
D. Connect water supply hoses onto water supply adapters. Tighten coupling nuts to
75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
F. Connect water supply hose onto water supply inlet adapter. Tighten coupling nut to
75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
22
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LIQUID FUEL/WATER FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacement of fuel nozzles, supply hoses, liquid
fuel manifolds, fuel manifold block, and associated components. (Reference kit, PN 682L175.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
A. If required, remove brackets with fuel nozzles per SWP 1913 02. Tag brackets for
location and orientation prior to removal.
CAUTION
D. Disconnect primary and secondary fuel feeder tubes from fuel nozzle.
E. Remove bolts that secure fuel nozzle onto compressor rear frame (CRF). Position fuel
feeder tubes clear of fuel nozzle. Remove fuel nozzle and seal ring. Discard seal ring.
F. If fuel nozzle bolt breaks during removal, use drilling fixture, 2C6883 (figure 2), to
remove broken bolt as follows:
(2) Align drill bushing hole over broken bolt and align other two holes with tapped
holes in pad.
(3) Install two bolts through body and into tapped holes. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Turn three lockscrews and lock body to fuel nozzle hole.
CAUTION
Fuel nozzles, PN L31476P49 (blue band), is installed at positions
4 and 27 (aft looking forward). For remaining positions, use fuel
nozzle, PN L31476P48(silver band). Do not mix fuel nozzles.
Failure to comply may result in engine damage.
CAUTION
Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles
into position. Failure to comply may result in fuel nozzle tip or
swirl cup damage.
B. Install fuel nozzle through CRF. Align seal ring with fuel nozzle boltholes.
C. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant and install through fuel nozzle, seal ring, and
brackets, as required. See SWP 1913 02 for bracket installation.
5
D. Tighten each fuel nozzle bolt to 50 lb in. (5.6 N·m) of torque, then tighten to
80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque.
E. After 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of
torque.
F. After an additional 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in.
(9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire bolts in groups of three.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel nozzle fittings are restrained when tightening
coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
G. Connect primary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting and onto primary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
I. Connect secondary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto secondary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
L. Install cap onto fuel nozzle outboard fitting, if required. Tighten cap to 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel feeder tube from fuel supply manifold.
See figure 1.
CAUTION
B. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel feeder tube from fuel nozzle. Remove fuel
feeder tube.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel nozzle fittings are restrained when tightening
coupling nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
A. Connect primary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle inboard fitting and onto primary
fuel supply manifold. See figure 1.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
7
C. Connect secondary fuel feeder tube onto fuel nozzle center fitting and onto secondary
fuel supply manifold.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
WARNING
• Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to
the skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive
tract. Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swal-
low liquid, and don't breathe mist or vapor.
CAUTION
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hose from fuel supply manifold.
See figure 1.
B. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hose from fuel manifold block. Remove
hose.
A. Connect primary or secondary fuel supply hose to appropriate fuel supply manifold.
See figure 1.
B. Connect primary or secondary fuel supply hose to appropriate fuel manifold block
fitting.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling nut.
Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to comply may
result in part damage.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to
55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to
78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Disconnect primary or secondary fuel supply hoses from primary or secondary fuel
supply manifold. See figure 3.
3
NOTE
B. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers from primary or secondary manifold section
connectors.
C. Remove clamps that secure primary and secondary fuel supply manifolds together.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel nozzle fittings are restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
D. Loosen primary or secondary fuel feeder tube coupling nuts from fuel nozzle.
E. Disconnect fuel feeder tube from primary or secondary fuel manifold. Remove
primary or secondary fuel supply manifold sections.
10
11
A. Install one primary or secondary fuel supply manifold section onto appropriate fuel
feeder tubes. Orient section connector as noted at disassembly. Do not tighten
coupling nuts at this time.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel manifolds are supported while attaching fuel feeder
tubes.
C. Connect remaining fuel feeder tubes onto fuel supply manifold. Tighten all fuel feeder
tube coupling nuts finger-tight.
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque at
each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction aft looking forward (ALF).
12
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque to the
coupling nut in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a
clockwise direction ALF.
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque at
each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of torque to the
coupling nut in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a
clockwise direction ALF.
F. Tighten primary and secondary feeder tube coupling nuts at primary or secondary fuel
supply manifold as follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque at
each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque to the
coupling nut in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a
clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
13
CAUTION
I. Install primary or secondary fuel supply hoses onto appropriate fuel supply manifold.
Tighten primary fuel supply hose coupling nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
(2) Loosen until nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
K. Install clamps to hold primary and secondary fuel supply manifolds together.
WARNING
• Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to
the skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive
tract. Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swal-
low liquid, and don't breathe mist or vapor.
A. Disconnect primary and secondary fuel supply hoses from fuel manifold block.
See figure 4.
4
B. Disconnect primary fuel inlet hoses from primary fuel inlet adapters per packager's
manual.
14
15
C. Disconnect secondary fuel supply inlet and water supply inlet hoses from fuel inlet tee
fitting, if installed, per packager's manual.
D. Disconnect pressure sensing hoses from primary and secondary fuel supply inlet
pressure sensing adapters.
WARNING
CAUTION
E. Tag and disconnect electrical connectors from primary and secondary fuel temperature
sensors.
F. Remove bolt and clamp that secure secondary fuel inlet tube onto bracket.
G. Remove bolts that secure fuel manifold block onto bracket. Remove fuel manifold
block.
CAUTION
Ensure fuel manifold block is secured in vise or other suitable
restraining device when removing adapters and temperature sensors.
Failure to comply may result in part damage.
A. Disconnect secondary fuel inlet tube from secondary fuel inlet adapter. See figure 4.
C. Remove secondary fuel inlet pressure sensing adapter. Remove and discard seal.
F. Remove primary fuel inlet pressure sensing adapter. Remove and discard seal.
16
A. Install new seals onto secondary fuel outlet adapters. Install adapters into secondary
fuel outlet ports. Tighten adapters to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque.
B. Install new seals onto primary fuel outlet adapters. Install adapters into primary fuel
outlet ports. Tighten adapters to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
C. Install new seal onto primary fuel temperature sensor. Install sensor into primary fuel
temperature sensor port. Tighten sensor to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Install new seal onto primary fuel pressure sensing adapter. Install adapter into pri-
mary fuel pressure sensing port. Tighten adapter to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m) of
torque.
E. Install new seal onto primary fuel inlet adapter. Install adapter into primary fuel inlet
port. Tighten adapter to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
F. Install new seal onto secondary fuel temperature sensor. Install sensor into secondary
fuel temperature sensor port. Tighten sensor to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
G. Install new seal onto secondary fuel pressure sensing adapter. Install adapter into sec-
ondary fuel pressure sensing port. Tighten adapter to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m)
of torque.
H. Install new seal onto secondary fuel inlet adapter. Install adapter into secondary fuel
inlet port. Tighten adapter to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque.
I. Install secondary fuel inlet tube onto secondary fuel inlet adapter. Do not tighten cou-
pling nut at this time.
A. Using bolts, install fuel manifold block onto bracket. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Using bolt, secure secondary fuel inlet tube clamp onto fuel manifold block mount
bracket. Tighten bolt to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
17
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb
ft (106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
18
F. Connect primary fuel supply hoses onto primary fuel supply adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft
(75-88 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
G. Connect secondary fuel supply hoses onto secondary fuel supply adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
H. Connect packager-supplied primary and secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing
hoses onto primary and secondary fuel supply inlet pressure sensing adapters. Tighten
coupling nuts as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque in the
tightening direction.
I. If required, connect water supply hose onto secondary fuel supply inlet tee fitting.
Tighten coupling nut to 75-91 lb ft (102-123 N·m) of torque.
19
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
K. Connect secondary fuel supply inlet hose onto secondary fuel supply inlet tee fitting.
Tighten coupling nut as follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
20
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacement of the fuel nozzles, supply hoses, and
natural gas manifold. (Reference kit, PN 682L176.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
CAUTION
NOTE
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle (figure 1).
B. Remove bolts that secure fuel nozzle onto compressor rear frame (CRF). Remove fuel
nozzle and seal ring. Discard seal ring.
1
C. If fuel nozzle bolt breaks during removal, use drilling fixture, 2C6883 (figure 2), to
remove broken bolt as follows:
(2) Align drill bushing hole over broken bolt and align other two holes with tapped
holes in pad.
(3) Install two bolts through body and into tapped holes. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(4) Turn three lockscrews and lock body to fuel nozzle hole.
CAUTION
Use care when installing fuel nozzles. Do not force fuel nozzles into
position. Failure to comply may result in fuel nozzle tip or swirl cup
damage.
B. Install fuel nozzle through CRF. Align seal ring with fuel nozzle boltholes.
C. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant and install through fuel nozzle, seal ring, and
brackets, as required.
D. Tighten each fuel nozzle bolt to 50 lb in. (5.6 N·m) of torque, then tighten to 80-90
lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque.
E. After 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in. (9.0-10.2 N·m) of
torque.
F. After an additional 5 minutes, tighten fuel nozzle bolts again to 80-90 lb in.
(9.0-10.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire bolts in groups of three.
G. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads.
H. Connect natural gas supply hose onto fuel nozzle fitting. Tighten coupling nut as
follows:
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nut by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when loosening coupling nut.
Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to comply may
result in part damage.
B. Disconnect natural gas supply hose from fuel nozzle. Remove hose.
A. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads (figure 1).
B. Connect natural gas supply hose to manifold and onto fuel nozzle fitting.
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling nut.
Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to comply may
result in part damage.
(2) Loosen until coupling nuts are free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque.
(3) Check nuts by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque in the tightening
direction.
6
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold upper section (figure 3).
3
NOTE
C. If manifold will be replaced, remove manifold vent fitting and seal. Discard seal.
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds (37
kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
D. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist on manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be removed manually.
E. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts from manifold section mounting flanges.
NOTE
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds
(37 kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
installation of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in
engine damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
A. Install sling and 250-pound (113 kg) capacity hoist onto manifold upper section, if
enclosure configuration permits. If sling and hoist cannot be installed, manifold
section must be installed manually. Install manifold upper section.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through upper and lower manifold section flanges
(figure 3). Install nuts and washers, washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between
flanges to insert gasket.
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Install packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold upper section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold upper
section brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts, but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through inlet flanges and secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 12:00 o'clock position inlet flange nuts to 235-265 lb ft (319-359 N·m) of
torque, if required.
NOTE
L. Install plug into manifold. Tighten plug to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
M. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads.
CAUTION
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto manifold. Tighten coupling nuts as follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction aft looking forward (ALF).
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft
(106-125 N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction
ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise
direction ALF.
10
CAUTION
A. Disconnect natural gas supply hoses from manifold lower section (figure 3).
NOTE
D. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts from manifold section mounting flanges.
NOTE
11
WARNING
• Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds (37
kg). Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual
removal of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine
damage or serious injury.
CAUTION
WARNING
Manifold section with inlet flange weighs 104 pounds (47 kg).
Manifold section without inlet flange weighs 81 pounds (37 kg).
Ensure adequate personnel are available for manual installation
of manifolds. Failure to comply may result in engine damage or
serious injury.
CAUTION
• Do not deform hoses if raising manifold upper section to gain
clearance for installation of manifold lower section. Failure to
comply may result in hose or fuel nozzle damage.
B. Install three adjacent bolts through manifold section flanges (figure 3). Install nuts and
washers, washers under nuts. Leave sufficient gap between flanges to insert gasket.
12
C. Install seal gaskets between manifold section flanges. Install five remaining bolts
through manifold section flanges. Install nuts and washers, washers under nuts.
D. Tighten manifold section flange nuts to 220-250 lb in. (24.9-28.2 N·m) of torque.
E. Install packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower section brackets with
packager-supplied fasteners.
F. Tighten fasteners that secure packager-supplied mount braces onto manifold lower
section brackets to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
G. Install three adjacent bolts through inlet flanges. Install nuts, but leave sufficient gap
between flanges to insert gasket.
H. Install packager-supplied seal gasket between inlet flanges. Install remaining five
bolts through inlet flanges. Secure with nuts.
I. Tighten 6:00 o'clock position inlet flange nuts to 235-265 lb ft (319-359 N·m) of
torque, if required.
NOTE
L. Install plug into manifold. Tighten plug to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
M. Apply thread lubricant onto natural gas supply hose coupling nut threads.
13
CAUTION
Ensure flexible hose is restrained when tightening coupling nut.
Painted stripes on hose shall not be twisted. Failure to comply may
result in part damage.
N. Connect natural gas supply hoses onto manifold. Tightening coupling nuts as follows:
(1) Assemble and tighten coupling nuts to 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque at each
joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(2) Loosen until coupling nut is free running and retighten to 78-92 lb ft (106-125
N·m) of torque at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise direction ALF.
(3) Check joint by reapplying 78-92 lb ft (106-125 N·m) of torque to the coupling nut
in the tightening direction at each joint sequentially around in a clockwise|
direction ALF.
14
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
ULTRAVIOLET FLAME SENSOR, FLAME SENSOR
SIGHT GLASS, AND FLAME SENSOR BRACKET
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. If replacing flame sensor, L44819, or cooling can, L44821, go to SWP 1515 01.
B. This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of ultraviolet
flame sensor, L28490, flame sensor sight glass, and flame sensor bracket. Flame
sensors are located at the 4:00 o'clock and 10:00 o'clock positions.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Ultraviolet Flame Sensor, L44819, Flame Sensor Sight Glass,
and Flame Sensor Bracket Replacement SWP 1515 01
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
WARNING
A. Disconnect flame sensor integral lead from packager's junction box per packager's
manual.
B. Remove bolts and clamps that secure flame sensor integral lead to brackets.
CAUTION
C. Disconnect cooling air supply tube from cooling air fitting on cooling can.
D. Remove bolts that secure cooling can to flame sensor bracket. Slide cooling can up
onto integral lead.
See figure 1.
A. Install new gasket and flame sensor onto flame sensor bracket.
B. Slide cooling can along integral lead over flame sensor. Secure cooling can and flame
sensor to flame sensor bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
C. Connect cooling air supply tube onto cooling air fitting on cooling can. Tighten
coupling nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
D. Install integral lead to brackets with clamps and bolts per SWP 1913 02. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
E. Connect flame sensor integral lead to packager's junction box per packager's manual.
See figure 2.
B. Remove bolts that secure flame sensor bracket to support bracket. Remove flame
sensor bracket.
2
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to support bracket with two bolts. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
See figure 2.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor sight glass into compressor rear frame. Tighten sight glass to
315-345 lb in. (35.6-39.0 N·m) of torque.
B. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to support bracket with two bolts. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
ULTRAVIOLET FLAME SENSOR, L44819, FLAME
SENSOR SIGHT GLASS, AND FLAME SENSOR
BRACKET REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of ultraviolet flame sensor,
L44819, flame sensor sight glass, and flame sensor bracket. Flame sensors are located at the
4:00 o'clock and 10:00 o'clock positions.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
WARNING
A. Disconnect interconnecting cable from packager's junction box per packager's manual.
CAUTION
D. Disconnect cooling air supply tube from cooling air fitting on air cooling can.
E. Loosen adjustable clamp screws that secure cooling can to flame sensor. Slide cooling
can off flame sensor.
G. Remove three bolts that secure flame sensor tube mount onto flame sensor bracket.
Remove tube mount and gasket. Discard gasket.
1
7. Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Install gasket and flame sensor tube mount onto flame sensor bracket. Secure tube
mount to flame sensor bracket with three bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Thread flame sensor onto tube mount. Hand-tighten flame sensor to until snug on tube
mount. Tighten flame sensor two and one-half turns.
C. Install cooling can onto flame sensor and tighten screws on adjustable clamps.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
D. Connect cooling air supply tube onto cooling air fitting on cooling can. Tighten
coupling nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
E. Install interconnecting cable to brackets with clamps and bolts per SWP 1913 02.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
See figure 2.
B. Remove bolts that secure flame sensor bracket to support bracket. Remove flame
sensor bracket.
2
9. Flame Sensor Bracket Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to support bracket with two bolts. Tighten
bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
See figure 2.
See figure 2.
A. Install flame sensor sight glass into compressor rear frame. Tighten sight glass to
315-345 lb in. (35.6-39.0 N·m) of torque.
B. Install flame sensor bracket and secure to support bracket with two bolts. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
IGNITER PLUG REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the igniter plug.
NOTE
Two configurations exist: single igniter plug unit and double igniter plug unit.
Single igniter plugs are installed at the 3:00 o'clock position and a blank off
plug installed at the 5:00 o'clock position. With a double igniter plug unit,
igniter plugs are installed at the 3:00 and 5:00 o'clock positions.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 4
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Disconnect ignition lead from igniter plug adapter. See figure 1. Momentarily ground
ignition lead to remove any residual electrical charge.
Change 4 3
(1) Measure from outer surface of igniter plug adapter to outer surface of combustor
ferrule using immersion depth gage, 2C6613. Record as dimension A.
C. Install igniter plug into igniter plug adapter. Ensure adapter is safety-wired. See figure 1.
CAUTION
Ensure igniter plug adapter is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
D. Install ignition lead over igniter plug adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 23.0-27.0 lb ft
(31.2-36.6 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
E. If installing a single igniter unit in place of a double igniter unit, ensure correct plug and
washer are installed. Apply thread lubricant to thread before installation. Tighten plug to
540-600 lb in. (61.1-67.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire blankoff plug. See figure 4.
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
6 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
TEMPERATURE (T3) SENSOR REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor (HPC) discharge temperature (T3) sensor. For detailed routing and clamping, see
SWP 1913 02.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and SWP 1913 02
Clamping
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from T3 sensor integral lead. See figure 1.
1
B. Remove jamnut that secures T3 sensor integral lead to No. 3 electrical interface panel.
C. Remove bolts that secure T3 sensor integral lead clamps to brackets. Remove clamps
from T3 sensor integral lead.
D. Remove bolts and washers that secure T3 sensor to high pressure compressor (HPC)
rear frame mounting boss.
See figure 1.
A. Install new gasket, P/N MS9202-042, and T3 sensor onto HPC rear frame mounting
boss. Forward (FWD) marking on T3 sensor must face toward front of engine.
NOTE
B. Using four washers and bolts, secure T3 sensor onto HPC rear frame. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
D. Secure clamps onto brackets using bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
E. Secure T3 sensor integral lead to No. 3 electrical interface panel with jamnut. Tighten
jamnut to 25-35 lb in. (2.9-3.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
0WP 1518 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE (CDP)
BLEED AIR MANIFOLD AND FLANGE COVER
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing compressor discharge
pressure (CDP) bleed air manifold (Reference kit, P/N 682L196G01) and cover plate. The cover
plate caps off CDP bleed air at 3 locations on the compressor rear frame. No cap is available to cap
the end of the bleed air manifold.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
A. Disconnect CDP discharge pipe from customer interface per packager's manual.
B. Remove V-band clamps that secure air manifold to CDP discharge ports.
C. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts that secure clamp to upper air manifold bracket.
Remove clamp.
D. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts that secure clamp to lower air manifold bracket.
Remove clamp.
E. Remove nuts, washers, and bolts that secure two clamps to CDP discharge pipe
bracket. Remove clamps, air manifold, and seal rings. Discard seal rings.
1
7. Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Flange Cover Removal.
See figure 2.
A. If installed, remove three V-band clamps, CDP flange covers, and seal rings. Discard
seal rings.
2
8. Compressor Discharge Pressure (CDP) Flange Cover Installation.
See figure 2.
A. Install three new seal rings, P/N J1128P05, and CDP flange covers onto CDP
discharge ports using V-band clamps.
See figure 1.
A. Install new seal rings, P/N J1128P05, and air manifold onto CDP discharge ports.
Using clamps, bolts, washers, and nuts, secure air manifold onto CDP discharge pipe
bracket. Washers under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
B. Secure air manifold onto CDP discharge ports with V-band clamps. Tighten nuts on
V-band clamps to 75-90 lb in. (8.5-10.1 N·m) of torque.
C. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install upper air manifold bracket clamp, washers
under nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install lower air manifold bracket, washers under nuts.
Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
E. Tighten CDP discharge pipe bracket clamp nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE ROTOR SPEED (XNSD) SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure rotor speed
(XNSD) sensor. There are two XNSD sensors on the low pressure turbine (LPT) rotor, one at 2:30
o'clock position, and one at 9:30 o'clock position. For detailed routing and clamping, see
SWP 1913 03.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har-
nesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 03
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
Safety-Wiring of Low Pressure Rotor Speed (XNSD) Sensor
Electrical Connector (PA Uprate, PC, and PD Models) LM6000-IND-165
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 4
NOTE
(1) Remove bolt and nut securing strap around blankets, and remove strap. Discard
strap.
(2) Remove bolts, nuts, and washers attaching insulation brackets to TRF aft flange.
Discard brackets.
(5) Reinstall bolt, washer, and nut attaching electrical bracket to TRF aft flange at
4:30 o’clock position. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installation.
Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from XNSD sensor. See figure 1.
1
WARNING
D. Remove nuts and bolts that secure bracket and spring retainer to adapter strut.
4 Change 4
CAUTION
Shim spacers must be separated or pulled away from XNSD sensor
to allow removal of sensor, or damage to sensor will occur.
F. Loosen four bolts and nuts attaching adapter strut to TRF strut. Do not remove bolts
and nuts.
H. Pull shim spacers, located between adapter strut and TRF strut, out as far as possible.
Shim spacers are not removable. See figure 2
CAUTION
Change 4 5
CAUTION
A. Lubricate new preformed packings with petrolatum and install onto XNSD sensor.
See figure 1.
B. Ensure shim spacers, located between adapter strut and TRF strut, are pulled out as
far as possible or sensor cannot be installed. See figure 2.
D. Slide shim spacers together around XNSD sensor and secure with four bolts and nuts.
Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
F. Install spring retainer and bracket onto adapter strut and secure with bolts and nuts.
Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
NOTE
(1) Engage connector with mating sensor connector and turn knurled coupling
ring (5) while wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) Fully seat connector (4) by hand. Tighten coupling ring (5) using Teflon-jawed
pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn beyond finger-tight.
6 Change 4
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3) as required, to ensure electrical connector (4) is
seated.
H. Install clamp (3) onto bracket. Secure clamp to bracket with bolt (1) and existing nut
(2). Tighten nut to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE
(T48) THERMOCOUPLE REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 2 1
This work package contains instructions for removal, inspection, and installation the low
pressure turbine (LPT) inlet temperature (T48) thermocouple. Refer to SWP 1913 03 for routing
of T48 harnesses.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 03
nesses, and Clamping
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Thread Lubricant GP 460
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 2
See figure 1.
B. Remove bolts that secure T48 thermocouple to LPT case. Remove T48 thermocouple.
C. Use puller fixture, 9429M49, if probe is difficult to remove. See figure 1A.
WARNING
(2) Place probe into a container of demineralized water. Ensure water fills inside of
all cavities.
(3) Remove temperature probe from water and dry for 5 minutes in air, heating to
00 to 300°F (93.3 to 148.9°C) using heat gun.
(1) Place probe in a container of demineralized water. Ensure water fills inside of all
cavities.
(2) Individually measure resistance, using ohmmeter, of each threaded stud to probe
body.
Change 2 3
4 Change 2
Change 2 5
Clean probe with clean cloth and alcohol. Dry with jet of dry,
filtered compressed air. Disconnect electrical harness. Mea-
sure resistance with one ohmmeter lead on each threaded stud,
then reverse ohmmeter leads and average resistance values.
a. KP to KN circuit 2.4 to 4.1 ohms Not repairable Replace probe
resistance
b. Insulation resis- >10 Mohms each Not repairable Replace probe
tance (refer to
steps B. and C.)
6 Change 2
Change 2 7
See figure 1.
B. Install T48 thermocouple into LPT case with flat side of flange facing aft. Using
thread lubricant, lubricate threads and friction surfaces of bolts and secure thermocou-
ple with bolts. Tighten bolts to 90-100 lb in. (10.1-11.3 N·m) of torque.
C. Ensure curved spring washer is in place, and connect thermocouple harness to T48
thermocouple and secure with nuts.
CAUTION
D. Tighten largest diameter nut to 29-33 lb in. (3.3-3.7 N·m) of torque. Tighten smallest
diameter nut to 16-18 lb in. (1.8-2.0 N·m) of torque.
8 Change 2
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE INLET PRESSURE (P48)
PROBE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure turbine
(LPT) inlet pressure (P48) probe.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec. TT-I-735
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 4
A. Disconnect pressure sensing tube from P48 pressure probe. See figure 1.
B. Remove safety wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure P48 probe onto LPT
case. Remove P48 probe.
A. Clean probe using isopropyl alcohol to remove external dirt. Total probe immersion
is permitted.
Change 4 3
A. Install new gasket, P/N 1538M42P01, onto LPT case. See figure 1.
B. Install P48 pressure probe in LPT case so that holes in probe face forward. Secure
probe with two washers and bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of
torque. Safety-wire bolts.
4 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
THRUST BALANCE VALVE (TBV) ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the thrust balance valve
(TBV) assembly, including changing orifices.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
(2) Disconnect drain tube coupling nut from TBV valve fitting.
(3) Disconnect supply tube and return tube coupling nuts from TBV assembly
fittings.
D. Remove four bolts that secure TBV assembly to mounting bracket. Remove TBV
assembly.
(1) Matchmark flange tee (2), flange to V adapter (9), and bleed air valve (8) flanges
for reassembly.
3
(2) Remove V-band clamp connecting bleed air valve (8) to flange to V adapter (9).
Discard E-seal (7).
(3) Remove eight nuts (4) and bolts (3) that secure flange to V adapter (9) to flange
tee (2). Discard metal seal rings (5). Handle main orifice plate (6) with care to
prevent damage to orifice.
(1) Lubricate threads and washer faces of eight bolts (3) with thread lubricant. Install
bolts thorough boltholes in flange tee (2).
NOTE
(2) Install new metal seal ring (5), orifice plate (6) [with chamfered side of orifice
away from flange tee (2)], and new metal seal ring (5) over bolts (3) onto flange
tee (2) flange face.
(3) Use matchmarks (if present) to align flange to V adapter (9) to flange tee (2).
Install flange to V adapter over bolts (3) and seat on metal seal rings (5) and
orifice plate (6). Secure assembly with nuts.
(4) Tighten nuts in crisscross pattern to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install new E-seal (7) onto inlet flange of bleed air valve (8).
(6) Use matchmarks (if present) to align V flange of flange to V adapter (9) to inlet
flange of bleed air valve (8). Seat flange to V adapter onto bleed air valve and
secure with packager supplied V-band type clamp as follows:
(a) Tighten clamp nut to approximately 60 lb in. (6.8 N·m) of torque. Check to
ensure clamp is seated over flanges equally around circumference, and E-seal
is properly seated. Loosen clamp and reseat as necessary.
(b) Using soft-faced mallet, lightly tap around circumference of clamp to seat
evenly.
(c) Continue to tap around clamp to ensure even seating, and tighten clamp nut
to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
B. Install TBV assembly on mounting bracket and secure with packager-supplied bolts.
Tighten bolts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install new packager-supplied seal ring onto flange of flange tee.
(2) Align packager-supplied high pressure compressor stage 11 tube flange to flange
tee and install packager-supplied bolts. Ensure seal is properly seated. Install nuts
onto bolts and tighten in crisscross pattern to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of
torque.
(1) Install new E-seal (7) onto outlet flange of bleed air valve (8).
(2) Align packager-supplied thrust balance interface tube to bleed air valve (8).
Secure tube onto valve with packager-supplied V-band type clamp as follows:
(a) Tighten clamp nut to approximately 60 lb in. (6.8 N·m) of torque. Check to
ensure clamp is seated over flanges equally around circumference, and E-seal
(7) is properly seated. Loosen clamp and reseat as necessary.
(b) Using soft-faced mallet, lightly tap around circumference of clamp to seat
clamp evenly.
(c) Continue to tap around clamp to ensure even seating, and tighten clamp nut
to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
(1) Install packager-supplied seal ring, orifice plate (1) [with chamfered side of
orifice away from flange tee (2)], and new packager-supplied seal ring onto
flange T flange face.
7
(2) Align packager-supplied bypass tube onto flange T flange face. Secure with
packager-supplied bolts and nuts. Ensure seals and orifice plate are properly
seated.
CAUTION
F. Align and connect packager-supplied supply tube, return tube, and drain tube onto
bleed air valve (8) fittings. Tighten coupling nuts as follows:
(1) Tighten return tube coupling nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten drain tube coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten supply tube coupling nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Check supply, return, and drain connections for leakage per packager instructions.
WARNING
(1) Align and install cable harness connector onto bleed air valve receptacle. Turn
coupling ring while wiggling the back shell assembly.
(2) After seating connector by hand, tighten the coupling ring using Teflon-jawed
pliers. Tighten 1/4-1/2 turn, or until pliers slip on coupling ring.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling the connector assembly. No movement
between mating connectors is allowed.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
BALANCE PISTON ORIFICE PLATE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure thrust bal-
ance orifice plate. This procedure is designed for engines that have passive Low Pressure Thrust
Balance kit, P/N 682L928, installed.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operations & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Engine Operation Chapter 8
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
GE Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0187
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54, CL-A
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
(MIL-T-5544) or GP460
5. Expendable Material.
A. Apply penetrating oil to nuts and bolts (4, 5, figure 1) that secure orifice plate
between air tube flanges. Remove nuts and bolts and retain for reuse. Remove air
tube, two gaskets, and orifice plate. Discard gaskets.
A. Apply thread lubricant to threads of bolts. Install orifice plate and gaskets
(3, 6, figure 1) and secure wiht bolts and nuts (4, 5, figure 1).Torque nuts to
110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m).
B. Perform low pressure thrust balance operational check per Chapter 8, Volume I of this
manual. Replace orifice plate if necessary. See Chapter 10, Volume I of this manual
for correct orifice plate
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LIQUID FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY, FUEL FILTER
ASSEMBLY, FUEL PUMP ADAPTER, AND QUICK
DISCONNECT ADAPTER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instruction for removing and installing the liquid fuel pump
assembly, quick disconnect adapter, fuel filter assembly, and fuel pump adapter.
(Reference kit, P/N 537L278.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
CAUTION
NOTE
D. Using hammer and nylon drift, tap outer ring counterclockwise until outer ring
disengages from pump.
E. Pull fuel pump straight out until drive splines clear gearbox. Remove and discard
preformed packing.
NOTE
G. Remove fittings from fuel pump ports. Remove and discard preformed packings.
See figure 1.
NOTE
(2) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto pilot pressure union. Install
union into pilot pressure port. Tighten union to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto filter outlet pressure reducer.
Install reducer into filter outlet pressure port. Tighten reducer to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P906, onto filter inlet pressure union.
Install union into filter inlet pressure port. Tighten union to 180-220 lb in.
(20.4-24.8 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P916, onto pump outlet union into pump
outlet port. Tighten union to 700-850 lb in. (79.1-96.0 N·m) of torque.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P216, using petrolatum. Install preformed
packing onto fuel pump drive spline.
NOTE
(1) Align drive splines and alignment pins. Install fuel pump into quick disconnect
adapter.
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
See figure 2
B. Remove screws that secure quick disconnect adapter onto gearbox. Remove quick
disconnect adapter.
See figure 2.
B. Install quick disconnect adapter onto gearbox ensuring alignment devices are engaged.
Using screws, secure adapter. Tighten screws to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of
torque.
See figure 3.
WARNING
B. Remove drain plug from fuel filter assembly. Allow fuel to drain. Remove and discard
preformed packing.
C. If same fuel filter assembly will be installed, lubricate new packing, P/N 140100-110,
with petrolatum and install onto drain plug.
D. Install drain plug into fuel filter assembly. Tighten drain plug to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
E. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure fuel filter assembly to fuel pump.
See figure 3.
B. Install fuel filter assembly onto fuel pump and secure with washers, nuts, and bolts.
Tighten nuts and bolts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
See figure 4.
B. Remove nuts and washers that secure fuel pump adapter onto fuel pump.
See figure 4.
B. Install new preformed packings into fuel pump adapter packing grooves.
C. Install fuel pump adapter onto fuel pump and secure with washers and nuts.
9/(10 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (HCU) AND HYDRAULIC
FILTER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the hydraulic control unit
(HCU) and hydraulic filter assembly.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
Ensure that lube oil supply is shut off before disconnecting tubing.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
(1) Remove bolts and washers that secure variable bypass valve (VBV) head and rod
hoses to HCU. Remove and inspect seal gaskets for serviceability. Discard
damaged seal gasket.
CAUTION
Ensure that connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(2) Disconnect variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
(3) Disconnect variable stator vane (VSV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
(4) Disconnect thrust balance vane (TBV) head and rod tubes from HCU.
(5) On left side of HCU, disconnect bleed supply and bleed return tubes from HCU.
See figure 3.
NOTE
D. Remove nuts and washers that secure HCU to variable geometry (VG) hydraulic
pump. Slide HCU off mounting studs. See figure 4.
NOTE
NOTE
WARNING
(2) Install new packings, P/N J221P910, onto VIGV, VSV, and TBV head port fit-
tings. Install fittings on HCU. Tighten fittings to 360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Install new packings, P/N J221P908, onto VIGV, VSV, and TBV rod port fittings.
Install fittings on HCU. Tighten fittings to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of
torque.
Figure 4. HCU
B. Install new seal gasket, P/N L28004P01, onto VG hydraulic pump. See figure 4.
NOTE
C. Install HCU onto VG hydraulic pump and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts
to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(1) Connect TBV, VSV, and VIGV head tubes onto HCU. Tighten head tube
coupling nuts to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(2) Connect TBV, VSV, and VIGV rod tubes onto HCU. Tighten rod tube coupling
nuts to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new or serviceable seal gasket, P/N J219P03, onto VBV rod-end port.
Using washers and bolts, secure VBV rod hose onto HCU. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in.(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install seal gasket, P/N J219P04, onto VBV head-end port. Using washers and
bolts, secure VBV head hose onto HCU. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in.
(3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Connect bleed supply tube onto HCU. See figure 3. Tighten supply tube coupling
nut to 54-64 lb ft (73.3-86.7 N·m) of torque.
(6) Connect bleed return tube onto HCU. Tighten return tube coupling nut to
79-91 lb ft (107.2-123.3 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure electrical connectors are installed at the proper positions.
Failure to comply will cause unreliable engine operation.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
See figure 5.
WARNING
B. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure hydraulic filter assembly to HCU. Pull
hydraulic filter assembly away from HCU.
See figure 5.
B. Install hydraulic filter assembly to HCU and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers.
Tighten bolts and nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
10
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE GEOMETRY HYDRAULIC PUMP
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable
geometry hydraulic pump.
B. At the operator's option, the variable geometry hydraulic pump and the HCU may be
removed as a unit. in this case, all steps of WP 1811 00 must be performed, except for
separating the HCU from the pump.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) and WP 1811 00
Hydraulic Filter Assembly Replacement
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 1
See figure 1.
B. Remove nuts and washers that secure oil supply tube onto pump.
C. Remove nuts and washers that secure oil supply tube onto eductor block. Remove tube
and seal gaskets. Inspect gaskets for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
D. Remove nuts and washers that secure eductor tube onto pump.
E. Remove nuts and washers that secure eductor tube onto eductor block. Remove tube
and seal gaskets. Inspect gaskets for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
F. Remove nuts and washers that secure pump onto gearbox adapter. Remove and dis-
card preformed packing.
See figure 1.
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P260, with petrolatum. Install preformed
packing into pump packing groove.
B. Align pump alignment pin with hole in gearbox flange. Engage pump spline in gear-
shaft. Push pump into position against gearbox adapter and secure with washers and
nuts. Tighten nuts evenly, in small increments, in a crisscross pattern to draw pump to
gearbox adapter flange. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque.
C. Position two new or serviceable oil supply tube seal gaskets, P/N J219P07, one at
pump and one at eductor block. Install oil supply tube and secure with nuts and wash-
ers. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Position new or serviceable eductor tube seal gaskets, P/N J219P05 and P/N J219P04,
at pump and eductor block. Install eductor tube and secure with nuts and washers.
Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 1 3
4 Change 1
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the lube and scavenge
pump.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Magnetic Chip Detector Replacement WP 1910 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 1
WARNING
CAUTION
(2) Tag and disconnect electrical connectors from chip detectors and resistance
temperature detector (RTD)s. See figure 2.
1
(3) Position waste fluid container under lube and scavenge pump.
WARNING
NOTE
(4) Disconnect tubes and hoses from lube and scavenge pump and oil manifolds.
NOTE
(5) Remove V-band clamp that secures lube and scavenge pump. See figure 2. Pull
pump straight out until drive spline clears gearbox. Remove round gasket and
inspect for serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
2
Change 1 3
Figure 1. Lube and Scavenge Pump and Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 1 of 2)
4 Change 1
Figure 1. Lube and Scavenge Pump and Oil Manifold Ports (Sheet 2 of 2)
Change 1 5
6 Change 1
NOTE
If same lube and scavenge pump will be installed, disregard steps B.,
C., and D.
(2) Disconnect coupling nut on air/oil separator tube (5). Remove air/oil separator
fitting (8). Remove and discard preformed packing (7).
(3) Remove bolts (4) that secure air/oil separator tube (5) onto lube and scavenge
pump (20) lube and scavenge. Remove air/oil separator tube.
(4) Remove bolts (16) and washers (17) that secure E-sump scavenge oil
manifold (18) onto lube and scavenge pump (20). Remove manifold.
(5) Remove gaskets (6, 12, 13, 15, and 19) and inspect for serviceability. Discard
damaged gaskets.
C. Remove spline lube and seal drain fittings. Remove and discard packings.
D. Remove chip detectors from lube and scavenge pump per WP 1910 00.
NOTE
If chip detectors, spline lube and seal drain fittings, and oil
manifolds are installed, disregard steps A., B., and C.
A. Install chip detectors into lube and scavenge pump per WP 1910 00.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
(1) Lubricate new preformed packings, P/N J221P904, with lubricating oil. Install
preformed packings onto spline lube and seal drain fittings.
Change 1 7
8 Change 1
(2) Install spline lube and seal drain fittings into spline lube and seal drain ports.
Tighten fittings to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install new or serviceable gaskets, P/N 9013M29P02 (12), P/N 9013M28P02
(13), and P/N 9013M30P02 (15), onto lube and scavenge pump (20).
(2) Position oil supply manifold (3), oil lube and scavenge manifold (11), and
scavenge oil manifold (14) onto lube and scavenge pump (20) and secure with
washers (2 and 10) and bolts (1 and 9). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Install new or serviceable gasket, P/N J219P04 (19), onto rear of lube and
scavenge pump (20). Install E-sump scavenge oil manifold (18) and secure with
washers (17) and bolts (16). Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install new gasket, P/N J219P02 (6), onto air/oil separator tube (5). Connect
air/oil separator tube (5) onto lube and scavenge pump (20) and secure with bolts
(4). Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
(5) Lubricate new preformed packing (7), P/N J221P910, with lubricating oil. Install
preformed packing onto air/oil separator fitting (8).
CAUTION
(6) Connect air/oil separator tube (5) to air/oil separator fitting (8). Tighten coupling
nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install round gasket, P/N 9608M12P04, onto lube and scavenge pump. Align hole
in gasket with antitorque pin on pump.
(2) Position lube and scavenge pump in front of gearbox, aligning drive shaft splines
and antitorque pin. Slide pump into gearbox until housing seats.
Change 1 9
NOTE
(3) Secure lube and scavenge pump onto gearbox using V-band clamp. Tighten clamp
to 70-90 lb in. (8.0-10.1 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto lube supply outlet (L3)
port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 325-425 lb in. (36.8-48.0 N·m) of
torque.
(2) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto lube supply inlet (L1) port
and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 500-700 lb in. (56.5-79.1 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install packager-supplied gasket. Connect oil tube onto scavenge discharge (L2)
port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 425-550 lb in. (48.1-62.1 N·m) of
torque.
CAUTION
(4) Connect lube oil tube onto lube discharge port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
900-1090 lb in. (101.7-123.1 N·m) of torque.
(5) Connect oil tube onto supply pressure (L4) port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(6) Connect scavenge tube onto scavenge discharge pressure (L5) port fitting. Tighten
coupling nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(7) Connect oil manifold tube onto gearbox oil supply port fitting. Tighten coupling
nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Connect oil tube onto compressor rear frame (CRF) oil supply port fitting.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(9) Connect oil tube onto turbine rear frame (TRF) oil supply port fitting. Tighten
coupling nut to 900-1090 lb in. (101.7-123.1 N·m) of torque.
(10) Connect accessory gearbox scavenge tube/hose onto accessory gearbox (AGB)
scavenge in port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m)
of torque.
10 Change 1
(11) Connect D-sump lube scavenge tube onto D-sump scavenge in port fitting.
Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(12) Connect E-sump lube scavenge tube onto E-sump scavenge in port fitting.
Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(13) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto transfer gearbox scavenge tube. Connect
tube onto transfer gearbox scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(14) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto B-sump scavenge tube. Connect tube onto
B-sump scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(15) Install new gasket, P/N J219P05, onto C-sump scavenge tube. Install tube onto
C sump scavenge in port and secure with bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(16) Connect oil tube onto spline lube port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(17) Connect hose assembly onto seal drain port fitting. Tighten coupling nut to
135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
PNEUMATIC STARTER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the pneumatic starter.
(Reference kit, P/N 682L184.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Pneumatic Starter Servicing WP 4022 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from pneumatic starter. See figure 1.
1
CAUTION
B. Remove V-band clamp that secures air/gas inlet hose onto pneumatic starter. Remove
and discard gasket.
C. Disconnect air/gas outlet hose from pneumatic starter per packager's manual.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when loosening coupling
nut. Failure to comply can result in part damage.
NOTE
F. Remove nuts that secure pneumatic starter to transfer gearbox (TGB). Reposition oil
scavenge tube bracket. Remove pneumatic starter.
NOTE
NOTE
WARNING
(2) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P906, onto reducer. Install reducer into
air supply port.
(3) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto elbow. Install elbow into oil
scavenge port. Tighten jamnut finger-tight.
(4) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P908, onto union. Install union into oil
scavenge port. Tighten union to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P222, onto pneumatic starter drive shaft.
See figure 1.
NOTE
E. Align pneumatic starter so maintenance drain plug is at 6:00 o'clock position and
install onto TGB. Install oil scavenge tube bracket onto TGB studs. Secure starter and
bracket using nuts. Tighten nuts to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
(1) Connect tube/hose onto air supply reducer. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align oil in elbow with oil tube. Tighten jamnut on elbow to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque. Connect oil tube onto oil in elbow. Tighten coupling
nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Connect oil scavenge tube to oil scavenge union. Tighten coupling nut to
450-550 lb in. (50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(4) Install new gasket, P/N L22281P02, on air/gas inlet hose. Using V-band clamp,
secure air/gas inlet hose to pneumatic starter. Tighten V-band clamp to
90-100 lb in. (10.2-11.3 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install air/gas outlet hose onto pneumatic starter per packager's manual.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
7/(8 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HYDRAULIC STARTER AND DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 2 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing hydraulic starter and
distributor assembly. (Reference kit, P/N 537L379G05.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Grease, Molybdenum Disulfide MIL-G-21164
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 2
See figure 1.
WARNING
WARNING
Pressure of 100 psig exists in the supply lines. Relieve pressure to
prevent injury when disconnecting fittings.
CAUTION
NOTE
C. Remove nuts that secure hydraulic starter to gearbox. Remove hydraulic starter.
A. Remove shaft retainer from drive shaft by prying out carefully from groove with
screwdriver.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
C. Using Isopropyl alcohol and clean cloth, clean drive shaft and shaft cavities to remove
old lubricant.
F. Reinstall shaft retainer by tapping into drive shaft cavity with soft-faced hammer.
Retainer will snap into groove when properly installed.
See figure 1.
A. Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P222, onto starter drive shaft.
4 Change 2
NOTE
C. Align hydraulic starter so cooling supply interface is at 12:00 o'clock position. Using
nuts, install hydraulic starter onto gearbox starter adapter. Tighten nuts to
190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Change 2 5
See figure 2.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged con-
tact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
6 Change 2
See figure 2.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in well-ventilated area.
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P219, using lubricating oil. Install
packing onto distributor assembly.
B. Using bolts, install distributor assembly onto starter. Tighten bolts to 250-320 lb in.
(28.3-36.1 N·m) of torque.
Change 2 7
See figure 1.
A. Remove fittings from case drain and seal drain ports. Discard preformed packings.
See figure 1.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in well-ventilated area.
(2) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, onto union. Install union into seal
drain port. Tighten union to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install new preformed packing, P/N J221P912, onto union. Install union into case
drain port. Tighten union to 540-600 lb in. (61.1-67.8 N·m) of torque.
8 Change 2
0WP 1816 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR SPEED (XN25)
SENSOR REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor speed (XN25) sensor.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 1
See figure 1.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
B. Loosen jamnut and remove XN25 sensor from gearbox port. Remove and retain
jamnut.
WARNING
CAUTION
Use care to ensure old silicone rubber adhesive does not fall
into gearbox. Failure to comply may cause part damage.
C. Using isopropyl alcohol, clean old silicone rubber adhesive from gearbox.
1
7. High Pressure Compressor Speed (XN25) Sensor Installation.
See figure 1.
A. Remove bolts that secure gearbox access cover or AGB vent tube(s). Remove access
cover or move AGB vent tube(s) out of the way, and remove gasket. Inspect gasket for
serviceability. Discard damaged gasket.
Change 1 3
4 Change 1
C. Install and adjust XN25 sensor to meet required gap of 0.010-0.015 in.
(0.25-0.38 mm) between sensor tip and tooth crown of gear. Using feeler gage inserted
through gearbox opening, check for required gap. GAP:
WARNING
D. Apply a thin bead of silicone rubber adhesive around XN25 sensor at gearbox.
Diameter of bead shall be approximately 0.06 inch (1.5 mm).
NOTE
E. Hold XN25 sensor and tighten jamnut to 90-110 lb in. (10.2-12.4 N·m) of torque.
F. Using feeler gage, recheck gap between sensor tip and tooth crown of gear. Gap shall
be between 0.010-0.015 in. (0.25-0.38 mm). Safety-wire jamnut. GAP:
NOTE
G. Install new or serviceable gasket, P/N J219P04, and cover or connect vent tube(s) with
gasket, P/N MS27196-16 onto gearbox access opening, and secure using bolts.
Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
Change 1 5
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
6 Change 1
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LUBE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR
(RTD) REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing lube resistance temperature
detector (RTD).
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
C. Remove RTD from lube and scavenge pump manifold or boss on transfer gearbox
(TGB) scavenge tube. Remove and discard preformed packing.
1
7. Lube Resistance Temperature Detector Installation.
See figure 1.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P904, with lubricating oil and install into
RTD packing groove.
CAUTION
Use care to prevent damage to RTD tip.
B. Install RTD into lube and scavenge pump manifold or boss on TGB scavenge tube.
Tighten RTD to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the magnetic chip
detector.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
CAUTION
WARNING
C. Remove chip detector from lube and scavenge pump or oil manifold block. Remove
and discard preformed packing.
See figure 1.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
A. Lubricate new preformed packing, P/N J221P905, with lubricating oil. Install new
preformed packing onto chip detector.
B. Install chip detector into lube and scavenge pump or oil manifold block. Tighten chip
detector to 155-175 lb in. (17.6-19.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
ACCELEROMETER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the compressor rear frame
(CRF) and turbine rear frame (TRF) accelerometers.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
WARNING
CAUTION
A. Remove bolts that secure CRF accelerometer integral lead loop clamps onto brackets.
Remove clamps from CRF accelerometer integral lead.
B. Remove nut and bolt that secure CRF accelerometer integral lead loop clamp onto
bracket. Remove clamp from CRF accelerometer integral lead.
C. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from CRF accelerometer integral lead. See
figure 1.
1
D. Remove jamnut that secures CRF accelerometer integral lead onto No. 3 electrical
interface panel.
E. Remove bolts that secure CRF accelerometer onto bracket. Remove CRF
accelerometer.
B. Using bolts, secure CRF accelerometer onto bracket. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Secure CRF accelerometer integral lead onto No. 3 electrical interface panel with
jamnut. Tighten jamnut to 25-35 lb in. (2.8-4.0 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Tighten connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier
slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3) as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
F. Using bolt and nut, secure loop clamp onto bracket. Tighten nut to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
G. Using bolts, secure loop clamps onto brackets. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or disconnecting
electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installa-
tion. Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
A. Remove bolts that secure TRF accelerometer integral lead loop clamps onto brackets.
Remove clamps from TRF accelerometer integral lead (section W-W).
B. Tag and disconnect electrical connector from TRF accelerometer integral lead.
See figure 2.
C. Remove jamnut that secures TRF accelerometer integral lead onto No. 4 electrical
interface panel.
2
D. Remove bolts that secure TRF accelerometer onto bracket. Reposition XNSD lead
clamp bracket. Remove TRF accelerometer (view X).
A. Install TRF accelerometer onto bracket. Position XNSD lead clamp bracket on
accelerometer. See figure 2.
B. Using bolts, secure TRF accelerometer onto bracket. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
C. Using jamnut, secure TRF accelerometer integral lead onto No. 4 electrical interface
panel. Tighten jamnut to 25-35 lb in. (2.8-4.0 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or discon-
necting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier
slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) (4)Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
F. Using bolts, secure clamps onto brackets. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
7/(8 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LIQUID FUEL MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing primary or secondary liquid
fuel manifold temperature sensor.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
CAUTION
B. Disconnect electrical connector from fuel manifold temperature sensor (figure 1).
1
WARNING
D. If required, remove second fuel manifold temperature sensor per steps B. and C.
A. Install new seal, P/N 9371M19P04, onto fuel manifold temperature sensor (figure 1).
B. Install sensor into primary or secondary fuel temperature sensor port. Tighten sensor
to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling backshell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier
slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
D. If removed, install second fuel manifold temperature sensor per steps A, B, and C.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
EXTERNAL PIPING, HOSES, AND ELECTRICAL
HARNESS REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Arrangement................................................................................................................................ 2
1. Introduction.
This work package introduces the external configuration work packages. For specific work
instructions, refer to the following: SWP 1913 01
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and SWP 1913 01
Clamping
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and
Clamping SWP 1913 02
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing,
Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 03
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Reference SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04 for a list of
consumable material.
5. Expendable Material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc. used during installation of external
tubing, expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB),
GEK 105060 , for required parts.
6. Arrangement.
A. SWP 1913 01 contains information for installation of front frame module external
tubing, harnesses, and clamping.
B. SWP 1913 02 contains information for installation of core module external tubing,
harnesses, and clamping.
C. SWP 1913 03 contains information for installation of engine assembly external tubing,
harnesses, and clamping.
D. SWP 1913 04 contains information for final installation of engine assembly external
tubing, harnesses, and clamping.
2
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
FRONT FRAME MODULE EXTERNAL TUBING,
HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
B. The following general instructions shall be met any time tubing, electrical leads,
harnesses, or cables are disturbed:
(1) Unless otherwise specified, bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
exhibit a smooth transition. No kinks allowed.
(2) Electrical connections of heads and harnesses shall conform to the following
assembly points:
(a) Engage connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring,
while wiggling backshell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring
using Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier
slippage occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (b) and (c), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
(4) Unless otherwise noted, install all bolts with boltheads forward.
2 Change 5
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall
be modified by bending as required. After bending, to obtain the required f
ree-state fit, the following shall apply:
(d) End flange fittings shall seat flush within 0.005 inch (0.12 mm).
(e) End points of tube or manifold shall align with mating connector with
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) in all planes.
(f) A minimum clearance of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) shall be maintained between
tube OD and adjacent parts.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.020 inch) R297P02
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Tape MIL-I-46852
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec TT-P-1757
5. Expendable Material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc. used during installation of external
tubing, expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB),
GEK 105060, for required parts.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b) (e)
(1) frame aft flange (6.3-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b) (e)
(3) frame aft flange (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b) (e)
(4) frame aft flange (6.3-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2), 55-70 lb in. (b) (f) (g)
(1) frame aft flange Spacer (18) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2), 55-70 lb in. (b) (f) (g)
(4) frame aft flange Spacer (18) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Air collector/front Bolts (2), 55-70 lb in. (b) (f) (g)
(3) frame aft flange Spacer (18) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Aft lower right Bolts (6), 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
(5) flange Nuts (7) (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Panel bracket (8) Forward lower Bolts (6), 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
right flange Nuts (7) (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Panel bracket (9) Air collector/front Bolts (10), 55-70 lb in. (a) (d)
frame forward Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
flange
Electrical Aft lower left Bolts (6), 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
bracket (12) flange Nuts (7) (54.3-64.4 N·m)
Electrical Aft lower left Bolts (6), 480-570 lb in. (a) (c)
bracket (13) flange Nuts (7) (54.3-64.4 N·m)
VSV/VBV Air collector aft Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in.
Bracket (14) face (6.3-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Air collector right Bolts (15), 55-70 lb in.
Bracket (16) side Washers (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using molybdenum disulfide lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire with safety cable, 736L680.
(c) Boltheads face outboard.
(d) Boltheads face aft.
(e) Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258.
(f) After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258.
(g) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
Change 5 9
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (2), 190-230 lb in. (a)
(1) Washers (3), Nuts (21.5-25.9 N·m)
(4)
Electrical bracket Gearbox housing Washers (6), Nuts 55-70 lb in.
(5) (7) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (10) 190-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(8) and Tubing (21.5-25.9 N·m)
bracket (9)
Electrical Bevel gear housing Washers (12), 190-230 lb in. (b)
bracket (11) Bolts (13) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
Electrical Bevel gear housing Washers (12), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (14) Bolts (25) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket (15) VG hydraulic pump Bolts (16) 55-70 lb in. (b)
adapter (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube bracket (17) VG hydraulic pump Bolts (16) 55-70 lb in. (b) (c)
adapter (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube bracket (18) Gearbox housing Bolts (19) 33-37 lb in.
(3.7-4.2 N·m)
Lube bracket (18) Gearbox housing Bolts (20), 300-360 lb in.
Washers (21), (33.9-40.6 N·m)
Nuts (22)
Electrical Manual drive Washers (6), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (23) adapter assembly Bolts (16) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Manual drive Washers (6), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (24) adapter assembly Bolts (16) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Mounting bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (10) 190-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(8) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
10 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Manifold bracket Gearbox housing Bolts (27) 190-230 lb in.
(26) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
WARNING
NOTES:
(a) Coat mating surfaces of bracket and gearbox housing using zinc chromate primer.
(b) Safety-wire.
(c) Nut plates face aft.
Change 5 11
12 Change 5
Change 5 13
14 Change 5
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Electrical bracket Oil supply Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in.
(1) manifold (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil manifold 180-200 lb in. (a)
packing (3), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (4)
Preformed Oil supply 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (5), Plug manifold (15.3-17.5 N·m)
(6)
Preformed Oil supply 180-200 lb in. (a)
packing (7), manifold (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (8)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (9), manifold (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (10)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 360-400 lb in.
packing (11), manifold (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (12)
Gasket (13), Oil scavenge Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (14) manifold (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil supply 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (16), manifold (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (17)
Gasket (18), Gearbox housing Bolts (21) 33-37 lb in.
AGB tube/hose (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(19), Oil drain
bracket (20)
AGB tube/hose Union (17) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(19) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
AGB tube/hose Manual drive Clamp (22), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(19) adapter (23) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Preformed AGB tube/hose 135-155 lb in. (a) (b)
packing (24), (19) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (25)
Change 5 15
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Preformed Fuel pump adapter 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (26), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (27)
Preformed Gearbox housing 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (28), fuel pump pad (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (29)
Hose assembly Union (29) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(30) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed Gearbox housing Coupling nut 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (31), starter pad (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil drain tube (32)
Oil manifold (33) Union (27), Coupling nuts 135-155 lb in.
Hose assembly (15.3-17.5 N·m)
(30), Oil drain tube
(32)
Oil manifold (33) Manifold bracket Clamp (34), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(26, figure 2) (35), Nut (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Oil manifold (33) Oil drain bracket Clamp (37), Bolt 33-37 lb in.
(20) (35), Nut (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (38), pump (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (39)
Hose assembly Oil manifold (33), Coupling nuts 135-155 lb in.
(40) Union (39) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Hose assembly Electrical bracket Clamp (41), 55-70 lb in.
(40) (23, figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Hose assembly AGB tube/hose Clamps (43, 44), 33-37 lb in.
(40) (19) Bolts (35), Nuts (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(36)
Preformed Lube and scavenge 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (45), pump (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Union (46)
16 Change 5
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Preformed Oil manifold 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (47), (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (48)
Preformed AGB tube/hose 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (49), (19) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
RTD sensor (50)
Preformed Oil supply 540-600 lb in. (a)
packing (51), manifold (61.1-67.8 N·m)
Union (52)
Preformed Oil supply 270-300 lb in. (a)
packing (53), manifold (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Union (54)
Preformed Oil manifold 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (55), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (56)
Preformed Oil manifold 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (57), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (58)
Preformed Oil manifold 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (59), (40.6-45.2 N·m)
Union (60)
Gasket (61), Lube and scavenge Bolts (63) 33-37 lb in. (a)
Air/Oil separator pump (3.7-4.2 N·m)
tube (62)
Air/Oil separator Union (60) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
tube (62) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
Preformed Oil manifold 540-600 lb in. (a)
packing (64), (61.1-67.8 N·m)
Union (65)
Preformed Oil manifold 540-600 lb in. (a)
packing (66), (61.1-67.8 N·m)
Oil tube (67)
Change 5 17
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil tube (68) Oil tube (67), Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
Union (65) (102-123 N·m)
Preformed Oil manifold 135-155 lb in. (a)
packing (69), (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Plug (70)
Preformed Oil manifold 180-200 lb in. (a)
packing (71), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Union (72)
Oil manifold (73) Union (72) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (73) Tubing bracket Clamp (37), 55-70 lb in.
(9, figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (74), VG hydraulic pump Washers (76), 33-37 lb in.
Lube tube (75) Nuts (36) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (77), Oil manifold Bolts (42) 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (75) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Lube tube (75) Lube bracket Clamp (41), 55-70 lb in.
(18, figure 2) Bolts (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (78), VG hydraulic pump Washers (80), 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (79) Nuts (81) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (82), Oil manifold Bolts (42) 55-70 lb in.
Lube tube (79) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed HCU, TBV Head 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (83), (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Union (84)
Preformed HCU, TBV Rod 270-300 lb in. (a)
packing (85), (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Union (86)
Preformed HCU, VSV and 360-400 lb in. (a)
packing (87), VIGV Head (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Union (88)
18 Change 5
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Gasket (91), Oil tube (14) Bolts (93), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
Oil tube (92) (94) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (95), Transfer gearbox Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (92) housing (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Preformed HCU, VSV and 270-300 lb in.
packing (89), VIGV Rod (30.6-33.9 N·m)
Union (90)
Oil tube (92) Lube bracket Clamp (96), 55-70 lb in.
(17, figure 2) Bolt (42) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil tube (92) Oil bracket Clamp (96), 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 2) Bolt (42), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (97), Nut
(94)
Oil tube (98) Oil manifold (73) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil tube (98) Union (46) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil tube (98) Lube bracket Clamp (34), 33-37 lb in.
(18, figure 2) Bolt (99), Washer (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(100), Nut (36)
Cap assembly Oil tube (98) 135-155 lb in.
(101) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed Accessory gearbox 155-175 lb in. (a)
packing (102), housing (17.6-19.7 N·m)
Reducer (103)
Oil manifold (104) Reducer (103) Coupling nut 180-200 lb in.
(20.4-22.6 N·m)
Oil manifold (104) Oil manifold (73) Coupling nut 180-200 lb in.
(20.4-22.6 N·m)
Oil manifold (104) Accessory gearbox Clamp (105), 55-70 lb in.
housing Bolt (106) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Change 5 19
Table 3. Transfer Gearbox Assembly Tubing and Clamping (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Preformed Transfer gearbox 155-175 lb in. (a)
packing (107), housing (17.6-19.8 N·m)
Reducer (108)
Oil tube (109) Reducer (108) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil tube (109) Oil manifold (104) Coupling nut 135-155 lb in.
(15.3-17.5 N·m)
Preformed VG hydraulic pump 180-200 lb in.
packing (71), (20.4-22.6 N·m)
Plug (110)
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Per-
sonal protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust
ventilation - if not available, use an approved respirator.
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate preformed packing using lubricating oil.
(b) Safety-wire.
20 Change 5
Change 5 21
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Mount pad (1) Front frame Bolts (2) 480-570 lb in. (a)
(54.3-64.4 N·m)
VBV bracket (3) Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
(5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV bracket Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
(6) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
(7) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
(9) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Transfer gearbox Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (10) mount plate (8) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket (11) Electrical Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (10) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 2 electrical Electrical brackets Bolts (13) 55-70 lb in.
interface panel (12) (9, 10) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 2 electrical Transfer gearbox Washers (4), 190-230 lb in.
interface panel (12) mount bracket Bolts (14) (21.5-25.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
bracket (15) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VSV/VBV Front frame Washers (4), Bolts 55-70 lb in.
bracket (16) (5) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical Front frame Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (17) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Coat threads of bolts with molybdenum disulfide lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
22 Change 5
Change 5 23
24 Change 5
26 Change 5
Change 5 27
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Gasket (1), HCU Bolts (3), 33-37 lb in.
Oil tube/hose (2) Washers (4) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Gasket (5), HCU Bolts (3), 33-37 lb in.
VBV oil hose (6) Washers (4) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Teflon hose (7) Union Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(Initial (88, figure 3) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
configuration)
Oil tube/hose (8) Union Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(Initial (90, figure 3) (50.8-62.1 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tube (9) Oil tube/hose (2) Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(Initial (102-123 N·m)
configuration)
VSV oil tube (10) Oil tube/hose (8) Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(Initial (50.8-62.1 N·m)
configuration)
VSV oil tube (11) Teflon hose (7) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(Initial (73.4-87.0 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tube (12) VBV oil hose (6) Coupling nut 112-128 lb ft
(Initial (151.9-173.5 N·m)
configuration)
VBV oil tubes (9, VSV/VBV bracket, Clamps (13, 14), 55-70 lb in.
12), VSV oil tubes (16, figure 1) Bolts (15), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(10, 11) (Initial Washers (16), and
configuration) Nuts (17)
VBV oil tubes (9, VSV/VBV bracket, Clamps (18, 19), 55-70 lb in.
12), VSV oil tubes (14, figure 1) Bolts (15), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(10, 11) (Initial Washers (16), and
configuration) Nuts (17)
28 Change 5
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Gasket (20), Front frame Bolts (22) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Air elbow (21) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (23) VSV/VBV bracket, Clamp (24), 55-70 lb in.
(16, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), and
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (23) VSV/VBV bracket, Clamp (24), 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), and
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (26) VSV/VBV bracket, Clamp (24), 55-70 lb in.
(16, figure 4) Bolt (22), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Washer (25), Nut
(17)
Oil manifold (26) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Preformed VBV actuator rod 135-155 lb in. (b)
packing (27), end port (6 places) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Reducer (28)
VBV oil tube (29) Oil manifold (26) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
VBV oil tube (29) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed VBV actuator head 135-155 lb in. (b)
packing (30), end port (6 places) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Reducer (31)
Preformed Oil tube (35) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Oil tube (35) Oil manifold (23) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Change 5 29
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil tube (35) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil drain tube (36) Drain can (34) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (37) Oil manifold (26) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
Oil manifold (37) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil tube (35) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Oil manifold (38) Oil manifold (23) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
Oil manifold (38) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil drain tube (39) Drain can (34) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (39) Oil drain tube (36) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifolds (37, VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (40), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
38) Oil drain tube (3, figure 1) (41), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(39) Nut (17)
Oil drain tube (39) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (42), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(15, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (43) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (44), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(6, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
30 Change 5
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil manifold (43) VBV bracket Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(3, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (45) VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(6, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Oil manifold (45) VBV bracket Clamp (24), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(3, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
VBV oil tube (46) Oil manifold (43) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
VBV oil tube (46) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil tube (47) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Oil tube (47) Oil manifold (45) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube (47) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil drain tube (48) Drain can (34) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (49) Oil manifold (43) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
Oil manifold (49) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil tube (50) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Change 5 31
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil tube (50) Oil manifold (45) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(73.4-87.0 N·m)
Oil tube (50) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil drain tube (51) Drain can (34) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (51) Oil drain tube (48) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (49), VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (40), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
Oil tube (50), (1, figure 1) (41), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (51) Nut (17)
Oil drain tube (51) VBV bracket Clamp (42), Bolt 55-70 lb in.
(3, figure 4) (22), Washer (25), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nut (17)
Preformed Oil tube (52) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Oil tube (52) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Coupling nut Hand-tight (c)
end port
Oil tube (53) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube (54) Reducer (28) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
Preformed Oil tube (55) (b)
packings (32, 33),
Drain can (34)
Oil tube (55) Reducer (31) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m)
32 Change 5
Table 5. Front Frame Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 5.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Drain can (34) VBV actuator head Hand-tight (c)
end port
VSV teflon Union Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
hose (56) (88, figure 4) (73.4-86.9 N·m)
VBV teflon HCU Bolts (60) 33-37 lb in.
hose (57) Washers (61) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (62)
VBV teflon HCU Bolts (60) 33-37 lb in.
hose (58) Washers (61) (3.7-4.2 N·m)
Gasket (63)
Reducer (64)
VSV teflon Union Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
hose (59) (90, figure 4) (50.8-62.1 N·m)
VSV teflon Together Clamps (65, 66, 57) 55-70 lb in.
hose (56, 59) Bolt (70) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV teflon Nut (71)
hose (57, 58)
VSV teflon VSV/VBV bracket Clamps (65, 66, 57) 55-70 lb in.
hose (56, 59) (68) (16, figure 1) Bolt (70) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV teflon Nut (71)
hose (57, 58)
VSV/VBV Front frame Bolts (69) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Safety-wire.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Per-
sonal protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust
ventilation - if not available, use an approved respirator.
Change 5 33
34 Change 5
Change 5 35
36 Change 5
Change 5 37
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Preformed T25 sensor 90-100 lb in. (a) (b)
packing (19), (10.2-11.3 N·m)
Plug (20)
T25 sensor/Integral Air collector upper Bolt (21) 33-37 lb in. (b)
lead (1) left (3.7-4.2 N·m)
T25 sensor/Integral VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (9), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
lead (1) (3, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (9), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(4, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamps (14), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(17, figure 4) Bolts (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(7, figure 4)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
CAUTION
Routing of harness is completed during final engine assembly.
Ensure loose connector is secured to avoid damage during trans-
port.
Left side VBV actuator Connector ring Hand-tight
VSV/VBV/LVDT (11:00 o'clock)
electrical cable (2)
VSV/VBV bracket Clamp (14), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(3, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (14), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(4, figure 1) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamps (14), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(17, figure 4) Bolts (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamps (13), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(7, figure 4) Bolt (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
38 Change 5
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
Gas generator XN25 sensor Connector ring Hand-tight (c)
speed electrical
cable (3)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(7, figure 4)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
Gas generator XN25 sensor Connector ring Hand-tight (b)
speed electrical
cable (4)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(12, figure 1)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
T25 sensor/integral Electrical bracket Clamps (9, 10, 13) 55-70 lb in. (c)
lead (1), left side (13, figure 1) Bolt (11), Nut (12) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
VBV/VSV LVDT
electrical cable (2),
Gas generator
speed electrical
cable (4)
Chip detector Common scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
electrical cable (5) chip detector
Tubing bracket Spring clip (a)
(9, figure 2)
Lube bracket Spring clip (a)
(17, figure 2) (2 places)
Change 5 39
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
B-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
chip detector
TGB/A-sump Connector ring Hand-tight
scavenge chip
detector
Electrical bracket Spring clips (a)
(23, figure 2)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(14, figure 2)
Chip detector Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
electrical cable (5) (5, figure 2)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(7, figure 4)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
TGB/A, AGB, B, AGB scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
C lube RTD RTD
electrical cable (6)
Electrical bracket Clamp (15), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(24, figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
TGB/A sump Connector ring Hand-tight
scavenge RTD
B-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD
C-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD
Electrical bracket Clamp (17), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(11, figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (17), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
40 Change 5
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
D, E, supply lube D, E-sump Connector ring Hand-tight
RTD electrical scavenge, supply
cable (7) RTD
D-sump branch of D-sump scavenge Connector ring Hand-tight
electrical cable (7) RTD
Electrical bracket Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(5, figure 1) (11), Nut (12) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil bracket Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(15, figure 2) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
E-sump & supply Oil bracket Clamp (18), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
branch of electrical (11, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
cable (7)
E-sump branch of Oil bracket Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
electrical cable (7) (11, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (16), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(1, figure 3) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Main cable No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
CAUTION
Routing of harness is completed during final engine assembly.
Ensure loose connector is secured to avoid damage during trans-
port.
Right side VBV actuator (5:00 Connector ring Hand-tight
VBV/VSV LVDT o'clock position)
electrical cable (8)
Change 5 41
Table 6. Front Frame Module Electrical Cables (See figure 1.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Electrical bracket Clamp (14), Bolt 55-70 lb in. (a)
(7, figure 4) (11) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 2 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(12, figure 4)
NOTES:
(a) Lead may be spiral wrapped using silicone tape in the area of spring clips or clamps and 0.50
inch (12.7 mm) on either side of clip or clamp to provide positive lead clamping as required.
(b) Safety-wire using R297P02 safety wire.
(c) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut using R297P02 safety wire.
42 Change 5
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
CORE MODULE EXTERNAL TUBING, ELECTRICAL
LEADS, AND CLAMPING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of core module
external tubing, harnesses, and clamping, including high pressure compressor (HPC), compres-
sor rear frame (CRF), and high pressure turbine (HPT).
B. The following general instructions shall be met any time tubing, electrical leads, harnesses, or
cables are disturbed:
(1) Unless otherwise specified, the bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
exhibit a smooth transition. No kinks allowed.
(2) Electrical connections of heads and harnesses shall conform to the following assembly
points:
(a) Engage the connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring, while
wiggling the backshell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage
occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement
with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (b) and (c), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps that
restrict mating.
(4) Unless otherwise noted, install all bolts with boltheads forward.
2 Change 4
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall be modified by
bending, as required. After bending, to obtain the required free-state fit, the following shall
apply:
(d) End flange fittings shall seat flush within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
(e) End points of tube or manifold shall align with mating connector with 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) in all planes.
(f) (f)A minimum clearance of 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) shall be maintained between tube
OD and adjacent parts.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.020 inch) R297P02
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Tape MIL-I-46852
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc., used during installation of external tubing,
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GEK105060, for
required parts.
Change 4 3
See figure 5 and table 5 for original configuration. See figure 5A and table 5A for current
configuration.
6
5
11. Core Module Tubing and Clamping Installation.
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
6 Change 4
Change 4 7
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Air/Oil bracket (1) Bolthole 9, 11 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Cooling bracket (4) Bolthole 18, 21 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air Cooling bracket Bolthole 30, 32 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(5) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air/Oil bracket (6) Bolthole 33, 35 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air/Oil bracket (7) Bolthole 39, 41 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air/Oil bracket (8) Bolthole 42, 44 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Accelerometer Bolthole 45, 47 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (9) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Accelerometer Bolthole 51, 53 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (10) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Cooling bracket Bolthole 63, 66 Bolt (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(11) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Cooling bracket Bolthole 71, 74, 76 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(12) (43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air/Oil bracket (13) Bolthole 78, 80 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Air/Oil bracket (14) Bolthole 87, 89 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
(43.0-47.4 N·m)
Balance piston air Air/Oil bracket (1) Bolts (16), Nuts 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (15) (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Balance piston air Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(18) bracket (15) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket (4) Bolts (16), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(36) Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
8 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(21) (36) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Cooling air bracket Bolts (23), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(22) (5) Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Air/Oil bracket (6) Bolts (26), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(25), Tray mount Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
bracket (28),
Bridge bracket (24)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(27) (25) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Air/Oil bracket (7) Bolts (16), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(29) (Initial Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(30) (Initial (29) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration)
Tray mount bracket Air/Oil bracket (8) Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(31) Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Tray mount bracket Tray mount bracket Bolts (19) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(31) (28) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (16), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(32) (12) Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(33) (32) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Air/oil bracket (13) Bolts (16), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(34) Nuts (17) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket Cooling bracket Bolts (19), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(35) (34) Washers (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
HPC flange bracket Air/oil bracket (7) Bolts (38), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37) Nuts (39) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Stage 7 cooling air Cooling bracket Bolts (38), 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube bracket (40) (12) Nuts (39) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Change 4 9
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Boltheads face aft.
(c) Boltheads face forward.
10 Change 4
Change 4 11
12 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
LPT bracket (1) Bolthole 131, 132, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
133 (23.8-25.9 N·m)
Fuel/Steam bracket Bolthole 23, 24, 25 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(4) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
HP recoup bracket Bolthole 45, 46, 47 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(5) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
Cooling bracket (6) Bolthole 51, 52, 53 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(Initial (23.8-25.9 N·m)
configuration)
Lube tray bracket Bolthole 60, 65 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(7) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
Recoup bracket (8) Bolthole 80, 85 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(23.8-25.9 N·m)
Fuel bracket (9) Bolthole 110, 111, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
112 (23.8-25.9 N·m)
HP recoup bracket Bolthole 113, 114, Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a)
(10) 115 (23.8-25.9 N·m)
Recoup bracket Recoup bracket (8) Bolts (12), 210-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(11) Washers (13) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
LP cooling support Boltholes 50, 51, Bolts (15), 210-230 lb in. (a)
bracket (14) 52, 53 Nuts (16) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
LP cooling support Boltholes 106, 107, Bolts (15), 210-230 lb in. (a)
bracket (17) 108, 109 Nuts (16) (23.8-25.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Nutplates face aft.
Change 4 13
14 Change 4
Change 4 15
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Electrical bracket Fuel nozzle 1 Bolts (2) 110-120 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(1) (12.5-13.5 N·m)
UV detector Fuel nozzle 4 Bolts (2) 110-120 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
bracket (3) (12.5-13.5 N·m)
Electrical bracket Fuel nozzle 6 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(4) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
Cooling bracket (5) Fuel nozzle 8 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(9.0-10.2 N·m)
Cooling bracket (6) Fuel nozzle 10 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(9.0-10.2 N·m)
HP recoup bracket Fuel nozzle 13 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(7) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
Cooling bracket (8) Fuel nozzle 14 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(Initial (9.0-10.2 N·m)
configuration)
Lube bracket (9) Fuel nozzle 15 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(9.0-10.2 N·m)
Lube bracket (10) Fuel nozzle 17 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(9.0-10.2 N·m)
Lube bracket (11) Fuel nozzle 20 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(9.0-10.2 N·m)
Cooling bracket Fuel nozzle 24 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(12) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
Cooling bracket Fuel nozzle 25 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(13) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
LPT cooling Fuel nozzle 26 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
bracket (23) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
UV detector Fuel nozzle 27 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
bracket (14) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
HP recoup bracket Fuel nozzle 28 Bolts (2) 80-90 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
(15) (9.0-10.2 N·m)
16 Change 4
Table 3. CRF Aft Case To CRF Brackets (See figure 3.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
UV detector UV detector Bolts (20), 55-70 lb in. (b) (d)
bracket (16) bracket (3) Washers (18), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Nuts (19)
CRF flame sight Compressor rear 315-345 lb in. (b)
(21) frame (35.6-39.0 N·m)
UV detector UV detector Bolts (20), 55-70 lb in. (b)
bracket (17) bracket (14) Washers (18), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Nuts (19)
CRF flame sight Compressor rear 315-345 lb in. (b)
(22) frame (35.6-39.0 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Bolts are fuel nozzle attaching bolts.
(b) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricant.
(c) Safety-wire using R297P04 safety wire.
(d) See figure 7, SWP 1913 04.
Change 4 17
18 Change 4
Change 4 19
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
B-sump bracket (1) HPC case Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
B-sump bracket (3) HPC case Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Vent bracket (4) HPC case Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Vent bracket (6) HPC case Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Vent bracket (7) HPC case Bolts (8) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Vent bracket (9) HPC case Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket HPC case Bolts (11) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(10) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Flange cooling HPC case Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (12) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Sump bracket (13) Flange cooling Bolts (14) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (12) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket HPC case Bolts (11) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(16) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Bridge bracket (17) Bridge bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(24, figure 1) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Bridge bracket (17) Electrical bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(16) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Electrical bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(19) (10) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Electrical bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(19) (16) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
No. 3 electrical Electrical bracket Bolts (21) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
interface panel (20) (10) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
20 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
No. 3 electrical Electrical bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
interface panel (20) (16) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
No. 3 electrical Electrical bracket Bolts (18) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
interface panel (20) (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire using R297P04 safety wire.
Change 4 21
22 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Seal ring (1), High pressure Bolts (3) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Baseplate (2) turbine (eight (6.3-7.9 N·m)
places)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Cooling air tube (8) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (7) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling air tube (8) Check valve (7) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(54.3-67.8 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (9) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Cooling air (6.3-7.9 N·m)
tube (11)
Cooling air Check valve (9) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
tube (11) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Cooling air (6.3-7.9 N·m)
tube (14)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (13) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling air Check valve (13) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
tube (14) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (15) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Cooling air (6.3-7.9 N·m)
tube (17)
Cooling air Check valve (15) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
tube (17) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
Change 4 23
24 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Ring seal (1), High pressure Bolts (3) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Baseplate (2) turbine (eight (6.8-7.9 N·m)
places)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (5) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (7) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Cooling air tube (8) Check valve (7) Coupling nut (19) 40-50 lb ft (b)
(55-67 N·m)
Cooling air tube (8), Check valve (5) Coupling nut (18) 55-70 lb in.
Ring seal (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (9) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (10) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Cooling air tube (11) Check valve (9) Coupling nut (19) 40-50 lb ft (b)
(55-67 N·m)
Cooling air tube (11), Check valve (10) Coupling nut (18) 55-70 lb in.
Ring seal (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (12) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (13) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Cooling air tube (14) Check valve (13) Coupling nut (19) 40-50 lb ft (b)
(55-67 N·m)
Cooling air tube (14), Check valve (12) Coupling nut (18) 55-70 lb in.
Ring seal (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Ring seal (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (15) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Seal ring (4), Baseplate (2) Bolts (6) 60-70 lb in. (a)
Check valve (16) (6.8-7.9 N·m)
Change 4 25
Table 5A. HPT Tubing, Current Configuration (See figure 5A.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Cooling air tube (17) Check valve (15) Coupling nut (19) 40-50 lb ft (b)
(55-67 N·m)
Cooling air tube (17), Check valve (16) Coupling nut (18) 55-70 lb in.
Ring seal (20) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
26 Change 4
Change 4 27
28 Change 4
Change 4 29
30 Change 4
Change 4 31
32 Change 4
Change 4 33
34 Change 4
Change 4 35
36 Change 4
Change 4 37
38 Change 4
Change 4 39
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Gasket (1), CRF strut 9 Bolts (3), Nuts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a)
B-sump air tube (2) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
B-sump air tube (2) Sump bracket Retaining strap (5), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(13, figure 4) Bolts (6), Washers (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(7), Nuts (4)
B-sump air tube (2) B-sump bracket Retaining straps (8, 55-70 lb in. (a)
(1, figure 4) 9), Bolts (6), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Seal ring (10), LPT Stage 8 bleed air Coupling (12) 40 lb in.
air tube (11) (Initial manifold (4.52 N·m)
configuration)
LPT air tube (11) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(Initial (71) (13), Bolts (6), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration) Nuts (4)
LPT air tube (11) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(Initial (72) (13), Bolts (6), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration) Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (14), LPT LPT air tube (15) Bolts (16), 55-70 lb in. (a)
air tube (11) (Initial Nuts (17), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration) Orifice plate (18)
LPT air tube (15) Bracket (73) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(13), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Seal ring (20), Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (22) 45 lb in.
HPT air tube (21) manifold (5.1 N·m)
HPT air tube (21) Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(7, figure 5) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
HPT air tube (21) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(35, figure 1) (23), Bolts (6) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
40 Change 4
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
HPT air tube (21) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(13, figure 3) (23), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (25), HP Compressor rear Bolts (3), Nuts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a)
recoup air tube (24) frame (6.3-7.9 N·m)
HP recoup air tube HP recoup bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(24) (15, figure 3) (26), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
HP recoup air tube HP recoup bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(24) (10, figure 2) (26), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Seal ring (20), Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (22) 45 lb in.
HPT air tube (27) manifold (5.1 N·m)
HPT air tube (27) Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(9, figure 5) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
HPT air tube (27) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(33, figure 1) (23), Bolts (6) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
HPT air tube (27) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(12, figure 3) (28), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (30), Compressor Bolts (31), Nuts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Air manifold (29) discharge ports (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Air manifold (29) Recoup bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(11, figure 2) (32), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (34), Air tube (36) Coupling (35) 45 lb in.
Supply tube (33) (5.1 N·m)
Change 4 41
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Air tube (36) Bracket (74) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Supply tube (33) B-sump bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(3, figure 4) (37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Supply tube (33) Bracket (75) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (34), Supply tube (33) Coupling (35) 45 lb in.
Supply tube (38) (5.1 N·m)
Supply tube (38) Bracket (76) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Supply tube (38) Bracket (77) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Supply tube (38) Bracket (78) Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(37), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Seal ring (20), Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (22) 45 lb in.
HPT air tube (39) manifold (5.1 N·m)
HPT air tube (39) Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(15, figure 5) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
HPT air tube (39) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(21, figure 1) (40), Bolts (6) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
42 Change 4
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
HPT air tube (39) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(5, figure 3) (40), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Seal ring (20), Stage 11 bleed air Coupling (22) 45 lb in.
HPT air tube (41) manifold (5.1 N·m)
HPT air tube (41) Check valve Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(13,figure 5) (54.2-67.8 N·m)
HPT air tube (41) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(27, figure 1) (40), Bolts (16) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
HPT air tube (41) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6, figure 3) (40), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (43), HP Compressor rear Bolts (3), Nuts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a)
recoup tube (42) frame (6.3-7.9 N·m)
HP recoup tube HP recoup bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(42) (7, figure 3) (70), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washer (7),
Nuts (4)
HP recoup tube HP recoup bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(42) (5, figure 2) (70), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
B and C supply oil Compressor rear Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
tube (44) frame (73.4-87.0 N·m)
B and C supply oil Lube bracket Split bushing (45), 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube (44) (11, figure 3) Clamp (46), Bolt (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(19), Nut (4)
B and C supply oil Lube bracket Split bushing (45), 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube (44) (10, figure 3) Clamp (46), Bolt (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(19), Nut (4)
Change 4 43
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Gasket (47), C Compressor rear Retainer plate (49), 55-70 lb in. (a)
scavenge oil tube frame Bolts (50) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(48)
C scavenge oil tube Lube bracket Split bushing (51), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(48) (10, figure 3) Clamp (52), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Bolt (19)
C scavenge oil tube Lube bracket Split bushing (51), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(48) (9, figure 3) Clamp (52), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Bolt (19)
Gasket (53), Compressor rear Retainer plate (55), 55-70 lb in. (a)
B scavenge oil tube frame Bolts (50) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(54)
B scavenge oil tube Lube bracket Split bushing (56), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(54) (9, figure 3) Clamp (57), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Bolt (19)
Gasket (58), LPT air tube (60) Orifice plate (61), 55-70 lb in. (a)
LPT air tube (59) Bolts (16), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Nuts (17)
LPT air tube (59) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6, figure 2) (62), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
LPT air tube (59) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(8, figure 3) (62), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
LPT air tube (60) Cooling bracket Retaining strap 55-70 lb in. (a)
(Initial (30, figure 1) (62), Bolts (19), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration) Washers (7),
Nuts (4)
Gasket (63), LPT Stage 8 adapter Bolts (65) 55-70 lb in. (a)
air tube (60) (Initial (64) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
configuration)
44 Change 4
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Seal ring (66), Stage 8 bleed air Coupling (67) TBD
Stage 8 adapter (64) manifold
(Initial
configuration)
Gasket (68), Stage 8 adapter Bolts (65) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Cover plate (69) (64) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Metal seal ring Stage 7 port (82) Clamp coupling 40 lb in. (4.6 N·m) (d)
(80), Stage 7 port (79)
cover (81) (Initial
configuration)
Seal fitting (84), Instrumentation 135-155 lb in. (b)
Machine plug (85) port (86) (15.5-17.5 N·m)
LPT air tube (60) HPC aft flange Retaining strap Finger-tight 55-70 (a)
bracket (87) (88), Bolts (89) lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Square gasket (90), Front frame Bolts (91) Finger-tight
Air tube (36) (b)
Air adapter (98), HPC stage 11 port Clamp coupling 110-125 lb in. (a)
Metal seal ring (99) (100) nut (12.4-14.1 N·m)
(Initial
configuration)
Machine plug (102) Instrumentation Seal fitting (101) 135-155 lb in. (b)
port (103) (15.3-17.5 N·m)
Oil supply bracket Lube tray bracket Bolts (104) 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 (a)
(105) (7, figure 2) N·m)
Oil supply bracket Tray mount bracket Bolts (104) 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 (a)
(105) (31, figure 1) N·m)
LPT cooling air Cooling Bolt (6), restraining (a)
tube (92) bracket (71) strap (13)
LPT cooling air HPT case port Metal seal ring 40 lb in.
tube (92) (93), Coupling (12) (4.5 N·m)
Change 4 45
Table 6. Core Module Tubing and Clamping (See figure 6.) (Continued)
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Plug (94) Instrumentation Boss and fitting 135-155 lb in.
port seal (95) (15.3-17.5 N·m) (b)
LPT cooling air LPT cooling air Bolts (16) Finger-tight
tube (92) tube (15) Gasket (14), 110-130 lb in.
Orifice plate (18), (11.3-14.7 N·m)
Nuts (17)
LPT cooling air Bracket Bolts (106), Nut
tube (92) (17, figure 2) (4), Washer (7),
Restraining
strap (107)
LPT cooling air Support bracket Bolts (19),
tube (96) (37, figure 1) Restraining
strap (62) (a)
LPT cooling air HPC case port Metal seal ring 40 lb in.
tube (96) (93), Coupling (12) (4.5 N·m)
Plug (94) Instrumentation Boss and fitting 135-155 lb in.
port seal (95) (15.3-17.5 N·m) (b)
LPT cooling air LPT cooling air Bolts (16), Finger-tight
tube (96) tube (59) Gaskets (68), 110-130 lb in.
Orifice plate (61), (11.3-14.7)
Nuts (17)
Stage 8 cover Stage 8 adapter Coupling (67) TBD
plate (97), Metal (64)
seal ring (66)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts/plugs using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
(c) See figure 7, SWP 1913 04.
(d) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut.
46 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Accelerometer Accelerometer Clamp (2), Bolt (3), 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
integral lead (1) bracket Nut (4) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(9, figure 1)
Bridge bracket Clamp (5), Bolt (3) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(17, figure 4) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical bracket Clamp (6), Bolt (3) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
(19, figure 4) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
No. 3 electrical Jamnut Hand-tighten, then (c)
interface panel 1/4 to 1/2 turn
(20, figure 4)
Change 4 47
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Lead may be spiral wrapped using silicone tape in the area of clamps and 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm) on either side of clamp to provide positive lead clamping as required.
(c) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut.
48 Change 4
5SWP 1913 03
SUBORDINATE WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE EXTERNAL
TUBING, HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of the low pres-
sure turbine (LPT) module and turbine rear frame (TRF) external, tubing,
harnesses, and clamping.
B. The following general instructions shall be met any time tubing, electrical leads,
harnesses, or cables are disturbed:
(1) Unless otherwise specified, the bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
exhibit a smooth transition. No kinks allowed.
(2) Electrical connections of leads and harnesses shall conform to the following assembly
points:
(a) Engage the connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring, while
wiggling the backshell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4 to 1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement
with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (b) and (c), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps
that restrict mating.
(4) Unless otherwise noted, install all bolts with boltheads forward.
2 Change 5
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall be
modified by bending as required. After bending to obtain the required free-state fit, the
following shall apply:
(d) End flange fittings shall seat flush within 0.005 inch (0.12 mm).
(e) End points of tube or manifold shall align with mating connector with 0.060 inch
(1.52 mm) in all planes.
(f) A minimum clearance of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) shall be maintained between tube
OD and adjacent parts.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Penetrating Oil L1 Liquid Wrench or
Dag 2404
(GE Spec. A50TF54)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Tape MIL-I-46852
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc. used during installation of external
tubing, expendable materials are not listed. Reference GEK 105060, Illustrated Parts Breakdown
(IPB), for required parts.
Change 5 3
See figure 2.
CAUTION
B. Remove self-locking nuts (9) and bolts (8) securing support links (7) to manifold
bracket (10).
C. Install safety wire through clevis end of support links (7) where bolt (8) was; secure clevis end
link to manifold with safety wire.
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Balance piston Boltholes 8, 9, 10 Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (1) (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Balance piston Boltholes 22, 23, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (3) 24 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Cable bracket (4) Boltholes 28, 29 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (7), Boltholes 35, 36, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
Balance piston 37 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
bracket (8)
Cable bracket (9) Boltholes 43, 44 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Balance piston Boltholes 48, 49, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (10) 50 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Accelerometer Boltholes 51, 52 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (11) Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Oil scavenge Boltholes 55, 56, Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (12) 57 Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Lube supply Boltholes 61, 62 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (13) Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (14) Boltholes 66, 67 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (15) Boltholes 71, 72 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Electrical Boltholes 78 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (16) through 83 Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
6 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Cable bracket (17) Boltholes 85, 86 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (18) Boltholes 91, 92 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (19) Boltholes 96, 97 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Cable bracket (20) Boltholes 102, 103 Bolts (5), 400-440 lb in. (a)
Self-locking (45.2-49.7 N·m)
nuts (6)
Balance piston Boltholes 115, 116, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (21) 117 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
Balance piston Boltholes 124, 125, Bolts (2) 400-440 lb in. (a)
bracket (22) 126 (45.2-49.7 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
CAUTION
(1) Remove a single nut (11) completely, then thread nut back on and hand-tighten. Mini-
mum two-thread engagement is required.
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Fixturing clamps, Left side air Wing nuts Finger-tight (a)
2C14754G01 manifold (1),
Right side air
manifold (2)
Gasket (3), Left LPT stator Bolts (4) 90-100 lb in. (b) (c) (d)
side air (10.2-11.3 N·m)
manifold (1)
Gasket (3), Right LPT stator Bolts (4) 90-100 lb in. (c) (d) (e)
side air (10.2-11.3 N·m)
manifold (2)
Left side air Left side air Bolts (5), Nuts (6) 55-70 lb in. (c)
manifold (1) manifold (1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Right side air
manifold (2)
Support link (7) Air manifold (1, 2) Bolts (8), Nuts (9) 33-37 lb in. (c) (f) (g)
(3.8-4.1 N·m)
Support link (7) Cooling bracket Bolts (8), Nuts (9) 33-37 lb in. (c) (h) (i) (j)
(3.8-4.1 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Fixturing clamps align the expansion joints for engine assembly.
(b) Align inlet fitting pointing forward at 10:00 o'clock position (aft looking forward).
(c) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(d) Safety-wire.
(e) Align inlet fitting pointing forward at 4:00 o'clock position (aft looking forward).
(f) Adjustable rod-end of link must be installed to manifold.
(g) Begin support link installation at 12:00 o'clock position and proceed clockwise (aft looking
forward).
(h) Loosen link jamnuts and adjust link to fit up with forward brackets.
(i) Tighten link jamnut to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire jamnut.
(j) Remove fixturing clamps.
(2) Remove second nut (11) completely. Lift and swing manifold bracket (10) over bolt (12)
and to one side, making sure manifold bracket is secured by first nut and bolt.
Change 5 9
10 Change 5
Change 5 11
12 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
LPT cooling PCC cooling Bolts (4) 29-33 lb in. (c)
bracket (1) manifold (3) (3.3-3.7 N·m)
(6 places)
LPT cooling PCC cooling Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (2) manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(6 places)
LPT damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (5) (5 places) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
LPT damper PCC cooling Bolts (7), 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (5) manifold (3) Self-locking (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(5 places) nuts (8)
Cooling damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (9) (5 places) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling damper PCC cooling Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (9) manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
(11 places)
LPT damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (10) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
LPT damper PCC cooling Bolts (11), 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (10), manifold (3) Nuts (12) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply
bracket (14)
Cooling damper Bracket (6) Bolts (4) 55-70 lb in.
bracket (13) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cooling damper PCC cooling Bolts (15) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (13), manifold (3) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply
bracket (14)
NOTES:
(a) LPT outer case to PCC cooling manifold clearance shall be a minimum of 0.075 inch
(1.9 mm).
(b) If any tube or manifold does not fit in the free state, within 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), it may be
modified by bending, as required.
(c) This torque value range is non-standard for this bolt at this location.
Change 5 13
14 Change 5
Change 5 15
16 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Balance piston air TRF (3) Bolts (4), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (1), Self-locking (11.3-14.6 N·m)
Gasket (2) nuts (5)
Balance piston air TRF (3) Bolts (4), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (6), Self-locking (11.3-14.6 N·m)
Gasket (2) nuts (5) (2 places)
Balance piston air Balance piston air Metal seal ring (7), 100-130 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) manifold (6) V-retainer (11.3-14.6 N·m)
coupling (8)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) bracket (21, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) bracket (22, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (1) bracket (1, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (6) bracket (3, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (6) bracket (8, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
Balance piston air Balance piston Retaining 50-70 lb in. (a)
manifold (6) bracket (10, strap (10), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1) Bolts (11)
NOTES:
(a) If any tube or manifold does not fit in the free state, within 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), it may be
modified by bending, as required.
(3) Thread removed nut (11) back on and hand-tighten. Minimum two-thread engagement is
required.
Change 5 17
18 Change 5
Change 5 19
20 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
LPT speed Cable bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (b) (c)
electrical cable (1) (7, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Cable bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
(9, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Electrical Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (6), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
Oil scavenge Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (12, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (2)
(2 places)
Lube Supply Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (13, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (2)
Cable bracket (14, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
Cable bracket (15, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to (a)
(16, figure 1) 1/2 turn more
LPT speed Cable bracket (19, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (b) (c)
electrical cable (4) figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
Cable bracket (18, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
Change 5 21
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Cable bracket (17, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (2)
Electrical bracket Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
(16, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (2)
(2 places)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to (a)
(16,figure 1) 1/2 turn more
High temperature Accelerometer Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in. (a) (b) (c)
accelerometer (5), bracket (11, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Electrical figure 1)
bracket (6)
High temperature Oil scavenge Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
accelerometer (5) bracket (12, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), cushion
clamp (7)
(2 places)
Lube supply Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (13, (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (7)
Cable bracket (14, Bolts (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (7)
Cable bracket (15, Bolt (3) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (7)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, 1/4 to
(16, figure 1) 1/2 turn more
Electrical TMF Bolt (18), 50-70 lb in.
bracket (14) Spacer (19) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
22 Change 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Thermocouple (b)
electrical
harness (8)
Right side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (2, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (9)
(4 places)
Right side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (2, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (12),
Cushion clamp
(13)
Electrical Bolts (10) 50-70 lb in.
bracket (14), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion
clamp (12)
Cable bracket (9, Bolts (10) 50-70 lb in.
figure 1), Cushion (6.3-7.9 N·m)
clamp (12)
Electrical bracket Bolts (10) 50-70 lb in.
(16, figure 1), (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion
clamp (12)
(2 places)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, (a)
(16, figure 1) 1/4 to 1/2 turn more
Change 5 23
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Thermocouple (b)
electrical
harness (15)
Left side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (1, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 2), Cushion
clamp (17)
(11 places)
Left side air Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
manifold (1, Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
figure 1), Cushion
clamp (9)
(2 places)
Oil supply bracket Bolts (10), 50-70 lb in.
(14, figure 3), Nuts (11) (6.3-7.9 N·m)
Cushion clamp (9)
Electrical bracket Jamnut Hand-tight, (a)
(16, figure 1) (not shown) 1/4 to 1/2 turn more
NOTES:
(a) Safety-wire.
(b) The bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness shall exhibit a smooth transition. No
kinks allowed.
(c) Cable may be spiral wrapped with silicone tape in the areas of bracket clips or clamps and
0.50 inch (12.7 mm) on either side, beyond the edge of the clip or clamp, to provide positive
lead clamping, as required.
(4) Remove first hand-tightened nut (11). Remove and discard damaged manifold bracket
(10).
(5) Thread removed nut (11) back on and hand-tighten. Minimum two-thread engagement is
required.
(1) Remove one of the hand-tightened nuts (11). Discard used nut.
(2) Coat open bolt (12) with thread lubricant, C02-058, on threads only.
24 Change 5
(3) Place new manifold bracket (10) on open bolt (12) and hand-tighten new nut (11). Mini-
mum two-thread engagement is required.
(4) Remove second used hand-tightened nut (11). Discard used nut.
(5) Coat second bolt (12) with thread lubricant, on threads only.
(6) Swing free end of new manifold bracket (10) over second bolt (12) and
hand-tighten new nut (11). Minimum two-thread engagement is required.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
ENGINE ASSEMBLY EXTERNAL TUBING,
HARNESSES, AND CLAMPING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package contains information concerning installation of engine assem-
bly external tubing, harnesses, and clamping.
B. The following general instructions shall be met any time tubing, electrical leads,
harnesses, or cables are disturbed:
(1) Unless otherwise specified, the bend radii for an electrical lead, cable, or harness must
exhibit a smooth transition. No kinks allowed.
(2) Electrical connections of heads and harnesses shall conform to the following assembly
points:
(a) Engage the connector with its mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring, while
wiggling the back shell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier
slippage occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no movement
with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (b) and (c), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead clamps
that restrict mating.
2 Change 4
(4) Unless otherwise noted, install all bolts with boltheads forward.
(5) If any external tube or manifold does not fit in the free state at assembly within
0.060 inch (1.52 mm), and is known to be within manufacturing tolerance, it shall be
modified by bending as required. After bending, to obtain the required
free-state fit, the following shall apply:
(d) End flange fittings shall seat flush within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
(e) End points of tube or manifold shall align with mating connector with
0.060 inch (1.52 mm) in all planes.
(f) A minimum clearance of 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) shall be maintained between tube
OD and adjacent parts.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamp- SWP 1913 01
ing
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 03
nesses, and Clamping
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
Change 4 3
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699
(C/I)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Silicone Tape MIL-L-46852
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
Due to the variety of gaskets, packings, seals, etc. used during installation of external tubing,
expendable materials are not listed. Refer to Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GEK 105060, for
required parts.
NOTE
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Electrical Boltholes 64, 1 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (1) Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Electrical Boltholes 3, 4 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (5) Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Electrical Boltholes 19, 20 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (6) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
[Deleted if speed
(XN2) sensor is
deleted]
Mounting Boltholes 19-22 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (7) (43.0-47.5 N·m)
Bearing block (9) Mounting Bolts (8), Nuts (10) 360-400 lb in. (a)
bracket (7) (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Angle bracket (11) Boltholes 23, 24 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Panel bracket (12) Boltholes 26, 27, 28 Bolts (8), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
IGV bracket (13) Boltholes 29, 30 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Angle bracket (14) Boltholes 32, 33 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Angle bracket (15) Boltholes 35, 36 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Angle bracket (16) Boltholes 38, 39 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
6 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Angle bracket (17) Boltholes 41, 42 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Angle bracket (18) Boltholes 46, 47 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Mounting Boltholes 50, 51, Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (20) 52, 53 (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Electrical Boltholes 52, 53 Bolts (8), Nuts (4) 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (19) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
[Deleted if speed
(XN2) sensor is
deleted]
Bearing block (21) Mounting Bolts (8), Nuts (10) 360-400 lb in. (a)
bracket (20) (40.7-45.2 N·m)
Electrical Boltholes 55, 56 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (22) Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Electrical Boltholes 58, 59 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (23) Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
Electrical Boltholes 61, 62 Bolts (2), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (24) Washers (3), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (4)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Install mounting brackets on each side of flange.
Change 4 7
8 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Panel bracket (1) Boltholes 26, 27, 28 Bolts (14), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
IGV bracket (2) Boltholes 29, 30 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Angle bracket (3) Boltholes 32, 33 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Angle bracket (4) Boltholes 35, 36 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Angle bracket (5) Boltholes 38, 39 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Angle bracket (6) Boltholes 41, 42 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Angle bracket (7) Boltholes 46, 47 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Electrical Boltholes 52, 53 Bolts (14), 380-420 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (8) Nuts (13) (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Electrical Boltholes 55, 56 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (9) Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
Electrical Boltholes 58, 59 Bolts (11), 380-420 lb in. (a)
bracket (10) Washers (12), (42.9-47.5 N·m)
Nuts (13)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Install mounting brackets on each side of flange.
Change 4 9
10 Change 4
Change 4 11
12 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Channel bracket (1) Panel bracket (9, Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
figure 1, (6.5-7.5 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Channel bracket (1) IGV bracket (13, Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
figure 1) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Panel bracket (3) Channel bracket (1) Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
(6.5-7.5 N·m)
Panel bracket (4) Channel bracket (1) Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
(6.5-7.5 N·m)
No. 1 electrical Panel bracket (8, Bolts (2), 57-67 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) figure 1, Washers (6) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
No. 1 electrical Panel bracket (12, Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) figure 1) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
No. 1 electrical Panel brackets (3, Bolts (2) 57-67 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) 4) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Preformed packing Right VIGV 133-157 lb in. (b)
(7), Reducer (8) actuator rod-end (15.1-17.7 N·m)
port
Preformed packing Right VIGV 133-157 lb in. (b)
(9), Reducer (10) actuator head-end (15.1-17.7 N·m)
port
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (14) (b)
(11, 12), Drain can
(13)
Oil tube/hose (14) Reducer (8) Coupling nut 262-308 lb in.
(29.7-34.7 N·m)
Drain can (13) Right VIGV Hand-tight (c)
actuator rod-end
port
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (15) (b)
(11, 12), Drain can
(13)
Change 4 13
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil tube/hose (15) Reducer (10) Coupling nut 262-308 lb in.
(29.7-34.7 N·m)
Drain can (13) Right VIGV Hand-tight (c)
actuator head-end
port
Oil tube/hose (16) Drain cans (13) Coupling nuts 262-308 lb in.
(two places) (29.7-34.7 N·m)
Oil tube/hoses (14, Angle bracket (11, Clamps (17), 57-67 lb in. (a)
15, 16) figure 1) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Washers (19)
Preformed packing Left VIGV actuator 133-157 lb in. (b)
(7), Reducer (8) rod-end port (15.1-17.7 N·m)
Preformed packing Left VIGV actuator 133-157 lb in. (b)
(9), Reducer (10) head-end port (15.1-17.7 N·m)
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (24) (b)
(11, 12), Drain can
(13)
Oil tube/hose (24) Reducer (10) Coupling nut 262-308 lb in.
(29.7-34.7 N·m)
Drain can (13) Left VIGV actuator Hand-tight (c)
rod-end port
Preformed packings Oil tube/hose (25) (b)
(11, 12), Drain can
(13)
Oil tube/hose (25) Reducer (8) Coupling nut 262-308 lb in.
(29.7-34.7 N·m)
Drain can (13) Left VIGV actuator Hand-tight (c)
head-end port
Oil tube/hose (26) Drain cans (13) Coupling nuts 262-308 lb in.
(two places) (29.7-34.7 N·m)
IGV oil tube (27) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 262-308 lb in.
(15, 24) (29.7-34.7 N·m)
14 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil manifold (28) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 262-308 lb in.
(16, 26) (29.7-34.7 N·m)
Oil manifold (29) Oil tube/hoses Coupling nuts 262-308 lb in.
(14, 25) (29.7-34.7 N·m)
Oil tube/hoses Angle bracket (17, Clamps (30), 57-67 lb in. (a)
(24, 25), figure 1) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Oil manifold (28) Washers (19)
IGV oil tube (27), Oil Angle brackets (14, Clamps (31), 57-67 lb in. (a)
manifolds (28, 29) 15, 16, figure 1) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Washers (19)
IGV oil tube (27), Oil IGV bracket (13, Clamps (32), 57-67 lb in. (a)
manifolds (28, 29) figure 1) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Washers (19)
IGV oil tube (27), Oil No. 1 electrical Clamps (33), 57-67 lb in. (a)
manifolds (28, 29) interface panel (5) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Washers (19)
IGV oil tube (27), Oil Angle bracket (11, Clamps (17), 57-67 lb in. (a)
manifolds (28, 29) figure 1) Bolts (18), (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Washers (19)
IGV oil tube (34) Oil manifold (29) Coupling nut 460-540 lb in.
(52.0-61.0 N·m)
IGV oil tube (35) IGV oil tube (27) Coupling nut 55-65 lb ft
(77-88 N·m)
Teflon hose (20) IGV oil tube (34) Coupling nut 460-540 lb in.
(52.0-61.0 N·m)
Teflon hose (20) Union (86, figure 3, Coupling nut 460-540 lb in.
SWP 1913 01) (52.0-61.0 N·m)
IGV oil hose (21) IGV oil tube (35) Coupling nut 55-65 lb ft
(77-88 N·m)
IGV oil hose (21) Union (84, figure 3, Coupling nut 55-65 lb ft
SWP 1913 01) (77-88 N·m)
IGV oil tube (34) No. 1 electrical Clamps (23), 57-67 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) Bolts (2) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
Change 4 15
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
IGV oil tube (35) No. 1 electrical Clamps (22), 57-67 lb in. (a)
interface panel (5) Bolts (2) (6.5-7.5 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-7808, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
VSV actuator Boltholes 18, 19, Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in.
bracket (1) 24, 26 (42.9-47.5 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 25 Bolt (3) 209-231 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 27 Bolt (4) 570-630 lb in.
(64.4-71.2 N·m) (a) (b)
Hydraulic Bolthole 33 Bolt (2) 380-420 lb in.
bracket (5) (42.9-47.5 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 34 Bolt (4) 570-630 lb in.
(64.4-71.2 N·m) (a) (b)
Bracket Boltholes 45, 46 Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in.
assembly (6) (42.9-47.5 N·m) (a) (b)
Bracket Front frame Bolt (7) 61.8-68.3 lb in.
assembly (6) (7.0-7.7 N·m) (a) (b)
Bracket Bolthole 54 Bolt (2) 380-420 lb in.
assembly (8) (42.9-47.5 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 55 Bolt (4) 570-630 lb in.
(64.4-71.2 N·m) (a) (b)
Bracket Front frame Bolt (7) 61.8-68.3 lb in.
assembly (8) (7.0-7.7 N·m) (a) (b)
VSV actuator Boltholes 60, 61, Bolts (2) 380-420 lb in.
bracket (9) 66, 68 (42.9-47.5 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 67 Bolt (3) 209-231 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) (a) (b)
Bolthole 69 Bolt (4) 570-630 lb in.
(64.4-71.2 N·m) (a) (b)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolt/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire
Change 4 17
18 Change 4
Change 4 19
20 Change 4
Change 4 21
22 Change 4
Change 4 23
24 Change 4
Change 4 25
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Preformed B-sump air tube (2, (a)
packing (1) figure 6,
SWP 1913 02)
Gasket (2), Flange Air elbow (21, Bolts (4), Nuts (5) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b) (c)
coupling (3) figure 5, (7.0-7.7 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
B-sump air tube (2, Flange coupling (3) Coupling nut Hand-tight (d)
figure 6,
SWP 1913 02)
Gasket (6), Air Front frame Bolts (8) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
manifold (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Air manifold (7) B-sump bracket (3, Retaining strap (9), 570-630 lb in. (b)
figure 4, Bolts (8), (64.4-71.2 N·m)
SWP 1913 02) Washers (10),
Nuts (5)
Air manifold (7) Vent bracket (6, Clamp (11), Bolts 570-630 lb in. (b)
figure 4, (8) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Air manifold (7) B-sump bracket (4, Clamp (12), Bolts 570-630 lb in. (b)
figure 4, (8), Washers (10), (64.4-71.2 N·m)
SWP 1913 02) Nuts (5)
Air manifold (7) B-sump bracket (9, Clamp (13), Bolts 570-630 lb in. (b)
figure 4, (8), Washers (10), (64.4-71.2 N·m)
SWP 1913 02) Nuts (5)
Air manifold (7) B-sump bracket (7, Clamp (14), Bolts 570-630 lb in. (b)
figure 4, (8) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Gasket (15), Air Front frame Bolts (8) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
manifold (7) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Preformed packing Air tube (17) (a)
(16)
Gasket (65), Flange Air manifold (7) Bolts (19), Nuts (5) 570-630 lb in. (b) (c)
coupling (18) (64.4-71.2 N·m)
26 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Air tube (17) Flange coupling Coupling nut Hand-tight (d)
(18)
Gasket (66), B- and C-sump Bolts (4), Nuts (5) 570-630 lb in. (b)
Air tube (17) vent fitting (64.4-71.2 N·m)
Preformed packing Right VSV actuator 135-150 lb in. (b)
(20), Reducer (21) head-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Right VSV actuator 135-150 lb in. (a)
(22), Reducer (23) rod-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Left VSV actuator 135-150 lb in. (a)
(24), Reducer (25) head-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Left VSV actuator 135-150 lb in. (a)
(26), Reducer (27) rod-end port (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Preformed packing Oil manifold (31) (a)
(28, 29), Drain can
(30)
Oil manifold (31) Reducers (21, 25) Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (30) Left/right VSV Hand-tight (f)
actuator head-end
ports
Preformed packing Oil manifold (32) (a)
(28, 29), Drain can
(30)
Oil manifold (32) Reducers (23, 27) Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Drain can (30) Left/right VSV Hand-tight (f)
actuator rod-end
ports
Oil manifold (33) Drain can (30) Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Change 4 27
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil manifold (33) Oil drain tube (51, Coupling nuts 270-300 lb in.
figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (33) VBV bracket (6, Clamp (34), 55-70 lb in. (b)
figure 4, Bolt (8), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01) Washer (10),
Nut (5)
VSV oil tube (10, Oil manifold (32) Coupling nut 450-550- lb in.
figure 5, (50.8-62.1 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
VSV oil tube (11, Oil manifold (31) Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
figure 5, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (35) Drain can (30) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Oil drain tube (39, Drain can (30) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil drain tube (39, Oil manifold (35) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (36) Oil manifold (23, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
figure 5, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (36) Oil manifold (45, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
figure 5, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (37) Oil manifold (26, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
figure 5, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (37) Oil manifold (43, Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
figure 5, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
28 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
VBV oil tube (38) Lower left VBV Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
actuator drain can (30.5-33.9 N·m)
(34, figure 5,
SWP 1913 01)
VBV oil tube (38) Oil manifold (35) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube (52, figure Oil manifold (36) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
5, SWP 1913 01) (30.5-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube Oil manifold (37) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(53, figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
VBV oil tube (39) Lower right VBV Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
actuator drain can (30.5-33.9 N·m)
(34, figure 5,
SWP 1913 01)
VBV oil tube (39) Oil manifold (35) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m)
Oil tube Oil manifold (36) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(55, figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil tube Oil manifold (37) Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
(54, figure 5, (30.5-33.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
VBV oil tube (9, Oil manifold (37) Coupling nut 75-91 lb in.
figure 5, (102-123 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
VBV oil tube (12, Oil manifold (36) Coupling nut 75-91 lb in.
figure 5, (102-123 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Supply oil Front frame Coupling nut 135-150 lb in.
tube (40) (15.3-16.9 N·m)
Oil manifold (41) Union (54, figure 3, Coupling nut 270-300 lb in.
SWP 1913 01) (30.5-33.9 N·m)
Change 4 29
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Oil manifold (41) Front frame Coupling nut 450-550 lb in.
(50.8-62.1 N·m)
Oil manifold (41) Oil bracket (11, Clamp (42), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
figure 4, Bolt (8) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (41) No. 2 electrical Clamps (43), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
interface panel (12, Bolt (8) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
figure 4,
SWP 1913 01)
Oil manifold (31, Bracket assembly Clamp (44, 45, 46), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
32, 35, 37, 36, 41) (8, figure 4) Spacer (47), Bolt (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(48, 49), Washer
(50)
Oil manifold (31, Bracket assembly Clamp (51, 52, 53), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
32, 35, 37, 36, 41) (6, figure 4) Spacer (54), Bolt (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(49, 55), Washer
(50)
Oil manifold (31, Front frame (two Clamp (56, 57), 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
32, 37, 36) places) Spacer (58), Bolt (7.0-7.7 N·m)
(59), Washer (60)
Tubes (31, 32) Front frame Clamp (61), Spacer 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
(62), Bolt (63), (7.0-7.7 N·m)
Washer (60)
Oil manifold (35) Hydraulic Clamp (64), Bolt 61.8-68.3 lb in. (b)
bracket (5, figure 4) (8) (7.0-7.7 N·m)
30 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
WARNING
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate packings using lubricating oil.
(b) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(c) Boltheads face aft.
(d) Use cushion jaw pliers, if necessary.
(e) Safety-wire.
(f) Align drain fittings before tightening.
Change 4 31
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
HP recoup Bolthole 135, Bolt (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a) (b)
bracket (1) 136, 1 (23.7-25.9 N·m)
Bracket (4) Bolthole 73, 74, 75 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a) (b)
(23.7-25.9 N·m)
LPT cooling air Bolthole 27, 28, 29 Bolts (2), Nuts (3) 210-230 lb in. (a) (b)
support bracket (5) (23.7-25.9 N·m)
LPT cooling air LPT cooling air Bolts (7), Nuts (8) Finger-tight 55-70 (a)
support bracket (6) support bracket (5) lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Boltheads face aft.
32 Change 4
Change 4 33
34 Change 4
Change 4 35
36 Change 4
Change 4 37
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Bracket (1) Tray mount Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (6.2-7.9 N·m)
(31, figure 1,
SWP 1913 02)
Bracket (1) Bracket (TBP) Bolts (2) 55-70 lb in. (a)
(6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (3), Lube and scavenge Bolts (5) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Scavenge oil pump (7.0-7.7 N·m)
tube (4)
Gasket (6), B scavenge oil tube Bolts (7), Nuts (8) 61.8-68.3 lb in. (a)
Scavenge oil (54, figure 6, (7.0-7.7 N·m)
tube (4) SWP 1913 02)
Scavenge oil Bracket (1) Clamp (9), 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube (4) Bolt (2) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Scavenge oil Bracket (1) Clamp (10), Spacer 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube (4) (11), Bolt (12) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (13), Lube and scavenge Bolts (5) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Scavenge oil pump (6.2-7.9 N·m)
tube (14), Electrical
bracket (15)
Scavenge oil Bracket (1) Clamp (17), 55-70 lb in. (a)
tube (14) Bolt (2) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (16), C Scavenge oil Bolt (7), Nut (8) 55-70 lb in. (a)
Scavenge oil tube (48, figure 6, (6.2-7.9 N·m)
tube (14) SWP 1913 02)
Teflon hose (18) Oil supply tube Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
(23) (73.4-87.0 N·m)
Teflon hose (18) B and C supply oil Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
tube (44, figure 6, (73.4-87.0 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Teflon hose (20) E-sump scavenge Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
manifold fitting (73.4-87.0 N·m)
38 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Teflon hose (21) D-sump scavenge Coupling nut 650-770 lb in.
manifold fitting (73.4-87.0 N·m)
Teflon hose (22) Oil supply Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
manifold fitting (102-123 N·m)
Oil supply tube (23) Teflon hose (22) Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m)
Oil supply tube (23) Teflon hose (24) Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m)
Teflon hose (20) Oil supply Clamp (25), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (21, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 3,
SWP 1913 03)
Teflon hose (20) Bracket (1) Clamp (25), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Teflon hose (20) Fitting Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m)
Teflon hose (20) Oil scavenge Clamp (29), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (12, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 1,
SWP 1913 03)
(2 places)
Teflon hose (20) Lube supply Clamp (29), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (13, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 1,
SWP 1913 03)
Teflon hose (21) Oil supply Clamp (27), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (21, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 3,
SWP 1913 03)
Teflon hose (21) Bracket (1) Clamp (27), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Teflon hose (21) Fitting Coupling nut 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m)
Change 4 39
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Teflon hose (24) Electrical Bracket Clamp (28), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(16, figure 1, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 03)
(2 places)
Teflon hose (24) Oil supply Clamp (28), 55-70 lb in. (a)
bracket (21, Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
figure 3,
SWP 1913 03)
Teflon hose (24) Bracket (1) Clamp (28), 55-70 lb in. (a)
Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply tube (23) Bracket (1) Clamp (30), 55-70 lb in. (a)
(2 places) Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Oil supply tube (23) Bracket (1) Clamp (31), 55-70 lb in. (a)
Bolt (26) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (32), HP air LPT case Bolts (34) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
tube (37) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (35), LPT case Bolts (34) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
Tee (36) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
HP air tube (37) Tee (36) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(54.2-67.8 N·m)
HP air tube (37) Recoup bracket (1, Retaining 55-70 lb in. (a)
figure 6) strap (38), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Bolts (2),
Washers (39),
Nuts (8)
Gasket (40), HP air LPT case Bolts (34) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
tube (44) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Gasket (42), LPT case Bolts (34) 55-70 lb in. (a) (b)
Elbow (43) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
HP air tube (44) Tee (43) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(54.2-67.8 N·m)
40 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
HP air tube (44) Bracket (4, Retaining 55-70 lb in. (a)
figure 6) strap (45), (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Bolts (2),
Washers (39),
Nuts (8)
HP recoup air tube Tee (36) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(24, figure 6, (54.2-67.8 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
HP recoup air tube Tee (43) Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (b)
(42, figure 6, (54.2-67.8 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
LPT air tube (15, Air manifold (1, Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (a)
figure 6, SWP 1913 figure 2, (54.2-67.8 N·m)
02) SWP 1913 03)
LPT air tube (59, Air manifold (2, Coupling nut 40-50 lb ft (a)
figure 6, SWP 1913 figure 2, (54.2-67.8 N·m)
02) SWP 1913 03)
NOTES:
(a) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts/nuts using thread lubricant.
(b) Safety-wire.
Change 4 41
42 Change 4
Change 4 43
44 Change 4
Change 4 45
46 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
T2 sensor electrical Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
lead (1) (23, figure 1)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(22, figure 1)
Electrical bracket Spring clip (a)
(19, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(18, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(17, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(16, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(15, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(14, figure 1)
IGV bracket Spring clip (a)
(13, figure 1)
Channel bracket Spring clip (a)
(1, figure 3)
No. 1 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
interface panel 1/4 turn
(5, figure 3)
Left side VIGV/ Left VIGV actuator Connector ring Hand-tight
LVDT electrical
harness (2)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(18, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(17, figure 1)
Change 4 47
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(16, figure 1)
Angle bracket Spring clip (a)
(15, figure 1)
Angle bracket (14, Spring clip (a)
figure 1)
Channel bracket Spring clip (a)
(1, figure 3)
No. 1 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
interface panel 1/4 turn
(5, figure 3)
Right side VIGV/ Right VIGV Connector ring Hand-tight
LVDT electrical actuator
harness (3)
Angle bracket Clamp (5), Bolt (6) 55-70 lb in. (c)
(11, figure 1) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
Channel bracket Clamp (5), Bolt (6) 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(1, figure 3) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
No. 1 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
interface panel 1/4 turn
(5,figure 3)
HCU torque motor HCU VSV torque Connector ring Hand-tight
electrical motor connector
harness (4) (bottom)
HCU VSV torque Connector ring Hand-tight
motor connector
(middle)
HCU VSV torque Connector ring Hand-tight
motor connector
(top)
48 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
No. 1 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
interface panel 1/4 turn
(5, figure 3)
Left side Left VSV actuator Connector ring Hand-tight
VBV/VSV/LVDT
electrical harness
(2, figure 6,
SWP 1913 01)
Right side Right VSV actuator Connector ring Hand-tight
VBV/VSV/LVDT
electrical harness
(8, figure 6,
SWP 1913 01)
T3 sensor electrical HP recoup bracket Clamp (8), Bolt (9) 55-70 lb in. (c)
lead (7) (15, figure 3, (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Left side UV UV detector Bolt (35) 55-70 lb in.
detector integral brackets (16 and (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (10), Cooling 17, figure 3,
can (33), SWP 1913 02)
Gasket (34)
Left side UV HP recoup bracket Clamp (11) 55-70 lb in. (a) (d)
detector integral (15, figure 3, (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (10) SWP 1913 02)
Leads (7, 10) Electrical bracket Clamps (11, 12), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(1, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
T3 sensor electrical UV detector Clamp (13), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
lead (7) bracket (3, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Left side UV UV detector Clamp (14), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
detector integral bracket (3, figure 3, Bolt (9), Washer (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (10) SWP 1913 02) (15), Nut (16)
Change 4 49
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Leads (7, 10) Electrical bracket Clamp (17, 18), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(4, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Right side UV UV detector Bolts (35) 55-70 lb in.
detector integral bracket (3, figure 3, (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (19), Cooling SWP 1913 02)
can (33),
Gasket (34)
Right side UV Electrical bracket Clamp (20), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
detector integral (4, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (19) SWP 1913 02)
Leads (7, 10) Cooling bracket (5, Clamp (21, 22), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
figure 3, SWP 1913 Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
02)
Right side UV Cooling bracket Clamp (23), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
detector integral (5, figure 3, Bolts (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (19) SWP 1913 02)
Leads (10, 19) Cooling bracket Clamp (24, 25), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(6, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
T3 sensor electrical Cooling bracket Clamp (26), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
lead (7) (6, figure 3, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Leads (7, 19) Electrical bracket Clamp (27, 28), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
(22, figure 1, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
Left side UV Electrical bracket Clamp (29), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
detector integral (22, figure 1, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (10) SWP 1913 02)
Right side UV Bridge bracket Clamp (31), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c) (e)
detector integral (17, figure 4, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (19) SWP 1913 02)
50 Change 4
Attach To Secure
Item Item With Torque Notes
Left side UV Bridge bracket Clamp (30), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c) (e)
detector integral (17, figure 4, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
lead (10) SWP 1913 02)
T3 sensor integral Bridge bracket Clamp (32), 55-70 lb in. (a) (c)
lead (7) (17, figure 4, Bolt (9) (6.2-7.9 N·m)
SWP 1913 02)
T3 sensor integral No. 3 electrical Jamnut Hand-tight, then (b)
lead (7) interface panel 1/4 turn
(20, figure 4,
SWP 1913 02)
NOTES:
(a) Lead may be spiral wrapped using silicone tape in the area of spring clips or clamps and
0.5 inch (12.7 mm) on either side of clip or clamp to provide positive lead clamping as
required.
(b) Safety-wire to adjacent jamnut using R297P02 safety wire.
(c) Lubricate threads and washer faces of bolts using thread lubricate.
(d) See figure 3, SWP 1913 02 for attaching hardware.
(e) See packager's manual for UV detector integral lead final hookup.
51/(52 Blank)
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
FLOW DIVIDER VALVE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package (WP) contains instructions for removing and installing fuel pressurization
valve. (Reference kit, PN 682L241.)
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04
5. Expendable Material.
A. Position waste fluid container under fuel pressurization valve (1, figure 1).
WARNING
B. Remove drain plug (27) from pressurization valve (1). Drain fuel into container.
Reinstall drain plug.
CAUTION
C. Remove safety wire. Disconnect water inlet line (2) from tube nipple (3). Remove
nipple and preformed packing (4) from mixing tee (5). Discard preformed packing.
D. Remove four bolts and washers (7) connecting fuel/water outlet line (6) to mixing
tee(5).
F. Remove safety wire. Remove mixing tee (5) from customer-supplied mixing line (9).
G. Remove safety wire. Disconnect customer-supplied mixing line (9) from tube
nipple (10).
H. Remove safety wire. Remove nipple (10) from check valve (11). Remove preformed
packing (12) from nipple. Discard preformed packing.
I. Remove safety wire. Remove check valve (11) from pressurization valve (1).
Remove preformed packing (13) from check valve. Discard preformed packing.
J. Remove safety wire. Disconnect reference pressure line (14) from tube elbow (15).
K. Remove safety wire. Loosen hex nut (16) at pressurization valve (1). Remove elbow
(15), nut, and preformed packing (17) from pressurization valve (1). Discard
preformed packing.
L. Remove safety wire. Disconnect fuel line (19) from tube nipple (18). Remove nipple
from check valve (20). Remove preformed packing (21) from nipple. Discard
preformed packing.
M. Remove safety wire. Remove check valve (20) from customer-supplied interface (22).
Remove preformed packing (23) from check valve. Discard preformed packing.
N. Remove four bolts (24) and washers (25) that secure customer-supplied interface (22)
to pressurization valve (1). Remove valve and remove seal gasket (26). Discard seal
gasket.
A. Install new seal gasket (26) onto pressurization valve (1). Secure pressurization valve
tocustomer-supplied interface (22) using four washers (25) and bolts (24). Tighten
bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
B. Lubricate new preformed packing (23) with petrolatum. Install preformed packing
onto check valve (20). Install check valve into customer-supplied interface (22),
tighten to270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque, and safety-wire.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing (21) with petrolatum. Install preformed packing
onto tube nipple (18). Install tube nipple onto check valve (20), tighten to
270-300 lb in.(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque, and safety-wire.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
D. Connect fuel line (19) from primary nozzle manifold to nipple (18). Tighten coupling
nut to 650-700 lb in. (73.4-79.1 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
E. Lubricate new preformed packing (17) with petrolatum. Install nut (16) onto elbow
(15). Install preformed packing onto elbow and install elbow into pressurization valve
(1). Tighten nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
F. Connect elbow (15) to reference pressure line (14) coupling nut to elbow (15), tighten
nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque, and safety-wire.
G. Lubricate new preformed packing (13) with petrolatum. Install preformed packing
onto check valve (11). Install check valve into pressurization valve (1), tighten to
360-400 lb in. (40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque, and safety-wire.
H. Lubricate new preformed packing (12) with petrolatum. Install preformed packing
onto tube nipple (10). Install nipple onto check valve (11), tighten to 360-400 lb in.
(40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque, and safety-wire.
I. Connect customer-supplied mixing line (9) to mixing tee (5). Tighten coupling nut to
900-1100 lb in. (101.7-124.3 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
J. Connect customer-supplied mixing line (9) onto nipple (10). Tighten coupling nut to
900-1100 lb in. (101.7-124.3 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
K. Install new seal gasket (8) onto mixing tee (5). Install fuel/water outlet line (6) onto
gasket and mixing tee and secure with four bolts and washers (7). Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in.(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
L. Lubricate new preformed packing (4) with petrolatum. Install preformed packing onto
tube nipple (3). Install nipple into mixing tee (5). Tighten nipple to 540-600 lb in.
(61.0-67.8 N·m) of torque. Connect water inlet line (2) onto nipple. Tighten coupling
nut to 900-1100 lb in. (101.7-124.3 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
NOTE
M. Adjust primary fuel manifold pressure to 375-425 psig (2586-2930 kPa gage) by
changing downstream pressurizing valve orifice size as necessary. Refer to packager’s
instructions and fuel system drawings for location and replacement of pressurizing
valve orifice plates.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR WATER INJECTION
(SPRINT®) KIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure|
compressor water injection (SPRINT®) kit. The removal procedure will restore the gas turbine
to the original configuration. The installation procedure can only be used on a gas turbine that
is SPRINT® ready.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Epoxy Paint MIL-C-22750, Color
26307
Molybdenum MIL-L-25681
Disulfide Royco 81MS
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed. Spec.
TT-P-1757
5. Expendable Material.
NOTE
(1) Support air manifold as needed. Remove coupling clamp (1, figure 1). Remove
bolts (18), gaskets (17), and plate orifice (16). Remove metal seal ring (2) from
stage 8 adapter (3). Discard gaskets and metal seal ring.
(2) Remove self-locking nuts (20) and bolts (19) that secure air tube (14) to air tube
or air manifold (4).
(3) Remove self-locking nuts (9) and bolts (8) that secure retaining strap (7) to
bracket (15). Remove restraining strap and air tube (14). Remove and discard
gasket (17).
NOTE
(4) Remove self-locking nuts (13) and bolts (12) that secure air tube or air manifold
(4) to air manifold (10).
(5) Remove self-locking nuts (9) and bolts (8) that secure retaining strap (7)
to brackets (5 and 6). Remove restraining strap and air tube or air manifold (4).
Remove and discard gasket (11).
B. Remove air tube and air manifold brackets from engine as follows:
(1) Remove self-locking nuts (1, figure 2) and bolts (2) that secure brackets (3) to air
collector. Remove brackets (3).
C. Remove stage 8 bleed adapter (3, figure 1). Retain coupling clamp (1) for reuse, and
discard metal seal ring (2).
D. Remove bolts and flat washers that secure air collector access panels (figure 3).
Remove access panels.
3
E. Disconnect air tubes (2 and 3, figure 4) from air manifold.
4
F. On original configuration, remove self-locking nuts (8, figure 5), bolts (7), and gasket
(6) from air manifolds at 12:00 o'clock and 6:00 o'clock positions. Discard gaskets.
F.A.On current configuration, remove self-locking nuts (8), bolts (7) and gaskets (6) from
air manifold at 3:00 o'clock and 9:00 o'clock positions.
G. Remove self-locking nuts (2) that secure air manifold U-bolts (1) to brackets (4).
5
H. Remove air manifold U-bolts (1).
I. On original configuration, remove left side air manifold (5) and right side air manifold
(3).
I.A.On current configuration, remove top air manifold (9) and bottom air manifold (10).
L. Remove water tubes (1, figure 4) from water nozzles (2 and 3, figure 7).
NOTE
M. Disconnect top water manifold (1, figure 6) from bottom water manifold (5) at
3:00 o'clock and 9:00 o'clock positions.
M.A.Disconnect top water manifold (1) from bottom water manifold (5) at 9:00 o'clock
position. Disconnect middle water manifold (6) from top and bottom water manifolds
(1 and 5) at 3:00 o'clock position.
N. Remove self-locking nuts that secure water manifold retaining straps (3) to
brackets (2). Remove straps.
6
O. Remove top and bottom water manifolds (1 and 5).
10
O.A. Remove top, bottom, and middle water manifolds (1, 5, and 6).
CAUTION
Ensure variable bypass valves (VBV) are in closed position so
hardware or tools will not fall into front frame.
NOTE
Original configuration water nozzle bolts are double hex head with safety wire or cable.
Current bolts are hex head without safety wire. Double hex head bolts will not be reinstalled.
P. Remove safety cable and bolts (4, figure 7) that secure short and long water nozzles
(2 and 3) to front frame.
Q. Remove short and long water nozzles (2 and 3) from front frame.
11
S. Install 24 plugs (1, figure 7) into front frame and secure with bolts (4). Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
7
T. Install cover plates (7, figure 8) using bolts (8). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
U. Remove brackets and install doublers onto LPC stator aft flange as follows (figure 9):
(1) Remove bolts, nuts, and three brackets at boltholes No. 2-5, 8-11, and 15-18.
(2) Remove remaining bolts, washers, and nuts at boltholes No. 1-23.
WARNING
(3) Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of 96 bolts that secure
aft flange. Allow primer to dry.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and bearing surfaces of aft flange bolts.
(5) Install bolts, two long doublers, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange, at boltholes No. 4-23.
(6) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Remove bolts, nuts, and two brackets at boltholes No. 24-32.
(8) Install bolts, one short doubler, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange at boltholes No. 24-31.
(9) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
(10) Remove bolts, nuts, and three brackets at boltholes No. 34-37, 41-44, and 49-52.
(11) Remove remaining bolts, washers and nuts at boltholes No. 33-55.
12
13
(12) Install bolts, two long doublers, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange at boltholes No. 32-51.
9
8
(13) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
(14) Remove bolts, nuts, and three brackets at boltholes No. 56-59, 61-64, and 66-69.
(15) Remove remaining bolts, washers, and nuts at boltholes No. 60-71.
(16) Install bolts, two long doublers, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange at boltholes No. 52-71.
(17) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
(18) Remove bolts, nuts and one bracket at boltholes No. 72-76.
(19) Remove remaining bolts, washers, and nuts at boltholes No. 77-81.
(20) Install bolts, one short doubler, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange at boltholes No. 72-79.
(21) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
(22) Remove bolts, nuts, and two brackets at boltholes No. 82-85 and No. 89-92.
(23) Remove remaining bolts, washers, and nuts at boltholes No. 86-96.
(24) Install bolts, two long doublers, and nuts in aft flange, boltheads aft, doublers on
forward side of aft flange at boltholes No. 80-96 and No. 1-3.
(25) Tighten aft flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.2-16.3 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
14
15
16
B. Ensure most inboard bolts of air collector forward flange at 3:00 o’clock and 9:00
o’clock positions are installed with boltheads down (figure 3). If not, remove bolts and
nuts and reinstall with boltheads down. Tighten nut to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m)
of torque.
(1) Remove bolts (1, figure 8) that secure channel bracket (2) to electrical bracket (5)
on air collector forward flange at 7:00 o’clock position, forward looking aft
(FLA).
(2) Remove self-locking nuts (3) and bolts (4) that secure electrical bracket (5) to air
collector forward flange. Remove and discard bracket.
(3) Reinstall bolt (4) and self-locking nut (3) in bolthole closest to 6:00 o’clock
position, vacated by electrical bracket (5) removal.
(4) Using remaining bolts (4) and self-locking nuts (3), secure electrical bracket (6),
on forward side of flange, bracket tab forward, and body inclined toward
6:00 o’clock position.
(5) Using bolts (1), secure channel bracket (2) to electrical bracket (6). Tighten bolts
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Do not remove more than two doublers at a time, or serious engine
damage could result. Install brackets, bolts, and washers in place
of removed doubler(s) before removing next doubler.
D. Remove doublers and install brackets onto LPC aft flange (figure 9) as follows:
(1) Beginning at 12:00 o'clock position, FLA and counting counterclockwise (CCW),
remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and two doublers from LPC aft flange at 12:00
o'clock and 11:00 o'clock positions. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
WARNING
Zinc Chromate Primer, TT-P-1757, is highly toxic to skin,
eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and
vapor control are required. Avoid all contact.
(2) Coat bolt shanks above threads and bearing surfaces of bolts with zinc chromate
primer. Allow primer to air dry.
17
NOTE
(3) Lightly coat bolt and nut threads with thread lubricant. Using bolts, boltheads aft,
and self-locking nuts, secure brackets, bracket tabs inclined forward, on forward
side of LPC aft flange at boltholes No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 5, No. 8, No. 9, No. 10,
and No. 11. Tighten bolts to 133-147 lb in. (15.0-16.6 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
A bracket will be installed in a later step in boltholes No. 90, No. 91,
and No. 92.
(4) Install remaining bolts, flat washers, and self-locking nuts in open boltholes in
flange, boltheads aft and washers under nuts, except boltholes No. 90, No. 91, and
No. 92. Tighten nuts to 133-147 lb in. (15.0-16.6 N·m) of torque.
(5) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 9:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(6) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 15, No. 16, No. 17, and No. 18.
(7) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 8:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
NOTE
At 8:30 o'clock and 2:30 o'clock positions, FLA, five bolts and
self-locking nuts are used to install brackets.
(8) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 24, No. 25, No. 26, No. 27, and No. 28.
(9) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 7:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
18
(10) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install brackets on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 29, No. 30, No. 31, No. 32, No. 34, No. 35, No. 36, and No. 37.
(11) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 6:00 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(12) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 41, No. 42, No. 43, and No. 44.
(13) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 4:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(14) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 49, No. 50, No. 51, No. 52, No. 56, No. 57, No. 58, and No. 59.
(15) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 3:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(16) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 61, No. 62, No. 63, No. 64, No. 66, No. 67, No. 68, and No. 69.
(17) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 2:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(18) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 72, No. 73, No. 74, No. 75, and No. 76.
(19) Remove self-locking nuts, bolts, and doubler from LPC aft flange at 1:30 o'clock
position. Retain bolts and nuts for reuse.
(20) Repeat substeps (2), (3), and (4) to install bracket on LPC aft flange at boltholes
No. 82, No. 83, No. 84, No. 85, No. 89, No. 90, No. 91, and No. 92.
19
CAUTION
NOTE
(1) Remove bolts (4, figure 7) and plug (1) from front frame at 12:30 o’clock
position, located just aft of VBV actuation ring (5).
CAUTION
Do not install original double hex head bolts. Use current hex head
bolts. Double hex head bolts may interfere with VBV system
bellcranks. Reference Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0209.
(2) Using hex head bolts (4), secure short water nozzle (2), at 12:30 o'clock position,
just aft of VBV actuation ring, orienting nozzle with larger nipple to clockwise
(CW) side. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(3) Remove bolts (4) and plug (1) at next location CW (FLA) from substep (2).
(4) Using hex head bolts (4), secure long water nozzle (3), in next opening CW (FLA)
with larger nipple to CW side of nozzle. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(5) Verify long water nozzle (3) is in correct position. Ensure nozzle is directly
forward of T2.5 sensor on front frame.
(6) Continue installing water nozzles (2 and 3) by alternating short and long nozzles
per substeps (1) through (4) in remaining 22 locations around front frame.
20
NOTE
(1) Remove self-locking nuts (1, figure 2) and bolts (2) from first three boltholes and
sixth, seventh, and eighth boltholes, counting from forward end of right side of air
collector horizontal flange. Retain nuts for reuse.
(2) Remove self-locking nuts (1) and bolts (2) from three boltholes on right-side
outer end of air collector horizontal flange aft side. Retain nuts for reuse.
(3) Apply a thin coat of lubricating oil to threads and mating surfaces of nine new
bolts (2).
(4) Place bracket (3), on top surface of air collector horizontal flange, over three
forward boltholes, with bracket tab turned outboard. Secure bracket to flange
using three bolts (2) and self-locking nuts (1) removed in substep (1). Tighten
nuts finger-tight.
(5) Repeat substep (4) for bracket (3) at sixth, seventh, and eighth boltholes on air
collector horizontal flange.
(6) Repeat substep (4) for bracket (3) at three boltholes on right-side outer end of air
collector horizontal flange aft side.
(7) Position bracket (4) at high pressure compressor (HPC) bosses just forward of
stage 2, second and third bosses up from right-side horizontal splitline. Bracket
body goes aft of mounting tab. Secure bracket to bosses using bolts (6). Tighten
bolts finger-tight.
(8) Position bracket (5) at HPC bosses just aft of stage 5, at 2:30 o’clock, aft looking
forward (ALF). Bracket body goes forward of mounting tab. Secure bracket to
bosses using bolts (6). Tighten bolts finger-tight.
21
(1) Remove bolts (8, figure 8) and cover plates (7) that cover water injection tube
access openings in air collector. Discard cover plates and bolts.
(2) Connect B-nut nearest single right-angle bend of water tube (1, figure 4), to water
nozzle just CW (FLA) of 12:00 o'clock position. Tube routes forward through air
collector wall toward brackets installed in step A. Tighten B-nut finger-tight.
(3) Repeat substep (2) for remaining 23 water nozzles (2 and 3, figure 7).
NOTE
(1) Position top water manifold (1, figure 6) on LPC stator, with manifold ends at
3:00 o'clock and 9:00 o'clock positions and manifold nipples facing aft, over
brackets (2) installed in step A. Using retaining strap (3), and two bolts (4), secure
top water manifold to bracket at 12:00 o'clock position. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(2) Using retaining strap (3) and bolts (4) at five remaining locations, secure top
water manifold (1) to brackets (2).
(3) Connect water tubes (1, figure 4) onto top water manifold (1, figure 6) at 12
locations. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(4) Install bottom water manifold (5) on LPC stator. Connect bottom water manifold
onto top water manifold (1) using B-nuts at 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions on
original configuration and at 9:00 o'clock position on current configuration.
Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
(4)A.On current configuration, install middle water manifold (6) to top (1) and bottom
(5) water manifolds at 3:00 o'clock position using B-nuts. Tighten B-nuts
finger-tight.
(5) Using retaining straps (3) and bolts (4), secure bottom water manifold (5) onto
brackets at eight locations. Tighten bolts finger-tight.
(6) Connect water tubes (1, figure 4) onto bottom water manifold (5, figure 6) at
12 locations. Tighten B-nuts finger-tight.
22
(7) Ensure minimum 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) clearance exists between water tube at
9:00 o'clock position FLA and air collector horizontal flange. If clearance is under
0.060 inch (1.52 mm), grind air collector horizontal flange as follows:
WARNING
(b) Grind lower inboard edge of air collector forward flange, figure 6, detail B,
sheet 2.
WARNING
(d) Using epoxy paint, color 26307, apply touch-up paint per MIL-C-22750.
(e) Install water tube. Ensure minimum 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) clearance exists
between water tube and air collector flange.
(8) Tighten B-nuts that connect water manifolds (1 and 5, and 6 on current
configuration, figure 6, sheet 1) together at 3:00 o'clock and 9:00 o'clock
positions to 75-91 lb ft (101.6-123.4 N·m) of torque.
(9) Tighten B-nuts that secure water tubes (1, figure 4) to water nozzles
(2 and 3, figure 7) to 135-155 lb in. (15.3-17.5 N·m) of torque.
(10) Tighten B-nuts that secure water tubes (1, figure 4) to water manifold
(1 and 5, figure 6) to 135-155 lb in. (15.3-17.5 N·m) of torque.
(11) Tighten bolts that secure water manifold retaining straps (3) to brackets (2)
to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
23
(1) Connect B-nut nearest double bend of air tube (2, figure 4) to water nozzle just
CW (FLA) of 12:00 o'clock position (water nozzle No. 1). Tube routes forward
through air collector wall toward brackets installed in step A. Tighten B-nut
finger-tight.
(2) Repeat substep (1) at water nozzles No. 3, No. 4, No. 7, No. 8, No. 11, No. 12, No.
13, No. 16, No. 17, No. 19, No. 20, No. 21, No. 23, and No. 24.
(3) Connect B-nut nearest double bend of air tube (3) to water nozzle No. 2. Tube
routes forward through air collector wall toward brackets installed step A. Tighten
B-nut finger-tight.
(4) Repeat substep (3) at water nozzles No. 5, No. 6, No. 9, No. 10, No. 14, No. 15,
No. 18, and No. 22.
(1) Using U-bolt (1, figure 5) and two self-locking nuts (2), secure right-side air
manifold (3), to bracket (4), near 12:30 o'clock position (FLA), inlet connector
near 2:00 o'clock position and nipples aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(2) Using six U-bolts (1) and 12 self-locking nuts (2), secure right-side air manifold
(3) to brackets (4) on 9:00 o'clock (FLA) side of LPC. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(3) Using U-bolt (1) and two self-locking nuts (2), secure left-side air manifold (5), to
bracket (4) near 11:00 o'clock position (FLA). Orient left-side air manifold with
nipples aft and flanges mating with flanges of right side air manifold (3).
(4) Using six U-bolts (1) and 12 self-locking nuts (2), secure left-side air manifold (5)
to brackets (4) at 3:00 o'clock position (FLA) side of LPC. Tighten nuts
finger-tight.
(5) Using bolts (7) and self-locking nuts (8), assemble air manifolds and gaskets (6),
at 12:00 o'clock and 6:00 o'clock positions. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in.
(11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
(1) Using U-bolt (1, figure 5) and two self-locking nuts (2), secure top air manifold
(9), to bracket (4), near 12:30 o'clock position (FLA), inlet connector near
2:00 o'clock position and nipples aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(2) Using five U-bolts (1) and 12 self-locking nuts (2), secure top air manifold (9) to
remaining brackets (4) on top of LPC. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
24
(3) Using U-bolt (1) and two self-locking nuts (2), secure bottom air manifold (10), to
bracket (4) near 6:30 o'clock position (FLA). Orient left-side air manifold with
nipples aft and flanges mating with flanges of right side air manifold (3).
(4) Using seven U-bolts (1) and 12 self-locking nuts (2), secure bottom air manifold
(10) to remaining brackets (4) at bottom of LPC. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(5) Using bolts (7) and self-locking nuts (8), assemble air manifolds and gaskets (6),
at 3:00 o'clock and 9:00 o'clock positions. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in.
(11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
L. Connect air tubes (2 and 3, figure 4) to air manifolds (3 and 5, or 9 and 10, figure 5),
finger-tight.
NOTE
(1) Loosen self-locking nut on coupling clamp, figure 10. Remove coupling clamp,
cover plate, and metal seal ring. Retain coupling clamp for reuse.
(2) Install new metal seal ring in groove of stage 8 adapter. Using coupling clamp,
secure stage 8 adapter and metal seal ring to stage 8 port. Install coupling clamp
with nut aft and outboard.
(3) Tighten nut on coupling clamp to 55-65 lb in. (6.2-7.3 N·m) of torque. Using
soft-face mallet, tap around outside of clamp to ensure complete seating. Tighten
nut to 115-125 lb in. (13.0-14.1 N·m) of torque.
25
NOTE
Steps N., O., and P. are only required if installing SPRINT® kit, PN
682L294G12, PN 682L874G01, PN 682L903G01, PN 682L903G06,
or PN 682L908G01.
NOTE
(1) Position air tube or air manifold (4, figure 1), on outboard and aft sides of brackets
(5) and (6), with right-angle bend of air tube or air manifold forward and mating
with connector on air manifold (10). Secure manifold to bracket (5), at aft end of
air collector horizontal flange, using retaining strap (7), two bolts (8), and two
self-locking nuts (9). Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(2) Secure air tube or air manifold (4) to bracket (5) on forward end of air collector
horizontal flange, bracket (5) on aft side of air collector horizontal flange, and
bracket (6) on HPC stage 1 bosses, using retaining straps (7), bolts (8), and self-
locking nuts (9). Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(3) Place new gasket (11), between flanges of air tube or air manifold (4) and air
manifold (10). Secure gasket and manifold flanges using bolts (12), boltheads
outboard, and self-locking nuts (13). Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(1) Position air tube (14) between stage 8 adapter (3) and air tube or air manifold (4),
S-bend forward. Secure air tube to bracket (15) using retaining strap (7), two bolts
(8), and two self-locking nuts (9). Tighten nuts finger-tight.
(2) Position plate orifice (16) and two gaskets (17) between flange of air tube (14) and
stage 8 adapter (3), one gasket on each side of plate orifice. Secure tube flange,
plate orifice, and gaskets to stage 8 adapter using bolts (18). Tighten bolts
finger-tight.
(3) Position gasket (17) between flanges of air tube (14) and air tube or air manifold
(4). Secure tubes or tube and manifold flanges and gasket using bolts (19),
boltheads aft, and self-locking nuts (20). Tighten nuts finger-tight.
26
(1) Ensure all tubing installed in steps N. and O. are aligned without strain. Tighten
self-locking nuts (20) at joint of tube or manifold (4) and tube (14) to
100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten bolts (18) securing tube (14) to plate orifice (16) to 100-130 lb in.
(11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten self-locking nuts (13) securing tube or manifold (4) to air manifold (10)
to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten bolts (6, figure 2) securing brackets (4) and (5) to HPC case bosses to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(5) Tighten self-locking nuts (1) securing three brackets (3) to air collector flanges to
480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
(6) Tighten self-locking nuts (9, figure 1) securing five retaining straps (7) to
brackets to (55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Q. Tighten B-nuts that secure air tubes (2 and 3, figure 4) to water nozzles
(2 and 3, figure 7) to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
R. Tighten B-nuts that secure air tubes (2 and 3, figure 4) to air manifold
(3 and 5, figure 5) to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
S. Tighten self-locking nuts that secure U-bolts (1, figure 5) to brackets (4) to
190-230 lb in. (21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
T. Install cap assembly (figure 11) into instrumentation fitting near upper flange of
right-side air manifold. Tighten cap assembly to 135-155 lb in. (15.3-17.5 N·m) of
torque.
U. Using bolts and flat washers removed in paragraph 6, step D., install air collector
access panels (figure 3). Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
V. Using plastic syringe or other suitable dispenser, inject bead of thread lubricant around
spacers of IGV, stage 1, and stage 2 variable stator vane actuation arms. See figure 12.
Using finger, press bead of thread lubricant into cavity between spacer and stator case
so compound is forced into gap between HPC stator casing and spacer. Thread
lubricant should be applied around at least 180 degrees of upper stator bushings and
approximately 90 degrees around lower stator bushings.
12
11
10
27
28
29/(30 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV) ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the variable inlet guide
vane (VIGV) assembly.
B. Remove low pressure compressor temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensor per WP 1111 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure WP 1111 00
(T2/P2) Sensor Replacement
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check WP 1113 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Soap Solution Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of brackets to low pressure compressor (LPC)
stages 0-3 stator case forward flange.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at
installation. Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine
operation.
(2) Disconnect tubing coupling nuts from VIGV actuator fittings as follows
(figure 1):
1
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated
or prolonged contact. Use in well-ventilated area.
(a) Position a waste fluid container beneath VIGV actuator. Disconnect drain
lines from drain adapters.
(b) Disconnect drain adapters from VIGV actuator. Slide drain adapters away
from VIGV actuator ports to expose coupling nuts.
CAUTION
(3) Remove nuts and bolts that secure actuator-to-ring brackets to actuation ring. See
figure 2. Remove actuator-to-ring brackets.
2
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, and bushings that secure actuator rod-ends.
(5) Remove nuts and bolts that secure VIGV actuator stationary mount brackets onto
LPC stator case front flange/VIGV stator case rear flange.
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV
assembly forward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
3
D. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers that secure VIGV assembly aft flange onto LPC
forward flange.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
E. Tap VIGV assembly forward flange using soft-face mallet. Move VIGV assembly
forward until aft rabbet clears LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward flange.
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV
assembly forward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
B. Lift VIGV assembly into position on LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward rabbet.
C. Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of bolts that secure VIGV
assembly aft flange to LPC forward flange.
D. Install brackets, bolts, washers, and nuts to secure VIGV assembly aft flange to LPC
forward flange. Boltheads face aft. Washer is under nut at bracket locations. At all
other flange locations, washers are under boltheads and nuts.
F. Remove bolts and nuts that secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto VIGV assembly
forward flange. Remove lift and turn fixture.
(1) Install bushings into actuator-to-ring brackets so bushing flanges are to outside of
brackets.
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of actuator rod-end retaining bolt.
(3) Using bolt (bolthead outboard) and nut, secure actuator-to-ring brackets to VIGV
actuator rod-end. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Apply thread lubricant to threads and mating surfaces of bracket retaining nuts.
(5) Align actuator-to-ring brackets with bushings installed in actuation ring. Install
eight bolts (boltheads are outside brackets) and nuts. Tighten nuts to
380-420 lb in. (43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
(6) Position VIGV actuator forward and aft stationary mount brackets and electrical
bracket as marked during disassembly.
NOTE
(7) Using bolts and nuts, secure forward and aft stationary mounts, and electrical
bracket, onto VIGV stator case and stages 0-3 stator case. Boltheads face aft,
except for two bolts adjacent to left speed sensor.
(8) Using bolts and nuts, secure actuator bearing blocks onto forward and aft
stationary mounts. Boltheads face forward.
(9) Tighten stationary mount brackets and actuator bearing block bolts and nuts to
380-420 lb in. (43.0-47.4 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(10) Lubricate new packings, P/N 9365M41P117 and P/N 9365M41P122, with
lubricating oil and install in drain adapters. See figure 1.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(11) Connect tubing to actuator fittings. Tighten coupling nuts to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
(a) Install reducers from adapter set, 1C9393, on hydraulic actuator unit,
1C3569. Tighten reducers to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(b) Disconnect head tube from hydraulic control unit (HCU). Install head tube
onto -4 to -10 reducer. Tighten coupling nut to 360-400 lb in.
(40.7-45.2 N·m) of torque.
(c) Disconnect rod tube from HCU. Install rod tube onto -4 to -8 reducer.
Tighten coupling nut to 270-300 lb in. (30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(d) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) to head tube and hold for a minimum of
2 minutes. Check head tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(e) Apply 200-250 psi (1379-1724 kPa) to rod tube and hold for a minimum of 2
minutes. Check rod tube/actuator connection for leakage.
(h) Connect head tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in.
(73.5-87.0 N·m) of torque.
(i) Connect rod tube to HCU. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in.
(50.9-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(13) Slide drain adapters over coupling nuts and connect to actuator ports.
Hand-tighten drain adapters.
(a) Connect a source of clean, dry, regulated shop air or nitrogen to drain line
fitting on drain adapter.
WARNING
(b) Apply 50-55 psi (345-379 kPa) to drain adapter. Shut off pressure and
monitor. Pressure shall not drop off more than 10 psi (69 kPa) in 2 minutes.
(c) If pressure drop limit is exceeded, use soap solution to detect leak. Repair, as
required, and repeat leak check.
(e) Connect drain lines to drain adapters. Tighten coupling nuts to 270-300 lb in.
(30.6-33.9 N·m) of torque.
(a) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling back shell assembly.
(b) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring
using Teflon-jawed connector pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn or until
plier slippage occurs.
(c) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
NOTE
(d) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamp that restrict mating.
10
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
INLET FRAME REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This Subordinate work package contains instructions for removing and installing the inlet frame
assembly.
2. Reference Material.
Prior to performing the tasks herein, remove the low pressure compressor (LPC)
temperature/pressure (T2/P2) sensor.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor Inlet Temperature/Pressure
(T2/P2) Sensor Replacement WP 1111 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
A. Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward flange.
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto inlet frame assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto inlet frame
assembly forward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
1
WARNING
C. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers that secure aft flange onto LPC forward flange.
D. Tap forward flange using a soft-face mallet. Move forward until aft rabbet clears LPC
stages 0-3 stator case forward flange.
(1) Connect lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto 1-ton (907 kg) capacity hoist.
(2) Position lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto inlet frame assembly forward flange.
(3) Using bolts and washers, secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto inlet frame
assembly forward flange. Boltheads face aft. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(4.6-6.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
B. Lift inlet frame assembly into position on LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward rabbet.
C. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of bolts that secure aft flange to
LPC forward flange.
NOTE
The two bolts adjacent to the left speed sensor boltheads face forward.
D. Install brackets, bolts, washers, and nuts that secure inlet frame assembly aft flange
onto LPC forward flange. Boltheads face aft, except for two bolts that are adjacent to
left speed sensor. Washer is under nut at bracket locations. At all other flange
locations, washers are under boltheads.
F. Remove bolts and nuts that secure lift and turn fixture, 1C9390, onto inlet frame
assembly forward flange. Remove lift and turn fixture.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) MODULE
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 2 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure
compressor (LPC) module.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between LPC module and gas
turbine per SWP 1913 04.
C. Remove and install the variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) per WP 2110 00 or inlet frame
assembly SWP 2111 01.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Assembly Replacement WP 2110 00
Inlet Frame Replacement SWP 2110 01
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark forward manifold and forward drive adapter.
(2) Remove bolts that secure forward manifold onto forward drive adapter.
(3) Using four jackscrews from jackscrew tool set, 1C9150, remove forward
manifold.
1
B. Install LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, and LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, as
follows:
(1) Install LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054,
at position marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin. See figure 2.
2
WARNING
(2) Connect 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116.
Lift horizontal lift fixture into position on LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317.
Secure with two quick-release pins.
(4) Position LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, so that inner ring boltholes align with
forward drive adapter boltholes.
(5) Using 16 bolts and nuts, secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, inner ring onto
forward drive adapter. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(6) Using 56 equally spaced screws and nuts, secure outer ring of LPC support/lift
adapter, 1C9317 onto stator case forward flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in.
(18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(1) If necessary to gain access, move actuation ring to aftmost position by actuating
variable bypass valve (VBV) doors to fully closed. Refer to WP 1312 00.
(2) Remove bolts that secure LPC aft fan case aft flange onto front frame forward
face.
(3) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly.
Change 2 3
4 Change 2
Figure 2. LPC Support/Lift Adapter, 1C9317, and LPC Horizontal Lift Fixture, 1C9054
Change 2 5
(4) Using marking pen, matchmark rotor shaft to forward fan shaft assembly.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under
suspended loads to prevent injury.
CAUTION
(5) Pull rotor forward from fan shaft. Simultaneously support LPC rotor using
overhead hoist. Closely monitor disengagement to prevent damage.
(7) Remove and discard preformed packing from rotor shaft. See figure 3.
3
6 Change 2
D. Install LPC module onto LPC support fixture, 1C9385, as follows (figure 4):
(2) Install LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054,
at location marked 1C9050, LPCR. Secure with quick-release pin.
(3) Connect second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture,
1C9116.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(6) Position LPC support fixture, 1C9385, beneath supended LPC module.
(7) Lower LPC module onto LPC support fixture, 1C9385, and secure with washers
and nuts.
(8) Remove nuts and bolts that secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, onto LPC
module.
(9) Install LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054,
at location marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin.
(10) Connect hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116. Lift assembled LPC
horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, and LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, from LPC
assembly.
NOTE
(3) Attach forward end of LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, onto LPC horizontal lift
fixture, 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin.
(4) Attach second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto eye of LPC lift and turn fixture,
1C9053.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(7) Position LPC vertical dolly, 1C9052, beneath suspended LPC module.
(8) Lower LPC module onto LPC vertical dolly, 1C9052, so that LPC horizontal lift
fixture, 1C9054, is between dolly supports. Remove quick-release pin and remove LPC
lift and turn fixture, 1C9053. See figure 6.
(9) Install forward lift fixture, 1C9116, onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, at location
marked 1C9054, 1C9050. Secure using quick-release pin.
(10) Connect hoist to forward lift fixture, then lift assembled horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054,
and adapter, 1C9317, from LPC assembly.
NOTE
A. Install LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, and LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, as
follows:
(1) Install LPC forward lift adapter, 1C9116, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, at
position marked 1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin. See figure 2.
(2) Connect 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116. Lift
LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, into position on LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317.
Secure with two quick-release pins.
(3) Move LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, into position marked 1C9054, 1C9050. Secure
with quick-release pin.
8 Change 2
Change 2 9
(5) Using 16 bolts and nuts, secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, inner ring onto
forward drive adapter outer flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of
torque.
(6) Using 56 equally spaced screws and nuts, secure outer ring of LPC support/lift adapter,
1C9317, onto LPC stages 0-3 stator case forward flange. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in.
(18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Move LPC forward lift fixture, 1C9116, to position marked 1C9054, 1C9050, LPCR.
Secure with quick-release pin.
(8) Connect second 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
(9) Lift and rotate LPC module into horizontal position. Remove LPC forward lift fixture,
1C9116.
NOTE
If LPC module has been rotated to the horizontal position per step A., proceed to
step C.
(1) Connect 4-ton (3,269 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053.
(2) Install LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, into bore of LPC rotor shaft. See figure 5.
(3) Attach forward end of LPC lift and turn fixture, 1C9053, onto LPC horizontal lift fixture,
1C9054. Secure with quick-release pin (part of 1C9054).
(4) Attach second 4-ton (3,629 kg) capacity hoist onto LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
10 Change 2
Change 2 11
(8) Adjust center of gravity of LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, until LPC module is
horizontal.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing, PN 9607M05P21, with petrolatum, and install into rotor
shaft preformed packing groove. See figure 3.
D. Install guide pins, 2C6348P02, at three equally spaced locations on fan shaft flange.
CAUTION
If same LPC rotor is being installed, ensure that alignment marks are aligned
properly. Failure to comply will require that LP section be balanced.
E. If same LPC module is being installed, align matchmark on rotor shaft with that on fan shaft
assembly.
F. Position LPC module so that offset boltholes at top vertical centerline align.
G. Push LPC module aft so that aft fan case aft flange mates with forward face of front frame
and aft rabbet of rotor shaft mates with fan shaft assembly. Ensure flanges and shafts are fully
seated.
I. Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bolts and onto threads and washer faces of nuts which
secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly.
J. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, secure rotor shaft onto fan shaft assembly. Boltheads face aft,
washers under nuts.
K. Tighten nuts to 275-285 lb ft (372.9-386.4 N·m) of torque. Bolts shall not rotate during
torquing. Loosen nuts one half turn, then retighten to 275-285 lb ft (372.9-386.4 N·m) of
torque. Wipe excess lubricant from nut.
L. Loosen bolts that secure LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317, onto LPC stages 0-3 stator case.
See figure 4.
M. Apply thread lubricant to threads of bolts which secure aft fan case aft flange onto front
frame forward face.
N. Using bolts, secure aft fan case aft flange onto front frame forward face.
12 Change 2
Change 2 13
P. Remove LPC horizontal lift fixture, 1C9054, and LPC support/lift adapter, 1C9317.
See figure 2.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads of bolts that secure forward manifold to forward
drive adapter. See figure 1.
(2) Install forward manifold onto forward drive adapter, aligning matchmarks. Secure
with bolts.
14 Change 2
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGE 0
ROTOR BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing low pressure compressor
(LPC) stage 0 rotor blades.
B. Remove variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per WP 2110 00 or inlet frame assembly
per SWP 2110 01 to gain access.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Assembly Replacement WP 2110 00
Inlet Frame Replacement SWP 2110 01
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Sharpening Stone Fed Spec SS-S-736
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 4
See figure 1.
CAUTION
NOTE
Change 4 3
(3) Remove balance bolts, washers, and nuts. Maintain each balance bolt and related
washer and nut together as a set.
(4) Weigh each balance bolt set and record on position map (figure 2).
(5) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure blade retainer. Maintain each bolt and
related washer and nut together as a set. Remove blade retainer.
B. Using marking pen, position mark stage 0 blades to be removed and corresponding
dovetail slot on stage 0 disk. If all stage 0 rotor blades are being replaced, position
mark No. 1 and No. 5 dovetail slots on stage 0 disk.
C. Measure blade tip to stator case clearance of blades being replaced as follows:
(1) Pull blade radially outward. Shake blade to ensure it is at its most outward
position.
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of stator case. Measurement may
be taken from any area on blade tip, provided each blade is measured from the
same area. Record clearance.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
4 Change 4
NOTE
NOTE
C. Select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade. Blades replacing those
with portions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of the average of eight serviceable
blades. If replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade is not available, use
blade replacement guide (figure 3).
NOTE
NOTE
(1) Pull blade radially outward. Shake blade to ensure it is at its most outward
position.
Change 4 5
6 Change 4
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of stator case. Take measurement
from same area on replacement blade tip as that used to measure replaced blade
clearance.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
CAUTION
Ensure run-on torque for all nuts is a minimum of 5 lb in.
(0.6 N·m) to ensure integrity of locking feature.
E. Align matchmark on blade retainer with matchmark on stage 0 disk and install blade
retainer. Secure blade retainer with 12 equally spaced nuts, washers, and bolts,
boltheads aft, washer under nut.
F. Tighten nuts to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque. Back off nuts one-half turn,
then tighten to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque.
G. Install remaining bolts, washers, and nuts that secure blade retainer, boltheads aft,
washer under nut.
Change 4 7
H. Tighten nuts to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque. Back off nuts one-half turn,
then tighten to 190-220 lb in. (21.5-24.8 N·m) of torque.
I. Install balance bolts, washers, and nuts into previously marked positions, boltheads
aft, washer under nut. Tighten nuts to 70-90 lb in. (8.0-10.1 N·m) of torque.
A minimum of 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) of threads shall protrude beyond nut after
torquing.
9. Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance.
CAUTION
A. Hand-blend replacement blade tip using sharpening stone and observe the following:
(1) Minimum and maximum blade clearance for stage 0 is shown on figure 5.
Replacement blade shall not exceed length of longest blade in stage 0, or be
shorter than shortest blade in stage 0.
(2) Do not remove more than 0.007 inch (0.178 mm) of material from blade tip.
8 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGES 0-3
UPPER AND LOWER STATOR CASE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure
compressor (LPC) stages 0-3 upper and lower stator cases, with engine installed in
maintenance dolly.
B. If upper and lower LPC stator cases are being removed, remove the VIGV assembly
WP 2110 00 or inlet frame assembly per SWP 2110 01.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Assembly Replacement WP 2110 00
Inlet Frame Replacement SWP 2110 01
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec TT-P-1757
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
NOTE
A. Remove variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per WP 2110 00 or inlet frame
assembly per SWP 2110 01.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
B. Position waste fluid container beneath hydraulic control unit (HCU). Disconnect
variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) tubing coupling nuts from HCU fittings. Install
protective caps/plugs. See figure 1.
1
C. Disconnect VIGV actuator drain line flexible hose from drain line manifold.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure location of electrical connector is noted to aid at installa-
tion. Failure to comply may cause unreliable engine operation.
E. Remove nuts and bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel aft support bracket
onto air collector.
Figure 1. No. 1 Electrical Interface Panel, VIGV Tubing, Channel Bracket, and Electrical Cables
F. Remove nuts and bolts that secure channel bracket tray onto rear electrical panel
support bracket.
H. Remove No. 1 electrical interface panel, VIGV tubing and brackets (if installed),
channel bracket, and electrical cables and brackets as a unit.
NOTE
If both upper and lower stator cases require removal, proceed to step B.
A. If only upper stator case requires removal, remove and disconnect the following:
(1) Disconnect T2 electrical lead from bracket clips on upper case forward flange.
NOTE
(2) Disconnect left VIGV hydraulic actuator from upper (stationary) bracket.
(3) Disconnect right VIGV hydraulic actuator from actuation ring bracket.
B. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers from forward and aft flanges of stages 0-3 upper
case. Remove and retain doublers.
C. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure horizontal flanges of stages 0-3 case. If
necessary, gently tap five body-bound bolts on each horizontal flange using hammer
and nylon drift to release bolts.
WARNING
E. Attach 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture. Lift stages 0-3 upper case
free of gas turbine and place on suitable pallet using care not to damage horizontal
flange surfaces or internal hardware. If new case will be installed, transcribe bracket
matchmarks to new case using marking pen.
A. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure aft flange of stages 0-3 lower case to aft
fan case. Remove and retain doublers.
NOTE
Nylon straps may be used to lower or elevate the lower stator case.
Attach hoist to nylon straps.
B. Place nylon straps under stages 0-3 lower case. Raise straps to support stages 0-3
lower case. See figure 3.
2
3
C. Remove bolts, nuts, and washers that secure horizontal flanges of stages 0-3 case. If
necessary, gently tap five body-bound bolts on either horizontal flange using hammer
and nylon drift to release bolts.
D. Slowly lower stages 0-3 lower case. If new case is to be installed, transcribe bracket
matchmarks to new case using marking pen.
A. Position stages 0-3 lower case under LPC rotor using nylon straps and hoist. See
figure 3.
B. Slowly raise stages 0-3 lower case until LPC stator case aft flange and aft fan case
forward flange boltholes align.
WARNING
Zinc Chromate Primer, TT-P-1757, is highly toxic to skin,
eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and
vapor control are required. Avoid all contact.
C. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts which secure aft
circumferential flange of stages 0-3 case onto aft fan case. Allow primer to air dry.
D. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and bearing surface of aft circumferential flange
bolts.
E. Install bolts and nuts into aft circumferential flange, boltheads aft, doublers on forward
side of aft circumferential flange. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
WARNING
A. Position stages 0-3 upper case over LPC rotor using lift fixture, 1C9602, and a 1-ton
(907 kg) capacity overhead hoist. Inspect flanges for cleanliness.
C. Install body-bound bolts, boltheads down, through lower stator case. Install bolts into
horizontal flange bolthole numbers 1, 4, 9, 13, and 17 (boltholes are counted from
forward flange) on both sides of stator case. See figure 4.
CAUTION
Be careful when mating upper and lower stages 0-3 case halves. The
inner shrouds have interlocking features at the horizontal split-lines.
The upper and lower stator shrouds shall be properly engaged as the
case halves are mated. Do not force case halves together. Failure to
comply will result in LPC stator damage.
D. Slowly lower stages 0-3 upper case until horizontal flanges are mated. Use flashlight
to ensure that shrouds interlock properly.
F. Install washers and nuts onto body-bound bolts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
WARNING
Zinc Chromate Primer, TT-P-1757, is highly toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. Skin and eye protection, and vapor control
are required. Avoid all contact.
G. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shanks and bearing surfaces of remaining bolts and
washers which secure horizontal flanges together. Also apply zinc chromate primer
onto inside diameter of boltholes these bolts go through.
4
NOTE
H. Install remaining horizontal flange bolts, washers, and nuts, boltheads up, with washer
under each nut and each bolthead. Tighten nuts on nonbody-bound bolts, left to right,
in ascending order 2L, 2R, 3L, 3R, 5L, 5R, etc., to 200-220 lb in. (22.6-24.9 N·m) of
torque.
I. Tighten horizontal flange nuts on body-bound bolts in ascending order 1L, 1R, 4L,
4R, 9L, 9R, etc., to 200-220 lb in. (22.6-24.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
J. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts which secure aft
circumferential flange. Allow primer to dry.
K. Apply thread lubricant onto threads and bearing surfaces of aft circumferential flange
bolts.
L. Install bolts, doublers, and nuts in aft circumferential flange, boltheads aft, doublers
on forward side of aft circumferential flange.
M. Tighten all aft circumferential flange nuts to 135-145 lb in. (15.3-16.3 N·m) of torque.
10
NOTE
O. If VIGV assembly or inlet frame assembly is installed, complete the following steps.
(1) Install brackets, bolts, washers, and nuts into forward circumferential flange per
WP 2110 00.
(3) Install T2 electrical lead into bracket clips on upper case forward flange.
NOTE
P. Install assembled No. 1 electrical interface panel, VIGV tubing and brackets, channel
bracket, and electrical cables and brackets as a unit. Align brackets at locations
marked at removal. See figure 1.
Q. Using bolts and nuts, secure No. 1 electrical interface panel aft mount brackets onto
air collector flange. Tighten nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
R. Using bolts and nuts, secure channel bracket to rear electrical panel support bracket.
Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Engage connector with mating interface and turn knurled coupling ring while
wiggling back shell assembly.
(2) After fully seating connector by hand, apply final torque to coupling ring using
Teflon-jawed pliers. Torque connector 1/4-1/2 turn, or until plier slippage occurs.
(3) Check for full seating by wiggling accessory assembly. There shall be no
movement with respect to mating connector.
11
NOTE
(4) Repeat substeps (2) and (3), as required. It may be necessary to loosen lead
clamps that restrict mating.
CAUTION
T. Connect VIGV actuator drain line flexible hose onto drain line manifold. Tighten
coupling nut to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
U. Connect tubes to HCU. Tighten head tube coupling nut to 360-400 lb in.
(40.6-45.2 N·m) of torque. Tighten rod tube coupling nut to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
V. Install VIGV assembly WP 2110 00 or inlet frame assembly per SWP 2110 01.
12
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGES 0-3
STATOR VANES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the low pressure
compressor (LPC) stages 0-3 stator vanes.
B. To gain access, remove stages 0-3 LPC upper and lower stator cases per WP 2212 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower WP 2212 00
Stator Case Replacement
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GP460
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Silicone Adhesive Sealant GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec TT-P-1757
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
A. Place upper and lower stator cases on a skid or table, aft end up.
B. Remove nuts, bolts, and washers from stage 3 inner shrouds. See figure 1.
1
CAUTION
Use care when separating forward and aft shroud sections to prevent
damage from prying tool.
C. Separate forward shroud section from aft shroud section. If necessary, pry between forward
and aft shroud sections to separate them. Remove shroud.
2 Change 1
Change 1 3
E. Remove two screws and locking strip from each stator case half horizontal flange.
F. Slide vanes circumferentially until they can be removed from slot in stator case.
A. Install dovetail liners in vane slots. See figure 2. If necessary, grind ends to allow
assembly. The gap between any two adjacent liner segments shall not exceed
0.030 inch (0.76 mm).
2
B. Slide stage 3 vanes circumferentially into lined slots. See figure 3. Adjust quantity of
A and D vanes to obtain required clearance (Dimension K) on each half of case.
Dimension K shall be met prior to installing shrouds. During stage 1, 2, and 3 vane
installation, install borescope vane so that a 0.405 inch (10.287 mm) diameter rod will
pass freely through case and platform of vane.
4
3
4 Change 1
Change 1 5
CAUTION
C. If natural gas sensors are installed in area, encase sensor heads in plastic bags and seal
with tie wraps to protect sensors.
WARNING
Vapor from uncured sealant is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Use in a
well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
NOTE
D. Apply thin layer of silicone adhesive sealant to outer surface of new stage 3 fan
booster bushing assemblies except flowpath surfaces, as well as vane-to-bushing
interface, inside bushing vane tang slot. See figure 4.
E. While adhesive is still wet, install 3 vane bushing assemblies onto vane tangs.
6 Change 1
Change 1 7
NOTE
H. Install aft section of shroud so that vane bushings fit into each semicircle cup.
J. Install forward section of shroud so bushings fit in semicircular cups. Hold both
shroud sections together and install bolts, washers, and nuts in each end and center of
shroud. Install one washer under bolthead (boltheads aft), and one washer under nut.
Tighten nuts finger-tight.
K. Install remaining bolts, washers, and nuts in same orientation as step M.or N.
CAUTION
Ensure run-on torque for all nuts is a minimum of 5 lb in. (0.6
N·m) to ensure integrity of locking feature.
NOTE
(1) Tighten six 0.250–29 stage 0 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque. Tighten
forty-four 0.312-24 nuts to 109-121 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 1 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten
twenty-eight 0.250-28 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(3) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 2 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten
fifty 0.250-28 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 3 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque.
Tighten thirty0.250-28 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.6 N·m) of torque.
(1) Tighten fifty 0.250-29 stage 0 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Tighten forty-four 0.250-28 stage 1 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
8 Change 1
(3) Tighten fifty-six 0.250-28 stage 2 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
(4) Tighten six 0.190-32 stage 3 nuts to 35-39 lb in. (4.0-4.4 N·m) of torque. Tighten
thirty 0.250-28 nuts to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Vapor from uncured sealant is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Use in a
well-ventilated area.
N. Apply silicone adhesive sealant over ends of nuts to cover exposed bolt threads.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
WARNING
Q. Install locking strip on each stator case half. Secure with screws coated with wet zinc
chromate primer. Tighten screws to 24-26 lb in. (2.7-2.9 N·m) of torque.
R. Allow silicone adhesive sealant to cure for minimum of 8 hours before operating
engine.
S. If applicable, remove protective plastic bags from natural gas sensors prior to engine
operation.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGES 1-3
ROTOR BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing low pressure compressor
(LPC) stages 1-3 rotor blades.
B. Remove LPC stages 0-3 upper stator case to gain access per WP 2212 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Upper and Lower
Stator Case Replacement WP 2212 00
3. Support Equipment.
Nomenclature Part No.
Program, Balance - Blade Replacement 9446M61G02
(or latest CD-Rom version)
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
Sharpening Stone Fed Spec SS-S-736
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 4
CAUTION
NOTE
This procedure is for removal of any number of LPC stages 1-3 rotor
blades. Instructions for grinding blade tips to meet clearance
requirements are included in paragraph 7. If an entire stage of
blades requires replacement, contact General Electric Customer Ser-
vice Representative to obtain a set of preground blades.
A. Position mark blades using marking pen. See figure 1, view B. Blade 1 is first blade to
right of right locking lug (aft looking forward).
1
B. Measure blade tip to lower stator case clearance of blades being replaced as follows:
(1) Pull blade radially outward. Shake blade to ensure it is at its most outward
position.
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of lower stator case. Measurement
may be taken from any area on blade tip, provided each blade is measured from
the same area. Record clearance.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
C. Mark centerline of locking lugs on outside diameter of disk or spool using marking
pen.
E. Loosen setscrews of two locking lugs until lugs will slip below surface of retaining
slot sufficiently to permit circumferential movement of blades.
G. Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove. Record on position map. See figure 2.
2
Change 4 3
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
H. Remove remaining blades, other locking lug, and all balance weights from stage being
removed. Mark and record position of balance weights on position map as removed.
Weigh each balance weight and record on position map.
NOTE
NOTE
C. Select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade. Blades replacing those
with portions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of the average of eight serviceable
blades. If replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement
guide. See figure 3.
NOTE
A. Ensure locking lug centerline locating marks are still visible. Mark again, if necessary.
6 Change 4
Change 4 7
CAUTION
D. Install two locking blades, one on each side of loading slot, so cutout on blade
platform faces loading slot.
(1) Install setscrews in each of two locking lugs. Run setscrews in and out twice, full
length of threads.
8 Change 4
NOTE
(2) After completion of second cycle, record run-on torque of each screw. Also,
check breakaway torque of each screw. Replace setscrew or locking lug if
breakaway torque is less than 8 lb in. (0.9 N·m).
(3) Install two locking lugs, one on each side of loading slot. Ensure slope of locking
lug follows slope of blade platform.
F. Install one locking blade so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
G. Rotate entire stage of blades approximately one-half the width of blade platform, or
until last blade can be installed. Install last locking blade so cutout on blade platform
faces locking lug.
H. Rotate entire stage of blades in the opposite direction until locking lugs align with
position marks on disk or spool.
J. Check each blade for shingling of platforms. If blade tends to shingle, replace with
blade of equal weight.
NOTE
(1) Pull blade radially outward. Shake blade to ensure it is at its most outward
position.
(2) Measure clearance between blade tip and edge of lower stator case. Take
measurement from same area on replacement blade tip as that used to measure
replaced blade clearance.
(3) Repeat substeps (1) and (2) for each blade requiring replacement.
Change 4 9
L. Tighten setscrews in locking lugs to 19-21 lb in. (2.2-2.3 N·m) of torque above the run-
on torque recorded in step E.(2). Top of the locking lug must be even with, or a maxi-
mum of 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) below, top of blade platform when blade is fully
extended radially.
9. Part Rework - Tip Grinding to Obtain Blade Tip to Stator Case Clearance.
CAUTION
Do not use hard abrasive grinding wheels to tip grind blades. Damage
to blades may occur.
A. Hand-blend replacement blade tip using sharpening stone. Observing the following:
(1) Minimum and maximum blade clearance for each stage is shown in figure 5.
Replacement blade shall not exceed length of longest blade in stage, or be shorter
than shortest blade in stage.
5
(2) Do not remove more than 0.007 inch (0.178 mm) of material from blade tip.
10 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) AFT FAN
CASE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing low pressure compressor
(LPC) aft fan case.
B. Remove LPC module and install in LPC rotor and stator vertical dolly, 1C9052, per
WP 2210 00. See figure 1.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module Replacement WP 2210 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
Zinc Chromate Primer Fed Spec TT-P-1757
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
A. Remove nuts, bolts, and doublers that secure forward flange of aft fan case to aft
flange of LPC stages 0-3 stator case (figure 1).
1
B. Tap gently around circumference of aft fan case aft flange using plastic face hammer.
WARNING
CAUTION
Use care when removing LPC aft fan case to avoid damaging LPC
stage 4 rotor blades.
B. Ensure aft fan case forward flange is fully seated against LPC stages 0-3 stator case aft
flange.
WARNING
C. Apply zinc chromate primer onto shank and bearing surface of bolts. Allow primer to
air dry.
D. Lubricate threads of bolts and threads and bearing surfaces of nuts using thread
lubricant. Install bolts, doublers, and nuts to secure aft fan case forward flange. Dou-
blers are on forward side of LPC stages 0-3 stator case aft flange. Boltheads face aft.
E. Tighten all nuts at forward flange to 130-150 lb in. (14.7-16.9 N·m) of torque.
Figure 1. LPC Module Installed in LPC Rotor and Stator Vertical Dolly, 1C9052
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGE 4
STATOR VANES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 4 stator vanes.
B. Remove low pressure compressor (LPC) module to gain access per WP 2210 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Module Replacement WP 2210 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
A. Clean front frame bumper slots and outer surface of bumpers using isopropyl alcohol.
See figure 1.
WARNING
B. Apply a thin layer of silicone rubber adhesive onto bumper slots in front frame.
C. Install stage 4 stator vane bumpers onto stator vane, rounded portion aft.
NOTE
D. Install stage 4 stator vanes while silicone rubber adhesive is still wet.
F. Install retaining bolts. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (LPC) STAGE 4
ROTOR BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing low pressure compressor
(LPC) stage 4 rotor blades.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Aft Fan Case Replacement WP 2215 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 4
CAUTION
A. Using marking pen, position mark blades per 1 and 2, figure 1, view B. Blade 1 is first
blade to right of right locking lug (3) (aft looking forward).
1
B. Using marking pen, mark centerline of locking lugs (3) on outside diameter of spool.
C. Apply penetrating oil onto setscrews (4) and allow to soak for 15 minutes.
D. Loosen setscrews (4) of two locking lugs (3) until lugs slip below surface of retaining
slot sufficiently to permit circumferential movement of blades (1 and 2).
F. Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove. Record on position map. See figure 2.
3
2
G. Remove remaining blades (1 and 2, figure 1), other locking lug (3), and all balance
weights (5) from stage being removed. Mark and record position of balance weights
on position map as removed. Weigh each balance weight and record on position map.
NOTE
C. Select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of original blade. Blades replacing those
with portions missing shall weigh within 0.5 gram of the average of eight serviceable
blades. If replacement blade within 0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement
guide. See figure 3.
Change 4 3
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
6 Change 4
NOTE
A. Ensure locking lug centerline locating marks are still visible. Mark again, if necessary.
CAUTION
• Ensure balance weights, locking lugs, and reinstalled blades
are replaced in exact positions from which they were removed.
D. Install two locking blades (2), one on each side of loading slot, so cutout on blade
platform faces loading slot.
4
E. Install locking lugs as follows:
(1) Install setscrews (4) into each of two locking lugs (3). Run setscrews in and out
twice, full length of threads.
NOTE
(2) After completion of second cycle, record run-on torque of each setscrew. Also,
check breakaway torque of each setscrew. Replace setscrew (4) or locking
lug (3) if breakaway torque is less than 8 lb in. (0.9 N·m).
(3) Install two locking lugs (3), one on each side of loading slot. Ensure slope of
locking lug follows slope of blade platform.
Change 4 7
F. Install one locking blade (2) so cutout on blade platform faces locking lug.
G. Rotate entire stage of blades approximately half the width of a blade platform, or until
last blade can be installed. Install last locking blade so cutout on blade platform faces
locking lug.
H. Rotate entire stage of blades in the opposite direction until locking lugs align with
position marks on disk or spool.
I. Move all blades in a fan out direction, away from an outside locking blade (2).
Measure clearance between blade platforms. Total accumulated clearance shall be
within 0.001-0.010 inch (0.025-0.254 mm) at narrowest point along axial length of
platform. Clearance at other axial positions shall not exceed 0.030 inch (0.762 mm). If
this requirement is not met, replace blade or blades adjacent to locking blades with
narrow or wide platform blades of equal weight.
J. Check each blade (1 and 2) for shingling of platforms. Replace any blade that tends to
shingle with a blade of equal weight.
K. Tighten setscrews (4) into locking lugs (3) to 19-21 lb in. (2.2-2.3 N·m) of torque
above the run-on torque recorded in step E.(2). The top of the locking lug must be even
with, or a maximum of 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) below, the top of the blade platform
when blade is fully extended radially.
8 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
FRONT FRAME AIR COLLECTOR REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the front frame air collector.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant MIL-L-25681
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
NOTE
• Engine must be removed from the enclosure prior to removal of the upper
air collector section. Do not support the gas turbine by the air collector
in the maintenance stand or support pedestals.
A. Ensure variable bypass valve (VBV) doors are in closed position so hardware or tools will not
fall into compressor front frame (CFF).
B. Using four bolts, washers, and nuts, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto upper air
collector section. See figure 1. Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to
420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
1
C. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture.
D. Remove bolts that secure actuator seal to upper air collector section. See figure 2. Remove
actuator seal.
2
E. Remove bolts, washers, and four access panels from upper air collector section.
F. Remove screws that secure frame seals to upper air collector section at 3:00 and
9:00 o'clock positions.
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure upper air collector section to CFF forward flange.
H. Using marking pen, mark location of CFF aft flange brackets and cut safety on bolts securing
upper air collector to CFF aft flange.
I. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, remove bolts securing upper air collector section
and brackets to CFF aft flange.
J. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, remove bolts and spacers securing upper air
collector section and brackets to CFF aft flange.
K. Remove nuts and bolts that secure upper air collector section horizontal flanges to lower air
collector sections.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
K. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, tighten aft flange bolts to 106-124 lb in.
(12.0-14.0 N·m) of torque. Safety wire bolts.
L. Tighten forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
M. Using screws, secure frame seals onto upper air collector section at 3:00 and
9:00 o'clock positions. Tighten screws to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
N. Using bolts, secure actuator seal onto upper air collector section. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
All tools or maintenance items shall be accounted for upon job
completion, or damage to engine could result.
O. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign
objects left in air collector.
P. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto upper air collector section.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Q. Remove air collector lift fixture.
8. Lower Right Air Collector Section Removal.
. NOTE
The lower right air collector section weighs 170 lb (77 kg).
A. Position bottle jack, with protective block, to support transfer gearbox assembly.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is installed, proceed to step C
B. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto
lower right air collector section with two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1.
Boltheads face up, washers are under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
If the upper air collector section is removed, proceed to step D
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower right air collector
section. Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling. Take up slack
on hoist.
E. Remove bolts and washers that secure two access panels from lower right air collector
section. See figure 3.
F. Remove screws that secure frame seal onto lower right air collector section.
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure lower right air collector section onto CFF forward
flange.
H. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts that
secure lower right air collector section onto CFF aft flange.
I. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts and
spacers securing lower right air collector section to CFF aft flange.
J. Using marking pen, mark location of lower right air collector flange brackets. Remove
nuts and bolts that secure lower right air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount
plate and onto upper air collector section.
K. Loosen bolts that secure support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel. Position
support bracket clear of air collector.
WARNING
L. Slowly lower hoist while pulling lower right air collector section clear of engine.
NOTE
A. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto
lower right air collector section using two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1.
Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m)
of torque.
NOTE
B. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling onto lower right air collector
section. Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
C. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling.
Change 5 9
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Use care when installing lower air collector section to avoid damaging
frame seals.
D. Carefully position lower right air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate
flange. See figure 3.
G. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lower right air collector section onto
upper section with bolts and nuts. Boltheads face up. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
H. Install brackets at positions marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower
right air collector section and brackets onto transfer gearbox mount plate. Boltheads
face outboard. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
I. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower right air collector section onto CFF forward flange.
Boltheads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
J. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, using bolts, secure lower right air collec-
tor section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-wire bolts.
K. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, using bolts and spacers, secure lower
right air collector section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to 106-124 lb in.
(12.0-14.0 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
L. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
Tighten bolts securing support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
M. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
N. Using screws, secure frame seal onto lower right air collector. Tighten screws to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
10 Change 5
CAUTION
All tools or maintenance items shall be accounted for upon job
completion, or damage to engine could result.
O. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign
objects left in air collector.
P. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto lower right air collector section.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
The lower left air collector section weighs 170 lb (77 kg).
A. Position bottle jack, with protective block, to support transfer gearbox assembly.
NOTE
B. If upper air collector section is removed, install air collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto
lower left air collector section using two bolts, washers, and nuts. See figure 1.
Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m)
of torque.
NOTE
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower left air collector
section. Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling. Take up slack on
hoist.
E. Remove bolts and washers that secure two access panels from lower left air collector
section. See figure 4.
4
F. Remove screws that secure frame seal onto lower left air collector section.
Change 5 11
12 Change 5
G. Remove nuts and bolts that secure lower left air collector section onto CFF forward
flange.
H. Before Service Bulleting LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts that
secure lower left air collector section onto CFF aft flange.
I. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts and spac-
ers securing lower left air collector section to CFF aft flange.
J. Mark location of lower left air collector flange brackets using marking pen. Remove
nuts and bolts that secure lower left air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount
plate and onto upper air collector section.
K. Loosen bolts that secure support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel. Position
support bracket clear of air collector.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
L. Slowly lower hoist while pulling lower left air collector section clear of engine.
M. Remove four bolts and air collector baffle from lower left air collector section.
A. Install air collector baffle onto lower left air collector section and secure with four
bolts.
NOTE
B. Using two bolts, washers, and nuts, if upper air collector section is removed, install air
collector lift fixture, 1C9300, onto lower left air collector section. See figure 1.
Boltheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m)
of torque.
NOTE
C. If upper air collector section is installed, secure lift sling to lower left air collector
section. Use holes in top flange gussets for sling attachment points.
D. Connect 1-ton (907 kg) capacity overhead hoist to lift fixture or sling.
Change 5 13
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Use care when installing lower air collector section to avoid damaging
frame seals.
E. Carefully position lower left air collector section onto transfer gearbox mount plate
flange. See figure 4.
H. Using bolts and nuts, if upper air collector section is installed, secure lower left air
collector section to upper section. Boltheads face up. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
I. Install brackets at positions marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower
left air collector section and brackets onto transfer gearbox mount plate. Boltheads
face outboard. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
J. Using bolts and nuts, secure lower left air collector section onto CFF forward flange.
Boltheads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
K. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, using bolts, secure lower left air collector
section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-wire bolts.
L. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, using bolts and spacers, secure lower
left air collector section onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to 106-124 lb in.
(12.0-14.0 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
M. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.2-64.4 N·m) of torque.
Tighten bolts securing support bracket to No. 1 electrical interface panel to 55-70 lb in.
(6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
N. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
O. Using screws, secure frame seal onto lower left air collector. Tighten screws to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
14 Change 5
Change 5 15
P. Before installing access panels, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign
objects left in air collector.
Q. Using washers and bolts, secure access panels onto lower left air collector section.
Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
A. Remove bolts, washers, and lockwashers that secure access panel to transfer gearbox
mount plate. See figure 5.
D. Mark location of CFF forward flange bracket using marking pen. Remove nuts and
bolts that secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF forward flange.
E. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts that
secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF aft flange.
F. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, cut safety wire and remove bolts and spac-
ers that secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto CFF aft flange.
G. If lower air collector sections are installed, mark location of flange brackets. Remove
nuts and bolts that secure transfer gearbox mount plate onto lower air collector
sections.
16 Change 5
WARNING
A. Using jack, 1C5654, lift transfer gearbox mount plate into position.
D. If lower air collector sections are installed, install flange brackets at positions marked
at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure transfer gearbox mount plate and brackets
onto lower air collector sections. Boltheads face outboard. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
See figure 5.
E. Install CFF forward flange bracket at position marked at disassembly. Using bolts and
nuts, secure transfer gearbox mount plate and bracket onto CFF forward flange.
Boltheads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
G. After Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0258, using bolts and spacers, secure transfer
gearbox mount plate onto CFF aft flange. Tighten bolts to 106-124 lb in. (12.0-14.0
N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
H. Tighten air collector section flange nuts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
I. Tighten CFF forward flange nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
J. Before installing access panel, perform thorough, final inspection for tools or foreign
objects left in air collector.
K. Using washers, lockwashers, and bolts, secure access panel onto transfer gearbox
mount plate. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) UPPER AND
LOWER STATOR CASE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor (HPC) upper and lower stator case.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between low pressure
compressor (LPC) module and gas turbine per SWP 1913 03.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components Replace-
ment WP 1410 00
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har-
nesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 03
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 1
4. Consumable Material.
CAUTION
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil Liquid Wrench (GE Spec. A50TF54)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
Change 1 3
(1) Remove VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
(a) Using marking pen, mark stage number on connecting links to be removed.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from inlet guide vane (IGV) and
stages 1-4 connecting links and remove links from actuation rings. Retain
sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
(c) Remove bolts from stage 5 connecting links and remove links from actuation
rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
1
CAUTION
(4) Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure
with washers and bolts removed in step (3). Tighten bolts only enough to secure
vane holding fixture in place.
2
B. Remove HPC upper stator case as follows:
WARNING
Penetrating oil is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged con-
tact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(1) Apply penetrating oil to forward and aft circumferential flange and
horizontal flange nuts and bolts.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame and compressor rear frame
(CRF) flanges.
(3) Position jack, 1C9419, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange. Raise jack
enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward force.
4 Change 1
Change 1 5
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure HPC upper stator case
forward and aft circumferential flanges.
(5) Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows (figure 3):
3
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to prevent
damage to rotor spool.
(a) Using overhead hoist, position upper compressor stator case lift fixture,
2C14699, over upper stator case top vertical centerline.
(b) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture,
2C14699, until pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
6 Change 1
CAUTION
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 4. Use
drift pin and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
4
(b) If horizontal flange bolt or nut is loose, broken, or missing, replace that bolt
and nut, plus bolt and nut on each side.
(c) If more than five horizontal flange bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing,
replace all bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
Change 1 7
8 Change 1
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
(7) Using overhead hoist, lift upper stator case from engine.
(8) Place stator case on clean work surface and remove upper compressor stator case
lift fixture, 2C14699, and vane holding fixture, 2C6259.
WARNING
A. Using a clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact
faces of upper and lower stator cases.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten bolts securing vane holding fixture,
2C6259, or tool damage will result.
B. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure with
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
C. Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows figure 3:
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
(1) Using overhead hoist, position upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699,
over upper stator case top vertical centerline.
(2) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699,
until pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
D. Use overhead hoist to position upper stator case over compressor rotor.
Change 1 9
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to prevent
damage to rotor spool.
E. Carefully lower stator case into position. Remove upper compressor stator case lift
fixture, 2C14699, and vane holding fixture, 2C6259.
F. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at
locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten nuts at this time.
H. Install hardware at locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts at this
time.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of horizontal flange attaching
bolts.
(2) Inspect to ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over full length of case. If
required, install clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull
flanges together. Do not overtighten clamps on bolts so that alignment pins cannot
function. Do not remove clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed and
tightened to final torque.
NOTE
Bolt positions on the horizontal flanges are counted from the aft
flange forward.
(3) Counting from aft end on both sides, install body-bound bolts or alignment pins
from alignment tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9,
21, 25, 31, and 35. See figure 4.
(4) Ensure body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. While restraining pins
with Allen wrench, tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of
torque. Use socket from alignment tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight
clearance areas. Avoid side loads.
(5) While restraining pins with Allen wrench, tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
240 lb in. (27.1 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts into remaining horizontal flange boltholes per
figure 4.
10 Change 1
NOTE
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from the aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Torque nuts per figure 4.
(8) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts per
figure 4.
(9) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Torque nuts per figure 4.
(10) Retighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and
alternating from flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
J. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque.
Tightening sequence is as follows:
(3) Continue tightening aft circumferential flange bolts, alternating from side to side,
until all nuts are tightened.
K. Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts per figure 5. Safety-wire bolts in groups
of two or three.
5
L. Remove jack, 1C9419.
(1) Remove vane holding fixture, 2C6259, from VSV stages 3-5.
(a) Loosen self-locking nuts that secure first five vane arms at each end of upper
and lower stage 5 actuator rings. Loosen self-locking nut until flush with end
of vane stem.
Change 1 11
12 Change 1
CAUTION
Connecting links shall be installed on correct stage and with lever
arm pins engaging sleeves, or VSV off-schedule operation and
engine damage may result.
(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for
stage being installed.
(c) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces
forward. Install IGV and stages 1-4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins
engage sleeves.
(d) Install bolts and washers on IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts on stage 5.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(e) Ensure all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and are not engaged with
connecting link lightening holes.
CAUTION
(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in step (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(3) Install VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
CAUTION
Do not remove HPC lower stator case unless the upper stator case
or dummy case is installed in the lower position.
B. Install stator case retainer, 1C9414, to HPC lower stator case as follows:
NOTE
The HPC stator case retainer retains the stator vanes in the lower
case half as the case is rotated to the 12:00 o'clock position.
(1) Install retainer with bend outboard and down, with aft edge against CRF.
Change 1 13
CAUTION
Do not over tighten knobs securing retainer, or tool damage will
result.
(2) Align retainer studs through their respective boltholes along horizontal flange.
Secure with knurled knobs from bottom side of flange. Tighten knobs only
enough to secure retainer in place.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the other retainer and flange.
C. Install upper stator case or dummy stator case, 1C9413, and secure with nuts and bolts
in boltholes 4, 8, 12, and 16. Install nut and bolt in bolthole 34 of case. Tighten nuts to
210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Apply penetrating oil to forward and aft circumferential flange and
horizontal flange nuts and bolts.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame and CRF flanges.
(3) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure stator case forward and aft
circumferential flanges.
(5) Install bolts and nuts to secure upper stator case or dummy stator case, 1C9413, to
lower portion of forward and aft circumferential flanges. Tighten bolts and nuts to
210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
14 Change 1
(1) Install upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699, as follows (figure 3):
WARNING
CAUTION
(a) Use overhead hoist to position upper compressor stator case lift fixture,
2C14699, over lower stator case top vertical centerline.
(b) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture,
2C14699, until pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
(2) Lift lower stator case from engine using overhead hoist.
(3) Place stator case on clean work surface and remove tooling.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
A. Using a clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact
faces of upper and lower stator cases.
CAUTION
B. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, on VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure using
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
Change 1 15
C. Install stator case retainer, 1C9414, to HPC lower stator case as follows:
NOTE
The HPC stator case retainer retains the stator vanes in the lower
case half as the case is rotated to the 12:00 o'clock position.
(1) Install retainer with bend outboard and down, with aft edge against CRF.
CAUTION
(2) Align retainer studs through their respective boltholes along horizontal flange.
Secure with knurled knobs from bottom side of flange. Tighten knobs only
enough to secure retainer in place.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the other retainer and flange.
(1) Use overhead hoist to position lower stator case over compressor rotor.
(2) Turn knurled nut to expand upper compressor stator case lift fixture, 2C14699,
until pins engage boltholes in circumferential flanges.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
E. Use overhead hoist to position lower stator case over compressor rotor.
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to prevent
damage to rotor spool.
F. Carefully lower the stator case into position. Remove upper compressor stator case lift
fixture, 2C14699.
G. Install nuts and bolts in horizontal flange boltholes 4, 8, 12, and 16. Install nut and bolt
into bolthole 34 of case. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m).
16 Change 1
(1) Remove nuts and bolts that secure the upper stator case or dummy case onto
lower portion of forward and aft circumferential flanges.
J. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts to lower case forward and aft circumferential flanges.
Install hardware at locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten bolts or nuts
at this time.
L. Remove screws that secure stator case retainer, 1C9414, onto lower stator case
horizontal flange. Remove retainer, 1C9414, from between stator case horizontal
flanges.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
7SWP 2411 01
SUBORDINATE WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR UPPER/LOWER
STATOR CASE OPENING/CLOSING
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
A. This subordinate work package (SWP) contains instructions for installation and removal of
the fixture set to raise and hinge the high pressure compressor (HPC) upper stator case.
B. Disconnect electrical leads and connecting tubes between low pressure compressor (LPC)
module and gas turbine per SWP 1913 02.
C. A shim set is provided which allows the lower case to be rotated 180 degrees about
horizontal axis to position the lower case at the top.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Actuator Components Replace- WP 1410 00
ment
Gas/Steam Fuel System Components Replacement WP 1510 00
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 1
4. Consumable Material.
CAUTION
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil Liquid Wrench (GE Spec. A50TF54)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
Change 1 3
(4) Remove VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
(a) Mark stage number on connecting links to be removed with marking pen.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from stages IGV and 1-4 connecting
links and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged,
for reinstallation.
(c) Remove bolts from stage 5 connecting links and remove links from actuation
rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
1
CAUTION
(6) Install holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Using bolts
removed in step (5), secure fixture to stages. Tighten bolts only enough to secure
fixture in place.
2
B. Open HPC upper stator case as follows:
WARNING
(1) Apply penetrating oil to forward and aft circumferential flange and
horizontal flange nuts and bolts.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame (figure 3) and compressor
rear frame (CRF) (figure 4) flanges.
4 Change 1
Change 1 5
6 Change 1
Change 1 7
(3) Position jack assembly, 1C9376, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange.
Raise jack just enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward
force. See figure 5.
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure HPC upper stator case
forward and aft circumferential flanges, figures 3 and 4.
CAUTION
• Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to prevent
damage to rotor spool.
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 6. Use a
drift pin and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
6
8 Change 1
Change 1 9
(c) If more than five horizontal bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing,
replace all bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
(6) Install aft jack, 1C9400P17, and forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, as
follows:
(a) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, remove second and fourth
bolts from forward HPC stator case to fan frame flange, counting down from
horizontal splitline, figure 3.
(b) Align lower tabs on forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, with flange
connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame flange, figure 7.
7
(c) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange connecting
HPC stator case to CRF, figure 4.
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF
flange, figure 7.
(e) Extend threaded rod on each jack so that arm aligns with second hole in
flange. Insert pin until upper arm is flush against engine flange.
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit lower tabs against HPC
stator case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two
bolts on each side.
(7) Extend each jack until resistance is felt. Using four operators, turn each nut, in
unison, approximately 1/4 turn each time until HPC stator case is raised
approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm) for installing hinges.
(a) Align forward, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P05 and 1C9400P06, onto
horizontal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position
hinges so forward hole in hinge aligns with second hole from forward end of
upper HPC stator case.
(b) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward hinges to HPC stator case.
(c) Align aft, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P07 and 1C9400P08, from fixture
set, 1C9400, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking
forward. Position hinges so aft hole in hinge aligns with sixth hole from aft
end of HPC stator case.
10 Change 1
Figure 7. Use of Jacks, Hinges, and Lift Bar from Fixture Set, 1C9400 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Change 1 11
Figure 7. Use of Jacks, Hinges, and Lift Bar from Fixture Set, 1C9400 (Sheet 2 of 3)
12 Change 1
Figure 7. Use of Jacks, Hinges, and Lift Bar from Fixture Set, 1C9400 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Change 1 13
(e) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto
underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking
forward.
(f) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator
case, aft looking forward.
(9) Ensure upper HPC stator case is supported by hinges and lift bar assembly.
Remove jacks.
(a) Raise upper HPC stator case by lifting up on lift bar (two man operation).
Open to height desired.
(b) Install top end of strut over aft flange of HPC stator case. Align strut holes
over fourth hole CW from the horizontal flanges holes, aft looking forward.
(d) Install bottom end of strut over forward flange of CRF. Align strut over third
hole CCW from top vertical centerline, aft looking forward. Insert ball-lock
pin.
(1) Install jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, as follows (figure 7):
(a) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, remove second and fourth
bolts from flange connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, counting
from splitline, figure 3.
(b) Align lower tabs on forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, with flange
connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, figure 7.
(c) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange connecting
HPC stator case to CRF, figure 4.
14 Change 1
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF
flange, figure 7.
(e) Extend threaded rod on each jack so that arm aligns with second hole in
flange. Insert pin until upper arm is flush against engine flange.
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit the lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit the lower tabs against
HPC stator case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with
two bolts on each side.
(a) While two people hold HPC stator case to keep it from falling, remove
ball-lock pins that secure struts to upper HPC stator case.
(c) Lower upper HPC stator case until it rests on jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18,
and 1C9400P19.
(a) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(b) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward handle, 1C9400P03,
onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(c) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft hinge onto
horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(d) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward hinge onto horizontal
flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(4) Turn jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, in unison and lower upper
HPC stator case down to fit onto lower HPC stator case.
(6) Clean and store all tools from fixture set, 1C9400, in container, 1C9400P02.
Change 1 15
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
C. Using clean cloth moistened with Isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact
faces of upper and lower stator cases.
CAUTION
D. Install vane holding set secure fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2.
Secure with washers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding
fixture in place.
CAUTION
E. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at
locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten nuts at this time.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of horizontal flange attaching
bolts. See figure 6.
(2) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required,
install clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges
together. Do not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins cannot
function. Do not remove these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed
and tightened to final torque.
16 Change 1
NOTE
Bolt positions on the horizontal flanges are counted from the aft
flange forward.
(3) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal
flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from aft end on both
sides. See figure 6.
(4) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Restrain pins
using Allen wrench and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m)
of torque. Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance
areas. Avoid side loads.
(5) Using Allen wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
240 lb in. (27.1 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per
figure 6.
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. For ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther
along one horizontal flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in
figure 6.
(8) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts per
figure 6.
(9) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(10) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating
from flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
I. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque.
Tightening sequence is as follows:
(3) Continue tightening aft circumferential flange bolts, alternating from side to side,
until all nuts are tightened, figure 8.
8
J. Tighten forward circumferential flange bolts to torque values listed in figure 9.
Safety-wire bolts in groups of two or three.
9
K. Remove jack assembly, 1C9376.
Change 1 17
18 Change 1
Change 1 19
(1) Remove vane holding fixture, 2C6259, from VSV stages 3-5.
(a) Loosen self-locking nuts that secure first five vane arms at each end of upper
and lower stage 5 actuator rings. Loosen self-locking nut until flush with end
of vane stem.
CAUTION
Connecting links shall be installed on correct stage and with lever
arm pins engaging sleeves, or VSV off-schedule operation and
engine damage may result.
(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for
stage being installed.
(c) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces
forward. Install IGV and stages 1-4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins
engage sleeves.
(d) Install bolts and washers onto IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts onto stage 5.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(e) Ensure all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and are not engaged with
connecting link lightening holes.
CAUTION
Stage 5 vane stem self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a)
shall be retorqued, or damage to engine will occur.
(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Install VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
20 Change 1
(3) Remove VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
(a) Mark stage number on connecting links to be removed with marking pen.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and lineup pins from stages IGV and 1-4 connecting
links and remove links from actuation rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged,
for reinstallation.
(c) Remove bolts from stage 5 connecting links and remove links from actuation
rings. Retain sleeves, if not damaged, for reinstallation.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten bolts securing vane holding fixture, 2C6259, or
tool damage will result.
(5) Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Using
bolts removed in step (4), secure fixtures to stages. Tighten bolts only enough to
secure fixtures in place.
WARNING
Penetrating oil is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin
and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged con-
tact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(1) Apply penetrating oil to forward and aft circumferential flange and
horizontal flange nuts and bolts.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark brackets to front frame, figure 3, and CRF
(figure 4) flanges.
Change 1 21
(3) Position jack assembly, 1C9376, at 6:00 o'clock position on CRF forward flange.
Raise jack just enough to support CRF flange, but not enough to exert any upward
force (figure 5)
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure HPC upper stator case
forward and aft circumferential flanges (figures 3 and 4).
CAUTION
(a) Remove nuts, spacers, and bolts from horizontal flanges. See figure 6. Use
drift pin and mallet to drive out body-bound bolts.
(b) If horizontal flange bolt or nut is loose, broken, or missing, record location
and replace bolt and nut plus bolt and nut on each side.
(c) If more than five horizontal bolts or nuts are loose, broken, or missing,
replace all bolts and nuts in both horizontal flanges.
(6) Install aft jack, 1C9400P17, and forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, as
follows:
(a) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, remove second and fourth
bolts from flange connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, counting
from splitline (figure 3).
(b) Align lower tabs on forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, with flange
connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame (figure 7).
(c) For aft jacks, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange
connecting HPC stator case to CRF (figure 4).
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jacks, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF
flange (figure 7).
(e) Extend threaded rod on each jack so that arm aligns with second hole in
flange. Insert pin until upper arm is flush against engine flange.
22 Change 1
(f) For aft jacks, 1C9400P17, fit lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit lower tabs against HPC
stator case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with two
bolts on each side.
(7) Extend each jack until resistance is felt. Using four operators, turn each nut, in
unison, approximately 1/4 turn each time until HPC stator case is raised
approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm) for installing hinges.
(8) Install aft shims, 1C9400P11 and 1C9400P23, as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align aft shim, 1C9400P11, onto right side horizontal flange. Insert studs
into the second and thirteenth holes from aft end of HPC stator case. Install
stud through horizontal flange of lower case and secure finger-tight at under
side of flange.
(b) Align aft shim, 1C9400P23, onto left side horizontal flange. Insert studs into
the second and thirteenth holes from aft end of HPC stator case. Install stud
through horizontal flange of lower case and secure finger-tight at under side
of flange.
(9) Install forward shims, 1C9400P10 and 1C9400P22, as follows (figure 7):
(a) Align forward shim, 1C9400P10, onto right side horizontal flange. Position
shim so forward most hole in shim aligns with third flange hole from forward
end of HPC stator case.
(b) Align forward shim, 1C9400P22, onto left side horizontal flange. Position
shim so forward most hole in shim aligns with third flange hole from forward
end of HPC stator case.
(10) Using jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, lower upper HPC stator
case down onto lower compressor case.
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to
prevent damage to rotor spool.
(a) Install bolts and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Do not tighten nuts at this
time.
(b) Install bolts at forward circumferential flange. Do not tighten bolts at this
time.
Change 1 23
(d) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required,
install clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull
flanges together. Do not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins
cannot function. Do not remove these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are
installed and tightened to final torque. See figure 6.
NOTE
Bolt positions on the horizontal flanges are counted from the aft
flange forward.
(e) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in
horizontal flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from
aft end on both sides. See figure 6.
(f) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Using Allen
wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in.
(4.5 N·m) of torque. Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in
tight clearance areas. Avoid side loads.
(g) Using Allen wrench, restrain pins, and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
240 lb in. (27.1 N·m) of torque.
(h) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per
figure 6.
(i) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. For ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther
along one horizontal flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values
listed in figure 6.
(j) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts
per figure 6.
(k) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(l) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and
alternating from flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
(m) Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of
torque. Tightening sequence is as follows (figure 8):
(14) Install jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, per step (5).
(15) Extend each jack until resistance is felt. Using four operators, turn each nut, in
unison, approximately 1/4 turn each time until HPC stator case is raised
approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm) for installing hinges.
(a) Align forward, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P05 and 1C9400P06, onto
horizontal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position
hinges so forward hole in hinge aligns with the second hole from forward end
of upper HPC stator case.
(c) Align aft, upper and lower hinges, 1C9400P07 and 1C9400P08, onto
horizontal flange of HPC stator case, right side, aft looking forward. Position
hinges so aft hole in hinge aligns with sixth hole from aft end of the case.
(d) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft hinges to HPC
stator case.
(e) Using three 1/4-inch fasteners, secure forward handle, 1C9400P03, onto
underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator case, aft looking
forward.
(f) Using two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners, secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto underside of left side of horizontal flange of HPC stator
case, aft looking forward.
(17) Ensure case is supported by hinges and lift bar assembly. Remove jacks,
1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19.
(a) Raise upper HPC stator case by lifting up on lift bar (two man operation).
Open to height desired.
Change 1 25
(b) Install top end of strut over aft flange of HPC stator case. Align strut holes
over fourth hole CW from the horizontal flanges holes, aft looking forward.
(d) Install bottom end of strut over forward flange of CRF. Align strut over third
hole CCW from top vertical centerline, aft looking forward. Insert ball-lock
pin.
WARNING
Deleted.
A. Inspect HPC rotor for FOD.
(a) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, remove second and fourth
bolts from flange connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame, counting
from splitline (figure 3).
(b) Align lower tabs on forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, with flange
connecting forward HPC stator case to fan frame (figure 7).
(c) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, remove second bolt and nut from flange connecting
HPC stator case to CRF (figure 4).
(d) Align lower tabs on aft jack, 1C9400P17, to straddle HPC stator case/CRF
flange (figure 7).
(e) Extend threaded rod on each jack so that arm aligns with second hole in
flange. Insert pin until upper arm is flush against engine flange.
(f) For aft jack, 1C9400P17, fit the lower tabs over aft flange and bolt into place.
(g) For forward jacks, 1C9400P18 and 1C9400P19, fit the lower tabs against
HPC stator case forward flange and bolt into place on fan frame. Secure with
two bolts on each side.
26 Change 1
(a) While two people hold HPC stator case to keep it from falling, remove
ball-lock pins that secure struts to upper HPC stator case.
(c) Lower upper HPC stator case until it rests on jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18,
and 1C9400P19.
(a) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft handle,
1C9400P04, onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(b) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward handle, 1C9400P03,
onto horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove handle.
(c) Remove two 3/8-inch and two 7/16-inch fasteners that secure aft hinge onto
horizontal flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(d) Remove three 1/4-inch fasteners that secure forward hinge onto horizontal
flange of HPC stator case. Remove hinge.
(a) Remove studs and remove aft shims, 1C9400P11 and 1C9400P23, from aft
end of HPC stator case.
(b) Remove studs and remove forward shims, 1C9400P10 and 1C9400P22, from
forward end of HPC stator case.
(5) Turn jacks, 1C9400P17, 1C9400P18, and 1C9400P19, in unison, and lower upper
HPC stator case down to fit onto lower HPC stator case.
(7) Clean and store all tools from fixture set, 1C9400, in container, 1C9400P02.
Change 1 27
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
C. Using clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol, clean horizontal flange contact
faces of upper and lower HPC stator cases.
CAUTION
NOTE
D. Install vane holding fixture, 2C6259, onto VSV stages 3-5. See figure 2. Secure using
washers and bolts. Tighten bolts only enough to secure vane holding fixture in place.
CAUTION
Ensure compressor vane levers are positioned fully open to
prevent damage to rotor spool.
E. Install brackets, bolts, and nuts at aft circumferential flange. Install hardware at
locations marked during disassembly. Do not tighten nuts at this time.
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer faces of horizontal flange attaching
bolts. See figure 6.
(2) Ensure flanges are in contact on both sides over their full length. If required,
install clamps or bolts at forward and aft ends and tighten slightly to pull flanges
together. Do not overtighten clamps or bolts so that alignment pins cannot
function. Do not remove these clamps or bolts until assembly bolts are installed
and tightened to final torque.
28 Change 1
NOTE
Bolt positions on the horizontal flanges are counted from the aft
flange forward.
(3) Install body-bound bolts or alignment pins from tool set, 2C14779, in horizontal
flange bolthole locations 2, 5, 9, 21, 25, 31, and 35, counting from aft end on both
sides. See figure 6.
(4) Ensure that body-bound bolts or alignment pins are fully seated. Restrain pins
using Allen wrench and tighten nuts on small diameter pins to 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m)
of torque. Use socket from tool set, 2C14779, to enable access in tight clearance
areas. Avoid side loads.
(5) Restrain pins using Allen wrench and tighten nuts on large diameter pins to
240 lb in. (27.1 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install bolts, spacers, and nuts in remaining horizontal flange boltholes per
figure 6.
(7) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. For ease of assembly, it is permitted to advance up to four bolts farther
along one horizontal flange than the other. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in
figure 6.
(8) Remove alignment pins and replace with body-bound bolts, spacers, and nuts per
figure 6.
(9) Tighten nuts, in sequence, starting from aft end and alternating from flange to
flange. Tighten nuts to torque values listed in figure 6.
(10) Tighten horizontal flange bolts with spacers, starting from aft end and alternating
from flange to flange. Do not unseat nuts during retightening.
I. Tighten aft circumferential flange nuts to 380-420 lb in. (42.9-47.5 N·m) of torque.
Tightening sequence is as follows (figure 8):
(3) Continue tightening aft circumferential flange bolts, alternating from side to side,
until all nuts are tightened.
Change 1 29
(1) Remove vane holding fixture, 2C6259, from VSV stages 3-5.
(a) Loosen self-locking nuts that secure first five vane arms at each end of upper
and lower stage 5 actuator rings. Loosen self-locking nut until flush with end
of vane stem.
CAUTION
Connecting links shall be installed on correct stage and with
lever arm pins engaging sleeves, or VSV off-schedule opera-
tion and engine damage may result.
(b) Install sleeves into connecting link ID. Ensure connecting link is correct for
stage being installed.
(c) Position connecting link onto actuation rings, ensuring FWD marking faces
forward. Install IGV and stages 1-4 lineup pins, ensuring lever arm pins
engage sleeves.
(d) Install bolts and washers onto IGV and stages 1-4. Install bolts onto stage 5.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(e) Ensure all lever arm pins are engaged in sleeves and are not engaged with
connecting link lightening holes.
CAUTION
Stage 5 vane stem self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a)
shall be retorqued, or damage to engine will occur.
(f) Tighten self-locking nuts loosened in substep (a) to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m)
of torque.
(3) Install VSV hydraulic actuators, actuator brackets, and actuation levers per
WP 1410 00.
5WP 2412 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) STATOR
VANES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection ................................... 20
HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Visual Inspection.............................................. 16
HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection............................................................... 24
HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Visual Inspection......................................................................... 20
HPC Stator Case Inspection ........................................................................................................ 30
HPC Stator Case - Repair of VSV Bushing Mounting Hole Threads......................................... 30
HPC Stator Vanes Installation..................................................................................................... 51
HPC Stator Vanes Removal ........................................................................................................ 4
Parts Repair - Vanes - General .................................................................................................... 27
Parts Repair - Vanes - Leading and Trailing Edge Blending ...................................................... 28
Parts Repair - Vanes - Tip Blending............................................................................................ 30
Change 3 1
1. Introduction.
NOTE
The LM6000 HPC high-boss case stages 3-5 bushings are replaceable
externally without top case removal. Refer to WP 1412 00 for replace-
ment instructions.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor (HPC) stator case.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) stages 3 to 5 Bushing Replace-
ment (High-Boss HPC Stator Case) WP 1412 00
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator WP 2411 00
Case Replacement
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection WP 4028 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 3
Nomenclature Specification
Deleted
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Sharpening Stone Fed Spec SS-S-736
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
Tapping Fluid Trim Tap NC
(Masters
Chemical Co.)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Referenced Procedures.
6. Expendable Material.
Change 3 3
7. SPD Information.
A. Before disassembly, inspect inlet guide vane (IGV) and stages 0-5 stator vanes for
off-schedule condition per WP 4028 00.
• The forward and aft parts of each shroud half section are a
matched set. If either part requires replacement, the entire half
section shall be replaced.
(b) Remove nuts from shroud retaining bolts. Support vanes and tap bolts out
using a plastic mallet. Separate and remove forward and aft shroud segments.
(3) Using holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, support individual vanes.
Support entire stage of vanes using holder from VSV holder set, 2C6171.
See figure 2.
2
(4) Loosen locknut using torque break wrench, 1C9428, and channel-lock pliers. See
figures 3 and 4. Remove locknut (1, figure 4), alignment sleeve (2), and lever arm
4
3
(5) If a large number of vanes are being removed, remove all lever arms (3) and
remove actuation ring (11).
4 Change 3
Change 3 5
CAUTION
(6) Remove spacer (5) and bushing (6) from outside of stator case (12).
(7) Remove vane (8) by pulling from inside of stator case (12).
(9) If HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove stages IGV-2 borescope plugs from
stator case.
(2) Using holding tool from VSV tool set, 2C6018, support individual vanes. Support
entire stage of vanes using holding tool from VSV holder set, 2C6171.
See figure 2.
6 Change 3
(b) Remove jamnut (3), alignment sleeve (4), and spacer (5).
(c) Remove vane (9) by pulling from inside of high-boss case (12).
(d) If large number of vanes are being removed, remove all lever arms (2) and
remove actuation ring (11) and actuation ring sleeves (10).
(e) Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND- 0213, remove bushing (6) as follows:
1 Remove bolts (7) that secure bushing (6) to high-boss case (12).
Change 3 7
8 Change 3
Figure 5. High-Boss Case Stages 3-5 Vane Removal Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0213
Change 3 9
10 Change 3
(g) If upper and lower HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove stages 3-5 borescope
plugs from stator case.
(1) Remove borescope plugs from HPC stator case on effected stages.
(2) Using marking pen, position mark vanes to HPC stator case.
(3) Remove vane retaining keys from horizontal flanges of upper HPC stator case (figure 6).
Lower HPC stator case has no retaining keys.
6
NOTE
(4) On stages 7 and 11, remove vanes by sliding circumferentially from retaining slots. Use
driver from compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against vane base, not
airfoil.
CAUTION
(5) On stages 6, 8, 9, 10, and 12, remove vanes to expose first spring retainer by sliding
circumferentially from retaining slots.
(6) Using stator vane spring retainer removal tool, 2C14684, remove spring retainers.
(figure 7). Discard spring retainers.
7
(7) Remove remaining vanes and retainers per steps (5) and (6).
(2) Using marking pen, position mark liner segments to HPC stator case.
Change 3 11
12 Change 3
Change 3 13
(3) Remove bolts that secure liner segments to HPC stator case.
CAUTION
Use care so end-stop does not fall out of the liner segments
and leaf seals do not become disengaged.
(6) Attempt to remove end-stop from liner. Early configuration end-stops cannot be
removed. See figure 8.
(7) If end-stop is not removable, remove vanes from end of liner opposite end-stop.
(b) Remove vane to expose first spring retainer by sliding circumferentially from
liner retaining slots, sliding it over liner end-stop pin.
14 Change 3
Change 3 15
(c) Using vane spring retainer removal tool, 2C14684, remove exposed spring retainer
(figure 7). Discard spring retainer. See figure 8.
(d) Slide second vane toward liner end-stop pin to expose next spring retainer.
(e) Repeat steps (c) and (d) until all spring retainers are removed from liner.
(g) Install end-stop and leaf seals to liner. Retain end-stop in place with two rubber bands,
one around each end of end-stop.
G. If HPC stator cases are to be replaced, remove variable stator vane (VSV) lever bracket from
stator case.
9. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Visual Inspection.
A.Visually inspect IGV and stage 1-5 vanes per tables 1 and 2, and figure 9.
16 Change 3
Table 1. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Visual Inspection (Continued)
Change 3 17
Table 1. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Visual Inspection (Continued)
6. Area E (IGV, Stage 1-2 Trunnions, Platforms, and Tangs) for (figure 9):
a. Nicks and 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) Blend high metal per
scratches deep if 80 percent of deep if 30 percent of paragraph 13
area is clear of defects. area is clear of defects
None allowed in fillets
and no raised metal
b. Scoring or wear 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Replace vane*
on outer deep, 0.100 inch deep
trunnion (2.54 mm) wide
diameter
c. Scoring or wear 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
on inner deep for 50 percent of
trunnion circumference
diameter
d. Wear on outer 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
platform deep
surface
e. Wear on inner 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
platform face deep
f. Runout of inner 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
trunnion FIR
diameter with
respect to outer
trunnion
diameter (IGV-
2 only)
g. Scoring or wear 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) Not repairable Replace vane*
on tang deep
18 Change 3
Table 1. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Visual Inspection (Continued)
Table 2. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
IGV Stage 1 Stage 2
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 2.26 57.4 2.02 51.3 1.74 44.2
0.50 12.7 2.24 56.9 2.00 50.8 1.73 43.9
1.00 25.4 2.19 55.6 1.96 49.8 1.69 42.9
1.50 38.1 2.14 54.4 1.92 48.8 1.66 42.2
2.00 50.8 2.08 52.8 1.88 47.8 1.63 41.4
2.50 63.5 2.03 51.6 1.83 46.5 1.60 40.6
3.00 76.2 1.98 50.3 1.80 45.7 1.57 39.9
3.50 88.9 1.92 48.8 1.75 44.5 1.53 38.9
4.00 101.6 1.87 47.5 1.70 43.2 1.50 38.1
4.50 114.3 1.81 46.0 1.64 41.7 1.46 37.1
5.00 127.0 1.76 44.7 1.59 40.4 1.43 36.3
5.50 139.7 1.71 43.4 1.52 38.6 1.40 35.6
6.00 152.4 1.65 41.9 1.46 37.1
6.50 165.1 1.60 40.6 1.40 35.6
7.00 177.8 1.55 39.4
7.50 190.5 1.49 37.8
Change 3 19
Table 2. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values (Continued)
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
IGV Stage 1 Stage 2
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 1.64 41.7 1.50 38.1 1.26 32.0
0.50 12.7 1.60 40.6 1.48 37.6 1.25 31.8
1.00 25.4 1.54 39.1 1.42 36.1 1.21 30.7
1.50 38.1 1.48 37.6 1.37 34.8 1.17 29.7
2.00 50.8 1.44 36.6 1.34 34.0 1.15 29.2
2.50 63.5 1.42 36.1 1.31 33.3 1.12 28.4
3.00 76.2 1.39 35.3 1.29 32.8 1.09 27.7
3.50 88.9 1.36 34.5 1.27 32.3 1.06 26.9
4.00 101.6 1.32 33.5 1.24 31.5
4.50 114.3 1.29 32.8
9
10. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Variable Stator Vanes Dimensional Inspection.
NOTE
A. Dimensionally inspect IGV and stage 1-5 vane chord (Dimension V) as follows:
(2) Check measured Chord V with table 2 limits. Replace vanes as required.
B. Dimensionally inspect vane length (Dimension L) of stage 3-5 vanes per table 3, and
figure 10.
10
11. HPC Stage 6-13 Stator Vanes Visual Inspection.
A.Visually inspect stage 6-13 vanes per table 4, and figure 11.
20 Change 3
Change 3 21
22 Change 3
Change 3 23
NOTE
(1) Measure vane Chord V at Dimension D listed in table 5. See figure 11.
(2) Check measured Chord V with table 5 limits. Replace vanes as required.
B. Inspect stage 6-13 vane length (Dimension L) per table 6 and figure 12.
24 Change 3
Change 3 25
Table 5. HPC IGV and Stage 1-5 Vanes Minimum Chord Values
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 6 Stage 7 Stage 8
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 1.34 34.0 1.23 31.2 1.26 32.0
0.50 12.7 1.32 33.5 1.22 31.0 1.24 31.5
1.00 25.4 1.28 32.5 1.16 29.5 1.22 31.0
1.50 38.1 1.24 31.5 1.11 28.2 1.20 30.5
2.00 50.8 1.20 30.5 1.06 26.9 1.17 29.7
2.50 63.5 1.16 29.5 1.01 25.7 1.14 29.0
3.00 76.2 1.11 28.2
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 9 Stage 10 Stage 11
inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 1.21 30.7 1.11 28.2 1.12 28.4
0.50 12.7 1.20 30.5 1.10 27.9 1.12 28.4
1.00 25.4 1.16 29.5 1.08 27.4 1.08 27.4
1.50 38.1 1.13 28.7 1.04 26.4 1.02 25.9
2.00 50.8 1.10 27.9 0.98 24.9
2.50 63.5
3.00 76.2
Minimum Chord V
Dim D
Stage 12 Stage 13
inches mm inches mm inches mm
Root Root 1.14 29.0 0.86 21.8
0.50 12.7 1.13 28.7 0.86 21.8
1.00 25.4 1.07 27.2 0.86 21.8
1.50 38.1 0.99 25.1 0.86 21.8
2.00 50.8
2.50 63.5
3.00 76.2
26 Change 3
A. Use smooth file when repair blending compressor vanes not over 8 inches (200 mm) long, or
emery cloth to remove nicks and dents when removal of considerable material is necessary. File
or blend in longitudinal direction (parallel with airfoil length). Power tools may be used for ini-
tial heavy removal of material such as excessive tip curl. Final blend and polish
0.020–0.030 inch (0.51–0.76 mm) must be accomplished by hand.
CAUTION
All blend repair and polishing shall be done in direction parallel
with the vane leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for
final polish or finish blending.
B. Use medium stone on any areas which have been blended with file or emery cloth, and
on areas containing small nicks and dents.
C. Use fine emery cloth and/or fine abrasive stone to polish blended area until finish looks and
feels like original.
Change 3 27
D. Blend leading edges to as near original configuration as possible. Blend trailing edges
to remove all sharp edges (figure 13).
13
14. Parts Repair - Vanes - Leading and Trailing Edge Blending.
A. Blend leading and trailing edges to within maximum repairable limits of figure 9.
Contour blend edges per figure 13.
B. When blending out cracks, blend away enough material to remove defect and continue
to blend an additional 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
CAUTION
When power blending out cracks, blend away enough material to
remove defect and continue to blend an additional 0.015 inch
(0.38 mm).
C. Power tools may be used to shorten time required to remove metal but hand bench last
0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
28 Change 3
Change 3 29
B. Blends may be 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) maximum depth on 20 percent of vanes per stage.
Maximum Maximum
Serviceable Repairable
Inspect Limit Limit Repair Method
1. High Boss Field Repair Stages 3-5 VSV Bushing Mounting Holes for:
a. Damage to Loss of first Any amount Repair per
threads full thread paragraph 17
17. HPC Stator Case - Repair of VSV Bushing Mounting Hole Threads.
A. This procedure provides instructions to field repair stages 3-5 VSV bushing mounting hole
threads in the HPC stator case by drilling two new holes 90º from the original holes and
tapping new threads. Refer to figure 14. Dimensional information for this repair is given in
figure 15.
14
15
16
B. Locally manufacture drilling jig for stages that have damaged VSV bushing mounting
holes. Refer to figure 16.
E. Install locally manufactured drilling jig onto damaged VSV bushing mounting holes as
follows. Refer to figure 19
(1) If case is off engine, place drilling jig in VSV hole. Tighten bolt to secure tool to
VSV hole. Tighten bolt to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) If case is assembled, install drilling jig using vane stem and a nut.
Refer to figure 19, sheet 2.
(3) Ensure drilling jig is correctly attached and seated against case wall and guiding
holes are in correct position.
30 Change 3
Change 3 31
32 Change 3
Change 3 33
34 Change 3
Change 3 35
36 Change 3
Change 3 37
38 Change 3
(4) Using drilling jig base and locally manufactured depth gage, adjust drill depth to
ensure depth of drilled hole in HPC case does not exceed limit of 0.370 inch
(9.39 mm). Refer to figure 17, sheet 3.
CAUTION
Assure drill stop is secure and depth is set on the drill or damage to
case may occur.
F. Drill two new holes located on the opposite position to old damaged holes. Refer to
figure 15. Ensure you use the transfer punch to facilitate drilling.
H. Tap threads inside new drilled holes. Refer to requirements of figure 15. Use thread
tapping fluid.
J. Do a swab etch of all repaired areas. Refer to Chapter 11, Swab Etching Procedures.
(1) All indications less than 0.03 in. (0.76 mm) are permitted.
(2) Indications less than 0.06 in. (1.5 mm), not interpreted as linear indications, are
permitted.
17
18
19
(3) The above defects are permitted if they are not closer than 0.5 in. (12.7 mm).
L. Select correct bushing. Rework bushing by drilling two holes 90° from existing two
mounting holes. Use bushing rework tool. Refer to figure 18.
O. Install bushing on repaired VSV holes. Use standard compressor case bolts to attach
replacement bushings to VSV mounting holes. Refer to figure 20.
Change 3 39
40 Change 3
Change 3 41
42 Change 3
Change 3 43
44 Change 3
Change 3 45
46 Change 3
Change 3 47
48 Change 3
Change 3 49
50 Change 3
(1) Install bushing (6, figure 4) into vane (8) counterbore on stator case (12) outer
diameter. Press bushing evenly to avoid snagging or cracking. Locally fabricate
installation tool per figure 21 and use to install bushings, if required.
CAUTION
Deleted.
(2) Install washer (7, figure 4) onto vane (8). Install vane into stator case (12). Washer
shall protrude into case bore when vane is installed.
(3) Install spacer (5) and lever arm (3) onto vane (8). Ensure spacer and lever arm
slide over vane tangs.
(4) Install alignment sleeve (2) and locknut (1) onto vane (8). Ensure alignment
sleeve seats between vane tangs.
CAUTION
Do not use lever arm to hold vane when torquing locknut, or lever
will be damaged.
1
20
(5) Using vane holding tool from VSV tool set, 2C6018, and torque wrench, tighten
locknut (1) to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m). A minimum of two threads shall show
beyond nut if parts are seated properly.
(a) Manually rotate vane (8) several times to ensure assembly is seated.
CAUTION
Failure to meet proper vane rotational torque may cause binding
and result in bent lever arm.
(b) Check that vane (8) rotational torque is between 2-10 lb in. (0.2-1.1 N·m).
Replace spacer (5), as required, to obtain proper rotational torque.
See figure 22.
Change 3 51
52 Change 3
NOTE
(c) Small changes to vane (8, figure 4) rotational torque may be accomplished by
lapping spacer face, using circular motion to remove material. Final surface
finish shall match original finish.
(d) Record final rotational torque of each vane (8). Torque value will be required
for checking total actuation load for half-ring segments.
1
(7) Ensure actuation travel limits of replacement vanes as follows:
(a) Check each replacement vane for freedom of travel through limits shown in
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to casing bore.
23
(b) Vane areas adjacent to casing bore may be blended to obtain clearance at
travel limits. See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate
interference. Do not use power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed
0.005 inch (0.13 mm). Original finish required. No undercutting allowed.
24
Change 3 53
(8) Ensure stages IGV-2 vanes are correctly seated using 0.004 inch (0.10 mm) feeler
stock between bushing and spacer. See figure 25. Parts are not seated correctly if
feeler stock can be inserted between bushing and spacer.
25
54 Change 3
WARNING
(1) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean old silicone rubber adhesive from shroud retaining
bolts and nuts.
(2) Install bushings onto vane inner trunnions. See figure 26.
26
(3) Position forward and aft shroud segments onto bushings.
Change 3 55
NOTE
(4) Install shroud retaining bolts. On stage IGV, boltheads face aft. On stages 1 and 2,
boltheads face forward.
(a) Check each replacement vane for freedom of travel through limits shown in
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to shroud.
(b) Vane areas adjacent to shroud may be blended to obtain clearance at travel
limits. See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate interference.
Do not use power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed 0.005 inch
(0.13 mm). Original finish required. No undercutting allowed.
56 Change 3
(7) Check that torque required to rotate vanes assembled into shrouds does not
exceed 15 lb in. (1.7 N·m).
WARNING
(8) Remove nuts one at a time, and fill nut threads with silicone rubber adhesive.
Install nuts before adhesive dries. Tighten nuts to 60-70 lb in. (6.8-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(9) Use 0.001-inch (0.03 mm) feeler stock to check that shrouds are mated.
(10) Apply silicone rubber adhesive over nuts and exposed bolt threads, to a minimum
thickness of 0.032 inch (0.81 mm).
(11) Allow silicone rubber adhesive to cure for a minimum of 8 hours before engine
operation.
Change 3 57
58 Change 3
(1) Select replacement vane of equal length to, or slightly longer than, vane being
replaced. If replaced vane length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of
two adjacent vanes.
NOTE
(2) Hand-grind replacement vane to length of original vane +0.000 to -0.005 inch
(+0.00 to -0.13 mm). Maintain proper length and angle across vane tip. Stages
3-5 vanes have double angles on tip. Power tools may be used to shorten grinding
time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand ground.
(1) Install high-boss case stages 3-5 stator vanes (figure 27 or figure 27.A) as
follows:
27
(a) Visually check for evidence of locking feature on bolts (7, figure 27 or
figure 27.A). Lightly coat threads and seating surfaces of bolts with thread
lubricant.
1 Install self-locking bolts by hand into case. If bolts can be run into case
without stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace bolt with
new bolt.
Change 3 59
Figure 27. High-Boss Case Stages 3-5 Vane Installation Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0213
60 Change 3
Change 3 61
CAUTION
Part Numbers are not marked on new bushings and are diffi-
cult to differentiate by size and shape. Stage 5 bushings have a
paint marking on bushing barrel and stage 3 and 4 bushings
have no paint markings. Failure to assemble correctly may
cause VSV off-schedule operation.
Part Numbers are not marked on new washers and are diffi-
cult to differentiate by size and shape. Stage 5 washers have a
paint marking on washer face and stages 3 and 4 washers
have no paint markings. Failure to assemble correctly may
cause VSV off-schedule operation.
a Insert barrel end of painted stage 5 flanged bushing (13), inside barrel
end of stage 5 compressor stator vane actuation housing (6).
62 Change 3
CAUTION
NOTE
Once assembled, the new multiple-piece bushing assemblies are
installed in the same manner as the one-piece bushing.
3 Verify that borescope ports in stages 3, and 4 are not blocked. If blocked,
repeat steps 1, and 2. If not blocked, perform remaining installation steps.
CAUTION
Ensure all stages 3-5 stator vanes have the letter V marked at
top of vane stem. Apex of V shall point forward. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
(e) Install vane (9) into high-boss case (12). Ensure vane has letter V
marked on top of vane stem and that apex of V is pointing forward.
(f) Install spacer (5) and alignment sleeve (4) onto vane (9). Flat on alignment
sleeve faces forward.
(g) Install jamnut (3) onto vane (9). Using holding tool from holding VSV tool
set, 2C6018, and torque wrench, tighten jamnut to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m)
of torque. Replace jamnut if run-on torque is more than 20 lb in. (2.3 N·m).
(h) Install lever arm (2) and locknut (1) onto vane (9) by hand. If nut can be run
onto vane without stopping, self-locking feature is not adequate. Replace nut
with new nut.
Change 3 63
CAUTION
Do not use lever arm to hold vane when torquing locknut, or lever
will be damaged.
(i) Using holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, and torque wrench,
tighten locknut to 50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m).
(a) Manually rotate vane (9) several times to ensure assembly is seated.
CAUTION
NOTE
A 0.0 lb in. (0.0 N·m) torque limit implies that vane can rotate with a
minimum force applied. However, it is important to ensure that the
vane assembly is not loose after assembly as a result of a spacer that
is too thin. Vane assembly should be tight and should not rattle or
demonstrate any looseness.
(b) Ensure vane (9) rotational torque on high-boss case (12) is within 0-10 lb in.
(0.0-1.1 N·m).
(c) On high-boss case (12) installation, obtain vane (9) rotational torque as
follows:
(d) Record final rotational torque of each vane (9). Torque value will be required
for checking total actuation load for half-ring segments.
(a) Check each replacement vane for freedom of travel through limits shown in
figure 23. If vane binds, check for interference adjacent to casing bore.
64 Change 3
(b) Vane areas adjacent to casing bore may be blended to obtain clearance at
travel limits. See figure 24. Remove only enough material to eliminate
interference. Do not use power tools. Gap in reworked area shall not exceed
0.005 inch (0.13 mm). Original finish is required. No undercutting is
allowed.
E. Connect lever arms (2, figure 27) to actuation rings (11) as follows:
(1) Loosen locknuts (1) enough to allow lever arm (2) pins to be inserted into
actuation ring sleeves (10).
(2) Insert lever arm (2) pins into actuation ring sleeves (10).
CAUTION
Do not use lever arm to hold vane when torquing locknut, or lever
will be damaged.
(3) Hold stages IGV-2 vane with holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, or
VSV holder set, 2C6171, and tighten locknut (1) to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m) of
torque. Use torque wrench, 2C6965P01.
(4) Hold stages 3-5 vane with holding tool from holding VSV tool set, 2C6018, or
VSV holder set, 2C6171, and tighten locknut (1) on high-boss case (12) to
50-70 lb in. (5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(1) Inspect stages IGV-4 actuation ring for presence of washers under spacer
locknuts. Install washer, if missing.
(2) Position vanes so lever arms point aft. Measure dim M at each spacer for all
stages.
(3) Adjust spacers, as required, to dim M limits. Tighten locknut to 70-90 lb in.
(7.9-10.2 N·m) of torque.
28
Change 3 65
NOTE
(1) Using torque measuring fixture set, 1C9408, perform pull check on stages IGV-5
as follows:
NOTE
To perform pull check using a pull scale rather than fixture set,
1C9408, proceed to step (2).
(a) Remove parts from vane near center of actuation ring as shown in figure 29.
29
(b) Remove sleeve from actuation ring.
(c) Install dummy lever arm, locator plug, and drive adapter from torque
measuring fixture set, 1C9408.
66 Change 3
Change 3 67
(d) On stages IGV-2, tighten locator plug to 65-75 lb in. (7.3-8.5 N·m) of torque.
On stages 3-5 high-boss case, tighten locator plug to 50-70 lb in.
(5.6-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(e) Measure torque required to move actuation ring + 5 degrees from axial
position as shown in figure 30. On stages IGV-4, torque required shall not
exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On stage 5, torque required shall not exceed
204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(a) Install slave bolt into actuation ring connecting link bolthole.
68 Change 3
(c) Measure force required to move actuation ring +5 degrees from axial position
as shown in figure 30. Multiply reading by the following scale factors to
obtain torque:
(d) On stages IGV-4, torque required shall not exceed 140 lb in. (15.8 N·m). On
stage 5, torque required shall not exceed 204 lb in. (23.0 N·m).
(3) Actuate each stage by hand, through complete open and closed mechanical travel.
Each stage shall move freely with no catching or binding.
(4) If pull check requirements are not met, perform the following:
(a) Check actuation ring spacer clearance per step F. Adjust as required.
(b) On stages IGV-2, check for vane binding at shrouds and HPC stator casing
bore. Correct, as required, per step A. or step B.
(c) On stages 3-5, check for vane binding at HPC stator casing bore. Correct, as
required, per step D.
(d) Check recorded rotation torques for individual vanes (reference step D.(3)).
Replace or rework spacers on vanes with high torques, as required, per
steps A. or D.
(1) Select replacement vane of equal length to, or slightly longer than, vane being
replaced. If replaced vane length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of
two adjacent vanes.
Change 3 69
CAUTION
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and
thermal stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part
damage.
(2) Hand-grind replacement vane to length of original vane +0.000 to -0.005 inch
(+0.00 to -0.13 mm). Maintain proper length and angle across vane tip. Stages
6-13 vanes have double angles on tip. Power tools may be used to shorten
grinding time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand ground.
Use care so end-stop does not fall out of the liner segments and leaf
seals do not become disengaged.
(1) Install one end-stop and seven standard vanes into liner. Install vanes with
borescope cutouts into liner with borescope hole.
(2) With liner end-stop fully seated into liner slot, check position of last vane. Last
vane platform edge shall be 0.000-0.015 inch (0.00-0.38 mm) inside end of liner.
See figure 31. If end gap is not within limits, proceed as follows:
(a) Replace standard vanes with wide platform vanes, as required, to meet end
gap.
70 Change 3
Change 3 71
72 Change 3
(3) Remove seven stator vanes from liner and reinstall with spring retainers as
follows (figure 32):
CAUTION
NOTE
(a) Install new spring retainer behind platform edge of installed stator vane.
Ensure spring retainers are installed per figure 32.
(b) Install next stator vane until further movement requires force. Use nylon drift
or driver from compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against
vane platform, not airfoil. Drive stator vane over spring retainer until vane
platforms contact.
32
(c) Install remaining stator vanes per step (a) and (b) until all vanes are installed.
(d) Check that end gap is still within limits per step (2).
CAUTION
(4) Apply thread lubricant to rails of liners. Lubricant is not permitted on vane
airfoils or case flowpath.
(5) Position honeycomb seal in place with seal lip forward and install assembled liner
into stator case slots. Install remaining liners and install honeycomb seals to
bridge liner segments. Install honeycomb seal segments at horizontal flanges.
Install liner and honeycomb seal with borescope holes in bottom case, to align
with case borescope hole.
(6) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of bolts. Secure liners with
bolts. Tighten bolts to 290-310 lb in. (32.8-35.0 N·m) of torque.
Change 3 73
(a) Measure gap between liners, four places per HPC stator case half. Gap shall
not be less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
(b) Measure gap between end liners and HPC stator case horizontal flange, two
places per case half. Gap shall not be less than 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
(c) On lower HPC stator case, check that a 0.405-inch (10.29 mm) diameter rod
will pass freely through case, liner, and vane borescope holes.
(d) Loosen bolts and adjust position of liners, as required. Tighten bolts to
290-310 lb in. (32.8-35.0 N·m) of torque.
(8) Install borescope plug into lower HPC stator case as follows:
(a) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer face of borescope plug.
(b) Install plug and tighten to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-
wire plug.
(1) On upper HPC stator case half, install retaining key on 3:00 o'clock horizontal
flange position and secure with two C-clamps (figure 33). On lower HPC stator
case half, install parallel bar on 3:00 o'clock horizontal flange position and secure
with two C-clamps.
74 Change 3
Change 3 75
76 Change 3
CAUTION
Do not allow thread lubricant on airfoil or case flowpath. Failure to com-
ply may result in part damage.
(2) Apply two thin coats of thread lubricant onto vane dovetails. Lubricant is not
permitted on vane airfoils or case flowpath.
CAUTION
If a scrap vane is used as a driver, ensure scrap vane is not installed. Fail-
ure to comply may result in part damage.
(a) Slide vane into retaining slot until flush against key or parallel bar. Use nylon drift
or compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, as required. Tool shall drive against
vane base, not airfoil. See figure 33.
(b) Continue installing vanes until all vanes are installed. Number of vanes per case half
shall comply with table 8.
Table 8. Stages 6-12 Vane Requirements
Change 3 77
CAUTION
(a) Slide vane into retaining slot until flush against key or parallel bar. Use nylon
drift or compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, as required. Tool shall
drive against vane base, not airfoil. See figure 33.
CAUTION
• Make sure vane spring retainers are installed correctly. Spring
retainers can be installed inverted and may result in parts failure.
(b) Install new spring retainer behind platform edge of installed vane. Ensure
spring retainers are installed per figure 32.
(c) Install next vane into retaining slot until further movement requires force.
Use nylon drift or compressor stator vane driver set, 2C6019, to drive against
vane platform, not airfoil. Drive vane over spring retainer until vane
platforms contact figure 33.
(d) Install remaining vanes per steps (b) and (c) until all vanes are installed.
Install vanes with borescope platform cutouts, to align with HPC stator case
borescope holes. Number of vanes per case half shall comply with table 8.
(a) On stages 6 and 10, check that a 0.405-inch (10.29 mm) diameter rod will
pass freely through HPC stator case and platform of vanes.
(b) On stage 12, check that a 0.320-inch (8.13 mm) diameter rod will pass freely
through HPC stator case and platform of vanes.
78 Change 3
(1) Push all vanes circumferentially toward retaining key or parallel bar, until no gaps
exist between vane platforms.
(2) Measure gap between last vane and case flange. Refer to table 1 for required
clearances. If end gap is not within limits of table 8, proceed as follows:
(a) Adjust quantity of wide and standard platform vanes to obtain required vane
platform end gap clearance. Each stage must contain quantity of vanes called
out in table 8.
L. Install vane retaining keys onto upper HPC stator case half flanges as follows:
(1) Install key onto each horizontal flange of upper HPC stator case half. Chamfered
side of key goes into case flange mating slot.
(2) Stake each key two places at each end and between adjacent vane slots between
stages 6 and 12. See figure 34.
(3) Using sharpening stone, remove any high metal caused by staking.
34
M. Install borescope plugs as follows:
(1) Apply thread lubricant to threads and washer face of borescope plug.
(3) Tighten IGV and stages 1 through 6 plugs to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of
torque.
(4) Tighten stages 9, 10, 12, and 13 plugs to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of torque.
Safety-wire or safety-cable plug.
Change 3 79
80 Change 3
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Subject Page
Change 6 1
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting, removing and installing high pressure compres-
sor (HPC) rotor blades.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
Preventive Maintenance Chapter 12
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator WP 2411 00
Case Replacement
High Pressure Compressor Upper/Lower Stator Case SWP 2411 01
Opening/Closing
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
High Pressure Compressor Rotor Stages 1-5 Blade Clearance LM6000-IND-143
Increase (PA, PB, PC, and PD Models)
2 Change 6
3. Support Equipment.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec
A50TF54, CL-A
(L1 Liquid Wrench)
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
Tape Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
Change 6 3
(1) Return balance weights and unchanged blades, removed during replacement of blades, to
original locations.
(2) Damaged blades are replaced with blades of same pan weight where possible, within
following limits: for stages 1 through 3, within 0.5 grams; for stages 4 and 5, within
0.3 grams and for stages 6 through 16, within 0.2 grams. Replace heavily damaged
blades (with pieces missing) with blades of same part number.
B. Ten blades in rotor may be reworked to maximum repairable limits, if worked blades are dis-
tributed uniformly around circumference to reduce imbalance effects.
C. Blend up to 100 percent of blades locally for erosion at tips, if all blades in those stages are
blended by approximately same amount. It is recommended that equivalent of no more than
50 percent of stages be blended to minimum tip-chord erosion limits.
D. If an entire stage of blades require replacement, contact General Electric Customer Service to
obtain a set of preground blades.
E. Gain access to HPC rotor by removing top stator case per WP 2411 00 or by opening top sta-
tor case per SWP 2411 01.
4 Change 6
NOTE
The No. 1 blade is at the same clock position as the stage 9 dovetail
loading slot.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of blades to be removed and corresponding dovetail
slot on stage 1 disk. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, position mark No. 1 and
No. 5 dovetail slots on stage 1 disk.
B. Using retainer removal tool, 2C14198, remove stage 1 blade retainers of individual
blade to be removed and adjacent blades as follows (figure 1):
(1) Install seal protector over seals forward and aft of blades. Locally manufacture
protectors from plastic or rubber.
(2) Install aft clamp ring onto aft side of stage 1 disk.
(3) Install forward clamp ring onto forward side of stage 1 disk. Secure forward
clamp ring to aft clamp ring using handknobs.
CAUTION
Use care when straightening blade retainers to avoid scratching
stage 1 disk or damaging seal teeth.
(4) Using wedge-shaped edge of impact tool, bend forward tabs of retainers away
from blades. Straighten tabs using square edge of impact tool.
(6) Use nylon bar and mallet to tap on forward tangs of blade retainer and force
retainer aft. Pull blade retainer from aft side of stage 1 disk. Discard blade
retainer.
CAUTION
Do not use tools or excessive force to remove blade(s), or blade
leading edge/trailing edge damage may occur.
C. Push blade to be removed and adjacent blades radially forward, to ease removal of
first blade. Do not remove adjacent blades from disk.
D. Push blade to be removed radially inward to disengage midspan shroud. Slide blade
forward out of stage 1 disk.
E. Pan weigh removed blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blades.
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
CAUTION
All stage 1 through 6 blades shall be kept together as engine sets; there are
different rotor grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in different
blade lengths for stage 1 through 6 blades.
A. There are different grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in different blade lengths for
stage 1 through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as engine sets.
B. Visually inspect rotor stage 1 blades per table 1 and figures 2 and 3.
C. On gas turbines with SPRINT® system, stage 1 blades shall be replaced after 16,000 hours of
SPRINT® operation or as defined in Chapter 12, table 12-1, of this manual.
Change 6 7
8 Change 6
Change 6 9
10 Change 6
Change 6 11
Figure 3. HPC Rotor Stage 1 Blade Mid Span Carboloy Wear Pad Inspection
12 Change 6
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length per
step A. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, proceed to step B.
A. If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length as follows:
(1) Select replacement blade with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
replaced. Take measurement from bottom of blade dovetail. If replaced blade
length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent blades or
0.005 inch (0.13 mm) less than longer blade, whichever is longer.
WARNING
CAUTION
Power blending shall be accomplished so no excessive heat and thermal
stresses are generated. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(2) Grind replacement blade to correct length, as required. Power tools may be used
to shorten grinding time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand worked.
(3) Etch hand worked area and spot-fluorescent-penetrant inspect per Chapter 11.
NOTE
B. Weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. If all stage 1
blades are being replaced, record weights on blade position map, figure 4.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, select blades per step C. If all
stage 1 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position per step D.
C. If individual blades are being replaced, select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of
original blade. Blades replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within
0.5 gram of the average of eight adjacent serviceable blades. If replacement blade
within 0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement guide, figure 5.
Change 6 13
NOTE
D. If all stage 1 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position using GE computerized
balance program, 9446M61, Blade Plot. Mark blade position on blade map, figure 4.
CAUTION
A. Slide adjacent stage 1 blades part way out of disk. Slide blade to be reinstalled into corre-
sponding dovetail slot from forward side of stage 1 disk and engage midspan shrouds. Slide
all adjacent blades back into position.
14 Change 6
Change 6 15
B. Lift adjacent blades and reinstalled blade radially outward and install new blade
retainers under blades, from aft side of disk. Ensure blade retainer is seated against aft
side of blade. Retainer may be pulled from forward end for proper seating. Do not
hammer on aft end of retainer.
NOTE
(1) Pull replacement blade and adjacent blades radially outward. Shake blade to
ensure blade is at most outward position.
(2) Measure clearance between adjacent blade tips close to replacement blade and
edge of lower case. Make same measurement for replacement blade. Ensure
replacement blade-tip-to-case measurement is the same or greater (more
clearance) than adjacent non-removed blades.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each replacement blade.
NOTE
(1) Tap four wooden shims between each stage 1 blade retainer and disk. Two shims
under forward end of blade retainer and two shims under aft end.
(2) Ensure all blades are seated fully aft, with tangs against disk.
6
(3) Shine light through gap or use 0.001-inch (0.03 mm) shim to check for clearance
between midspan shrouds. Do not measure as cumulative gap. No clearance is
permitted. Replace stage 1 blade, as required, to eliminate clearance between
midspan shrouds.
E. Using plastic bar, figure 7, hold blade retainer forward and prebend forward tabs using
pre-bend tool, 2C6599. Ensure tool is seated onto retainer tab prior to bending.
F. Position seating tool, 2C6600, onto stage 1 blade retainer tabs. Center forward foot of
tool radially between two retainers. Fit aft foot of tool over tabs of both retainers.
Ensure leg of seating tool marked FWD is on forward side of disk.
16 Change 6
WARNING
G. Apply 5,000 psig (34,474 kPa gage) maximum hydraulic pressure to seating tool,
2C6600G03, to seat blade retainer tabs. If using seating tool, 2C6600G02, apply 8,000
psig (55,158 kPa gage) maximum hydraulic pressure to seat blade retainer tabs. Push aft
leg of seating tool forward while applying hydraulic pressure so retainer is correctly
seated while bending. Release hydraulic pressure and remove seating tool. Remove seal
protectors.
(1) Using feeler stock, measure clearance between blade retainer and disk. Measure
clearance on both forward and aft side of disk. Total combined clearance shall not
exceed 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Replace blade retainer if requirement is not met.
Change 6 17
(2) After retainer is seated, check for axial movement of blade by hand. If blade
movement is detected, measure with dial indicator placed against blade platform
face. Movement shall not exceed 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Replace blade retainer if
requirement is not met.
(3) Inspect retainer for cracks using light, inspection mirror, and 10X magnifying
glass. Pay particular attention to areas of bend radii. No cracks allowed.
NOTE
The No. 1 blade is at the same clock position as the stage 9 dovetail
loading slot.
A. Using marking pen, mark position of blades to be removed and corresponding dovetail
slot on stage 2 disk. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, position mark No. 1 and
No. 5 dovetail slots on stage 2 disk.
18 Change 6
B. Using retainer stop removal tool, 2C6968, remove stage 2 blade and retainer as
follows (figure 8):
8
(1) Position clamp rings between stages 1 and 2 disks. Turn three jackscrews to retain
clamp rings against disks and stage 2 blade retainers.
(2) Install anvil assembly aft of stage 2 blade so that lower anvil is under one leg of
retainer tab and upper anvil is placed on top of retainer stop.
(3) Tap down on upper anvil with plastic mallet until retainer stop is straightened.
(5) Using pliers, pull retainer stop from side of blade slot. See figure 9. Discard
retainer stop.
9
(6) Slide retainer to center of dovetail slot. Remove retainer and blade. If retainer is
not damaged, retain for installation.
C. Pan weigh removed blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blades.
CAUTION
A. There are different grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in different blade
lengths for stage 1 through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as
engine sets.
B. Visually inspect stage 2 rotor blades per table 2, and figures 10 and 11.
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length per
step A. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, proceed to step B.
A. If individual blades are being replaced, obtain correct blade length as follows:
(1) Select replacement blade with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
replaced. Take measurement from bottom of blade dovetail. If replaced blade
length cannot be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent blades or
0.005 inch (0.13 mm) less than longer blade, whichever is longer.
Change 6 19
20 Change 6
Change 6 21
22 Change 6
Change 6 23
24 Change 6
Change 6 25
26 Change 6
Change 6 27
WARNING
Do not breathe the particles from grinding or let the particles
touch you. The particles can cause damage, injury, or irritation
to you. Use personal protection equipment. Use local mechanical
exhaust ventilation or an approved respirator.
CAUTION
(2) Grind replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. Power tools
may be used to shorten grinding time but last 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) must be hand
worked. See figure 4.
NOTE
B. Pan weigh replacement blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on blade. If all stage
2 blades are being replaced, record weights on blade position map. See figure 4.
NOTE
C. If individual blades are being replaced, select replacement blade within 0.5 gram of
original blade. Blades replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within
0.5 gram of average of eight adjacent serviceable blades. If replacement blade within
0.5 gram is not available, use blade replacement guide. See figure 5.
NOTE
D. If all stage 2 blades are being replaced, calculate blade position using GE compute-
rized balance program, 9446M61. Mark blade position on blade position map.
See figure 4.
28 Change 6
The aft end of the retainer stop shall extend beyond the aft end of
the retainer.
D. Install retainer stop, from forward side, on right side of retainer, ALF, with shoulder
toward disk ID. Ensure shoulder of retainer stop seats against forward side of disk. If
necessary, tap with nylon drift and nylon mallet to seat.
NOTE
(1) Pull replacement blade and adjacent blades radially outward. Shake blade to
ensure blade is at most outward position.
(2) Measure clearance between adjacent blade tips close to replacement blade and
edge of lower case. Make same measurement for replacement blade. Ensure
replacement blade-tip-to-case measurement is the same or greater (more
clearance) than adjacent non-removed blades.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for each replacement blade.
F. Secure stage 2 blade with retainer stop installation tool, 2C6967, as follows
(figure12):
(1) With tool stop separated from anvil, install tool so lever arm is under aft end of
retainer stop and anvil holds retainer stop forward face against disk. Install tool
stop to anvil.
Change 6 29
30 Change 6
CAUTION
Ensure lever arm does not slip off retainer stop during bending
operation. Damage to engine parts could result.
(2) Use hand pressure to securely hold lever arm under retainer stop and pull lever
arm handle forward to bend retainer stop outward 30 degrees, minimum.
(1) After retainer is seated, check for axial movement of blade by hand. If blade
movement is detected, measure with dial indicator placed against blade platform
face. Movement shall not exceed 0.020 inch (0.51 mm). Replace blade retainer if
this requirement is not met.
(2) Inspect retainer for cracks using light, inspection mirror, and 10X magnifying
glass. Pay particular attention to areas of bend radii. No cracks allowed.
A. Using marking pen, number all blades in affected stages, starting with first blade
clockwise, ALF, from dovetail loading slot.
NOTE
(1) Prepare stages 3-5 and 10-14 locking lugs for removal as follows (figure 13):
CAUTION
Do not use unauthorized penetrating oils, or corrosion and prema-
ture failure may result.
(b) Using wrench, MSE-28, loosen setscrew until threads bottom on locking lugs
located on both sides of loading slot.
(c) Push locking lugs radially inward to bottom of dovetail slot. Locking lugs
will be sufficiently below surface of retaining slot to permit circumferential
movement.
Change 6 31
32 Change 6
(2) Prepare stages 6-9 locking lugs for removal as follows (figure 14):
(a) Apply penetrating oil to setscrew in locking lugs.
(b) Using wrench, MSE-28, loosen setscrew until threads bottom, on locking lugs
located on both sides of loading slot and on locking lug located 180 degrees oppo-
site loading slot.
(c) Push three locking lugs radially inward to bottom of dovetail slot. Locking lugs will
be sufficiently below surface of retaining slot to permit circumferential movement.
CAUTION
Locking lug access hole, located 180 degrees from loading slot, shall be
taped to prevent locking lug reseating while moving blades, or part dam-
age may result.
NOTE
The INCO 718 stages 3-9 HPC spool has two locking lugs and four
locking blades per stage. The locking slots 180 degrees circumferen-
tially from the loading slot on stages 6-9 were eliminated. For INCO
718 stages 3-9 HPC spools, disregard step 15.B.(2)(d).
(d) Cover access hole of locking lug, located 180 degrees from loading slot, with tape
to prevent possible resetting of lug into locking slot when blades are moved.
CAUTION
• Do not use unauthorized penetrating oils, or corrosion and pre-
mature failure may result.
• Impact tools should not be used to move blades, because of potential
damage to blades and spool.
NOTE
Penetrating oil may be used on blade dovetails to aid removal of blades.
(e) Rotate entire stage of blades circumferentially (in either direction) approximately
one-half width of blade platform, until locking blade is in line with loading slot.
Blades may be moved by lightly tapping on blade airfoil base with plastic drift. Use
care not to distort or damage airfoil.
(f) Remove blade by pulling straight out of loading slot.
(g) Slide locking lug to loading slot and remove.
(h) Remove adjacent locking blade and locking lug per steps (d) and (e).
Change 6 33
34 Change 6
CAUTION
Failure to identify balance weight positions may result in rotor
imbalance.
(i) Continue moving blades up to loading slot and removing. If installed, remove
seal plugs from between stages 3-5 blades. Discard seal plugs.
(j) Using marking pen, mark balance weights by position, so weights can be
installed at same position when replacement blades are installed.
(1) Before drilling, try using the shock bar to unlock the screw. Soak lug with L1
Liquid Wrench. Shock lug using shock bar, provided in kit, and a small ball peen
hammer.
(2) If step (1) fails, use an easy out to remove setscrew as follows:
(a) Find inscribed metal depth guide block, for easy out drilling, in kit.
Determine what color chuck extender to use, based on the stage being
worked.
(b) Insert smaller diameter drill bit into chuck extender and tighten extender.
Ensure proper depth by inserting bit into hole in depth guide that corresponds
to stage being worked.
(3) If step (2) fails, drill out threads down to locking feature and use easy out as
follows:
(a) Use inscribed depth guide block for thread clearing and find correct chuck
to use.
(b) Insert larger diameter drill bit and check depth using depth guide. Drill into
screw until bottom of chuck extender touches lug.
D. In stages 6-14, check and remove wire seals, if required, as follows (figures 13 and14):
(1) Measure gap between ends of wire seal. Maximum serviceable gap between wire
seal ends is 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Check one gap per stage on stages 6-10 and
three gaps per stage on stages 11-14.
Change 6 35
(2) Remove and discard wire seal if gap is greater than 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
CAUTION
All stage 1 through 6 blades shall be kept together as engine sets; there
are different rotor grind methods used on HPC rotors, resulting in dif-
ferent blade lengths for stage 1 through 6 blades.
A. Different grind methods used on HPC rotors, result in different blade lengths for stage 1
through 6 blades. Keep all stage 1 through 6 blades together as engine sets.
B. Visually inspect stage 3–14 rotor blades per table 4 and figures 15 through 18.
15
Table 4. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blades Visual Inspection
36 Change 6
Change 6 37
38 Change 6
Change 6 39
40 Change 6
Figure 16. MHPC Rotor Stage 3–7 Blade Airfoil Tip Clang - Area D
Change 6 41
Figure 17. HPC Rotor Stage 3-14 Blade Airfoil Tip Erosion
42 Change 6
NOTE
If individual blades are being replaced, select blades per step A. If an entire
stage of blades is being replaced, calculate blade position per step B.
(1) Select replacement blades with length equal to or slightly longer than blade being
replaced. Take measurement from bottom of blade dovetail. If replaced blade length can-
not be determined, use length of shorter of two adjacent blades or 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
less than the longer blade, whichever is longer.
CAUTION
Blade part numbers shall be checked before installation. New blade must
have same part number as old blade or comparable number per Illus-
trated Parts Breakdown (IPB), GEK 105060.
(2) Select replacement blades of similar platform width distribution of removed blades.
Check that replacement blades have correct part number per IPB, GEK 105060.
Change 6 43
(1) Using marking pen, number all replacement blades, starting with two of four
locking blades and ending with last two locking blades.
(2) Pan weigh replacement blades and record weight on blade position map.
See figure 19.
NOTE
A. If stages 6-10 wire seals have been removed, install as follows (figure 20):
(1) Cut wire seals to completely encircle applicable seal groove forward and aft of
dovetail slot.
(2) Install wire seals into grooves forward and aft of dovetail slot. Position wire seals
so seal end gaps are minimum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) away from dovetail
loading slot.
(3) Trim ends of wire seals so end gap is within limits of table 5. Remove burrs and
sharp edges so ends are smooth and blunt. Apply petrolatum, as required, to hold
wire seals in place.
(4) Install two blades into dovetail loading slot and move blades around rotor to seat
wire seals. Position blade approximately 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) from ends of wire
seals and ensure end gap is within limits of table 5.
(5) Remove two blades from dovetail slot and ensure wire seals are seated in grooves.
B. If stages 11-14 wire seals have been removed, install as follows (figure 20):
(1) Cut each wire seal into three sections, each 23.00-26.00 inches (584.2-660.4 mm)
long.
(2) Install wire seal segments into seal groove forward and aft of dovetail slot.
Position two wire seal segments so end gap between two segments is minimum of
2.00 inches(50.8 mm) away from dovetail loading slot. Position remaining wire
seal segment 180 degrees from blade loading slot.
44 Change 6
Change 6 45
46 Change 6
(3) Trim ends of wire seal segments so each end gap is within limits of table 5. Remove
burrs and sharp edges so ends are smooth and blunt. Apply petrolatum, as required,
to hold seals in place.
(4) Install six blades into dovetail loading slot and move the blades all the way around
rotor to seat wire seals. Position blade approximately 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) from end
of each wire seal and ensure end gaps are within limits of table 5.
(5) Remove six blades from dovetail slot and ensure wire seals are seated in grooves.
Table 5. Stages 6-14 Wire Seal End Gap Limits
NOTE
• The steel A-286 and titanium HPC spools have three locking
slots per stage in stages 6-9 and two locking slots per stage in
stages 3-5 and stages 10-14. See figure 13 and figure 14.
• The new INCO 718 stages 3-9 HPC spool eliminated the
locking slot, locking lug, and two locking blades located
180 degrees circumferentially from the loading slot on
stages 6-9. Two standard blades per stage were added to fill
this gap. On the INCO 718 stages 3-9 HPC spool measure
only one accumulative gap per stage and refer to table 6 and
table 7 for blade quantities and accumulated clearance
requirements.
(1) Using marking pen, mark location of locking slots and loading slots on OD of spool
or disk. See figures 13 and 14. Locking slots will not be visible after blades are
installed.
Change 6 47
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(2) Clean dovetail slots with isopropyl alcohol to aid in blade installation.
(a) Install locking lug in locking slot located 180 degrees opposite loading slot.
See figure 14. Slope of locking lug top surface must follow slope of blade
platform.
NOTE
4 After setscrew is properly torqued, make sure locking lug is flush with or
below top of blade platform. Replace locking lug and/or setscrew if lug
protrudes above blade platform.
48 Change 6
CAUTION
• Failure to install balance weights in required locations will result
in rotor imbalance.
(4) In stages 6-9, install locking blade on each side of locking lug with blade platform
cutout facing locking lug. Check blade part number and install blades to fill stage
requirements of table 6. Maintain blades and balance weights in original locations or
as indicated by GE computer blade balance program, Bladeopt.
(5) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, check blade part number and install blades to fill stage
requirements of table 6. Maintain blades and balance weights in original locations or
as indicated by GE computer blade balance program, Bladeopt.
NOTE
Seal plugs are no longer installed between blade dovetails. Seal plugs
have been deleted.
NOTE
(6) After all standard blades (nonlocking) are installed, install one locking blade on
each side of loading slot, with platform cutout facing toward loading slot. Install
locking slug on each side of loading slot. Slope of locking lug top surface must fol-
low slope of blade platform.
(7) Align locking lugs with locking slots and turn setscrew to raise locking slots. If
locking blade platform overhangs locking slot and prevents locking lug
engagement, replace standard blades (nonlocking blades) with blades having more
narrow platforms until overhang condition is corrected.
Change 6 49
(a) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, measure total accumulated platform clearance as
shown in figure 13. Slide one locking blade against locking lug and slide
remaining blades against locking lug on opposite side of loading slot.
Accumulated clearance shall be within limits of table 7.
(b) In stages 6-9, measure total accumulated platform clearance two places on
each side of loading slot as shown in figure 14. Slide one locking blade against
the locking lug and slide remaining blades against locking lug 180 degrees
opposite loading slot. Accumulated clearance shall be within limits of table 7.
(11) Check each blade for overlapping (shingling) of platforms. Replace any blade
that exhibits a tendency to overlap (shingle). Replacement blades must weigh
within 0.5 gram of removed blade.
50 Change 6
NOTE
Stages 3-5 and 10-14 have two locking lugs. Stages 6-9 have three locking
lugs.
(a) In stages 3-5 and 10-14, loosen locking lugs on both sides of loading slot and push
them to bottom of locking slots.
(b) In stages 6-9, loosen two locking lugs on both sides of loading slot and one located
180 degrees opposite loading slot, and push them to bottom of
locking slots.
CAUTION
Locking lug access hole, located 180 degrees from loading slot, shall be
taped to prevent locking lug reseating while moving blades, or part dam-
age may result.
(c) In stages 6-9, place tape over access hole for locking lug 180 degrees from loading
slot, to prevent lug from engaging slot while moving blades.
(d) Install locking blade with blade platform cutout facing a locking lug.
Change 6 51
CAUTION
Impact tools should not be used to move blades, because of potential
damage to blades and spool.
(14) Verify that locking blades between locking lugs can move freely and indepen-
dently of each other. If locking blades cannot be installed or if they are clamped
together by lugs, switch position of locking blades and lugs in order to find a
sequence of blades and lugs which allows free movement of locking blades
between lugs. Replacement blades must weigh within 0.5 gram for stage 3,
0.3 gram for stages 4 and 5, and 0.2 gram for stages6-16 of removed blades.
NOTE
There are three locking lugs in stages 6-9 and two locking lugs in
stages 3-5 and 10-14.
(15) Ensure all blade locking lugs are installed and tight.
52 Change 6
WARNING
CAUTION
• Titanium parts shall not be blend repaired with tools such as grinding
wheels, files, stones, or emery cloths that have been used to repair
other types of metal. Stages 1 through 5 blades are titanium.
NOTE
A. Use smooth file, not over 8.0 inches (203 mm) long, or emery cloth to remove nicks and
dents when removal of considerable material is necessary. File or blend in longitudinal direc-
tion (parallel with airfoil length). Power tools may be used for initial heavy removal of mate-
rial such as excessive tip curl. Final blend and polish 0.020–0.030 inch (0.51–0.76 mm) must
be accomplished by hand.
Change 6 53
CAUTION
All blend repair and polishing shall be done in direction parallel with the
blade leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for final polish or
finish blending.
B. Use medium stone on any areas which have been blended with file or emery cloth, and on
areas containing small nicks and dents.
C. Use fine emery cloth and/or fine abrasive stone to polish blended area until finish looks and
feels like original.
D. Blend leading edges to as near original configuration as possible. Blend trailing edges to
remove all sharp edges. See figure 22.
54 Change 6
Change 6 55
NOTE
On stages 2 through 14 rotor blades, if both leading and trailing edges are
blended, the maximum material removed at the tip shall not exceed the
amount shown in figure 21, sheet 2.
A. Blend leading and trailing edges to within maximum repairable limits defined in
figure 21. Contour blended edges per figure 22.
B. When blending out cracks blend away enough material to remove the effect and
continue to blend an additional 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
CAUTION
All blend repair and polishing shall be done in direction parallel with the
blade leading or trailing edges. Do not use power tools for final polish or
finish blending.
C. Power tools may be used to shorten time required to remove metal but hand bench last
0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
NOTE
Width of blend shall not exceed 50 percent of the blade chord (figure
21).
(1) Blend airfoils to within limits in figure 23. Restrict blending to leading and trailing
edges outboard of area 3.2 inches (81 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend leading
edges only if required to meet section contour.
(2) After blending, minimum trailing edge thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) is required.
Minimum tip chord remaining is 2.33 inches (59.2 mm).
56 Change 6
Change 6 57
58 Change 6
(1) Blend airfoils to within limits in figure 23. Restrict blending to leading and trailing
edges outboard of area 3.2 inches (81 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend leading
edges only if required to meet section contour.
(2) After blending, minimum trailing edge thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) is required.
Minimum tip chord of Y inches is required.
(1) Blend airfoils to within limits in figure 21. Restrict blending to leading and trailing
edges outboard of area 2.50 inches (63.5 mm) above top of blade platform. Blend
leading edges only if required to meet section contour.
(2) After blending, minimum trailing edge thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) is required.
Minimum tip chord remaining is 2.439 inches (61.95 mm).
(3) No blending is allowed 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) above or below midspan shroud or on
midspan shroud within 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) of blade airfoil.
A. Whenever possible, remove damage on leading and/or trailing edge corners by blending to
smooth radius. Remove as little metal as possible. Do not exceed limits of figure 23.
B. If both corners are damaged, blend out damage; do not exceed radius of 1/10 blade chord
length for each corner. If only one corner is damaged, blend out damage at leading or trailing
edge corner; do not exceed a radius of 1/10 blade chord length for each corner.
Change 6 59
NOTE
This procedure may have been performed on blades that have been blended
to maximum limits on the leading and/or trailing edges and/or tip corners.
CAUTION
B. Remove tips bent over 15 degrees by blending. Do not exceed limits of figure 22.
C. Repair blend nicks, gouges, dents and cracks by removing damaged metal per
paragraph 19 and within limits of figure 21. Length of removal will be governed by
figure 22.
60 Change 6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) STATOR
OUTLET GUIDE VANES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
NOTE
HPC outlet guide vanes are located in the compressor rear frame.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure
compressor (HPC) stator outlet guide vanes.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Upper and Lower Stator SWP 2411 01
Case Opening/Closing
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Rotor WP 2413 00
Blades Replacement
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Anti-Seize Compound Milk-of-Magnesia
(Unflavored)
Cloth, Abrasive Aluminum Oxide,
Various Grit
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Oil, Engine Lubricating MIL-L-23699
Stone, Abrasive Local Purchase
Stone, Sharpening Fed Spec SS-S-736
Tape, Masking Local Purchase
Nomenclature Specification
Tape, Plastic NT-580, Patco
No. 110-50, or
Shurtape PC-623
Thread Lubricant GP460
5. Referenced Procedures.
6. Expendable Material.
7. SPD Information.
None.
A. Open upper or lower HPC stator case per SWP 2411 01.
B. Remove stage 14 and, if required, stage 13 blades to gain access to OGVs per
WP 2413 00.
WARNING
(1) Bend OGV liner clips down (radially inward). See figure 1.
(2) Unseat OGV liner assemblies from OGV liner rails in CRF assembly. Secure
OGVs into liners using masking tape at end of liner that is not keyed.
WARNING
(3) Using No. 10-32 thread jackscrew, lubricated with oil, remove OGV liner
assemblies from CRF assembly one at a time.
(6) Remove four insulation blankets from between OGV liner rails in CRF assembly.
NOTE
A. Remove high metal by blending down to the machined surface. Use abrasive stones or
papers. Coarse grades of abrasive may be used for fast removal of metal. Then use a
fine grade abrasive for the finish.
B. Blend to remove damage with a fine file, abrasive cloth or abrasive stone as follows
(figure 3):
(1) Blend and polish in a longitudinal direction, parallel with the airfoil of the blades.
(2) The leading and trailing edge radius of the blend repaired area must conform to
the original contour with the airfoil of the blades (figure 4) .
(3) When blending on an area involving a radius, maintain the radius as specified or
as near as possible to the original radius.
CAUTION
Power blending must be accomplished in such a manner that
no excessive heat and thermal stresses will be generated.
C. If a large or deep blend is required, blend to remove the damage with a slow speed
power tool to shorten the time required for repair as follows (figure 3):
(1) Blend and polish in a longitudinal direction, parallel with the airfoil of the blades.
(2) The leading and trailing edge radius of the blend repaired area must conform to
the original contour (figure 4) .
(3) When blending on an area involving a radius, maintain the radius as specified or
as near as possible to the original radius.
10
11
CAUTION
Do not force OGVs into liners. OGVs should assemble without addi-
tional force. If OGVs cannot be installed easily, check for correct
vane orientation.
NOTE
• All dimensions involving OGV key in liner are taken with key bot-
tomed in slot.
(1) Install forward and aft vane dovetail liners into OGV liner as follows:
(a) Install vane dovetail liners into OGV liner per figure 5.
(b) With OGV key bottomed into slot in OGV liner, push dovetail liners so liners
are against OGV key. Check vane dovetail liners are 0.005-0.050 inch
(0.13-1.27 mm) inside end of OGV liner.
NOTE
(a) Install one 3-vane OGV segment into end opposite key of each liner and slide
to key end of liner.
(b) Install 25 OGVs into each of OGV liners. Ensure all vane leading edges are
forward.
(c) Check OGVs extend 0.000-0.012 inch (0.00-0.30 mm) beyond end of OGV
liner with vanes rotated against OGV key and with OGV key bottomed in slot
against OGV liner. Use alternate wide and narrow OGVs to achieve this
dimension.
(d) Secure OGVs in liners with plastic tape until ready for installation into CRF
assembly.
12
WARNING
(1) Install four insulation blankets between OGV liner rails. Use adhesive tape to
hold insulation blankets in place. Do not align butt ends of insulation blankets
with butt ends of OGV liners.
(2) Locally crush insulation blanket at slots in CRF rail to permit engagement of key.
Tearing of insulation blanket skin is not permitted.
(3) Using OGV liner assemblies as guide, mark locations on CRF that require liner
clips. Use marking pen.
(4) Install one OGV liner clip onto each marked location. Prebend clip and snap into
place. Liner clip should protrude forward after installed over rail.
NOTE
(5) Install each OGV liner assembly, engaging liner key into slot in CRF rail. Rotate
liner counterclockwise (before seating), forward looking aft, so key contacts slot
in CRF rail.
NOTE
Ensure that OGV liner clips protrude through slots of the OGV liner
assembly.
(6) Seat OGV liner assembly onto OGV liner rails by lightly tapping with plastic or
rubber mallet.
(7) Bend OGV liner clips outboard to secure OGV liner assembly into CRF. Tabs
must not protrude forward of CRF forward flange.
(9) Check for radial looseness of OGV liner assemblies with 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
feeler stock.
13
(10) Assure forward liner does not protrude axially forward of CRF forward flange.
(11) Measure gap between adjacent liners at four locations. Minimum gap shall be
0.044 inch (1.12 mm).
(12) If gap between adjacent liners is less than minimum, verify liner key is in contact
with CRF rail slot. Obtain gap by reworking end of liner without key. Rework per
Chapter 11, Hand Blending
(13) Use feeler stock to verify minimum gap of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) between OGVs
and CRF forward inner diffuser.
(14) If minimum gap between OGVs and CRF forward inner diffuser is less than
minimum, rework vane tips to obtain 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) clearance. Rework
vane tips per Chapter 11, Hand Blending.
D. Close upper and lower HPC stator cases per SWP 2411 01.
14
15/(16 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSOR (HPC) STAGE 11
CHECK VALVE - VALVE FLAPPER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
This work package contains instructions to replace the worn or missing valve flappers, hinge pin,
and stop pin in the stage 11 check valve.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
5. Referenced Procedures.
6. Expendable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Wire, Weld, Inco 625 Inco 625 weld wire
(AMS 5837)
7. SPD Information.
A. Remove hinge pin, stop pin, and worn valve flappers from check valve assembly as
follows (figure 1):
1
WARNING
Do not breathe the particles from blending or let the particles touch
you. The particles from blending can cause damage, injury, or irrita-
tion to you. Use personal protection equipment. Use local mechanical
exhaust ventilation or an approved respirator.
CAUTION
(1) Blend to remove welds from ends of hinge pin and stop pin (four locations) per
Chapter 11.
(2) Use pin punch and mallet to drive hinge and stop pins out of check valve housing.
(3) If necessary, ream hinge pin hole or stop pin hole in flange to the correct diamter.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to the skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
C. Using isopropyl alcohol and a clean cloth, clean ID and OD flange surfaces of check valve
housing. Replace soiled cloth with new ones until cloth shows no dirt.
D. Spot-fluorescent-penetrant-inspect check valve housing flange, hinge and stop pin holes
and ID surfaces of housing flange where valve flappers are removed per Chapter 11.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to the skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
E. Using isopropyl alcohol and a clean cloth, clean ID and OD flange surfaces of check
valve housing. Replace soiled cloth with new ones until cloth shows no dirt.
F. Inspect for fluorescent penetrant under a black light, make sure no penetrant is seen on
part. Repeat step E. as necessary to remove fluorescent penetrant.
(1) Measure dimension AA of check valve housing and record the dimension. Refer
to figure 1.
(1) Install two new valve flappers, P/N 1978M21P01, into flange and align hinges
with hinge pin hole.
(2) Install replacement hinge pin through flange housing and valve flappers hinges.
(6) Ensure valve flappers open and close freely by gravitational force. The flapper
valves must not bind or stick.
(7) Ensure valve flappers seal against sealing surfaces of the flange.
WARNING
Do not weld if you are not approved (trained and qualified). Use
personal protection equipment and approved safety procedures.
(8) Weld the ends of hinge pin and stop pin at four locations. Use AMS 5837 weld
wire. Make sure pins do not extend more than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) from check
valve housing.
NOTE
(9) Visually inspect welds using 10X magnifying glass and white light to verify that
welds provide an airtight seal that will not permit leakage from pin holes. No
ndications are permitted.
E. Inspect for fluorescent penetrant under a black light, make sure no penetrant is seen on
part. Repeat step D. as necessary to remove fluorescent penetrant.
F. Inspect check valve assembly. Make sure valve flappers operate freely. No binding in
open or closed position is permitted. Make sure that valve flappers seal against the
sealing face of check valve flange assembly.
10
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
COMBUSTION CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the combustion chamber.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Beeswax Local Purchase
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpies T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 6
WARNING
CAUTION
(1) Disconnect ignition lead from igniter plug adapter. See figure 1. Momentarily ground
ignition lead to remove any residual electrical charge.
Change 6 3
NOTE
Some engines may have only one igniter plug at 3:00 o'clock position
and a blank off plug at 5:00 o'clock position.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) for the other igniter plug, or blank off plug at 5:00 o'clock
position.
(2) Back off eight screws on aft side of ring so that pins do not protrude through
forward face of ring. See section C-C.
(3) Loosen nine handknobs and adjust clamps to ensure pins will clear combustion
liner. See section A-A.
(4) Install lifteye into threaded hole at top vertical centerline of ring. Tighten lifteye to
420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(5) Connect an overhead hoist onto lifteye. Lift removal fixture into position on
compressor rear frame (CRF) aft flange. Pin on forward face of ring shall engage
hole at top vertical centerline of CRF.
(6) Install three guides and bolts. Secure guides against inner diameter of outer liner
by tightening bolts finger-tight. See section A-A.
(7) Adjust nine clamps so that pins engage in combustor outer liner. Tighten
handknob to lock ring into place. See section B-B.
WARNING
(2) Connect an overhead hoist to horizontal lift fixture link. Raise lift adapter into
position on aft flange of combustor inner liner.
(3) Using six bolts, secure lift adapter to aft flange of combustor inner liner. Tighten
bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
4 Change 6
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
Change 6 7
(1) Turn eight screws in by hand to seat pins against CRF aft flange. See figure 2,
section C-C.
CAUTION
(2) Tighten each screw 1/2 turn, in sequence, until combustion chamber disengages
from CRF.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(3) Remove combustion chamber and place onto bench, forward end down. Remove
tooling.
(1) Remove eight screws and washers from forward face of ring.
(2) Back off eight screws on aft side of ring so that pins do not protrude through
forward face of ring.
(3) Loosen nine handknobs and adjust clamps to ensure pins will clear combustor
liner.
(4) Install lifteye in threaded hole at top vertical centerline of ring. Tighten lifteye to
420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(5) Place ring onto combustion chamber aft flange. TOP VERT CL scribe line shall
pass through notch at top vertical centerline of combustion chamber aft flange.
(6) Install three guides and bolts. Secure guides against inner diameter of outer liner
by tightening bolts finger-tight. See section A-A.
(7) Adjust nine clamps so that pins engage in combustor outer liner. Tighten
handknobs to lock ring in place. See section B-B.
8 Change 6
(1) Position lift adapter onto combustor liner. Tube shall be positioned at top vertical center-
line.
(3) Using quick-release pin, attach horizontal lift fixture, 1C9362, onto lift adapter. Adjust
CG, as required.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
(1) Connect an overhead hoist to horizontal lift fixture link. Lift and turn combustion cham-
ber to horizontal position. Align combustion chamber with CRF.
(2) Position swirlers in center of swirler cups. Apply a small amount of beeswax at two
places on each swirler to retain swirlers in position. See figure 4.
4
Change 6 9
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged
contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(3) Apply a light coat of lubricating oil to inner conical surface of each swirler.
(4) Inspect interior area of CRF for dirt and foreign material. No dirt or foreign
materials are allowed.
WARNING
(5) Carefully move combustion chamber forward into CRF aligning notch in outer flange
with pin in CRF aft flange rabbet. Ensure that igniter plug ferrules are aligned and that
swirlers pass over fuel nozzles. If difficulty is encountered, heat CRF aft flange using
heat gun.
(6) Install eight screws and washers through CRF aft flange into forward face of ring. See
figure 2, section D-D.
(7) Loosen handknobs and adjust clamps to disengage pins from outer liner. See
section A-A.
(8) Tighten each screw 1/2 turn, in sequence, until outer liner aft flange is flush with, or
slightly aft of, CRF aft flange aft face. See section D-D. Ensure that fuel nozzles are
engaged in swirler openings.
CAUTION
(11) Remove eight screws and washers. Remove installation fixture. Store screws and washers
in thread holes in ring.
(12) Install bolts through CRF aft flange with nuts and oversize washers to support combus-
tion chamber until stage 1 HPT nozzle is installed.
10 Change 6
(3) Install igniter plug into igniter plug adapter. See figure 1.
WARNING
CAUTION
(4) Install ignition lead over igniter plug adapter. Tighten coupling nut to 23-27 lb ft
(31.2-36.6 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire coupling nut.
Change 6 11
12 Change 6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STAGE 1 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) NOZZLE
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 1 high pressure
turbine (HPT) nozzle.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Replacement WP 2610 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
NOTE
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
A. Required Material
B. The following material may be required in the conduct of this work package.
GE recommends that the following material be available:
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
(1) Remove 60 screws that secure aft air seal onto stationary seal support. If
necessary, heat screws using heat gun to facilitate removal.
(2) Remove 72 screws that secure air cover baffles and aft air seal onto stage 1 nozzle
support. If necessary, heat screws using heat gun to facilitate removal. Remove 24
air cover baffles and aft air seal.
(2) Remove 54 nuts that secure stationary seal support onto nozzle support inner
mounting flange. Use flex or universal joint on socket or torque adapter, 2C14290,
to prevent out-of-position stress on studs.
CAUTION
Uneven removal of stationary seal support may cause binding and
damage to recoup tubes and tube brackets. The following removal
sequence shall be followed to prevent binding and tube damage.
(a) Coat threads of jackscrews, 1C6804, with thread lubricant. Install three
equally spaced jackscrews into inner mounting flange of stationary seal
support. Run in jackscrews until they contact compressor rear frame (CRF)
inner seal support flange.
(c) Repeat step (b) until stationary seal support is free of CRF.
(4) Remove six piston rings from recoup tubes. Discard piston rings.
WARNING
(1) Position lift fixture, 2C14695, at aft end of stage 1 HPT nozzle using lift adapter,
1C9362, and an overhead hoist. See figure 3. Secure lift fixture onto stage 1
nozzle support using eight screws provided with lift fixture. Tighten screws to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Adjust center of gravity (CG) as required.
3
(2) Remove 30 bolts that secure stage 1 nozzle support onto combustor inner liner aft
support flange. See figure 4.
4
CAUTION
(3) Coat threads of jackscrews, 1C6804, with thread lubricant. Install three equally
spaced jackscrews into nozzle support inner mounting flange of stage 1 nozzle
support. Tighten jackscrews evenly, in small increments, to release stage 1 HPT
nozzle.
WARNING
(2) Using 0.250-28 thread jackscrews, 1C6804P04, lubricated with lubricating oil,
remove No. 5R bearing air/oil seal from No. 5R bearing housing.
(3) Remove and discard preformed packing from ring groove in forward end of
No. 5R bearing air/oil seal.
8
10
Figure 5. No. 5R Bearing Air/Oil Seal and No. 5R Bearing Housing Removal
11
CAUTION
(1) Remove safety wire and remove three bolts and two clamps that secure
No. 5R bearing lube manifold onto No. 5R bearing housing.
(3) Remove safety wire and remove seven bolts that secure No. 5R bearing oil shield
onto No. 5R bearing housing. Remove oil shield.
WARNING
CAUTION
Take care during the removal of the No. 5R bearing housing to prevent
shifting aft of the aft sump housing and unseating of the sump joint
piston ring. Use the following jackscrew procedure to assure that the
aft sump housing is not disturbed.
(4) Using 0.375-24 thread jackscrews, 1C9150P04, and 0.250-28 thread jackscrews,
1C6804P04, lubricated with lubricating oil, remove No. 5R bearing housing as
follows:
12
NOTE
(c) Continue tightening jackscrews in sequence specified [step (a) then step (b)],
tightening jackscrews three revolutions each time, until No. 5 bearing
housing is free.
(5) Remove and discard preformed packing from outer diameter of No. 5 bearing
housing.
Use care in removing bolts and nuts. Do not drop bolts and nuts
into CRF, or CRF damage could result.
(1) Remove 12 slab-head bolts, nuts, and six high pressure rotor (HPR) brackets from
CRF aft inner flange.
(2) Remove remaining 42 slab-head bolts and nuts from CRF aft inner flange.
See figure 6.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
A. Lubricate threads and mate faces of slab-head bolts and nuts with lubricating oil.
B. Install brackets by inserting slab-head bolts through bracket and forward side of
flange. Flat side of bolthead fits against inside diameter of inner casing.
13
14
See figure 7.
7
WARNING
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
B. Using heat gun, heat aft end of CRF assembly aft sump.
C. Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Install packing into ring groove of
No. 5R bearing housing.
D. Install No. 5R bearing housing into CRF assembly. Align clearance hole in housing
with No. 5R bearing forward lube nozzle in CRF assembly at approximately
10:00 o'clock position, aft looking forward.
(1) Install six nuts onto equally spaced bolts on outer flange of bearing housing. Run
nuts down until they contact flange face.
(2) Install six bolts, equally spaced, into inner flange of bearing housing. Run bolts
down until they touch flange face.
(3) Turn nuts three turns each, then turn bolts three turns each.
(4) Repeat step (3) until bearing housing assembly is seated. Tighten bolts to
355 lb in. (40.1 N·m) and nuts to 225 lb in. (25.4 N·m) of torque. Remove nuts
and bolts.
15
16
CAUTION
• To assure proper assembly, lube manifold shall be installed
after the bearing housing is fully seated in sump.
WARNING
(2) Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Install preformed packing onto end
of lube manifold.
(3) Insert end of lube manifold and preformed packing into forward No. 5R lube
nozzle. Align lube manifold clamps and mounting pad to three lugs on aft side of
bearing housing. Clamps are attached at two top lugs with flat of clamps aft.
(4) Hold lube manifold into forward No. 5 lube nozzle and secure with three bolts.
Check drop between aft face of housing and aft side of tube. Check drop at
clamps and near bend in tube where it turns forward. Maximum drop between aft
face of housing and aft side of tube is 0.290 inch (7.366 mm).
(5) Tighten three bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(1) Place petrolatum onto No. 5R bearing rollers, opposite lube nozzle.
(2) Connect dry air supply to oil inlet fitting located on No. 8 strut.
17
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure. Eye
protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines and fittings.
(3) Pressurize manifold and check for impingement on bearing rollers. If jet doesn't
impinge on bearing rollers, loosen, adjust, and retighten lube manifold.
WARNING
(4) Check for leakage where lube manifold plugs into forward jet by applying
lubricating oil to fitting. No leaks allowed
(1) Install No. 5R bearing oil shield onto aft face of No. 5R bearing housing with
cutouts around clamps of lube manifold.
WARNING
(2) Apply lubricating oil to threads of seven No. 5R bearing oil shield bolts. Secure
oil shield with bolts.
(3) Tighten seven bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
18
WARNING
A. Coat preformed packing with lubricating oil. Coat threads of 18 bolts with thread
lubricant.
B. Install preformed packing into ring groove at forward end of No. 5R bearing air/oil
seal.
C. Install No. 5R bearing air/oil seal over No. 5 bearing housing assembly, aligning top
centerlines. Use drift pin to align holes in seal with holes in bearing housing.
D. Apply lubricating oil to threads of No. 5R bearing air/oil seal bolts and secure air/oil
seal with bolts. Tighten bolts alternately to 340-360 lb in. (38.5-40.6 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire bolts in groups of two.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 1 HPT nozzle part number is correct per IPB, GEK
105060 before installation or damage to engine could result.
A. Check slab-head bolts for security. See figure 4. Tighten nut to 20-40 lb in.
(2.3-4.5 N·m) of torque if bolt is loose.
B. Install stage 1 HPT nozzle as follows:
(1) Position lift fixture, 2C14695, onto aft end of stage 1 HPT nozzle using lift
adapter, 1C9362, and an overhead hoist. See figure 3. Secure lift fixture to stage 1
nozzle support using eight screws provided with lift fixture. Tighten screws to
55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Adjust CG as required.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift
parts. Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally
move or fall, they can cause an injury or kill you.
(2) Lift stage 1 HPT nozzle into position on combustor. See figure 4. Align three
equally spaced holes in stage 1 nozzle support with those at top vertical centerline
of combustor. Borescope vane shall be at 4:30 o'clock position.
19
(3) Seat stage 1 nozzle support onto No. 5 bearing housing using 12 equally spaced
slave nuts. Tighten nuts alternately, and evenly, until all nuts are seated. Tighten
nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto washer faces and threads of 30 bolts that secure stage
1 nozzle support onto combustor inner liner aft support flange.
(5) Install 30 bolts that secure stage 1 nozzle support onto combustor inner liner aft
support flange. Tighten bolts to 110-120 lb in. (12.5-13.5 N·m) of torque.
(6) Verify that outer leaf seals (360 degree radius) extend past combustor lip.
See figure 8.
20
(1) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto bottom of bolthole counterbores
in forward flange of stationary seal support.
WARNING
(2) Apply light coat of lubricating oil onto six new piston rings, P/N 1754M91P01.
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
(4) Heat forward flange of stationary seal support using heat gun.
(5) Install stationary seal support, aligning position mark made at removal with top
vertical centerline of CRF.
(7) Secure stationary seal support to nozzle support inner mounting flange using 54
nuts. Use flex or universal joint on socket or torque adapter, 2C14290, to prevent
out-of-position stress on studs. Tighten nuts alternately, and evenly, to seat
stationary seal support. Tighten nuts to 400-450 lb in. (45.2-50.8 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install aft air seal onto stationary seal support so part number is at 12:00 o'clock
position.
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto washer faces and threads of screws that secure aft air
seal.
(3) Install 10 equally spaced screws into inner flange of aft air seal. Tighten screws
alternately, and evenly, until all are seated.
(4) Install remaining screws into inner flange of aft air seal. Finger-tighten screws.
21
(5) Install one air cover baffle centered at 12:00 o'clock position onto outer flange of
aft air seal and secure using three screws. Finger-tighten screws.
(6) Install remaining 23 air cover baffles and secure using screws. Finger-tighten
screws.
(7) Check run-on torque of all aft air seal retaining screws. If run-on torque is less
than 3.5 lb in. (0.39 N·m), replace nut assembly (gang channel) per paragraph 13
and 14.
(8) Tighten all screws on inner and outer flanges of aft air seal to 70-80 lb in.
(8.0-9.0 N·m) of torque.
A. Install new nut assembly (gang channel) aligning nutplates with holes in part flange.
CAUTION
Do not use hammer and block to seat rivets. Part damage may result.
B. Install rivets so manufactured head sits flush in countersunk hole in part flange. Seat
rivets using rivet squeezer to secure nut assembly (gang channel).
22
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) MODULE
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the high pressure turbine
(HPT) module.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement WP 2710 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
Change 6 3
A. Remove the low pressure turbine (LPT) module to gain access per WP 2710 00.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between HPT module
and gas turbine per SWP 1913 02.
NOTE
After a HPTR seal fracture event in which pieces of the seal have
separated/liberated, the HPTR stage 2 disk can be exposed to elevated
temperatures. HPTR seal separation/liberation is an abnormal condi-
tion that requires special inspection and disposition.
C. If engine has experienced a HPTR seal fracture with any pieces of the seal
separating/liberating, perform the following:
• document total operating hours and cycles accumulated on seal since new
• photograph seal
D. Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts and bolts retaining aft air seals. Apply pen-
etrating oil onto threads of nuts and bolts retaining HPT to compressor rear frame
(CRF). Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark aft air seals to stage 2 HPT rotor disk. Remove
nuts and bolts retaining aft air seals and pressure tube/coupling nut onto stage 2
HPT rotor disk. Discard nuts.
(2) Remove assembled aft air seals from stage 2 HPT rotor disk using pull fixture,
2C14785, as follows (figure 1):
1
(a) Loosen clamp knobs on pull fixture, 2C14785, and move slide clamps
inward.
(b) Connect an overhead hoist and lift sling through pull fixture, 2C14785,
holes.
4 Change 6
Change 6 5
(c) Install pull fixture, 2C14785, over mid shaft so that rest pads are against stage 2 HPT
rotor disk. Move slide clamps outwards to engage aft air seal. Hand-tighten clamp
knobs to secure.
(f) Tighten jackscrews slowly and evenly to remove aft air seals.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
(3) Separate aft air seal from aft outer air seal using fixture, 2C14784, as follows
(figure 2):
(c) Tighten jackscrew to separate aft air seal from aft outer air seal.
6 Change 6
Figure 2. HPT Rotor Aft Outer Air Seal Remove Fixture, 2C14784
F. Install rotor locking feature of removal fixture, 1C9608, as follows (figure 3):
NOTE
(2) Thread inner support, 1C9608P10, onto aft end of mid shaft until fully seated.
(3) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, forward so that clamp plate, 2C14199P96, rests against
inner support.
(5) Install center shaft, 1C9608P05, so that male-threaded end engages threads on inside
diameter of compressor rotor aft shaft. Thread center shaft until seated against end of
compressor rotor aft shaft, then back off one-half turn.
3
Change 6 7
(6) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, aft so clamp plug is seated firmly against inside shoul-
der of center shaft, 1C9608P05. Lock into position using locknut, 2C14199P98. Tighten
clamp plug to 180 lb in. (20.3 N·m) of torque.
(2) Using clamp, 1C9626P06, and knob, 1C9626P08, secure leg, 1C9626P05, onto stage 2
HPT nozzle support flange. Hand-tighten knob.
(3) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, into pressure tube/coupling nut. Align torque tube so
splines engage splines on pressure tube/coupling nut.
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112B, or equivalent, so multiplier splines
engage splines on torque tube, 1C9626P03.
8 Change 6
Change 6 9
WARNING
Stand clear of engine when using torque multiplier. Torque in
excess of 20,000 lb ft (27,120 N·m) may be required to break cou-
pling nut loose. If parts should fail, they will do so with explosive
force and could cause serious injury.
NOTE
Pressure tube/coupling nut has right-hand threads.
(6) Remove pressure tube/coupling nut and shim (if installed). Remove torque mul-
tiplier and all components of torque adapter, 1C9626.
H. If same HPT rotor will be installed, matchmark stage 2 HPT disk rear face inner
diameter in line with X mark on aft surface of high pressure compressor (HPC) rotor
aft shaft using marking pen.
I. Measure from seating flange of stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft seal flange to aft surface of
HPC rotor aft shaft using seating check fixture, 2C14131. See figure 5. Record as
HSA (Before Disassembly) on HPT Worksheet. See figure 6.
1 .
10 Change 6
Change 6 11
CAUTION
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(2) Assemble lift adapter, 2C14199P53, lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36.
Attach to bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(3) Thread center plate, 2C14199P103, onto extension shaft, 2C14199P104. Thread assem-
bly into center shaft, 1C9608P05. See figure 7.
(4) If not already attached, install frame extension, 1C9608P02, onto frame, 2C14199P123.
12 Change 6
(5) Install frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, with support shaft, 2C14199P111, onto HPT
module as follows (figure 8):
(b) Attach lift fixture, 1C9608P11, with lifteye, 2C14199P38, onto frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02, at 6:00 o’clock and 12:00 o’clock positions. Secure with
thumbscrews.
(d) Attach overhead hoists onto lift fixture, 1C9608P11, and horizontal lift fixture,
1C9358 or 2C14220.
WARNING
(f) Move tooling into HPT module. Support shaft, 2C14199P111, shall fit into rabbet of
stage 2 disk aft flange. Frame, 2C14199P123, shall fit into rabbet of stage 2 HPT
nozzle support aft flange.
(g) Using 12 bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plates, 2C14199P27, secure support shaft,
2C14199P111, onto stage 2 disk aft flange. Tighten bolts, 2C14199P43, to
70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque.
(h) Using 30 bolts, 2C14199P43, six nut plates, 2C14199P34, and six nut plates,
2C14199P35, secure frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle
support aft flange. Tighten bolts, 2C14199P43, to 70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of
torque.
Change 6 13
14 Change 6
(6) Install guide tube, 1C9608P04, over center shaft, 1C9608P05, so that guide tube seats
against compressor rotor aft shaft. See figure 9.
(7) Apply light coat of petrolatum onto No. 5R bearing rollers. Push rollers outward in outer
race using finger pressure.
(8) Install 24 guide pins, 2C14199P33, in sets of three, through stage 2 HPT nozzle support
forward flange into blocks, 2C14199P26. Do not install pins, 2C14199P33, at 6:00
o’clock and 12:00 o’clock positions. See figure 8.
(a) Ensure that the HPTR shaft inner diameter and seating shoulder are clean and free of
foreign material or high metal.
(b) Install lift fixture, 2C14199P22, with lifteye, 2C14199P36, into aft end of pusher
shaft, 1C9608P03.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can
cause an injury or death.
(d) Insert pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, into aft end of HPT module until pusher shaft,
1C9608P03, contacts bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(e) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, clockwise (CW) so that slots in retainer nut align
with slots in support shaft, 2C14199P111, and lugs of pusher shaft, 1C9608P03.
(g) Rotate bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102, by hand, while holding pusher shaft,
1C9608P03, stationary to move pusher shaft forward until pusher shaft threads
engage bearing adapter shaft threads. Continue hand-tightening until pusher shaft,
1C9608P03, is fully threaded onto bearing adapter shaft.
6
(10) Remove lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36.
(11) Position spacer foot, 2C14199P65, aft of HPT. Secure spacer foot, 2C14199P65, onto
foot bracket, 2C14199P66, using quick-release pins, 2C14199P74.
(12) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8200, onto splines of pusher shaft, 1C9608P03.
Change 6 15
16 Change 6
(13) Install antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, over square shank of bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102. Using four hand knobs, 2C14199P23, secure antirotation strap,
2C14199P25, to frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02.
(14) Loosen clamp on lift fixture enough to permit support shaft, 2C14199P111, to rotate and
still support module and tooling.
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure. Eye
protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting lines
and fittings.
CAUTION
NOTE
• The HPT rotor and pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, will rotate counter-
clockwise (CCW) and move aft during removal. The frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02, and torque multiplier will not rotate,
but will move aft.
(1) Apply CCW input torque to torque multiplier. Pneumatic torque multiplier, Sweeney
Model 8202A, (in direct drive) may be used in combination with torque multiplier,
Sweeney Model 8200, at a pressure of 90 psi (621 kPa) to reduce installation time.
(2) Apply torque until the CRF flange is outside of the second scribe line on guide pins,
2C14199P33. See figure 8. This will ensure that the HPT module has moved aft far
enough.
(3) Install spacer foot, 2C14199P65, (figure 9) between CRF and HPT stator support. Secure
spacer foot to foot bracket, 2C14199P66, using quick-release pins, 2C14199P74.
Change 6 17
(4) Reverse rotation on torque multipliers a minimum of one full turn to relieve internal ten-
sion on tooling.
(5) Turn retaining nut, 2C14199P70, CCW to unlock pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, lugs.
(6) Reverse Sweeney torque multiplier two or three complete turns to release load on threads
between bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102, and pusher shaft, 1C9608P03.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
(a) Rotate bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102, in CW direction, aft looking forward.
(b) Attach lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36, to aft end of pusher shaft,
1C9608P03.
(c) Remove pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, from aft end of HPT module.
(9) Remove guide pins, 2C14199P33, and blocks, 2C14199P26. See figure 8.
(10) Install eight bolts, 2C14199P43, evenly spaced with bolt heads forward. Tighten bolts,
2C14199P43, to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(11) Tighten hand knob, 1C9358P31 or 2C14220P18, of HPT horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358
or 2C14220.
(12) Ensure that lift fixture, 1C9608P11, and horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220, are
still attached to frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, and overhead hoist for support while
moving HPT module. Tighten clamp on horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220, if
necessary.
(14) Install retaining sleeve, 2C14679P01, to secure No. 4B bearing inner race. Ensure that
retaining sleeve is firmly installed.
18 Change 6
NOTE
L. Install HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, as follows (figure 10):
(1) Lower HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, so the frame, 2C14199P123,
sits on the four vertical supports.
(2) Secure HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, by positioning four swing
clamps against frame.
CAUTION
The No. 5R bearing is a matched assembly. Ensure matched
bearing components are kept together as sets by serial numbers.
Mixing of serviceable matched bearing components may result
in engine damage.
(1) Pull heat shield from HPT forward shaft using puller, 2C14688.
(2) Install wrench, 2C14664, onto No. 5R bearing spanner nut. Attach torque multi-
plier, Sweeney Model 8200, or equivalent, to wrench.
Change 6 19
Figure 10. HPT Rotor Shaft Seals and Bearing Races Install/Remove Stand, 1C9417
20 Change 6
N. Install HPT module into shipping/storage stand, 2C14193, as follows (figure 11):
(1) Attach vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11, with lifteye, 2C14199P38, onto frame at
6:00 and 12:00 o'clock positions. Secure using thumbscrews.
CAUTION
(2) Ensure that weight of HPT module is supported by horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358
or 2C14220. Disconnect four swing clamps on support stand, 1C9417.
WARNING
(4) Connect a second hoist onto vertical lift fixture. Turn HPT module so forward end
is down. Remove horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220.
(5) Lower HPT module into shipping/storage stand, 2C14193. Secure case to leveling
screws using washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
(6) Install plug into aft bore of stage 2 HPT rotor disk. Secure plug using rod.
Safety-wire plug to rod.
Change 6 21
22 Change 6
NOTE
(1) Measure from aft face of forward HPT rotor shaft inner seating shoulder onto aft
face of stage 2 HPT disk aft mounting flange. Record as dimension J on HPT
Worksheet. See figure 12 and figure 6. For reference, dimension J should be
15.783-15.824 inches (400.89-401.92 mm). Remeasure dimension J if not within
range.
(2) Measure from aft face of No. 4B bearing inner race onto aft face of compressor
rotor aft shaft using seat check fixture, 2C14094. Record as dimension CCM on
HPT Worksheet. See figure 13 and figure 6. If dimension CCM is not within
8.921-8.948 inches (226.60-227.27 mm), No. 4B bearing inner race has backed
out, remeasure to validate.
8
Change 6 23
CAUTION
24 Change 6
Change 6 25
D. Install rotor locking feature of removal fixture, 1C9608, as follows (figure 16):
NOTE
Inner support, 1C9608P10; clamp plate, 2C14199P96; clamp plug, 2C14199P97; lock-
nut, 2C14199P98; and shoulder bolt, 2C14199P99, are maintained as an assembly.
(2) Thread inner support, 1C9608P10, onto aft end of mid shaft until fully seated.
(3) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, forward so that clamp plate, 2C14199P96, rests against
inner support.
(5) Install center shaft, 1C9608P05, so male-threaded end engages threads on inside diameter
of compressor rotor aft shaft. Thread center shaft until seated against end of compressor
rotor aft shaft, then back off one-half turn.
(6) Adjust clamp plug, 2C14199P97, aft so that clamp plate, 2C14199P96, is seated firmly
against inside shoulder of center shaft, 2C14199P29. Lock into position with locknut,
2C14199P98. Tighten clamp plug to 180 lb in. (20.3 N·m) of torque.
12
26 Change 6
CAUTION
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads of bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(2) Assemble lift adapter, 2C14199P53, lift fixture, 2C14199P22, and lifteye, 2C14199P36.
Attach to bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102.
(3) Thread center plate, 2C14199P103, into extension shaft, 2C14199P104. Thread assem-
bly into center shaft, 1C9608P05.
(5) Remove nuts and washers that secure HPT module onto shipping/storage module.
(6) Install frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02, with support shaft, 2C14199P111, onto HPT
module as follows:
(a) If not already attached, install frame extension, 1C9608P02, onto frame
2C14199P123.
Change 6 27
(c) Attach vertical lift fixture, 1C9608P11, with lifteye, 2C14199P38, onto frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02, at 6:00 o’clock and 12:00 o'clock positions. Secure with
hand knob, 2C14199P23.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay out
from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can cause
an injury or death.
(d) Attach hoist to lifteye, 2C14199P38. Lift frame, 2C14199P87/1C9608P02, and sup-
port shaft, 2C14199P111, over HPT rotor.
(e) Lower tooling onto HPT module. Support shaft, 2C14199P111, shall fit into rabbet
of stage 2 HPT disk aft flange. Frame shall fit into rabbet of stage 2 HPT nozzle sup-
port aft flange. See figure 18.
(f) Install spacer foot, 2C14199P65, onto forward flange of HPT stator support.
Using quick-release pins, 2C14199P74, secure spacer foot onto foot bracket,
2C14199P66. See figure 19.
(g) Secure support shaft, 2C14199P111, onto stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft rabbet using 12
bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plate 2C14199P27. Tighten bolts to 70-110 lb in.
(7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque. See figure 18.
(h) Secure frame onto stage 2 HPT nozzle support aft flange using 30 bolts,
2C14199P43, six nut plates, 2C14199P34, and six nut plates, 2C14199P35. Tighten
bolts to 70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque.
(a) Ensure HPT rotor shaft inner diameter and seating shoulder are clean and free of for-
eign material or high metal.
(c) Install lift fixture, 2C14199P22, with lifteye, 2C14199P36, into aft end of pusher
shaft, 1C9608P03. Raise pusher shaft over HPT module.
(d) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise so that slots in retainer nut align
with slots in support shaft, 2C14199P111.
28 Change 6
Change 6 29
30 Change 6
(e) Insert pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, into aft end of HPT module. Align lugs of pusher
shaft with slots of support shaft, 2C14199P111, and retainer nut, 2C14199P70.
NOTE
F. Install HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, as follows (figure 20):
13
(1) Attach horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220, onto frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay out
from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can
cause an injury or death.
(4) Connect second hoist onto shackle on horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220.
(6) Lower HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, so the frame,
2C14199P123/1C9608P02, sits on the four vertical supports.
(7) Secure HPT module into support stand, 1C9417, by positioning four swing clamps
against frame, 2C14199P123/1C9608P02.
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot parts. Hot parts
can cause injury.
(1) If required, heat rotating air seal in oven for 30 minutes at 350°F (176.7°C) and install
onto HPT forward shaft.
Change 6 31
Figure 20. HPT Rotor Shaft Seals and Bearing Races Install/Remove Stand, 1C9417
32 Change 6
(2) Heat No. 5R bearing inner race in oven for 30 minutes at 350°F (176.7°C).
(3) Install bearing inner race onto HPT forward shaft using pusher, 2C14025P08. Do
not remove pusher until temperature of inner race has normalized.
(4) Ensure bearing inner race is seated properly by attempting to insert a 0.002-inch
(0.05 mm) thick shim between inner race and 5R air/oil seal. Shim shall not fit
anywhere between parts except at puller relief grooves.
WARNING
(a) Clean threads of HPT forward shaft and spanner nut using isopropyl alcohol.
(b) Measure spanner nut minor thread diameter. See figure 21. Take measurement
at three axial locations on threads. The average of these three measurements
shall not exceed 7.684 in. (195.17 mm). Replace spanner nut if this require-
ment is not met.
14
(c) Apply a coat of thread lubricant onto threads of spanner nut.
(d) Install spanner nut over HPT rotor shaft engaging threads just forward of
No. 5R bearing inner race. Chamfer faces forward.
(e) Tighten spanner nut until threads extend through nut locking insert. Use
wrench, 2C14664; torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8200, or equivalent; and
a torque wrench.
(f) Measure torque required to start spanner nut moving (with nut not bottomed
out). A minimum of 25 lb ft (34 N·m) of torque shall be present. Replace
spanner nut if this requirement is not met.
(h) Wipe excess thread lubricant from spanner nut and inner race.
Change 6 33
(a) Place the heat shield into oven for 20 minutes at maximum temperature 400°F
(204.4°C).
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot parts. Hot parts
can cause injury.
(b) Remove heat shield from oven and install onto stage 1 HPT disk/shaft as follows:
34 Change 6
NOTE
4 After heat shield and shaft have reached the same temperature, take a
drop check from the forward end of shaft to forward end of heat shield.
Drop check dimension must be 0.240-0.350 inch (6.10-8.89 mm).
CAUTION
(2) Transfer X mark from forward surface of stage 1 HPT disk shaft to stage 2 HPT
disk rear face inner diameter.
NOTE
(4) Install guide tube, 1C9608P04, into engine over center shaft, 1C9608P05, until
tube seats against compressor rotor aft shaft. See figure 19.
(5) Apply light coat of petrolatum onto No. 5R bearing rollers. Push rollers outward
in outer race using finger pressure.
(6) Install 24 guide pins 2C14199P33, in sets of three, through stage 2 nozzle support
forward flange into blocks, 2C14199P26. Do not install pins at 6:00 o’clock and
12:00 o'clock positions.
(b) Connect overhead hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or 2C14220.
(c) Connect second hoist onto shackle on horizontal lift fixture, 1C9358 or
2C14220.
Change 6 35
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the part accidentally move or fall,
they can cause injury or death.
CAUTION
HPT module shall be slid into core engine only until CRF aft
flange is between scribed lines on guide pins. Failure to comply
may cause bearing damage.
(8) Slide HPT module into core engine until guide tube, 1C9608P04, just contacts
bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102, and guide pins, 2C14199P33, pass through
CRF aft flange. Do not slide HPT module beyond the point where CRF aft flange
is between scribed lines on guide pins.
(9) Position spacer feet, 2C14199P65, aft. Secure spacer feet in foot bracket,
2C14133P66, with quick-release pins, 2C14199P74. See figure 19.
(10) Hold pusher shaft, 1C9608P03, stationary while rotating bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102, to move pusher shaft forward until threads engage bearing adapter
shaft threads. Continue hand-threading until guide pins, 2C14199P33, pass
through CRF flange.
(11) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8200, or equivalent, onto pusher splines.
Secure torque multiplier to frame using two knurled head screws, 2C14199P41.
(12) Install antirotation strap, 2C14199P25, over square shank of bearing adapter shaft,
2C14199P102. Secure antirotation strap to frame with handknobs, 2C14199P23.
(13) Loosen clamp on lift fixture enough to permit support shaft, 2C14199P111, to
rotate and still support module and tooling.
36 Change 6
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure. Eye pro-
tection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting lines and fit-
tings.
CAUTION
• The HPC and LPC rotors will rotate during HPT module installation.
Ensure LPC inlet is clear of foreign objects and rotors are free to
rotate.
NOTE
• The HPT rotor and tooling will rotate clockwise and move forward
during installation. The frame and torque multipliers will not rotate,
but will move forward.
(14) Apply input torque of 80 lb ft (108 N·m) to torque multiplier. Pneumatic torque multi-
plier, Sweeney Model 8202A, or equivalent, (in direct drive) may be used in combination
with torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8200, or equivalent, at a pressure of 90 psi
(621 kPa) to reduce installation time.
(1) Rotate retainer nut, 2C14199P70, counterclockwise to unlock pusher shaft lugs. Reverse
torque multiplier two or three revolutions to release load on threads between HPT rotor
shaft and pusher shaft.
(a) Rotate bearing adapter shaft, 2C14199P102, (figure 17) clockwise to back out
pusher shaft, 1C9608P03.
(b) Install lift fixture, 2C14199P22, with lifteye, 2C14199P36, into aft end of pusher
shaft, 1C9608P03. Remove pusher shaft from HPT module.
(4) Remove guide pins, 2C14199P33, and blocks, 2C14199P26. See (figure 8).
Change 6 37
(5) Install eight flange bolts, 2C14199P43, as evenly spaced as possible. Bolt heads should
face forward. Tighten bolts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(7) Remove bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plates, 2C14199P34 and 2C14199P35 from HPT
stator support aft flange. Remove bolts, 2C14199P43, and nut plates, 2C14199P27, from
stage 2 disk aft flange.
(1) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and forward face for dirt, burrs, or high metal.
No dirt, burrs, or high metal allowed.
CAUTION
Do not allow alignment pins to extend through the aft side of the shim.
Failure to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling nut.
(2) If required, install HPT rotor shim, PN 9219M19P05, onto aft flange of stage 2 disk.
Install shim holder, 1C9397, to keep shim holes aligned with flange holes when pressure
tube/coupling nut is tightened.
NOTE
(3) Thread pressure tube/coupling nut onto HPC aft shaft. Hand-tighten pressure
tube/coupling nut.
(4) Install antitorque tube, 1C9626P02, onto stage 2 HPT rotor seal flange. Rotate forward
ring on tube to misalign lugs and slots. Install quick-release pin.
(5) Using clamps, 1C9626P06, and knob, 1C9626P08, secure leg, 1C9626P05, onto stage 2
HPT nozzle support flange. Hand-tighten knob.
(6) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, into inside diameter of pressure tube/coupling nut so
that splines engage.
(7) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112B, or equivalent, onto torque tube,
1C9626P03.
38 Change 6
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque.
(9) Break torque on pressure tube/coupling nut. Remove pressure tube/coupling nut,
shim and all tooling except rotor locking tools.
(10) Measure from seating flange of stage 2 HPT rotor disk aft seal flange to aft surface
of HPC rotor aft shaft using seating check fixture, 2C14131. See figure 22. Record
measurement on HPT Worksheet as HSA (After Assembly). See figure 6. This
dimension shall be within 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) of HSA (Calculated) determined
in step B.(4). Repeat steps J.(1) through (10) if this requirement is not met.
15
K. Install pressure tube/coupling nut as follows:
WARNING
(2) Measure pressure tube/coupling nut minor thread diameter. See figure 23. Take
measurement at three axial locations on threads. The average of these three mea-
surements shall not exceed 6.388 in. (162.26 mm). Replace pressure tube/coupling
nut if this requirement is not met.
(3) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and forward face for burrs or high
metal. Remove burrs or high metal.
16
(4) Apply coat of thread lubricant onto threads, forward face, and flange forward face
of pressure tube/coupling nut.
CAUTION
Do not allow alignment pins to extend through the aft side of the
shim. Failure to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/cou-
pling nut.
(5) If required, install HPT rotor aft shim, PN 9219M19P05, onto seal flange of stage
2 HPT rotor disk. Install alignment pins into shim holder, 1C9397, to keep shim
holes aligned with flange holes when pressure tube/coupling nut is tightened.
Change 6 39
40 Change 6
NOTE
(6) Thread pressure tube/coupling nut onto HPC aft shaft. Hand-tighten pressure
tube/coupling nut.
(7) Install antitorque tube, 1C9626P02, onto HPT stage 2 rotor flange. Rotate forward
ring on tube to misalign lugs and slot. Install quick-release pin.
(8) Using clamp, 1C9626P06, and knob, 1C9626P08, secure leg, 1C9626P05, onto
stage 2 HPT nozzle support flange. Hand-tighten knob.
(9) Install torque tube, 1C9626P03, into inside diameter of pressure tube/coupling nut
so that splines engage.
(10) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112B, or equivalent, onto torque tube,
1C9626P03.
Change 6 41
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque of 13,100 lb ft (17,761 N·m). Failure
to comply will cause damage to pressure tube/coupling nut.
(b) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut threads and mating faces for dirt, burrs,
galling, or high metal. Clean and deburr threads and mating faces, if neces-
sary.
(c) Inspect outer diameter seal teeth for evidence of contact with HPT rotor shaft
inner diameter. If seal teeth have contacted HPT rotor shaft inner diameter,
replace pressure tube/coupling nut. Remove high metal from HPT rotor shaft
inner diameter.
(d) Inspect HPT rotor seating shoulder for dirt or metal pickup. Clean and deburr
HPT rotor seating shoulder, if necessary.
(e) Replace pressure tube/coupling nut if reason for excessive torque cannot be
determined.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a maximum of 84 degrees beyond zero point or a
maximum torque value of 13,800 lb ft (18,710 N·m).
(15) Continue tightening to align stage 2 HPT disk and pressure tube/coupling nut aft
flange boltholes to minimum torque of 9,500 lb ft (12,880 N·m). Record final
angle and torque.
(17) Inspect pressure tube/coupling nut inner diameter for displaced or damaged
damper sleeve. Replace pressure tube/coupling nut if damage is present.
42 Change 6
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of bolts and new nuts,
PN 9283M41P04.
(2) Using bolts and self-locking nuts, 9283M41P04, secure aft air seals and pressure
tube/coupling nut to stage 2 HPT rotor disk. Tighten nuts to 220-240 lb in.
(24.9-27.1 N·m) of torque.
(1) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and seating faces of flange retaining bolts.
(2) Install brackets at locations marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure
brackets onto flange. Boltheads face forward. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install remaining bolts, spacers, and nuts. Boltheads face forward, and spacers
mate directly with boltheads. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of
torque.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STAGE 2 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) NOZZLE
(ON ENGINE) REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for replacing the stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT)
nozzle when HPT module is installed on engine.
B. Remove low pressure turbine (LPT) module to gain access per WP 2710 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Blades Replace- WP 2614 00
ment
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement WP 2710 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Adhesive Scotch Grip 77
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C. (Black
or Blue)
Masking Tape Local Purchase
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 6
The procedures in this work package for removing and installing stage
2 HPT rotor blades are to facilitate other maintenance only. If stage 2
HPT rotor blades require replacement, refer to WP 2614 00.
(1) Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer onto
stage 2 disk. Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blade retainer to stage 2 disk.
(3) Remove and discard nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer. If any stud is broken,
or if any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module.
WARNING
Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-tem-
perature skin damage. Can decrease available air. Asphyxiant.
Personal protective equipment required, especially insulated
gloves and eye protection when handling material. Use in a well-
ventilated area.
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
Protect stage 2 disk from tool damage when prying stage 2 blade
retainer. Ensure prying tool has corner radii to prevent damage to
stage 2 blade retainer.
(5) Remove stage 2 blade retainer. Remove and discard ring seal.
Change 6 3
4 Change 6
CAUTION
Ensure blade damper assemblies are matchmarked accurately.
Incorrect placement at installation will cause rotor imbalance.
(6) Using a marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blades to stage 2 disk. Begin with blade
in dovetail slot marked 1-1 and number all stage 2 blades consecutively in
clockwise direction. Mark number 1 through number 5 dovetail slots. Mark blade
damper assemblies, starting with number 1 at clockwise side of number 1 blade.
(1) Using lift adapter assembly, 1C9358, and 1-ton (907 kg) overhead hoist, position
lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange.
(2) Using three screws and nuts, secure lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT
nozzle aft flange. Tighten nuts to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
(3) Using masking tape and marking pen, matchmark brackets to compressor rear
frame (CRF) aft flange.
(4) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure stage 2 nozzle support
forward flange onto CRF aft flange. Do not remove four screws and nuts that
secure HPT hanger support.
(5) Carefully slide stage 2 HPT nozzle aft from HPT rotor assembly.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 HPT nozzle part number is correct per IPB,
GEK 105060, before installation, or damage to engine could result.
(1) Using lift adapter assembly, 1C9358, and overhead hoist, position lift adapter,
2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange.
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
(2) Using three screws and nuts, secure lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT
nozzle aft flange. Tighten nuts to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(3) Lift stage 2 HPT nozzle into position. Carefully slide stage 2 HPT nozzle onto
HPT rotor assembly.
(4) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of 136 bolts.
(5) Install brackets at locations marked at disassembly. Using bolts and nuts, secure
brackets onto flange. Boltheads face forward. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install remaining bolts, spacers, and nuts. Boltheads face forward. Spacers mate
directly with boltheads. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in. (23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install stage 2 HPT rotor blade marked number 1 into dovetail slot marked
number 1. Install blade from aft side of disk.
CAUTION
(2) Install damper assembly marked number 1 on clockwise side of number 1 blade.
Seal extension faces aft and letter F faces forward.
(4) Hold adjacent blades together at platforms and outward in dovetail slot. Seal
portion of damper assembly shall be free to move radially minimum of 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm). See figure 3. Damper portion of damper shall be free to move.
3
(5) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of new
self-locking nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer.
Change 6 7
WARNING
CAUTION
Adhesive may be used to hold ring seal in place during assembly.
Ensure adhesive is applied in areas 0.5-1.5 inches (12.7-38.1 mm)
long and spacer not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm) apart.
(6) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ends of ring
seal shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm), a
piece of another ring seal may be used to fill gap. Minimum length of 2.00 inches
(50.8 mm) shall be used.
(7) Install stage 2 blade retainer onto stage 2 disk, aligning matchmarks. Using new
nuts, secure stage 2 blade retainer. Using dial indicator torque wrench, tighten
nuts to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque. If run-on torque is less than
6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m) or more than 30 lb in. (3.4 N·m), replace nut.
8 Change 6
(8) Check clearance between aft retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be
0.002 inch (0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade
shank is greater than width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch
(0.025 mm) maximum in all other areas. See figure 4.
(9) Loosen nuts one-half turn, then tighten to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of
torque.
4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STAGE 2 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) NOZZLE
(OFF ENGINE) REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for replacing the stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT)
nozzle when HPT module is removed from engine.
B. Remove HPT module and install, forward end down, in HPT module shipping/storage stand,
2C14193G03, and secure with plug, 2C14193P04, to retain stage 2 disk refer to WP 2610 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Module Replacement WP 2610 00
Stage 2 High Pressure Turbine (HPT) Rotor Blades Replace- WP 2614 00
ment
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Adhesive Scotch Grip 77
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C. (Black
or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
NOTE
(1) Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer onto
stage 2 disk. Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blade retainer to stage 2 disk.
1
CAUTION
Do not move HPT rotor assembly while stage 2 blade retainer is
removed unless a minimum of 37 blade retainer nuts are installed
and tightened to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.5 N·m) of torque.
(3) Remove and discard nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer. If any stud is broken,
or if any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module refer to WP 2610 00.
WARNING
Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-tem-
perature skin damage. Can decrease available air. Asphyxiant.
Personal protective equipment required, especially insulated
gloves and eye protection when handling material. Use in a well-
ventilated area.
WARNING
CAUTION
Protect stage 2 disk from tool damage when prying stage 2 blade
retainer. Ensure prying tool has corner radii to prevent damage to
stage 2 blade retainer.
(5) Remove stage 2 blade retainer. Remove and discard ring seal.
CAUTION
Ensure blade damper assemblies are matchmarked accurately.
Incorrect placement at installation will cause rotor imbalance.
(6) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blades to stage 2 disk. Begin with blade in
dovetail slot marked 1-1 and number all stage 2 blades consecutively in clockwise
direction. Mark number 1 through number 5 dovetail slots. Mark blade damper
assemblies, starting with number 1 at clockwise side of number 1 blade.
(2) Using three screws and nuts, secure lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT
nozzle aft flange. Tighten nuts 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(3) Carefully lift stage 2 HPT nozzle aft from HPT rotor assembly.
C. Inspect interstage seal honeycomb for evidence of thermal shield teeth rub into braze.
Replace HPT module if braze has been contacted.
CAUTION
(1) If installed, remove stage 2 HPT rotor blades refer to step 6.A.
WARNING
(2) Using sling and 1-ton overhead hoist, position lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2
HPT nozzle aft flange.
(3) Using three screws and nuts, secure lift adapter, 2C14703, onto stage 2 HPT
nozzle aft flange. Tighten nuts to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(4) Lift stage 2 HPT nozzle over HPT rotor assembly. Carefully lower stage 2 HPT
nozzle onto HPT rotor assembly. Remove lift adapter.
(1) Install stage 2 HPT rotor blade marked number 1 into dovetail slot marked num-
ber 1. Install blade from aft side of disk.
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 blade damper assemblies are installed at positions as
marked at disassembly. Incorrect placement will cause rotor imbal-
ance.
(2) Install stage 2 blade damper assembly marked number 1 on clockwise side of
number 1 blade. Seal extension faces aft and letter F faces forward.
(4) Hold adjacent blades together at platforms and outward in dovetail slot. Seal
portion of damper assembly shall be free to move radially minimum of 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm). See figure 3. Damper portion of damper shall be free to move.
(5) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of new
nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer.
WARNING
Adhesive is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract.
Skin and eye protection is required. Use in a well-ventilated area.
NOTE
(6) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ends of ring
seal shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm),
piece of another ring seal may be used to fill gap. A minimum length of
2.00 inches (50.8 mm) shall be used.
(7) Install stage 2 blade retainer onto stage 2 disk, aligning matchmarks. Using new
nuts, secure aft retainer. Using dial indicator torque wrench, tighten nuts to
110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque. If run-on torque is less than 6.5 lb in.
(0.7 N·m), or more than 30 lb in. (3.4 N·m), replace nut.
(8) Check clearance between aft blade retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be
0.002 inch (0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade
shank is greater than width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch
(0.025 mm) maximum in all other areas. See figure 4.
(9) Loosen nuts one-half turn, then tighten to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of
torque.
4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STAGE 1 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
1. Introduction.
GE does not recommend replacing stage 1 HPT blades in the field due to the inability to
replace the HPT rim bolts without total disassembly of the rotor stage.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STAGE 2 HIGH PRESSURE TURBINE (HPT) ROTOR
BLADES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the stage 2 high
pressure turbine (HPT) rotor blades.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Deleted
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Adhesive Scotch Grip 77
Dry Ice BB-C-104
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54,
CL-A
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 6
WARNING
(1) Apply penetrating oil onto threads of nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer onto
stage 2 disk. Allow penetrating oil to soak for 20 minutes.
(2) Using marking pen, matchmark stage 2 blade retainer to stage 2 disk.
CAUTION
(3) Remove and discard nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer. If any stud is broken,
or if any nut must be cut off, replace HPT module.
WARNING
Dry ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-tem-
perature skin damage. Can decrease available air. Asphyxiant.
Personal protective equipment required, especially insulated
gloves and eye protection when handling material. Use in a well-
ventilated area.
Change 6 3
4 Change 6
CAUTION
Protect stage 2 disk from tool damage when prying stage 2 blade
retainer. Ensure prying tool has corner radii to prevent damage to
stage 2 blade retainer.
(5) Remove stage 2 blade retainer. Remove and discard ring seal.
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure blade damper assemblies are matchmarked accurately.
Incorrect placement at installation will cause rotor imbalance.
(1) Position mark stage 2 blades and blade dampers to be removed and their
corresponding dovetail slot on stage 2 disk using marking pen. Mark blade
damper assemblies to be removed.
A. Measure length of removed stage 2 HPT rotor blades using gage, 2C14796.
Replacement blade length shall be within 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) of length of removed
blade but shall not exceed length of longest blade in stage.
B. Weigh removed stage 2 HPT rotor blades and record on position map (figure 2).
2
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
NOTE
C. Weigh replacement stage 2 HPT rotor blades. Using marking pen, mark weight on
blade.
D. Select replacement stage 2 HPT rotor blades within 0.25 gram of original blade.
Blades replacing those with portions missing shall weigh within 0.25 gram of average
of two adjacent blades on each side of damaged blade. If replacement blade within
0.25 gram of original blade is not available, use blade replacement guide (figure 3).
NOTE
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 HPT nozzle part number is correct per IPB,
GEK 105060, before installation, or damage to engine could result.
(1) Install stage 2 HPT rotor blade into corresponding dovetail slot. Install blade from
aft side of disk.
Change 6 7
8 Change 6
CAUTION
Ensure stage 2 blade damper assemblies are installed at positions
as marked at disassembly. Incorrect placement will cause rotor
imbalance.
(4) Hold adjacent blades together at platforms and outward in dovetail slot. Seal
portion of damper assembly shall be free to move radially minimum of 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm). See figure 4. Damper portion of damper assembly shall also be free to
move.
(1) Apply generous amount of thread lubricant onto threads and washer faces of new
nuts that secure stage 2 blade retainer.
4
Change 6 9
NOTE
(2) Install new ring seal into stage 2 blade retainer groove. Gap between ring seal
ends shall be 0.10-0.15 inch (2.5-3.8 mm). If gap exceeds 0.15 inch (3.8 mm),
piece of another ring seal may be used to fill gap. Minimum length of 2.00 inches
(50.8 mm) shall be used.
(3) Install stage 2 blade retainer onto stage 2 disk, aligning matchmarks. Using new
nuts, secure aft retainer. Tighten nuts to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of torque
using dial indicator torque wrench. Replace nut if run-on torque is less than
6.5 lb in. (0.7 N·m) or more than 30 lb in. (3.4 N·m).
(4) Check clearance between aft retainer and stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be
0.002 inch (0.050 mm) maximum in areas where axial width of stage 2 blade
shank is greater than width of stage 2 disk. Clearance shall be 0.001 inch
(0.025 mm) maximum in all other areas. See figure 5.
(5) Loosen nuts one-half turn, then tighten to 110-120 lb in. (12.4-13.6 N·m) of
torque.
5
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the LPT module.
B. Remove gas turbine from enclosure per WP 3010 00 and install in the maintenance dolly or
maintenance support pedestals per WP 3012 00 or WP 3013 00.
C. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between LPT module and gas
turbine per SWP 1913 03.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 02
nesses, and Clamping
Gas Turbine in Enclosure Replacement WP 3010 00
Gas Turbine Maintenance Dolly Removal and Installation WP 3012 00
Gas Turbine/Support Pedestal Removal and Installation WP 3013 00
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module in Shipping Container
Replacement WP 3017 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
2 Change 6
3. Support Equipment.
Change 6 3
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Dry Film Lubricant GE Spec A50TF192,
CL-B
(Surfkote A-1625 or
Sandstrom 27A)
Dry Ice Fed Spec BB-C-104
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Penetrating Oil GE Spec A50TF54, CL-A
(L1 Liquid Wrench or
Dag 2404)
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
A. Required Material.
C. The following material may be required if a new LPT module is being installed:
4 Change 6
Change 6 5
(1) Remove nuts that secure aft shaft cap to adapter nut.
(2) Using four jackscrews, from tool set, 1C6804, remove aft shaft cap.
B. Match mark and remove balance weights (bolts/spacers) if installed on aft spacer seal,
L47758, in order to install tool, 1C9609.
(1) Install rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609 onto aft spacer seal, L47758P01.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
NOTE
The rear drive adapter, 682L262, has been replaced with spacer seal,
L47758. The rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609, is a tool that
attaches to the spacer seal during removal. See figure 1.
(3) Using overhead hoist, lift shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, into position on rear
drive adapter assembly, 1C9609. Secure shaft adapter ring onto adapter assembly
with 14 equally spaced bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of
torque.
(5) Using adjustable horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627, and dynamometer or load cell
between hoist and horizontal lift fixture, lift strongback, 1C9613, into position.
6 Change 6
Change 6 7
CAUTION
Do not allow the weight of the strongback to rest on the outer seal
carrier or shaft adapter ring before installing strongback retaining
screws.
(6) Secure strongback, 1C9613, onto outer seal carrier with screws and washers.
Tighten screws to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Turn LPT rotor to align alignment hole on shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, with
radial slot at 10:00 o'clock position on strongback. Install quick-release pin.
(8) Install nut ring, 1C9613P06, onto shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04. Tighten nut ring
until seated against shaft adapter ring flange.
(9) Install four lock blocks, 1C9613P05. Secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, with
screws. Tighten screws to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(1) Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over adapter nut and secure with nuts. See
figure 3. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, over fixture assembly. Secure mounting plate,
1C9619P06, to strongback, 1C9613, with two mounting screws. Tighten
mounting screws finger-tight.
(4) If adapter nut will not loosen with 15,000 lb ft (20,337 N·m) of torque, proceed as
follows:
(a) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut
fixture, 1C9336.
Figure 2. Deleted
8 Change 6
Change 6 9
WARNING
Use eye protection when you cut material or parts. Particles can
cause damage to your eyes.
(b) Cut adapter nut in axial direction, two places 180 degrees apart, on top of
castellation, 1.375 inch (34.93 mm) deep. Use care not to cut into LPT rotor
shaft threads or rear drive adapter. Cut adapter nut with high speed cut-off
wheel.
(c) Install tooling and loosen adapter nut per steps (1), (2), and (3) above.
Adapter nut will split under torque and may be removed and discarded.
(5) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut fixture,
1C9336. Remove adapter nut.
E. Install guide protector, 1C9316P04, so that tabs engage slots in LPT rotor shaft. See
figure 4. Tighten retaining nut, 1C9316P03, until bottomed against rear drive
adapter/spacer seal.
(1) Using bright light, determine location of two retaining ring tooling holes. Rotate
shaft to locate these holes to 6:00 o'clock position.
(2) Using gage block, 1C9618P14, preset pins on retaining ring removal fixture,
1C9618.
(3) Install retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, into guide protector, 1C9316P04.
If necessary, rotate removal fixture, 1C9618, slightly to engage pins in retaining
ring tooling holes.
(4) Insert flexible borescope into guide tube at rear of retaining ring removal fixture,
1C9618. Verify engagement of pins in retaining ring tooling holes. If necessary,
reposition removal fixture to engage pins in retaining ring tooling holes.
(5) Seat retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, against retaining ring.
(6) Turn knurled knob of retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, to compress
retaining ring.
(7) Withdraw retaining ring removal fixture, 1C9618, with retaining ring. Turn
knurled knob to release retaining ring.
10 Change 6
Change 6 11
(1) Using marking pen and masking tape, mark location and orientation of brackets
on stage 2 high pressure turbine (HPT) nozzle aft flange.
(3) Remove nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets that secure LPT module to HPT
module.
(4) Install guide clamps, 2C14693, onto stage 2 HPT nozzle aft flange at 12:00, 3:00,
6:00, and 9:00 o'clock positions. Tighten thumbscrews.
NOTE
(1) Install torque tube, 1C9619P03, and torque fixture, 1C9619, through LPT rotor
shaft. Align torque tube so that teeth of tube engage slots of LPT coupling nut.
(2) Push indexing tube, 1C9619P02, forward and rotate, if necessary, to engage tab
on tube with slot in mid shaft assembly.
(3) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, onto strongback, 1C9613, and secure with
two mounting screws. Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112B/8200, or equivalent, onto mount-
ing plate, 1C9619P06, so that splines engage splines on torque tube. Secure
torque multiplier to mounting plate, 1C9619P06, with two locking screws.
(7) Using LPT coupling nut start fixture, 1C9617, remove LPT coupling nut.
If difficulty is encountered engaging locking pins into LPT coupling nut inner
snapring groove, remove LPT coupling nut as follows (figure 7):
(b) Insert start fixture and loosen LPT coupling nut until nearly disengaged.
12 Change 6
(c) Remove start fixture and extend inner sleeve until locking pins are positioned
0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) beyond wrenching lugs.
(d) Insert start fixture so that locking pins engage LPT coupling nut inner
snapring groove.
7
(e) Loosen LPT coupling nut until disengaged from threads. Remove LPT
coupling nut and discard.
(1) Install plunger tube, 1C9327P11, into LPT rotor shaft so that forward end of tube
seats against mid shaft assembly.
(2) Install remaining portion of LPT module mid shaft puller, 1C9327, so that slots in
adapter, 1C9327P03, slide over capscrews in sleeve adapter, 1C9316. Turn
adapter counterclockwise to lock.
Change 6 13
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure. Eye protec-
tion is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting lines and fittings.
NOTE
If LPT module cannot be removed using mid shaft puller, 1C9327, alternate
puller, 1C9650, may be used. Keep tools separate.
(3) Apply hydraulic pressure until LPT module moves aft approximately 0.75 inch
(19.1 mm). Ensure that LPT moves freely, indicating it is not held by press fit diameters.
If LPT module breaks free, proceed to step 4. If LPT will not move, proceed as follows:
WARNING
Dry Ice, BB-C-104: Do not let this material touch you. Low-temperature
skin damage. Can decrease available air. Asphyxiant. Personal protec-
tive equipment required, especially insulated gloves and eye protection
when handling material. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(a) Pack mid shaft with dry ice, BB-C-104 and chill for 30 minutes.
14 Change 6
Change 6 15
(b) Remove dry ice and re-try tool, 1C3927. If LPT module breaks free, proceed
to step 4. If LPT will not move proceed to step (c).
(c) Release pressure. Remove puller, 1C9327, and plunger tube, 1C9327P11
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when using tool, 1C9650. Aft threads on the
LPT shaft may be damaged during use.
(d) Install plunger tube, 1C9650P02, sheet 2, forward end into LPT shaft until aft
end of tube is inside aft face of LPT shaft.
(e) Attach horizontal adjustable lift fixture, 1C9627, to lift ring on hydraulic
cylinder and adapter, 1C9650P03, assembly.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
(f) Align large holes in adapter, 1C9650P03, with bolts of LPT rotor shaft sleeve
adapter, 1C9316P03. Push adapter against sleeve adapter and rotate hydraulic
cylinder to lock cylinder to LPT shaft.
(g) Attach hand pump to hydraulic cylinder coupler and actuate cylinder. LPT
module must move 1 inch (25.4 mm) to disengage from rabbet fit.
(h) If LPT module does not break free after reaching 5000 psig (34,474 kPa
gage), increase pressure in increments of 1000 psi (6895 kPa) until LPT mod-
ule breaks free from mid shaft. Do not exceed 10,000 psig (68,948 kPa gage).
(i) When LPT module moves freely, remove tool and visually inspect LPT
threads for any damage. Using removed engine hardware aft nut, hand-thread
nut on LPT shaft. Nut should hand-thread to mate face of aft seal adapter. If
nut will not hand-thread, fluorescent-penetrant-inspect aft threads per GEK
9250, Section 70-32-02. If damage is found, route LPT module to approved
LM6000 depot for shaft replacement.
16 Change 6
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
(6) Using knurled nut, ensure jack assembly, 1C9448, under compressor rear frame
(CRF), is snug in place. Tighten rod-end nut one additional turn. Lift strongback,
1C9613, until dynamometer or load cell indicates combined weight of LPT
module, strongback, and lift fixture, 1C9627, approximately 8600 pounds
(3901 kg). Check pins at turbine rear frame (TRF) for easy removal. If pins cannot
be removed, readjust jack assembly. Lift strongback until dynamometer or load
cell indicates combined LPT module, strongback, and lift fixture weight again.
Repeat process until pins at TRF are not loaded. Remove pins and move LPT
module aft, taking care to level module during removal, until clear of engine.
(7) Remove shim from mid shaft rear flange. Record shim part number or thickness.
J. Install LPT module into LPT module storage dolly, 1C9632, per WP 3017 00 or install
in shipping container per WP 3017 00.
K. If LPT module will not be installed shortly, install mid shaft pilot, 1C9610, onto mid
shaft.
NOTE
Some LPT modules contain a bushing on the aft shaft inner pilot diameter
(figure 9). Inspection of the shaft for bushing axial movement is required
prior to LPT module installation.
B. Alternate Inspection - If step on surface B is present, measure axial position of aft shaft
bushing (figure 10):
Change 6 17
18 Change 6
Change 6 19
(1) For forward portion of tool, attach push plate (1, figure 11, Detail A) to nylon
guide (2) using three capscrews (3), provided. Thread handle (4) into push plate.
NOTE
(2) For aft portion of tool, assemble backing plate (5) to guide rod (6). Assemble
three guide plates (7) and seven nuts (8) per figure 11
(1) Insert aft portion of tool, backing plate (5) first, into aft LPT shaft bore until plate
seats on aft face of bushing.
(2) Insert forward portion of tool into forward end of LPT shaft, over guide rod (6),
and seat against bushing.
(3) Thread nut (8) onto forward end of guide rod (6) and tighten with hand wrench.
NOTE
(4) Tighten nut (8) against LPT aft shaft to 25 lb ft (34 N·m).
NOTE
Each turn of nut (8) is worth approximately 0.090 inch (2.3 mm).
(5) Tighten nut (8) until torque starts to dramatically increase. Back off nut, remove
tooling, and inspect bushing for correct seating.
20 Change 6
Change 6 21
(1) If removed, install rear drive adapter, 1C9609, onto aft spacer seal.
WARNING
(3) Using overhead hoist, lift shaft adapter ring into position on rear drive adapter
assembly, 1C9609. Using 14 equally spaced bolts and nuts, secure adapter ring
onto adapter assembly. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (75-88 N·m) of torque.
(5) Using adjustable horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627, and dynamometer or load cell
between hoist and horizontal lift fixture, lift strongback, 1C9613, into position.
CAUTION
Do not allow the weight of the strongback to rest on the outer seal
carrier or shaft adapter ring before installing strongback retaining
screws.
(6) Secure strongback, 1C9613, onto outer seal carrier with screws and washers.
Tighten screws to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Turn LPT rotor to align alignment hole on shaft adapter ring with radial slot at
10:00 o'clock position on strongback. Install quick-release pin.
(8) Install nut ring, 1C9613P06, onto shaft adapter ring. Tighten nut until seated
against shaft adapter ring flange.
(9) Install four lock blocks, 1C9613P05. Secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, with
screws. Tighten screws to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
22 Change 6
NOTE
(1) Calculate dimension A as follows, using figure 12 and worksheet from figure 13:
(a) Thread parallel bar, 1C9620P02, onto LP mid shaft. Bar shall be tight against
LPT rotor shaft seating flange (surface AH) of LP mid shaft.
(b) Position centering collar and support fixture, 1C9622, so support frame,
1C9622P02, feet interface with HPT stator case aft flange. If necessary, lower
adjusting plate, 1C9622P03, by turning hand knob, 1C9622P08. Align
countersunk holes in frame feet and flange holes. Insert capscrews into
countersinks and secure onto forward side of stator case flange with washers
and nuts, sheet 2. Tighten nuts to 70-110 lb in. (7.9-12.4 N·m) of torque.
(c) Use hand knob, 1C9622P08, to raise adjusting plate, 1C9622P03, to bring
LPTR mid shaft to required level. If necessary, apply slight upward force at
aft end of shaft. Tighten nuts (figure 12, sheet 1).
(d) Using vernier depth gage, 1C9620P04, take four drop measurements from aft
surface of parallel bar (surface AH) to HPT stator support aft face at 2:00,
4:00, 8:00, and 10:00 o'clock position locations by turning the assembled core
section 90 degrees after each measurement. Record measurements as
dimension A1.
(f) Subtract thickness of parallel bar (stamped on bar) from A2 and record as
dimension A3.
NOTE
The 0.093 inch (2.36 mm) equals stage 2 shroud support thickness
(0.063 inch [1.60 mm]) and depth of HPT stator support cooling
scallops (0.030 inch [0.76 mm]).
(g) Subtract 0.093 inch (2.36 mm) from A3 and record as dimension A.
(2) Obtain dimension J02 from LPT module build record or as marked on LPT case.
Dimension J02 is marked on case at 9:00 o'clock position, adjacent to T48 probe
boss, approximately 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) aft of case forward flange.
Change 6 23
24 Change 6
Change 6 25
26 Change 6
(3) Determine difference between J02 and dimension A. Subtract J02 from
dimension A. Record result as calculated shim thickness. See LPT installation
worksheet on figure 13.
(4) Calculate shim thickness based on figure 13. Record result as calculated shim
thickness.
(6) Use calculated shim thickness to select required LPT shim from table 1. If
calculated shim is not within range of shims shown, select shim closest to
calculated shim thickness.
Table 1. LPT Shim Thickness
D. Determine calculated LPT seating check dimension AJ as follows. See figure 14 and
worksheet on figure 13.
(2) Measure length of new coupling nut at one location. Mark point of measurement
on aft face with marking pen. Record as dimension THK.
(3) Measure thickness of shim at four equally spaced locations. Average four
measurements and record as dimension AST.
Change 6 27
28 Change 6
(4) Measure thickness of LPT shaft seating flange at four equally spaced locations.
Average four measurements and record as dimension ST.
(5) Add dimensions THK, AST, and ST and record as dimension TAS.
(6) Measure length from end of LP mid shaft to surface AH at four equally spaced
locations. Average four measurements and record as dimension AG.
(7) Determine difference between dimensions TAS and AG. Record result as
calculated dimension AJ.
E. Install guide clamps, 2C14693, onto HPT stator case aft flange at 12:00, 3:00, 6:00,
and 9:00 o'clock positions. Tighten thumbscrews. See figure 15.
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
(1) Clean threads and seating surface of new LPT coupling nut and threads, seating
surface, aft pilot, and splines of mid shaft assembly using clean cloth with solvent.
(2) Apply solid film lubricant to mid shaft spline (figure 16).
(a) Apply lubricant to full length of spline bottom and flank surfaces to an
approximate thickness of 0.0005-0.002 inch (0.013-0.05 mm). Full coverage
required.
(b) Excess lubricant allowed on spline major diameter and within 0.5 inch
(13 mm) and 0.15 inch (3.8 mm) of spline ends.
(d) Excess lubricant not allowed on shaft mating Surface F or on shaft threads.
(e) Allow lubricant to dry for one hour before mating LPT module.
Change 6 29
30 Change 6
Change 6 31
(3) Apply generous coat of thread lubricant to threads of mid shaft assembly.
(4) Apply an even coat of thread lubricant to forward face of LPT coupling nut.
(5) Lubricate preformed packing with thread lubricant and install in preformed
packing groove of mid shaft duct.
NOTE
(7) Install shim into LPT rotor shaft until shim contacts seating shoulder. Align shim
so that maximum thickness is located 180 degrees from H mark on fan midshaft
(8) Rotate LPC rotor to align forward drive adapter M mark with M mark on spacer
seal/rear drive adapter. See figure 17.
(9) With strongback,1C9613, installed and dynamometer or load cell installed, lift
LPT module and trial fit module to mid shaft splines. Move LPT module
forward, align and initiate spline engagement. Do not force module. After spline
alignment is verified, pull module away.
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot parts. Hot parts
can cause injury.
(10) Heat inside pilot diameter of LPT rotor shaft to 325 to 400°F (162.8 to 204.4°C)
using dry heat.
CAUTION
• Do not remove hoist loading until pins at TRF are fully loaded.
(11) Move LPT module forward aligning M marks. Carefully engage splines of mid
shaft assembly. Ensure that M marks remain aligned.
(12) Install several bolts at each clock position to secure LPT module forward flange to
stage 2 nozzle aft flange. Tighten bolts finger tight.
32 Change 6
(13) Install dolly mounting pins at TRF. Snug TRF dolly posts to take weight of LPT module
by adjusting threaded risers. Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft. (95-108 N·m)
of torque
G. Install guide protector, 1C9316P04, so that tabs engage slots in LPT rotor shaft
(figure 18).
H. Start LPT coupling nut onto mid shaft assembly using LPT coupling nut start fixture,
1C9617. See figure 19.
I. Install LPT shaft coupling nut torque fixture, 1C9619, as follows (figure 20):
(1) Install torque tube, 1C9619P03, of torque fixture, 1C9619, through LPT rotor shaft.
Align torque tube so that teeth of tube engage slots of LPT coupling nut.
(2) Push indexing tube, 1C9619P02, forward and rotate, if necessary, to engage tab on tube
with slot in mid shaft assembly.
(3) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, onto strongback fixture, 1C9613, and secure with
two mounting screws. Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
Change 6 33
(4) Install torque multiplier, Sweeney Model 8112B/8200, or equivalent, onto mount-
ing plate, 1C9613P06, so that splines engage torque tube splines. Secure torque
multiplier to mounting plate, 1C9619P06, with two locking screws.
J. Tighten LPT coupling nut as follows:
(1) Tighten LPT coupling nut to 4,000 lb ft (5,423 N·m) of torque. Allow shaft
temperature to normalize. Break torque on LPT coupling nut.
(2) Tighten LPT coupling nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,712 N·m) of torque. Record wrench
angle at this torque.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m) maximum torque or a maximum
wrench angle of 30 degrees from angle recorded in step (2).
(3) Continue tightening to wrench angle 26 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in
step (2). Do not exceed maximum torque value of 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m).
(4) Check alignment of LPT coupling nut and mid shaft assembly slots.
(5) Continue tightening until slots align. Marks on tool must align or retaining ring
cannot be installed. Do not exceed maximum torque of 7,500 lb ft (10,169 N·m)
or maximum angle of 30 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in step (2).
34 Change 6
Change 6 35
(6) Remove torque multiplier and all components of torque fixture, 1C9619.
K. Check LPT module installation using seat check fixture, 1C9616, as follows
(figures 21 and 22):
(1) Secure gage master, 1C9616P03, to seat check fixture, 1C9616, with
thumbscrew. Set dial indicator to zero. Remove gage master from seat check
fixture.
(2) Position seat check fixture, 1C9616, into LPT in order to measure from marked
LPT coupling nut castellation aft surface. Hold firmly in place.
NOTE
(3) Read coupling nut position directly from dial indicator and record as measured
dimension AJ. See figure 22 and worksheet on figure 13.
36 Change 6
Change 6 37
(4) Measured dimension AJ must be 0.002-0.010 inch (0.05-0.25 mm) less than
calculated dimension AJ. If dimension AJ is not with in limits, proceed as
follows:
(a) Verify seat check fixture, 1C9616, with gage master, 1C9616P03, and check
LPT module installation per steps (1) through (3). Check all calculations used
to determine calculated dimension AJ.
(b) If measured dimension AJ is still not within limits, this indicates that LPT
module is not correctly installed. Remove LPT module and check dimensions
per steps C and D. Reinstall LPT module and check installation per this
paragraph.
(1) Install retaining ring onto pins of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618.
(2) Turn knurled knob of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, to compress
retaining ring.
(3) Insert retaining ring into LPT rotor coupling nut and mid shaft assembly slots.
(4) Turn knurled knob of retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, to release ring.
38 Change 6
Change 6 39
(5) Optional: Insert flexible borescope into guide tube at rear of retainer ring
installation fixture, 1C9618, to verify retaining ring is seated in coupling nut.
(6) Rotate retainer ring installation fixture, 1C9618, slightly and pull aft to remove
from LPT shaft.
N. Lubricate bolt threads with thread lubricant. Install nuts, bolts, spacers, and brackets
that secure LPT module to HPT module. Tighten nuts to 210-230 lb in.
(23.7-26.0 N·m) of torque. Refer to SWP 1913 03.
P. If adapter nut was removed, install adapter nut as follows (figure 24):
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(1) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean threads and mating surfaces of adapter nut and LPT
rotor shaft. Inspect adapter nut threads to ensure threads are free of damage and
high metal.
(2) Apply thread lubricant onto threads and forward face of adapter nut and onto
threads of LPT rotor shaft.
CAUTION
Adapter nut shall be able to be tightened by hand.
(3) Install adapter nut onto LPT rotor shaft. Hand-tighten nut.
(4) Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over adapter nut and secure with nuts. Tighten
nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(5) Install mounting plate, 1C9619P06, over adapter nut fixture, 1C9336. Secure
mounting plate onto strongback, 1C9613, with mounting screws. Tighten
mounting screws finger-tight.
40 Change 6
Change 6 41
(a) Seat adapter nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,712 N·m) of torque. Loosen adapter nut.
(b) Tighten adapter nut to 250 lb ft (339 N·m) above run-on torque. Record
wrench angle at this torque.
(d) Check alignment of adapter nut and LPT rotor shaft slots.
CAUTION
(e) Continue tightening until adapter nut slots align with LPT rotor shaft slots.
Do not exceed maximum of 8,500 lb ft (11,525 N·m) or maximum angle of 24
degrees from wrench angle recorded in step (b).
(8) Remove torque multiplier, mounting plate, 1C9619P06, and adapter nut fixture,
1C9336.
(1) Remove bolts that secure lock blocks, 1C9613P05, to strongback, 1C9613.
Remove lock blocks.
CAUTION
Do not allow the weight of the strongback to rest on the outer seal
carrier or shaft adapter ring after removing strongback retaining
screws.
(3) Remove washers and screws that secure strongback, 1C9613, to outer seal carrier.
42 Change 6
Figure 26. LPT Module Lift, Turn, and Restrain Strongback, 1C9613
Change 6 43
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or kill you.
(4) Move strongback, 1C9613, aft away from LPT module. Lower strongback,
1C9613, forward end down, onto pallet or store on LPT module storage dolly,
1C9632. Remove quick-release pin securing strongback onto adjustable
horizontal lift fixture, 1C9627. Remove lift fixture and dynamometer or load cell
from overhead hoist.
(5) Install lifteye in shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04. Connect an overhead hoist to
lifteye.
(6) Remove nuts and bolts that secure shaft adapter ring, 1C9613P04, to rear drive
adapter assembly, 1C9609. Lower shaft adapter ring to pallet. Remove lifteye.
R. Reassemble balance weights (bolts/spacers) and install per match marks on aft spacer
seal, L47758, if previously removed. Torque to Standard Practice requirement per
GEK 9250.
T. Install aft shaft cap and secure with nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of
torque.
44 Change 6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
REAR DRIVE ADAPTER OR AFT SEAL SPACER
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing a rear drive adapter or an
aft seal spacer.
B. This work package also allows switching of a rear drive adapter with an aft seal spacer or an aft
seal spacer with a rear drive adapter.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement WP 2710 00
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 4
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol TT-I-735
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire R297P04
Thread Lubricant GP460 (GE Spec
A50TF201)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
Change 4 3
NOTE
(1) Using marking pen, matchmark rear drive adapter to LPT rotor shaft and rear
drive adapter to rear drive adapter flange cover.
(2) Remove bolts and self-locking nuts securing rear drive adapter flange cover to
rear drive adapter. Remove rear drive adapter flange cover. Retain rear drive
adapter flange cover, bolts, and self-locking nuts for reuse.
(3) Install reaction plate, 1C9329P04 (figure 1), into LPT rotor shaft.
1
(4) Install LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, onto drive adapter puller plate,
1C9329P02, by sliding midshaft puller slots over puller plate capscrews and
turning LPT module midshaft puller counterclockwise to lock.
WARNING
(5) Using overhead hoist attached to LPT module midshaft puller lift ring, position
drive adapter puller plate, P02, onto rear drive adapter. Using hex nuts,
MS51972-6, and slabbed head bolts, 1C9613P07, obtained from strongback
fixture, 1C9613, secure drive adapter puller plate to rear drive adapter. Do not
install bolts in three holes at 12:00 o'clock position.
(6) Using three capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure fixture,
1C9643, to drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, and rear drive adapter. Attach
overhead hoist to fixture.
(7) Install hydraulic pressure source to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327.
4 Change 4
Change 4 5
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure. Eye
protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines and fittings.
(8) Apply hydraulic pressure until rear drive adapter is free from LPT rotor shaft.
(1) Using capscrews, NAS1352-8-36 (figure 2), flat washers, AN960-C816, under
screwheads, and hex nuts, MS51971-5, install rear drive adapter onto aft seal
spacer.
(3) Install LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, onto drive adapter puller plate,
1C9329P02, by sliding midshaft puller slots over puller plate capscrews and
turning LPT module midshaft puller counterclockwise to lock.
WARNING
(4) Using overhead hoist attached to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327, lift ring,
position drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, on rear drive adapter assembly,
1C9609. Using hex nuts, MS51972-6, and slabbed head bolts, 1C9613P07,
obtained from strongback fixture, 1C9613, secure drive adapter puller plate to rear
drive adapter assembly. Do not install bolts in three holes at 12:00 o’clock
position.
(5) Using three capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure fixture,
1C9643, to drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02. Attach overhead hoist to
fixture sling link.
(6) Install hydraulic pressure source to LPT module midshaft puller, 1C9327.
6 Change 4
Change 4 7
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying hydraulic pressure. Eye
protection is required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines and fittings.
(7) Apply hydraulic pressure until aft seal spacer is free from LPT rotor shaft.
(10) Using isopropyl alcohol, clean thread and splines of LPT rotor shaft.
(11) Using marking pen, mark area of key slot of balance piston on LPT rotor shaft
splines. Move mark to most aft point of LPT rotor shaft.
(1) Calculate aft seal spacer/rear drive adapter installation measurement as follows:
NOTE
(a) Measure stack-up thickness of aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter. Record
as dimension AB (figure 5).
3
2
(b) Measure stack-up thickness of adapter nut. Record as dimension AC
(figure5).
(c) Measure drop dimension from LPT shaft aft tang to balance piston aft
surface. Record as dimension AD, Figure 5.
(d) Add dimension AB to dimension AC and subtract sum from dimension AD.
Record as calculated dimension AF (figure 5).
(2) If installed, matchmark rear drive adapter flange cover to rear drive adapter using
marking pen. Remove rear drive adapter flange cover from rear drive adapter.
8 Change 4
Change 4 9
10 Change 4
Change 4 11
NOTE
(3) Attach drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, and fixture, 1C9643, to rear drive
adapter as follows (figure 1):
(a) Using capscrews, MS35308-446, and hex nuts, MS51972-6, secure lifting
plate, 1C9643P02, and drive adapter puller plate, 1C9329P02, to rear drive
adapter.
WARNING
(b) Attach hoist to sling link and raise rear drive adapter to the vertical position.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts.
Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall,
they can cause an injury or death.
(b) Attach hoist to sling link and raise aft seal spacer to vertical position.
12 Change 4
Figure 6. LM6000 Aft Seal Spacer Lift and Remove Fixture, 1C9642
Change 4 13
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
(5) Heat aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter using heat gun to 350°F (176.6°C) for
30 minutes minimum.
CAUTION
(6) Install aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter to the LPT rotor shaft, aligning key on
rear drive adapter to slot mark on LPT rotor shaft. Remove tooling used to
position aft seal spacer or rear drive adapter.
A .For aft seal spacer configurations only, install rear drive assembly adapter, 1C9609,
onto aft seal spacer using capscrews, NAS1352-8-36, flat washers, AN960-C816, and
hex nuts, MS51971-5 (figure 2).
WARNING
B. Lift shaft adapter ring, 1C9328P04 or 1C9613P04 (figure 7), into position on rear
drive assembly or rear drive adapter assembly, 1C9609, using an overhead hoist.
Secure shaft adapter ring with eight equally spaced slabbed head bolts, 1C9328P07
or 1C9613P07 and hex nuts, MS51972-6. Tighten nuts to 55-65 lb ft (74.6-88.1 N·m)
of torque.
5
WARNING
Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
C. Clean retaining nut and rotor shaft threads with isopropyl alcohol.
D. Lightly coat threads and forward face of adapter nut and threads of LPT rotor shaft
with thread lubricant.
E. Install adapter nut onto LPT rotor shaft. Tighten adapter nut finger-tight.
F. Install adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, over studs in adapter nut and secure using seven
nuts, MS51972-1. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
14 Change 4
Change 4 15
G. Install mounting plate, 1C9309P06 for rear drive adapter configurations or 1C9619P06
for aft seal spacer configurations, over adapter nut fixture, 1C9336. Secure mounting
plate to shaft adapter ring, 1C9328P04 or 1C9613P04, using mounting screws,
1C9309P07 or 1C9619P07. Tighten mounting screws finger-tight.
H. Install torque multiplier onto adapter nut fixture, 1C9336, and mounting plate,
1C9309P06 or 1C9619P06.
(1) Seat adapter nut to 2,000 lb ft (2,711 N·m) of torque. Loosen adapter nut.
(2) Tighten adapter nut to 250 lb ft (339 N·m) above run-on torque. Record wrench
angle at this torque.
(3) Continue tightening to wrench angle 21 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in
substep (2).
(4) Check alignment of adapter nut and LPT rotor shaft slots.
CAUTION
Do not exceed maximum torque value of 8,500 lb ft (11,524 N·m) of
torque or maximum angle of 24 degrees from wrench angle
recorded in substep (2) or damage to LPT module may result.
(5) Continue tightening until adapter nut slots align with LPT rotor shaft slots. Do not
exceed maximum of 8,500 lb ft (11,524 N·m) of torque or maximum angle of
24 degrees beyond wrench angle recorded in substep (2).
K. Using depth micrometer, measure from rear face of adapter nut to rear face of LPT
rotor shaft. Record as measured dimension AF (figure 5).
L. Compare measured dimension AF to calculated dimension AF. The two values shall be
within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) of each other.
N. Using self-locking nuts, J626P04, secure aft shaft cap to LPT rotor shaft. Tighten
self-locking nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.5-7.9 N·m) of torque.
O. If rear drive adapter flange cover was removed in step 6.B.(2), secure rear drive
adapter flange cover to rear drive adapter using bolts, L45045P01 and self-locking
nuts, J626P09B or J626P09D. Ensure matchmarks on rear drive adapter flange cover
and rear drive adapter align. Tighten self-locking nuts to 480-570 lb in.
(54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
16 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
RADIAL DRIVE SHAFT REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the radial drive shaft.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
(1) Position waste fluid container under transfer gearbox drain. Remove drain plug
and drain oil. See figure 1. Remove and discard preformed packing from drain
plug.
(2) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install on drain plug.
(3) Install drain plug into transfer gearbox assembly. Tighten drain plug to
60-80 lb in. (6.8-9.0 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire drain plug.
(4) Place waste fluid container under radial cover assembly. Remove nuts and
washers that secure radial cover assembly. Using jackscrews, carefully remove
radial cover assembly. Remove and discard preformed packing.
1
(5) Using flat-tipped screwdriver, unwind retaining ring from groove in bottom of
bevel gearshaft.
(6) Assemble radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, as follows (figure 2):
2
(a) Turn handnut counterclockwise until no threads are visible at end of rod
between handnut and T-handle.
(c) Assemble washer, expandable plug, and retainer onto socket head screw.
Ensure retainer fits over end of expandable plug. Install socket head screw
into end of rod and tighten finger-tight.
(7) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into gearbox opening so expandable plug
goes through center of radial drive shaft spacer. Lift tool upwards as far as
possible.
(8) Hold T-handle of rod and turn handnut clockwise to expand expandable plug
snugly inside spacer.
CAUTION
Radial drive shaft may fall suddenly after removal of radial drive
shaft spacer. Hand should be held under gearbox opening to prevent
damage to drive shaft.
(9) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to remove radial drive shaft spacer
from bevel gearshaft. Remove radial drive shaft, by hand, if radial drive shaft
comes out with radial drive shaft spacer.
(10) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft spacer from radial drive shaft tool,
1C6361.
(11) Remove preformed packing from radial drive shaft spacer. Remove and discard
preformed packing.
(12) Remove socket head screw, retainer, expandable plug, and washer from radial
drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
Figure 2. Radial Drive Shaft Spacer Removal Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
NOTE
If radial drive shaft fails to come out during spacer removal, remove
radial drive per paragraph B.
(2) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into gearbox opening so that collet enters
center of radial drive shaft.
(3) Hold T-handle of rod and turn handnut clockwise to expand collet snugly into
radial drive shaft.
(4) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to remove radial drive shaft from
radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
NOTE
(5) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft from radial drive shaft tool,
1C6361.
(1) Assemble radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, as follows (figure 3):
(a) Turn handnut counterclockwise until no threads are visible at end of rod
between handnut and T-handle. Install sleeve onto rod against handnut.
(b) Assemble collet onto draw screw. Install draw screw into end of rod and
tighten finger-tight.
(2) Insert radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, into end of radial drive shaft opposite
grooved shear section. Hand-tighten handnut.
(3) Install radial drive shaft into transfer gearbox opening. Raise radial drive shaft as
far as possible. Slight turning may be required to engage splines.
(4) Move radial drive shaft up and down to ensure free axial movement. No binding is
allowed.
Figure 3. Radial Drive Shaft Removal Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
(a) Loosen jamnuts on mount links until locking devices are disengaged.
CAUTION
(d) Move radial drive shaft up and down to ensure that no binding exists.
(e) Check mount links for proper engagement of rod-end bearing threads by
trying to insert a No. 56 drill (0.055-inch [1.4 mm] diameter) through witness
hole at each end of turnbuckle. Drill shall not pass through.
CAUTION
If left unsupported, radial drive shaft may fall out of transfer gearbox.
(6) Loosen handnut and carefully withdraw radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
B. Using radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, install radial drive shaft spacer and retaining
ring, as follows (figure 4):
4
(1) Install new retaining ring into flanged end of retaining ring shaft.
(2) Using ring pusher, push retaining ring through retaining ring shaft to within
0.125-0.250 in. (3.18-6.35 mm) of end of shaft. Align cutout sections of shaft and
pusher.
(4) Assemble washer, expandable plug, and retainer onto socket head screw. Ensure
retainer fits over end of expandable plug. Install socket head screw into end of rod
and tighten finger-tight.
Figure 4. Radial Drive Shaft Spacer and Retaining Ring Installation Using Radial Drive Shaft Tool, 1C6361
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(5) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto radial drive
shaft spacer.
(6) Install radial drive shaft spacer onto expandable plug. Hand-tighten handnut.
(7) Insert radial drive shaft spacer into bottom of radial drive shaft. Turn radial drive
shaft tool cutouts to face aft.
(8) Raise radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to position radial drive shaft and radial drive
shaft spacer as far into gearbox as possible.
(9) Hold T-handle and push retaining ring shaft upwards, as far as possible, and hold.
(10) Release T-handle and push ring pusher upwards, as far as possible, to position
retaining ring into groove of bevel gear.
(11) Pull down on radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361, to seat radial drive shaft spacer
against retaining ring.
(12) Loosen handnut and remove radial drive shaft tool, 1C6361.
CAUTION
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(14) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto radial cover
assembly. See figure 1.
(15) Using washers and nuts, install radial cover assembly onto bottom of transfer
gearbox assembly. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
10
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
TRANSFER GEARBOX ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the transfer gearbox
assembly.
B. Deleted.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamp- SWP 1913 01
ing
Radial Drive Shaft Replacement WP 2810 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Molybdenum Disulfide Lubricant GE Spec A50TF79
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 6
B. Disconnect electrical leads and connecting tubes between transfer gearbox and gas turbine
per SWP 1913 01.
CAUTION
When loosening hose clamp to reposition and retighten around radial drive
shaft housing, ensure clamp is not placed directly on beaded end of adapter.
C. Loosen lower flexible housing clamp. See figure 1. Reposition clamp higher on flexible
housing and retighten to prevent clamp from falling.
1
D. Install installation/removal fixture, 1C6872 (figure 2), onto jack, 1C5654 (figure 3).
E. Position jack, 1C5654, under transfer gearbox assembly. Raise jack to position
installation/removal fixture, 1C6872, against transfer gearbox assembly.
G. Secure strap around forward side of transfer gearbox assembly between forward mount and
flexible housing adapter. Set floor locks on jack, 1C5654.
CAUTION
Ensure bolts are free turning prior to removal. Forceful removal of bolts
may damage gas turbine or transfer gearbox assembly.
H. Remove three nuts, washers, and bolts that secures transfer gearbox assembly onto links.
I. Remove nut from expandable bushing that secure front end of transfer gearbox assembly
onto gas turbine.
J. Retract screw of pusher, 1C6892, then engage clevis end of pusher around head of expand-
able bushing. See figure 4. Ensure that pusher is seated squarely against gearbox mount. Turn
pusher screw slowly to push out expandable bushing.
2
WARNING
K. Lower jack, 1C5654, slowly until transfer gearbox assembly is clear of gas turbine.
L. Release floor locks on jack, 1C5654, and remove transfer gearbox assembly.
Change 6 3
4 Change 6
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
A. Install installation/removal fixture, 1C6872 (figure 2), onto jack, 1C5654 (figure 3). Set floor
locks on jack.
C. Secure strap around forward end of transfer gearbox assembly between forward mount and
flexible housing adapter.
D. Release floor locks on jack, 1C5654. Position transfer gearbox assembly under gas turbine.
Set floor locks on jack.
E. Raise jack, 1C5654, to position transfer gearbox assembly. Align mounting points and flexi-
ble housing adapter with flexible housing.
Change 6 7
NOTE
F. Raise gearbox until flexible housing adapter is engaged in flexible housing and
forward mount expandable bushing can be installed.
G. Screw guide, 1C6119, onto expandable bushing until seated. See figure 5. Do not
apply pressure that could expand bushing. Insert expandable bushing, with guide, into
forward gearbox mount so bolthead is to left (aft looking forward). If necessary, lightly
tap bolthead with plastic mallet.
I. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant onto spherical bearings of mount and sway
links.
J. Adjust gearbox, as required, to connect aft left mount link onto gearbox mount. See
figure 1. Install bolt, washer, and nut so that bolthead faces left (aft looking forward).
Do not tighten nut at this time.
3
8 Change 6
K. Adjust gearbox, as required, to connect right mount link onto gearbox mount. Ensure
sleeve bushing is present. Install bolt, washer, and nut so that bolthead faces right
(aft looking forward). Do not tighten nut at this time.
L. Connect sway link onto gearbox mount. Install bolt, washer, and nut so bolthead faces
aft. Do not tighten nut at this time.
N. Tighten remaining mount and sway link nuts to 125-133 lb ft (169.5-180.3 N·m) of
torque.
WARNING
O. Disconnect strap from around transfer gearbox assembly. Slowly lower jack, 1C5654.
Release floor locks and roll jack clear of gas turbine.
CAUTION
Radial drive shaft housing cuts caused by clamps can occur when
clamp is installed on housing surface directly over beaded end of
adapter. Ensure clamps are installed per figure 1.
P. Ensure that flexible housing is seated over flexible housing adapter. Loosen and lower
clamp to secure flexible housing to flexible housing adapter. Ensure clamp is placed
on housing per dimensions shown in view A of figure 1. Tighten clamps at both ends
of flexible housing to 35-45 lb in. (4.0-5.1 N·m) of torque. If clamps are not tight at
45 lb in. (5.1 N·m), discard clamp and replace with new clamp. Housing material shall
not bulge around clamp.
Q. Connect electrical leads and connecting tubes between transfer gearbox and gas tur-
bine per SWP 1913 01.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
SPUR GEARSHAFT ASSEMBLIES REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing transfer gearbox assembly
spur gearshaft assemblies.
B. Remove gearbox mounted accessories as required to gain access per WPs 1812 00, 1814 00,
and 1815 00.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Geometry Hydraulic Pump Replacement WP 1812 00
Pneumatic Starter Replacement WP 1814 00
Hydraulic Starter and Distributor Assembly Replacement WP 1815 00
Accessory Gearbox Carbon Seals Replacement WP 2813 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
A. Place waste fluid container under transfer gearbox drain. Remove drain plug and drain
oil. Discard preformed packing. See figure 1.
B. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto drain plug.
C. Install drain plug into transfer gearbox assembly. Tighten drain plug to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.9 N·m) of torque.
1
CAUTION
A. Disconnect seal drain manifold from fitting on fuel pump adapter. Reposition seal
drain manifold.
(1) Remove bolts, washers, fuel pump cover, and gasket from fuel pump drive pad,
if required. Discard gasket. See figure 2.
2
(2) Remove aft shaft seal assembly. Remove and discard preformed packing.
(3) Remove nut, adapter, and preformed packing from aft shaft seal assembly.
Discard preformed packing.
D. Remove safety wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure fuel pump adapter
assembly onto gearbox housing assembly.
CAUTION
E. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove fuel pump adapter assembly
and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
F. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from fuel pump adapter assembly.
CAUTION
If mating seal ring requires replacement, carbon seal must also be
replaced. Refer to WP 2813 00 for carbon seal replacement.
CAUTION
Inner and outer races of roller bearing must be kept together as a
matched set, or bearing damage may occur.
H. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft
assembly.
I. Remove forward shaft seal assembly from spur gearshaft assembly. Remove and
discard preformed packing.
J. Remove nut, adapter, and preformed packing from forward shaft seal assembly.
Discard preformed packing.
K. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing.
Discard keywashers.
L. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer
race as follows (figure 3):
3
(1) Install puller so three puller feet engage bearing housing.
(4) Slide hammer against knurled knob with enough force to disengage bearing
housing from gearbox housing assembly.
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CCW to release bearing housing from
puller feet.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tion tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
A. Using lubricating oil, lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore. Install
bearing housing into gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer,
tap bearing housing until seated. See figure 3.
Figure 3. Typical Bearing Housing Removal Using Puller from Tool Set, 1C6986
CAUTION
• Ensure prebent tabs of keywasher contact CCW against bearing
housing ear with zero clearance. Do not use force or distort
prebent tab of keywasher into position.
B. Install bolts and new keywashers (figure 2). Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m)
of torque. Determine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary,
continue to tighten bolt to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque, until flat on
bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto forward shaft seal
assembly. See figure 2.
D. Install adapter and nut onto forward shaft seal assembly. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
4
E. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto forward shaft seal
assembly.
F. Install forward shaft seal assembly into fuel pump spur gearshaft assembly.
G. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto spur gearshaft
assembly.
I. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into fuel pump adapter assembly.
J. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner
race to minimize roller circle diameter.
K. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into fuel pump drive pad.
L. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of fuel pump
adapter assembly.
M. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly
inward to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage
spur gears.
CAUTION
Ensure gear teeth mesh properly and gears rotate freely to avoid
damaging gears.
N. Install five bolts and washers. Tighten bolts evenly, in small increments, to draw fuel
pump adapter assembly onto gearbox housing.
P. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
(1) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto aft shaft
seal assembly.
(2) Install adapter and nut onto aft shaft seal assembly. Tighten nut to 190-230 lb in.
(21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto aft shaft
seal assembly.
10
(4) Install aft shaft seal assembly into fuel pump spur gearshaft assembly.
(5) Using bolts, install new round gasket and cover onto fuel pump adapter assembly.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
R. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto fitting.
S. Install fitting into fuel pump adapter. Tighten fitting to 135-150 lb in. (15.3-16.9 N·m)
of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
T. Connect seal drain manifold onto fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 135-150 lb in.
(15.3-16.9 N·m) of torque.
A. Remove safety-wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure starter adapter assembly
onto gearbox housing assembly. See figure 5.
5
11
CAUTION
Do not allow starter adapter assembly flange to cock during removal.
Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments will prevent cocking.
B. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove starter adapter assembly and
preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
C. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from starter adapter assembly.
CAUTION
CAUTION
E. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft
assembly.
G. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing.
Discard keywashers.
H. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer
race as follows (figure 3):
(4) Slide hammer against knurled knob with enough force to disengage bearing
housing from gearbox housing assembly.
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CW to release bearing housing from puller
feet.
12
WARNING
A. Lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore with lubricating oil. Install
bearing housing to gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer, tap
bearing housing until seated. See figure 5.
CAUTION
B. Install bolts and new keywashers. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of
torque. Determine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary,
continue to tighten bolt to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque until flat on
bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Install new retaining ring into forward groove of starter spur gearshaft assembly.
See figure 5.
D. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto starter spur
gearshaft assembly.
F. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into starter adapter assembly.
G. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of starter
adapter assembly.
H. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner
race to minimize roller circle diameter.
I. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into starter drive pad.
13
J. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly
inward to engage guide pins. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage gear teeth with idler
gear. Continue pushing to engage bearing rollers with outer race. Using soft face
hammer, tap assembly gently until starter adapter assembly is seated.
K. Remove guide pins and secure starter adapter assembly with bolts and washers.
Tighten bolts finger-tight.
M. Tighten starter adapter assembly retaining bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
Safety-wire bolts.
A. Remove bolt and clamp that secures scavenge tube and hose assembly onto manual
drive pad cover plate. See figure 6.
6
B. Remove nut, bolt, and clamp that secures scavenge tube and hose assembly onto low
pressure drain hose.
C. Remove bolts that secure scavenge tube and hose assembly onto boss on gearbox
assembly. Remove and discard gasket.
D. Disconnect scavenge tube and hose assembly coupling nut from oil tube assembly.
Remove scavenge tube and hose assembly.
E. Using marking pen, position mark electrical brackets. Remove nuts and washers that
secure manual drive adapter assembly onto gearbox housing assembly. Reposition
electrical brackets.
CAUTION
Do not allow manual drive adapter assembly flange to cock during removal.
Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments will prevent cocking.
F. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove manual drive adapter assembly
and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
CAUTION
If mating seal ring requires replacement, carbon seal must also be
replaced. Refer to WP 2813 00 for carbon seal replacement.
14
15
CAUTION
Inner and outer races of roller bearing must be kept together as a
matched set, or bearing damage may occur.
H. Using arbor press, remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft
assembly.
I. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from manual drive adapter
assembly.
J. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers that secure bearing housing.
Discard keywashers.
K. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer
race as follows (figure 3):
(4) Slide hammer against knurled knob with enough force to disengage bearing
housing from gearbox housing assembly.
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CCW to release bearing housing from
puller feet.
WARNING
A. Lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore with lubricating oil. Install
bearing housing to gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer, tap
bearing housing until seated. See figure 6.
16
CAUTION
• Ensure prebent tabs of keywasher contact CCW against bearing
housing ear with zero clearance. Do not use force or distort prebent
tab of keywasher into position.
B. Install bolts and new keywashers. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of
torque. Determine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary,
continue to tighten bolt to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque until flat on
bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto manual drive spur
gearshaft assembly. See figure 6.
E. Using arbor press, install manual drive spur gearshaft assembly into manual drive
adapter assembly.
F. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of manual
drive adapter assembly.
G. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner
race to minimize roller circle diameter.
H. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into manual drive pad.
I. Carefully hold manual drive spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and
move assembly inward to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft
slightly to engage spur gears.
CAUTION
Ensure gear teeth mesh properly and gears rotate freely to avoid
damaging gears.
J. Position electrical brackets as marked at removal. Install five bolts and washers.
Tighten bolts evenly, in small increments, to draw manual drive adapter assembly
onto gearbox housing.
L. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
17
M. Install new gasket onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolts, secure
scavenge tube and hose assembly onto boss on gearbox assembly. Tighten bolts to
33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
N. Connect scavenge tube and hose assembly coupling nut onto oil tube assembly.
Tighten coupling nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.4-87.0 N·m) of torque.
O. Install clamp onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolt and nut, secure clamp
to clamp on low pressure drain hose. Tighten nut to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of
torque.
P. Install clamp onto scavenge tube and hose assembly. Using bolt, secure clamp to
manual drive adapter assembly. Tighten bolt to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
A. Remove safety-wire. Remove bolts and washers that secure variable geometry
hydraulic pump adapter onto variable geometry pump drive pad. See figure 7
7
18
CAUTION
Do not allow variable geometry hydraulic pump adapter flange to
cock during removal. Turning jackscrews evenly in small increments
will prevent cocking.
B. Using three jackscrews from tool set, 1C6986, remove variable geometry hydraulic
pump adapter and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
C. Using arbor press, remove spur gearshaft assembly from variable geometry hydraulic
pump adapter.
CAUTION
CAUTION
E. Remove roller bearing inner race and rollers from spur gearshaft assembly.
F. Unbend keywasher tabs. Remove bolts and keywashers securing bearing and housing.
Discard keywashers.
G. Using puller from tool set, 1C6986, remove bearing housing and roller bearing outer
race as follows (figure 3):
(4) Slide hammer against knurled knob with enough force to disengage bearing
housing from gearbox housing assembly.
(5) Loosen jamnut and turn knurled knob CCW to release bearing housing from
puller feet.
19
WARNING
A. Lubricate bearing housing and gearbox housing bore with lubricating oil. Install
bearing housing to gearbox housing bore. Using nylon drift and soft face hammer, tap
bearing housing until seated.
CAUTION
B. Install bolts and new keywashers. Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
Determine if flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary, continue to
tighten bolt to a maximum of 40 lb in. (4.5 N·m) of torque until flat on bolthead is
adjacent to tab. Bend tab into position. See figure 4.
C. Using arbor press, install roller bearing inner race and rollers onto spur gearshaft.
D. Install mating seal ring so that tangs engage slots on roller bearing.
E. Using arbor press, install spur gearshaft assembly into variable geometry hydraulic
pump adapter.
F. Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install into groove of variable
geometry hydraulic pump adapter.
G. Apply light coat of petrolatum onto roller bearing rollers. Push rollers toward inner
race to minimize roller circle diameter.
H. Install two guide pins from tool set, 1C6986, into variable geometry hydraulic pump
drive pad.
I. Carefully hold spur gearshaft assembly centered in gearbox bore and move assembly
inward to engage guide pins and roller bearing. Rotate gearshaft slightly to engage
spur gears.
20
CAUTION
Ensure gear teeth mesh properly and gears rotate freely to
avoid damaging gears.
J. Install six bolts and washers. Tighten evenly, in small increments, to draw variable
geometry hydraulic pump adapter into gearbox housing.
L. Remove guide pins and install remaining bolts and washers. Tighten all bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire bolts.
(1) Remove nuts and washers that secure horizontal cover onto transfer gearbox
housing assembly.
(2) Tap horizontal cover with nylon drift and soft face hammer. Remove horizontal
cover and preformed packing. Discard preformed packing.
8
21
NOTE
(3) Remove nuts and washers that secure radial cover assembly. Using two
0.250-28 UNF-3B jackscrews, remove radial cover assembly. Remove and
discard preformed packing.
(4) Remove internal retaining ring from groove on inside forward end of bevel
gearshaft. Discard internal retaining ring.
(1) Remove nuts, washers, cover plate, and preformed packing to gain access to
manual drive to check free rotation of newly installed gearshaft. Discard
preformed packing.
(3) Turn manual drive gearshaft CW and ensure gears mesh properly and no binding
exists.
(4) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install onto cover plate.
(5) Install cover plate onto manual drive adapter assembly. Secure with washers and
nuts. Tighten nuts to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-26.0 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tion tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(1) Apply light coat of lubricating oil to splines of horizontal drive shaft. Install drive
shaft, small spline aft, through opening in front of transfer gearbox housing into
bevel gearshaft. Align splines and push drive shaft through bevel gearshaft.
(2) Install new internal retaining ring into groove on inside forward end of bevel
gearshaft.
22
(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with petrolatum and install on horizontal cover.
(4) Install horizontal cover onto front of transfer gearbox housing. Secure with
washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to 33-37 lb in. (3.7-4.2 N·m) of torque.
(5) If radial cover assembly was removed, lubricate new preformed packing with
petrolatum and install onto radial cover assembly. Using washers and nuts, install
radial cover assembly onto bottom of transfer gearbox housing. Tighten nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
23/(24 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
ACCESSORY GEARBOX CARBON SEALS
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing and installing accessory gearbox
carbon seals.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Pneumatic Starter Replacement WP 1814 00
Hydraulic Starter and Distributor Assembly Replacement WP 1815 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Petrolatum Fed Spec VV-P-236
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 1
NOTE
NOTE
(4) Rotate carbon seal by inserting pin of offset driver from fixture set, 1C8182, into
bolthole of seal flange and tap lightly with light hammer until seal tangs overlap
housing boss.
CAUTION
(5) Remove carbon seal from gearbox housing bore using prybar from fixture set,
1C8182, to apply leverage.
(6) Remove packing from gearbox housing bore using pick set from fixture set,
1C8182. Discard preformed packing.
(7) Prior to removal of mating seal ring, obtain drop from gearbox face to mating seal
ring surface. Use this reading for reference at reinstallation of mating seal ring.
Change 1 3
4 Change 1
CAUTION
If carbon seal is replaced, the mating seal ring shall also be replaced.
If carbon seal is reused, the mating seal ring shall also be reused.
NOTE
Tool numbers 1C8182P02 through P05 are used at starter pad. Tool
numbers 1C8182P10 through P13 are used at fuel pump pad and
auxiliary accessory drive pad.
(1) Turn screw, 1C8182P06, counterclockwise to end of travel to retract pusher plate,
1C8182P05 or P11.
(2) Slide outer sleeve, 1C8182P04 or P12, back to allow fingers of inner sleeve,
1C8182P03 or P10, to expand.
(3) Insert tool into seal cavity until plastic stop, 1C8182P02 or P13, contacts mating
seal ring.
2
Change 1 5
(4) Slide outer sleeve over inner sleeve closing flexible fingers over mating seal ring.
(5) Turn screw clockwise until mating seal ring is pulled free of shaft.
(6) Remove tool and slide outer sleeve back to release mating seal ring.
(7) Remove packing from seal ring packing groove. Discard packing.
NOTE
Tool numbers 1C8182P07 and P08 are used at starter pad. Tool numbers
1C8182P14 and P15 are used at fuel pump pad and auxiliary accessory
drive pad.
(1) Using petrolatum, lubricate new preformed packing and install into mating seal
ring packing groove (figure 2).
CAUTION
(2) Using seal ring installation pliers from fixture set, 1C8182, install mating seal ring
onto shaft. Ensure tangs of mating seal ring fully engage slots of bearing inner
race. Following installation of mating seal ring, take drop from gearbox face to aft
surface of mating seal ring. Compare to reading taken during removal.
(1) Using petrolatum, lubricate new preformed packing and install into gearbox
housing bore (figure 1).
6 Change 1
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated
or prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
(2) Lubricate internal elements of carbon seal with lubricating oil. Depress and
release carbon seal slowly several times to ensure seal operates smoothly.
(3) Apply light coat of lubricating oil onto carbon seal face, seal housing outside
diameter, and face of mating seal ring.
(4) Install locally fabricated guide pins into gearbox housing inserts to align seal tang
boltholes with inserts during installation.
CAUTION
• Before installation, ensure carbon seal is clean and free of
debris. Contamination may cause carbon seal failure.
(5) Install carbon seal over guide pins and carefully push into housing until seal
flange is fully seated against housing face. Remove guide pins.
NOTE
Perform step (6) only if starter pad carbon seal was replaced.
Change 1 7
CAUTION
Ensure prebent tabs of keywasher contact CCW against bearing
housing ear with zero clearance. Do not use force or distort prebent
tab of keywasher into position.
CAUTION
Do not loosen bolt to position a flat on the bolthead adjacent to the tab.
(8) Tighten bolts to 33-37 lb in. (3.8-4.1 N·m) of torque. Determine if flat on bolthead
is adjacent to tab of keywasher. If necessary, continue to tighten bolt to a maxi-
mum of 40 lb in. (4.6 N·m) of torque until flat on bolthead is adjacent to tab. Bend
tab into position. See figure 3.
(9) Install new gasket, cover, and coupling clamp or bolts and washers, as applicable.
Tighten coupling clamp to 100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.6 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolts
to 190-230 lb in. (21.5-25.9 N·m) of torque.
3
8 Change 1
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE IN ENCLOSURE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 3 1
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for removing or installing the gas turbine in an
enclosure.
B. Disconnect and connect electrical leads and connecting tubes on the gas turbine per
SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
NOTE
C. Normal Shutdown and Cooldown. If the gas turbine including fuel system is to be removed
from the enclosure in preparation for shipment by ground or air, complete the following fuel
system drain and purge procedure. Fuel system removal prior to shipment does not require
the purge procedure.
(1) While the engine is still in the enclosure, disconnect all fuel manifolds at the package
supply interface.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6081, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(a) Liquid Fuel - If present, should be drained into a container or fuel drain tank when
the fittings are opened. Any locations such as flow splitter, pressurization valve or
flow divider should also be isolated and drained. As an alternative to ventilating, the
liquid fuel system can be filled with MIL-L-6081, Grade 1010 slush oil. This alter-
native is preferred if the engine is to be stored for extended periods before or after
service.
(b) Gas Fuel - Open the fuel manifold fittings and allow them to ventilate into the
enclosure.
(2) Using the Human Machine Interface (HMI), start the enclosure ventilation fan(s).
(3) Initiate a Dry Crank (no fuel supply) using the HMI and allow the engine to ramp to
2200 rpm HP rotor speed for 10 minutes. This will ventilate any remaining fuel or vapor
into the enclosure using compressor discharge air.
2 Change 3
(4) For DLE units, all staging valves should be normally open. If there are any normally
closed valves in the system the HMI should be used to open them.
D. Emergency Shutdown or Engine Failure. If the gas turbine including fuel system is to be
removed from the enclosure in preparation for shipment by ground or air, complete the fol-
lowing fuel system drain and purge procedure. Fuel system removal prior to shipment does
not require the purge procedure.
(1) While the engine is still in the enclosure, disconnect all fuel manifolds at the package
supply interface as well as at all nozzles or premixers.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6081, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(a) Liquid Fuel - If present, should be drained into an approved container or the fuel
drain tank when the fittings are opened. Any locations such as flow splitter, pressur-
ization valve or flow divider should also be isolated and drained. As an alternative to
ventilating, the liquid fuel system can be filled with MIL-L-6081, Grade 1010 slush
oil. This alternative is preferred if the engine is to be stored for extended periods
before or after service.
(b) Open the combustor case drain fitting and drain any residual fuel into an approved
container or the fuel drain tank.
WARNING
(c) After all fuel is drained, blow out each of the lines, hoses and connections with shop
air.
Change 3 3
(d) Gas Fuel - Open the fuel manifold fittings and blow out each of the lines, hoses and
connections with shop air.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) Actuator Replacement with SWP 1112 01
Fixed Link
Front Frame Module External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamp- SWP 1913 01
ing
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 03
nesses, and Clamping
Engine Assembly External Tubing, Harnesses, and Clamping SWP 1913 04
Gas Turbine Maintenance Dolly Removal and Installation WP 3012 00
Gas Turbine/Support Pedestal Removal and Installation WP 3013 00
Gas Turbine in Shipping Container Replacement WP 3014 00
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4 Change 3
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Black or Blue)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
Packager-supplied gaskets are required to perform the tasks described in this work package.
(Reference packager's manual.)
Change 3 5
See figure 1.
A. If previously installed on gas turbine with VIGV assembly, remove fixed links and install
VIGV actuators as follows:
(1) Remove fixed link per SWP 1112 01. Secure fixed link to gas turbine for return with gas
turbine.
CAUTION
Ensure all electrical, fuel, oil, and air supplies are shut off before
disconnecting customer interfaces. Failure to comply may result in
part damage.
(1) Disconnect inlet system from variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) case or inlet frame
assembly per packager's manual.
(4) If same gas turbine will be installed, matchmark drive adapter and shaft using
marking pen.
(5) Disconnect forward and aft drive adapters per packager's manual.
6 Change 3
Change 3 7
WARNING
Before you disconnect the ignition leads, make sure the ignition
system was off for more than 2 minutes. The ignition system could
be charged with high voltage that can cause death.
NOTE
Some engines may have only one ignition plug at 3:00 o'clock position
and a blank off plug at 5:00 o'clock position.
CAUTION
(a) Remove safety wire. Disconnect ignition cables from igniter plug adapters.
Momentarily ground ignition cable to remove any residual electrical charge.
(c) Remove nut, bolt, and clamps that secure ignition cables onto gas turbine bracket.
(2) Disconnect flame sensor integral leads from packager's junction box per packager's
manual.
(3) If required, disconnect starter speed switch connector from pneumatic starter per
packager's manual.
(a) Using marking pen, matchmark customer electrical cable connections at electrical
interface panels.
(b) Remove bolts, washers, and clamps that secure customer electrical cables onto
electrical interface panels.
8 Change 3
WARNING
Circuits shall be open (off) and capacitors discharged to ground
before proceeding. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
(c) Disconnect customer electrical cable connectors from electrical interface panels per
packager's manual.
D. Disconnect remaining customer hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, and vent/drain interfaces
per SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
E. Install steam/fuel manifold shipping bracket fixture assembly per WP 3015 00.
F. Remove bolts that secure fuel and steam manifold mounts onto packager's stanchions per
packager's manual.
(1) Attach hoist of sufficient lifting capacity to horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, or equivalent.
See figure 2.
WARNING
(2) Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, to working height. Level fixture by adjusting
trolley. Record center of gravity (CG) measurement.
(3) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, over gas turbine. Using quick-release pins,
secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine rear frame.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install
quick-release pin.
Change 3 9
10 Change 3
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines
with VIGV installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with
inlet frame installed. Incorrect positioning may cause lift fixture/gas
turbine damage.
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with VIGV installed,
and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame installed. Slowly apply small
amount of lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly attached to gas turbine.
WARNING
Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shifting,
causing serious injury.
(6) Remove trunnion attachments and aft mount attachment per packager's manual.
Change 3 11
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
CAUTION
Ensure rear mount links do not drop onto gas turbine components
while gas turbine is raised from enclosure. Gas turbine damage may
result.
(8) Install gas turbine into applicable support equipment per WP 3012 00, WP 3013 00, or
WP 3014 00.
H. Using bright light, visually inspect inner and outer piston rings for wear and cracks (figure 3).
If rings are worn or cracked, replace rings.
12 Change 3
Change 3 13
A. If lease engine is being installed with dual ignition system and site is set up for single
ignition system, it will be required that a plug and washer be installed in the 5:00 o'clock
igniter plug position. See Illustrated Parts Breakdown, GEK 105060.
CAUTION
NOTE
• Zero Degree - Has a light green primer on inlet guide vane frame
outer surface and gray urethane paint on flowpath surfaces.
• Negative Five Degree - Pre CID 464632 has a light green primer on
the inlet guide vane frame outer surface and tan/beige urethane
paint on the flowpath surfaces. Post CID 464632 has gray urethane
paint on outer surface and on flowpath surfaces of inlet guide vane
frame.
B. If replacement gas turbine, equipped with VIGV actuator, is replacing gas turbine with
fixed link, replace VIGV actuators with fixed links per SWP 1112 01.
C. Verify the rear drive adapter or aft seal spacer, whichever is applicable, is installed. Refer to
WP 2711 00.
WARNING
Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shifting,
causing serious injury.
14 Change 3
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
CAUTION
Ensure rear mount links do not drop onto gas turbine components
while gas turbine is raised from enclosure. Gas turbine damage may
result.
(2) Lower gas turbine into enclosure and align aft clevis mounts with mount links.
(3) Install trunnion pins into trunnion support stanchions per packager's manual.
(4) Install trunnion washers and nuts onto gas turbine trunnions. Tighten nuts per packager's
manual.
(5) Install mount bolt and nut through aft left mount link and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut
per packager's manual.
(6) Install mount bolt and nut through aft center mount and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut
per packager's manual.
(7) Adjust aft right mount link so mount bolt can be inserted freely. Install mount bolt and
nut through aft right mount link and gas turbine mount. Tighten nut per packager's
manual.
(8) Tighten aft right mount link jamnut per packager's manual.
WARNING
Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before discon-
necting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in gas tur-
bine damage or serious injury.
(10) Position lift fixture trolley at CG. Slowly apply lifting force to allow lift fixture pins to
rotate freely. See figure 2.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay
out from below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they
can cause an injury or death.
(11) Remove two turbine rear frame lift fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point
quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
Change 3 15
(2) Connect forward and aft drive adapters per packager's manual.
(4) Connect inlet system to VIGV case or inlet frame assembly per packager's manual.
NOTE
WARNING
Circuits shall be open (off) and capacitors discharged to ground
before proceeding. Electricity causes shock, burns, and death.
16 Change 3
(b) Using bolts, washers, and clamps, secure customer electrical cables onto electrical
interface panels. Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Before you disconnect the ignition leads, make sure the ignition
system was off for more than 2 minutes. The ignition system could
be charged with high voltage that can cause death.
CAUTION
Igniter plug may fall out when ignition cable is disconnected or
igniter plug cover is removed.
(a) Remove igniter plug covers at 3:00 o'clock position, and if installed, at 5:00 o'clock
position.
(b) Install ignition cables over igniter plug adapters. Tighten coupling nuts to
23-27 lb ft (31-37 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire coupling nut.
(3) Connect flame sensor integral lead to packager's junction box per packager's manual.
CAUTION
NOTE
Some engines may have only one ignition system (3:00 o'clock position)
and a blank off plug will then be required at the 5:00 o'clock position.
(4) If required, connect starter speed switch connector to pneumatic starter per packager's
manual.
Change 3 17
CAUTION
Position hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, water, steam, and
vent/drain interfaces to avoid interference with engine components
that could result in premature failure.
G. Check for misalignment and interference between engine and package interfaces. Adjust and
correct as required.
H. Connect remaining customer hydraulic, pneumatic, lube oil, fuel, and vent/drain interfaces
per SWP 1913 01, SWP 1913 02, SWP 1913 03, and SWP 1913 04.
NOTE
Misalignment between the fuel and steam manifolds, and the packager's
stanchions may indicate that the packager's supporting stanchions are
located incorrectly.
I. Install bolts that secure fuel and steam manifolds to packager's stanchions. Tighten bolts to
100-130 lb in. (11.3-14.7 N·m) of torque.
J. Remove steam/fuel manifold shipping bracket fixture assembly per WP 3015 00.
NOTE
Contact your control vendor for proper configuration for engine con-
trols not listed in table 1 or table 2.
K. Ensure the control software is correctly configured for the engine IGV configuration (refer to
table 1 or table 2) if engine is installed with a different IGV configuration than on the engine
removed.
18 Change 3
Engine
Removed
Change 3 19
Engine
Removed
20 Change 3
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
PRESERVATION/DEPRESERVATION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Definitions................................................................................................................................... 4
Engine Depreservation................................................................................................................ 33
Installed Engine for Greater than 30 Days Preservation............................................................. 26
Installed Engine for up to 30 Days Preservation......................................................................... 4
Noninstalled Engine for Greater than 30 Days Preservation ...................................................... 30
Noninstalled Engine for up to 30 Days Preservation.................................................................. 29
Oil Wetting LM6000 Bearings (Alternate Procedure 1) ............................................................. 14
Oil Wetting LM6000 Bearings (Alternate Procedure 2) ............................................................. 25
Change 3 1
1. Introduction.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Deleted
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
2 Change 3
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Barrier Paper (Kraft) Grade A, Type II, Class II
Desiccant MIL-P-116
Fuel System Preservation Oil MIL-L-6081, Grade 1010
Lubricating Oil MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I)
Rust Preventive Concentrate GE Spec D50TF6 or
Brayco 599
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
Change 3 3
6. Definitions.
CAUTION
• Ensure driven equipment is prelubricated or drive shaft is dis-
connected prior to motoring engine. Failure to comply may
result in damage to driven equipment or lack of low pressure
rotor rotation and subsequent insufficient bearing lubrication.
(1) Install locally manufactured blankoff plates (figure 1) using existing gaskets,
bolts, and washers onto ports L1, L2, and L3. See figure 2. Tighten bolts on port
L1 to 420-510 lb in. (47.4-57.6 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolts on port L2 to
250-320 lb in. (28.2-36.1 N·m) of torque. Tighten bolts on port L3 to
160-210 lb in. (18.0-23.7 N·m) of torque.
4 Change 3
Change 3 5
6 Change 3
Change 3 7
(2) Install cap, PN MS51532B6S, onto scavenge discharge pressure port L5 fitting.
(4) Remove fitting from supply pressure port L4. Discard preformed packing.
WARNING
(5) Lubricate new preformed packing, PN J221P906, with lubricating oil and install
onto reducer, PN MS51525B6-8S. Install reducer into supply pressure port L4.
Tighten reducer to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.5 N·m) of torque.
(6) Connect lubricating stand supply hose onto reducer at supply pressure port L4.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(8) Lubricate preformed packing, PN J221P908, with lubricating oil and install onto
union, PN MS51525B8S. Install union into accessory gearbox drain port. Tighten
union to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
(9) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto union on accessory gearbox drain
port. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(10) )Remove transfer gearbox (TGB), B- and C-sump scavenge inlet screen plugs
from lube and scavenge pump. Discard preformed packings.
(11) Lubricate preformed packings, PN M83248/1-912, with lubricating oil and install
onto reducers, PN MS51525B8-12S. Install reducers into TGB, B- and C-sump
scavenge ports. Tighten reducers to 45-50 lb ft (61-68 N·m) of torque.
(12) Connect lubricating stand scavenge lines onto TGB, B- and C-sump scavenge port
reducers. Tighten coupling nuts to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(13) Disconnect D-sump scavenge hose from D-sump scavenge in port fitting. Install
cap, PN MS51532B10S, onto fitting. Tighten cap finger-tight.
8 Change 3
(15) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto reducer on D-sump scavenge hose.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(16) Disconnect E-sump scavenge hose from E-sump scavenge in port fitting. Install
cap, PN MS5132B10S, onto fitting. Tighten cap finger-tight.
(18) Connect lubricating stand scavenge hose onto reducer on E-sump scavenge hose.
Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
(1) Remove nuts and washers securing forward drive pad cover to front of accessory
gearbox. Remove cover. Discard preformed packing.
WARNING
(2) Lubricate spline adapter, 1C8208, with lubricating oil. Install spline adapter into
spline adapter forward drive spline and secure with washers and nuts. Tighten
nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.2-14.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install electric drive motor, 2C14764, or pneumatic drive motor, 18932, onto
forward drive pad aligning square drive with spline adapter. Secure with washers
and bolts. Tighten bolts to 420-510 lb in. (47.4-57.6 N·m) of torque.
Change 3 9
WARNING
NOTE
(1) Add 5 percent (by volume) of rust preventive concentrate, Brayco 599, to
lubricating stand oil tank.
CAUTION
(2) Start lubricating stand supply and scavenge pumps. See figure 3 Regulate supply
pressure to 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa). Lube oil temperature shall be maintained
between 60 and 100°F (15.6 to 37.8°C).
WARNING
Use thermal gloves when you move or touch hot or cold parts.
Hot or cold parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
(3) Rotate high pressure turbine (HPT) rotor, using electric/pneumatic drive motor, in
forward direction a minimum of two revolutions (approximately 12-15 minutes)
at maximum RPM. Rotate low pressure turbine (LPT) rotor, using driven
equipment jacking gear (if installed), a minimum of two revolutions. If jacking
gear is not installed, disconnect coupling shaft to driven equipment and rotate LPT
rotor by pulling stage 5 LPT blades minimum of two revolutions.
(4) Stop lubricating stand supply pump. Run scavenge pump until no oil flow is
visible in scavenge line viewing windows. Stop scavenge pump.
10 Change 3
Change 3 11
(1) Disconnect lubricating stand supply line from supply pressure port L4.
WARNING
(3) Lubricate new preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto
fitting. Install fitting in supply pressure port L4. Tighten fitting to 180-200 lb in.
(20.3-22.5 N·m) of torque.
(4) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge lines from TGB, B-, and C-sump scavenge
inlet port fittings. Remove fittings.
(5) Lubricate three preformed packings with lubricating oil and install on TGB,
B- and C-sump scavenge inlet screen plugs.
(6) Install inlet screen plugs into TGB, B-, and C-sump scavenge inlet ports. Tighten
plugs to 540-600 lb in. (61.0-67.7 N·m) of torque.
(7) Remove cap from main scavenge discharge tube. Install pump scavenge
discharge hose onto main scavenge discharge tube. Tighten coupling nut to
133-150 lb ft (180-203 N·m) of torque.
(9) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto accessory
gearbox drain plug.
(10) Install accessory gearbox drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plug.
(12) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge hose from reducer on D-sump scavenge
hose. Remove reducer from D-sump scavenge hose.
(13) Connect D-sump scavenge hose onto D-sump scavenge fitting. Tighten coupling
nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
12 Change 3
(14) Disconnect lubricating stand scavenge hose from reducer on E-sump scavenge
hose. Remove reducer from E-sump scavenge hose.
(15) Connect E-sump scavenge hose onto E-sump scavenge fitting. Tighten coupling
nut to 650-770 lb in. (73.4-86.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Use extreme care when working with electricity. Electricity
causes shock, burns, and death.
(2) Remove bolts and washers that secure drive motor onto accessory gearbox.
Remove drive motor.
(3) Remove nuts, washers, and spline adapter, 1C8208, from accessory gearbox.
WARNING
(4) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install into preformed
packing groove on cover.
(5) Install forward drive pad cover onto accessory gearbox forward drive pad. Secure
with washers and nuts. Tighten nuts to 100-130 lb in. (11.2-14.6 N·m) of torque.
I. Cover or plug all engine openings and unattached fittings. Cover inlet, exhaust, and
VBV openings using moisture barrier paper, if possible.
Change 3 13
WARNING
NOTE
(1) Thoroughly mix 6 quarts (6 liters) of lubricating oil with 290 cc of Brayco 599
preventive to obtain 5 percent mixture.
(2) Remove oil from reservoir of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569. Pour oil/Brayco
mixture into unit pressurizer reservoir.
(3) Remove tube-end reducer, nut, -6/-4 reducer, and cap from head-end hose swivel
of unit pressurizer. Head-end and rod-end lines are identified with tag.
(4) Move unit pressurizer selector valve to head-end position, open supply valve on
head-end line, and close supply valve on rod-end.
(5) Locate gearbox drain plug (figure 4) and place clean container under drain.
Remove drain plug (some packages may have a starter clutch drain attached).
Dispose of drained oil and return container under drain.
(6) Remove four nuts and washers from accessory gearbox manual drive pad cover
plate (figure 5). Remove cover plate.
(7) Insert 3/4 -inch by 12-inch-drive extension into manual drive pad and attach
ratchet.
14 Change 3
Figure 4. Gearbox
(d) Remove electrical connector from lube oil supply resistance temperature
detector (RTD).
(f) Remove bolts and washers connecting oil supply manifold onto oil manifold.
Remove manifold and store in clean container.
(9) Locate gearbox lube oil supply tube and install reducer. Connect unit pressurizer
head-end line onto reducer.
Change 3 15
16 Change 3
Change 3 17
18 Change 3
CAUTION
During operation of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, observe
head-end pressure gage to verify pressure buildup does not exceed
100 psi (689.4 kPa) or damage to gearbox seals may result.
NOTE
(10) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking
forward) while operating unit pressurizer, 1C3569, pump handle (maintain
20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate core and activate pump handle
for 2 minutes.
(11) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from gearbox oil
supply line. Cap or tape gearbox lube oil supply tube to avoid lube system
contamination.
WARNING
(12) Allow oil/preservation mixture to drain from gearbox into container. If clean,
pour mixture from container into hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir
and replace container under open gearbox drain. If reservoir does not contain
approximately 6 quarts (6 liters) (reservoir capacity), mix an additional 5 percent
mixture and fill reservoir.
Change 3 19
(1) Locate A-sump oil supply tube (figure 6) and install reducer. Connect hydraulic
unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line to reducer.
CAUTION
NOTE
(2) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking
forward). Simultaneously rotate low pressure rotor by hand using rear drive
adapter (the gas turbine shall be disconnected from the electrical generator or
drive equipment). Rotate both rotors while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer
pump, 1C3569, handle (maintain 20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate
rotors and activate pump handle for 2 minutes.
(3) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from A-sump oil
supply tube. Cap or tape A-sump oil supply tube to avoid lube system
contamination.
(4) Install locking ring, preformed packing and drain plug into gearbox. Tighten plug
to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
(5) Inspect oil/Brayco 599 mixture. If serviceable, pour mixture from container into
hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir. If reservoir does not contain approx-
imately 6 quarts (6 liters) (reservoir capacity), mix an additional 5 percent
oil/Brayco mixture and fill reservoir.
(a) Install oil supply manifold onto oil manifold with three washers and bolts.
Tighten bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(b) Connect gearbox lube oil supply tube and preformed packing. Tighten fitting
to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.5 N·m) of torque.
(c) Connect A-sump oil supply tube and preformed packing. Tighten fitting to
270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
20 Change 3
(d) Connect B-, C-, D-, and E-sump tube. Tighten fitting to 75-91 lb ft
(102-123 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(1) Disconnect the D- and E-sump oil supply line fitting on strut 6 of turbine rear
frame (figure 7). Connect hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line with
reducer, AN919-8.
WARNING
(2) Locate D- and E-scavenge lines (figure 8) and place clean container under lines.
Disconnect the two lines. Dispose of drained oil and return container under lines.
8
7
CAUTION
During operation of hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, observe
head-end pressure gage to verify pressure buildup does not exceed
100 psi (689.4 kPa) or damage to gearbox seals may result.
NOTE
(3) Using rear drive adapter, rotate low pressure rotor 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft
looking forward) while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer pump, 1C3569,
handle (maintain 20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate low pressure
rotor and activate pump handle for 2 minutes.
Change 3 21
(4) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from D- and E-sump
oil supply line. Reconnect oil supply line. Tighten fitting to 450-550 lb in.
(50.8-62.1 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-PRF-23699F (C/I): Combustible. Do not
inhale, ingest, or let this material touch you. Irritant. Personal
protective equipment required. Use mechanical exhaust ventila-
tion - if not available, use an approved respirator.
(6) Pour oil mixture from container into hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, reservoir.
If reservoir does not contain approximately 6 quarts (6 liters) (reservoir capacity),
mix an additional 5 percent mixture and fill reservoir.
22 Change 3
(1) Locate B- and C-sump oil supply line (figure 7) and disconnect fitting at main
lube supply manifold. Connect hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line
with reducer, AN919-13.
(2) Locate B- and C-scavenge lines (figure 7) and place container under lines.
Disconnect two lines. Dispose of drained oil and return container under lines.
Change 3 23
NOTE
(3) Use ratchet in manual drive pad to rotate core 5-10 RPM clockwise (aft looking
forward) while operating hydraulic unit pressurizer pump, 1C3569, handle
(maintain 20 psig [137.8 kPa] minimum pressure). Rotate core and activate pump
handle for 2 minutes.
(4) Remove hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, head-end line from B- and C-sump
oil supply line. Reconnect oil supply line and tighten fitting to 650-750 lb in.
(73.4-84.7 N·m) of torque.
(5) Reconnect B- and C-scavenge lines and two gaskets. Tighten bolts and nuts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
WARNING
(6) Remove ratchet from gearbox drive pad. Lubricate preformed packing with
lubricating oil, and install preformed packing onto cover plate.
(7) Reinstall cover plate, four washers, and four nuts. Tighten nuts to 55-70 lb in.
(6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Pump all oil/preservative mixture from hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569,
reservoir and agitate using fresh lubricating oil in reservoir. Pump all oil from
reservoir and dispose of oil.
(9) Disconnect reducer from hydraulic unit pressurizer, 1C3569, line and reinstall
-6/-4 reducer, nut, and cap on head-end line.
24 Change 3
E. Cover or plug all engine openings and unattached fittings. Cover inlet, exhaust, and
VBV openings using moisture barrier paper, if possible.
WARNING
NOTE
A. Add Brayco 599, preventive, to lube oil tank to obtain 5 percent mixture.
NOTE
(3) Motor engine for minimum of 10 minutes with XN25 greater than 2000 rpm and
XN2 greater than 200 rpm.
Change 3 25
CAUTION
C. Perform paragraphs 7.A through 7.C, as applicable, every 30 days. Update engine log
to include oil wetting dates.
WARNING
Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to the
skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive tract.
Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swallow liquid,
and don't breathe mist or vapor.
(2) Disconnect maintenance outlet hose from engine fuel pump. Drain fuel into
suitable container.
9
WARNING
(3) Remove maintenance drain plug from engine fuel pump. Drain fuel into suitable
container. Discard preformed packing.
26 Change 3
Change 3 27
(4) Lubricate new preformed packing using fuel system preservation oil and install
onto fuel pump maintenance drain plug.
(5) Install maintenance drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque. Safety-wire plug.
(6) Remove bolts that secure pressure bypass hose onto engine fuel pump. Drain fuel
into suitable container. Remove hose. Inspect seal gasket for serviceability.
Discard damaged seal gasket.
(7) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Drain fuel into suitable container. Discard
preformed packing.
(8) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install
onto filter bowl drain plug. Install drain plug into filter bowl. Tighten drain plug to
135-150 lb in. (15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
Ensure connecting fitting is restrained when tightening coupling
nut. Failure to comply may result in part damage.
(10) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install on
reducer. Install reducer into interstage pressure tap. Tighten reducer to
135-150 lb in. (15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(11) Connect rod-end hose of fuel system preservation pump, 2C6395, onto interstage
pressure tap fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of
torque. Ensure remaining pump hoses are plugged.
(12) Fill fuel system preservation pump, 2C6395, with fuel system preservation oil.
(13) Fill engine fuel pump with fuel system preservation oil using fuel system
preservation pump, 2C6395. Continue pumping until oil runs freely from pressure
bypass port.
(14) Install new or serviceable packager-supplied seal gasket onto pressure bypass
hose. Using bolts, install pressure bypass hose onto fuel pump. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
(15) Continue pumping fuel system preservation oil into engine fuel pump until a
minimum of 1 quart (0.9 liter) of clear preservation oil runs freely from pressure
outlet fitting.
28 Change 3
(16) Install pressure outlet hose onto fitting. Tighten fitting to 112-128 lb ft
(152-174 N·m) of torque.
(18) Remove reducer from interstage pressure tap. Discard preformed packing.
(19) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install
onto interstage pressure tap plug.
(20) Install interstage pressure tap plug into fuel pump. Tighten plug to 135-150 lb in.
(15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Perform paragraphs 7.A through 7.C, as applicable, every 30 days. Update engine log
to include oil wetting dates.
NOTE
A. Container should be stored in an area shaded from direct sunlight and within limits of
normal environment. Engine storage log should be maintained and updated every 30
days, to include recorded humidity condition, oil wetting dates, and desiccant
replacement.
(4) Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. Indicator should appear
blue, indicating safe humidity conditions. If indicator appears pink, the following
steps must be complied with within 14 days:
Change 3 29
(1) Engine storage log should be maintained and updated to include oil wetting dates.
NOTE
A. Container should be stored in an area shaded from direct sunlight and within limits of
normal environment. Engine storage log should be maintained and updated every 30
days, to include recorded humidity condition, oil wetting dates, and desiccant
replacement.
B. For gas turbine to be installed in shipping container, preserve liquid fuel pump, if
installed, as follows (figure 9):
NOTE
WARNING
Fuel in liquid, vapor, or mist form is flammable, irritating to the
skin and respiratory tract, and poisonous in the digestive tract.
Remove saturated clothing, wash skin well, don't swallow liquid,
and don't breathe mist or vapor.
(2) Disconnect maintenance outlet hose from engine fuel pump. Drain fuel into a
suitable container.
(3) Remove maintenance drain plug from engine fuel pump. Drain fuel into a suitable
container. Discard preformed packing.
30 Change 3
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6081, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(4) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install
onto fuel pump maintenance drain plug.
(5) Install maintenance drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque. Safety-wire plug.
(6) Remove bolts that secure pressure bypass hose onto engine fuel pump. Drain fuel
into suitable container. Remove hose. Inspect seal gasket for serviceability.
Discard damaged seal gasket.
(7) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Drain fuel into suitable container. Discard
preformed packing.
(8) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install
onto filter bowl drain plug. Install drain plug into filter bowl. Tighten drain plug
to 135-150 lb in. (15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
CAUTION
(10) Lubricate new preformed packing with fuel system preservation oil and install on
reducer. Install reducer into interstage pressure tap. Tighten reducer to
135-150 lb in. (15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(11) Connect rod-end hose of fuel system preservation pump, 2C6395, onto interstage
pressure tap fitting. Tighten coupling nut to 450-550 lb in. (50.8-62.1 N·m) of
torque. Ensure remaining pump hoses are plugged.
(12) Fill fuel system preservation pump, 2C6395, with fuel system preservation oil.
(13) Fill engine fuel pump with fuel system preservation oil using fuel system
preservation pump, 2C6395. Continue pumping until oil runs freely from the
pressure bypass port.
Change 3 31
(14) Install new or serviceable packager-supplied seal gasket onto pressure bypass onto
hose. Using bolts, install pressure bypass hose onto fuel pump. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
NOTE
(18) Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. Indicator should appear
blue, indicating safe humidity conditions. If indicator appears pink, the following
steps must be complied with within 14 days:
(f) Inspect humidity indicator at least once every 30 days. If indicator appears
pink, complete corrective actions per steps (18)(a) through (e) within 14 days
and start humidity inspection period again.
(1) Maintain and update engine storage log to include oil wetting dates.
(2) Preserve liquid fuel pump, if installed, per paragraphs 12.B.(1) through 12.B.(14).
(4) Repeat gas turbine preservation per paragraphs 7.C.(1) or 7.C.(2) every 30 days.
32 Change 3
WARNING
(2) Remove drain plug from forward side of accessory gearbox. Drain oil into
suitable container. Discard packing.
(3) Lubricate preformed packing with lubricating oil and install onto accessory
gearbox drain plug.
(4) Install accessory gearbox drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in.
(30.5-33.8 N·m) of torque.
(5) Fill lubricating oil tank with lubricating oil per packager's manual.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-6081, is toxic to skin, eyes, and respira-
tory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
(1) Remove maintenance drain plug from engine fuel pump. Drain fuel system
preservation oil into suitable container. Discard packing.
(2) Lubricate new preformed packing using fuel system preservation oil, and install
onto fuel pump maintenance drain plug.
(3) Install maintenance drain plug. Tighten plug to 270-300 lb in. (30.5-33.8 N·m) of
torque.
Change 3 33
(4) Remove bolts that secure pressure bypass hose to engine fuel pump. Drain fuel
system preservation oil into suitable container. Inspect seal gasket for
serviceability. Discard damaged seal gasket.
(5) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Drain fuel system preservation oil into suitable
container. Discard packing.
WARNING
(6) Lubricate preformed packing with fuel and install onto filter bowl drain plug.
Install drain plug into either bowl. Tighten drain plug to 135-150 lb in.
(15.2-16.9 N·m) of torque.
(7) Install new or serviceable packager-supplied seal gasket onto pressure bypass
hose. Using bolts, install pressure bypass hose onto fuel pump. Tighten bolts to
55-70 lb in. (6.2-7.9 N·m) of torque.
34 Change 3
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE MAINTENANCE DOLLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing gas turbine in
maintenance dolly.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
NOTE
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
CAUTION
A. Install only those supports required for maintenance task being performed.
See figures 1 and 2 to determine which supports are required.
2
1
B. If required, install trunnion pedestals, 1C9378P02 and P03, onto maintenance dolly,
1C9372, with bolts, washers, and nuts. Boltheads face up, washers under both bolts
and nuts. Tighten nuts to 70-80 lb ft (94.9-108.5 N·m) of torque. See figure 3.
3
C. If required, install air collector support pedestals, 1C9378P10, onto maintenance dolly,
1C9372, with bolts, washers, and nuts, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts
finger-tight. See figure 4.
4
D. Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install turbine rear frame (TRF) support pedestals,
1C9378P06, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Boltheads face up, washers under nuts.
Tighten nuts finger-tight. See figure 5.
5
E. Install gas turbine into maintenance dolly, 1C9372, as follows:
NOTE
(1) Adjust height of pedestals to lower or higher maintenance position. Secure with
quick-release pins.
WARNING
(3) If required, secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion adapters with locknuts.
Tighten locknuts to 50 lb ft (68 N·m) of torque. See figure 3.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
NOTE
(4) If required, adjust air collector support pedestal position on maintenance dolly,
1C9372. See figure 4. Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft
(94.9-108.5 N·m) of torque.
(5) If required, turn adjusting nut to align air collector support pedestal mount with
forward air collector support adapter, 1C9375. Install quick-release pin.
(6) Adjust TRF support pedestal position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372. See
figure 5. Tighten pedestal retaining nuts to 70-80 lb ft (94.9-108.5 N·m) of torque.
Turn support pedestal yoke to align TRF pedestal bracket, 1C9373P35, with gas
turbine rear mount.
(7) Using TRF mount pin, secure gas turbine onto TRF support pedestal bracket,
1C9378P35. Install quick-release pins through TRF mount pins.
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
(1) Slowly release tension on hoist until lift fixture pins rotate freely. Position lift
fixture trolley at center of gravity (CG).
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift
parts. Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally
move or fall, they can cause an injury or kill you.
(2) Remove TRF fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point quick-release
pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
G. Install compressor rear frame (CRF) support jack assembly, 1C9448, as follows
(figure 7):
7
NOTE
(1) Install spacer, 1C9448P13, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372, cross plate and
secure with screws, washers, and nuts. Screwheads face up, washers under nuts.
Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install support jack assembly, 1C9448, onto cross plate or spacer, as required.
Secure with screws, washers, and nuts. Screwheads face up, washers under nuts.
Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(3) Install CRF cradle, 1C9448P10, onto support jack assembly arm, 1C9448P05.
Secure with quick-release pin.
(4) Adjust support jack assembly, 1C9448, position on maintenance dolly, 1C9372,
by moving cross plate. Tighten cross plate nuts to 70-80 lb ft (95-108 N·m) of
torque.
(5) Turn nut and rod-end nut, in even increments, until CRF cradle is aligned and
touching CRF.
Change 5 9
10 Change 5
NOTE
(2) Install universal support pedestals, 1C9378P06, and yoke, 1C9378P08, onto
maintenance dolly, 1C9372, with bolts, washers, and nuts. Boltheads face up,
washers under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
12 Change 5
Change 5 13
(1) Position VIGV support ring, 1C9371, onto VIGV case front flange or inlet frame
assembly front flange using 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling. Secure ring with bolts
and washers. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in. (4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
(2) Using bolts, washers, and nuts, install universal support pedestals, 1C9378P06,
and yoke, 1C9378P08, onto maintenance dolly, 1C9372. Boltheads face up,
washers under nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
WARNING
Establish and record the center of gravity of the horizontal
lift fixture to prevent fixture from pitching when being dis-
connected from the gas turbine. Failure to comply may
cause serious injury or gas turbine damage.
(1) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist to horizontal lift fixture, 1C9265.
WARNING
(2) Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9265, to working height. Level fixture by adjusting
trolley. Record CG measurement.
14 Change 5
Change 5 15
(3) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9265, over gas turbine. Secure lift fixture clevis,
1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine rear frame with quick-release pins.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install
quick-release pin.
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for
engines with VIGV installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for
engines with inlet frame installed. Incorrect positioning may
cause lift fixture/gas turbine damage.
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with VIGV
installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame installed.
Slowly apply small amount of lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly
attached to gas turbine.
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in maintenance
dolly support mounts. Mount pins shall turn freely.
(1) Adjust universal support pedestal adjusting nut to allow quick-release pins to
rotate freely. Remove quick-release pins.
(2) Attach a 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling on VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Apply
sufficient lifting force to VIGV support ring for removal.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift
parts. Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally
move or fall, they can cause an injury or kill you.
(3) Remove bolts and washers from VIGV support ring, 1C9371. Remove support
ring.
(2) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure LPC forward support adapters,
1C9377, onto LPC case. Remove LPC forward support adapters.
16 Change 5
(2) Adjust support jack knurled nut until CRF cradle quick-release pin turns freely.
Remove quick-release pin and CRF cradle.
E. Adjust universal support pedestal, 1C9378P06, to release tension on TRF mount pins.
See figure 5. Pins shall rotate freely. Remove quick-release pins. Remove TRF mount
pins.
F. Remove forward air collector support adapters, 1C9375, as follows (figure 4):
(1) Adjust air collector support pedestal adjusting nut to allow quick-release pin to
rotate freely.
(2) Remove quick-release pin and forward air collector support adapter, 1C9375.
G. Remove locknuts that secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion adapters.
See figure 3.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift
parts. Stay out from below loads. If the parts accidentally
move or fall, they can cause an injury or kill you.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE/SUPPORT PEDESTAL REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the gas turbine in the
support pedestals.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Steam/Fuel Manifold Shipping Bracket Fixture Replacement WP 3015 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
CAUTION
A. Use only those supports required for the maintenance task being performed. See
figures 1 and 2 to determine which supports are required.
2
1
B. Install gas turbine onto support pedestal, 1C9384, as follows:
(1) If required, secure gas turbine onto trunnion support pedestals, 9448M53, as
follows (figure 3):
3
(a) Align trunnion support pedestals, 9448M53, with gas turbine trunnions.
(b) Using locknuts, secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion support pedestals,
9448M53. Tighten locknuts to 50 lb ft (67.8 N·m) of torque.
(2) If required, secure gas turbine onto air collector support pedestals, 9448M52, as
follows (figure 4):
4
NOTE
(a) Align air collector support pedestals, 9448M52, with air collector support
adapters, 1C9375.
(b) Adjust support pedestal yokes, as required, and install quick-release pins.
(3) Secure gas turbine onto turbine rear frame (TRF) support pedestals, 9448M84, as
fol-lows (figure 5):
5
(a) Align CRF support pedestals, 9448M84, with gas turbine mounts.
(b) Turn support pedestal yokes, as required, and install mount pins. Mount pins
shall rotate freely. Install quick-release pins through mount pins.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
WARNING
(2) Remove TRF fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point quick-release
pin. Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, clear of gas turbine.
D. Support gas turbine with compressor rear frame (CRF) support jack assembly,
1C9448, as follows (figure 7):
7
(1) Install CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448, onto support pedestal, 9448M85.
Using bolts and nuts, secure support jack. Tighten nuts to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
(2) Install CRF cradle, 1C9448P10, onto CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448.
Secure with quick-release pin.
(3) Position CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448, under gas turbine. Turn knurled nut
and rod-end nut, in even increments, until cradle is aligned and touching CRF.
NOTE
Install LPC support adapters only if VIGV case has been removed.
E. Install low pressure compressor (LPC) support adapters, 1C9377, and secure gas
turbine onto LPC support pedestals as follows (figure 8):
8
(1) Install LPC support adapters, 1C9377, onto LPC case front flange by aligning
split-line markings on adapters with the LPC case split-line. Secure using bolts,
washers, and nuts. Tighten nuts to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align gas turbine support pedestals, 9448M51, with LPC support adapters,
1C9377.
(3) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts, as required, and install quick-release pins.
Change 5 9
10 Change 5
F. Install variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) case support ring assembly, 1C9371, and
secure gas turbine onto VIGV support pedestals as follows (figure 9):
9
(1) Position VIGV case support ring assembly, 1C9371, on VIGV case front flange or
inlet frame assembly front flange using 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling. Secure ring
assembly with 27 capscrews and washers. Tighten bolts to 40-60 lb in.
(4.5-6.8 N·m) of torque.
(2) Align gas turbine support pedestals, 9448M51, with ring assembly.
(3) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts, as required, and install quick-release pins.
G. Remove fuel/steam manifold shipping fixture bracket assembly per WP 3015 00.
(1) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625.
Change 5 11
12 Change 5
Change 5 13
14 Change 5
WARNING
• Establish and record the center of gravity of the horizontal
lift fixture to prevent fixture from pitching when being dis-
connected from the gas turbine. Failure to comply may cause
serious injury or gas turbine damage.
(2) Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, to working height. Level fixture by
adjusting trolley. Record CG measurement.
(3) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, over gas turbine. Secure lift fixture clevis,
1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on TRF using quick-release pins.
(4) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, front frame adapter onto front frame
forward lift point. Install quick-release pin.
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for
engines with VIGV installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for
engines with inlet frame installed. Incorrect positioning may cause
lift fixture/gas turbine damage.
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with VIGV
installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame installed.
Slowly apply small amount of lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly
attached to gas turbine.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in support
mounts. Mount pins shall turn freely.
B. Remove fuel/steam manifold shipping fixture bracket assembly per WP 3015 00.
C. Remove VIGV case support ring assembly, 1C9371, as follows (figure 9):
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts to allow quick-release pins to rotate freely.
Remove quick-release pins.
(2) Attach 1-ton (907 kg) hoist and sling to VIGV case support ring assembly,
1C9371. Take up slack on hoist.
Change 5 15
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(3) Remove capscrews and washers from ring assembly. Remove ring assembly.
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nuts to allow quick-release pins to rotate freely.
Remove quick-release pins. Remove pedestals.
(2) Remove bolts, washers, and nuts that secure LPC support adapters, 1C9377, onto
LPC case. Remove LPC support adapters.
(1) Adjust CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448, rod-end nut to release pressure on
CRF.
(2) Adjust CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448, adjusting nut until CRF cradle
quick-release pin turns freely. Remove quick-release pin and CRF cradle.
(3) Remove bolts and nuts that secure CRF support jack assembly, 1C9448, to
support ped-estal, 9448M54. Remove support jack.
(1) Adjust support pedestal adjusting nut to release tension on mount pins. Pins shall
rotate freely. Remove quick-release pins. Remove mount pins.
(1) Turn support pedestal yoke to allow quick-release pin to rotate freely.
H. Remove locknuts that secure gas turbine trunnions onto trunnion adapters on support
pedestals, 9448M53P02. See figure 3.
WARNING
16 Change 5
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE IN SHIPPING CONTAINER
REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the gas turbine in the
shipping container. Refer to paragraph 3 for a list of applicable shipping container part numbers.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
LM6000 PC, PD, PF, PG, and PH Gas Turbine Shipping and Storage Containers
Stencil for all Stencil for Stencil for Stencil for Stencil for
Containers 106C7154P04 106C7154P05 106C7154P06 106C7154P07
Total Weight 30,619 lb 30,619 lb 30,619 lb 30,819 lb
(13,889 kg) (13,889 kg) (13,889 kg) (13,979 kg)
Container 10,619 lb 10,619 lb 10,619 lb 10,819 lb
(4817 kg) (4817 kg) (4817 kg) (4907 kg)
Maximum Gas 20,000 lb 20,000 lb 20,000 lb 20,000 lb
Turbine Weight (9072 kg) (9072 kg) (9072 kg) (9072 kg)
Cube 1274 cu ft 1274 cu ft 1274 cu ft 1274 cu ft
(36 cu m) (36 cu m) (36 cu m) (36 cu m)
Width 8.5 ft (2.6 m) 8.5 ft (2.6 m) 8.5 ft (2.6 m) 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
Height 8.3 ft (2.5 m) 8.3 ft (2.5 m) 8.3 ft (2.5 m) 8.3 ft (2.5 m)
Length 18.2 ft (5.6 m) 18.2 ft (5.6 m) 18.2 ft (5.6 m) 18.2 ft (5.6 m)
Note: The weight of container, 106C7154, with addition of air ride (soft ride) kit, is
increased by 2000 pounds (907 kg).
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Desiccant MIL-D-3464
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure crane is of sufficient lifting capacity when moving ship-
ping container with engine installed, into and out of truck.
WARNING
(4) Raise lid straight up until clear of gas turbine and place on wood blocks. Remove
hoist and sling.
(1) Remove five bolts and nuts from air collector lower forward flange on each side.
See figure 4.
4
(2) Remove two aft bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel onto support
bracket. Loosen forward bolt on support bracket and swing bracket clear of air
collector flange.
(3) Using five bolts, install air collector support adapters, 1C9375, onto air collector
lower forward flange. Tighten bolts to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
See figure 5.
5
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
WARNING
(4) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist onto horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from
under suspended loads to prevent injury.
(5) Raise horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, to working height. Level fixture by
adjusting trolley. Record center of gravity (CG) measurement.
(6) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, over gas turbine. Using quick-release
pins, secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine rear
frame. See figure 6.
6
Change 5 7
8 Change 5
Change 5 9
(7) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point. Install quick-
release pin. See figure 6.
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with
VIGV installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame
installed. Incorrect positioning may cause lift fixture/gas turbine damage.
(8) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with VIGV installed, and
31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame installed. Slowly apply small amount
of lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is properly attached to gas turbine.
(9) Remove nuts, lockwashers, and flat washers from trunnions. See figure 7.
(10) Remove four bolts and lockwashers that secure upper pillow blocks. Remove upper pillow
blocks. See figure 2.
(11) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in rear mounts. Rear
mount pins shall turn freely.
7
10 Change 5
WARNING
• Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under
suspended loads to prevent injury.
• Ensure hoist and lift fixture are aligned prior to removing rear
mount pins. Failure to comply may result in gas turbine shifting,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Ensure rear mount links do not drop onto gas turbine components while
gas turbine is being raised. Gas turbine damage may result.
(12) Remove rear mount pins and raise gas turbine clear of container.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
(1) Slowly lower gas turbine into changeout dolly, 1C9354. Align air collector
support adapters, 1C9375, with changeout dolly, forward supports. Install
quick-release pin on both sides. See figure 5.
(2) Push right rear support clevis pin inboard and align with turbine rear mount. Install
mount pin. Install quick-release pin through mount pin. Install
quick-release pin through rear mount support and clevis pin.
(3) Push left rear support clevis pin inboard and align with turbine rear mount by adjusting
support. Install mount pin. Install quick-release pin through mount pin. Install quick-
release pin through rear mount support and clevis pin.
(4) Position lift fixture trolley at CG. Slowly release tension on hoist until lift fixture pins
rotate freely.
Change 5 11
WARNING
• Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before discon-
necting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in gas tur-
bine damage or serious injury.
• Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under
suspended loads to prevent injury.
(5) Remove two turbine rear frame fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward lift point
quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
(6) Remove straight pin, washers, and cotter pin from turbine rear frame sway mount. See
figure 8.
8
7. Gas Turbine Installation into Shipping Container.
CAUTION
Ensure crane is of sufficient lifting capacity when moving shipping container with
engine installed, into and out of truck.
NOTE
• Prior to installation of the gas turbine into the shipping container the fuel sys-
tem must be drained and purged according to the procedure in WP 3010 00.
• Prior to installation of gas turbine into the shipping container, make sure
appropriate shipping container is being used. Refer to paragraph 3 for a list of
applicable shipping container part numbers.
A. Prepare shipping container (refer to paragraph 3 for applicable part numbers) for gas turbine
installation as follows:
(1) Remove four bolts and lockwashers that secure trunnion mount upper pillow blocks.
Remove upper pillow blocks. See figure 2.
(2) Loosen four bolts that secure trunnion mount lower pillow blocks, to provide for lateral
adjustment.
(3) Position aft mount links outboard. Loosen right mount link jamnut.
(4) Lower four corner posts.
(5) Position aft mount links to proper position (farthest aft location).
12 Change 5
Change 5 13
WARNING
(2) Attach 15-ton (13,607 kg) hoist to horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625. Raise fixture
to working height. Level fixture by adjusting trolley. Record CG measurement.
(3) Position horizontal lift fixture, 1C9625, over gas turbine. Using quick-release
pins, secure lift fixture clevis, 1C9625P09, onto rear mounts on turbine rear
frame. See figure 6.
(4) Position lift fixture front frame adapter onto front frame forward lift point.
Install quick-release pin.
CAUTION
Ensure lift fixture trolley is set to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for
engines with VIGV installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for
engines with inlet frame installed. Incorrect positioning may
cause lift fixture/gas turbine damage.
(5) Position lift fixture trolley to 30.1 inches (764.5 mm) for engines with VIGV
installed, and 31.8 inches (807.7 mm) for engines with inlet frame installed.
Slowly apply small amount of lifting force on hoist. Ensure lift fixture is prop-
erly attached to gas turbine.
WARNING
(6) Apply sufficient lifting force on hoist to allow gas turbine to float in mounts.
Mount pins shall turn freely.
(7) Remove air collector support adapter quick-release pins. See figure 5.
14 Change 5
(8) Remove quick-release pins that secure mount pins onto turbine rear frame.
Remove mount pins.
(9) Remove quick-release pins that secure clevis pins onto support. Pull clevis pins
outboard for maximum clearance.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure rear mount links do not drop onto gas turbine components
while gas turbine is being lowered into container, or gas turbine
damage may result.
NOTE
Prior to installation of gas turbine into the shipping container, make
sure appropriate shipping container is being used. Refer to
paragraph 3 for a list of applicable shipping container part numbers.
(1) Lower gas turbine into shipping container. Align trunnion mounts with lower
pillow blocks. Align aft mount links with turbine rear frame mounts. See
figure 2.
(2) Install left rear mount pin, washers, and cotter pin. One washer under pinhead,
one washer under cotter pin. Secure pin with cotter pin.
(3) Adjust right rear mount link, as required, until mount pin can be inserted freely.
Install mount pin, washers, and cotter pin. One washer under pinhead, one
washer under cotter pin. Secure pin with cotter pin. Hand-tighten adjustable link
jamnut.
(5) Using four bolts and lockwashers, install upper pillow blocks (figure 2). Tighten
bolts to 50-70 lb ft (67.8-94.9 N·m) of torque.
Change 5 15
(6) Install flat washers, lockwashers, and nuts onto gas turbine trunnions. Tighten
nuts to 200-250 lb ft (271.2-339.0 N·m) of torque.
(7) Tighten lower pillow block bolts to 50-70 lb ft (67.8-94.9 N·m) of torque.
(8) Position lift fixture trolley at CG. Slowly apply sufficient lifting force to allow lift
fixture pins to rotate freely.
WARNING
(9) Remove two turbine rear frame lift fixture quick-release pins. Remove forward
lift point quick-release pin. Raise lift fixture clear of gas turbine.
(10) Remove five bolts that secure air collector support adapters, 1C9375, onto air
collector lower forward flange. Remove support adapters.
(11) Position No. 1 electrical interface panel bracket. Secure bracket onto air collector
with two bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts finger-tight. Install eight remaining bolts
and nuts onto air collector forward flange. Tighten eight air collector nuts to
480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
(12) Install two bolts that secure No. 1 electrical interface panel onto bracket. Tighten
three bolts to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Tighten two nuts that secure
bracket onto air collector to 480-570 lb in. (54.3-64.4 N·m) of torque.
(3) Ensure flange and gasket on enclosure base are clean and serviceable.
16 Change 5
NOTE
• Ensure tee bolts are aligned in recess and nuts have been loosened
prior to installing the lid on the shipping container.
• Up to two tee bolts per side (eight total) can be missing, provided
missing tee bolt locations are not adjacent and are not at the corners.
(4) Attach 4-ton (3,628 kg) hoist and sling to two lifting rings at top of lid. Attach two
control lines to opposite ends of lid.
WARNING
Ensure lift fixture is located at the center of gravity before dis-
connecting from gas turbine. Failure to comply may result in gas
turbine damage or serious injury.
(5) Lower lid straight down over gas turbine, aligning forward and aft guide pins.
Ensure flanges seat.
(7) Rotate tee bolts until long side of bolthead is perpendicular to flange. Tighten tee
bolt nuts to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque. Re-torque tee bolts to
420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque. Continue to re-torque until all tee bolts
are tightened to 420-510 lb in. (47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque. See figure 3.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
AIR RIDE KIT INSTALLATION
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
1 - 10 ................. 5
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Air Ride Kit Installation.......................................................................................................... 3
Air Ride Kit Removal. ............................................................................................................ 9
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package provides instructions for installing and removing the LM6000 gas turbine shipping
container air ride kit. The air ride kit is designed to reduce the possibility of bearing damage in gas
generators and gas turbines installed in shipping containers, in areas where trucks and trailers with air
ride suspensions may not be available.
The air ride kit is made up of two box assemblies. Each assembly is made up of two interconnected air
ride boxes. During shipping, one air ride box assembly is attached to each end of the gas turbine shipping
container.
Each air ride box assembly weighs approximately 850 pounds (386 kg).
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Compressed air
2 Change 5
NOTE
• Air ride kit can only be installed on containers that have a dark blue painted
base (bottom section of container).
• Two interconnected air ride boxes make up each air ride box assembly.
A. Open air pressure release valves (9, figure 1), two valves inside each of the four air
ride boxes (1 and 15), to release any residual air pressure present in the air bags.
B. Remove bolts (5) that secure air ride box lids (2) to boxes. Open box lids.
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay out from
below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can cause an injury or
death.
CAUTION
Yellow lifting bars on air ride boxes are for installation or removal of air ride
boxes only. Do not attempt to lift gas turbine shipping container using air ride
box lifting bars, or damage to air ride box, shipping container, or gas turbine
may result.
C. Using forklift, or overhead hoist with a minimum 1000-pound (454 kg) capacity, connected
to yellow lifting bars (4), move left side air ride box (1) into position at end of gas turbine
shipping container (11). Align boltholes in air ride box to boltholes in gas turbine shipping
container.
NOTE
Do not fully tighten bolts until both air ride boxes and connecting channel have
been installed with all bolts hand-tight.
D. Secure left side air ride box (1) to gas turbine shipping container with 12 bolts (3). Tighten bolts
hand-tight.
E. Repeat steps 6.C. and 6.D. to install right side air ride box (15) to gas turbine shipping
container.
F. Install connecting channel (13) to air ride boxes (1 and 15), aligning boltholes in connecting
channel with boltholes in air ride boxes. Secure connecting channel to each air ride box with
four bolts (12). Tighten bolts hand-tight.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
6 Change 5
I. Repeat steps 6.C. through 6.H. to install second air ride box assembly to other end of gas
turbine shipping container.
J. Verify, and adjust as necessary, that adjustable shock dampers (14) are set to the No. 6 setting.
K. Close lids on the four air ride boxes and secure each lid with two bolts (5). Tighten bolts to
69-81 lb ft (94-109 N·m) of torque.
L. Open the two air shutoff valves (6) inside each of the four air ride boxes.
WARNING
Serious injury can occur when applying pneumatic pressure. Eye protection is
required. Relieve pressure before disconnecting lines and fittings.
M. Using compressed air and air pressure gauges (7), apply air to air inlet valves (8) to inflate air
bags to 50-60 psig (345-413 kPa gage) for the gas turbine model to be transported.
NOTE
If gas turbine shipping container is to be transported empty, it is acceptable, but
not a requirement, to pressurize air bags.
N. After air bags are pressurized to the correct air pressure setting, remove compressed air source
and close the two air shutoff valves (6) inside each of the four air ride boxes.
Change 5 7
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay out from
below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can cause an injury or
death.
CAUTION
Yellow lifting bars on air ride boxes are for installation or removal of air ride
boxes only. Do not attempt to lift gas turbine shipping container using air ride
box lifting bars, or damage to air ride box, shipping container, or gas turbine
may result.
NOTE
If gas turbine shipping container is lifted with a forklift or overhead crane or
hoist, air ride box assemblies may sag off ends of shipping container. This is
acceptable and will not damage the air ride box assemblies or container.
O. Using forklift, or overhead crane or hoist, install gas turbine shipping container on truck trailer
bed.
CAUTION
During transport of gas turbine, make sure shipping container is not directly
chained to or in direct contact with trailer bed, or damage to gas turbine
bearings may result.
P. Secure air ride boxes on each corner of gas turbine shipping container to truck trailer bed,
using chains between trailer and tie down rings (10) on air ride box (figure 2). Make sure
clearance between gas turbine shipping container (11) and bed of truck is between 2-3 inches
(51-76 mm). Gas turbine shipping container must not be chained to or in direct contact with
trailer bed.
Q. If clearance between gas turbine shipping container (11) and bed of truck is not between
2-3 inches (51-76 mm), remove tie-down chains and verify air ride box inflation pressure of
50-60 psig (345-413 kPa gage).
8 Change 5
WARNING
Always use approved equipment and procedures to lift parts. Stay out from
below loads. If the parts accidentally move or fall, they can cause an injury or
death.
CAUTION
Yellow lifting bars on air ride boxes are for installation or removal of air ride
boxes only. Do not attempt to lift gas turbine shipping container using air ride
box lifting bars, or damage to air ride box, shipping container, or gas turbine
may result.
NOTE
If gas turbine shipping container is lifted with a forklift or overhead crane, air ride
kits may sag off ends of shipping container. This is acceptable and will not damage
the kits or container.
A. If necessary, using forklift or overhead crane or hoist, remove gas turbine shipping
container from truck trailer bed and place on shop floor or other suitable surface.
B. Open the two air shutoff valves (6, figure 1) inside each of the four air ride boxes (1 and 15).
C. Open two air pressure release valves (9) inside each of the four air ride boxes, to release air
pressure present in the air bags.
D. Remove bolts (12) that secure connecting channel (13) to left and right air ride boxes (1 and
15). Remove connecting channel.
E. Remove bolts (5) that secure air ride box lids (2) to air ride boxes. Open box lids.
F. Remove bolts (3) that secure air ride boxes to gas turbine shipping container (11).
G. Using forklift, or overhead hoist with a minimum 1000-pound (454 kg) capacity, connected to
yellow lifting bars (4), remove each air ride box from gas turbine shipping container (11).
Change 5 9
10 Change 5
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
STEAM/FUEL MANIFOLD SHIPPING BRACKET
FIXTURE REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the steam/fuel
manifold shipping bracket fixture assembly.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
NOTE
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
See figure 1.
1
A. Apply thread lubricant to threads of all screws.
B. Using screw, washer, and nut, install single leg bracket onto aft support tube. Washer
under nut, screwhead faces aft. Tighten nut finger-tight.
C. Using screws, washers, and nuts, install double leg bracket onto aft support tube.
Washers under nuts, screwheads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
D. Position aft support tube over compressor rear frame (CRF) aft flange. Using screws,
washers, and nuts, secure single and double leg brackets onto CRF gas turbine mount
brackets. Washers under nuts, screwheads face aft. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
E. Remove manifold adapters from left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) support tubes.
F. Slide LH and RH support tubes into air collector brackets. Using screws, washers, and
nuts, secure LH and RH support tubes under aft support bracket. Washers under nuts,
screwheads face up. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
G. Install manifold adapters so that slots slide over pins on LH and RH support tubes.
Using screws and nuts, secure manifold adapters to LH and RH support tubes.
Screwheads face outward. Tighten nuts finger-tight.
NOTE
H. Check alignment between manifold adapters and fuel/steam manifold brackets. Install
screws finger-tight.
I. Tighten nuts that secure manifold adapters onto LH and RH support tubes to
160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
J. Install screws, washers, and nuts that secure LH and RH support tubes onto air
collector brackets. Screwheads face up, washers under nuts. Tighten nuts to
160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
K. Tighten nuts that secure single and double leg brackets onto CRF gas turbine mount
brackets to 160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
L. Tighten nuts that secure single and double leg brackets onto aft support tube to
160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
M. Tighten nuts that secure LH and RH support tubes onto aft support tube to
160-210 lb in. (18.1-23.7 N·m) of torque.
See figure 1.
CAUTION
Ensure that fuel and steam manifolds are securely attached onto
the packager's supporting stanchions before removing shipping
bracket fixture assembly.
A. Remove nuts, washers, and screws that secure LH and RH support tubes onto air
collector brackets.
B. Remove screws that secure manifold adapters onto fuel/steam manifold brackets.
C. Remove nuts, washers, and screws that secure manifold adapters onto LH and RH
support tubes. Remove manifold adapters.
D. Remove nuts, washers, and screws that secure LH and RH support tube onto aft
support tube. Remove LH and RH support tube.
E. Remove nuts, washers, and screws that secure single and double leg brackets onto
CRF gas turbine mount brackets. Remove aft support tube with assembled brackets.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT) MODULE IN
SHIPPING CONTAINER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 2 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for removing and installing the LPT module in the
shipping container utilizing a single hoist.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module Replacement WP 2710 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Desiccant MIL-D-3464
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 6
(2) Loosen nuts on tee-head bolts that secure shipping container top. Rotate tee-head
bolts so boltheads drop into lower flange recess (figure 1, sheet 2, section A-A).
2
(3) Attach 2-ton (1,814.4 kg) hoist and sling to four lifting rings along sides of top.
Attach two control lines to opposite ends of top.
WARNING
(4) Raise top straight up until clear of module and place on wood blocks. Remove
hoist and sling.
(1) Lower four alignment tubes, located in corners of the container, by pulling cotter
pin, view A.
(2) Remove shaft restraint lock from center of LPT rotor shaft by turning rod until
lock is removed, view B.
(3) Install strongback fixture, 1C9613, onto LPT module per WP 2710 00. Use
two-leg sling and 10-ton (9,071.9 kg) hoist to install strongback.
(4) Remove 16 capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure support plate to mounting
frame.
(6) Remove four capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure center shaft restraint and
extension assembly to mounting frame, view B. Remove center shaft restraint and
extension assembly.
Change 6 3
4 Change 6
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
Change 6 7
8 Change 6
NOTE
Pivot brace consists of a top and bottom piece. Both pieces are required for
PA Uprate, PC, and PD models.
(7) Remove four capscrews, washers, and nuts that secure pivot braces (sheet 1) in corner of
container. If top pivot brace is not attached to bottom brace, secure using two bolts and
nuts, view D.
(8) Position pivot brace in center of mounting frame by engaging pins in brace in holes in
frame. Secure pivot brace onto frame using two bolts and nuts at curved end.
(10) Rotate module until top vertical centerline is toward clevis mounts and 6:00 o'clock posi-
tion is toward center of container.
(11) Lower module and install trunnion pins, sheet 2, view C, into clevis mounts. Install
quick-release pins.
(12) Slowly rotate module in clevis mounts to horizontal position until strongback fixture,
1C9613, rests on pivot brace in center of container.
(13) Remove sling and install adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627, to strongback fixture,
1C9613.
(14) Switch hoist from strongback fixture, 1C9613, to adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627.
(15) Raise module enough to take load off pivot brace but leave module retained in clevis
mounts.
(16) Remove 24 capscrews, lockwashers, and 12 clamps that attach support plate to module
foward flange.
(17) Slowly slide LPT module away from support plate. Support plate will remain in clevis
mounts.
(18) Raise module from container and either install on gas turbine per WP 2710 00 or install
in storage dolly, 1C9632, as follows:
(a) Install adapter plate, 1C9632P08, to LPT case foward flange and secure with five
tooling screws and nuts. Tighten nuts to 70–110 lb in. (7.9–12.4 N·m) of torque.
(b) Lower module onto dolly, 1C9632, and secure adapter plate, figure 3, to forward
posts with ball lock pins.
3
Change 6 9
10 Change 6
(c) Install LPT restrain fixture, 1C9338, onto forward end of module as follows:
5 Secure fixture to LPT case using 13 capscrews. Install capscrews with heads on
LPT case flange.
7 If fixture flange does not mate to LPT case or pointers cannot be engaged, pro-
ceed as follows:
a Remove screws that secure lock blocks, 1C9613P02, onto strongback fix-
ture, 1C9613. Remove lock blocks.
CAUTION
Do not remove strongback until LPT rotor is restrained at the forward end,
either by the forward restrain fixture, installation in the vertical shipping con-
tainer, or by connection to the engine.
Change 6 11
12 Change 6
CAUTION
Do not allow the weight of the strongback to rest on the outer seal
carrier or shaft adapter ring after removing strongback retaining
screws.
5 Move strongback fixture, 1C9613, aft and separate from LPT module.
C. If LPT module will not be installed in shipping container, prepare shipping container
for storage as follows:
(1) Install support plate and 12 clamps into shipping container and secure to
mounting with 16 capscrews, washers, and nuts.
(2) Store pivot braces in corner of shipping container and secure with four capscrews,
washers, and nuts.
(1) Obtain LPT module serial number (S/N) from 6:00 o'clock position on LPT
forward flange.
(2) Paint S/N on shipping container base. Ensure old S/N is completely obscured and
new S/N is legible.
(3) Ensure all shear mounts are secured at each of the shipping container corners.
NOTE
(1) Remove restrain fixture, 1C9338, from module forward flange, figure 3.
Change 6 13
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
(4) Remove adapter plate, 1C9326P03, from LPT case forward flange.
(1) If support plate is not already installed in clevis mounts, remove 16 capscrews, nuts, and
washers that secure support plate onto mounting frame. Remove support plate and 12
clamps from shipping container, install in clevis mounts, and secure with two quick-
release pins.
(2) Install support plate onto LPT case forward flange as follows:
(b) Slowly slide module toward support plate until forward flange contacts support
plate. Position support plate onto LPT case forward flange aligning 3 locating pins
and TOP VERTICAL mark on support plate with 12:00 o’clock position of LPT
module.
(c) Slide 12 clamps back into position over LPT case forward flange, clamps have
notches for 3 locating pins. Tighten 24 capscrews.
NOTE
This LPT module requires both top and bottom pivot braces. Ensure braces
are bolted together.
(3) Install both pivot braces in center of mounting frame by engaging pins in brace in holes
in frame. Secure pivot brace onto frame using two bolts and nuts at curved ends.
(4) Slowly lower LPT module in clevis mounts until strongback fixture, 1C9613, rests on
pivot brace located in center of shipping container.
(5) Remove adjustable CG lift fixture, 1C9627, from strongback fixture, 1C9613.
(6) Install two-legged sling onto strongback fixture, 1C9613, and connect hoist to sling.
Remove slack from sling.
(7) Lift LPT module and rotate in clevis mounts to forward end down position.
14 Change 6
(8) Remove pivot braces from center of mounting frame and store in corner of
container. Secure pivot brace to container with four capscrews, washers, and nuts.
NOTE
(9) Install center shaft restraint to center of mounting frame, view B. Secure with four
capscrews and lockwashers. Tighten capscrews.
WARNING
Use correct lifting equipment and techniques. Stay out from under sus-
pended loads to prevent injury.
(10) Remove quick-release pins from clevis mounts and lift LPT module from clevis mounts.
(11) Align TOP VERTICAL markings of support plate on LPT module and marking on
mounting frame.
CAUTION
(12) Slowly lower LPT module and engage rotor shaft and center shaft restraint. Continue to
lower module until seated on restraint and two locating pins are aligned with holes in
adapter plate.
(13) Secure support plate onto mounting frame with 16 capscrews, washers, and nuts, sheet 1.
Tighten nuts.
(14) Remove strongback fixture, 1C9613, from LPT module per WP 2710 00
(15) Install shaft restraint lock through center of LPT shaft and thread into center shaft
restraint until tight.
(1) Raise four corner alignment tubes and secure into position with pins.
(3) Ensure flange and gasket on shipping container base are clean and serviceable.
Change 6 15
NOTE
Ensure tee-head bolts are aligned in recess before installing the lid
on the shipping container.
(4) Attach 2-ton (1,815 kg) hoist and sling to four lifting rings on sides of top. Attach
two control lines to opposite ends of top.
WARNING
(5) Lower top straight down over LPT module, aligning forward and aft guide pins.
Ensure flanges seat.
(7) Rotate tee-head bolts, sheet 2, section A-A, until long side of bolthead is
perpendicular to flange. Tighten tee-head bolt nuts to 420-510 lb in.
(47.5-57.6 N·m) of torque.
16 Change 6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE INLET INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting the gas turbine inlet.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Borescope Inspection WP 4015 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 5
WARNING
CAUTION
(4) Secure enclosure door so that it will remain open. Enclosure door shall remain
open.
B. Access inlet plenum through access hatch or inlet duct access per packager's manual.
NOTE
C. Using bright light, visually inspect gas turbine inlet per table 1. See figures 1 and 2.
2
1
D. If evidence of foreign object damage (FOD) is found, perform borescope inspection of
low pressure compressor (LPC) and high pressure compressor (HPC) sections per
WP 4015 00.
CAUTION
E. Before exiting the enclosure, perform a thorough, final inspection for possible foreign
objects.
G. Activate the fire extinguishing system per packager's manual and close enclosure door.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
Change 5 5
On-Site
On-Site Max Repairable On-Site
Inspect Max Serviceable Limits Limits Corrective Action
NOTE
Some of the following items can be inspected only if the gas turbine
is removed. If the gas turbine is installed, inspection will be limited
to accessible items only.
1. Inlet Duct or Bellmouth Assembly for:
a. Damage – – Refer to packager's
manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Plugged water- None allowed Any amount Remove contamina-
wash discharge tion per packager's
holes manual
c. Dirty airflow None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if inlet
path surfaces screen has been
removed
d. Loose installa- None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners per
tion fasteners packager's manual
2. Centerbody Assembly for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace centerbody
b. Nicks and Any number, any Any number, 0.06 inch Blend to remove high
scratches length, 0.03 inch (1.52 mm) deep, metal
(0.76 mm) deep, 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
0.03 inch (0.76 mm) wide, and 0.05 inch
wide, 1.0 inch (1.27 mm) long, pro-
(25.4 mm) separation vided none extend into
boltholes
c. Missing paint Any amount, if no Any amount Touch up paint
exposed parent metal
d. Dirty airflow None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if inlet
path surfaces screen has been
removed
e. Loose bolts None allowed Any amount Tighten bolts
6 Change 5
On-Site
On-Site Max Repairable On-Site
Inspect Max Serviceable Limits Limits Corrective Action
3. Inlet FOD Sock for:
a. Tears and holes None allowed Any amount Replace sock per
packager's manual
b. Build up of None allowed Any amount Clean
debris and
deposits
c. Coverage and No missing coverage Any amount Cover and secure sock
security of sock allowed across entire screen per
across entire No non-secure areas packager's manual
screen allowed
4. Inlet FOD Screen for:
a. Damage and - - Refer to packager's
corrosion manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Cracked, None allowed Any amount Replace screen per
broken, or packager's manual
missing pieces
c. Coverage and No missing coverage Any amount Cover and secure
security of allowed screen across entire
screen across No non-secure areas inlet area per
entire inlet area allowed packager's manual
5. Baffles for:
a. Cracks, tears, – – Refer to packager's
and damage manual for limits and
corrective action
b. Loose fasteners None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners
c. Contact with None allowed Any amount Reposition baffles to
variable inlet provide proper
guide vane clearance per
(VIGV) case packager's manual
6. Seals for:
a. Cracks, tears, – – Refer to packager's
and damage manual for limits and
corrective action
Change 5 7
On-Site
On-Site Max Repairable On-Site
Inspect Max Serviceable Limits Limits Corrective Action
b. Loose None allowed Any amount Tighten fasteners
fasteners
7. LPC Inlet Temperature/Pressure (T2/P2) Sensor for:
a. Damage None allowed Not repairable Replace sensor
b. Security No looseness allowed Any amount Tighten connections/
fasteners
c. Obstructions None allowed Any amount Clear obstructions
d. Buildup of None allowed Any amount Wipe clean
deposits
NOTE
8 Change 5
On-Site
On-Site Max Repairable On-Site
Inspect Max Serviceable Limits Limits Corrective Action
8A.A VIGV, PN L43918, Flaps for:
a. Radial (1) All flaps with (a) Any single flap (a) Inspect inner and
movement movement of 0.030 in. with movement greater outer cases for case rub
(0.76 mm) or less than 0.030 in. per step 8B
(0.76 mm) but less than
0.050 in. (1.27 mm)
(b) Any single flap (b) Replace VIGV
with movement greater assembly or return to
than 0.050 in. Depot
(1.27 mm), not
repairable
8B. Inner and Outer Cases for:
a. Inner case rub 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) or Greater than 0.015 in. Replace VIGV
due to loose less deep (0.38 mm), not assembly or return to
flaps repairable Depot
b. Outer case rub 0.030 in. (0.76 mm) or Greater than 0.030 in. Replace VIGV
due to loose less deep (0.76 mm), not assembly or return to
flaps repairable Depot
9. Inlet Frame Assembly for:
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace VIGV
assembly
b. Dents and nicks TBP TBP –
c. Loose flap TBP TBP –
d. Dirt, salt, or None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if
industrial accessible
deposits
10. LPC Stage 0 Rotor Blades for (figure 2):
a. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace blade
b. Chips, crush, None allowed Not repairable Replace blade
nicks, dents,
and scratches
in root area
Change 5 9
On-Site
On-Site Max Repairable On-Site
Inspect Max Serviceable Limits Limits Corrective Action
c. Chips and Any number, 0.025 inch Not repairable Replace blade
crush in (0.6 mm) deep
leading and
trailing edges,
except root
area
d. Scratches on Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
leading and 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
trailing edges, deep, 0.5 inch
except root (1.27 mm) long
area
e. Nicks and Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
dents on 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
leading and deep, 0.125 inch
trailing edges, (3.1 mm) diameter
except root
area
f. Tip curl Not more than Not repairable Replace blade
0.25 inch (6.35 mm) of
original blade tip
width
g. Pits and Any number, Not repairable Replace blade
erosion, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm)
except in deep, any diameter, any
root area spacing
h. Dirt, salt, or None allowed Any amount Wipe clean if
industrial accessible
deposits
10 Change 5
4WP 4011 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
EXTERNAL ENGINE CLEANING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for cleaning the external engine surfaces.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Gas Turbine Water-Wash WP 4014 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
ARDROX 6322 Local Purchase
B&B 3100 Local Purchase
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Monopropylene Glycol AMS 1424
RMC Turbine/Engine Cleaner (Rivenaes) Local Purchase
Rochem FYREWASH Local Purchase
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
WARNING
NOTE
A. Wash external engine and components with 50-60 gallons (189-227 liters) of clean
water using a flexible hose with adjustable spray nozzle. Maintain water pressure of
40-45 psi (276-310 kPa).
B. If water will not remove dirt, apply water-wash solution per WP 4014 00 and allow to
soak for 2 hours minimum. Flush with clean water.
C. Start engine and operate at idle speed 5 minutes to dry excessive water.
3/(4 Blank)
WP 4012 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE EXTERNAL INSPECTION (VISUAL)
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
A. This work package contains instructions for performing a visual external inspection of
LM6000 gas turbine.
B. Replace electrical leads and connecting tubes on gas turbine, as required, per
SWP 1913 03.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging WP 1411 00
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Stages 3 to 5 Bushing WP 1412 00
Replacement (High-Boss HPC Stator Case)
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) Module External Tubing, Har- SWP 1913 03
nesses, and Clamping
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Stator Vanes Replacement SWP 2412 00
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection WP 4028 00
High Pressure Compressor Stator Variable Geometry Stage 5 LM6000-IND-150
Connecting Link Rework (PA, PB, PC, and PD Models)
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Silicone Rubber Adhesive GE Spec A15F6B6
(RTV 106)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
B. Inspect variable inlet guide vane (VIGV) assembly per table 2 and figure 1.
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE
16
17
18
19
G. Inspect high pressure compressor (HPC) case per table 7 and figures 3 and 4.
Hot spots and bulges indicate internal damage in that area. Assess
condition by borescope inspection.
1. Casing Skin for:
a. Nicks, gouges, Any number, Not repairable Replace case
scratches, and 0.0150 inch (0.38 mm)
dents deep, after removal of
high metal
b. Cracks None allowed Not repairable Replace case
c. Bulges None allowed Not repairable Replace case
d. Hot spots (dis- Serviceable if metal is Not repairable Replace case
coloration) not crazed and cracks
are not present
e. Grooves worn Any length, Not repairable Replace case
by actuation 0.0250 inch (0.63 mm)
ring spacers deep, after removal of
high metal
20
21
22
23
24
H. Inspect variable stator vane (VSV) actuation components per table 8 and figure 5.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51/(52 Blank)
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 1 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting the gas turbine exhaust system.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 1
See figure 1.
1
WARNING
CAUTION
To ensure that no loose objects are left in the exhaust, empty pockets
before entering exhaust access.
NOTE
Some items can only be inspected if the gas turbine and exhaust duct
are separated. If the gas turbine and exhaust duct are not separated,
inspection will be limited to accessible items only.
C. Using bright light, visually inspect turbine rear frame and inner and outer seal carriers
for cracks, security, metal deposits, and damage. Contact General Electric Marine and
Industrial Customer Service if discrepancies are found. See figure 1.
D. Using bright light, visually inspect exhaust duct, inner and outer diffuser walls, and
housings for cracks, security, metal deposits, and damage. If discrepancies are found,
refer to the packager's manual for limits and corrective action.
E. Using bright light, visually inspect inner and outer piston rings for wear and cracks
(figure 1). If rings are worn or cracked, replace rings.
Change 1 3
4 Change 1
F. Perform thorough, final inspection of exhaust duct for possible foreign objects or tools
left in exhaust area.
NOTE
Exhaust duct alignment should be checked after final full engine align-
ment is complete.
(1) Measure and record dimension A and dimension B at eight equally spaced locations
around circumference of exhaust duct. Calculate X as follows:
XA = AMAX - AMIN
(2) Refer to table 1 for the applicable limits. If dimensions exceed the table maximum
or minimum values, then adjust the exhaust diffuser. Refer to packager's manual.
Minimum Maximum
Value Value Maximum XA
Dimension A 2.775 in. (70.49 mm) N/A 0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
(Measured at Outer Piston Ring)
Dimension B 0.14 in. (3.56 mm) N/A N/A
DIM A DIM B
1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
4. 4.
5. 5.
6. 6.
7. 7.
8. 8.
AVG AVG
7WP 4014 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
GAS TURBINE WATER-WASH
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 4 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for performing water-wash procedures on the LM6000
gas turbine.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Water Purity - Compressor Cleaning Appendix A4
Liquid Detergent - Compressor Cleaning Appendix A5
System Descriptions Chapter 5
Engine Operation Chapter 8
Borescope Inspection WP 4015 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Acetone Fed Spec 0-A-51
ARDROX 6322 (solvent base) Local Purchase
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 4
6. Water-Wash Description.
NOTE
The need for gas turbine water wash and frequency is installation
and site specific. In particular, effectiveness of inlet filtration may
have a significant effect on need for washing. Reduced power out-
put and dirty appearance during borescope are indications that the
gas turbine may benefit from off-line water wash.
A. Crank/Soak Cleaning: Applied while motoring the high pressure (HP) rotor at greater
than 2000 RPM and low pressure (LP) rotor at greater than 200 RPM. Used for
performing a thorough cleaning of engine. Crank-soak washing removes oily or tarry
deposits which bind dirt to blade. The frequency of wash must be tailored to type of
atmospheric contaminants, temperature, operational frequency/profile, gas turbine
health and site economics. In the absence of this information a prudent strategy would
be to crank-soak wash every 2 weeks.
B. On-line Cleaning: Applied while engine is running. Requires special on-line cleaning
manifold. It is used primarily to maintain gas turbine performance between crank-soak
washes but rarely is able to make a significant improvement in performance.
A. Water quality and liquid detergent for crank/soak compressor cleaning must meet
requirements specified in Appendix A4 and Appendix A5,Volume I of this manual.
B. The liquid detergents listed below may be used for performing water-wash
procedures. Follow liquid detergent manufacturer's instructions for recommended
detergent/water dilution ratios. Ensure that detergents used, including those listed,
meet requirements specified by packager.
Change 4 3
C. In freezing weather, mix one of the antifreeze agents listed below with cleaning
solution. Refer to Appendix A5 for recommended solution mixtures and additional
information.
• Acetone
• Isopropyl alcohol
• Monopropylene Glycol
8. Crank/Soak Cleaning.
WARNING
• The enclosure area shall be ventilated. The engine shall
be shut down and cooled prior to crank/soak cleaning.
All drains shall be open.
CAUTION
Be certain that checklists have been established for packager-
furnished equipment. Consult the packager’s manual for
mandatory pre-start procedures, especially making sure that
the packager-furnished lube supply sub-system is activated
and operational prior to any motoring sequence. Failure to
comply may result in part damage.
(1) Disconnect pressure sensor lines from PS3 and P48 locations on gas turbine to
prevent water collection in lines and subsequently affecting engine operation.
(2) Cover electronic devices below gas turbine, such as fuel metering valve, to pre-
vent entry of water that may affect engine operation.
4 Change 4
(4) Allow gas turbine to cool so that outside surfaces are less than 200°F (93°C).
WARNING
NOTE
While motoring the engine with the starter, ensure that a minimum
lube pressure of 6 psig (41 kPa) is maintained.
(5) To expedite cooling, motoring starter is permissible. Dry motoring procedures are
contained in to Chapter 8, Volume I of this manual. Limit starter duty cycles to
those defined in Chapter 5, Volume I.
(1) Motor HP rotor to 2,000 rpm and allow speed to stabilize. Low pressure (LP)
rotor speed should be 200-300 rpm. Allow LP rotor speed to stabilize before
initiating water flow.
Change 4 5
CAUTION
In below freezing conditions, antifreeze agents shall be added to
the water. The use of non-isopropyl alcohol, ethylene glycol,
and additives containing chlorine, sodium, or potassium are not
permitted since they may attack titanium and other metals in the
engine.
NOTE
• Total solids in the wash and rinse waters shall be no more than
100 ppm. The ph factor shall be between 6.5 and 8.5 at 77°F
(25°C). Potable water will normally meet these requirements.
Water-wash solution should be at room temperature and a flow
rate of approximately 20 gpm (76 liters/minute).
6 Change 4
CAUTION
Packager-supplied control system shall automatically close
the water wash injection valve if LP rotor speed drops below
200 RPM or HP rotor speed drops below 2000 RPM. Water
injection at lower speeds may result in water entering LP or
HP compressors rotors, which may result in major engine
damage.
(3) After completion of wash solution injection, close the variable inlet guide vanes
(VIGVs) and maintain variable bypass valves (VBVs) in closed position. Allow
rotors to coast to a stop and the solution to soak for a minimum of 10 minutes.
Operator experience will determine soak time.
NOTE
(1) Open inlet drain, bleed air collector drain, exhaust collector drains, and module
drains to remove any wash solution and rinse water after washing is complete.
(2) Use a minimum of 25 gallons (95 liters) of 160 to 180°F (71 to 82°C) water, while
motoring HP rotor at approximately 2,000 rpm and LP rotor at 200-300 rpm.
NOTE
(3) Repeat rinse until water sample at turbine exhaust is clear. If conductivity check-
ing is possible, conductivity should be similar to that of clear rinse water.
Change 4 7
D. As an option, operator may inspect gas turbine to determine if cleaning process was
adequate as follows:
(1) After completion of the rinse cycles, allow rotors to coast to a complete stop.
(2) Borescope inspect LPC and high pressure compressor (HPC) rotors per
WP 4015 00, Volume II of this manual, paying particular attention to stator/blade
airfoils.
E. Make a normal engine start and allow engine to run at synchronous idle for 2-3
minutes to dry engine.
9. On-Line Cleaning.
CAUTION
Antifreeze mixtures for on-line water-wash and rinse should
be used when ambient temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or less.
Formation of ice may result in major engine damage.
NOTE
On-line cleaning does not typically eliminate the need for off-
line cleaning and it is not effective in cleaning a significantly
fouled compressor. However, on-line cleaning will typically
extend the required intervals for off-line cleaning to maintain
the gas turbine performance.
A. Conduct on-line wash with water only. Use of detergent is not recommended.
Use of water to NOx suppression standards per specification MID-TD-0000-3
(Appendix A-3) is required.
C. Refer to packager's manual for specific amount of water and frequency of on-line
wash.
8 Change 4
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
BORESCOPE INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
1 - 96 ...... 6
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
B. Gain access to gas turbine borescope ports inside high pressure compressor (HPC) air
manifold by removing tubes per SWP 1913 02.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Maintenance Considerations Chapter 11
Preventive Maintenance Chapter 12
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging WP 1411 00
Gas/Steam Fuel System (NGS) Components Replacement WP 1510 00
Dual Fuel/Water Fuel System (NDW) Components WP 1511 00
Replacement
Gas/Water Fuel System (NGW) Components Replacement WP 1512 00
Liquid Fuel/Water Fuel System (NLW) Components WP 1513 00
Replacement
Gas Fuel System (NG) Components Replacement WP 1514 00
Igniter Plug Replacement WP 1516 00
Low Pressure Turbine Inlet Pressure (P48) Probe Replacement WP 1712 00
Core Module External Tubing, Electrical Leads, and Clamping SWP 1913 02
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) Stages 0-3 Stator Vanes WP 2213 00
Replacement
Gas Turbine Water-Wash WP 4014 00
Variable Stator Vane Off-Schedule Inspection WP 4028 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
2 Change 6
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Marking Ink Dykem (Water Based
White or Yellow)
Marking Pen Sharpie T.E.C.
(Water Based
White or Yellow)
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
Tape Local Purchase
Thread Lubricant GE Spec A50TF201
5. Expendable Material.
Change 6 3
WARNING
• Ensure that all personnel are clear of gas turbine inlet before
rotating rotors.
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
C. Allow gas turbine to cool to surface temperature below 120°F (48.9°C) prior to
borescope inspection.
E. Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
NOTE
G. Use spline adapter, 1C8208, and drive motor, 2C14764, to rotate high pressure rotors during
borescope inspection of rotors. Install adapter and motor per paragraph 7. A manual ratchet
may be used instead of the drive motor.
4 Change 6
NOTE
A. Remove nuts and washers that secure drive pad cover onto transfer gearbox (figure 1).
Remove cover from gearbox and discard preformed packing. Retain hardware for reinstalla-
tion.
1
NOTE
This drive pad may be utilized as an accessory drive. If so, the acces-
sory must be removed for access to the pad. Refer to the packager's
manual for removal/installation instructions.
B. Install adapter plate onto gearbox drive pad (figure 1). Secure with nuts provided with
adapter plate. Tighten nuts to 57-67 lb in. (6.5-7.5 N·m) of torque.
D. Insert drive shaft through hole in center of adapter plate and into spur gear. Ensure drive shaft
splines mesh with spur gear splines.
E. Secure drive motor to adapter plate with bolts and washers supplied with drive motor.
Tighten bolts to 428-502 lb in. (48.4-56.7 N·m) of torque.
Change 6 5
6 Change 6
WARNING
Improperly grounded electrical equipment can cause severe shock
or death. Equipment shall be properly grounded before use.
H. Connect three-prong power cord to control unit J1 power connector. Plug three-prong con-
nector into power source.
(3) Move switch on remote control to forward or reverse as required. Adjust motor speed on
control unit to achieve desired rotor rotation speed. Operator may perform borescope
inspection as planned, and may vary speed and direction of rotation as required.
CAUTION
(4) To reverse direction of rotation, move directional selector to neutral position which
allows gas turbine to free wheel. Wait until rotor completely stops; then move direc-
tional selector to opposite direction.
WARNING
Improperly grounded electrical equipment can cause severe shock
or death. Equipment shall be properly grounded before use.
A. Switch control unit off and disconnect power cord from power source and control unit.
C. Remove drive motor from adapter plate by removing drive motor bolts and washers
(figure 1). Loosen setscrew on drive shaft and remove drive shaft from drive motor.
D. Remove nuts that secure adapter plate onto transfer gearbox. Remove adapter plate from
gearbox.
Change 6 7
NOTE
If drive pad is used for driving an accessory, install the accessory per
the packager's manual.
E. Install preformed packing, J221P134, and drive pad cover (figure 1) onto transfer gearbox and
secure with nuts and washers removed during drive motor installation. Tighten nuts to 57-67
lb in. (6.5-7.5 N·m) of torque.
9. Borescope Set.
NOTE
The following instructions apply to the Everest XLG3 and XL Go VideoProbe
systems borescope equipment. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions if
using an alternate borescope set.
A. For description and operating instructions for the Everest XLG3 VideoProbe system (figure 2)
or XL Go VideoProbe system (figure 3), refer to the borescope unit instruction manual or con-
tact GE Inspection Technologies. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions if using an alternate
borescope set.
B. Guide Tube.
(1) Guide tube, 2C6948, is to be used with the Everest XLG3 or XL Go VideoProbe
systems, or equivalent, when borescope inspecting the HPT shrouds.
8 Change 6
Change 6 9
10 Change 6
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not do a borescope inspection if the temperature inside the
engine is above 150°F (65.6°C).
• If the engine starter is used to motor the engine, the engine hot
section inspections shall be done in less than 20 minutes after the
motoring cycles are completed. Local temperature rise due to
engine temperature soak-back may damage the borescope.
NOTE
(1) For description and operating instructions for the Everest XLG3 VideoProbe system
(figure 2) or XL Go VideoProbe system (figure 3), refer to the borescope unit instruction
manual or contact GE Inspection Technologies. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
if using an alternate borescope set.
Change 6 11
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
NOTE
Purchaser must provide equipment for rotation of the LPC rotor for
borescope inspection of the LPC. Refer to packager's manual for pro-
cedure.
A. Remove borescope plugs from borescope ports S4-1 through S4-4 in variable inlet guide
vane (VIGV) and LPC. See figure 4.
B. Rotate rotor and use borescope probe to view rotor blades. Identify first blade to left of two
locking lugs as blade number 1 for stage being viewed.
C. Borescope inspect LPC blades and vanes per table 1, figure 4A, and figure 5.
2
D. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
E. Install borescope plugs into borescope ports S4-1 through S4-4 as follows:
(2) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
(3) Install borescope plugs into S4-1 through S4-4 borescope ports. See figure 4.
(4) Tighten VIGV borescope plugs S4-1 and S4-4 to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire.
(5) Tighten LPC case borescope plugs S4-2 and S4-3 to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of
torque and safety-wire.
12 Change 6
Change 6 13
14 Change 6
Change 6 15
16 Change 6
Change 6 17
18 Change 6
Change 6 19
A. Remove the four bolts per flange, one gasket, and B-sump vent manifold from the aft side of
the front frame (just aft of the air collector) at the 2:00 and 10:00 o'clock positions aft looking
forward (ALF). Place tape over open port (10:00 o'clock position) on left side once pipe has
been removed.
20 Change 6
Figure 5.A. Inlet Gearbox Spline Borescope Inspection. Before Service Bulletin LM6000-IND-0220
Change 6 21
C. On right hand port, insert the flexible borescope approximately 15 inches (38.1 cm) into the
frame. The scope will traverse two turns and exit the front frame strut with the IGB housing
and pressurizing holes visible.
CAUTION
D. Carefully enter the IGB assembly through the pressurizing holes. The inlet gearbox bevel
gears are immediately forward of this location, the flexible probe must be articulated aft,
towards the No. 3R bearing and the inlet gearbox splines.
E. Proceed aft approximately 2 inches (5.1 cm) towards the No. 3R bearing and the inlet gearbox
splines.
F. Inspect the area for evidence of iron oxide “sludge”. Iron oxide “sludge” buildup has been
determined to be evidence of spline wear as a result of non-optimized lubrication.
G. If iron oxide “sludge” is present, notify GE and provide photos/documentation of IGB spline
wear condition.
H. Remove the flexible borescope being careful not to move the borescope forward toward the
inlet gearbox bevel gears.
I. Lubricate bolts with thread lubricant. Install four bolts per flange point, with one gasket and
B-sump vent manifold from the aft side of the front frame (just aft of the air collector) at the
2:00 and 10:00 o'clock positions aft looking forward (ALF). Torque bolts to 62-68 lb in.
(7.0-7.7 N·m).
J. Reinstall any bolt, washers, nuts or clamps that were also removed to B-sump vent manifold.
Torque bolt or nut to 62-68 lb in. (7.0-7.7 N·m).
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep borescope
ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a time.
(1) Gain access to borescope port S5-11 through the stage 11 bleed air manifold per
SWP 1913 02 and remove S5-11 borescope plug.
4
22 Change 6
(2) Rotate rotor clockwise (forward looking aft) and use borescope probe to view stage 12
rotor blade platforms. Locate first blade to left of two locking lugs. See figure 6.
NOTE
The locking lugs are two blades apart. The rotor blades rotate CCW as
viewed through the borescope.
(3) Position this blade in line with leading edge of stage 12 stator vane (as viewed through
the borescope). Identify this blade as blade No. 1. The next blade to appear will be blade
No. 2. See figure 6.
(4) The HPC rotor is now zero-referenced for all stages of compressor and HPT rotor blades.
Inspection of each applicable stage must start with HPC rotor positioned back to zero
reference point at stage 12.
C. Gain access to borescope ports S5-7, S5-8, and S5-9 through the stages 7 and 8 bleed air man-
ifolds per SWP 1913 02 and remove S5-7, S5-8, and S5-9 borescope plugs.
D. Remove borescope plugs from borescope ports S5-0 through S5-6, S5-10, S5-12, and S5-13
from HPC case. See figure 7.
E. Borescope inspect HPC blades and vanes per table 2 and figures 8, 9, and 10.
Change 6 23
24 Change 6
F. If damage is found, inspect adjacent stages to assess total damage. Record condition and
report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
(2) Coat S5-0 through S5-13 borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with
antiseize compound.
(3) Install borescope plugs into S5-0 through S5-13 borescope ports. See figure 7.
(4) Tighten borescope plugs S5-0 through S5-13 to 95-105 lb in. (10.8-11.8 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire or safety-cable.
26 Change 6
Change 6 27
28 Change 6
Change 6 29
30 Change 6
Change 6 31
32 Change 6
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
A. Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-3 through S6-6 from the compressor rear frame (CRF).
Remove the upper ignitor plug (borescope port S6-2) per WP 1516 00. See figure 12.
9
B. Borescope inspect the combustion and fuel nozzles per table 3 and figures 13, 14, 15, and
16. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
Change 6 33
34 Change 6
Change 6 35
36 Change 6
Change 6 37
38 Change 6
Change 6 39
BA. Inspect primary swirlers, venturi (secondary swirlers), and nozzles per table 3, figure 16A,
and figure 16B, as follows:
(1) Matchmark fuel nozzles with their respective locations on CRF assembly.
(2) Remove fuel nozzles per WP 1510 00 (Gas/Steam), WP 1511 00 (Dual Fuel/Water),
WP 1512 00 (Gas/Water), WP 1513 00 (Liquid Fuel/Water), or WP 1514 00 (Gas Fuel).
Place nozzles in secure area.
(3) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
(4) Install borescope plugs into S6-1 and S6-3 through S6-6 ports. See figure 12.
(5) Tighten CRF borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-3 through S6-6 to 115-135 lb in.
(13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
40 Change 6
Change 6 41
42 Change 6
Change 6 43
44 Change 6
Change 6 45
46 Change 6
Change 6 47
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
NOTE
(1) Remove borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 from the CRF.
(2) Remove igniter plugs (borescope ports S6-3 and S6-6) per WP 1516 00.
(3) Remove borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 from the HPT stator case.
B. Borescope inspect HPT stage 1 nozzle per table 4 and figure 17.
C. Borescope inspect HPT stage 2 nozzle per table 5 and figure 18.
D. Borescope inspect cavity outboard of HPT stage 2 nozzle and 11th stage check valves per
table 5A and figures 18A and 18B.
E. Inspect borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 per table 5B and figure 18C.
F. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
(3) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
(5) Tighten CRF borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 to 115-135 lb in. (13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire or safety-cable.
48 Change 6
(7) Tighten HPT borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 to 115-135 lb in. (13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire.
Change 6 49
50 Change 6
Change 6 51
52 Change 6
Change 6 53
54 Change 6
56 Change 6
Table 5A. Cavity Outboard of Stage 2 Nozzles and 11th Stage Check Valve Inspection
Change 6 57
58 Change 6
Change 6 59
60 Change 6
Change 6 61
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep borescope
ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a time.
NOTE
(2) Remove igniter plugs (borescope ports S6-3 and S6-6) per WP 1516 00.
(3) Remove borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 from HPT stator case.
C. Borescope inspect HPT shrouds per table 6 and figure 19. Use Everest XLG3 or XL Go bore-
scope equipment or equivalent, and guide tube, 2C6948P06, at borescope ports S7-1 and S7-2.
D. Borescope inspect HPT stage 1 rotor blades per table 7 and figures 20 and 21.
E. Borescope inspect HPT stage 2 rotor blades per table 7 and figure 22.
F. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
(3) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
(5) Tighten CRF borescope plugs S6-1 and S6-4 to 115-135 lb in. (13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire or safety-cable.
(7) Tighten HPT borescope plugs S7-1 and S7-2 to 115-135 lb in. (13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque
and safety-wire.
62 Change 6
Change 6 63
64 Change 6
Change 6 65
66 Change 6
Change 6 69
It is possible that the tip film holes extend into blade tip area
(figure 20).
(1) Radial Any number on con- Not repairable Replace blade
cracks cave surface, if cracks
do not extend more
than one hole below tip
film holes. Any num-
ber on convex surface,
if cracks do not extend
below second trailing
edge hole from top and
are not notched open
below first trailing
edge hole from top.
Three per blade that
extend to fourth trail-
ing edge hole from top,
if cracks are not
notched open below
first trailing edge hole
from top
(2) Axial Any number, if cracks Not repairable Replace blade
cracks do not extend below tip
of film holes
(3) Bent or Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
curled does not extend below
blade tips tip area
(4) Tears Any number, if tears do Not repairable Replace blade
not extend below tip
area
(5) Missing Any amount, if damage Not repairable Replace blade
material, does not extend below
except at tip area and internal air
trailing passages are not visible
edge where material is
missing
Change 6 71
There are tip notches on the concave side of four blades 90 degrees
apart on the stage 2 rotor. The tip notches are for reference only
and are not signs of erosion.
a. Concave and Convex Surfaces for:
(1) Cracks Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
(2) Tears and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
missing
material
(3) Dents and Not serviceable Not repairable Replace blade
nicks
within
0.500 inch
(12.70 mm)
of platform
72 Change 6
Change 6 73
74 Change 6
Change 6 75
76 Change 6
Change 6 77
78 Change 6
Change 6 79
80 Change 6
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
NOTE
B. Insert Everest XLG3 or XL Go, or equivalent, flexscope into fuel nozzle port, around/under
combustor cowl and inner liner and through holes in stage 1 HPT nozzle support and seal sup-
port (mini nozzle) until outer vanes of HPT diffuser are visible. Continue to insert flexscope
until entire trailing edge of adjacent vane is visible. See figures 22.A. and 22.B.
C. Borescope inspect entire length of transition radius between convex vane wall and aft wall of
vane ring to extent allowed by physical limitations of borescope equipment. See figure 22.B.
D. Retract borescope from HPT diffuser enough to allow rotation of core without
damaging borescope equipment.
CAUTION
Do not rotate engine while the borescope equipment is inserted into
rotating parts of the engine (HPT diffuser). Damage to equipment
and engine could occur.
Change 6 81
G. Document any indications by saving image with camera on borescope equipment. Document
the following:
(1) Any diffuser vane ring with a non-cracklike linear indication must be reviewed by GE
LM6000 Customer Support Engineering to determine serviceability.
(2) Any diffuser vane ring with an indication that is determined to be cracklike is unservice-
able and diffuser replacement is required.
CAUTION
To prevent foreign objects from entering the gas turbine, keep bores-
cope ports covered when they are not being used. Open one port at a
time.
NOTE
Purchaser must provide equipment for rotation of the LPT rotor for
borescope inspection of the LPT. Refer to the packager’s manual for
procedure.
A. Remove borescope plugs S8-2 through S8-4 from the LPT case and turbine rear frame (TRF).
See figure 23.
D. Record condition and report discrepancies for disposition and corrective action.
(2) Coat borescope plug threads and mating surfaces with thread lubricant.
82 Change 6
Change 6 83
84 Change 6
(4) Tighten LPT case borescope plugs S8-3 and S8-4 to 115-135 lb in.
(13.0-15.2 N·m) of torque and safety-wire.
(5) Tighten TRF borescope plug S8-2 to 115-135 lb in. (13.0-15.2 N·m)
of torque and safety-wire.
Change 6 85
Figure 24. HPT Leaf Seals Wrapped Around EGT Probe and Airfoils
86 Change 6
Change 6 87
88 Change 6
Change 6 89
90 Change 6
Change 6 91
CAUTION
The vane leading edge is the primary source of purge air to the aft
side of the stage 2 HPT disk rim. Any interference of this airflow
could damage the stage 2 HPT.
92 Change 6
Change 6 93
Change 6 95
96 Change 6
0WP 4016 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LUBE OIL SAMPLING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 2 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for lube oil sampling and test analysis.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Oil Analysis, Particle Count ARP598
Oil Analysis, Acid ASTM D664-58
Oil Analysis, Viscosity ASTM D445-65
Oil Analysis, Color ASTM D1500
Oil Analysis, Water ASTM D1744
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Lube and Scavenge Pump Chip Detector Inspection WP 4017 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Screen Check WP 4020 00
Oil Analysis, SOAP NAVA1R 31-1-37
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 2
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not take oil sample from low drain point. Low drain point
may contain heavy sediments and provide incorrect indications.
NOTE
All oil samples shall be taken from the same location.
(b) Take oil sample from oil tank filler. Ensure oil extraction equipment and
container are clean and free of contaminates.
(c) If oil sample is obtained from a low drain point, such as the scavenge oil
discharge line, flow approximately l pint (0.5 liter) into a waste container and
then, without interrupting the flow, obtain oil sample.
Date _____________________________________
Change 2 3
C. Deliver oil sample to laboratory for analysis. The oil sample shall be tested per table 1.
(1) Inspect lube and scavenge pump chip detectors and screens per WP 4017 00 and
WP 4020 00.
(a) Shut down engine and completely drain oil tank and as many service lines as
possible.
(b) Service oil tank with new lubricating oil. Always use oil from same
manufacturer.
(d) Shut down engine and drain oil tank and service lines.
4 Change 2
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP CHIP DETECTOR
CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS - ALL
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the lube and scavenge pump chip
detectors.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Magnetic Chip Detector Replacement WP 1910 00
Lube and Scavenge Pump Screen Check WP 4020 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680,
Type II
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
B. Remove chip detectors from locations shown in figure 1. Remove chip detector from
housing bayonet mount by pushing knurled ring inward and rotating counterclockwise
(figure 2).
NOTE
Standard chip detector configuration is common scavenge, B-scavenge,
and transfer gearbox (TGB) scavenge. Optional chip detectors may be
installed in C-scavenge, D-scavenge, and E-scavenge ports.
2
1
7. Chip Detector Inspection.
A. Visually inspect chip detectors for foreign material (figure 3). If any foreign material
is found, analyze, and perform corrective action as follows:
3
(1) Isolate source of foreign material by identifying area from which material was
scavenged. Check lube and scavenge pump screens per WP 4020 00.
(2) Visually examine suspect material for identification of source. If material can be
visually identified as bearing material, such as roller, ball, and/or race fragments,
component replacement is the required corrective action. Bearing races, rollers,
and balls are magnetic, therefore, separating out any magnetic materials will help
identification. See table 1.
(3) Main gas turbine bearing distress normally increases lube scavenge temperatures
and gas turbine vibration. Review gas turbine log sheets for significant changes in
gas turbine logged parameters.
(4) If suspect material is found on TGB chip detector or in TGB screen, source must
be further identified. Remove lower drain plug and inspect TGB/A-sump area for
any distress.
(2) Check for open continuity of pins to housing and all pins to each other.
(3) Check continuity across chip detector tip control surfaces. Continuity shall not
exceed 10 ohms.
(4) If chip detector fails any of these checks, replace chip detector. Refer to
Chapter 10, Volume I of this manual for electrical lead and chip detector wiring
schematics and troubleshooting tables.
WARNING
• Drycleaning solvent, P-D-680, Type II, is flammable and
toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Skin, eye, and
respiratory protection is required. Avoid repeated or pro-
longed contact. (W-MIL-C13).
A. Clean chip detectors with dry cleaning solvent. Dry with shop air at 40 psig (276 kPa).
WARNING
D. Install chip detectors in chip detector housing by pushing knurled ring inward and
rotating clockwise. Check for proper seating by twisting knurled ring back and forth
without pressing inward.
WARNING
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle. Put on protective ear and hand
equipment. Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
(5) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per
packager's manual.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
MAIN FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for replacing the main fuel filter.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-L-6085
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
(1) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Place suitable container under filter bowl and
drain fluid. Remove and discard preformed packing.
(4) Remove and discard preformed packings from filter head and bowl.
WARNING
• Alcohol is flammable and toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory
tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
WARNING
(2) Install two new preformed packings, PN 110100-139, onto each end of new filter
element, PN AA9227F-1680.
(5) Install filter bowl onto filter head and hand-tighten, using strap wrench to
maximum of 50 lb ft (67.8 N·m).
(6) Install new preformed packing, PN 140100-110, onto drain plug and install plug
into filter bowl. Tighten plug to 40-65 lb in. (4.5-7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Safety-cable or safety-wire drain plug onto filter bowl and filter bowl onto filter
head.
WARNING
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle. Put on protective ear and hand
equipment. Deactivate fire extinguishing system.
(5) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per
packager's manual.
5/(6 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
FUEL PUMP FILTER CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspecting and cleaning the fuel pump filter.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Liquid Fuel Pump Assembly, Fuel Filter Assembly, Fuel WP 1810 00
Pump Adapter, and Quick Disconnect Adapter -
Replacement
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-C-6529
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-C-16173
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-L-6085
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680,
Type II
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Sodium Dichromate Crystals Local Purchase
(Commercial Grade, 99.5% min)
Sulfuric Acid Local Purchase
(Technical Grade, 66° Baume)
5. Expendable Material.
WARNING
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
(1) Remove two screws and washers that secure cap and valve assembly to fuel
pump. Drain fuel into suitable container.
(2) Using two screws removed in step (1) as jackscrews, remove cap and valve
assembly with strainer element.
WARNING
(2) Clean element with soft bristle brush. Dislodged contaminant should float from
sieves.
(3) Hold element up to light and visually inspect for contamination between inside
and outside diameter sieves.
WARNING
(a) Pour isopropyl alcohol into cleaning tank of an ultrasonic cleaner to depth of
approximately 3 inches (76 mm).
(b) Connect cleaner to suitable power source, making sure cleaner switches are
in OFF or normal position.
(d) Position strainer element in cleaner tank and turn cleaner on for
approximately 15 minutes.
(f) Allow cleaner to run desired cycle; then shut off cleaner and remove strainer
element.
WARNING
NOTE
(a) Immerse strainer element in saturated solution of 1 liter of sulfuric acid and
20 grams of sodium dichromate crystals.
WARNING
(c) Thoroughly rinse element in clean water and dry with clean, moisture free
compressed air.
(d) If strainer element is not completely clean, repeat steps (a), (b), and (c).
(6) Dispose of all waste fluids per federal and state EPA standards.
WARNING
Lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, is toxic to skin, eyes, and res-
piratory tract. Skin and eye protection is required. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Use in a well-ventilated area.
(3) Assemble strainer element onto cap and valve assembly making sure element is
firmly bottomed against shoulder on cap and valve assembly.
(4) Install cap and valve assembly, with strainer element, into fuel pump and secure
with two screws and washers.
(5) Tighten screws to 45-55 lb in. (5.1-6.2 N·m) of torque above running torque.
WARNING
A safety observer shall be stationed adjacent to the enclo-
sure access.
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start.
(2) Ensure gas turbine will not be operated above idle. Put on protective ear and hand
equipment. Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
WARNING
Inlet and exhaust area of running engine are extremely dan-
gerous. Stay clear and wear ear protection
(5) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per
packager's manual.
7/(8 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP SCREEN CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the lube and scavenge pump inlet
screens.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Lube and Scavenge Pump Chip Detector Inspection WP 4017 00
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed Spec TT-I-735
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
Plug:
Chip Detector:
Screens:
WARNING
A. Before removing lube and scavenge pump inlet screens, perform following:
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door shall remain open.
(5) Shut off lube oil supply to gas turbine per packager's manual.
(1) Remove drain plugs or chip detectors from transfer gearbox (TGB), accessory
gearbox (AGB), B-sump, C-sump, D-sump, and E-sump inlet screens. Remove
and discard preformed packings. Examine chip detectors per WP 4017 00. Drain
residual oil into approved waste container.
(2) Remove lube inlet screen and six lube scavenge inlet screens from lube and
scavenge pump, and identify by location using tags or vibropeen etch. Remove
and discard preformed packings.
A. Visually inspect inlet screens for foreign material. If any foreign material is found,
analyze as follows and perform corrective action:
(1) Isolate source of foreign material by identifying area from which material was
scavenged.
(2) Visually examine suspect material for identification of source. If material can be visu-
ally identified as bearing materials, such as roller, ball and/or race fragments, required
corrective action is component replacement. Bearing races, rollers, and balls are mag-
netic, therefore, separating out any magnetic materials will help identification. Material
property analysis may be required. Main engine bearings cannot be replaced on-site.
Main engine bearings may be replaced at depot level. Main bearing failures require
replacement of gas turbine or module. See table 1 for possible corrective action details.
(3) Main gas turbine bearing distress usually increases lube scavenge temperatures and gas
turbine vibration, therefore, gas turbine log sheets should be reviewed for significant
changes in gas turbine logged parameters.
(4) If suspect material is found in TGB screen, source shall require further
identification. Inspect TGB/A-sump area for any distress.
(5) If suspect material is identified as bolt or rivet fragments, replace component as indi-
cated by screen identity.
(6) If suspect material is identified as pieces of preformed packing, gasket, safety wire,
coke, machining chip, or seal rub strip material, place gas turbine on watch, e.g., check
and clean scavenge pump screens daily and monitor lube system parameters until prob-
lem is located or screens are clean for two successive days, then resume normal inspec-
tion intervals.
See figure 1.
WARNING
A. Clean screens with isopropyl alcohol and soft bristle brush. Dry with shop air at 30
psig (207 kPa) maximum pressure. Replace any damaged screens.
WARNING
B. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-912, with lubricating oil, and install onto
TGB, B-, and C-sump inlet screens. Install inlet screens into same ports from which
they were removed and tighten to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
C. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-908, with lubricating oil, and install onto
AGB, D-, and E-sump inlet screens. Install inlet screens into same ports from which
they were removed and tighten to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
D. Lubricate packing, P/N NAS1593-121, with lubricating oil, and install on lube inlet
screen. Install lube inlet screen into same port from which it was removed and tighten
to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque.
E. Lubricate new packings, P/N M83248/1-905 or P/N J221P905, if chip detectors are
used, with lubricating oil. Install packings onto drain plugs or chip detectors and
install in AGB, TGB, B-, C-, D-, and E-sump inlet screens. Tighten drain plugs or chip
detectors to 55-70 lb in. (6.3-7.9 N·m) of torque. Safety-wire plugs or chip detectors.
WARNING
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start per packager's manual.
WARNING
(6) Enter enclosure. Check for leaks in lube system, and correct leaks as required.
(7) Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per
packager's manual.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE GEOMETRY PUMP/HYDRAULIC
CONTROL UNIT FILTER CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 5 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the variable geometry (VG)
pump/hydraulic control unit (HCU) filter.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Illustrated Parts Breakdown GEK 105060
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Corrosion Preventive Oil MIL-L-6085
Dry Cleaning Solvent Fed Spec P-D-680,
Type II
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
2 Change 5
WARNING
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door shall remain open.
(5) Shut off oil supply to gas turbine per packager's manual.
(1) Remove filter bowl drain plug. Drain fluid into a suitable container. Remove and
discard preformed packing.
Change 5 3
4 Change 5
WARNING
(1) Clean filter bowl with dry cleaning solvent. Blow dry with compressed air.
WARNING
(5) Install filter bowl onto filter head and hand-tighten until filter bowl bottoms.
Tighten filter bowl to maximum of 50 lb ft. (67.8 N·m) of torque.
(6) Install preformed packing, P/N M83248/1-110, onto drain plug and install plug.
Tighten plug to 40-65 lb in. (4.6-7.3 N·m) of torque.
(7) Safety-wire drain plug to filter bowl and filter bowl to filter head.
WARNING
A safety observer shall be stationed adjacent to the enclosure
access.
(1) Open fuel supply valve and make a gas turbine start per packager's manual.
Change 5 5
WARNING
(6) Enter enclosure. Check for leaks in lube system. Correct leaks as required.
(7) Exit enclosure, secure enclosure access, and activate fire extinguishing system per
packager's manual.
6 Change 5
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
PNEUMATIC STARTER SERVICING
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
This work package contains instructions for servicing the pneumatic starter before installation.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Lubricating Oil MIL-L-23699
5. Expendable Material.
See figure 1.
NOTE
A. Remove reducer from air supply port. Remove and discard preformed packing.
WARNING
B. Pour 12-15 fl oz (350-450 cc) of lubricating oil, MIL-L-23699, into air supply port.
D. Install reducer into air supply port. Tighten reducer to 180-200 lb in. (20.3-22.6 N·m)
of torque.
1
0WP 4023 00
WORK PACKAGE
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
IGNITION SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for a functional check of the ignition system.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
Nomenclature Specification
Safety Cable 736L680G01
Safety Wire (0.032 inch) R297P04 (ALT)
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
(1) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(2) Shut off electrical power to ignition system per packager's manual.
(3) To clear combustor of any residual fuel, motor gas turbine per packager's manual for
1 minute and allow gas turbine to coast down and stop.
(5) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door shall remain open.
WARNING
B. Disconnect number one ignition exciter input lead at exciter. Temporarily secure input
lead away from exciter.
C. Turn on electrical power to ignition system (No. 2 ignition exciter energized) per
packager's manual. An audible cracking should be heard when the No. 2 igniter plug
fires.
D. Turn off electrical power to ignition system. Reconnect input lead to exciter and
safety-wire connector.
E. Repeat steps B., C., and D., disconnecting the No. 2 exciter.
F. If an audible noise or cracking is not heard on No. 1 and/or No. 2 igniters, check out
system to isolate problem, and take appropriate corrective action per Volume I,
Chapter 10.
G. Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, turn on electrical power to ignition system, open
main fuel supply valve, and activate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual.
3/(4 Blank)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
CHECK
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for a functional check of the vibration monitoring
system.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Accelerometer Replacement WP 1911 00
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
WARNING
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(4) Enter enclosure access per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain open.
CAUTION
NOTE
C. If accelerometer does not show an indication of tapping, inspect accelerometer for loose
or missing cable clamps, loose mount brackets, and/or loose electrical connections. Make
corrections as required and repeat step B.
D. If accelerometer does not show an indication of tapping after completion of step C.,
perform electrical test of accelerometer as follows:
NOTE
(2) Resistance shall be 100 megohms minimum at 100 Vdc at an ambient temperature
of 60 to 90°F (15 to 32°C). If not, replace accelerometer per WP 1911 00.
E. If accelerometer fails electrical test or fails to operate, replace per WP 1911 00 and repeat
steps B., C., and D.
F. Exit enclosure, close enclosure access, open fuel supply valve, and activate fire
extinguishing system per packager's manual.
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
OVERSPEED INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for overspeed inspection including disposition of the
gas turbine.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
Gas Turbine in Enclosure Replacement WP 3010 00
Gas Turbine Inlet Inspection WP 4010 00
External Engine Cleaning WP 4011 00
Borescope Inspection WP 4015 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
CAUTION
NOTE
B. Perform overspeed inspection per table 1 (low pressure rotor) and table 2 (high pressure
rotor).
C. Perform gas turbine control system check per appropriate packager's manual.
D. Perform inlet and exhaust inspection per WP 4010 00 and WP 4011 00 or packager's
manual.
E. Borescope low pressure compressor (LPC) and low pressure turbine (LPT) or high
pressure compressor (HPC) and high pressure turbine (HPT) per WP 4015 00.
F. If LPC and LPT or HPC and HPT require teardown, remove gas turbine per WP 3010 00
and return to an authorized depot for teardown and inspection.
Table 1. Low Pressure Rotor Overspeed Inspection and Corrective Action Requirements
Requirements
Control System Inlet and Exhaust LPC & LPT
Condition Check Inspection Teardown
≤4300 RPM X – –
>4300 and X X –
≤4600 RPM
>4600 RPM X – X
Table 2. High Pressure Rotor Overspeed Inspection and Corrective Action Requirements
Requirements
Inlet and
Control System Exhaust HPC & HPT
Condition Check Inspection Borescope HPC Teardown
<11055 RPM X – – –
≥11055 and X X X –
<11202 RPM
≥11202 RPM X – – X
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
OVERTEMPERATURE INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
LM6000 System Descriptions Chapter 5
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV) System Check WP 1113 00
Variable Bypass Valve (VBV) System Check WP 1312 00
Variable Stator Vane (VSV) Rigging WP 1411 00
Gas Turbine in Enclosure Removal/Installation WP 3010 00
External Engine Inspection WP 4012 00
Borescope Inspection WP 4015 00
3. Support Equipment.
None required.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
CAUTION
(1) Check Po and Ps3 sensor systems. See appropriate packager's manual (SPAM) to
confirm correct interface location and proper transducer calibration, and check for
sensor line leakage. Correct any abnormal conditions.
(2) Check functionality of XN25 sensors per Chapter 10, TS-28. Check functionality of
T2 and T25 sensors per Chapter 10, TS-27.
(3) Check fuel flow calibration for high fuel flow condition. See appropriate packager's
manual.
(1) Check variable inlet guide vane (VIGV), variable bypass valve (VBV), variable stator
vane (VSV), and torque motor customer interface cables at electrical panel No. 1 for
security. Correct, as required, before restarting engine.
(2) Check electrical connectors, VIGV A, VBV A, and VSV A for security at hydraulic
control unit (HCU). If installed, check VIGV B, VBV B, and VSV B connectors also.
Correct, as required, before restarting engine.
(3) Ensure VSV position indicator (LVDT) indicated 0-42 percent during start. See
appropriate packager's manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of
engine control unit (ECU). Perform the following and correct before restarting
engine:
(a) Inspect VSV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing
hardware per WP 4012 00.
WARNING
Electrical power shall be off before connecting or
disconnecting electrical connectors. Electricity causes shock,
burns, and death.
(c) Ensure customer interface cables for VBV/VSV left and right LVDTs, are secure
at electrical panel No. 2.
(d) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VSV LVDT electrical cable, left and right, from
appropriate actuator to electrical panel No. 2 per wiring schematics in
Chapter 10.
3 Ensure continuity of VIGV, VBV, VSV, torque motor A/B, and, if installed,
VIGV, VBV, VSV, and torque motor B/C customer interface electrical cables
from electrical panel No. 1 to ECU interface panel per wiring schematics in
Chapter 10.
4 Ensure continuity of VSV portion of the VIGV, VBV, VSV, torque motor A/B,
and, if installed, VIGV, VBV, VSV, and torque motor B/C electrical cables from
electrical panel No. 1 to HCU per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
5 Verify ohmic value of VSV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque motor
B/C, at HCU connectors No. 4 per troubleshooting tables and wiring schematics
in Chapter 10.
6 Verify ohmic value of VSV actuator LVDTs per troubleshooting tables and
wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
(e) If VSV LVDT indicator is still in error, perform VSV rig check per WP 1411 00.
(4) Ensure VBV LVDT indicated 83-100 percent during start. See appropriate packager's
manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of ECU. Perform the following
and correct before restarting engine:
(a) Inspect VBV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing
hardware per WP 4012 00.
(c) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VBV LVDT electrical cables, left and right, from
appropriate actuator to electrical panel No. 2 per wiring schematics in
Chapter 10.
2 Verify ohmic value of the VBV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque motor
B/C, at the HCU connectors No. 3 per troubleshooting tables and wiring
schematics in Chapter 10.
3 Verify ohmic value of VBV actuator LVDTs per Chapter 10, troubleshooting
tables and wiring schematics.
(d) If VBV position indicator is still in error, perform VBV rig check per WP 1312 00.
(5) Ensure VIGV LVDT indicated 27-29 percent during start. See appropriate packager's
manual to verify correct schedule and proper functioning of ECU. Perform the following
and correct before restarting engine:
(a) Inspect VIGV system mechanical components for damaged, loose, or missing
hardware per WP 4012 00.
(c) Ensure customer interface cables, XN2, VIGV LVDT, left and right, are secure at
electrical panel No. 1.
(d) Perform electrical system wiring check as follows and replace cables as required:
1 Ensure continuity of VIGV electrical cable, left and right, from appropriate
actuator to electrical panel No. 1 per wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
2 Ensure continuity of XN2, VIGV LVDT left and right customer interface
electrical cables from electrical panel No. 1 to ECU interface panel per wiring
schematics in Chapter 10.
3 Verify ohmic value of the VIGV torque motor A/B, and, if installed, torque
motor B/C, at the HCU connectors No. 2 per troubleshooting tables and wiring
schematics in Chapter 10.
4 Verify ohmic value of VIGV actuator LVDTs per troubleshooting tables and
wiring schematics in Chapter 10.
(e) If VIGV position indicator is still in error, perform VIGV rig check per
WP 1113 00.
6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
BEARING SUMP FLOW TESTS
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
Change 6 1
1. Introduction.
This work package contains instructions for air flow testing of the lubrication system.
2. Reference Material.
None required.
3. Support Equipment.
CAUTION
The lube system portable air flow tester, 9453M62P01, must be cali-
brated annually. Failure to do so may result in erroneous readings
and damage to engine bearings.
NOTE
4. Consumable Material.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
2 Change 6
WARNING
(2) Shut off main fuel inlet valve per packager's manual.
(3) Deactivate fire extinguishing system per packager's manual. Enclosure door must remain
open.
B. Deleted.
C. Connect lube flow tester, 9453M62, to a source of clean, dry compressed air or nitrogen and
to connection area to be flow tested. See figures 1 and 2, and table 1. Connect lube flow tool
to electrical supply source.
WARNING
D. Flow test engine frames and gearboxes with clean, dry air at 70.5 to 74°F (21.4 to 23.3°C) at
the tool gage supply pressure of 20 psig (138 kPa). Allow Air/Nitrogen temperature to
stabilize before recording flow data (2-3 minutes). Compare measurements with limits
specified in table 1. Contact CSE or CSM, for engine disposition if sump exceeds flow
limits.
E. Deleted.
2
1
Change 6 3
4 Change 6
Figure 1. Engine Connections for Lube Jet Flow Tester, 9453M62 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Change 6 5
Figure 1. Engine Connections for Lube Jet Flow Tester, 9453M62 (Sheet 2 of 2)
6 Change 6
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
VARIABLE STATOR VANE OFF-SCHEDULE
INSPECTION
(LEVEL 1 MAINTENANCE)
EFFECTIVITY: LM6000 PC GAS TURBINE MODELS
Alphabetical Index
Subject Page
1. Introduction.
Engines operated with compressor stators with misassembled, bent, or broken lever arms with
broken connector links, or with actuation rings with elongated lever arm pin holes will result in
an off-schedule vane condition. This condition requires special handling of compressor rotor
blades in the stages adjacent to the vane stage containing the discrepant lever arm or connector
link.
2. Reference Material.
Title Number
Operation & Maintenance Manual GEK 105059
High Pressure Compressor (HPC) Rotor Blades WP 2413 00
Replacement
3. Support Equipment.
4. Consumable Material.
None required.
5. Expendable Material.
None required.
(1) Using sight gage tools, determine amount of off-schedule. Use sight gage, 2C6962, for
lever arms assembled to connecting links at the 3:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions. Use
sight gages, 2C6966 and 2C8016, for lever arms assembled to actuation rings.
See figure 1.
(2) Locate the gage over vane tangs and around retaining nut and sleeve. The clear
plexiglass arm extends over the lever arm and has lines scribed at 0 degrees ± 2 degrees,
and ± 4 degrees. The centerline at 0 degrees is scribed on both top and bottom. To
properly view through the gage, the centerlines must line up. The angle of bend is
determined by noting where the center of the pin or rivet is viewed among the scribed
lines.